IR-ADV C5500 Series Service Manual en 4.0

Revision 4.
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5500 Series
Service Manual
Introduction
Introduction
Important Notices
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products.
This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does
not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the
need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2016
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Explanation of Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check. Remove the claw.
1x
Check visually. Insert the claw.
1x
Check a sound. Push the part.

Introduction
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.
1x
Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.
1x
Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

cable guide or wire saddle.
1x
Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

guide or wire saddle.
1x
Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.
1x 1x
Install the screw. Tighten the screw.
1x 1x
Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit
door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations
of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of
the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and
major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
Contents
Contents
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1
Laser Safety........................................................................................................................................ 2
Handling of Laser System................................................................................................................... 2
Turn power switch ON.........................................................................................................................3
Power Supply...................................................................................................................................... 3
Toner Safety........................................................................................................................................3
About Toner..........................................................................................................................................3
Handling Adhered Toner........................................................................................................................3
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery............................................................................................. 4
Notes Before it Works Serving............................................................................................................ 4
Points to Note at Cleaning...................................................................................................................4
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly........................................................................................................ 4
1. Product Overview.............................................................................................6
Product Lineup.................................................................................................................................... 7
Host machine........................................................................................................................................7
Options................................................................................................................................................ 8
Features............................................................................................................................................ 12
Product Features................................................................................................................................ 12
Toner Container.................................................................................................................................. 12
Setup Guide........................................................................................................................................13
Introduction of Situation Mode..............................................................................................................13
Limiting of Color Printing......................................................................................................................14
Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 15
Product Specifications......................................................................................................................... 15
Weight and Size..................................................................................................................................17
Productivity.........................................................................................................................................17
Paper type.......................................................................................................................................... 17
Parts Name....................................................................................................................................... 26
External View......................................................................................................................................26
Cross Section View............................................................................................................................. 31
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................32
2. Technology..................................................................................................... 33
Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 34
Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 34
Original Exposure System.................................................................................................................35
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 35
Magnification Ratio..............................................................................................................................43
Original Size Detection........................................................................................................................ 43
Dust Detection Control.........................................................................................................................44
Image Processing............................................................................................................................... 45
Color displacement correction processing in vertical scanning direction.................................................. 48
Outline of Electric Circuits.................................................................................................................... 48
i
Contents
Scanner Unit.......................................................................................................................................51
Pickup Feed System........................................................................................................................... 52
Fan.................................................................................................................................................... 60
Power Supply Assembly...................................................................................................................... 60
Controller System..............................................................................................................................62
Specifications / Configuration...............................................................................................................62
Motion Sensor.....................................................................................................................................65
Shutdown Sequence........................................................................................................................... 66
Startup Sequence............................................................................................................................... 66
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 68
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 68
Laser ON/OFF Control.........................................................................................................................70
Horizontal Scanning Synchronization Control........................................................................................ 70
Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control............................................................................................71
APC (Auto Power Control)................................................................................................................... 72
Laser Scanner Motor Control............................................................................................................... 72
BD Correction Control......................................................................................................................... 73
Laser Shutter Control.......................................................................................................................... 74
Image Skew Correction Control............................................................................................................75
Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 76
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 76
Charging Control.................................................................................................................................78
Developing Control..............................................................................................................................83
Primary Transfer Control......................................................................................................................84
Secondary Transfer Control................................................................................................................. 89
Pre-exposure Control.......................................................................................................................... 96
Image Stabilization Control.................................................................................................................. 97
Toner Supply Control.........................................................................................................................103
Waste Toner Feed Control................................................................................................................. 114
Other Controls...................................................................................................................................116
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................119
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 119
Overview of Fixing Temperature Control............................................................................................. 121
Standby temperature control.............................................................................................................. 122
Print temperature control....................................................................................................................123
Down sequence control..................................................................................................................... 124
Fixing Film Edge Cooling Control....................................................................................................... 126
Film Unit Engagement/Disengagement Control................................................................................... 126
Fixing Unit Detection......................................................................................................................... 127
Detection of New Fixing Film Unit....................................................................................................... 128
Protection function.............................................................................................................................128
Pickup Feed System....................................................................................................................... 130
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 130
Cassette Pickup Assembly.................................................................................................................136
Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Assembly..................................................................................................143
Fixing/Registration Assembly............................................................................................................. 145
Duplex / Delivery Assembly................................................................................................................148
Jam Detection...................................................................................................................................149
External Auxiliary System................................................................................................................151
Software Counter Control...................................................................................................................151
Fan Control.......................................................................................................................................153
ii
Contents
Environment Heater Control...............................................................................................................155

Power Supply....................................................................................................................................156
Power-saving Function...................................................................................................................... 157
Quick Startup.................................................................................................................................... 159
3. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 161

Consumable Parts List.................................................................................................................... 162
Host machine....................................................................................................................................162
Cassette Feeding Unit-AM1 .............................................................................................................. 165
High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-A1...................................................................................166
Paper Deck Unit-F1........................................................................................................................... 166
Booklet Finisher-Y1........................................................................................................................... 167
Staple Finisher-Y1.............................................................................................................................167
Inner Finisher-H1.............................................................................................................................. 167
Cleaning/Check/Adjustment Locations............................................................................................169
Compatibility of Consumable Parts................................................................................................. 171
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............................................................... 172

Preface............................................................................................................................................ 173
Outline..............................................................................................................................................173
List of Parts..................................................................................................................................... 174
List of Cover..................................................................................................................................... 174
List of Electrical Parts........................................................................................................................ 179
List of Connectors............................................................................................................................. 201
Original Exposure System...............................................................................................................224
Removing the ADF Pre-separation Unit / ADF Separation Roller.......................................................... 224
Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit.................................................................................................225
Removing the ADF Pickup Roller and the ADF Feed Roller..................................................................226
Installing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit.................................................................................................. 228
Removing the ADF............................................................................................................................ 230
Installing the White Plate....................................................................................................................231
Removing the ADF Scanner Unit........................................................................................................233
Cleaning the Paper Back Reading Glass.............................................................................................236
Removing the Rear Cover..................................................................................................................238
Cleaning the Lead Roller 1/2/3........................................................................................................... 239
Removing the ADF Driver PCB.......................................................................................................... 242
Removing the Reader Controller PCB.................................................................................................243
Cleaning the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror.............................................................................. 246
Removing the Reader Scanner Unit....................................................................................................248
Main Controller System................................................................................................................... 252
Removing the HDD........................................................................................................................... 252
Removing the Main Controller PCB.................................................................................................... 253
Removing the Riser PCB................................................................................................................... 255
Opening the Controller Box................................................................................................................ 258
Removing the DC Controller PCB.......................................................................................................259
Removing the Primary Transfer/Bk Developing Charging High-Voltage Unit.......................................... 261
Removing the Rear Lower Cover........................................................................................................262
Removing the Power Supply Unit (12 V/24 V)......................................................................................263
Removing the Feed/Drum Driver PCB................................................................................................ 264
Removing the Relay PCB.................................................................................................................. 265
iii
Contents
Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage Unit...........................................................................266

Removing the AC Driver PCB............................................................................................................ 268
Removing the Control Panel...............................................................................................................269
Removing the All-night Power Supply PCB......................................................................................... 274
Removing the Developing High-Voltage PCB (YMC)/Charging High-Voltage PCB (YMC).......................275
Laser Control System......................................................................................................................278
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass.............................................................................................................278
Removing the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Pad......................................................................................279
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit...................................................................................................... 279
Image Formation System................................................................................................................ 283
Removing the Toner Filter..................................................................................................................283
Removing the ITB Unit.......................................................................................................................283
Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor..............................................................................................287
Removing the Registration Patch Sensor (Front), (Middle), (Rear)........................................................ 288
Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit.........................................................................................................290
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit............................................................................................... 292
Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit................................................................................................. 294
Removing the ITB..............................................................................................................................296
Installing the ITB............................................................................................................................... 300
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk)......................................................................................... 308
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C, M, Y).................................................................................. 312
Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller................................................................................... 316
Removing the Waste Toner Container................................................................................................ 319
Pulling out the Process Unit............................................................................................................... 319
Removing the Process Unit................................................................................................................322
Installing the Process Unit..................................................................................................................323
Removing the Drum Unit....................................................................................................................327
Installing the Drum Unit......................................................................................................................328
Removing the Developing Unit........................................................................................................... 330
Installing a New Developing Unit........................................................................................................ 333
Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit................................................................................................ 335
Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller/Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit............................ 339
Installing the Secondary Transfer Roller/Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit..............................341
Removing the Main Drive Unit............................................................................................................ 342
Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover................................................................................348
Removing the Hopper Unit (M)........................................................................................................... 351
Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)............................................................................................................354
Removing the Hopper Unit (C)........................................................................................................... 357
Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk)..........................................................................................................360
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................363
Removing the Fixing Unit................................................................................................................... 363
Removing the Film Unit......................................................................................................................364
Cleaning the Fixing Shutter Cover...................................................................................................... 370
Cleaning the Fixing Separation Guide.................................................................................................371
Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide...........................................................................................................372
Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing................................................................. 373
Removing the 27T Gear.....................................................................................................................375
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Guide............................................................................................. 377
Cleaning the Feed Contact Guide.......................................................................................................378
Cleaning the Registration Roller......................................................................................................... 378
iv
Contents
Cleaning the Pre-registration Guide Unit............................................................................................. 379

Cleaning the Registration Sensor....................................................................................................... 380
Cleaning the Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor........................................................................................ 381
Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Guide.....................................................................................................383
Cleaning the Fixing Rear Roller..........................................................................................................384
Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Roller..................................................................................................... 385
Removing the Duplex Feed Upper Rollers...........................................................................................386
Removing the Duplex Feed Lower Roller............................................................................................ 387
Cleaning the Second/Third Delivery Roller, Roller and First, Second, and Third Delivery Rollers............ 388
Removing the Right Rear Cover 1...................................................................................................... 390
Removing the Front Right Cover........................................................................................................ 392
Removing the Reverse Backend Guide and Inner Output Cover...........................................................393
Removing the Second/Third Delivery Unit........................................................................................... 393
Removing the First Delivery Unit........................................................................................................ 395
Removing the Duplex Unit................................................................................................................. 398
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray/Feed/Separation Roller....................................................................399
Removing the Pickup/Delivery/Separation Roller (Cassette 1/2)........................................................... 402
Removing the Right Door...................................................................................................................403
Removing the Cassette 1/2 Pickup Unit.............................................................................................. 406
Removing the Transparency Registration Sensor/Registration Sensor.................................................. 408
5. Adjustment................................................................................................... 411
Image Position Adjustment.................................................................................................................412
Geometric Characteristics Adjustment................................................................................................ 415
Original Exposure System...............................................................................................................420
Reader Assembly..............................................................................................................................420
ADF..................................................................................................................................................421
Image Formation System................................................................................................................ 433
ITB Alignment Adjustment..................................................................................................................433
Actions at Parts Replacement......................................................................................................... 437
MP Pickup Tray Unit..........................................................................................................................437
DC Controller PCB............................................................................................................................ 437
Control Panel CPU PCB.................................................................................................................... 438
Hard disk.......................................................................................................................................... 439
Laser Scanner Unit............................................................................................................................441
ITB Unit............................................................................................................................................ 441
ITB................................................................................................................................................... 442
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.........................................................................................................442
Secondary Transfer Roller................................................................................................................. 442
Drum Unit......................................................................................................................................... 443
Developing Unit.................................................................................................................................443
Patch Sensor.................................................................................................................................... 443
Reader Controller PCB...................................................................................................................... 443
Scanner Unit (Paper Front)................................................................................................................ 445
Scanner Unit (Paper Back).................................................................................................................445
Copyboard Glass.............................................................................................................................. 446
6. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................447
Initial Check.....................................................................................................................................448
v
Contents
Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 449

Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 449
How to use the test print.................................................................................................................... 450
Troubleshooting Items.....................................................................................................................454
Fixing Wrinkle/Jams Caused by Deterioration in the Rib of the Fixing Inlet Guide.................................. 454
Display of "Non-Canon Product" Message.......................................................................................... 455
Forcible stop of paper feed.................................................................................................................456
Startup System Failure Diagnosis................................................................................................... 459
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 459
Startup System Failure Diagnosis Flow...............................................................................................460
Controller Self Diagnosis....................................................................................................................470
Debug Log.......................................................................................................................................476
Function Overview.............................................................................................................................476
Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs.........................................................................478
Saving and Collecting Sublogs........................................................................................................... 479
7. Error/Jam/Alarm........................................................................................... 490
Overview......................................................................................................................................... 491
Location Code...................................................................................................................................491
Pickup Position Code ........................................................................................................................491
Pickup size....................................................................................................................................... 491
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON..............................................................................................493
Points to Note When Clearing HDD.................................................................................................... 493
Error Code.......................................................................................................................................494
Error Code Details.............................................................................................................................494
Jam Code........................................................................................................................................ 639
Jam Type..........................................................................................................................................639
Jam screen display specification........................................................................................................ 639
Main Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 640
ADF/ Reader.....................................................................................................................................642
Cassette Feeding Unit-AM1............................................................................................................... 644
High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-A1............................................................................................ 645
Paper Deck Unit-F1........................................................................................................................... 646
Inner Finisher-H1.............................................................................................................................. 647
Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1..............................................................................................648
2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1.................................................................................................................. 649
Inner 2/4 Hole Puncher-B1.................................................................................................................650
Buffer Pass Unit-L1........................................................................................................................... 651
Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 652
Alarm Code Details........................................................................................................................... 652
8. Service Mode................................................................................................ 759

Overview......................................................................................................................................... 760
Points to Note when Executing Service Mode..................................................................................... 760
Service Mode Menu...........................................................................................................................760
Description of Service Mode Items..................................................................................................... 760
Operation Check of Electrical Components......................................................................................... 761
Enhanced I/O Information.................................................................................................................. 764
Security Support................................................................................................................................766
vi
Contents
Switching the Screen Display (Level 1 <->2)....................................................................................... 767

Service Mode Backup........................................................................................................................767
Output of Service Print Data...............................................................................................................768
SITUATION Mode............................................................................................................................. 773
Function to Mask the Screen during Remote Access........................................................................... 773
COPIER (Service mode for copier)................................................................................................. 776
DISPLAY (State display mode)...........................................................................................................776
I/O (I/O display mode)........................................................................................................................873
ADJUST (Adjustment mode).............................................................................................................. 892
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode).......................................................................................... 973
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................1006
TEST (Print test mode).................................................................................................................... 1139
COUNTER (Counter mode)..............................................................................................................1146
FEEDER (ADF service mode).......................................................................................................1176
DISPLAY (State display mode).........................................................................................................1176
ADJUST (Adjustment mode)............................................................................................................ 1176
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)........................................................................................ 1178
SORTER (Service mode for delivery options)...............................................................................1181
ADJUST (Adjustment mode)............................................................................................................ 1181
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)........................................................................................ 1193
BOARD (Option board setting mode)............................................................................................1202
9. Installation.................................................................................................. 1203
How to Check this Installation Procedure......................................................................................1205
Symbols..........................................................................................................................................1205
Points to Note at Installation..........................................................................................................1206
Checking before Installation.......................................................................................................... 1207
Checking Power Supply................................................................................................................... 1207
Checking the Installation Environment.............................................................................................. 1207
Checking the Installation Space........................................................................................................1207
Points to Note before Installation...................................................................................................... 1207
Combination Table of Accessory Installation................................................................................ 1209
Unpacking..................................................................................................................................... 1210
Checking the Contents.................................................................................................................. 1211
Installation Procedure....................................................................................................................1212
Removing the Packaging Materials...................................................................................................1212
Installing the Scanner...................................................................................................................... 1215
Installing the Drum Unit....................................................................................................................1215
Setting the Environment Heater Switch............................................................................................. 1224
Installing IC Card Reader (EUR Only)............................................................................................... 1225
Setting the Cassette........................................................................................................................ 1230
Installing Stamp Cartridge ............................................................................................................... 1231
Installing the Cleaning Tool.............................................................................................................. 1232
Securing the Host Machine.............................................................................................................. 1232
Turning the Main Power ON / Setting the Toner Container................................................................. 1233
Host Machine Settings (Starting the Setup Guide)............................................................................. 1234
Other Installations........................................................................................................................... 1235
vii
Contents
Installing the Envelope Attachment................................................................................................... 1237

Checking after the Installation.......................................................................................................... 1240
Auto Adjust Gradation......................................................................................................................1240
Register Correction Pattern.............................................................................................................. 1241
Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection................................................................................. 1242
Adjusting Image Position..................................................................................................................1244
Checking Network Connection..........................................................................................................1248
Troubleshooting of Network..............................................................................................................1249
When Relocating the Machine..........................................................................................................1249
Printer Cover-J1............................................................................................................................ 1252
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1252
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power............................................................................... 1252
Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1252
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1252
Platen Cover Type W.................................................................................................................... 1256
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1256
Installation Outline Drawing ......................................................................................................... 1256
NFC Kit-B1 (Flat Control Panel).................................................................................................... 1261
Installation procedure...................................................................................................................... 1261
Setting after Installation....................................................................................................................1269
Reader Heater Unit - J1 / J2..........................................................................................................1270
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 1270
Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1...........................................................................................................1275
Checking before Installation............................................................................................................. 1275
Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1285
Inner 2-Way Tray-J1......................................................................................................................1286
Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. 1286
Settings after Installation ..............................................................................................................1287
Copy Tray-J2.................................................................................................................................1288
Checking the Contents ................................................................................................................. 1288
Installation Outline Drawing ......................................................................................................... 1288
Preparation before Installation ..................................................................................................... 1288
Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. 1289
Settings after installation ..............................................................................................................1290
Utility Tray-B1................................................................................................................................1291
viii
Contents
Points to Note when Installing.......................................................................................................... 1291

When Installing the USB Keyboard................................................................................................... 1294
Copy Card Reader-F1/Copy Card Reader Attachment-B5........................................................... 1295
Installation...................................................................................................................................... 1296
IC Card Reader Box-C1................................................................................................................ 1304
Serial Interface Kit-K3, Copy Control Interface Kit-A1...................................................................1310
Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1310
Check Items When Turning OFF the Main Power.............................................................................. 1311
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1......................................................................................................... 1315
Voice Operation Kit-D1..................................................................................................................1319
Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1326
Pre-checks for HDD-related Option...............................................................................................1327
Removing the HDD (Preparation)................................................................................................. 1328
[TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB)......................................................................................................... 1330
[TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit.......................................................................................................1333
ix
Contents

[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit..................................................................... 1339
[TYPE-4] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit......................................... 1346
[TYPE-5] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit.....1352
[TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit.................................................................... 1361
[TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit................................ 1368
Connection Kit-A1 for Bluetooth LE...............................................................................................1378
Voice Guidance Kit-G1..................................................................................................................1381
Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1388
NFC Kit-C1.................................................................................................................................... 1389
Installation procedure...................................................................................................................... 1389
APPENDICES..................................................................................................1398
Service Tool.................................................................................................................................. 1399
List of Special Tools.........................................................................................................................1399
Solvent/Oil List................................................................................................................................ 1399
General Circuit Diagram................................................................................................................1400
Main Unit General Circuit Diagram....................................................................................................1400
x
Contents
Control Panel Unit General Circuit Diagram.......................................................................................1401

ADF/Reader General Circuit Diagram............................................................................................... 1402
Software Counter Specifications................................................................................................... 1403
Removal........................................................................................................................................ 1409
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1409
Work Procedure.............................................................................................................................. 1409
Target PCBs of Automatic Update................................................................................................ 1412
List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored............................................................................... 1413
xi
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety.......................................... 2
Handling of Laser System..................... 2
Turn power switch ON...........................3
Power Supply........................................ 3
Toner Safety..........................................3
Notes When Handling a Lithium
Battery............................................... 4
Notes Before it Works Serving.............. 4
Points to Note at Cleaning.................... 4
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly..........4
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside this machine is completely confined with protective housings, external covers and interlock
switches, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of normal use by users.
Therefore, this machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product under the international standard IEC60825-1 that is regarded as
safe during normal use.
Handling of Laser System

This machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product.
However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and exposure to the beam may cause eye injuries. Therefore, when
servicing on and around the Laser Assembly, be sure to turn OFF the power of the machine before starting the work.
If you must service while the power is turned ON, be sure to keep the following in mind.
• - Do not use a screwdriver or any tools that reflect laser light.
• - Remove watches, rings and any other objects that act as reflectors before starting the work to prevent eye injuries.
A warning label is affixed to the machine's covers that confine laser beam as shown in the figure.
If you must open the cover and disable the interlock switches for servicing, be sure to prevent the eye from exposure.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Innerhalb des Geräts wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt, der Augenschäden verursachen kann, wenn man
in diesen Strahl blickt.
Deshalb sollte bei Servicearbeiten an oder in der Nähe der Laserbaugruppe zuerst die Stromversorgung des Geräts
ausgeschaltet werden.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen, auf jeden Fall die folgenden
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten.
• Keine Schraubendreher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge verwenden, die Laserlicht reflektieren können.
• Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen, die als Reflektoren fungieren können, um
Augenschäden zu verhindern.
An den Abdeckungen des Geräts, die das Austreten des Laserstrahls verhindern, sind Warnaufkleber angebracht (siehe
Abbildung).
Müssen für Servicezwecke die Abdeckung geöffnet und die Verriegelungsschalter deaktiviert werden, besondere Vorsicht walten
lassen, damit der Laserstrahl nicht in die Augen gerät.
2
Safety Precautions
Turn power switch ON

The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control energy saver key.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power mode, sleep mode).
CAUTION:
Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which access is made to the HDD. If
deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
Power Supply
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords.
If an extension cord must be used, however, use one for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the
power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension
cord.
CAUTION:
Do not plug multiple cords together to an extension cord. It may cause a fire or electrical shock.
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Toner Safety
About Toner
Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic, iron and a trace of pigments.
CAUTION:
Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion.
Handling Adhered Toner

• Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash in water.
• Never use warm water for cleaning up toner to prevent toner particles from being gelated to soak into fibers permanently.
• Toner particles are reactive with vinyl polymers. Avoid contacting these materials.
3
Safety Precautions
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
CAUTION:
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
CAUTION:
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.
Notes Before it Works Serving

• At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug.
• Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a regular basis and remove dust and dirt accumulated around the outlet with dry
cloth.
CAUTION:
Leaving the power plug connected for a long time in an environment having a lot of dust, moisture, or oily smoke will
cause a fire. (Because dust accumulated in the surrounding area will absorb moisture and cause an insulation failure)
Points to Note at Cleaning

When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized
completely before assembling.
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly
Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.
1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works.
2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling.
4. To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to
use the right screw type when assembling.
5. Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
6. Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling.
4
Safety Precautions
CAUTION:
Double pole/neutral fusing
ACHTUNG
Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung
5
1 Product Overview
Product Lineup...................................... 7
Features.............................................. 12
Specifications...................................... 15
Parts Name......................................... 26
1. Product Overview
Product Lineup
Host machine
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560 / C5550 / C5540 / C5535
The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed (ppm: print per minute).
C5560 C5550 C5540 C5535

Print speed 60/60 ppm 50/50 ppm 40/40 ppm 35/35 ppm
(BW/Color)
Positioning High speed / High image quality Middle Office machine
Target machine: imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 series
7
1. Product Overview
Options
■ Pickup/Delivery System Options
[9] [8] [7]
[10] [1]
[2]
[3]
[11] [6]
[4]
[5]
No. Product name Condition

[1] Copy Tray-J2
[2] Paper Deck Unit-F1
- Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1
[3] 2-cassette Pedestal-AM1
[4] High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-A1
- Cassette Heater Unit-41
[5] FL Cassette-AZ1
[6] FL Cassette-BA1
- Tab Paper Attachment-F1
[7] Inner 2-way Tray-J1
[8] Buffer Path Unit-L1
[9] Inner Finisher-H1
- Inner 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1
- Inner 2/4 Hole Puncher-B1
8
1. Product Overview

- Inner 4 Hole Puncher-B1
[10] Saddle Finisher-Y1
[11] Staple Finisher-Y1
- 2/3 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
- 2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
- 4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
- Power Supply Cable-U1
- Power Supply Cable-W1
■ Image Reading System Options

[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
[5]

[1] Copyboard Cover Type W Cannot be installed with the DADF.
Cannot be installed with Printer Cover-J1.
[2] Printer Cover-J1 Cannot be installed with the DADF.
Cannot be installed with Copyboard Cover Type W.
[3] Stamp Ink Cartridge-C1 DADF is required
[4] ADF Access Handle-A1
[5] Reader Heater Unit-J1
9
1. Product Overview
■ Function expansion system options

[1]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[20] [6]
[3]
[19]
[9],[10]
[11],[12]
Licence option
[7]
[8]
[15],[16] [13],[14]
[17],[18]
Hardware Products

[1] NFC Kit-B1 (Flat Control Panel)
[2] IC Card Reader Box-C1
[3] Connection Kit-A1 for Bluetooth LE
[4] Utility Tray-B1 Cannot be installed with Voice Guidance Kit-G1.
Cannot be installed with Voice Operation Kit-D1.
[5] Copy Card Reader-F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment-B5 is required.
Cannot be installed with Serial Interface Kit-K3.
Cannot be installed with Copy Control Interface Kit-A1.
[6] Copy Card Reader Attachment-B5 It is required when installing Copy Card Reader-F1.
[7] Serial Interface Kit-K3 Cannot be installed with Copy Card Reader-F1.
Cannot be installed with Copy Control Interface Kit-A1.
[8] Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 Cannot be installed with Copy Card Reader-F1.
Cannot be installed with Serial Interface Kit-K3.
[9] 2.5inch/250GB HDD-N1 It is required when using the mirroring function with HDD
Mirroring Kit-J1.
[10] 2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1 It is required when using the mirroring function with HDD
Mirroring Kit-J1.
[11] HDD Mirroring Kit-J1 When executing the mirroring function, either 2.5inch/
250GB HDD-N1 or 2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1 is required.
[12] Removable HDD Kit-AL1
[13] Super G3 FAX Board-AS1
10
1. Product Overview

[14] Super G3 FAX Board-AS2
[15] Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS1 Super G3 FAX Board-AS1 is required.
[16] Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS2 Super G3 FAX Board-AS2 is required.
[17] Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AS1 Super G3 FAX Board-AS1 is required.
Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS1 is required.
[18] Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AS2 Super G3 FAX Board-AS2 is required.
Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS2 is required.
[19] Voice Guidance Kit-G1 Cannot be installed with Utility Tray-B1.
Cannot be installed with Voice Operation Kit-D1.
[20] Voice Operation Kit-D1 Cannot be installed with Utility Tray-B1.
Cannot be installed with Voice Guidance Kit-G1.
- imagePASS-P1
- ColorPASS-GX500
- Removable HDD Kit-B1
- GUI KIT-B1
- Open I/F board unit for GX500
- Open I/F board unit for P1
License Products
At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate included. Then, enter the obtained license
number from the Control Panel of the machine. The applicable functions are enabled.
There is no physically required installation.
Product name Condition

Remote Fax Kit-A1
IP FAX Expansion Kit-B1
PCL Printer Kit-BE1
PCL Asian Font Set-A1
PCL International Font Set-A1
PS Printer Kit-BE1
Barcode Printing Kit-D1
Universal Send Trace & Smooth PDF Kit-A1
Universal Send Advanced Feature Set-H1
Universal Send Security Feature Set-D1
Universal Send Digital User Signature Kit-C1
Encrypted Secure Print Software-D1
Encrypted Printing Software-D1
Secure Watermark-B1
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1
Picture Login-A1
iR-ADV Security Kit-P1 for IEEE 2600.1 Common Criteria Certifi-
cation
Web Access Software-K1
11
1. Product Overview
Features
Product Features
Improved business productivity

/usability Low initial cost
‫ۍ‬Reader/ADF ‫ ۍ‬Option
- Adoption of double feed detection - Support of staple-free stapling
/ Support of high speed scanning - Support of manual stapling
Improved operability
‫ۍ‬Toner Container
- Prevention of toner soiling
by new toner supply mechanism
High image quality

/Low running cost
‫ۍ‬Drum Unit/Waste Toner Container
- Adoption of long life Drum Unit
- Adoption of Large Waste Toner Container
Toner Container
This equipment uses IAP (Insulated & Air Pressure) toner bottles.
Characteristics Description
Toner supply mouth: Smaller diameter Toner soiling-resistant, soiling-resistant
Toner supply: Air assist method Enables stable toner supply even through the small supply mouth.
Design without a cap member Improves toner replaceability. (No need to remove the cap)
Installation of IC tag Installation of IC tag enables to record the Toner Bottle ID and the toner level.
12
1. Product Overview
Setup Guide
Setup Guide is designed to improve the workability during the installation by enabling to implement the series of necessary setting
items at installation of a device in the format of a navigation.
The items that can be set are as follows:
Display Setting screen Remarks

order
1 Switch Language/Keyboard If canceled, the device starts up without Setup Guide.
2 Paper Settings Paper Settings
3 Authentication Login If skipped, the screen proceeds to Auto Adjust Gradation (User Authentica-
tion is standard).
4 Date/Time Settings Sets the date and time
5 Network Settings Sets the IP address, subnet, and gateway.
6 DNS/Proxy Settings DNS/Proxy Settings
7 Selection Counry/Retion (FAX-TYPE set- Skipped depending on the country.
tings) The countries that require selection are USA, EUR, and ASIA.
8 FAX Settings Sipped if no G3 fax.
Configuration of a second line is outside the scope of the Setup Guide.
9 Auto Adjust Gradation Executes auto gradation adjustment
10 Output Report Network user data list
FAX user data list
List of adjsutment value (LBL-PRT)
11 End Setup Guide -
Introduction of Situation Mode

Situation mode has been newly provided to improve the workability and searchability of service technicians at the site.
This mode makes it possible to easily use the service mode appropriate for the scene at the site.
13
1. Product Overview
< Category >
[SITUATION MODE] Detail

Installation Items related to installation
Troubleshooting Items related to troubleshooting
Parts Replacement Items performed at parts replacement
Major Adjustment Major items of adjustment
Sensor Check Operation Check of Electrical Components
Parts Check
Limiting of Color Printing

Even if an error attributed to the Developing Unit or drum of any of the Y/M/C colors has occurred, B&W printing and copying
remain possible without entering the limited printer function mode where the entire printing function stops.
14
1. Product Overview
Specifications
Product Specifications
Item Specification/Function
Machine installation method Desktop type
Light source LED
Photosensitive medium OPC (30 mm dia.)
Image reading sensor CMOS
Exposure method Laser exposure
Charging method Roller charging
Developing method Dry, 2-component development
Transfer method Intermediate Belt transfer (Primary transfer: Roller transfer, Secondary transfer: Roller transfer)
Separation method Curvature separation + Static Eliminator
Pickup method Separation retard
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Delivery method Face-down
Drum cleaning method Cleaning Blade
Transfer cleaning method Cleaning Blade
Toner type Non-magnetic negative toner
Toner supplying method Toner Container method
Toner level detection func- Yes
tion
Leading edge image margin 4.0 mm +1.5/-1.0 mm
Left image margin 2.5 mm +/- 1.5 mm (2-sided: 2.5 mm +/- 2.0 mm)
Warm-up time*1 When the Main Power is turned ON:
• Quick startup OFF: 30 sec. or less ( imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535 : 32 sec. or less)
• Quick startup ON: 10 sec. or less
Startup from sleep mode:

• Sleep Mode Eco Exit = OFF : 10 sec. or less
• Sleep Mode Eco Exit = ON : 15 sec. or less
First copy time imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560:
• Color: 4.5 sec.
• B/W : 2.9 sec.
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5550:

• Color: 5.2 sec.
• B/W: 3.5 sec.

• Color: 6.1 sec.
• B/W: 4.1 sec.

• Color: 7.4 sec.
• B/W: 4.9 sec.
Image gradations 256 gradations
Print resolution 1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi
Maximum image guarantee 300 mm x 450.7 mm (Long size paper Print : 300 mm x 1193.5 mm , Long size paper Copy : 300 x
area 623.5mm)
Maximum printable area 300 mm x 450.7 mm (Long size paper Print : 300 mm x 1193.5 mm , Long size paper Copy : 300 x
623.5mm)
15
1. Product Overview
Item Specification/Function
Paper type Cassette:
Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2), Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2), Heavy
paper (106 to 256 g/m2), Colored paper, Pre-punched paper, Transparency, Clear film, Bond paper,
Tab paper*2, Letterhead, Envelope
Multi-purpose Tray:
Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2), Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2), Heavy
paper (106 to 300 g/m2), Color paper, Pre-punched paper, Transparency, Clear film, Tracing paper,
Coated paper, Label paper, Bond paper, Tab paper, Washi (JPN paper), Letterhead, Postcard, En-
velope
Paper size Cassette 1:
A4, B5, A5, A5R, LTR, STMTR, EXEC, 16K, Envelope (COM10 No.10, DL, ISO-C5, Nagagata 3,
Yougatanaga 3), Custom Size (Width: 98.0 to 297.0 mm, Length: 148.0 to 215.9 mm)
Cassette 2:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, 12" x 18", EXEC, 8K, 16K,
16KR, Envelope (COM10 No.10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, Kakugata 2, Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3),
Custom size (Width: 98.0 to 304.8 mm, Length: 182.0 to 457.2 mm)
Multi-purpose Tray:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, SRA3, 12" x 18",
EXEC, 8K, 16K, Postcard, Envelope (COM10 No.10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, Kakugata 2, Nagagata
3, Yougatanaga 3), Custom size (Width: 98.0 to 320.0 mm, Length: 98.4 to 1200 mm), Free size
(Width: 98.0 to 320.0 mm, Length: 139.7 to 457.2 mm), Free size long original (Width: 98.0 to 320.0
mm, Length: 457.3 to 1200 mm)
Pickup capacity Cassette:
550 sheets (80 g/m2), 640 sheets (64 g/m2)
Multi-purpose Tray:
106 sheets (80 g/m2), 120 sheets (64 g/m2)
Duplex method Through-pass duplex
Memory capacity Capacity of 2 GB (for controller control) + 2 GB (for image processing)
Hard disk capacity Standard: 250 GB or more (Usable area: 250 GB)
Option: 1 TB
Usage environment temper- 10 to 30 deg C
ature range
Environment humidity range 20 to 80 % RH (Relative humidity; without dew condensation)
Operation noise 75 dB or less (During printing)
Rated power supply AC 120 to 127 V / 11.5 A, 60 Hz (image RUNNER ADVANCE C5560/C5550)
AC 120 to 127 V / 10 A, 60 Hz (image RUNNER ADVANCE C5540/C5535)
AC 220 to 240 V / 8.7 A, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption Maximum:
(Reference value) 1.8 kW or less (120 to 127 V)
1.8 kW or less (220 to 240 V)
During sleep mode:

0.8W
At power OFF:
• Quick startup setting OFF: 0.19 W
• Quick startup setting ON: 0.45 W
Dimensions (W x D x H) ADF model : 620 x 742 x 950 mm
Platen model : 620 x 742 x 827 mm
Weight *3 Approx. 139 kg
*1: The numeric value may differ depending on the usage conditions and environment.
*2: Cassette 2 only
*3: Excluding the Toner Container
16
1. Product Overview
Weight and Size

Product name Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight: Approx.
(kg)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560/C5550/ 620 742 950 139
C5540/C5535 Platen Cover Model : Platen Cover Model : Platen Cover Model :
726 827 127
2-cassette Pedestal-AM1 620 700 251 22.5
High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-A1 620 700 251 30
Paper Deck Unit-F1 344 630 440 31
Inner Finisher-H1 466 525 224 8.6
Staple Finisher-Y1 537 623 1095 31
Saddle Finisher-Y1 537 623 1095 57
Productivity
Paper size Productivity (sheets/min)
C5560 C5550 C5540 C5535
A4 (1-side/2-side) 60 50 40 35
LTR (1-side/2-side) 60 50 40 35
* Except pickup from the Multi-Purpose Tray

The copying speed is reduced depending on the paper type, size, and feed method. Furthermore, during continuous reproduction,
the operation may stop or be delayed due to temperature adjustment or image quality adjustment on the host machine.
Paper type
Available paper types are shown below.
See the table below for the custom paper size.
Size Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)

Custom paper size 1-1 98.4 to 139.6 98 to 297
Custom paper size 1-2 98.4 to 139.6 297.1 to 304.8
Custom paper size 1-3 98.4 to 139.6 304.9 to 320
Custom paper size 1-4 139.7 to 147.9 98 to 128.4
Custom paper size 1-5 148 to 181.9 98 to 128.4
Custom paper size 1-7 148 to 181.9 128.5 to 139.6
Custom paper size 2-5 148 to 181.9 139.7 to 297
Custom paper size 3-1 182 to 194.9 257 to 297
17
1. Product Overview
Size Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)

Custom paper size 5-3 431.9 to 457.2 195 to 304.8
Custom paper size 7-1 457.3 to 1200 98 to 320
■ Pickup Specifications (1/11)

Type (paper weight: g/m2)
• Thin paper 2 (52 to 59) / Thin paper 1 (60 to 63)
• Plain paper 1 (64 to 75), Plain paper 2 (76 to 90), Plain paper 3 (91 to 105)
• Color paper (64 to 81)
• Heavy paper 1 (106 to 128) / Heavy paper 2 (129 to 150) / Heavy paper 3 (151 to 163) / Heavy paper 4 (164 to 180) / Heavy
paper 5 (181 to 220) / Heavy paper 6 (221 to 256)
• Letterhead (106 to 163)
Paper size Pickup position

Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck High Capaci-
pose Tray Unit-F1 ty Cassette
Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
B4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
A4R Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
A5 Yes Yes No No No No No
A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
11x17 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
LGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
LTRR Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
STMTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
STMT Yes No No No No No No
SRA3 Yes No No No No No No
EXEC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
OFFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
E-OFFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
B-OFFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
M-OFFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
A-OFFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
A-LTR Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
18
1. Product Overview

Feeding Unit-
A1
A-LTRR Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
GLTR-R Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
GLTR Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
GLGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
AFLS Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
FLS Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
8K Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
16K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
16KR No No Yes Yes Yes No No
F4A Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
I-LGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
Free Yes No No No No No No
Free (Long Yes No No No No No No
length)
Custom size A* No No No No No No No
Custom size B* Yes No No No No No No
Custom size C* Yes Yes No No No No No
Custom size D* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Custom size E* Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
*
• Custom paper size A: Custom paper size 1-1, Custom paper size 1-2, Custom paper size 1-3
• Custom paper size B: Custom paper size 1-4, Custom paper size 1-6, Custom paper size 2-3, Custom paper size 2-4, Custom
paper size 5-4, Custom paper size 6-1, Custom paper size 7-1
• Custom paper size C: Custom paper size 1-5, Custom paper size 1-7, Custom paper size 2-5
• Custom paper size D: Custom paper size 2-1, Custom paper size 2-2, Custom paper size 2-6, Custom paper size 2-7, Custom
paper size 2-8, Custom paper size 3-1, Custom paper size 3-2, Custom paper size 3-3
• Custom paper size E: Custom paper size 3-4, Custom paper size 4-1, Custom paper size 4-2, Custom paper size 4-3, Custom
paper size 4-4, Custom paper size 4-5, Custom paper size 4-6, Custom paper size 4-7, Custom paper size 4-8, Custom

• Heavy 7 (257 to 300)

Feeding Unit-
A1
A3 Yes No No No No No No
B4 Yes No No No No No No
A4R Yes No No No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No No No
11x17 Yes No No No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No No No
19
1. Product Overview

Feeding Unit-
A1
LTRR Yes No No No No No No
STMTR Yes No No No No No No
EXEC Yes No No No No No No
OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
E-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
B-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
M-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
A-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
A-LTR Yes No No No No No No
A-LTRR Yes No No No No No No
GLTR-R Yes No No No No No No
GLTR Yes No No No No No No
GLGL Yes No No No No No No
AFLS Yes No No No No No No
FLS Yes No No No No No No
8K Yes No No No No No No
16KR No No No No No No No
F4A Yes No No No No No No
I-LGL Yes No No No No No No
Free (Long Yes No No No No No No
length)
*
• Custom paper size A: Custom paper size 1-1, Custom paper size 1-2, Custom paper size 1-3
paper size 6-1, Custom paper size 7-1

• Recycled 1 (64 to 75) / Recycled 2 (76 to 90) / Recycled 3 (91 to 105)
• Pre-Punched paper (64 to 81)

Feeding Unit-
A1
B4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
20
1. Product Overview

Feeding Unit-
A1
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
A5 Yes Yes No No No No No
A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
LGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
STMTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
OFFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
E-OFFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
B-OFFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
M-OFFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
A-OFFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
A-LTR Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
A-LTRR Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
GLTR-R Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
GLTR Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
GLGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
AFLS Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
FLS Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
8K Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
16K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
16KR No No Yes Yes Yes No No
F4A Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
I-LGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
Free (Long No No No No No No No
length)
Custom size C* Yes Yes No No No No No
Custom size D* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Custom size E* Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
*
• Custom paper size A: Custom paper size 1-1, Custom paper size 1-2, Custom paper size 1-3, Custom paper size 7-1
• Custom paper size C: Custom paper size 1-5, Custom paper size 1-7, Custom paper size 2-5
• Custom paper size D: Custom paper size 2-1, Custom paper size 2-2, Custom paper size 2-6, Custom paper size 2-7, Custom
• Custom paper size E: Custom paper size 3-4, Custom paper size 4-1, Custom paper size 4-2, Custom paper size 4-3, Custom
21
1. Product Overview

• 1-Sided Coated 1 (106 to 163), 1-Sided Coated 2 (164 to 220), 1-Sided Coated 3 (221 to 256)
• 2-Sided Coated 1 (106 to 163), 2-Sided Coated 2 (164 to 220), 2-Sided Coated 3 (221 to 256)
• Tracing (64 to 81)
• Labels (118 to 185)

Feeding Unit-
A1
B5R Yes No No No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No No No
LTRR Yes No No No No No No
STMTR Yes No No No No No No
EXEC Yes No No No No No No
OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
E-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
B-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
M-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
A-OFFICIO Yes No No No No No No
A-LTR Yes No No No No No No
A-LTRR Yes No No No No No No
GLTR-R Yes No No No No No No
GLTR Yes No No No No No No
GLGL Yes No No No No No No
AFLS Yes No No No No No No
FLS Yes No No No No No No
16KR No No No No No No No
F4A Yes No No No No No No
I-LGL Yes No No No No No No
length)
*
• Custom paper size A: Custom paper size 1-1, Custom paper size 1-2, Custom paper size 1-3, Custom paper size 7-1
22
1. Product Overview
paper size 6-1

• Washi (93 to 93)

Feeding Unit-
A1

• Clear film (121 to 220)

Feeding Unit-
A1
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Custom size B* Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
*
• Custom paper size A: Custom paper size 1-1, Custom paper size 1-2, Custom paper size 1-3, Custom paper size 1-4, Custom

• Transparency (121 to 220)
23
1. Product Overview

Feeding Unit-
A1
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

• Bond paper (82 to 99)

Feeding Unit-
A1

• Postcard, Reply postcard, 4 on 1 postcard (164 to 220)

Feeding Unit-
A1
Postcard Yes No No No No No No
Reply Postcard Yes No No No No No No
4 on 1 Postcard Yes No No No No No No

• Tab Paper 1 (91 to 105) / Tab paper 2 (106 to 128) / Tab paper 3 (129 to 150) / Tab paper 4 (151 to 220)

Feeding Unit-
A1
A4 Yes No Yes No No No No
LTR Yes No Yes No No No No

• Envelope (75 to 105)
24
1. Product Overview

Feeding Unit-
A1
COM10_R Yes No Yes No No No No
Monarch_R Yes No Yes No No No No
ISO-C5_R Yes No Yes No No No No
DL_R Yes No Yes No No No No
Nagagata 3_R Yes No Yes No No No No
Yougatanaga Yes No Yes No No No No
3_R
Kakugata 2_R Yes No Yes No No No No
COM10 Yes Yes No No No No No
Monarch Yes Yes No No No No No
ISO-C5 Yes Yes No No No No No
DL Yes Yes No No No No No
Nagagata 3 Yes Yes No No No No No
Yougatanaga 3 Yes Yes No No No No No
Free No No No No No No No
length)
Custom size A* Yes No No No No No No
Custom size B* No No No No No No No
*
• Custom paper size A: Custom paper size 1-1, Custom paper size 1-2, Custom paper size 1-3, Custom paper size 1-4, Custom
• Custom paper size B: Custom paper size 7-1
25
1. Product Overview
Parts Name
External View
■ Front side of the machine
No. Name No. Name

1 Motion Sensor 10 Right Lower Cover
2 Control Panel 11 Right Lower Door
3 ADF 12 Cassette Right Door
4 USB Port (Right Front) 13 Cassette 1
5 Right Upper Cover 14 Cassette 2
6 USB Port (Right Rear) 15 Waste Toner Cover
7 USB Connector 16 Toner Identification Mark
8 LAN Port 17 Main Power Supply Switch
9 Multi-purpose Tray
26
1. Product Overview
No. Name No. Name

18 Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box 21 Toner Replacement Cover
19 Delivery Tray 22 Push-out Stopper
20 Front Cover
■ Rear side of the machine
No. Name No. Name

1 Extension phone line terminal (LINE 4/LINE 3/LINE 2 3 Handset connection terminal (Handset)
from above)
2 Phone line terminal (LINE 1) 4 External phone terminal (EXT.)
27
1. Product Overview
■ Inside of the host machine
No. Name No. Name

1 Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool 3 Waste Toner Container
2 Toner Container
28
1. Product Overview
■ ADF/Reader
No. Name No. Name

1 Document Set Lamp 7 Document Read Area Cover
2 ADF Upper Cover 8 Copyboard Glass
3 Slide Guide 9 Document Delivery Extension Tray
4 Document Pickup Tray 10 Document Stopper
5 Document Pickup Extension Tray 11 Document Delivery Tray
6 Document Read Area 12 Unremoved Document Lamp
■ Multi-purpose Tray
No. Name No. Name

1 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate 3 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Sub Tray
2 Multi-purpose Tray
29
1. Product Overview
■ Cassette
Cassette 1 Cassette 2
No. Name No. Name

1 Trailing Edge Guide Plate 2 Side Guide Plate
30
1. Product Overview
Cross Section View

[18]
[16]
[17]
[15]
[8]
[7]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[6]
[12]
[13]
[5]
[14]
[2] [1] [3] [4]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Cassette 1 [10] ITB Unit
[2] Cassette 2 [11] ITB Cleaner Unit
[3] Cassette 1 Pickup Unit [12] Developing Assembly + Drum Unit
[4] Cassette 2 Pickup Unit [13] Laser Scanner Unit
[5] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit [14] Waste Toner Container
[6] Registration Unit [15] Reader Unit
[7] Fixing Assembly [16] ADF Unit
[8] Duplex/Delivery Unit [17] Reader Scanner Unit
[9] Toner Bottle [18] ADF Scanner Unit
31
1. Product Overview
Control Panel
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]
No. Name No. Name

1 [Settings/Registration] key 9 [Start] key
2 Numeric keys 10 Main Power indicator
3 [Energy Saver] key 11 Error indicator
4 [Counter/Device Information] key 12 Processing/Data indicator
5 Brightness Adjustment key 13 [Reset] key
6 Settings key 14 ID (Log In/Out) key
7 [Clear] key 15 NFC (If equipped with NFC Kit-B1)
8 [Stop] key 16 Touch panel display
32
2 Technology
Basic Configuration............................. 34
Original Exposure System...................35
Controller System................................62
Laser Exposure System...................... 68
Image Formation System.................... 76
Fixing System....................................119
Pickup Feed System......................... 130
External Auxiliary System................. 151
2. Technology
Basic Configuration
Functional Configuration
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document exposure system block, controller
system block, laser exposure system block, image formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.
Document exposure system
Reader
Controller CCD Exposure Lamp
Flow of paper
Flow of signal
Laser beam
Delivery
Controller system
Duplexing
Option Main Feed
Board Controller
Fixing
HDD
DC system
Controller Fixing
Image formation system

ITB Transfer
Laser Scanner Laser Scanner Pickup

Unit 1 Unit 2
Laser exposure
system Pickup/
Cassette 1
feed
system
Cassette 2
34
2. Technology
Original Exposure System
Overview
■ Features
● Reader Assembly
• Productivity has been increased by improving the original reading speed.
● ADF
• Low energy consumption by adopting a new Scanner Unit
• Realization of a compact Scanner Unit by adopting a new lens unit
• Increase in the supported original basis weight
• The double feed detection function added
■ Specifications
● Reader Assembly
Item Specification/Function Remarks
Photo conductor White high luminance LED + light guide plate -
Scanning of original At copyboard reading -
Scanning by moving Scanner Unit
When Using ADF

Stream scanning of original with fixed Scanner Unit
Reading resolution Black & White: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Color: 600 dpi x 600 dpi*
Number of gradations 256 gradations -
Carriage position detec- Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS2) -
tion
Magnification ratio 25% to 400% Black & White: Scan magnification (skipping of 2 ver-
tical lines: 25% to 50%)
Color: Digital variable magnification
35
2. Technology
Item Specification/Function Remarks

Horizontal scanning direction Horizontal scanning direction
Image processing by the Main Controller PCB -
Vertical scanning direction Vertical scanning direction

Image processing by the Main Controller PCB Partially processed by the Reader Controller
PCB
Number of lines of the 4 lines (R, G, B, B/W) -
Reading Sensor
Original size detection Horizontal scanning direction -
Detection by the Reading Sensor (Scanner Unit)
Vertical scanning direction

Detection by the Reflection Sensor (Original Size
Sensor 1 (AB configuration) or Original Size Sen-
sor 2 (Inch configuration))
Maximum document At copyboard reading -
size 297 mm x 431.8 mm
When using the ADF

304.8 mm x 630 mm
● ADF
Item Specifications Remarks
Document pickup Automatic pickup/delivery method Simultaneous duplex reading
method
Original Type Sheet document -
Original basis weight 1-sided 1-sided
• A/B: 38 to 157 g/m2 • A/B: For originals 38 g/m2 or more
• Inch: 50 to 157 g/m2 and less than 42 g/m2, width 257
mm (B5 size) or more and 1-sided
2-sided
single sheet delivery
50 to 157 g/m2 • A/B: For originals exceeding 432
Color original mm, 1-sided single sheet feed: 60
to 90 g/m2
64 to 157 g/m2
Original size A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, B6R, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTRR, • B6 paper can only be fed with landscape
STMT, STMTR, 8K, 16K, 16KR orientation
• Since originals that are 432 to 630 mm
Feed direction
in the feed direction are larger than the
139.7 to 432 mm (STMT to 17 inch) *432 to 630 mm originals Document Pickup Tray, they can be
can also be read (see the note). read while being held by the user.
Width direction
128 to 304.8 mm (B6R to 12 inch)
Original setting direc- Pickup from the Original Tray: Face up -
tion
Original setting posi- Pickup from the Original Tray: Center reference -
tion
Document scanning Stream reading Simultaneous duplex reading can only be
method performed on originals that are 432 mm or
smaller
Original separation Drive-free retard separation -
method
Original feed mode 1-sided, 2-sided (simultaneous) -
Original Tray stack- All sizes: 150 sheets (80 g/m2 or less) • Originals exceeding 80 g/m2 are con-
ing capacity verted by basis weight. Folded originals
must be 10 mm or less in height.
• Originals exceeding 432 mm can only be
loaded one sheet at a time.
36
2. Technology
Item Specifications Remarks

Mixed paper func- Mix of the same configuration Load the originals on the rear side.
tions Available Guaranteed combinations with a mix of dif-
ferent configurations: AB configuration:
Mix of different configurations A3/B4, B4/A4R, A4/B5, B5R/A5R
Available
Original size detec- Available -
tion function
Finished stamp func- Available -
tion
Document process- Stream reading -
ing speed • 1-sided
• Copy/SEND: 600 dpi
BW: 80 ipm
BW: 60 ipm
• SEND: 300 dpi
BW: 80 ipm
CL: 80 ipm
• 2-sided
• Copy/SEND: 600 dpi
BW: 150 ipm
BW: 80 ipm
• SEND: 300 dpi
BW: 160 ipm
CL: 160 ipm
Power Supply DC 24 V, DC 12 V Supplied by the connected equipment
*1: To use the Long Original mode, select the following service mode (LV.2) and set it to "1" (default: "0")
• COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST
■ Basic Configuration
● Reader Assembly
Parts Configuration
[8] [9]
[7] [10]
[6] [11]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Key No. Name Code Function/Specification

[1] Scanner Unit - Image reading, analog image processing
[2] Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS_A1 Scanner Unit HP detection
[3] ADF Open/Close Sensor 1 PS_N1 ADF open/close detection (DADF detection at 5 degrees)
[4] ADF Open/Close Sensor 2 PS_N2 ADF open/close detection (detection of timing for size detection at 30
degrees of ADF opening/closing)
[5] Sensor Lightproof Sheet - -
37
2. Technology
Key No. Name Code Function/Specification

[6] Reader Controller PCB UN_BO1 Overall Reader control, digital image processing
[7] Original Size Sensor 1 PS_R1 Size detection in the vertical scanning direction (AB configuration)
[8] Original Size Sensor 2 PS_R2 Size detection in the vertical scanning direction (Inch configuration)
[9] Scanner Motor STM1 2-phase Pulse Motor: Pulse control
[10] Carriage Drive Belt - -
[11] Guide Shaft - -
Scanner Unit
This equipment uses a Scanner Unit that integrates an LED, mirror, lens, and Reading Sensor to perform original exposure and
reading.
Light emitted from the LED is reflected by the original and reaches the Reading Sensor through the Reflection Mirror and the
Lens Unit.
Lens
LED (light source)
mirror
No.4
mirror No.3
mirror
No.2
mirror No.1
mirror
No.5
Lens CCD
Red (R) line

Green (G) line
Blue (B) line
Black & White (B/W) line
LED Lamp Unit

The LED Lamp Unit emits light from the 2 LED Lamp PCBs (with 36 LED chips for each PCB).
The emitted light exposes the original via the Reflection Plate.
Newly Developed Lens Unit

By using the Lens Unit with 4 lenses combined, downsizing of the Scanner Unit has been achieved.
Reading Sensor
The Reading Sensor reads the image for1 image line.
38
2. Technology
The Reading Sensor has 4 lines (R, G, B, and B/W). At 600 dpi B&W reading, 1 line (B/W) is used. At color reading, 3 lines (R,
G, and B) are used.
Related Error Code

Shading error
• E302-0001: Error in paper front white shading
• E302-0002: Error in paper front black shading
● ADF
Function Configuration
A list of functions is indicated below.
Reader Controller PCB
ADF Driver PCB

Power Supply
Assembly
Original Feed Assembly Original Pickup Assembly Original Pickup Tray
Original Scanning Original Delivery Tray

Assembly (Rear Side)
Original Scanning Original Path
Assembly (Front Side)
Parts Configuration
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
39
2. Technology
Key No. Name Code

[1] ADF Stamp Solenoid SL1
[2] Scanner Unit -
[3] ADF Pickup Clutch CL1
[4] ADF Registration Motor STM1
[5] ADF Pickup Motor STM2
[6] ADF Read Motor STM3
[7] ADF Cooling Fan FAN_A1
[8] ADF Driver PCB UN_BO1
Drive Configuration List

This equipment is a document feeder for stream reading only.
This equipment has 3 motors, 1 clutch, and 1 solenoid as drive load.
It also has 1 document reading unit (Scanner Unit) for the back side of originals.
The drive configuration of this equipment is indicated below.
M1 M2
CL1
M3 SL1
Code Name Role

STM1 ADF Registration Motor Drive of Pickup Roller
STM2 ADF Pickup Motor Drive of Registration Roller, paper feed
STM3 ADF Read Motor Lead Roller, Delivery Roller drive, Glass shift
CL1 ADF Pickup Clutch ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Unit lifting operation
SL1 ADF Stamp Solenoid Stamp drive
40
2. Technology
List of Rollers
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
Key No. Name Key No. Name

[1] Pickup Roller [9] Lead Roller 1
[2] Separation Roller [10] Platen Roller 1
[3] Feed Roller [11] Platen Roller 2
[4] Pullout Roller [12] Lead Roller 2
[5] Pullout Roller [13] Lead Roller 2
[6] Registration Roller [14] Delivery Roller
[7] Registration Roller [15] Delivery Roller
[8] Lead Roller 1
List of Sensors
PS_R3
PS_N1
PS_A3
PS_A5
PS_A4
UN_SNS1
PS_R1
UN_BO8
UN_BO7
PS_A9
PS_R2
PS_A1
PS_A6
PS_A2
PS_A7
UN_BO6
Code Name Detection description Jam Detection

Delay Sta- Others
tion-
ary
PS_A1 Arch Sensor Pullout Roller arch formation timing Yes Yes -
PS_A2 Delivery Tray Sensor Existence of originals in the Original Output Tray - - -
41
2. Technology
Code Name Detection description Jam Detection

Delay Sta- Others
tion-
ary
PS_A3 LTR-R/ LGL Sensor Identifying LTR-R/LGL paper - - -
PS_A4 AB/ Inch Sensor Identifying A4R/LTRR and A5R/STMTR paper - - -
PS_A5 Cover Open/Closed Sensor Opening/closing of the Feeder Cover - - Yes
PS_A6 Lead Sensor 1 Lead Roller 1 disengagement timing Yes Yes -
PS_A7 Lead Sensor 2 Lead Roller 2 disengagement timing Yes Yes -
PS_A9 Paper Back Reading Glass HP Sensor Reading Glass position - - -
UN_BO6 Original Size Sensor Original size in the width direction - - -
UN_BO7 Double Feed Sensor PCB (transmission) Double feed detection (transmission) - - Yes
UN_BO8 Double Feed Sensor PCB (reception) Double feed detection (reception) - - Yes
PS_N1 Original Sensor Existence of originals in the Document Pickup - - -
Tray
PS_R1 Post-separation Sensor The position of the leading edge of the original Yes Yes -
immediately after pickup
PS_R2 Registration Sensor Registration arch formation timing Yes Yes -
PS_R3 Large Size/ Small Size Sensor Identifying large size/small size originals - - -
ADF Driver PCB

The connections of the ADF Driver PCB are indicated below.
J402 J401 J408

J407
J409
IC
J410
J405 J404
ADF Driver Connection destination ADF Driver Connection destination

PCB J No. Code Name PCB J No. Code Name
J401 UN_BO1 Reader Controller PCB J408 PS_A5 Cover Open/Closed Sensor
J402 UN_BO1 Reader Controller PCB PS_A6 Lead Sensor 1
J404 STM1 ADF Registration Motor PS_A7 Lead Sensor 2
STM2 ADF Pickup Motor PS_A9 Paper Back Reading Glass HP
Sensor
J405 STM3 ADF Read Motor PS_R2 Registration Sensor
J407 CL1 ADF Pickup Clutch UN_BO6 Original Size Sensor
SL1 ADF Stamp Solenoid UN_BO7 Double Feed Sensor PCB (trans-
mission)
PS_A1 Arch Sensor UN_BO8 Double Feed Sensor PCB (recep-
tion)
PS_A2 Delivery Tray Sensor J410 UN_SNS1 Original Width Volume
PS_N1 Original Sensor PS_A3 LTR-R/ LGL Sensor
PS_R1 Post-separation Sensor PS_A4 AB/ Inch Sensor
UN_BO4 Original Display LED PS_R3 Large Size/ Small Size Sensor
J409 FAN_A1 ADF Cooling Fan UN_BO5 Delivery Display LED
NOTE:
The Scanner Unit is connected to the Reader Controller PCB.
42
2. Technology
Magnification Ratio
■ Changing the Magnification Ratio in the Horizontal Scanning Direction
When using the reading mode of the reader / When using the ADF
Reading in the horizontal scanning direction is performed at 100% size. Changes to the magnification ratio are processed by the
Main Controller PCB.
■ Changing the Magnification Ratio in the Vertical Scanning Direction

As the magnification change in vertical scanning direction, the following operation is performed according to original reading
method and difference in magnification.
1. Magnification change operation when using the reading mode of the reader
Data is processed by the Main Controller PCB according to the magnification ratio.
Example) In the case of reducing the magnification to 25%: Original reading speed of 260 mm/sec, original reduced to 25%
(1/4 size) by the Main Controller PCB
Example) In the case of 100%: Original reading speed of 260 mm/sec
Operation description Magnification

25 % to 50 % 50.1 % to 199.9 % 200 % to 400 %
Original reading speed (mm/ 260 260 260
sec)
Digital magnification process- 25 to 50 50.1 to 199.9 100 to 200
ing in the Main Controller PCB
(%)
Original Size Detection

■ Overview
This machine determines the size of an original by the combination of the measurement results of the reflected light at particular
points of the Reflection Sensor and Reading Sensor. Furthermore, two points are measured for each size to perform accurate
detection even if the original is moved when the ADF is closed.
• Horizontal scanning direction: Reading Sensor (AB configuration: 12 point measurement, inch configuration: 6 point
measurement)
• Vertical scanning direction: Reflection Photosensor (AB configuration, inch configuration: 1 location, AB/inch configuration:
1 location (shipped with position of Original Sensor 1, but can be changed the position of Original Sensor 2 as necessary))
The original size is determined using the following procedure:
1. Search of external light (horizontal scanning direction only)

The sensor level at each detection position in the horizontal scanning direction is measured while the LED is OFF.
2. Detection of output level of each sensor

The LED of the Reading Sensor Unit is turned ON to measure the sensor level at each detection position in the horizontal
scanning direction.
Furthermore, the Reflection Photo Sensor LED for the vertical scanning direction is turned ON to measure the sensor output.
The original size is determined by the combination of these outputs.
■ Control description
In horizontal scanning direction, sensor level of each original detection position is measured by moving the Scanner Unit to the
detection position shown in the figure in relation to the original setting position. In the vertical scanning direction, the original size
is determined using the Original Sensor 1 and 2.
43
2. Technology
AB type
Original sensor 1
Original detection A5R

position 1
Original detection
position 2 B5R
Original detection
position 3 A5 A4R
Original detection
position 4 B5 B4
Original detection position 5 K16 K8
Original detection position 6 A4 A3
CCD original detection position
Inch type
Original sensor 2
Original detection
position 1 STMTR
Original detection
position 2 STMT LTRR LGL
Original detection 279.4×431.8mm

position 3 LTR (11"×17")
CCD original detection position
Dust Detection Control

■ Overview
When reading an original, original reading position is changed according to the presence/absence of dust on the Stream Reading
Glass or the Guide Plate of the ADF or image correction is performed to prevent the dust to be printed on an image. This control
is performed only when the ADF is being used and has been closed.
[Control timing]
• At job completion
• At paper interval (after each sheet is read)
• At the start of a job (only when one of the following conditions is met)
When dust is detected at all detection points when the previous job finished
When dust detection was not completed normally when the previous job finished (because the ADF was opened, etc.)
Main power Start key

switch ON ON
WMUP STBY
1st 2nd
SCAN SCAN
Dust detection Dust detection Dust detection

control control control
44
2. Technology
[Control description]
• At job completion (dust detection)
The Reading Sensor detects presence/absence of dust at the reading position A, B, and C in that order, and the position
where dust is least present becomes the reading position for the next job.
• At the start of a job (dust evasion)
Like the time of completion of a job, presence/absence of dust is detected at all positions (A, B, and C in that order). The
position where dust is least present is used as the reading position and reading starts.
C B A
• At paper interval
The Scanner Unit does not move.
Reading is performed at the position determined by the control performed at job completion or at the start of a job, and image
correction is performed if dust is detected at that position.
0.5 mm 0.5 mm
C B A
Scanning Glass
Service mode
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L1
Adjustment of dust detection level at paper interval
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L2
Adjustment of dust detection level at job completion
Image Processing
The functions of the PCB related to image processing are shown below:
• Reader Controller PCB
Shading correction (executed per job)
Color displacement correction in vertical scanning direction
45
2. Technology
• Scanner Unit PCB

Scanner Unit drive, analog image processing, A/D conversion
Image processing is performed by the Reader Controller PCB for each line of the images. The main functions are indicated below.
1. Reader Controller PCB
• Shading correction
• Color displacement correction in vertical scanning direction
2. Scanner Unit PCB (in the Scanner Unit)
• Scanner Unit Drive
• Gain correction of the Reading Sensor output, Offset correction
Scanner Unit PCB (Reader)
LED (4lines)
Analog image ASIC

signal EEP-ROM
SRAM
Gain
Scanner unit Shading correction
drive control correction data
Analog image CPU
process A/D Color offset
Digital
- gain correction correction
conversion image
- offset correction in sub scanning
signal
CCD/AP PCB
Scanner Unit PCB (ADF)
LED (4lines)
Analog image
signal
Scanner unit Main Controller PCB

drive control
Analog image
process A/D
- gain correction
conversion
- offset correction
CCD/AP PCB
■ Scanner Unit Drive

The Reading Sensor included in this equipment is a 4-line linear image sensor comprised of approx. 7,500 pixels. The signal
photoelectrically converted by the light-receiving part is output to the Analog Front-end Circuit on the Scanner Unit PCB with each
channel of the Reading Sensor (R, G, and B for color reading and B/W for black & white) in parallel.
46
2. Technology
Red(R)line
Green(G)line
Blue(B)line
Black/White(B/W)line
Enlarged
Light-receiving section
Output
L L H H L H L H H H L ………
■ Gain correction of the Reading Sensor output, Offset correction

The analog video signal output from the Reading Sensor has its amplification ratio aligned with a fixed value (gain correction)
and has its output voltage when there is no incident light aligned with a fixed value (offset correction).
■ A/D Conversion for Reading Sensor Output

The corrected analog video signal is converted into the digital signal for each pixel voltage value using an A/D converter.
■ Overview of Shading Correction

Even density of an original is even, output of the Reading Sensor may not become even due to the following reasons.
1. Variation in sensitivity of pixels of the Reading Sensor
2. Variation in lens light intensity
3. Difference in the transmission light intensity in the center of the lens and the surrounding area
4. Difference in the light intensity in the center of the LED and the surrounding area
5. LED deterioration
To correct unevenness of the Reading Sensor output, shading correction is performed.
In shading correction, there is a type of shading correction that is executed per job.
■ Shading correction
Shading correction is performed for each scanning of original.
With this operation, light of LED Lamp is emitted to the Standard White Plate, and the reflected light is converted into digital data
at the analog image processing part of the Scanner Unit PCB. The amount of digitized reflected light is input to the shading
correction circuit in the Main Controller PCB as the shading coefficient. In the shading correction circuit, the stored target value
and the shading coefficient are compared, and the difference is determined as the shading correction value.
With this shading correction value, variation of pixel of the Reading Sensor of each scan is corrected to make the image density
level even.
Reading Sensor
output Characteristics
after correction
Target value Characteristics
before correction
Measurement
value
White
Original density
Standard White Plate
47
2. Technology
Color displacement correction processing in vertical scanning

direction
Color displacement correction control in vertical scanning direction is a processing to correct the displacement in RGB by shifting
pixels in the vertical direction (up to 1 pixel) to align GREEN with RED and BLUE images when RGB cannot be read such that
they are accurately overlapped at color scanning.
Example) Scanned image of black line when RED is shifted upwards and BLUE is shifted downwards compared to GREEN
&RORUGLVSODFHPHQW
FRUUHFWLRQLQYHUWLFDO
VFDQQLQJGLUHFWLRQ5*
1 line
&RORUGLVSODFHPHQW %HIRUH $IWHU

FRUUHFWLRQLQYHUWLFDO FRUUHFWLRQ FRUUHFWLRQ
VFDQQLQJGLUHFWLRQ*%
There are 2 color displacement correction values in the vertical scanning direction, as indicated below. The correction values are
already adjusted at the time of shipping and stored as service modes. (In COPIER > ADJUST > CCD)
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-BG
When a job is started, color displacement correction processing is performed based on the saved color displacement correction
values.
Outline of Electric Circuits

This equipment is controlled by the Reader Controller PCB.
The relationship between the various electrical components is indicated below.
Sensor
Motor
ADF Driver
Scanner Unit
PCB
Solenoid
Fan
Related Error Code

Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Scanner Unit
• E280 - 0001: Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was not completed within
the specified period of time.
• E280 - 0002: Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was detected.
• E280 - 0101: Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was not completed within
the specified period of time.
• E280 - 0102: Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was detected.
Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF
• E400 - 0001: A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
• E400 - 0002: A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
• E400 - 0003: Disconnection of the harness between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
ADF fan error
• E412 - 0005: Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
• E412 - 0006: Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
Different DADF model error
48
2. Technology
• E490 - 0001: A wrong Scanner Unit was installed.

• E490 - 0101: A wrong DADF was installed.
■ Overview
The operation modes of this machine are categorized as indicated below.
Name of opera- Duplex reading Operation overview Supported print mode

tion mode method
Normal rotation - Picks up originals and reads them with the 1-sided original -> 1-sided printing
pickup/delivery Scanner Unit on the Reader side. Then out- 1-sided original-> 2-sided printing
puts them.
1-sided original mix of the same configuration -
> 1-sided printing
> 2-sided printing
1-sided original mix of different configurations -
> 1-sided printing
> 2-sided printing
Long original -> 1-sided printing
Simultaneous du- Picks up originals, reads their front side with 2-sided original -> 1-sided printing
plex reading the Scanner Unit at the Reader side, and 2-sided original -> 2-sided printing
reads their back side with the Scanner Unit
on the ADF side. Then outputs them.
> 1-sided printing
> 2-sided printing
> 1-sided printing
> 2-sided printing
An overview of the flow of the original is indicated below.
49
2. Technology
■ 1-Sided Original (Small Size)

1) 1st sheet pickup
2) 1st sheet arch creation 1

(Pullout Roller)
3) 1st sheet arch creation 1

(Registration Roller)
4) 1st sheet scanning
5) 1st sheet delivery

& 2nd sheet pickup
and arch creation 1 (Pullout Roller)
6) 2nd sheet scanning
50
2. Technology
Scanner Unit
■ Configuration of the Scanner Unit
The Scanner Unit has the same mechanism as that of the reader. For details, refer to "Scanner Unit" in "Basic Configuration" in
the section "Reader Technology".
Note that there is a difference in their externals due to the shapes of the locations where the units are installed. For this reason,
the unit for the ADF and that for the reader cannot be exchanged.
Related Error Code

Light intensity error
• E301-0002: Light intensity is below the reference level at paper back shading.
Shading error
• E302-0101: Error in paper back white shading
• E302-0102: Error in paper back black shading
■ Duplex Reading Control

2-sided originals are read using simultaneous duplex reading.
With one feed, the Scanner Unit of the Reader Unit reads the front side and the Scanner Unit of the ADF reads the back side
without reversing the paper.
Scanner Unit Scanning position

(ADF) for the rear side
Scanning position Scanner Unit

for the front side (Reader)
Service mode
• FEEDER > ADJUST > ADJMSCN1
: Zoom fine adjustment when reading 2-sided originals (horizontal scanning direction) [front side]
• FEEDER > ADJUST > ADJMSCN2
: Zoom fine adjustment when reading 2-sided originals (horizontal scanning direction) [back side]
• FEEDER > ADJUST > ADJSSCN1
: Zoom fine adjustment when reading 2-sided originals (vertical scanning direction) [front side]
• FEEDER > ADJUST > ADJSSCN2
: Zoom fine adjustment when reading 2-sided originals (vertical scanning direction) [back side]
■ Glass shift control

This equipment has a Reading Glass on the bottom surface of the Scanner Unit.
This Reading Glass has a Standard White Plate used for shading correction and dust detection correction.
The Reader Controller drives the Read Motor (STM3) as needed to move the Reading Glass.
The Reader Controller performs the above-mentioned correction by comparing the position of the Standard White Plate and the
reflection data of the image scanning position.
51
2. Technology
ADF Driver PCB
M3
PS_A9 Scanning Glass
The shift timing for the Reading Glass is indicated below.
Condition Reading Glass shift operation

Wait Yes
Standby No
At recovery from sleep mode Yes
At 1-sided reading Yes
At 2-sided reading Yes
At last rotation No
Related Error Code

Scanner HP error
• E202-0101: An error occurs during the Glass HP detection operation (outward)
• E202-0102: An error occurs during the Glass HP detection operation (homeward)
Pickup Feed System

A list of original size detections is indicated below.
Timing Direction Sensor Mode

Normal Mix of the Mix of dif- Long
same con- ferent con- original
figuration figurations
Feeding starts. Feed LTR-R/ LGL Sensor (PS_A3) Yes - - -
Large Size/ Small Size Sensor (PS_R3) Yes - - -
Width AB/ Inch Sensor (PS_A4) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Original Width Volume (UN_SNS1) Yes Yes Yes Yes
During feed Feed Post-separation Sensor (PS_R1) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Lead Sensor 1 (PS_A6) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Width Original Size Sensor (UN_BO6) - - Yes -
NOTE:
Normal/mix of same configuration/mix of different configurations: The measurement value is replaced with a fixed size.
Long Original mode (non-fixed detection): The measurement value is used as the original size without changing it.
■ Detection when Starting Pickup

● Detection in the Feed Direction
The LTR-R/ LGL Sensor (PS_A3) and Large Size/ Small Size Sensor (PS_R3) determine the paper size (large size or small size).
52
2. Technology
When an original is placed in the Document Pickup Tray, the detection lever of the LTR-R/ LGL Sensor (PS_A3) operates with
the Lightproof Plate and the Lightproof Plate blocks the Photo Interrupter.
At the same time, the reflective Large Size/ Small Size Sensor (PS_R3) detects whether the original has reflecting light.
The size of a paper in the Document Pickup Tray is estimated based on the signal (LGL_S) of the LTR-R/ LGL Sensor (PS_A3),
the signal (LGL_S2) of the Large Size/ Small Size Sensor (PS_R3), and the original width.
The original size is detected in real-time when turning ON the start key and sent to the connected equipment.
ADF Driver PCB
LGL-S2
LGL-S
LGL Size Original
PS_A3
PS_R3
Detecting Flag
● Detection in the Width Direction

The original size in the width direction is detected using the Original Width Volume (UN_SNS1) and AB/ Inch Sensor (PS_A4) in
the Document Pickup Tray.
The analog resistance value of the Original Width Volume (UN_SNS1) changes according to the Slide Guide. The ADF Driver
PCB receives this change in the resistance value as an original size signal (UN_SNS1), and uses it as the size in the width
direction.
The AB/ Inch Sensor (PS_A4) is located inside the Document Pickup Tray to enable accurate width detection of A4R/LTRR and
A5R/STMTR using the Original Width Volume (UN_SNS1). The AB/ Inch Sensor (PS_A4) outputs "1" for the AB/inch detection
signal (A4LT_S) when the original width is "127 mm or more and less than 148 mm" or "197 mm or more and less than 214 mm".
ADF Driver PCB
Slide Guide
(Rear)
A4LT_S
VR
AB/ Inch
Determination Sensor
(PS_A4)
Gear
Original Width Volume

(UN_SNS1)
Slide Guide
(Front)
53
2. Technology
■ Detection when Feeding

● Detection in the Feed Direction
The original size in the feed direction is calculated using the detection signals of the Post-separation Sensor (PS_R1) and Lead
Sensor 1 (PS_A6).
ADF Driver PCB
PS_A6 PS_R1
● Detection in the Width Direction(Only when loading the different width mixed paper)
The size is determined by the Original Size Sensor (UN_BO6).
UN_BO6
ADF Driver PCB
■ Original Detection Control

Detection of originals in the Document Pickup Tray is performed by the Original Sensor (PS_N1).
When an original is placed in the Document Pickup Tray, the Detection Lever operates with the Lightproof Plate and the Lightproof
Plate passes through the Photo Interrupter. This makes the Original Sensor (PS_N1) emit an original detection signal (EMP_S).
If the Cover Open/Closed Sensor (PS_A5) detects that the Feeder Cover has been closed, a Feeder Cover open/close detection
signal (COVER_S) is emitted.
When the ADF Driver PCB receives a Feeder Cover open/close detection signal (COVER_S) and original detection signal (EMP_
S), an original set indication signal (EMP_LED) is sent to light the Original Set Display LED (LED).
54
2. Technology
ADF Driver PCB
UN_BO4
PS_N1 PS_A5
■ Pickup Operation
The pickup operation is performed by the Pickup Roller, Separation Roller, and Feed Roller.
The Pickup Roller and Feed Roller are driven by the Pickup Motor (M1). By turning ON the Pickup Clutch (CL1) after completion
of the pickup operation, the Pickup Roller Unit is lifted up.
Errors in the pickup operation are detected by the Post-separation Sensor (PS_R1). If the original could not be detected at the
specified timing, it is notified as a jam.
ADF Driver PCB

SEPA_M_A/ B
SEPA_S
MV_CL
M1 CL1
PS_R1
■ Original Feed Control

This equipment forms an arch in the Pullout Roller and Registration Roller locations. This increases the feed accuracy.
55
2. Technology
ADF Driver PCB
PS_A1
ADF Driver PCB
PS_R2
■ Jam Detection
This equipment detects original jams using the sensors indicated in the diagram. The check timing to detect jam is already stored
in the ROM of the Reader Controller PCB, which determines the occurrence of a jam by the presence of an original in the areas
of corresponding sensors.
When a jam occurs, the machine stores the information by the code.
This machine's jam code can be checked by printing out a jam error history report from service mode.
PS_R2 UN_BO8 UN_BO7 PS_A1 PS_R1
PS_A6 PS_A7
56
2. Technology
'LVSOD\ ,2 $GMXVW )XQFWLRQ 2SWLRQ 7HVW &RXQWHU
-$0! ! 5($'<!

1R '$7( 7,0( 7,0( / &2'( 3 &175 6,=(
2' $
2' $

2&

19'

) 3&$5'

2 $5

2 $
%

2
$
'LVSOD\ ,2 $GMXVW )XQFWLRQ 2SWLRQ 7HVW &RXQWHU
1R
-DP7\SH
'(/$<
6HQVRU1R
36
■ Double Feed Detection Control

This equipment has Double Feed Sensor PCBs (Transmission/Reception) (UN_BO7/UN_BO8) to detect double feeding of paper.
The Double Feed Sensor PCBs (Transmission/Reception) (UN_BO7/UN_BO8) located between the Pullout Roller and the
Registration Roller use an ultrasonic method to perform double feed detection. Once it is judged that a double feed has occurred,
the machine stops operation due to a jam.
When a job is started, the sensor level is checked without an original to calculate the threshold value for double feed detection.
During the job, the Post-separation Sensor (PS_R1) detects and manages the leading edge/trailing edge for each original sheet
and determines whether a double feed has occurred by comparing the values with the threshold value from when the job started.
UN_BO8 UN_BO7 PS_R1
[2] [1]
No. Name
[1] Pullout Roller
[2] Registration Roller
PS_R1 Post-separation Sensor
57
2. Technology
No. Name
UN_BO7 Double Feed Sensor PCB (transmission)
UN_BO8 Double Feed Sensor PCB (reception)
NOTE:
The Double Feed Sensor PCB uses an ultrasonic sensor. With the ultrasonic method, the oscillation portion emits ultrasonic wave
to the paper surface. In the result, new ultrasonic wave is generated as the paper vibrates, and the reception side reads the
ultrasonic wave. A double feed is detected when the oscillation is smaller due to a second sheet of paper.
<In the case of a single sheet>

Reception
side paper vibration
Vibration: large
Transmission Original
side
<In the case of double feeding> Original (1st sheet)

Reception paper vibration
side
Vibration: large
Vibration: small
Transmission
side Original (2nd sheet)
■ Double Feed Detection Jam

Loca-
Jam code Types of jam Sensor name Sensor number
tion
01 0020 Double feed jam (during a job) ADF Double Feed UN_BO7, UN_BO8
0021 Sensor communication error (during a job) Sensor
0060 Double feed jam (during a job, first sheet)
0061 Sensor communication error (during a job,
first sheet)
0062 Sensor adjustment reception level error (at
the start of a job)
0063 Sensor adjustment communication error (at
the start of a job)
■ Types of jam
● Feed System
Location Jam code Sensor name Sensor number Jam type
Delay Stationary Residual
01 0001 ADF Post-separation PS_R1 Yes - -
0002 Sensor - Yes -
0042 - Yes -
0003 ADF Arch Sensor PS_A1 Yes - -
0043 Yes - -
0004 - Yes -
0044 - Yes -
0005 ADF Registration Sensor PS_R2 Yes - -
0045 Yes - -
58
2. Technology
Location Jam code Sensor name Sensor number Jam type

Delay Stationary Residual
01 0006 ADF Registration Sensor PS_R2 - Yes -
0046 - Yes -
0007 ADF Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 Yes - -
0047 Yes - -
0008 - Yes -
0048 - Yes -
0009 ADF Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7 Yes - -
0049 Yes - -
0010 - Yes -
0050 - Yes -
0094 Entire Feed System Sen- - - - Yes
sor
● Others
Location Jam code Jam type Sensor name Sensor number
01 0090 DADF open DADF Open/Close Sen- Reader: PS_N1, PS_N2
0091 DADF opened by user sor 1/2
0092 Cover open Cover Open/Closed Sen- PS_A5
0093 Cover opened by user sor
0095 Pickup error Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
0071 Software timing error*1 - -
0073 Error avoidance jam*2 - -
0076 Size Error Large/Small Sensor, PS_R3, PS_A3
LTR-R/LGL Sensor
0096 Limited functions jam*3 - -
00A1 Post-separation Sensor Power ON Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
Jam
00A2 Scanner Unit HP Sensor Power ON Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS_A1
Jam
00A3 Original Size Sensor (Inch) Power Registration Sensor PS_R2
ON Jam
00A4 Lead Sensor 1 Power ON Jam Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
00A5 Lead Sensor 2 Power ON Jam Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7
*1 It occurs when a software sequence error has occurred for some reasons. The machine is recovered by opening and then
closing the cover to remove jammed paper.
*2 An error which is handled as an error code occurs. It is highly possible that the machine is recovered by opening and then
closing the cover. Therefore, the jam message is indicated to make the user to open and then close the cover to recover the
machine. If the machine is not recovered by opening and then closing the cover, refer to the error log, and perform the remedy
for the error code which has occurred at the same time.
*3 Limited functions jam is a jam for preventing an original to be left inside the machine when a problem which requires the
machine moves to limited functions mode occurs. If an error occurs for some reasons, a jam message is displayed to make the
user to perform jam removal. After that, an error is displayed, and the device enters limited functions mode. The machine recovers
when the cause of the error is solved.
If this jam occurs, refer to the error log, and perform the remedy for the error code which has occurred at the same time.
59
2. Technology
NOTE:
Settings/Registration (method for resuming when a feeder paper jam occurs)
When performing stream reading, the method for resuming after a jam has occurred can be set.
Setting item is as follow.
• From 1st Page: After removing the jam, load all original pages in the Document Pickup Tray again. After the Start key is
pressed, the machine feeds the original pages that were already read until the jam occurred without reading them again, and
resume reading of the remaining pages. (Default)
• From Stopped Original: After removing the jam, only load the original pages that have not yet been read in the Document
Pickup Tray again. After the Start key is pressed, the machine resumes reading of the remaining pages.
This equipment supports stream reading of 150 original pages (80 g/m2), so if a jam occurs at the 149th page of a 150 page
original, for example, it can take up to 2 minutes to resume reading if all the original pages are loaded again. Resuming from the
original page where reading stopped enables shorter jam recovery times.
Fan
This equipment has a single fan. Its functions are indicated below.
Code Name Function

FAN_A1 ADF Cooling Fan Cooling the ADF Driver PCB (UN_BO1) and 3 motors
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Power Supply Assembly

An overview of the power supply is indicated below.
With this equipment, 4 types of power (24 V, 12 V, 6 V, and 5 V) are received from the Reader Unit.
The 24 V power is mainly used for the motor, solenoid, fan.
The 12 V power is mainly used for the LED Lamp Unit.
The 5 V power is mostly used for the sensors.
3.3 V power is generated via a converter on the ADF Driver PCB and supplied to the Original Width Volume.
60
2. Technology
24V
Motor
24V 24V Solenoid
DADF driver 24V
PCB Fan
Reader
controller 5V
Sensor
PCB
5V
3.3V Original
width volume
24V
6V Scanner Unit 24V LED
4.5V PCB lamp unit
Related Error Code

Power supply (24 V) error
• E227-0101: 24 V port is OFF when the power of the DF Unit is turned ON
61
2. Technology
Controller System
Specifications / Configuration
■ Configuration/Function
Item Function
Main Controller PCB System Control/Memory Control/Printer Output Image Processing Control, Reader Image Input Pro-
cessing, Card Reader Connection I/F, Fax Image Processing, USB Extension HUB Connection I/F,
RTC
RAM Temporarily storage of image data: Capacity of 2 GB (for controller control) + 1 GB (for image pro-
cessing)
USB port USB2.0 Device I/F, USB3.0 Host I/F
Hard disk 2.5-inch SATA I/F Standard: 250 GB (250 GB usable area), address book, security information
(password, certificate), image data, preferences
Flash PCB Storage of system software: 2 GB
TPM PCB Generation and storage of the encryption key: Only when Management Settings > Data Management
> TPM Settings is "On". (Default: OFF)
62
2. Technology
■ Main Controller PCB

Image
Analysis
FAN PCB Internal I/F
J15 J6001 External I/F
Voice OP
J13
HDD
J18 J2010
J2000
J2040 HDD
J2020
J5
USB(H)
J3
USB(D)
J7
LAN
J1 J21 J20 J11 J1010 J1050 J1020

TPM CC-VI CARD FLASH J6000 Terminal Riser
Board Counter
No. Functions and specifications No. Functions and specifications

J1 TPM PCB J21 Copy Card Reader
J3 USB I/F (device) J1010 Open I/F Board (for external controller)
J5 USB I/F (host) J1020 Riser PCB
J7 LAN I/F J1050 Counter PCB / Relay PCB
J9 - J1100 Image Data Analyzer PCB
J11 Flash PCB J2010 / Hard disk
J13 Voice-Operation J2000
Voice-Guidance
J15 Controller Fan J2020 / Hard disk for mirroring
J18 - J2040
J20 Serial Interface Kit
Copy Card Reader
63
2. Technology
■ Riser PCB
Internal I/F
External I/F
J4021
J2 Control Panel I/F
DC Controller
PCB J4031
Reader
J4022
J10 Control Panel I/F
J4023
DC Controller USB(H)
PCB
J4202
WiFi
J4
FAX（2/3/4 Lines）
J17
FAX
J8
Main J1
Controller FAX (1 Line)
PCB
J9
Laser Driver
J14
All-Night Power PCB / Relay PCB
No. Functions and specifications No. Functions and specifications

J1 / J17 Fax (1-Line) J14 All-night Power Supply/Relay Board
J2 DC Controller PCB J4021 Control Panel I/F
J4 / J17 Fax (2/3/4-Line) J4022 Control Panel I/F
J8 Main Controller PCB J4023 IC Card Reader (upper) / USB (lower)
J9 Laser Driver J4031 Reader
J10 DC Controller PCB J4202 WiFi
64
2. Technology
■ Function Expansion System Options

Main Controller PCB
Voice Operation/ Image Analysis PCB

Voice Guidance PCB
Open I/F PCB
Name Functions, specifications and features

Voice Recognition PCB Voice Operation Kit, Voice Guidance Kit (for models outside Japan)
Open I/F PCB imagePASS-P1
ColorPASS-GX500 (for models outside Japan)
Image Data Analyzer PCB Scan protection for output original (Copy/SEND/Mail Box)
Motion Sensor
Function
Automatic recovery from sleep mode
• The machine automatically recovers from sleep mode by staying in the designated area for more than a certain period of
time.
• The sensor determines whether a person approaches the above mentioned area is a user. If a person approaches the
machine from the front side, it starts the operation to recover from sleep mode early. If a person approaches the machine
from the side, the sensor judges whether he/she is just a passer to prevent recovery by mistake.
CAUTION:
Recovery time depends on the time for recovery from sleep mode of the host machine. The Motion Sensor outputs the
trigger for recovery from sleep mode. Operation of the Motion Sensor is the same for recovery from Deep Sleep and from
Sleep 1, but time for recovery differs depending on the recovery process of the host machine.
The machine is not recovered by a passer.

• Reduce unnecessary power consumption
• The machine may recover from sleep mode if walking speed is slow. However, if no operation is performed for a certain
period of time, it moves to sleep mode again.
CAUTION:
• Since the sensor detects heat from human body (infrared ray), do not block the sensor area.
• If the lens is heavily soiled, clean it with wet and tightly-wrung clothes or dry clothes.
65
2. Technology
Settings / Registration
Preferences > Timer / Energy Settings > Use Motion Sensor
In Settings / Registration, you can disable the sensor and select the sensor sensitivity.
Shutdown Sequence
Before shutting down the power supply, it is necessary to perform the HDD completion process (Purpose: to prevent damage on
the HDD) and execute the fixing disengagement operation. This series of process is called "shutdown sequence".
With this machine, the Main Controller PCB detects turning OFF the Main Power Supply Switch, and the shutdown sequence is
started and executed automatically.
Note that the maximum shutdown time with this machine is 90 seconds. (If the maximum of 90 seconds has elapsed, the power
supply is turned OFF by the hard timer circuit on the Relay PCB.)
NOTE:
If the power supply is stopped without shutting down the machine, or if the processing to completely delete the hard disk (deletion
of the primary file) fails to be completed within the shutdown time (max. 90 sec.), data consistency is checked at startup, during
which the progress bar is displayed.
Startup Sequence
Name in bracket [ ]: Location where program is stored
Power Supply Switch ON • Initializing process of hardware
• Starting BIOS
[Main Controller PCB]
• Starting IPL (boot program) and OS system software
[Flash PCB]
• Starting application
[Hard disk]
Standby screen display
66
2. Technology
NOTE:
To achieve faster startup, the progress bar and the active PCB are not synchronized.
For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting.
See the following error code list for the troubleshooting.
Related Error Code

• E602-0001: HDD detection error
HDD failed to be Ready. When the HDD is not formatted
When an HDD for another machine is connected at installation of the Removable HDD Kit
• E614-0001: Flash PCB detection error
Failed to recognize the Flash PCB. When the Flash PCB is not formatted
• E614-0002: Error in file system on the Flash PCB
The file system could not be initialized normally at startup.
The OS boot file was not found.
The OS kernel was not found.
• E748-2010: Flash PCB error / HDD error
When IPL (boot program) was not found, or the HDD could not be recognized
NOTE:
When the following errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not
recorded in the log.
E602-XX01, E614-XX01
67
2. Technology
Laser Exposure System
Overview
Because this machine supports high-speed operations, two Laser Scanner Units are employed and the Laser Driver for each
color performs laser scanning with four beams.
[5]
M33
M34
[2]
M31
C
[5]
M32 Bk
[6]
[4]
M
UN15
[6]
[1] UN14
[3]
Laser A
UN13
Laser B
Laser C
UN12
Laser D
No. Name No. Name

[1] Laser Scanner Unit 1 M32 Image Skew Correction Motor (M)
[2] Laser Scanner Unit 2 M33 Image Skew Correction Motor (C)
[3] BD Sensor (Y, M) M34 Image Skew Correction Motor (Bk)
[4] BD Sensor (C, Bk) UN12 Laser Driver PCB (M)
[5] Imaging Lens UN13 Laser Driver PCB (Y)
[6] Scanner Mirror UN14 Laser Driver PCB (Bk)
M31 Image Skew Correction Motor (Y) UN15 Laser Driver PCB (C)
Laser is applied to the image on the negatively-charged drum with this machine.
Image area
Non-image area Non-image area
Laser ON
Enlarged view
68
2. Technology
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[5]
UN12 UN13 UN14 UN15
Y M C Bk
[4] [4]
[3] [3]
[4] [4]
UN12 [5] UN13 UN14 [5] UN15
No. Name No. Name

[1] Laser Scanner Unit 1 UN12 Laser Driver PCB (M)
[2] Laser Scanner Unit 2 UN13 Laser Driver PCB (Y)
[3] Imaging Lens UN14 Laser Driver PCB (Bk)
[4] Reflection Mirror UN15 Laser Driver PCB (C)
[5] Scanner Mirror
■ Specifications
Item Description
Wave length 787 to 800 nm
Laser type Infrared laser (invisible)
Laser output 15 mW
Number of Laser Scanner Units 2
Number of laser beams 4 beams/lines in each color
Resolution 1200 dpi
Motor type Brushless motor
Motor revolutions imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560: 31181.1 rpm
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5550/C5540: 26220.5 rpm
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535: 17126.0 rpm
Number of Scanner Mirror facets 6 facets (40 mm dia.)
List of Controls Laser ON/OFF Control
Horizontal Scanning Synchronization Control
Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control
APC Control
Laser Scanner Motor Control
69
2. Technology
Item Description
List of Controls BD Correction Control
Laser Shutter Control
Image Skew Correction Control
Laser ON/OFF Control

Purpose
Turns the laser beam ON and OFF according to the combination of laser control signals.
Execution timing
After turning ON the power
Control description
The DC Controller performs the register setting of the Laser Polygon Control ASIC on the Laser Driver PCB. This Laser Polygon
Control ASIC switches between four modes (Forced OFF mode, APC mode, Print mode, and Standby mode).
DC Controller (UN1)
Laser control signal
Laser Driver
Scanner Motor
PCB
Laser beam
Main Controller Video signal
Mode Laser status Remarks

Forced OFF mode OFF Clears the light intensity setting determined by the APC.
APC mode ON Adjusts laser light intensity.
Print mode On/Off Emits the laser according to the video signal.
Standby mode OFF The machine is in standby mode.
Print Image formation

instruction ready timing
PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY

At 1st line (APC)
LaserA
At 2nd line (APC)
LaserB
At 3rd line (APC)
LaserC
At 4th line (APC)
LaserD
Mode Standby Forcible Standby

APC mode APC mode / Print mode
name mode OFF mode mode
Horizontal Scanning Synchronization Control

Purpose
Aligns the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction.
Execution timing
Every line
70
2. Technology
Control description
1. The Main Controller forcibly activates the laser diode of the M Laser Driver PCB by setting the M laser control signal to APC
mode. Similarly, the Main Controller forcibly activates the laser diode of the Bk Laser Driver PCB by setting the Bk laser
control signal to APC mode.
2. The BD Sensor (YM) is located on the scanning light path of the laser beam of the M laser, and the laser beam is incident
on the BD Sensor (YM). Similarly, the BD Sensor (CBk) is located on the scanning light path of the laser beam of the Bk
laser, and the laser beam is incident on the BD Sensor (CBk).
3. The two BD sensors detect the laser beam, generate BD signals (BD_YM, BD_CBk), and then send them to the Main
Controller.
4. The Main Controller outputs video signals (VDO_Y, VDO_M, VOD_C, VDO_Bk) to each Laser Driver PCB when it receives
these BD signals. This enables the laser driver to emit a laser beam from a fixed position for each line.
Laser Scanner Unit 1
VDO_Y Y Laser Driver Y Laser

PCB
BD_YM
BD Sensor (Y, M)
VDO_M M Laser Driver M Laser

PCB
Main Controller
C Laser Driver C Laser

VDO_C
PCB
BD_CBk
BD Sensor (C, Bk)
VDO_Bk
Bk Laser Driver Bk Laser
PCB
Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control

Purpose
Aligns the write start position in the vertical scanning direction.
Execution timing
At each print
Control description
1. The DC Controller detects an internal reference signal when it receives a print order. Based on this signal, a vertical scanning
synchronous signal (ITOP) is generated and sent to the Main Controller.
2. The Main Controller synchronizes with ITOP signal and generates VDO signals (Y_VDO, M_VDO, C_VDO and Bk_VDO),
and sends them to the Laser Scanner Unit.
3. The Laser Scanner Unit generates the laser drive signals based on the VDO signals. At this timing, the Laser Scanner Unit
emits laser beams to match the leading edge of image with that of paper.
ITOP Reference
signal
Print
instruction
Main DC
Controller Controller
(UN1) Laser Laser Laser Laser
Laser drive signal Laser drive signal
VDO signal
71
2. Technology
APC (Auto Power Control)

Purpose
Ensures constant laser beam light intensity for each line.
Execution timing
For each line (before writing the image)
Control description
1. The DC Controller outputs the laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC of each Y/C Laser Driver PCB.
2. The APC mode is set for the Laser Driver ICs of each Y/C Laser Driver PCB and the laser diode of each color is forcibly
activated. Each Laser Driver IC simultaneously monitors the laser diode (LD) with the Photo Diode (PD) and adjusts output
of laser diode until the laser light intensity reaches a specified level.
㼅㻌Laser
Y㻌Laser
Control Signal
Laser Driver LD
㼅㻛㻹
PCB (Y) PD
Laser
Control
Signal
㻹㻌Laser
M㻌Laser
Control Signal
LD
PD
DC Controller
(UN1) Laser Scanner Unit 2
㻯㻌Laser
Control Signal C㻌Laser
㻯㻛㻮㼗 Laser Driver LD

Laser PCB (C) PD
Control
Signal
㻮㼗㻌Laser
Control Signal Bk㻌Laser
LD
PD
Laser Scanner Motor Control

Purpose
Rotates the Scanner Mirror at a specific speed.
Execution timing
At power-on, and at each print
Control description
Scanner Motor rotation speed is controlled by the Y/C Laser Driver PCB.
1. The Y/C Laser Driver PCB outputs Scanner Motor control signals (acceleration signal: ACC, deceleration signal: DEC) to
the Scanner Motor to rotate the Scanner Mirror.
2. The Y/C Laser Driver PCB detects the acceleration detection signal (FG1 to 2, BD_YM, BD_CBk) and controls the
acceleration signal (ACC1 to 2) and deceleration signal (DEC1 to 2) to keep the specified speed in comparison with the
reference signal in the Main Controller.
72
2. Technology
Laser Driver
Scanner Motor
PCB (M)
(YM)
Scanner BD Sensor
Motor (YM)
Control
Signal ACC1
DEC1
Laser Driver
PCB (Y) FG1
DC Controller
(UN1)
Laser Driver
Scanner Motor
PCB (Bk)
(CBk)
BD Sensor
Scanner (CBk)
Motor
Control ACC2
Signal DEC2
Laser Driver
PCB (C) FG2
Related Error Code

• E100-0100: BD signal was not detected although a specified period of time had passed during operation of the Laser Scanner
(Y, M).
• E100-0102: Correction in timing of laser exposure to the Polygon Mirror (Y, M) was not completed within the specified period
of time.
• E100-0300: BD signal was not detected although a specified period of time had passed during operation of the Laser Scanner
(C, Bk).
• E100-0302: Correction in timing of laser exposure to the Polygon Mirror (C, Bk) was not completed within the specified period
of time.
• E102-0101: An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner was detected (Y, M).
• E102-0301: An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner was detected (C, Bk).
BD Correction Control
Purpose
Corrects the displacement of each color's laser write start position due to the varied angle of the Scanner Mirror surface.
Execution timing
At power-on, and at each print
Control description
1. The Main Controller measures the BD interval after the completion of constant speed rotation control of the Scanner Motor.
2. The Main Controller calculates the correction value from the displacement of the BD interval.
3. The write start position is corrected by correcting the write start timing based on the above correction value.
73
2. Technology
Laser Shutter Control

Purpose
Prevents residual toner getting attached on the Dustproof Glass. Also, prevents exposure of laser light in the machine when the
Front Cover/Right Cover is open.
Execution timing
After turning ON the power
Control description
Opens the Laser Shutter while the Laser Scanner Motor is operating. Closes the Laser Shutter at any other time.
In addition, the Laser Driver's output signal is stopped when the Front Cover Sensor (PS18) and Right Cover Sensor (PS20)
operate together. The Laser Shutter closes and forcibly cuts-off the optical path of the laser when the Front Cover and the Right
Cover are opened simultaneously.
These operations are controlled by the DC Controller.
Bk Laser Shutter
Color Laser Shutter
Bk Shutter Lever
Color
Shutter Lever
Bk Shutter Cam
Laser Shutter
Motor (M28)
Drive Shaft
Color Shutter Cam
Laser Shutter
Sensor (PS29)
Sensor Lever
Front Door Sensor

DC (PS18)
Controller (UN1) Right Door Sensor
(PS20)
Laser shutter position Relation of shutter lever and cam

Sensor lever position
For Bk For color For Bk For color
(PS29)
Close Close Shutter Sensor
Lever Lever
Shutter Cam
Laser
Shutter
Open Close
Open Open
74
2. Technology
Related Error Code

• E0112-0000: Home position of the Laser Shutter was not detected.
• E0112-0001: Home position was not detected although the Laser Shutter was closed.
• E0112-0002: Change in home position was not detected while the Laser Shutter was open.
Image Skew Correction Control

Purpose
This control is performed to prevent displacement in laser exposure.
Execution timing
• At power-on
• At [Auto Correct Color Mismatch] is executed
Control description
1. The DC Controller forms the patch pattern of each color on the ITB.
2. The DC Controller reads this patch pattern with the patch sensor to detect the degree of color displacement in comparison
with the reference value backed-up in the DC Controller.
3. Based on this detection result, the laser exposure position (skew amount) of the Laser Scanner Unit is changed.
Photosensitive Drum Imaging Lens

Cam
Skew
Correction
Motor Arm
Position relation of
imaging lens and arm
Skew Correction Motor
Imaging Lens
Imaging Lens
Before correction Arm Cam
Photosensitive Drum Imaging Lens

Cam
Cam
Arm Skew
Correction
Motor Arm
Position relation of
imaging lens and arm
Imaging Lens
After correction Arm Cam
Imaging Lens Cam
Skew
Correction
Motor
Scanner Mirror
Reflection
Mirror
Arm
75
2. Technology
Image Formation System
Overview
■ Specifications
Item Function/Method
Photosensitive Drum Material OPC (Organic Photoconductor)
Cleaning Cleaning Blade
Process speed imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560 series: 264 / 222 / 132 mm/s
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5550/5540 series: 222 /132 mm/s
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5530 series: 145 / 132 mm/s
Drum Heater Provided for all colors as standard
Developing Assembly Developing Cylinder 1 cylinder for each color (single-developing method)
Developing method Dry, 2-component development + ACR method (ACR: Auto Carrier Re-
fresh)
Toner Non-magnetic negative toner
Primary charging Charging method Roller charging
Cleaning Urethane Sponge Roller
Toner Container Replacement of Toner Container Yes
(during continuous print)
Transfer method Intermediate transfer (ITB)
ITB Unit Material Acrylic coated polyether ether ketone resin
Cleaning Cleaning Blade
Corrects belt displacement Yes (Optical sensor)
Primary transfer Transfer method Transfer Roller
Disengagement mechanism Yes
Secondary transfer Transfer method Transfer Roller
Disengagement mechanism None
Cleaning Static cleaning
Separation method Curvature separation + Static Eliminator
Patch Sensor Yes
76
2. Technology
■ Parts Configuration
[1]
Y M C Bk
[2] [4]
[3] [5]
[6]
[8]
[9] [7]
[10]
[11]
No. Parts name

1 Toner Bottle
2 ITB Unit
3 ITB Cleaner Unit
4 Primary Transfer Roller
5 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
6 Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
7 Patch Sensor Unit/Registration Sensor Unit
8 Developing Unit
9 Drum Unit
10 Laser Scanner Unit
11 Waste Toner Container
77
2. Technology
■ Print Process
Delivery
Fixing block
7.Fixing
ITB cleaning block Transfer block

6.Separation
8.ITB cleaning
ITB 5.Secondary
transfer
4.Primary 4.Primary 4.Primary 4.Primary
transfer transfer transfer transfer
Y M C Bk
3.Developing Photosensitive Photosensitive Photosensitive Photosensitive
Developing block drum drum drum drum
2.Laser exposure 9.Pre-exposure
1.Primary charging 10.Drum cleaning
Registration
Static latent image
formation block Drum cleaning block
Pickup
Flow of print paper
Rotating direction of ITB, photosensitive drum
Block No. Process Description

Static latent image formation 1 Primary charging The surface of the Photosensitive Drum is charged to make a uni-
block form negative potential.
2 Laser exposure Emission of the laser light forms a static latent image on the surface
of the Photosensitive Drum. (Image exposure: laser exposed area
becomes image area)
Developing block 3 Development With the dry, 2-component AC developing method, toner that has
been negatively charged by the Developing Cylinder is attached to
the Photosensitive Drum.
Transfer block 4 Primary transfer Toner on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum is transferred to
the ITB by applying positive charge from the back side of the ITB.
5 Secondary transfer Toner on the ITB is transferred to the paper by applying positive
potential to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
6 Separation With the curvature separation method, the paper is separated from
the ITB. In the case of thin paper which has low elastic force, the
Static Eliminator reduces potential on the back side of paper to
make the thin paper to be separated easily.
Fixing block 7 Fixing The toner on the paper is fixed on the paper by heat and pressure.
ITB cleaning block 8 ITB cleaning The Cleaning Blade removes the residual toner attached on the ITB.
Drum cleaning block 9 Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Pre-exposure LED Unit removes the residual charge.
10 Drum cleaning The Cleaning Blade removes the residual toner attached on the
Photosensitive Drum.
Charging Control
To charge the Photosensitive Drum surface to a negative potential, this machine uses the Charging Roller to perform charging
control.
78
2. Technology
Note that since this machine has the high voltage circuits independent for each color, different biases can be applied for each
color.
UN1
DC Controller PCB
UN77
Charging High-Voltage PCB (YMC)
Photosensitive Drum
Charging Roller
Charging control superimposes an AC bias in addition to the primary charging DC bias using the Charging Roller adjacent charging
method.
■ Charging DC Bias
The setting value of the charging DC bias is determined by D-max control (“D-max Control” on page 98) so that the optimal
image density can be achieved.
Related Service Mode

Display of the each color developing DC bias:
(Level 2) COPIER > Display > DENS > DEV-DC-Y
(Level 2) COPIER > Display > DENS > DEV-DC-M
(Level 2) COPIER > Display > DENS > DEV-DC-C
(Level 2) COPIER > Display > DENS > DEV-DC-K
Adjustment of the each color fogging removal potential:

COPIER > Adjust > V-CONT > VBACK-Y
COPIER > Adjust > V-CONT > VBACK-M
COPIER > Adjust > V-CONT > VBACK-C
COPIER > Adjust > V-CONT > VBACK-K
Adjustment of the each color contrast potential:

COPIER > Adjust > V-CONT > VCONT-Y
COPIER > Adjust > V-CONT > VCONT-M
COPIER > Adjust > V-CONT > VCONT-C
COPIER > Adjust > V-CONT > VCONT-K
Display of the each color primary charging DC voltage:

COPIER > Display > DENS > CHG-DC-Y
COPIER > Display > DENS > CHG-DC-M
COPIER > Display > DENS > CHG-DC-C
COPIER > Display > DENS > CHG-DC-K
■ Charging AC Bias Control

For AC bias, discharge current control is performed to calculate an appropriate Vpp (potential difference between the maximum
value and minimum value of the AC voltage waveform).
79
2. Technology

Adjustment of each color charging AC voltage (at high speed):
COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > OFSTAC-Y
COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > OFSTAC-M
COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > OFSTAC-C
COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > OFSTAC-K
Adjustment of each color charging AC voltage (at low speed):

COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > OFSTACY2
COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > OFSTACM2
COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > OFSTACC2
COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > OFSTACK2
■ Discharge Current Control

This machine performs sampling for the time corresponding to a single drum rotation for each voltage to control the discharge
current because of the following reasons.
Discharge current control outputs Vpp to an area uncharged by AC bias and an area charged by AC bias, and performs sampling
of the current to calculate the optimal discharge current.
The amount of discharge from the Charging Roller that is based on temperature characteristics is significantly affected by
environmental changes. Therefore, the discharge amount needs to be corrected in accordance with the changes.

Adjustment of the discharge current control target current for each color (at high speed):
Adjust the offset of the discharge current control target current for each color when the process speed is high.
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > DIS-TGY
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > DIS-TGM
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > DIS-TGC
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI > DIS-TGK
Adjustment of the discharge current control target current for each color (at low speed):
Adjust the offset of the discharge current control target current for each color when the process speed is low.
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI >DIS-TGY2
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI >DIS-TGM2
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI >DIS-TGC2
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-PRI >DIS-TGK2
■ Drum Unit Detection

Whether the Drum Unit is installed or not is detected.
Detection timing:
• At power-on
• When recovering from sleep (after 8 hours or more have elapsed)
Detection description:
The following is determined from the AC current monitor value when discharge current control is executed to detect the
presence or absence of the Drum Unit.
• When the current monitor value is less than the specified value: Drum Unit absent
• When the current monitor value is the specified value or higher: Drum Unit present
NOTE:
If the Drum Unit is detected as present but the memory of the Drum Unit is not detected, alarm code 09-0010/0011/0012/0013 is
generated.
Operation of the host machine:

If the Drum Unit is detected as absent, "Insert the drum unit. (XXXX)" is displayed on the status line of the Control Panel.
(XXXX is the color name.)
80
2. Technology
NOTE:
Detection of presence/absence of a Drum Unit may not be executed at times such as at recovery from sleep mode (of less than
8 hours).
■ Drum Unit Detection (New/Old)

This machine reads information recorded in the Drum Unit Memory and detects whether the drum is new or old based on the
information, when the power is turned on.
When a new drum is detected, it is judged that the Drum Unit has been replaced.

1. Check whether Drum Unit Memory is present in each drum unit.
2. If there is Drum Unit Memory, judge whether the Drum Unit is new or old (has been replaced or not).
UN1
DC Controller PCB
UN70㹼73
Drum Unit New/Old Sensor
Information specific to the drum
Drum Unit Memory
Related Alarm Codes

Drum Unit (each color) replacement completion alarm:
Drum Unit (Y) replacement completion alarm: 43-0070
Drum Unit (M) replacement completion alarm: 43-0071
Drum Unit (C) replacement completion alarm: 43-0072
Drum Unit (Bk) replacement completion alarm: 43-0073
Drum memory tag detection error (each color):

Drum memory tag detection error (Y): 09-0010
Drum memory tag detection error (M): 09-0011
Drum memory tag detection error (C): 09-0012
Drum memory tag detection error (Bk): 09-0013
81
2. Technology
■ Drum Unit Life Detection

This machine measures the film thickness on the drum based on the application data and calculates the Drum Unit life from the
measured data.
The calculated life is recorded in the Drum Memory as information specific to the drum. The recorded information can be seen
in service mode.
NOTE:
Although conventional models used the detected drum film thickness also for image formation control, this model uses it only for
life calculation. Furthermore, although conventional models measured only the YMC drums, this model performs detection on all
of the CMYK drums.

Drum Unit (each color) estimated life:
COPIER > Counter > LF > Y-DRM-LF
COPIER > Counter > LF > M-DRM-LF
COPIER > Counter > LF > C-DRM-LF
COPIER > Counter > LF > K-DRM-LF
■ Drum Heater Control

A drum heater is provided on the bottom of the Photosensitive Drum in order to deliver charging and exposure that is stable
against changes in the internal environment.
This heater is controlled to keep the internal temperature constant. Basically, when the Environment Switch is ON, the heater is
ON regardless of ON/OFF of the main power except for during printing. (Excluding the case where the internal temperature is
high)
It also controls the Cassette Heater in the same manner. (Refer to the Pickup/Feed System Cassette Heater Control for details)
Photosensitive Drum
Drum Heater
NOTE:
For the conventional models, a drum heater was provided only for Bk and drum heaters for other colors were option. Starting from
this model, drum heaters are provided for all colors as standard.
82
2. Technology
Developing Control
In this machine, charging is performed on the Developing Cylinder the same as the Charging Roller, and imaging is performed
using a 2-component developing method for all colors.
The bias applied to the cylinder is calculated from the data calculated based on the absolute moisture content obtained from the
Environment Sensor.
UN1
DC Controller PCB
UN76 Developing High-Voltage PCB (YMC) /

UN17 Primary Transfer/Bk Developing Charging
High-Voltage PCB
Developing Cylinder
Developing DC bias:
The setting value of the voltage for charging the Developing Cylinder is calculated from the environment data, like the data
used for setting the charging bias.
Developing AC bias:
Developing performance and development charge injection performance are affected by the humidity and absolute moisture
content.
For example, in high humidity environments, charge injection performance is poor but developing performance is good. In
contrast, in low humidity environments, charge injection performance is good but developing performance is poor. Developing
performance and charge injection performance are affected by the voltage (Vpp). Specifically, when Vpp decreases,
developing performance becomes worse and charge injection performance becomes better.

Execution of the initial installation mode of the Developing Assembly (each color):
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > INISET-Y
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > INISET-M
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > INISET-C
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > INISET-K
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > INISET-4
Stirring of each color developer:

COPIER > Function > INSTALL > STIR-4
Setting of the Developing Cylinder peripheral speed ratio:

COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > SL-RATIO
Display of the each color developing DC bias:

COPIER >Display > DENS > DEV-DC-Y
COPIER >Display > DENS > DEV-DC-M
COPIER >Display > DENS > DEV-DC-C
COPIER >Display > DENS > DEV-DC-K
Adjustment of the developing AC bias Vpp:

COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > ADJ-VPP
83
2. Technology
Related Error Code

ATR output error:
E020-01A8/ E020-01A9
E020-02A8/ E020-02A9
E020-03A8/ E020-03A9
E020-04A8/ E020-04A9
E020-01B8/ E020-01B9
E020-02B8/ E020-02B9
E020-03B8/ E020-03B9
E020-04B8/ E020-04B9
E020-0124/ E020-0134
E020-0224/ E020-0234
E020-0324/ E020-0334
E020-0424/ E020-0434
Primary Transfer Control

■ Basic Control
Primary transfer control refers to control to apply a primary transfer bias to the Primary Transfer Roller and transfer the toner on
the Photosensitive Drum to the ITB. Note that the process of transferring toner from the ITB to the paper is called secondary
transfer.
Image of operation
[2] [1]
[3]
No. Parts name

[1] Primary Transfer Roller
[2] ITB
[3] Photosensitive Drum
Overview
The following is an overview of the basic control in the primary transfer control.
• Apply the primary transfer bias to the Primary Transfer Roller.
• Transferability becomes unstable due to variations in resistance caused by wear of the Primary Transfer Roller,
environmental factors, such as temperature and humidity, and others.
In order to prevent this, this machine performs primary transfer ATVC (Auto Transfer Voltage Control) to calculate the optimal
voltage to apply to the roller.
• Since the conditions are not necessarily exactly the same for all of the rollers, primary transfer ATVC is performed to all
colors.
• Since the target current also changes if the process speed is changed, primary transfer ATVC is performed for each change
in speed.
84
2. Technology
• Since the ease with which current can flow changes between the state where the Primary Transfer Roller is engaged on the
ITB and the state where it is disengaged, conventional models performed primary transfer ATVC each time when performing
black and white printing after color printing.
For this machine, to perform black and white printing after performing color printing with ATVC, where all of the rollers are
engaged, ATVC is not performed in order to reduce downtime and the voltage for the black and white printing is calculated
based on the data obtained during color printing.

Setting of paper interval automatic adjustment execution interval
COPIER > Option > FNC-SW > INTROT-1
■ Primary transfer ATVC control

The transfer voltage required to obtain the target transfer current value is set in order to prevent transfer failure due to
environmental changes.
This control calculates the target transfer voltage by referring to the data.
Note that this can also be executed optionally with the following service mode.
• COPIER > Function > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX
Control description:
Measure the transfer current when two different transfer voltages are applied, and calculate the voltage required to achieve
a desired transfer current based on the measurement results.
Timing Conditions for execution

At power-on When warm-up rotation is executed at power-on
At recovery from When recovering from 8 hours or more of sleep mode
sleep mode
When a job starts When an environmental change is detected by the Environment Sensor
During a job 4C/Bk mode Each 200 sheets fed
When the accumulated printing duty ratio reaches 3000%
When ATR control is executed (Refer to “ATR Control” on page 106.)
When the transparency black band sequence is executed (Refer To “Transparency Black Band
Sequence” on page 116.)
When the black band sequence is executed (Refer to “Black Band Sequence” on page 116.)
When cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is executed (Refer to “Secondary Transfer
Outer Roller Cleaning Control” on page 93.)
4C mode When real-time multiple tone correction is executed (Refer to “Real-time Multiple Tone Correc-
tion” on page 101.)
Bk mode When the toner ejection sequence for low image ratio is executed (Refer to “Toner Ejection Se-
quence for Low Image Ratio” on page 117.)
Each 30 sheets at 1/2 speed
At job completion 4C mode When real-time multiple tone correction is executed (Refer to “Real-time Multiple Tone Correc-
tion” on page 101.)
When the accumulated number of sheets reaches 1000
Bk mode When the accumulated number of sheets reaches 1000
When ATR control is executed (Refer to “ATR Control” on page 106.)
When the toner ejection sequence for low image ratio is executed (Refer to “Toner Ejection Se-
quence for Low Image Ratio” on page 117.)
When the transparency black band sequence is executed (Refer To “Transparency Black Band
Sequence” on page 116.)
30 sheets in Bk mode at 1/2 speed
When the mode is When an environmental change is detected by the Environment Sensor
switched
When replacing the At the Drum Unit detection (new/old) (Refer to “Drum Unit Detection (New/Old)” on page 81.)
drum
When the Develop- When service mode (COPIER > Function > INSTALL > INISET-Y/M/C/K) is executed
ing Assembly is re-
placed
85
2. Technology

Execution of the primary transfer ATVC control:
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX
Display of the primary transfer current (each color):

( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > HV-STS > 1ATVC-Y
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > HV-STS > 1ATVC-M
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > HV-STS > 1ATVC-C
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > HV-STS > 1ATVC-K4
Adjustment of the primary transfer ATVC target current:

(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGK1: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current in the single color Bk
mode (at high speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGKT: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current in the color Bk mode
(at high speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TK12: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current in the single color Bk
mode (at low speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TK13: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current in the single color Bk
mode (at medium speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TK42: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current in the color Bk mode (at
low speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TK43: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current in the color Bk mode (at
medium speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGC: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for C-color (at high speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGC2: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for C-color (at low speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGC3: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for C-color (at medium
speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGY: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for Y-color (at high speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGY2: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for Y-color (at low speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGY3: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for Y-color (at medium
speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGM: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for M-color (at high speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGM2: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for M-color (at low
speed)
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 1TR-TGM3: Adjusts the primary transfer ATVC target current for M-color (at medium
speed)
Clearing of the primary transfer ATVC control history:

( Level 2 ) COPIER > Function >CLEAR > 1TR-CLR
86
2. Technology
■ Primary Transfer Bias Control

In order to transfer the toner on the Photosensitive Drum onto the ITB, the voltage calculated by the primary transfer ATVC control
is applied to the Primary Transfer Roller.
The primary transfer bias (DC), which has been generated by the HVT2 (UN17), is applied to the Primary Transfer Roller.
The bias values are corrected by using the measurement values of the Environment Sensor 1 (UN22).
UN1
DC Controller PCB
UN17
Primary Transfer/Bk Developing Charging High-Voltage PCB
DC DC DC DC
Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer

Roller (Y) Roller (M) Roller (C) Roller (Bk)
87
2. Technology
■ Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Control

The color Primary Transfer Rollers are disengaged in the single color Bk mode in order to increase the life of image formation
parts (Photosensitive Drum, ITB).
The cam mechanism provides 2 phases, which correspond to the 2 states of Bk mode and CL mode.
Furthermore, they are disengaged from all the drums by operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever. (Full disengaged)
[2] M15 [1]
[4] [3] [4] [3] [4] [3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[2]
M15
[2]
PS23
PS22
[3]
No. Name
[1] Primary Transfer Disengagement Cam
[2] Slide Plate
[3] Link Arm
[4] Primary Transfer Roller (Y, M, C)
[5] Primary Transfer Roller (Bk)
M15 Primary Transfer Disengagement Motor
PS22 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1
Primary transfer disengagement initialization operation

Operation overview:
The Primary Transfer Disengagement Cam is rotated to change the disengagement shift mode between Bk mode and the
color mode.
After initialization, the mode transitions to Bk mode of the HP state.
Color mode Bk mode

Control timing
Engagement: During color printing (Note that the color primary transfer is disengaged if the specified number of sheets or
more in Bk are printed consecutively within a mixed single job including color printing and B&W printing.)
Disengagement: Other than the above timing
88
2. Technology
Related Error Code

Error in Primary Transfer Engagement/Disengagement operation
E074-0001 (ITB HP time-out error)
E074-0002 (ITB HP time-out error)
E074-0003 (Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor error)
Status of each mode/timing to enter each mode
Mode Condition Operation status

Bk mode Only the Bk Primary Transfer Roller is engaged At standby
Detected by the Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 (PS22) While in deep sleep
At B&W printing (when image formation is
executed)
M15
CL mode All Primary Transfer Rollers are engaged At color printing (when image formation is
Detected by the Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 (PS23) executed)
At adjustment operation
M15
Full disengage- All Primary Transfer Rollers are disengaged When the ITB Pressure Release Lever is op-
ment mode erated

Setting of the color mode in the single color Bk mode at 1/2 speed:
(Level 2) COPIER > Option > FNC-SW > BK-4CSW
Secondary Transfer Control

■ Basic Control
Secondary transfer control is control that is performed when the toner that has been transferred from the Photosensitive Drum
to the ITB is then transferred to the paper.
89
2. Technology
Behavior Image
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
No. Parts name Role

1 Secondary Transfer Outer Roller As well as attracting toner on the ITB to the paper, paper is fed.
2 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Paper is fed while the tension of the ITB is maintained.
3 Separation Static Eliminator Static charge is eliminated from the paper.
4 Paper -
Overview
The following is an overview of the basic control in the secondary transfer control.
• In secondary transfer, ATVC is performed by constant current control.
• The transfer current is controlled to match the resistance value of the Secondary Transfer Roller, the paper type, the paper
feed speed, and the color mode by the constant current ATVC.
• During secondary transfer, control is performed by the voltage determined by ATVC control.
Secondary Transfer Bias Setting Value

For the voltage that is applied to the Secondary Transfer Roller, since the target current for optimal image formation varies
depending on the absolute moisture content of the environment, the paper type, and the printing color mode, the secondary
transfer voltage is determined by the secondary transfer ATVC control such that the optimal current value is obtained according
to each of the conditions.
Furthermore, since the optimal current differs depending on the process speed, the secondary transfer voltage is determined
such that the optimal transfer current is obtained depending on the process speed during image formation.

Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller:
COPIER > Function > CLEANING > 2TR-CLN
Execution of the toner application mode on the Secondary Transfer Roller:

COPIER > Function > CLEANING > TNR-COAT
Display of the environment during secondary transfer ATVC control:

COPIER > Display > MISC > ENV-TR
■ Secondary transfer ATVC control

In this machine, secondary transfer ATVC is performed by constant current control.
Different currents are applied at two points on the ITB, and the secondary transfer voltage is calculated based on the transfer
voltage of these points.
Secondary transfer is performed at the following timings.
• At each initial rotation
• When the speed is changed
• When the color is changed
90
2. Technology

Collective adjustment of the secondary transfer ATVC paper allotted voltage:
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > 2TR-OFF
Display of the secondary transfer ATVC target current:

(Level 2) COPIER > Display > HV-STS > 2ATVC
Setting of the secondary transfer bias correction table:

COPIER > Option > FNC-SW > 2TR-TBLS
Adjustment of the paper trailing edge weak bias application length

(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > B2TR-LNG: single color Bk
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > T2TR-LNG
Adjustment of the paper leading edge weak bias

(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > T2TR-H51: Heavy 5, 1st side
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > T2TR-H52: Heavy 5, 2nd side
Adjustment of the paper leading/trailing edge weak bias current
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > WK-TGTC: single color Bk, coated paper
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > WK-TGTN: single color Bk, plain paper
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > WK-TGTH1: single color Bk, Heavy 1
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > WK-TGTH2: single color Bk, Heavy 2
■ Secondary Transfer Bias Control

In order to transfer the toner from the ITB onto paper, the voltage calculated by the secondary transfer ATVC control is applied
to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
The secondary transfer bias (DC), which has been generated on the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB (UN18), is applied
The bias value is determined by the measurement value of the Environment Sensor 2 (UN50) and the paper type.
UN1
DC Controller PCB
UN18
Driving Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB
Roller
DC
Secondary Transfer
Outer Roller
■ ITB Displacement Correction Control

This control prevents ITB damage caused by ITB displacement.
This machine improves control of the amount of movement compared to conventional models by tilting the direction of moving
the back side of the Steering Roller (and Drive Roller), which direction was perpendicular to the belt surface in conventional
models.
This control is performed with the following two steps: "Steering home position search" and "ITB displacement correction".
Control description
Steering home position search
1. The position of the Steering Roller is detected by the Steering HP Sensor.
91
2. Technology
2. If the Steering Roller is lower than the steering home position, the Steering Cam is rotated in the clockwise direction by
the ITB Displacement Control Motor, or if it is higher, it is rotated counterclockwise.
The Steering Arm Plate swings due to the rotation of the Steering Cam, and tilts the Steering Roller.
3. When the steering home position is detected by the Steering HP Sensor, the ITB Displacement Control Motor stops
driving.
ITB Displacement correction

1. The ITB displacement is detected by the ITB Displacement Sensor.
2. When the ITB Drive Motor starts driving, the Steering Roller simultaneously tilts according to the amount of ITB
displacement. The ITB moves towards center in the lengthwise direction due to the ITB rotation, and the displacement
is corrected.
3. When the ITB Displacement Sensor detects that the ITB is reset to the center, the Steering Roller tilt is reset.
4. The ITB displacement is corrected and the center is maintained by repeating steps 1 to 3.
[5]
UN60
M14
[1]
[4]
PS24
[3] [2]
[2] [1]
M14
PS24
[4] [3]
No. Name Role

[1] Steering Roller (and Drive Roller) The ITB is driven.
The ITB displacement is corrected.
[2] Transfer Drive Plate (Rear) The Steering Roller is supported.
[3] Steering Arm Plate The Steering Roller is operated by engaging with the Steering Cam.
[4] Steering Cam The Steering Arm Plate is operated by rotating this.
[5] Sensor Flag The ITB position is detected by detecting the position of the Sensor Flag by the ITB
UN60 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB Displacement Sensor PCB (UN60).
M14 ITB Displacement Control Motor The rear side of the Driver Roller moves up and down in a direction tilted against
the direction perpendicular to the belt surface and correction control is performed
to maintain the belt in equilibrium.
PS24 ITB Steering Sensor The steering home position of the Drive Roller is detected. The point where the
sensor position switches is the position of the home position.
92
2. Technology
Related Error Code

ITB displacement control error:
E075-0002
E075-0003
E075-0004
E075-0005
E075-0006
E075-0103

Initial adjustment of the ITB standard position:
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > ITB-INIT
Display of the ITB standard position (B&W mode):

COPIER > Display > MISC > ITB-POS
Display of the ITB standard position (color mode):

COPIER > Display > MISC > ITB-POS2
■ ITB Cleaning
After secondary transfer, the toner that remains on the ITB is removed before the next transfer.
1. The ITB Cleaning Blade scrapes toner on the ITB.
2. The scraped toner is fed to the Waste Toner Container by the ITB Cleaning Screw.
[3]
M13
[1] [2]
No. Parts name Role

1 ITB Cleaning Screw Residual toner collected in the ITB Cleaner Unit is fed.
2 ITB Cleaning Blade Residual toner on the ITB is collected.
3 Waste Toner Ejection Mouth Ejection Mouth for toner collected on the ITB
M13 ITB Motor The ITB Cleaning Screw is driven.
Related User Mode

Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance > Clean Inside Main Unit

Setting of the ITB toner band formation interval:
(Level 2) COPIER > Option > CLEANING > ITBB-TMG
Setting of the number of transparency to execute ITB cleaning:

(Level 2) COPIER > Option > CLEANING > OHP-PTH
■ Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Cleaning Control

This machine cleans the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller in order to prevent soiling of the back of the paper.
93
2. Technology
Control timing:
• At warm-up rotation
• At last rotation
• After executing the image stabilization control (generation of patch image on the ITB)
• When service mode is executed
The secondary transfer cleaning bias, which has been generated on the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB (UN18), is applied
Residual toner on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is attached to the ITB, and then collected by the ITB Cleaning Unit.
[4] [3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
N Parts Name Roll

o.
1 Secondary Transfer Roller As well as attracting toner on the ITB to the paper, paper is fed.
2 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Paper is fed while the tension of the ITB is maintained.
3 Drive Roller The ITB is driven. The ITB displacement is corrected.
4 ITB Cleaning Blade Residual toner on the ITB is collected.
5 ITB Cleaning Screw Residual toner collected in the ITB Cleaner Unit is fed.

Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller:
COPIER > Function > CLEANING > 2TR-CLN
94
2. Technology
■ Separation
This control separates paper from the ITB by elastic force of the paper. (Curvature separation method)
In the case of thin paper which has low elastic force, the Static Eliminator removes positive potential at the back of the paper.
This reduces electrostatic absorption force of the paper so that paper can be easily separated.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
No. Parts name

1 Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
2 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
3 Separation Static Eliminator
4 Paper
95
2. Technology
Pre-exposure Control
In order to reduce ghosting due to residual charge, this machine performs pre-exposure to return the drum potential to 0V to
prevent unevenness in the primary transfer.
Note that this machine does not control the light intensity of the pre-exposure according to environmental and other factors. (The
output current can be adjusted by using service mode.)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
N Name Roll
o
1 Photosensitive Drum After a static latent image has been formed on the Photosensitive Drum, a toner image is formed with
the toner from the Developing Cylinder.
2 Residual charge Residual charge remaining on the Photosensitive Drum surface.
3 Drum Cleaning Pre-Expo- Residual charge remaining on the Photosensitive Drum surface is removed.
sure LED
4 Cleaning Screw Residual toner that has been removed by the Cleaning Blade is fed.
5 Cleaning Blade Residual toner on the Photosensitive Drum is removed.
Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure

Residual charge is removed from the Photosensitive Drum surface by emitting light from the Pre-exposure LED.
Ghost images, etc. are reduced by removing residual charge because this reduces potential differences in the charging process
of the next process.
Drum cleaning
The Cleaning Blade, which is in contact with the Drum, cleans residual toner on the Photosensitive Drum.
Next, residual toner is fed to the Waste Toner Container by the rotation of the Cleaning Screw.

Adjustment of the pre-exposure LED current for each color:
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Adjust > EXP-LED > PR-EXP-Y
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Adjust > EXP-LED > PR-EXP-M
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Adjust > EXP-LED > PR-EXP-C
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Adjust > EXP-LED > PR-EXP-K
96
2. Technology
Image Stabilization Control

■ Overview
Purpose: To control to prevent image failure due to change of the environment or deterioration of parts to ensure stabilized print
image
Various controls are performed to form patch pattern [1] on the ITB and read the patch pattern using the Registration Sensor Unit
(Rear/Front/Center) (UN47/48/49).
[1]
UN48
UN49
UN47
No. Name
[1] Patch pattern
UN47 Registration Sensor (Front)
UN48 Registration Sensor (Rear)
UN49 Registration Sensor (Center)
Patch pattern:
Y M C Bk
Patch for correction in horizontal scanning direction
Y M C Bk
Patch for correction in vertical scanning direction
97
2. Technology
■ Registration Patch Sensor Adjustment

The correction of the Registration Patch Sensor light intensity and sampling of the ITB background are performed.
Configuration of the Registration Patch Sensor

The light produced by the LED is reflected from the patch image and detected by the light-receiving element.
There are two types of waves that are P wave (regular reflection) and S wave (diffuse reflection), and the light intensity is detected
by the light-receiving element.
Registration Patch Sensor
P-wave Light intensity

LED Monitor
S-wave
Reflection
Diffused
reflection
Half Mirror
Light intensity adjustment

The light intensity of the Patch Sensor is changed sequentially and adjusted such that the P wave output is the specified value.
Sampling of the ITB background

To prevent uneven reflection in the inner circumference of the ITB, the background of the whole circumference of the ITB is
sampled by the Patch Sensor without forming patches.
The patch image that is read is compared with the sampling results of the ITB background to read the density.
Related Error Code

Patch Sensor Error:
E029-1000
E029-1001
Registration Shutter Solenoid error:

E029-6001
Related Alarm Codes

Patch Sensor error:
10-0006: Patch Sensor error 1
10-0007: Patch Sensor error 2
10-0022: Patch detection light intensity abnormal change alarm
■ D-max Control
This machine corrects changes in the D-max value due to duration and environment variation, and controls to give stable laser
output over a long period of time.*1
Control description: Forms a density patch on the ITB and controls the contrast potential during image formation by reading that.
Feedback is performed to the charging DC, development DC, and laser power setting values accompanying the changes in
contrast potential.

Adjustment of the density target values of each color by D-max control:
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > DENS > DMAX-Y
*1. Deepest density
98
2. Technology
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > DENS > DMAX-M

(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > DENS > DMAX-C
(Level 2) COPIER > Adjust > DENS > DMAX-K
Adjustment of the D-max target density of each color:

If the density of the solid part of the image is not suitable despite executing auto gradation adjustment, adjust the D-max
control target density.
( Level 2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DMX-OF-Y
( Level 2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DMX-OF-M
( Level 2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DMX-OF-C
( Level 2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DMX-OF-K
D-max/real-time multiple tone control ON/OFF during warm-up rotation:

COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > AUTO-DH
Setting of the automatic adjustment execution interval during last rotation:

COPIER > FNC-SW > INTROT-2
D-max PASCAL Control ON/OFF during auto gradation adjustment:

COPIER > Option > FNC-SW > DMX-DISP
Setting of Bk color density increase:

COPIER > Option > IMG-MCON > PSCL-TBL
Setting of the paper type to be used for auto gradation adjustment:
( Level 2) COPIER > Option > IMG-MCON > PASCL-TY
Setting of target speed for auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment):

COPIER > Option > FNC-SW > PSCL-MS
Setting of gradation adjustment data:

COPIER > Option > IMG-MCON > PASCAL
99
2. Technology
■ Color Displacement Correction Control

Read the patch formed on the ITB and correct color displacement caused by uneven exposure (skew/bent) from the Laser Scanner
Unit or uneven rotation of the drum/ITB.
Color displacement is corrected by forming a patch for color displacement on the ITB and reading the amount of color
displacement by the Patch Sensor.
1. A patch pattern (short/long) for each color is formed on the ITB.
2. This patch pattern is read by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front/Rear) (UN47/48) to detect the amount of color
displacement compared to the reference color (Y).
3. Based on the abovementioned detection result, correction is performed according to the amount of color displacement.
Y M C Bk Y M C Bk
8 Set 2 Set
Long patch pattern
Y M C Bk Y M C Bk
3Set 1Set
Short patch pattern
NOTE:
Short pattern is normally used as the patch pattern used when performing color displacement correction.
Long pattern is used only for the following cases:
• When executing Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct Color Mismatch
• When executing the warm-up rotation sequence (Refer to “Warm-up Rotation Adjustment” on page 117.)
Correction description
Type of control Correction description

Correction in horizontal Write start correction Write-start timing in horizontal scanning direction is changed.
scanning direction Overall magnification ratio correction Pixels in horizontal scanning direction is increased/reduced (at
the both edges of the image)
Correction in vertical Write start correction Write-start timing in vertical scanning direction is changed.
scanning direction Image skew correction Image data is corrected.
Related Alarm Codes

Auto registration adjustment:
34-0003

Rough adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction for each color:
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-H-K
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-H-C
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-H-M
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-H-Y
100
2. Technology
Fine adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction for each color:
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-HS-K
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-HS-C
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-HS-M
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-HS-Y
Rough adjustment of the image write start position in the vertical scanning direction for each color:
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-V-K
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-V-C
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-V-M
COPIER > Adjust > IMG-REG > REG-V-Y
■ Real-time Multiple Tone Correction

In order to always maintain an appropriate gradation performance, a patch of multiple tone correction is formed on the ITB and
LUT correction*1 is performed.
Function Features
The features of functions compared to the conventional ARCDAT control or D-half control are as follows.
• Correction control of areas of high density is possible by using the Patch Sensor.
• Since control can be performed according to various cases, it is robust against environmental changes.
• A high productivity is achieved because processing can be performed in real time without stopping the engine.
Differences Between Full Correction and Light Correction in Real-time Multiple Tone Correction
The real-time multiple tone correction in this machine is available in two types: full correction and light correction. Full correction
and light correction are the same in that a gradation patch is formed as notified by the controller and that density is notified.
The differences between full and light are as follows.
Features of full real-time multiple tone correction

• A 10-gradation patch is always formed.
• The entire lookup table is overwritten.
Features of light real-time multiple tone correction

• A patch with a smaller number of gradations is formed.
• The formed gradations are rotated.
• Part of the lookup table is overwritten.

D-max/real-time multiple tone control ON/OFF during warm-up rotation:
COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > AUTO-DH
Setting of the error diffusion correction coefficient:

(Level 2) COPIER > Option > IMG-MCON > TMC-SLCT
Setting of the real-time multiple tone correction (full/light) feedback rate:
(Level 2) COPIER > Option > IMG-MCON > FL-FB
(Level 2) COPIER > Option > IMG-MCON > INT-FB
Setting of the c tone control correction (dither):

(Level 2) COPIER > Option > IMG-MCON > DITH-FB
Setting of the real-time multiple stone control (light) execution/stop interval:

(Level 2) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > INTPPR-1
(Level 2) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > INTPPR-2
Setting of the real-time multiple tone control patch pattern:

(Level 2) COPIER > Option > IMG-MCON > PTN-INT
*1. LUT is an abbreviation of "look up table". This table maps input values to output values. Normally, the capacity of (number of entries
in) the LUT table is equal to the number of gradations. For example, if there are 256 gradations, the number of data entries in the
table is 256. By mapping input values to output values with this table in advance, numeric values can be converted by looking up
this table.
101
2. Technology
■ Control Timing List

Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment and condition of image formation parts.
Following shows the control items at each sequence.
Timing Conditions for execution ATR Real-time multi- D-max Color

Con- ple tone control Control dis-
trol Light Full place-
ment
correc-
tion
At power- Normal environment * Yes Yes
on
At recovery When 8 or more hours have elapsed * Yes Yes
from sleep
mode
When a job When an environmental change is detected Yes Yes
starts
During a 4C mode When the number of sheets fed reaches 200, or the ac- Yes Yes Yes
job cumulated duty ratio reaches 3000%
At job com- 4C mode Each 60 sheets fed Yes Yes Yes
pletion Each 1000 sheets fed Yes Yes
BK mode Each accumulated duty ratio of 2100%, or 140 sheets fed Yes
*: The behavior differs when the COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > AUTO-DH setting is enabled (the setting value is 1 or 2)
102
2. Technology
Toner Supply Control

■ Parts / Drive Configuration
Toner is supplied from the Toner Container to the Hopper Unit. The toner level in the Toner Container is detected at the same
time.
PS60, 61, 62, 63

PS64, 65, 66, 67
UN66
UN67 M9, 10, 11, 12
UN68
UN69
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4 PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
[1]
[2]
[3]
CL2, 3, 4, 5
M5, 6, 7, 8
TS5, 6, 7, 8
[4]
[5]
Parts name Role

[1], [2] Toner Stirring Plate A, B Toner in the Hopper Unit is stirred.
[3] Toner Supply Screw Toner is supplied from the Hopper Unit to the Developing Assembly.
[4], [5] Toner Feed Screw A, B Developer (toner and carrier) in the Developing Assembly is stirred and is sup-
plied to the Developing Cylinder.
PS 1, 2, 3, 4 Toner Supply Level Sensor The rotation of the Toner Supply Screw is detected and the amount of toner
supplied to the Developing Assembly is counted.
PS 60, 61, 62, 63 Bottle Rotation Sensor The rotation of the Toner Bottle is detected.
PS 64, 65, 66, 67 Bottle Position Sensor The behavior of the Toner Bottle Replacement Door Open Link is detected.
TS 1, 2, 3, 4 Hopper Toner Level Sensor Toner full in the hopper is detected.
TS 5, 6, 7, 8 ATR Sensor The ratio of developer (toner + carrier) in the Developing Assembly is detected.
UN 66, 67, 68, 69 Bottle New/Old Detection Sensor The type and state of the Toner Bottle are detected.
CL 2, 3, 4, 5 Toner Supply Clutch The Toner Supply Screw rotation is turned on/off.
M 9, 10, 11, 12 Bottle Motor The Toner Bottle is rotated. The Toner Bottle Replacement Door is opened.
M 5, 6, 7, 8 Developing Motor The screw and the Developing Cylinder in the Developing Assembly are driven.
103
2. Technology
■ Opening/Closing of Toner Container Shutter

The Toner Container Shutter is opened or closed.
Toner Head Assembly
Toner Container
Claw
Shutter
Lever
■ Bottle State Detection

Purpose: To detect the state of the Toner Container
Detection timing:
• At power-on
• When the Toner Bottle Exchange Door is closed
• At recovery from sleep mode
The Bottle New/Old Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN66/UN67/UN68/UN69) detects the state of the bottle from the Toner Container
memory [1].
UN66 [1]
UN67
UN68
UN69
104
2. Technology
Screen display:
A message shown below is displayed according to the condition detected from the memory.
Message Condition
---- The correct Toner Container is loaded.
Wrong cartridge color may be inserted. The incorrect color Toner Container is inserted.
Cartridge with wrong item no. may be inserted. The Toner Container with wrong item no. is inserted.
Toner cartridge may be malfunctioning. The Toner Cartridge which may be malfunctioning is inserted.
Related Alarm Codes

Toner memory detection error (each color):
10-0091: Y
10-0092: M
10-0093: C
10-0094: Bk

Display of each color Toner Container ID:
COPIER > Display > MISC > TNRB-IDY
COPIER > Display > MISC > TNRB-IDM
COPIER > Display > MISC > TNRB-IDC
COPIER > Display > MISC > TNRB-IDK
Output of the Toner Container ID report:

COPIER > Function > MISC-P > TNRB-PRT
105
2. Technology
■ Toner Container Detection

This machine detects the presence/absence of the Toner Bottle by checking whether the cover is opened or closed.
The bottle cover employs a mechanism where the bottle cover closes when a bottle is inserted. Therefore, the cover closed state
is judged as "Bottle present" and the cover open state is judged as "Bottle absent".
The bottle cover opened/closed state is detected by the Bottle Cover Open/Close Switches (Y/M/C/K) (SW11/SW12/SW13/
SW14).
NOTE:
The bottle cover is not normally opened unless theBottle Empty state occurs.
Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch

(SW11/ SW12/ SW13/ SW14)
Bottle [OFF]
Bottle [ON]
Related Error Code

Toner Bottle Inner Door open detection error:
E025-01C0
E025-02C0
E025-03C0
E025-04C0
■ ATR Control
ATR control (Auto Toner Replenishment) supplies toner to the Developing Assembly from the Hopper Unit such that the developer
(toner + carrier) in the Developing Assembly has an ideal ratio.
Adjustment timing/conditions:
At job completion: For each accumulated duty of 2100%, or each 140 sheets fed
During a job: For each accumulated duty of 3000%, or each 200 sheets fed
ATR control is performed using the following steps.
1. Based on the toner supply count, the supply amount is calculated.
2. Based on detection data from the ATR Sensor (TS5/6/7/8), the toner supply amount is corrected to keep TD ratio in the
Developing Assembly constant (toner ratio in the developer).
3. A patch is formed at a specified timing, and the ATR target correction amount is determined based on the detection
data.
The toner density of each color is corrected to the target value and is controlled to achieve an appropriate toner supply to
the Developing Unit. The DC Controller PCB determines toner supply amount by the following 2 data:
• ATR Sensor output value
• Toner supply count value
The DC Controller PCB turns ON the Bottle Motors (Y/M/C/K) (M9/10/11/12) when it determines that toner supply is
necessary.
This supplies the specified amount of toner to the Developing Unit.
106
2. Technology
M9, 10, 11, 12
CL2, 3, 4, 5
M5, 6, 7, 8 TS5, 6, 7, 8
UN1
DC Controller PCB
Main Controller PCB
Developing Assembly supply count
Video Count Value
ATR Sensor result
Related Error Code

ATR output error:
E020-01A8 / -01A9 / -01B8 / -01B9
E020-02A8 / -02A9 / -02B8 / -02B9
E020-03A8 / -03A9 / -03B8 / -03B9
E020-04A8 / -04A9 / -04B8 / -04B9
E020-0124 / -0134
Developing Motor error:

E021-0100
E021-0200
E021-0300
E021-0400
Developing Screw rotation detection error:

E021-0120
E021-0220
E021-0320
E021-0420

Entry of the ATR Sensor (each color) control voltage:
COPIER > Adjust > DENS > CONT-Y
COPIER > Adjust > DENS > CONT-M
COPIER > Adjust > DENS > CONT-C
COPIER > Adjust > DENS > CONT-K
Entry of the toner density target value for each color:

COPIER > Adjust > DENS > REF-Y
COPIER > Adjust > DENS > REF-M
COPIER > Adjust > DENS > REF-C
COPIER > Adjust > DENS > REF-K
107
2. Technology
Setting of the ATR Sensor (each color) gain value offset:

( Level 2 ) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > DVTGT-Y
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > DVTGT-M
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > DVTGT-C
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > DVTGT-K
Adjustment of the accumulated value interval for ATR patch video count:
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > PCHINT-V
Setting of the ATR patch formation interval:

( Level 2 ) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > PCHINT-1
Adjustment of the ATR control each color target value:

( Level 2 ) COPIER > Adjust > DENS > P-TG-Y
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Adjust > DENS > P-TG-M
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Adjust > DENS > P-TG-C
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Adjust > DENS > P-TG-K
Display of each color TD ratio history during ATR control:

( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-Y-H
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-M-H
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-C-H
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-K-H
Display of patch image density:

( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-S-Y
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-S-M
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-S-C
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-S-K
Display of ATR control each color patch target density:

( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > D-Y-TRGT
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > D-M-TRGT
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > D-C-TRGT
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Display > DENS > D-K-TRGT
Display of patch image density history:

( Level 2) COPIER > Display > DENS > DS-S-Y-H
( Level 2) COPIER > Display > DENS > DS-S-M-H
( Level 2) COPIER > Display > DENS > DS-S-C-H
( Level 2) COPIER > Display > DENS > DS-S-K-H
Stirring of each color developer:

COPIER > Function > INSTALL > STIR-Y
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > STIR-M
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > STIR-C
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > STIR-K
Display of each color developer density:

COPIER > Display > DENS > SGNL-Y
COPIER > Display > DENS > SGNL-M
COPIER > Display > DENS > SGNL-C
COPIER > Display > DENS > SGNL-K
Display of each color developer density variation rate:

COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-Y
COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-M
COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-C
COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-K
■ Toner Supply Control

Toner is supplied from the Toner Container to the Hopper Unit.
This machine uses a Toner Container that has an accordion mechanism at the leading edge. The drive of the Bottle Motor rotates
the Toner Bottle and operates the accordion section. At that time, air pressure is used to supply toner to the Hopper Unit.
108
2. Technology
Expansion Contraction
Small toner supply mouth
M9, 10, 11, 12
Shrunk PS64, 65, 66, 67
Main Controller PCB
Video Count Value

TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
UN1
DC Controller PCB
Developing Assembly
supply count
ATR Sensor result

CL2, 3, 4, 5
TS5, 6, 7, 8
M5, 6, 7, 8
Control timing:
When toner supply is determined necessary by the result of ATR control, toner is supplied.

In this machine, Toner Bottle Motors are arranged for each color to perform toner supply.
The Bottle Motor (Y/M/C/K) (M9/M10/M11/M12) is driven to supply the toner with the amount as determined based on the
Toner Density Sensor (TS5/6/7/8) and video count output value.
In order to ensure that the bottle rotation speed does not vary greatly as the amount of toner inside the bottle is being reduced,
the bottle rotation is controlled by using the Bottle Rotation Sensor (Y/M/C/K) (PS60/61/62/63) and the Bottle Position Sensor
(Y/M/C/K) (PS64/65/66/67).
When toner is supplied, the Toner Supply Level Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (PS1/PS2/PS3/PS4) is started while it is turned ON.
Driving the Bottle Motor (Y/M/C/K) (M9/10/11/12) rotates the Toner Bottle, causing the flag of the Toner Supply Sensor to
drop to the cut-off part of the Toner Bottle as shown in the figure below, which in turn switches OFF the sensor. When the
flag then moves away from the cut-off part of the Toner Supply Sensor, the sensor is switched ON.
When the Toner Supply Sensor is OFF, toner for one time is supplied to the Developing Assembly.
109
2. Technology
Flag Flag
< ON > < OFF >
Toner Bottle Toner Bottle
Toner Supply
Toner Supply
Sensor
Sensor
Cut-off
Cut-off
Toner Supply Control
Parts name
[1] Flag
[2] Toner Bottle
[3] Cut-off
Bottle semicircule
Bottle Motor
Toner Supply Sensor

ON
Toner Supply Sensor
OFF
Related Error Code

Toner Bottle Motor error:
E025-0100: Y
E025-0200: M
E025-0300: C
E025-0400: Bk
Hopper Motor error:

E025-0150 / 0151
E025-0250 / 0251
E025-0350 / 0351
E025-0450 / 0451
Each color Developing Assembly supply error:

E027-0100: Y
E027-0200: M
E027-0300: C
E027-0400: Bk

Setting of the Toner Container used-up mode:
COPIER > Option > CUSTOM > USEUPTNR
Each color toner supply counter:

COPIER > Counter > MISC > T-SPLY-Y
COPIER > Counter > MISC > T-SPLY-M
COPIER > Counter > MISC > T-SPLY-C
COPIER > Counter > MISC > T-SPLY-K
110
2. Technology
■ Toner Level Detection

Toner Level Detection outputs alarms and messages with "Bottle Remaining Toner Low", "Bottle Empty", or "Output Stop"
depending on the detection result.
Condition Bottle Remaining Toner Low Bottle Empty Output Stop Bottle Replacement
Completion
Toner Status
Toner Container: 0 to 40% *1 *2 Toner Container: 0% Toner Container: 0% Toner Container: 100%
Hopper: 100% Hopper: 100% Hopper: 0% Hopper: 100%
Alam Code Toner Container UGW-generated Toner Bottle empty alarm None Toner Bottle replace-
prior delivery alarm *3 ment notification alarm
alarm
10-0017 to 10-0001 to 10-0004 10-0401 to 10-0404 10-0100(00000071 to
10-0020 74)
10-0100(00000181 to
184)
Message (ma- None XXXX toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the toner car- None
chine opera- Replacement is not (XXXX) tridge. (XXXX)
tion) yet needed. *4
Detection tim- The timing varies The timing varies When the sensor output re- After the total number of When Toner Bottle re-
ing depending on depending on the sult is changed from H to L printed sheets reaches placement is completed
the service mode service mode set- approximately 800 since
setting. *1 ting. 2* "Bottle Empty" was de-
tected. * 5
Detected to Toner supply count Hopper Toner Level Sensor Toner supply count Bottle New/Old Detec-
(location) (TS1 to 4) tion Sensor (UN66 to
69)
Whether the No*6 No*6 Yes Yes No*6
Toner Con-
tainer can be
removed
XXXX = Yellow / Magenta / Cyan / Black

*1: The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes (setting of the Toner Container prior delivery alarm
notification timing). (0 - 40 % : The default value varies depending on the country.)
• COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T-DLV-BK (Bk)
• COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T-DLV-CL (CL)
• COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T-DLV2CL (low-capacity bottle CL)
*2: The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes (setting of the threshold value for displaying the Toner
Container remaining toner warning). (0 - 40 % : The default value varies depending on the country.)
• COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > T-LW-BK (Bk)
• COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > T-LW-CL (CL)
• COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > T-LW2CL (low-capacity bottle CL)
*3: The message is generated by UGW and displayed on the UGW portal screen. This is not displayed on this machine.
*4: Whether to display the toner replacement preparation message can be changed in the following service mode (setting of the
ON/OFF of toner warning display).
• COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > TNR-WARN
*5: The exact number of printed sheets differs depending on the usage environment and usage situation.
*6: It is possible to replace forcibly by executing the following Settings/Registration.
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance > Replace Specified Toner
Whether to display or hide the "Replace Specified Toner" screen can be changed in the following service mode.
• COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > T-CRG-SW
■ Detection of Completion of Toner Replacement

When the Toner Bottle is replaced, the completion of the replacement work is detected.
When the completion of the replacement work is detected, the toner supply counter is reset.
111
2. Technology
Detection timing:
When a replacement of Toner Container is detected
Detected to (location):
Bottle New/Old Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN66 to 69)

Setting of the Toner Container counter display:
(Level 2) COPIER > Option > USER > TNRB-SW
Related Error Code

Toner Bottle Inner Door open detection error for each color:
E025-01C0: Y
E025-02C0: M
E025-03C0: C
E025-04C0: Bk
Related Alarm Codes

Toner Bottle:
10-0100-0071
10-0100-0072
10-0100-0073
10-0100-0074
Toner Bottle (ejection counter):

10-0100-0081
10-0100-0082
10-0100-0083
10-0100-0084
Unidentified Toner Bottle:

10-0100-0181
10-0100-0182
10-0100-0183
10-0100-0184
CAUTION:
Note that the toner replacement completion alarm is not generated under the following conditions:
• The DC Controller PCB is replaced, and then a new Toner Bottle is installed before the power is turned ON.
• The DC Controller PCB is replaced, the power is turned ON with the Toner Bottle removed or the Front Door opened,
and then a new Toner Bottle is installed.
112
2. Technology
NOTE:
When the following service mode is set, the toner container counter and premature removal counter are displayed on the counter
check screen on the control panel.
• ( Level2 ) COPIER > Option > USER > TNRB-SW
Setting value
0: Hide
1: Display (Toner Container counter 70/870s)
2: Display (Toner Container counter 70/870s and ejection counter)
3: Display (Toner Container counter 70/870s and 180s)
113
2. Technology
Waste Toner Feed Control

Waste toner in the Drum Unit and ITB Cleaning Unit is fed to the Waste Toner Container.
M1
[2]
M4
[3]
[1]
M13
M5,6,7,8
M26
SW10
UN75
M45
[4]
[5]
[6]
Parts name Role

[1] ITB Cleaning Screw Collected toner is fed to the ITB Cleaning Unit.
[2] Drum Unit Cleaning Screw Residual toner in the Drum Unit is fed.
[3] [4] Waste Toner Feed Screw Toner collected from the ITB Unit/Drum Unit is fed to the Waste Toner
Container.
[5] Waste Toner Screw The waste toner inside the Waste Toner Container is made uniformly even.
M13 ITB Motor The ITB Cleaning Screw is driven.
M1 Drum Motor (YMC) To drive the Y/M/C Drum Unit Cleaning Screw.
M4 Drum Motor (Bk) To drive the Bk Drum Unit Cleaning Screw.
M26 Waste Toner Feed Motor To drive the Waste Toner Feed Screw.
M45 Recycle Toner Stirring Motor To make the waste toner inside the Waste Toner Container uniformly even.
UN75 Waste Toner Sensor PCB Waste Toner Container full level detection
SW10 Waste Toner Container Detection Switch Waste Toner Container detection
Related Error Code

Waste Toner Stirring/Feed Motor error:
E013-0001
E013-0002
114
2. Technology
Drum Motor error:

E012-0101
E012-0401
ITB Motor error:

E012-1000
E012-1001
■ Waste Toner Container Detection

The Waste Toner Container Detection Switch (SW10) is used to detect the presence/absence of the Waste Toner Container.
SW10
■ Waste Toner Container Full Level Detection

Toner level accumulated in the Waste Toner Container is detected.
M45
UN75
[ UN75 = ON ] [ UN75 = OFF ]
UN1
DC Controller PCB
Video count
Number of sheets
Detection description Prior delivery alarm/Waste Toner Container Waste Toner Container full
preparation warning *1
Message (machine opera- Waste toner is near full. (Replacement not yet Replace the waste toner container. (Host machine is
tion) needed.) stopped.)
Detection timing When the output result of the Waste Toner Sen- When toner has supplied to the Developing Assembly a
sor PCB (UN75) changes certain number of times after the prior delivery alarm/
Waste Toner Container preparation warning (Converted
number of prints: approx. 4700 sheets *2)
Detected to (location) Waste Toner Sensor PCB (UN75) Detected by number of supplies
Alarm Codes 11-0010 11-0001
*1: The Waste Toner Container preparation warning message can be set to be displayed or hidden using (Lv. 1) COPIER >
OPTION > DSPLY-SW > WT-WARN.
*2: The exact number of printed sheets differs depending on the usage environment and usage situation.
115
2. Technology
Related Alarm Codes

Waste toner alarm:
11-0001: Waste toner alarm
11-0010: Near-full state of the Waste Toner Container
■ Detection of Completion of Waste Toner Replacement

The completion of Waste Toner Container replacement is detected by the following timing/conditions.
Item Details
Detection timing When the Waste Toner Sensor PCB (UN75) turns ON while "preparation warning" or "full" is detected
*
Parts counter Automatically cleared
*: In the following cases, the parts counter is not automatically cleared and thus you must clear it manually.
• Replacement while "preparation warning" or "full" is not detected
• Replacement while the power is off
Other Controls
■ Special Controls
This machine has the following sequences as the special sequence.
Drum Fusing Band

Black Band Sequence Developing Discharge Sequence
Transparency Sequence
Solid Black Band Solid Color Band (Y/M/C/Bk)
● Black Band Sequence

In order to prevent flipping of the blade of the ITB Cleaning Blade, a 10 mm toner band (Bk) is supplied to the blade in the vertical
scanning direction to reduce the friction force in areas of sliding.
Control timing: Perform by changing the frequency according to the ITB duration and moisture content (environment data).
Control timing Details

During a job Each 200 sheets
Until reaching 50,000 sheets after replacement of the ITB, every 60 sheets in a high temperature and high
humidity environment
At job completion Each 140 sheets
Until reaching 50,000 sheets after replacement of the ITB, every 60 sheets in a high temperature and high
humidity environment

Changing of the black band sequence frequency:
COPIER > Option > CLEANING > ITBB-TMG
● Transparency Black Band Sequence

Transparency is coated in surfactant, and if a large amount of transparencies passes through the printer, the surfactant adheres
to the ITB. In order to prevent this, a 10 mm-wide Bk patch is formed on the ITB to remove the surfactant together with toner.
116
2. Technology
Control timing
During a job: Each 10 sheets of transparency
At job completion: Each 5 sheets of transparency

Setting of the number of transparency to execute ITB cleaning
(Level 2) COPIER > Option > CLEANING > OHP-PTH
● Toner Ejection Sequence for Low Image Ratio

If printing is performed successively with a low image ratio, the developing performance may be degraded. To prevent this error,
an adequate amount of toner based on the average image ratio for each color (width = A4, length = a solid color band according
to the deteriorated toner amount) is transferred to the ITB.
Conditions for execution

When the average image ratio per sheet reaches 1% or less
Control timing
During last rotation after the job is completed, or 60 seconds after the copy job starts

Setting of the image ratio for executing the color toner ejection:
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > DELV-THY
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > DELV-THM
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > DELV-THC
( Level 2 ) COPIER > Option > IMG-DEV > DELV-THK
● Drum Fusion Band Sequence

In order to prevent the toner, etc. from fusing onto the drum, a toner band of 10 mm is formed on the ITB depending on the
environment data (temperature/humidity) and usage conditions.
● Toner Band Control Sequence When Drum Stopped

If a new ITB is stopped for a long period of time while it is in contact with the Photosensitive Drum, it adversely affects the drum
surface and can cause white lines on the image.
In order to prevent this symptom and protect the surface of the drum, a toner band is formed when the ITB is stopped during a
period from the ITB's first use until 300,000 sheets are printed.
■ Warm-up Rotation Adjustment

Warm-up rotation is an operation to check the status of sensors, motors, and others, when the power is turned on, at recovery
from sleep mode, or at jam removal.
According to the conditions, warm-up rotation is performed.
Note that warm-up rotation adjustment is not performed when the state is "no Waste Toner Container", "waste toner full", or "no
toner".

Setting of additional execution at warm-up rotation at the first power-on:
(Level 2) COPIER > Option > CLEANING > DRMR-MNG
117
2. Technology
■ Behavior when color printing is limited or there is no color toner

If an error occurs caused by the Y/M/C Developing Assembly or a Y/M/C toner runs out, this machine ensures that black and
white printing and copying are allowed without stopping the entire printing function.
Applicable Error Codes

• E012-0101
• E020-0XA8 / 0XA9 / 0XB8 / 0XB9 (X : Y = 1, M = 2, C = 3)
• E021-XXXX (ALL)
• E025-XXXX (ALL)
• E027-XXXX (ALL)
NOTE:
When color printing is limited or there is no color toner, the following Settings/Registration menu cannot be executed:
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct Color Tone Settings > Auto Correct
Color Tone
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Correct Shading
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance > Clean Inside Main Unit
118
2. Technology
Fixing System
Overview
■ Features
This machine uses an on-demand fixing method.
[7]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Fixing Inlet Guide [5] Separation Guide
[2] Pressure Roller [6] Inner Delivery Roller
[3] Fixing Film [7] Fixing Delivery Roller
[4] Fixing Heater
1. Energy saving
Power consumption during standby is reduced by quick startup in low heat capacity
2. Higher speed
60 ppm in both B&W and color is enabled by using new toner and highly heat conductive elastic film
■ Specifications
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Fixing speed 60 ppm machine
• 264 mm/s: Paper weight (52 to 105 g/m2)
• 132 mm/s: Paper weight (129 to 300 g/m2), coated paper
50/40 ppm machine

35 ppm machine
119
2. Technology
Heater Ceramic Heater
The Main Heater (heat distribution: high at center) and the Sub Heater (heat distribution: high at edges) are
individually driven. The heater activation rate changes according to the paper size.
Purpose: To control temperature increase at the edge
Control temperature Target temperature at printing (Plain Paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2))
60 ppm machine: 162 to 191 deg C
50/40 ppm machine: 157 to 183 deg C
35 ppm machine: 145 to 166 deg C
Detection of temper- By Main Thermistor and Sub Thermistor
ature
Protection function Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor
When an error is detected, power supply to the Fixing Heater is shut down.
Thermoswitch
Rated operating temperature: 250 +/- 7 deg C
New part detection Yes (Fixing Film Unit only)
Life detection None
TH2 [2]
TH1
PS30
PS37
PS31
[1]
PS32 TH2
TP1
H1
[3]
M27
PS32 FM5
PS31 FM6
No. Name Function/Method

[1] Film Unit A toner image on paper is fixed by applying heat/pressure.
[2] Pressure Roller
120
2. Technology
No. Name Function/Method

[3] Shutter Opens and operates at seven different positions according to the size of
paper to be fed.
H1 Fixing Heater Ceramic Heater
TH1 Main Thermistor
Fixing Heater (Center) This is engaged with Heater.
Temperature is controlled and abnormal temperature increase is detected.
Fixing Film (Center) This is engaged with the inside surface of Film.
Fixing Heater (Front Edge) This is engaged with Heater.
Fixing Heater (Rear Edge) This is engaged with Heater.
TH2 Sub Thermistor
Fixing Film (Front Edge) This is engaged with the inside of the film (non paper feed area).
Temperature Control, Abnormal Temperature Rise Detection, Edge Tem-
perature Detection/Cooling Control
Fixing Film (Rear Edge) This is engaged with the inside of the film (non paper feed area).
Temperature Control, Abnormal Temperature Rise Detection, Edge Tem-
perature Detection/Cooling Control
TP1 Thermoswitch Heater non contact type
AC power supply is shut down at detection of a failure.
PS30 Fixing Pressure Sensor Detect the engagement/disengagement status of the Film Unit
PS31 Shutter HP Sensor Detect the home position of the shutter
PS32 Shutter Position Sensor Detect the position of the shutter
PS37 Inner Delivery Sensor Jam Detection
Overview of Fixing Temperature Control

Fixing
temperature
STBY INTR PRNT
Flying start Startup During-print Sheet-t

control (warm-up control o-sheet
temperature rotation) temperature control
control temperature
temperature
Time
Command for Command for

flying start print start
121
2. Technology
Standby temperature control

Fixing
temperature
STBY INTR PRNT
Flaying start
control
temperature
15 sec Time
Command for
flying start
■ Flying start temperature control

Purpose:
To execute temperature control of the Fixing Unit before starting a job in order to reduce time to print the first sheet (FPOT).
Startup conditions:
• When pressing a numeric key on Control Panel
• When pressing a software key on Touch Panel
• When recovering from sleep mode to standby mode
Starts up the machine until it reaches the designated temperature and then controls the temperature.

Set whether to execute flying start (Service Mode: Lv. 2)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FLYING
122
2. Technology
Print temperature control

Fixing
temperature
STBY INTR PRNT
Startup During print Sheet-to

(warm-up control -sheet
rotation) temperature control
control temperature
temperature
Time
Command for Command for

Flying start print start
■ Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control

To increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing once the print-start command is received.
■ Print temperature control

This is a control to set an optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or hot offset. Temperature is controlled to maintain
the specified target temperature during printing.
Setting the target temperature

Determined according to the time which elapsed from when fixing temperature control (including standby control) finished
last time and the fixing temperature when startup control started.
Temperature control during printing

Temperature is controlled to maintain the target temperature according to the detected temperature of the Main Thermistor
(Fixing Heater (Center) and Fixing Film (Center)).
■ Paper interval temperature control

The paper interval temperature is decreased to prevent temperature increase when the paper interval becomes wider than a
normal condition*1.
Paper Interval Temperature = Target temperature during printing - (4 to 18 deg C)
*1:
• At paper interval widening
An interval between the first side and the second side at 2-sided printing
• At down sequence
At execution of controls (ATR control, registration control, ATVC control)

Display the detected temperature of the thermistor
• COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-C (displays Fixing Film temperature)
• COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E (displays temperature at center of Fixing Heater)
• COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E2 (displays temperature at front edge of Fixing Heater)
• COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E3 (displays temperature at rear edge of Fixing Heater)
• COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-F (displays temperature at front edge of Fixing Film)
• COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-R (displays temperature at rear edge of Fixing Film)
123
2. Technology
Set the fixing control temperature

• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TEMP-TBL (Plain paper 1)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL7 (Plain paper 2)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB04 (Plain paper 3)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TEMP-TBL2 (Heavy paper 1)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TEMP-TB02 (Heavy paper 4)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TEMP-TB01 (Thin paper 1)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TEMP-TBL5 (Thin paper 2)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL9 (1-sided coated paper 1)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB10 (1-sided coated paper 2)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-T010 (2-sided coated paper 3)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB11 (Recycled paper 1)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-T011 (Recycled paper 2)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-T012 (Recycled paper 3)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL6 (Envelope)
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL8 (Transparency)
Down sequence control

■ Down sequence when small-size paper is fed
Purpose:
To prevent fixing offset and deterioration of the Fixing Film by controlling temperature increase at a non paper feed area at
continuous printing of small-size paper (paper with the width-direction length of A4R or less)
Startup conditions:
When the detected temperature of the Main Thermistor (front/rear edge of the Fixing Heater) and Sub Thermistor (front/rear edge
of the Fixing Film) during printing is at or below the designated temperature
Operation:
The paper interval is increased to lower the temperature and adjust it slightly below the target temperature for normal printing.
Model The content inside the parentheses after paper type is paper weight (g/m2) Print speed (ppm)
60 ppm ma- Thin paper 2 (52 to 59) / Thin paper 1 (60 to 63) 14 to 4
chine Plain paper 1 (64 to 75) / Plain paper 2 (76 to 90) / Recycled paper 1 (64 to 75) / Recycled
paper 2 (76 to 90) Color paper (64 to 81) / Pre-punched paper (64 to 81) / Washi (JPN paper)
(93)
Plain paper 3 (91 to 105) / Recycled paper 3 (91 to 105) / Bond paper (80 to 99) / Tracing
paper (64 to 81) / Tab paper 1 (91 to 105)
Heavy paper 1 (106 to 128) / Tab paper 2 (106 to 128) 18 to 4
Heavy paper 2 (129 to 150) / Heavy paper 3 (151 to 163) / Label paper (118 to 180) / Tab 11 to 2
paper 3 (129 to 150) / Letterhead (106 to 163)
Heavy paper 4 (164 to 180) / Heavy paper 5 (181 to 220) / Postcard / 4 on 1 Postcard (164
to 220) / Tab paper 4 (151 to 220)
Heavy paper 6 (221 to 256) / Heavy paper 7 (257 to 300)
1-sided coated paper 1 (106 to 163) / 2-sided coated paper 1 (106 to 163)
1-sided coated paper 2 (164 to 220) / 1-sided coated paper 3 (221 to 256) / 2-sided coated
paper 2 (164 to 220) / 2-sided coated paper 3 (221 to 256)
Transparency (121 to 220)
Envelope
50/40 ppm ma- Thin paper 2 (52 to 59) / Thin paper 1 (60 to 63) 18 to 4
chine
124
2. Technology
Model The content inside the parentheses after paper type is paper weight (g/m2) Print speed (ppm)
50/40 ppm ma- Plain paper 1 (64 to 75) / Plain paper 2 (76 to 90) / Recycled paper 1 (64 to 75) / Recycled 18 to 4
chine paper 2 (76 to 90) Color paper (64 to 81) / Pre-punched paper (64 to 81) / Washi (JPN paper)
(93)
Heavy paper 1 (106 to 128) / Tab paper 2 (106 to 128)
to 220) / Tab paper 4 (151 to 220)
Envelope
35 ppm ma- Thin paper 2 (52 to 59) / Thin paper 1 (60 to 63) 12 to 4
chine Plain paper 1 (64 to 75) / Plain paper 2 (76 to 90) / Recycled paper 1 (64 to 75) / Recycled
paper 2 (76 to 90) Color paper (64 to 81) / Pre-punched paper (64 to 81) / Washi (JPN paper)
(93)
Heavy paper 1 (106 to 128) / Tab paper 2 (106 to 128)
to 220) / Tab paper 4 (151 to 220)
Envelope

Set temperature to start down sequence when feeding small-size paper
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD > FX-D-TMP
■ Down sequence when switching paper size

Purpose:
During continuous printing, when a succeeding sheet with a wider width than a preceding sheet is fed, temperature at the non
paper feed area increases, and it may cause fixing offset and wrinkles, etc. This down sequence controls temperature increase
at the non paper feed area.
Non-feeding area
Film
A4R A4
Non-feeding area
125
2. Technology
Startup conditions:
When switching to paper that is wider than the preceding sheet while printing and the detected temperature of the Main Thermistor
(front/rear edge of the Fixing Heater) and Sub Thermistor (front/rear edge of the Fixing Film) at that time exceeds the designated
temperature
Operation:
The paper interval is increased to decrease temperature, and feeding the succeeding sheet and power supply to the Heater are
stopped.
Termination condition:
This down sequence is terminated at the point when any of the following conditions is satisfied.
• When the detected temperature of the Main Thermistor (front/rear edge of the Fixing Heater) and Sub Thermistor (front/rear
edge of the Fixing Film) is at or below the designated temperature
• When specified time has elapsed after the preceding sheet passed the fixing nip
Fixing Film Edge Cooling Control

Temperature at the edge of the film rises during continuous printing. Excessive temperature rise leads to film deterioration, so it
enters down sequence when printing small-size paper (paper with the width-direction length of A4R or less).
In the event that the film temperature exceeds the designated temperature (Main Thermistor; front/rear edge of the Fixing Heater,
Sub Thermistor; front/rear edge of the Fixing Film) when printing paper with the width-direction length of A4R or larger to A3 or
smaller, temperature increase is controlled by ventilating and cooling the film from the fan provided near the Fixing Assembly.
Unlike down sequence, there is no reduction in throughput because this control is performed while continuing to print.
Shutter
M27
PS32 FM5
PS31 FM6
Direction of movement
PS31 Shutter PS32
M27
A4-R LTR-R B4 EXE 8K LTR A4
A shutter is provided in the vent, which opens and operates at seven different positions according to the size of paper to be fed.
This enables air to be blown to the most suitable area of the film.
Film Unit Engagement/Disengagement Control

The Film Unit is disengaged from the Pressure Roller under a specific condition in order to prevent deformation of the Fixing Film/
Pressure Roller due to heat and pressure that arise when the drive of the Pressure Roller stops, and to improve jam removability.
126
2. Technology
Execution condition/timing (engagement):
Sensor Flag PS30

Cam
M21
Pressure Plate
Film Unit Pressure Roller
Engaged
• When the unit is disengaged at power-on

• At recovery after jam removal
• When closing the Front Cover/Right Cover
Execution condition/timing (disengagement):
Cam PS30
M21
Sensor Flag
Pressure Plate
Film Unit Pressure Roller
Disengaged
• When turning OFF the power

• At occurrence of a jam
• At occurrence of an error
Related Error Code

E009 (Film Unit engagement/disengagement error)
• E009-0000: Engagement error
• E009-0001: Disengagement error
• E009-0002: Engagement error (it is highly possible that grease is scattered on the surface of the cam)
Fixing Unit Detection

At power-on/recovery from sleep mode/closing of the cover, the Thermistor connection signal is input to the DC Controller to
detect the Fixing Unit.
When it is judged that the Fixing Unit is absent, error code: E004-0000 is displayed and operations stop.
127
2. Technology
Detection of New Fixing Film Unit

The Fixing Memory PCB (UN79) detects whether the Fixing Film Unit is new at power-on/recovery from sleep mode/closing of
the cover.
When a new part is detected, the parts counter (COPIER > COUNTER> DRBL-1 > FX-UP-FR) is cleared and the Fixing Film
Unit replacement completion alarm (alarm code: 43-0076) is generated.
CAUTION:
When the Fixing Memory PCB cannot be detected, the following screen is displayed on the Control Panel.
At that time, alarm code 06-0012 is generated.
Protection function
Code Description Clearing of
error
E001 Detection of abnormal high temperature
0001 The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a high temperature error. Required*1
0002 The Fixing Thermistor (Front) detected a high temperature error. Required*1
0003 The Fixing Thermistor (Rear) detected a high temperature error. Required*1
0004 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Middle) detected a high temperature error. Required*1
0005 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Front) detected a high temperature error. Required*1
0006 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Rear) detected a high temperature error. Required*1
0007 The Fixing Thermistor detected a high temperature error by hardware detection. Required*1
E002 Detection of abnormal low temperature during startup
0001 After the Fixing Heater was turned ON, the Fixing Main Thermistor detected no temperature in- Required*1
crease.
0002 Startup control was not completed although 60 sec had passed. Required*1
0003 After the Fixing Heater was turned ON, the Fixing Main Thermistor detected error in temperature Required*1
increase.
0004 After the Fixing Heater was turned ON, the Fixing Thermistor (Front) detected error in temperature Required*1
increase.
0005 After the Fixing Heater was turned ON, the Fixing Thermistor (Rear) detected error in temperature Required*1
increase.
0006 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Middle) detected no temperature increase. Required*1
0007 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Front) detected no temperature increase. Required*1
0008 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Rear) detected no temperature increase. Required*1
0009 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Middle) detected error in temperature increase. Required*1
0010 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Front) detected error in temperature increase. Required*1
128
2. Technology
Code Description Clearing of

error
E002 0011 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Rear) detected error in temperature increase. Required*1
E003 Detection of low temperature
0001 The Fixing Main Thermistor detected an abnormally low temperature during print control. Required*1
0002 The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) detected an abnormally low temperature during print control. Required*1
0003 The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) detected an abnormally low temperature during print control. Required*1
0004 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Middle) detected an abnormally low temperature during print control. Required*1
0005 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Front) detected an abnormally low temperature during print control. Required*1
0006 The Fixing Film Thermistor (Rear) detected an abnormally low temperature during print control. Required*1
0007 An error in temperature difference between the Fixing Film Thermistor (Front) and (Rear) was de- Required*1
tected during print control.
E004 Detection of error in the Fixing Heater drive circuit
0000 Open circuit of the Fixing Thermistor or connector disconnection was detected. Not required
0001 Welding of the fixing relay on the AC Driver PCB was detected. Not required
E009 Detection of error in fixing engagement/disengagement
0000 The Fixing Pressure Sensor did not detect ON status within 5 sec after the start of pressure appli- Not required
cation operation for fixing.
0001 The Fixing Pressure Sensor did not detect OFF status within 5 sec after the start of fixing disen- Not required
gagement operation.
0002 The gears did not stop at pressure application position within 10 times after the start of pressure Not required
application operation for fixing.
E014 Fixing Motor error
0001 Lock error of the Fixing Motor was detected. Not required
E808 Detection of error in fixing drive circuit/power supply
0000 Zero cross signal was not detected after fixing relay was ON. Not required
*1: After performing the remedy work, the error can be cleared in the following service mode:
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR
129
2. Technology
Pickup Feed System
Overview
Reverse
/Duplex Assembly
Fixing/ Registration
Assembly
Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup Assembly
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
■ Features
• Enhanced productivity
The registration control has been improved and the pre-registration control has been abolished, thereby improving the
productivity.
• Addition of print-supported paper types
Support of 300g/m2 paper (including coated paper) with the Multi-purpose Tray pickup.
• Automatic paper size recognition for Multi-purpose Tray pickup
The usability has been improved by automatic paper size recognition for Multi-purpose Tray pickup.
• Support for landscape envelopes
Landscape envelopes can now be fed from the Cassette 1 and Multi-purpose Tray.
• Longer life of the Pickup Roller, Feed Roller, and Separation Roller
Longer life of the Pickup Roller, Feed Roller, and Separation Roller is achieved by changing the materials.
■ Specifications
Item Description
Pickup method Cassette 1/2, Multi-purpose Tray
Separation retard method
130
2. Technology
Item Description
Stacking capacity Cassette 1/2
550 sheets (80 g/m2 paper), 640 sheets (64 g/m2 paper)
Multi-purpose Tray
106 sheets (80 g/m2 paper), 120 sheets (64 g/m2 paper)
Paper size Cassette 1:
A4, B5, A5, A5R, LTR, STMTR, EXEC, 16K, Envelope (COM10 No.10, DL, ISO-C5, Nagagata 3, Youga-
tanaga 3), Custom Size (Width: 98.0 to 297.0 mm, Length: 148.0 to 215.9 mm)
Cassette 2:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, 12" x 18", EXEC, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
Envelope (COM10 No.10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, Kakugata 2, Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3), Custom size
(Width: 98.0 to 304.8 mm, Length: 182.0 to 457.2 mm)
Multi-purpose Tray:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, SRA3, 12" x 18", EXEC,
8K, 16K, Postcard, Envelope (COM10 No.10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, Kakugata 2, Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga
3), Custom size (Width: 98.0 to 320.0 mm, Length: 98.4 to 1200 mm), Free size (Width: 98.0 to 320.0 mm,
Length: 139.7 to 457.2 mm), Free size long original (Width: 98.0 to 320.0 mm, Length: 457.3 to 1200 mm)
Paper weight Cassette 1/2
52 to 256 g/m2
Multi-Purpose Tray
52 to 300 g/m2
Paper size switching Cassette 1/2, Multi-Purpose Tray
Automatic size detection
2-sided print method Through-pass duplexing
Paper level display Yes
Transparency detec- None
tion
Leading edge margin 4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm
Right edge margin 1-sided: 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm
2-sided: 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm
131
2. Technology
● Layout Drawing of Rollers
[24]
[25]
[23]
[22]
[26]
[21]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[27]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[28]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[7]
[8]
[13] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller [15] Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
[2] Cassette 1 Feed Roller [16] Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
[3] Cassette 1 Separation Roller [17] Fixing Pressure Roller
[4] Cassette 2 Pickup Roller [18] Fixing Inner Delivery Roller
[5] Cassette 2 Feed Roller [19] Fixing Outlet Roller
[6] Cassette 2 Separation Roller [20] Vertical Path Roller 1
[7] Cassette 1 Pullout Roller [21] First Delivery Roller
[8] Cassette 2 Pullout Roller [22] Vertical Path Roller 2
[9] MP Pickup Roller [23] Second Delivery Roller
[10] Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller [24] Duplex Reverse Roller
[11] MP Separation Roller [25] Third Delivery Roller
[12] Multi-purpose Tray Pullout Roller [26] Duplex Inlet Roller
[13] Pre-registration Roller [27] Duplex Feed Upper Roller
[14] Registration Roller [28] Duplex Feed Lower Roller
132
2. Technology
● Sensors Layout Drawing
PS39
PS42
PS57
PS43
PS40
PS41
PS37
PS34
PS33
PS38
PS72
PS55
PS76
PS56
No. Name No. Name

PS33 Registration Sensor PS42 Second Delivery Sensor
PS34 Fixing Inlet Sensor PS43 Third Delivery Sensor
PS37 Inner Delivery Sensor PS55 Cassette 1 Pullout Sensor
PS38 Duplex Paper Sensor PS56 Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor
PS39 Reverse Sensor PS57 Pre-Reverse Sensor
PS40 Duplex Inlet Sensor PS72 Multi-Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor
PS41 First Delivery Sensor PS76 Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor
133
2. Technology
● Diagram of Load Drives
SL6
SL7
M24
M25
M23
SL5
M21
M20
M13
M19
M44
M18
M42
M41 M43
No. Name No. Name

M13 ITB Motor M41 Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor
M18 Multi-Purpose Pickup Motor M42 Cassette 1 Pullout Motor
M19 Registration Motor M43 Cassette 2 Pullout Motor
M20 Duplex Feed Motor M44 Pre-Registration Motor
M21 Fixing Motor SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid
M23 First & Second Delivery Motor SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid
M24 Reverse Motor SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid
M25 Third Delivery Motor
134
2. Technology
■ Paper Path
Acceleration section
Reverse Mouth
Third Delivery
Second Delivery
First Delivery
Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup
Cassette 1 Pickup
Cassette 2 Pickup
Option Cassette Pickup
135
2. Technology
Cassette Pickup Assembly

M42
M43
PS68
M41 PS49
PS55
[1]
M40 PS76
PS51 PS74
PS52
[2]
SW6
PS53 PS69
PS50
PS54 [3]
[4]
[5]
[6] PS75
[7] [8] PS56
SW8
SW9
No. Name No. Name

[1] Cassette 1 Pullout Roller PS49 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor
[2] Cassette 2 Pullout Roller PS50 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor
[3] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller PS51 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A
[4] Cassette 1 Feed Roller PS52 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B
[5] Cassette 1 Separation Roller PS53 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A
[6] Cassette 2 Pickup Roller PS54 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B
[7] Cassette 2 Feed Roller PS55 Cassette 1 Pullout Sensor
[8] Cassette 2 Separation Roller PS56 Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor
M40 Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor PS68 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor
M41 Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor PS69 Cassette 2 Paper Surface Sensor
M42 Cassette 1 Pullout Motor PS74 Cassette 1 Pickup Nip Sensor
M43 Cassette 2 Pullout Motor PS75 Cassette 2 Pickup Nip Sensor
SW6 Cassette 1 Size Switch PS76 Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor
SW8 Cassette 2 Size Switch A
SW9 Cassette 2 Size Switch B
136
2. Technology
■ Drive Configuration
M40 M41 [1] [2] [4]
[3]
M42
M43
[8]
[9] [5] [6] [7]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller M40 Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor
[2] Cassette 1 Feed Roller M41 Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor
[3] Cassette 1 Separation Roller M42 Cassette 1 Pullout Motor
[4] Cassette 1 Pullout Roller M43 Cassette 2 Pullout Motor
[5] Cassette 2 Pickup Roller
[6] Cassette 2 Feed Roller
[7] Cassette 2 Separation Roller
[8] Cassette 2 Pullout Roller
[9] Lifting Plate
■ Lifter Control
Paper inside a cassette is lifted up by the Lifting Plate.
The Lifting Plate is lifted up by rotating the Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor (M40).
When the paper surface reaches the position of the Pickup Roller, the Cassette 1/2 Paper Surface Sensor (PS68/PS69) is turned
ON to detect that the paper has reached the pickup position.
Lifter Error Detection

When the Cassette Paper Surface Sensor is not turned ON although the Cassette Lifter Motor is driven, an alarm is issued due
to error in pickup assembly.
However, at first and second failure of paper surface detection, Trailing Edge Guide Plate error is displayed on the Control Panel
to prompt the user to open and then close the cassette.
If paper surface detection fails for 3 consecutive times, no paper is displayed for the cassette and an alarm is issued.
While an alarm has occurred, the corresponding cassette cannot be used.
<Related alarm codes>

• 04-0001: Cassette 1 Lifter Error
• 04-0002: Cassette 2 Lifter Error
■ Cassette Pickup Control

Rotation of the Cassette Pickup Motor feeds paper to the Cassette Pullout Roller.
The Cassette 1/2 Pickup Roller and the Cassette 1/2 Feed Roller are driven by the Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor (M41) while the
Cassette 1/2 Pullout Roller is operated by the rotation of the Cassette 1/2 Pullout Motor (M42/M43).
Pickup Retry Error

Pickup retry is executed when a delay jam is detected by the Pullout Sensor of each cassette.
An alarm code is notified when pickup fails the predetermined number of times.

• 04-0011: Cassette 1 Pickup Retry Error
137
2. Technology
• 04-0012: Cassette 2 Pickup Retry Error
■ Cassette paper size detection

Size detection is performed to paper set in the cassette, and paper size is determined according to the setting of Paper Size
Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer (All sizes, A/B size, Inch size, A/K size).
Result of size detec- Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer*1
tion in each cassette All sizes A/B size Inch size A/K size
A5 (Cassette 1 only) A5 A5 No corresponding size A5
A3 A3 A3 No corresponding size A3
B4 B4 B4 No corresponding size No corresponding size
A4-R A4-R A4-R No corresponding size A4-R
A4 A4 A4 No corresponding size A4
B5-R B5-R B5-R No corresponding size No corresponding size
B5 B5 B5 No corresponding size No corresponding size
A5-R Depends on the setting*2 A5R STMT-R A5-R
11x17 11x17 No corresponding size 11x17 No corresponding size
LGL LGL No corresponding size LGL No corresponding size
LTR LTR No corresponding size LTR No corresponding size
LTR-R LTR-R No corresponding size LTR-R No corresponding size
STMT-R Depends on the setting*2 A5-R STMT-R A5-R
12x18 12x18 No corresponding size 12x18 No corresponding size
EXEC Depends on the setting*3 No corresponding size EXEC 16K
8K 8K No corresponding size No corresponding size 8K
16K Depends on the setting*3 No corresponding size EXEC 16K
16K-R 16K-R No corresponding size No corresponding size 16K-R
Envelope Blank unless "Paper Settings" is performed due to non-standard size
Custom size
*1: Set the paper size you want to perform automatic size detection in the cassette in the following Setting/Registration.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer
NOTE:
The default settings by region are shown below.
Location Default setting

US Inch Size
CN A/K Size
Other than above A/B Size
*2: Set whether to support A5-R or STMT-R in the following Settings/Registration.

• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
*3: Set whether to support EXEC or 16K in the following service mode (Lv. 2).
• Cassette 1:
• COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-K-SW
• Cassette 2:
• COPIER > OPTION > CST > C2-K-SW
Cassette 1
Paper size in Cassette 1 is detected by the Cassette 1 Size Switch. The switch consists of 3 microswitches, and the width is
detected in accordance with the combination of ON/OFF.
138
2. Technology
[1]
SW6
A-1
A-2
A-3
[2]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Trailing Edge Guide Plate SW6 Cassette 1 Size Switch
[2] Side Guide Plate
Cassette 2
The paper size in the Cassette 2 is automatically detected by the Cassette 2 Size Switch A/B after the position of the Guide Plate
is adjusted. The switch consists of 3 microswitches, and length and width are detected in accordance with the combination of
ON/OFF.
The Cassette 2 Size Switch B detects width and the Cassette 2 Size Switch A detects length.
139
2. Technology
SW8
[1] [2]
A-1
A-2
A-3
[4] SW9
B-1
B-2
B-3
[3]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Trailing Edge Guide Plate SW8 Cassette 2 Size Switch A
[2] Link Arm SW9 Cassette 2 Size Switch B
[3] Side Guide Plate
[4] Side Detection Plate
■ Cassette Detection
Cassette is detected by the Cassette Size Switch. When none of the following microswitches of the Cassette Size Switch is
pressed, "no cassette" is detected.
• Cassette 1: Cassette 1 Size Switch (SW6)
• Cassette 2: Cassette 2 Size Switch B (SW9)
■ Paper Level/Presence Detection

The level and presence of paper in the cassette are detected by four sensors.
• Paper Level Sensor A
• Paper Level Sensor B
• Paper Sensor
• Paper Surface Sensor
The paper level is displayed in four levels in the Control Panel.
Level display Level Paper Level Sen- Paper Level Sen- Paper Sensor Paper Surface
sor A sor B Sensor
100 to 50 % OFF OFF ON ON
50 to 10 % OFF ON ON ON
140
2. Technology
Level display Level Paper Level Sen- Paper Level Sen- Paper Sensor Paper Surface
sor A sor B Sensor
10 to 0 % ON OFF ON ON
0% - - OFF ON
[1]
ON PS49
ON
[1]
OFF
PS68
OFF
ON PS49
PS51
ON
ON
OFF
ON PS49
ON
OFF
ON PS52
ON PS49
OFF
No. Name No. Name

[1] Paper PS49 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor
PS51 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A
PS52 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B
PS68 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor
141
2. Technology
Cassette 1
PS68
PS49
[1]
[2]
PS51
PS52
[3]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Lifter Gear PS49 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor
[2] Paper Detection Lever PS51 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A
[3] Lifting Plate PS52 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B
Cassette 2
PS69
[1] PS50
[2]
PS53
PS54
[3]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Lifter Gear PS50 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor
[2] Paper Detection Lever PS53 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A
[3] Lifting Plate PS54 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B
142
2. Technology
Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Assembly

PS71
M18 PS70
PS73
PS78
UN52
[1]
M42
[2]
[3]
[4]
PS72
PS47
No. Name No. Name

[1] MP Pickup Roller PS47 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Sensor
[2] MP Feed Roller PS70 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1
[3] MP Separation Roller PS71 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2
[4] Multi-purpose Tray Pullout Roller PS72 Multi-Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor
M18 Multi-Purpose Pickup Motor PS73 Multi-Purpose Tray HP Sensor
M42 Cassette 1 Pullout Motor PS78 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller HP Sensor
UN52 Multi-Purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB
■ Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Control

Rotation of the Multi-Purpose Pickup Motor feeds the paper set on the Multi-purpose Tray to the Multi-purpose Tray Pullout Roller.
The MP Pickup Roller and the MP Feed Roller are driven by the Multi-Purpose Pickup Motor (M18) while the Multi-purpose Tray
Pullout Roller is driven by the counterclockwise rotation of the Cassette 1 Pullout Motor (M42).
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup HP Sensor Error

When an error in the Multi-Purpose Pickup Motor (M18) or the Multi-Purpose Tray HP Sensor (PS73) is detected, "no paper" is
displayed for the Multi-purpose Tray pickup, and an alarm is issued.
While an alarm has occurred, the Multi-Purpose Tray cannot be used.

04-0007: Multi-purpose Tray Pickup HP Sensor Error
Multi-purpose Tray pickup retry error

Pickup retry is executed when a delay jam is detected by the Multi-Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor (PS72).
If pickup fails for the specified number of times, an alarm is notified.

04-0017: Multi-purpose Tray pickup retry error
■ Multi-purpose Tray Paper Detection

Paper presence/absence on the Multi-Purpose Tray is detected by the Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Sensor (PS47).
143
2. Technology
■ Multi-purpose Tray Automatic Size Detection

Size detection is performed to paper set in the Multi-purpose Tray, and paper size is determined according to the setting of Paper
Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer (A/B size, Inch size, A/K size).
Result of size detection Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer*1
A/B Size Inch Size A/K Size
A3 A3 12x18/11x17/No corresponding A3
size
B4 B4 11x17/No corresponding size 8K/No corresponding size
A4-R A4-R LGL/LTR-R/No corresponding A4-R
size
A4 A4 LTR/No corresponding size A4
B5-R B5-R No corresponding size No corresponding size
B5 B5 LTR/EXEC/No corresponding 16K/No corresponding size
size
A5-R A5R STMT-R/No corresponding size A5-R
A5 A5 STMT/No corresponding size A5
11x17 A3/B4/No corresponding size 11x17 A3/8K/No corresponding size
LGL A4R/No corresponding size LGL A4R/No corresponding size
LTR A4/B5/No corresponding size LTR A4/16K/No corresponding size
LTR-R A4R/No corresponding size LTR-R A4R/No corresponding size
STMT A5/No corresponding size STMT A5/No corresponding size
STMT-R A5R/No corresponding size STMT-R A5R/No corresponding size
SRA3 No corresponding size No corresponding size No corresponding size
12x18 A3/No corresponding size No corresponding size A3/No corresponding size
EXEC B5/No corresponding size EXEC 16K/No corresponding size
8K B4/No corresponding size 11x17/No corresponding size 8K
16K B5/No corresponding size LTR/EXEC/No corresponding 16K
size
Postcard Blank unless "Paper Settings" is performed due to non-standard size
Envelope
Custom size
*1: Set the paper size you want to perform automatic size detection in the Multi-purpose Tray in the following Setting/Registration.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer
NOTE:
The default settings by region are shown below.
Location Default setting

US Inch Size
CN A/K Size
Other than above A/B Size
Automatic size detection is performed by the following three sensors for the paper size of the Multi-purpose Tray.
• Multi-Purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB (UN52): detects the paper width
• Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1 (PS70): detects the paper length
• Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2 (PS71): detects the paper length
■ Long Length Paper

This machine supports long length paper.
Long length paper with 457.3 to 1200 mm in length can be used in the Multi-purpose Tray pickup.
144
2. Technology
CAUTION:
For copy jobs, paper with up to 630 mm in length can be used.
<Related service mode>

By setting the following service mode (Lv.2) to "1", the Long Original button appears on the Copy > Options screen, and long
length paper becomes available for use.
• COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST
CAUTION:
When setting Long Original, paper cannot be delivered to the Third Delivery Outlet.
● Free Size Control

Free Size can be set for paper feed only in case of Multi-purpose Tray pickup.
1. Measure the picked up paper.
2. Control the printing according to the paper length.
CAUTION:
Do not set paper of different sizes.
Fixing/Registration Assembly
M19
M44
[3]
PS77
PS33
[2]
[1]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Registration Roller M19 Registration Motor
[2] Pre-registration Roller M44 Pre-Registration Motor
[3] Registration Sensor Flag PS33 Registration Sensor
PS77 Transparency Registration Sensor
145
2. Technology
■ Registration Control
Purpose: To correct paper skew / align the leading edges of image and paper
After performing skew correction control, the leading edge of paper is aligned with the leading edge of image for feed control.
● Skew Correction Control

The paper leading edge runs into the stopped Registration Roller, thereby forming a slack (arch) in order to correct the skew.
M19
Registration
Roller
M44
Paper
Registration
Sensor
Pre-registration
Roller
M19
M44
Slack
● Non-stop Registration Control / Stop Registration Control

Depending on the paper feed condition, the following 2 controls are used as feed controls to align the leading edge of paper with
the leading edge of image:
Non-stop Registration Control

The control to align the leading edge of paper with the leading edge of image by accelerating and decelerating the feed speed.
Because paper is not stopped temporarily at the registration position, paper interval between sheets can be shortened to improve
productivity.
Stop Registration Control

This control is executed to stop paper using the Registration Roller, and resume feeding in accordance with the timing when the
image reaches the secondary transfer processing.
■ Fixing Arch Control

This control is used to monitor the slack (arch) status of paper, and depending on that status, switch the feed speed using the
Fixing Motor in order to feed paper to the Fixing Unit always at an optimal status.
This is performed between the Secondary Transfer Unit and the Fixing Unit. When thermal expansion occurs on the Pressure
Roller of the Fixing Unit, the circumference of the roller will increase. Consequently, even if the number of rotations is fixed, the
146
2. Technology
feed speed on the fixing side becomes faster than the feed speed on the secondary transfer side. Therefore the Fixing Arch
Sensors 1 and 2 are used to change the speed of the Fixing Motor depending on the status of the arch.
[Large loop detection]
PS34
ON
PS36
ON
[Fixing Inlet Sensor ON] PS36

Fixing Arch Sensor 2
Fixing Motor
Feeding speed UP
PS34
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Fixing Motor
[Small loop detection] Feeding speed Doun
PS35
ON
PS35
Fixing Arch Sensor 1
147
2. Technology
Duplex / Delivery Assembly

SL6
[5]
SL7
M24 [6]
M25
[4]
[3]
[7]
M23
SL5
[2]
[8]
[1] M20
[9]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Vertical Path Roller 1 M20 Duplex Feed Motor
[2] First Delivery Roller M23 First & Second Delivery Motor
[3] Vertical Path Roller 2 M24 Reverse Motor
[4] Second Delivery Roller M25 Third Delivery Motor
[5] Duplex Reverse Roller SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid
[6] Third Delivery Roller SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid
[7] Duplex Inlet Roller SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid
[8] Duplex Feed Upper Roller
[9] Duplex Feed Lower Roller
■ Duplex Control
● Duplex Feed Control
This machine reverses paper outside the machine using the Reverse Mouth.
After stopping at the reverse stop position, the paper fed to the duplex path will be fed to the 2-sided pickup standby position.
● Duplex Standby Control

In the case of duplex feed, when there is paper at the downstream standby position, feeding of the 1st side is suspended.
148
2. Technology
Duplex Reverse Roller [Reverse stop position]
[Duplex upper standby position]
Duplex Feed Upper Roller

Registration Roller
>Duplex pickup standby position@
■ Delivery Control
This machine executes face-down delivery (delivers paper to the Delivery Tray with the print side down).
When face-up delivery (paper is delivered to the Delivery Tray with the print side up) is specified for a job, an image is created
on the 1st side, and then the paper is passed through the duplex path and delivered with no image created on the 2nd side.
● Delivery Acceleration Control

When the trailing edge of the paper reaches the downstream position of Fixing Inner Delivery Roller, the First & Second Delivery
Motor (M23) and Reverse Motor (M24) speeds up and accelerates the feed speed.
The speed will subsequently return to the process speed to improve delivery alignment and to receive succeeding sheets.
Jam Detection
Jam code list
Jam code Sensor XX

Name Code 01: Delay jam 02: Stationary jam 0A: Power-on jam
XX01 Cassette 1 Pullout Sensor PS55 Yes Yes Yes
XX02 Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor PS56 Yes Yes Yes
XX03 Cassette 3 Pullout Sensor*2*3 PS101 Yes Yes Yes
XX04 Cassette 4 Pullout Sensor*2 PS102 Yes Yes Yes
XX05 Registration Sensor PS33 Yes Yes*1 Yes
XX06 Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34 Yes Yes Yes
XX07 Inner Delivery Sensor PS37 Yes Yes Yes
XX08 First Delivery Sensor PS41 Yes Yes Yes
XX09 Second Delivery Sensor PS42 Yes Yes Yes
XX0A Reverse Sensor PS39 Yes Yes Yes
XX0B Third Delivery Sensor PS43 Yes Yes Yes
XX0C Duplex Inlet Sensor PS40 Yes Yes Yes
XX0D Duplex Paper Sensor PS38 Yes Yes Yes
XX0E Multi-Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor PS72 Yes Yes Yes
XX0F Deck Pickup Sensor*4 PS1 Yes Yes Yes
XX14 Pre-Reverse Sensor PS57 Yes Yes Yes
149
2. Technology
Jam code Sensor XX

Name Code 01: Delay jam 02: Stationary jam 0A: Power-on jam
XX15 Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor PS76 Yes Yes Yes
*1: Including size mismatch (large)

*2: When the 2-cassette Pedestal is installed
*3: When the High Capacity Cassette Pedestal is installed
*4: When the Side Paper Deck is installed
Other Jams
Jam code Jam type

0190 A delay jam because paper did not come in time for the image
0D91 Size mismatch (small)
0B00 Door open
150
2. Technology
External Auxiliary System
Software Counter Control

This machine has software counters which count the number of prints/copies according to the job type. Various counters are
displayed by pressing the Check Counter key on the Control Panel. The default counters for each country (model) are listed
below.
Target Number displayed for each counter (in service mode)/Item Target
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8 country
code
Japan mod- Total 1 Total (Black Copy (Full Total A (Full *1 *1 *1 *1 JP
el 1) Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
Type 1 gle Color/1) gle Color 1)
101 108 232 149 000 000 000 000
Japan mod- Total 2 Copy (Full Total A (Full Copy (Black Total A *1 *1 *1 JP
el Color + Sin- Color + Sin- 2) (Black 2)
Type 2 gle Color/2) gle Color 2)
102 231 148 222 133 000 000 000
Taiwan Total 1 Total (Black Copy + Print Copy + Print Total (Sin- *1 *1 *1 TW
model 1) (Full Color/ (Full Color/ gle Color 1)
Large) Small)
101 108 401 402 118 000 000 000
UL model Total 1 Total (Black Copy (Full Copy (Full Print (Full Print (Full *1 *1 US
Type 1 1) Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
gle Color/ gle Color/ gle Color/ gle Color/
Large) Small) Large) Small)
101 108 229 230 321 322 000 000
UL model Total 2 Total (Black Copy (Full Copy (Full Print (Full Print (Full *1 *1 US
Type 2 2) Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
102 109 229 230 321 322 000 000
General Total 1 Total (Black Copy + Print Copy + Print Total (Sin- Total 1 (2- *1 *1 SG/KR/TH/
model 1) (Full Color/ (Full Color/ gle Color 1) Sided) VN/AR/IN
Large) Small)
101 108 401 402 118 114 000 000
UK model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 GB
Type 1 (Black/ (Black/ Color + Sin- Color + Sin- 1) 1)
Large) Small) gle Color/ gle Color/
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
240V UK Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 GB
model 101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
Type 2
CA model Total 1 Total (Black Copy (Full Copy (Full Print (Full Print (Full *1 *1 AU
1) Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
101 108 229 230 321 322 000 000
FRN model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 FR
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
FRN model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 FR
Type 2 101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
151
2. Technology
Target Number displayed for each counter (in service mode)/Item Target
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8 country
code
GER model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 DE
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
GER model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 DE
Type 2 101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
AMS model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 ES/SE/PT/
Type 1 (Black/ (Black/ Color + Sin- Color + Sin- 1) 1) NO/DK/FI/P
Large) Small) gle Color/ gle Color/ L/HU/CZ/SI/
Large) Small) GR/EE/RU/
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000 NL/SK/RO/
HR/BG/TR
AMS model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ES/SE/PT/
Type 2 101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 NO/DK/FI/P
L/HU/CZ/SI/
GR/EE/RU/
NL/SK/RO/
HR/BG/TR
ITA model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 IT
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
ITA model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 IT
Type 2 101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
China Total 1 Total Total Total (Full Total (Full *1 *1 *1 CN
(Black/ (Black/ Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
Large) Small)
101 112 113 122 123 000 000 000
*1: Hidden by default. Can be changed in service mode.

<Description of symbols>
• Large: Large size paper (when paper length exceeds 364 mm in paper feed direction)
• Small: Small size paper (when paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction)
• Total: When a sheet of paper is delivered, the counter is advanced by 1
• 2-Sided: The counter is advanced by 1 for paper delivered in 2-sided mode
• Change the country code of CONFIG in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CONFIG
• Three-digit number in the counter column shows the setting value of the following service mode items.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER1 to COUNTER8
• COUNTER 2 to COUNTER 8 can be changed in service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER).
• The type of counter display can be switched between the former and new methods in service mode (COPIER > OPTION >
USER > CNT-SW).
Loca- Location Loca- Location Loca- Location

tion tion tion
code code code
JP Japan ES Spain RU Russia
US United States SE Sweden SK Slovakia
GB United Kingdom PT Portugal RO Romania
FR France NO Norway HR Croatia
DE Germany DK Denmark BG Bulgaria
IT Italy FI Finland TR Turkey
AU Australia PL Poland TH Thailand
SG Singapore HU Hungary VN Vietnam
NL Netherlands CZ Czech Republic AR Argentine
KR Korea SI Slovenia IN India
152
2. Technology
Loca- Location Loca- Location Loca- Location

tion tion tion
code code code
CN China GR Greece
TW Taiwan EE Estonia
■ Count-up timing
Count-up timing differs according to the following:
• Print mode (1-sided/2nd side of 2-sided print, 1st side of 2-sided print)
• Delivery position (Finisher)
Delivery position Print mode

1-sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print 1st side of 2-sided print
Count-up timing
1 Host machine First Delivery Tray First Delivery Sensor (PS41) Duplex Paper Sensor
Second Delivery Tray Second Delivery Sensor (PS42) (PS38)
Third Output Tray Third Delivery Sensor (PS43)
2 When the Finisher is installed Finisher: Inlet Sensor (S1)
Fan Control
■ Location of Fans
FM2 FM11
FM7 FM1
FM9
FM6
FM8
FM5
FM4
FM10 FM3
Circuit Name Role Error/Alarm code

code
FM1 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 Heat exhaust around the Fixing Assembly E805-0000
FM2 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 Heat exhaust around the Fixing Assembly E805-0001
FM3 Power Supply Cooling Fan To cool power supply. E804-0000
FM4 Process Cartridge Fan (Rear) Heat exhaust around the Process Cartridge E807-0000
153
2. Technology
Circuit Name Role Error/Alarm code

code
FM5 Fixing Cooling Fan (Front) Cooling of the Fixing Assembly -
FM6 Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear) Cooling of the Fixing Assembly -
FM7 Delivery Fan 1 To cool the paper passing through the delivery area E806-0000
FM8 Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan To exhaust air around Secondary Pre-transfer Charging E806-0002
Assembly
FM9 Delivery Fan 2 To cool the paper passing through the delivery area E806-0001
FM10 Process Cartridge Fan (Front) Heat exhaust around the Process Cartridge E807-0001
FM11 Controller Fan To cool the Main Controller PCB E880-0003
Airflow
Operation
Fan Warm-up Standby When a job During a job After a job ERR/JAM Reader op- Sleep
rotation starts eration
Fixing Exhaust Half speed Stopped Half speed Full speed Half speed Stopped Stopped Stopped
Fan 1 (FM1)
Fixing Exhaust Half speed Stopped Half speed Full speed Half speed Stopped Stopped Stopped
Fan 2 (FM2)
Process Car- Full speed/Half speed/Stopped*1 Stopped Stopped Stopped
tridge Front Fan
(FM10)
Process Car- Stopped Stopped Stopped
tridge Rear Fan
(FM4)
Power Supply Full speed Half speed Full speed Full speed Full speed Half speed Half speed Stopped
Cooling Fan
(FM3)
Fixing Cooling Full speed/Half speed/Stopped*2 Stopped Stopped Stopped
Fan (Front)
(FM5)
154
2. Technology
Fan Warm-up Standby When a job During a job After a job ERR/JAM Reader op- Sleep
rotation starts eration
Fixing Cooling Full speed/Half speed/Stopped*2 Stopped Stopped Stopped
Fan (Rear)
(FM6)
Delivery Fan 1 Stopped Stopped Stopped Full speed/ Stopped Stopped Stopped Stopped
(FM7) Half speed/
Delivery Fan 2 Stopped*2
(FM9)
Secondary
Transfer Ex-
haust Fan
(FM8)
*1: The state of the fan (full speed/half speed/stopped) differs depending on the detection status of the Internal Temperature
Sensor (UN22) and the Environment Sensor (UN50).
*2: The state of the fan (full speed/half speed/stopped) differs depending on the paper size.
Environment Heater Control

Condition Reader Heater Drum Heater Cassette Heater
Power OFF ON ON ON
Deep Sleep ON ON ON
Sleep Standby / Sleep 1 ON ON ON
Standby External temperature is less than 22 deg C *1 OFF ON ON
External temperature is 22 deg C or more *1 OFF OFF OFF / ON *2
During print operation OFF OFF OFF
*1: External temperature can be checked in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP).
*2: It is [ON] only in DCON Ver 20.03 or later.
155
2. Technology
Power Supply
■ Power Supply Configuration inside the Host Machine
Main SW
AC
5V
12V
UN1
12V IL
DC Controller PCB
24V
24V IL
UN9
5V All-night
Power Supply Main Controller PCB
OUTLET
UN6 UN10
12V Power Supply
AC Driver PCB
UN11 Finisher
24V Power Supply
UN1
DC Controller PCB
Laser
Environment Switch
Interlock SW
UN3
Front Driver PCB
UN5 Interlock SW
Cassette Heater Relay PCB
Fuse
UN2 UN18
Feed/Drum Secondary Transfer
Driver PCB High-Voltage PCB
Deck Heater
Fixing Heater Reader Heater UN17
Primary Transfer/
Fixing Assembly
Bk Developing Charging
High-Voltage PCB
Option Option
Cassette Pedestal Paper Deck
Drum Heater
UN_BO1
Reader Controlle PCB
156
2. Technology
[7] [3]
[6] [5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
UN17
UN18
UN22 UN1
UN50
UN2
UN3
UN5
UN6
UN10
UN76 UN9
UN77 UN11
No. Name
UN1 DC Controller PCB
UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB
UN3 Front Driver PCB
UN5 Relay PCB
UN6 AC Driver PCB
UN9 All-night Power Supply PCB
UN10 24V Power Supply PCB
UN17 Primary Transfer/Bk Developing Charging High-Voltage PCB
UN18 Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB
UN22 Internal Temperature Sensor
UN50 Environment Sensor
UN76 Developing High-Voltage PCB (YMC)
UN77 Charging High-Voltage PCB (YMC)
[1] Main Controller PCB
[2] Riser PCB
[3] Control Panel CPU PCB
[4] Control Panel KEY PCB
[5] NFC PCB
[6] Wireless LAN PCB
[7] Device Port LED PCB
Power-saving Function
■ Overview
There are "Standby" and "Sleep" as the power supply mode of this machine.
Further, "Sleep" is divided into the following 3 modes: "Sleep Standby", "Sleep 1", "Deep Sleep".
157
2. Technology
Reader Control panel

State of power
supply ON
Standby Energy Saving
State of power
supply OFF
Engine
Main Controler
[Energy Saver] key is turned off

or [Energy Saver] key is turned on
A specified period of time has passed
Sleep Mode
Sleep Standby
Energy Use Energy Use

“Low” “High”
Job end Job submission

Job submission Job end
Deep Sleep Sleep 1
* The time specified in Settings/Registration> Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time
Standby
The mode that the machine is running or can start operation immediately and all power is supplied in this mode.
Sleep Standby
The state that only the Control Panel is off while the power is supplied to all other parts.
Sleep 1
The state that the controller's all-night and non-all-night power is supplied while the Control Panel is off.
Deep Sleep
In this state, the Control Panel is off while only all-night power is supplied.
When any of the following "Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep" applies, transition to this mode does not occur.
■ Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep Mode (Check Items)

Settings of Settings/Registration
When the following settings are enabled in the [Settings/Registration] menu, the machine does not enter Deep Sleep mode.
The corresponding items are shown below.
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings

• Sleep Mode Energy Use > High
• Sleep Mode Energy Use > Low > Compensate for Network Comm.
• Within the time specified in Auto Sleep Time
Preferences > Network

• NetWare Settings > Use NetWare > ON
• AppleTalk Settings > Use AppleTalk > ON
• TCP/IP Settings > BMLinkS Settings > Use BMLinkS > ON (*1)
• IEEE 802.1X Settings > Use IEEE 802.1X > ON
• TCP/IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > IP Address Settings > Auto IP > ON
• TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > mDNS Settings > Use mDNS > ON
• Google Cloud Print Settings > Use Google Cloud Print > ON (*2)
• TCP/IP Settings > SIP Settings > NGN Settings > Use NGN > ON (*1)
• Direct Connection Settings > Use Direct Connection > ON
158
2. Technology
Function Settings > Receive/Forward

• Fax Settings >Select RX Mode > Fax/Tel (Auto Switch) (*1)
• Fax Settings > Remote RX > ON (*1)
• Fax Settings > Set Number Display > ON (*1)
Function Settings > Send

• Fax Settings > Modem Dial-in Settings > ON (*1)
Other Settings
• Volume Settings key > Fax Volume Settings > Incoming Fax Ring > ON (*1)
*1: This may not be displayed depending on the country, model, and configuration of the options.
*2: This must be already registered on Google Cloud Print in advance.
Hardware status
• It is connected to the coin vendor.
System Performance Status

• The system is running/communicating.
CAUTION:
The system is in a running/communicating state for approx. 10 minutes after startup in many cases.
Quick Startup
To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to the AC Driver PCB and Main Controller
PCB. Consequently, the Touch Panel can be operated after 4 seconds from turning ON the Main Power Switch.
Even when the Main Power Supply Switch is OFF, power is supplied to the following PCBs:
Quick startup setting ON Quick startup setting OFF

AC Driver PCB Power is supplied Power is supplied
5 V All-night Power Supply Power is supplied OFF
Main Controller PCB Power is supplied OFF
NOTE:
The quick startup function can be set from "Settings/Registration".
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Quick Startup Settings for Main Power
[On]: Quick startup is executed (default)
[Off]: Quick startup is not executed
Disconnect the power plug when performing work with the possibility to come in contact with the PCBs above. If a conductive
material comes in contact with the PCB, short circuit may occur in the PCB, and may cause damage on it.
The following label is used at the place where attention is required.
Quick Start
Plug Off
Conditions for not executing quick startup

This machine does not execute quick startup if the following conditions are met at first startup after the power plug is connected
to the outlet.
Connection status of the hardware

• A coin vendor is connected.
Either of the following network settings is set to "ON":

Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network
159
2. Technology
• AppleTalk Settings > Use AppleTalk > ON

• Slect Wired/Wireless LAN > Wireless LAN
• Bluetooth Settings > ON
When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power in any of the conditions below
• The system is running/communicating.
Others
• More than 110 hours have elapsed after quick startup
• When turning ON the main power of the machine in 20 seconds after turning OFF the main power
• Startup after 8 hours or more have passed since the power of this product was turned OFF
• When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power from the Remote UI
• The next time the power is turned ON after occurrence of the error code
• The next time the power is turned ON after shifting to the service mode screen
160
3 Periodical Service
Consumable Parts List...................... 162
Cleaning/Check/Adjustment Locations
.......................................................169
Compatibility of Consumable Parts... 171
3. Periodical Service
Consumable Parts List
Host machine
No. Category Name Parts Quan- Esti- Work Parts counter Alarm Re-
number *1 tity mated de- (Service mode) code at marks
life *2 scrip- Intermedi- Sub item counter
tion ate item clear
1 - Dustproof Glass FL2-9476 1 150,000 Re- - - -
Cleaning Pad pages place-
ment
2 Image For- Drum Unit (Y) - 1 - Re- DRBL-1 PT-DR-Y 43-0070
mation Sys- place- (ALARM-3)
tem ment
3 Drum Unit (M) - 1 - Re- DRBL-1 PT-DR-M 43-0071
place- (ALARM-3)
ment
4 Drum Unit (C) - 1 - Re- DRBL-1 PT-DR-C 43-0072
place- (ALARM-3)
ment
5 Drum Unit (Bk) - 1 - Re- DRBL-1 PT-DRM 43-0073
place- (ALARM-3)
ment
6 Developing Unit (Y) FM1-N370 1 720,000 Re- DRBL-1 DV-UNT-Y -
pages place-
ment
7 Developing Unit (M) FM1-N371 1 720,000 Re- DRBL-1 DV-UNT-M -
pages place-
ment
8 Developing Unit (C) FM1-N372 1 720,000 Re- DRBL-1 DV-UNT-C -
pages place-
ment
9 Developing Unit (Bk) FM1-N373 1 720,000 Re- DRBL-1 DV-UNT-K -
pages place-
ment
10 Primary Transfer FC0-0257 3 720,000 Re- DRBL-1 TR-ROLC -
Roller (Y, M, C) pages place-
ment
11 Primary Transfer FC0-0257 1 720,000 Re- DRBL-1 TR-ROLK -
Roller (Bk) pages place-
ment
12 Secondary Transfer FL0-4164 1 720,000 Re- DRBL-1 2TR-INRL -
Inner Roller pages place-
ment
13 Secondary Transfer FE4-8322 1 720,000 Re- DRBL-1 2TR-ROLL - Simulta-
Roller pages place- neous
ment replace-
14 Transfer Separation FM3-8893 1 720,000 Re- DRBL-1 T/S-UNIT - ment of
Guide Unit pages place- 2 parts
ment
15 ITB FM1-N265 1 720,000 Re- DRBL-1 TR-BLT -
pages place-
ment
16 ITB Cleaning Blade FM4-7246 1 360,000 Re- DRBL-1 T-CLN-BD -
pages place-
ment
17 Fixing Sys- Fixing Film Unit (100 FM1-N253 1 360,000 Re- DRBL-1 FX-UP-FR 43-0076 For 100
tem V) pages place- V
18 Fixing Film Unit (120 FM1-N254 ment For 120
V) V
162
No. Category Name Parts Quan- Esti- Work Parts counter Alarm Re-
number *1 tity mated de- (Service mode) code at marks
life *2 scrip- Intermedi- Sub item counter
tion ate item clear
19 Fixing Sys- Fixing Film Unit (230 FM1-N255 1 360,000 Re- DRBL-1 FX-UP-FR 43-0076 For 230
tem V) pages place- V
ment
20 Fixing Pressure Roll- FM1-N252 1 Inter- Re- DRBL-1 FX-LW-RL - Replace
er Unit (Fixing Pres- mittent place- the Fix-
sure Roller + Shaft printing ment ing
Support) of 5 Pres-
sheets sure
per job: Roller
360,000 and the
pages Shaft
Support
at the
same
time
21 27T Gear FU2-1252 1 360,000 Re- DRBL-1 FX-LW-GR -
pages place-
ment
22 Pickup/Feed Cassette Pickup FL0-4002 2 500,000 Re- DRBL-1 C1-PU-RL / - Cas-
System Roller sheets place- C2-PU-RL settes 1
ment and 2
23 Cassette Feed Roller FL0-2885 2 500,000 Re- DRBL-1 C1-FD-RL / - (one for
sheets place- C2-FD-RL each)
ment
24 Cassette Separation FL0-1674 2 500,000 Re- DRBL-1 C1-SP-RL / -
Roller sheets place- C2-SP-RL
ment
25 MP Pickup Roller FL0-4002 1 500,000 Re- DRBL-1 M-PU-RL -
sheets place-
ment
26 MP Feed Roller FL0-4002 1 500,000 Re- DRBL-1 M-FD-RL -
sheets place-
ment
27 MP Separation Roll- FL0-1674 1 500,000 Re- DRBL-1 M-SP-RL -
er sheets place-
ment
48 Filter Toner Filter FC6-9817 1 100,000 Re- DRBL-1 TN-FIL1 -
sheets place-
ment
49 - Waste Toner Con- FM1-A606 1 260,000 Re- DRBL-1 WST-TNR - Can be
tainer images place- re-
ment placed
by the
user
50 ADF Pickup Roller FL0-3873 1 80,000 Re- DRBL-2 DF-PU-RL -
sheets place-
ment
51 Feed Roller FC0-9450 1 80,000 Re- DRBL-2 DF-FD-RL -
sheets place-
ment
52 Separation Roller FC0-9631 1 80,000 Re- DRBL-2 DF-SP-RL -
sheets place-
ment
53 Pre-separation Unit FM1-J766 1 80,000 Re- DRBL-2 DF-PR-PD -
sheets place-
ment
54 Stamp FC7-5465 1 7,000 Re- DRBL-2 STAMP -
times place-
ment
163
*1: The parts number may be changed due to engineering change.

*2: All the values described in this column are estimated replacement timing in A4 size. The replacement timing is a reference
value in the case of usage in general offices, and the actual value differs depending on the customer environment, operation
conditions in the field, etc.
[53]
[54]
[20]
[21]
[48]
[1]
164
[52] [51] [50]
[17,18,19]
[11]
[10] [12]
[16] [14]
[13]
[15]
[25]
[6]
[2]
[7] [26]
[3] [27]
[49]
[8] [4] [9] [5] [22] [23] [24] [22] [23] [24]
Cassette Feeding Unit-AM1

Parts counter
(Service mode)
No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Estimated life Remarks
Intermediate
Sub item
item
C3-PU-RL
1 Cassette Pickup Roller FL0-4002 2 500,000 sheets DRBL-2 Replaced based on
C4-PU-RL
the number of actual-
2 Cassette Feed Roller FL0-2885 2 500,000 sheets DRBL-2 C3-FD-RL
ly
C4-FD-RL
One for each Cas-
3 Cassette Separation FL0-1674 2 500,000 sheets DRBL-2 C3-SP-RL sette 3/4
Roller C4-SP-RL
165
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] [2] [3]
High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-A1

Parts counter
Parts num- (Service mode)
No. Parts name Q'ty Estimated life Remarks
ber Intermediate
Sub item
item
1 High Capacity Cassette FL0-4002 1 500,000 sheets DRBL-2 HCCPU-RL Replaced based on
Pickup Roller the number of actually
2 High Capacity Cassette FL0-2885 1 500,000 sheets DRBL-2 HCCFD-RL fed paper
Feed Roller
3 High Capacity Cassette FL0-1674 1 500,000 sheets DRBL-2 HCCSP-RL
Separation Roller
[1]
[2]
[3]
Paper Deck Unit-F1

Parts counter
(Service mode)
Intermediate
Sub item
item
1,000,000
1 Deck Pickup Roller FL0-4500 1 DRBL-2 PD-PU-RL
sheets
Replaced based on
1,000,000
2 Deck Feed Roller FC0-9631 1 DRBL-2 PD-FD-RL the number of actual-
sheets
ly fed paper
1,000,000
3 Deck Separation Roller FC0-9450 1 DRBL-2 PD-SP-RL
sheets
166
Booklet Finisher-Y1
Parts counter
(Service mode)
Intermediate
Sub item
item
1 Stapler FM1-L281 1 500,000 times DRBL-2 FIN-STPR
2 Stitcher Unit FL0-6966 1 100,000 times DRBL-2 SDL-STP
3 Staple-free Staple Unit FM1-K422 1 30,000 times DRBL-2 FR-STPL
4 Stacking Tray Torque FL3-9778 2 200,000 times DRBL-2 TRY-TQLM
Limiter
5 Paddle Unit FE3-6957 4 1,000,000 times DRBL-2 FIN-MPDL
6 Stack Delivery Lower FK4-1312 1 1,000,000 times DRBL-2 SW-RL-CL
Roller Clutch
7 Escape Feed Clutch FK4-1312 1 1,000,000 times DRBL-2 ESC-CL
8 Static Eliminator (Stack- FL0-5052 1 1,000,000 DRBL-2 DL-STC
ing Tray Delivery As- sheets
sembly)
9 Static Eliminator (Upper FL0-5056 1 1,000,000 DRBL-2 TRY-STC1
Escape Delivery Assem- sheets
bly)
10 Static Eliminator (Saddle FL0-2207 2 1,000,000 DRBL-2 SDL-STC
Delivery Assembly) sheets
Staple Finisher-Y1
Parts counter
(Service mode)
Intermediate
Sub item
item
1 Stapler FM1-L281 1 500,000 times DRBL-2 FIN-STPR
2 Staple-free Staple Unit FM1-K422 1 30,000 times DRBL-2 FR-STPL
3 Stacking Tray Torque FL3-9778 2 200,000 times DRBL-2 TRY-TQLM
Limiter
4 Paddle Unit FE3-6957 4 1,000,000 times DRBL-2 FIN-MPDL
5 Stack Delivery Lower FK4-1312 1 1,000,000 times DRBL-2 SW-RL-CL
Roller Clutch
6 Escape Feed Clutch FK4-1312 1 1,000,000 times DRBL-2 ESC-CL
7 Static Eliminator (Stack- FL0-5052 1 1,000,000 sheets DRBL-2 DL-STC
ing Tray Delivery As-
sembly)
8 Static Eliminator (Upper FL0-5056 1 1,000,000 sheets DRBL-2 TRY-STC1
Escape Delivery Assem-
bly)
9 Punch Unit F28-1062 1 1,000,000 times DRBL-2 PUNCH
F28-1063
F28-1064
Inner Finisher-H1
Parts counter
(Service mode)
Intermediate
Sub item
item
1 Stapler FK4-1126 1 500,000 times DRBL-2 FIN-STPR
167
Parts counter
(Service mode)
Intermediate
Sub item
item
2 Staple-free Staple Unit FM1-C429 1 30,000 times DRBL-2 FR-STPL
168
Cleaning/Check/Adjustment Locations
No. Category Name Timing Work Cleaning method

descrip-
tion
1 Reader Unit Dustproof Glass Whenever needed Cleaning Clean with the Dustproof Glass
Cleaning Tool
2 Both sides of the Copy Board Glass Whenever needed Cleaning
(Large) (including the back side White
Plate)
3 Both sides of the Document Reading Whenever needed Cleaning
Glass
4 Scanner Mirror (1st to 5th) Whenever needed Cleaning
5 ADF Unit Post-separation Sensor Whenever needed Cleaning
6 Registration Roller (Perform as needed basis Cleaning
during a service visit for
7 Lead Rollers 1 to 3 Cleaning
parts replacement)
8 Pullout Roller Cleaning
9 Rollers/Slave Rollers Cleaning
10 ADF height adjustment Whenever needed Adjust-
ment
11 Original Sensor Whenever needed Clea-
(Perform as needed basis ningnt
12 Double Feed Sensor PCB (light-emit- during a service visit for Clea-
ting side) parts replacement) ningnt
13 Double Feed Sensor PCB (light-re- Clea-
ceiving side) ningnt
14 Host ma- Fixing Shutter Cover Whenever needed Cleaning Clean when the Film Unit has
15 chine Fixing Separation Guide been replaced*
16 First Delivery Roller Whenever needed Cleaning When there is soiling or foreign
17 Second Delivery Roller (Perform as needed basis Cleaning matter, clean with lint-free paper
during a service visit for moistened with alcohol.
18 Third Delivery Roller Cleaning
parts replacement)
19 Registration Roller Cleaning
20 Pre-registration Guide Unit Cleaning
21 Fixing Delivery Guide Unit Cleaning
22 Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor Cleaning Clean with dry lint-free paper
23 Fixing Inlet Guide Cleaning When there is soiling or foreign
matter, clean with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
24 Registration Sensor Cleaning Clean it in a single direction with
lint-free paper moistened with
water.
25 Secondary Transfer Guide Cleaning Clean with dry lint-free paper
26 Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Cleaning Clean with dry lint-free paper
27 Inner Delivery Roller Inspec- After the check, clean with lint-
tion free paper moistened with alco-
28 Fixing Delivery Roller Inspec- hol if necessary
tion
29 Duplex Feed Upper Roller Inspec-
tion
30 Duplex Feed Lower Roller Inspec-
tion
31 Registration Patch Sensor Inspec- Check at replacement of the
tion drum. If necessary, wipe approx.
3 times in one direction with a
cotton swab moistened with wa-
ter
*: If it is soiled or foreign matters are attached, clean with alcohol and lint-free paper.
169
[6] [13] [12] [8] [5] [11] [7]
[7]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[17]
[4] [18]
[16]
[4] [4] [21]

[28]
[27]
[31] [29]
[15]
[31] [14]
[23]
[31] [26]
[25]
[19]
[30]
[20]
[24]
[22]
[1]
170
Compatibility of Consumable Parts

The following consumable parts are compatible with both this machine and the conventional model (iR-ADV C5200 series).
Parts number
No. Category Parts name Conventional Remarks
This machine
model
1 Primary Transfer Roller (Y, M, C, K) FC0-0257 FC0-0257
ITB
2 ITB Cleaning Blade FM4-7246 FM4-7246
3 Toner Filter FC6-9817 FC6-9817
Externals
4 Dustproof Glass Cleaning Pad FL2-9476 FL2-9476
5 Right Door Transfer Separation Guide Unit FM3-8893 FM3-8893
6 ADF Stamp FC7-5465 FC7-5465
171
4 Parts Replacement
and Cleaning
Preface..............................................173
List of Parts....................................... 174
Original Exposure System.................224
Main Controller System.....................252
Laser Control System........................278
Image Formation System.................. 283
Fixing System....................................363
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning
Preface
Outline
This chapter describes disassembly and reassembly procedures of the printer.
The service technician is to identify the cause of printer failures according to follow the disassembly procedures of each part to
replace the defective parts or the consumable parts.
Note the following precautions when working on the printer.
• Before disassembling or reassembling the printer, be sure to disconnect its power cord from the electrical outlet.
• When having removed the Drum Unit from the host machine before disassembling and assembling the machine, be sure to
put the Photosensitive Drum in a protective bag even in a short period of time to prevent the adverse effect of light.
• Reassembling procedures are followed by the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise specified.
• Note the length, diameters, and locations of screws as you remove them. When reassembling the printer, be sure to use
them in their original locations.
• Do not run the printer with any parts removed as a general rule.
• Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused
by static electricity.
• When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached, be sure to remove the rating plate or
the product code label and put it to the new part.
173
List of Parts
List of Cover
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[20]
[8]
[9] [5] [7]

[6]
[10]
[19]
[11]
[15]
[18] [12]
[17] [13]
[16]
[14]
[15]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Control panel upper Cover [11] Front Cover
[2] Control panel side Cover [12] Cassette 1
[3] Control panel Lower Cover [13] Cassette 2
[4] Control panel conector Cover [14] Waste toner Cover
[5] Control panel upper arm Cover [15] Left Handle Cover
[6] Control panel Lower arm Cover [16] Left Duct Cover
[7] Lower Cover (small) [17] Service Book Holder
[8] Right Front Upper Cover Unit [18] Left Lower Cover
[9] Front Upper Cover Unit [19] Left Upper Cover
[10] Toner Replacement Cover [20] Rear Upper Left Cover
174
[7] [8]
[6]
[9]
[5] [10]
[4]
[11]
[3]
[12]
[2]
[13]
[1]
[14]
[15]
[16]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Inner Lower Cover Unit [9] Reverse Backend Guide
[2] Pushing Stopper [10] Inner Output Cover
[3] Inner Delivery Cover (left rear) [11] Toner Bottel Right Inner Cover
[4] Delivery Frame [12] ITB Cover
[5] Bias PCB Cover [13] Process Unit Front Cover
[6] Inner Delivery Cover (rear) [14] Toner Bottle Exchange Door (Bk)
[7] Inner Delivery Cover (right rear) [15] Toner Bottle Exchange Door (Y/M/C)
[8] Inner Delivery sensor Cover [16] Lock Pin Cover
175
[21]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[14]
[17]
[1]
[15] [13]
[16]
[22]
[2]
[12]
[11]
[10] [3]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[7] [5]
[6]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Rear Upper Cover [12] Right Front Cover
[2] Rear Lower Cover [13] Right Handle Cover (Front)
[3] Filter Cover [14] MP Pickup Tray Unit
[4] Connector Cover [15] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Sub Tray
[5] Right Rear Cover 1 [16] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate
[6] Environment Heater Switch Cover [17] Right Front Cover (Upper)
[7] Right Handle Cover (Rear) [18] Main Power Supply Switch Cover
[8] Right Lower Sub Cover 2 [19] Right Door Unit
[9] Right Rear Cover 2 [20] Third Delivery Frame Cover
[10] Right Cover (Lower) [21] Third Delivery Outlet Cover
[11] Right Lower Door [22] Wire Cover
176
[6]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[8]
[10]
[9]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Reader Front Cover [6] Reader Right Retaining Cover
[2] Reader Front Cover (Small) [7] Reader Hinge Lower Cover (Left) / Reader Hinge Lower
Cover (Right)
[3] Reader Left Cover [8] Reader PCB Cover
[4] Reader Left Retaining Cover [9] Reader Rear Cover
[5] Reader Glass Support Cover [10] Reader Right Cover
177
[4] [5]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[2] [1]
[10]
[8]
[9]
No. Name No. Name

[1] ADF Front Cover [6] Document supply tray extension
[2] ADF Left Cover [7] Document output tray extension
[3] ADF Upper Cover [8] Hinge Cover
[4] Slide Guide [9] ADF Rear Cover
[5] Document supply tray [10] Document output tray
178
List of Electrical Parts

■ Drum Unit / Developing Unit
UN46
UN45
UN59
UN44
TS8
UN43
UN58
TS7
UN57
TS6
TS5 UN56
No. Name Refarence

UN43 Developing Sub Bias PCB (Y)
UN44 Developing Sub Bias PCB (M)
UN45 Developing Sub Bias PCB (C)
UN46 Developing Sub Bias PCB (Bk)
UN56 Drum Unit Memory (Y)
UN57 Drum Unit Memory (M)
UN58 Drum Unit Memory (C)
UN59 Drum Unit Memory (Bk)
TS5 ATR Sensor (Y)
TS6 ATR Sensor (M)
TS7 ATR Sensor (C)
TS8 ATR Sensor (Bk)
179
■ Process Unit
UN30 UN71
UN72
UN28
UN25
UN73
UN27
UN26
UN29
UN24
UN23
M26
UN70
UN20
No. Name Refarence

M26 Waste Toner Feed Motor
UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB
UN23 Y Pre-Exposure Led PCB (Front)
UN24 Y Pre-Exposure Led PCB (Rear)
UN25 M Pre-Exposure Led PCB (Front)
UN26 M Pre-Exposure Led PCB (Rear)
UN27 C Pre-Exposure Led PCB (Front)
UN28 C Pre-Exposure Led PCB (Rear)
UN29 Bk Pre-Exposure Led PCB (Front)
UN30 Bk Pre-Exposure Led PCB (Rear)
UN70 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (Y)
UN71 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (M)
UN72 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (C)
UN73 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (Bk)
180
■ Hopper Unit
PS63
PS66 PS67
PS62
UN66
UN39 UN67
UN40 UN68
UN41 UN69
UN42
PS1
PS65 TS1 PS2
PS60 PS61 TS2 PS3
PS64 TS3 PS4
TS4
No. Name Refarence

PS1 Toner Supply Sensor (Y)
PS2 Toner Supply Sensor (M)
PS3 Toner Supply Sensor (C)
PS4 Toner Supply Sensor (Bk)
PS60 Bottle Rotation Sensor (Y)
PS61 Bottle Rotation Sensor (M)
PS62 Bottle Rotation Sensor (C)
PS63 Bottle Rotation Sensor (Bk)
PS64 Bottle Position Sensor (Y)
PS65 Bottle Position Sensor (M)
PS66 Bottle Position Sensor (C)
PS67 Bottle Position Sensor (Bk)
TS1 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Y)
TS2 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (M)
TS3 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (C)
TS4 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Bk)
UN39 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Y)
UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (M)
UN41 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (C)
UN42 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Bk)
UN66 Bottle New/Old Sensor (Y)
UN67 Bottle New/Old Sensor (M)
UN68 Bottle New/Old Sensor (C)
UN69 Bottle New/Old Sensor (Bk)
181
■ Main Drive Unit
M4 M1
CL5
CL4
CL3
M8 CL2
M7
M6
M5
No. Name Refarence

M1 Drum Motor (YMC)
M4 Drum Motor (Bk)
M5 Developing Motor (Y)
M6 Developing Motor (M)
M7 Developing Motor (C)
M8 Developing Motor (Bk)
CL2 Toner Supply Clutch (Y)
CL3 Toner Supply Clutch (M)
CL4 Toner Supply Clutch (C)
CL5 Toner Supply Clutch (Bk)
182
■ ITB Unit
PS22
M15
PS23
PS24
M14
UN60 M13
No. Name Refarence

M13 ITB Motor
M14 ITB Displacement Control Motor
M15 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor
PS24 ITB Steering Sensor
UN60 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB
183
■ Laser Scanner Unit
M34 M33
M30
M31
UN15
M32
UN14
M29 UN13
UN12
No. Name Refarence

M29 Laser Scanner Motor (YM)
M30 Laser Scanner Motor (CK)
M31 Image Skew Correction Motor (Y)
M32 Image Skew Correction Motor (M
M33 Image Skew Correction Motor (C)
M34 Image Skew Correction Motor (Bk)
UN12 Laser Driver PCB (M)
UN13 Laser Driver PCB (Y)
UN14 Laser Driver PCB (Bk)
UN15 Laser Driver PCB (C)
184
■ Bottle Cover / Waste Toner Container
SW14
SW13
SW10
SW12
UN75
SW11
M45
No. Name Refarence

M45 Recycle Toner Stirring Motor
UN75 Waste Toner Sensor PCB
SW10 Waste Toner Container Detection Switch
SW11 Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (Y)
SW12 Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (M)
SW13 Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (C)
SW14 Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (Bk)
185
■ Cassette Lifter Drive Assembly
M40
SW6 PS51
PS52
PS53
PS54
SW8
SW9
No. Name Refarence

M40 Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor
SW6 Cassette 1 Size Switch
SW8 Cassette 2 Size Switch A
SW9 Cassette 2 Size Switch B
186
■ Pickup Unit
PS55
PS76
PS74
PS68
PS49 PS56
PS75
PS69
PS50
No. Name Refarence

PS49 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor
PS50 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor
PS55 Cassette 1 Pullout Sensor
PS56 Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor
PS74 Cassette 1 Pickup Nip Sensor
PS75 Cassette 2 Pickup Nip Sensor
PS76 Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor
187
■ Registration Unit
UN48
UN49
UN47
SL1
PS77
PS33
No. Name Reference

SL1 Registration Shutter Solenoid
UN47 Registration Patch Sensor (Front)
UN48 Registration Patch Sensor (Rear)
UN49 Registration Patch Sensor (Middle)
PS33 Registration Sensor
PS77 Transparency Registration Sensor
188
■ Right Door Unit
UN61
PS34
PS35
PS36
PS38
PS19
No. Name Refarence

UN61 Right Door Relay PCB
PS19 Right Lower Door Sensor
PS34 Fixing Inlet Sensor
PS35 Fixing Arch Sensor 1
PS36 Fixing Arch Sensor 2
PS38 Duplex Paper Sensor
189
■ Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly
PS71
PS70
PS78
PS73
UN52
PS72
PS47
No. Name Refarence

PS47 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Sensor
PS70 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1
PS71 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2
PS72 Multi-Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor
PS73 Multi-Purpose Tray HP Sensor
PS78 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller HP Sensor
UN52 Multi-Purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB
190
■ Fixing Unit
TH2
TH1
PS30
PS37
PS31
PS32 TH2
UN78
TP1
UN79
H1
No. Name Refarence

PS30 Fixing Pressure Sensor
PS31 Shutter HP Sensor
PS32 Shutter Position Sensor
PS37 Inner Delivery Sensor
UN78 Fixing Relay PCB
UN79 Fixing Memory PCB
H1 Fixing Heater
TH1 Main Thermistor (Fixing Heater (Center) / Fixing Film (Center) / Fixing Heater (Front
Edge) / Fixing Heater (Rear Edge))
TH2 Sub Thermistor (Fixing Film (Front Edge) / Fixing Film (Rear Edge))
TP1 Thermoswitch
191
■ 2/3 Delivery Unit
M25
PS40
PS43
M24
PS45
M23
PS57
SL7
PS42
SL6
PS39 SL5
No. Name Refarence

M23 First & Second Delivery Motor
M24 Reverce Motor
M25 Third Delivery Motor
SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid
SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid
SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid
PS39 Reverse Sensor
PS40 Duplex Inlet Sensor
PS42 Second Delivery Sensor
PS43 Third Delivery Sensor
PS45 Second Delivery Tray Full Sensor
PS57 Pre-Reverse Sensor
192
■ Motor (Others)
M21
M12
M27 M11
M19
M10
M20
M9
M18
M44
M42
M43
M28 M41
No. Name Refarence

M9 Bottle Motor (Y)
M10 Bottle Motor (M)
M11 Bottle Motor (C)
M12 Bottle Motor (Bk)
M18 Multi-Purpose Pickup Motor
M19 Registration Motor
M20 Duplex Feed Motor
M21 Fixing Motor
M27 Fixing Shutter Motor
M28 Laser Shutter Motor
M41 Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor
M42 Cassette 1 Pullout Motor
M43 Cassette 2 Pullout Motor
M44 Pre-Registration Motor
193
■ Fan (Others)
FM2 FM11
FM7 FM1
FM9
FM6
FM8
FM5
FM4
FM10 FM3
No. Name Refarence

FM1 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1
FM2 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2
FM3 Power Supply Cooling Fan
FM4 Process Cartridge Fan (Rear)
FM5 Fixing Cooling Fan (Front)
FM6 Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear)
FM7 Delivery Fan 1
FM8 Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan
FM9 Delivery Fan 2
FM10 Process Cartridge Fan (Front)
FM11 Controller Fan
194
■ Sensor / Switch (Others)
PS20
PS41
PS44 PS21 [2] [1]
SW5 SW1
SW2 H2
PS17
PS18
SW3
PS29
H4
No. Name Refarence

PS17 Toner Container Outer Cover Sensor
PS18 Front Door Sensor
PS20 Right Door Sensor
PS21 Second & Third Delivery Door Sensor
PS29 Laser Shutter Sensor
PS41 First Delivery Sensor
PS44 First Delivery Tray Full Sensor
SW1 Main Power Supply Switch
SW2 Environment Switch
SW3 DC Interlock Switch
SW5 AC Interlock Switch
H2 Drum Heater
H4 Cassette Heater
[1] Speaker
[2] Motion Sensor
195
■ PCB (Others)
[7] [3]
[6] [5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
UN17
UN18
UN22 UN1
UN50
UN2
UN3
UN5
UN6
UN10
UN76 UN9
UN77 UN11
No. Name Refarence

UN1 DC Controller PCB
UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB
UN3 Front Driver PCB
UN5 Relay PCB
UN6 AC Driver PCB
UN9 All-Night Power PCB
UN17 Primary Transfer/Bk Developing Charging High-Voltage PCB
UN18 Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB
UN22 Internal Temperature Sensor
UN50 Environment Sensor
UN76 Developing High-Voltage PCB (YMC)
UN77 Charging High-Voltage PCB (YMC)
[1] Main Controller PCB
[2] Riser PCB
[3] Control Panel CPU PCB
[4] Control Panel KEY PCB
[5] NFC PCB
[6] Wireless LAN PCB
[7] Device Port LED PCB
196
■ Reader
STM1
UN_BO1 HTR1
HTR3
HTR2
HTR4
PS_N2
PS_N1
PS_A1 PS_R2
PS_R1
UN_BO2
UN_BO3
No. Name Refarence

STM1 Scanner Motor
PS_A1 Scanner Unit HP Sensor
PS_N1 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front)
PS_N2 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Rear)
PS_R1 Original Size Sensor (AB)
PS_R2 Original Size Sensor (Inch)
HTR1 Reader Heater 1 (100V)
UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB
UN_BO2 CMOS PCB
UN_BO3 LED PCB
197
■ ADF
FAN_A1
STM3
STM2
STM1
CL1
SL1
No. Name Refarence

CL1 Separation Clutch
SL1 Stamp Solenoid
STM1 Registration Motor
STM2 Pickup Motor
STM3 Read Motor
FAN_A1 Cooling Fan
198
PS_R3
PS_N1
PS_A3
PS_A5 PS_A4
UN_SNS1
PS_R1
UN_BO8
UN_BO7
PS_A9
PS_R2
PS_A6 PS_A1
PS_A2
PS_A7
UN_BO6
No. Name Refarence

PS_A1 Arch Sensor
PS_A2 Delivery Tray Sensor
PS_A3 LTR-R/ LGL Sensor
PS_A4 AB/ Inch Sensor
PS_A5 Cover Open/Closed Sensor
PS_A6 Lead Sensor 1
PS_A7 Lead Sensor 2
PS_A9 Glass Movement HP Sensor
PS_N1 Original Sensor
PS_R1 Post-separation Sensor
PS_R2 Registration Sensor
PS_R3 Large/Small Sensor
UN_BO6 Paper Width Sensor
UN_BO7 Double Feed Detection PCB (Transmission)
UN_BO8 Double Feed Detection PCB (Reception)
UN_SNS1 Original Width Volume
199
UN_BO1
UN_BO5
UN_BO4
UN_BO2
UN_BO3
No. Name Refarence

UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB
UN_BO2 CMOS PCB
UN_BO3 LED PCB
UN_BO4 Original Display LED
UN_BO5 Delivery Display LED
200
List of Connectors
■ Main Unit
UN46
UN45
J6118
J6120
UN44
UN43
J6116
J6114
J6150
J6149 J6803
J6117
J6148 J6119
J6802
J6804
J6147
J6121
J6111
J600
J606
J6115
J605 J604
J6801 J608
J609
J603
J607
J601
J602
J306
201
J No. Sym- Name Relay connector J No. Sym- Name Re-

bol bol marks
J601 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6115 UN23 Y Pre-Exposure Led PCB -
(Front)
J602 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6147 UN24 Y Pre-Exposure Led PCB -
(Rear)
J602 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6148 UN26 M Pre-Exposure Led PCB -
(Front)
J603 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6117 UN25 M Pre-Exposure Led PCB -
(Rear)
J604 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6119 UN27 C Pre-Exposure Led PCB -
(Front)
J605 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6149 UN28 C Pre-Exposure Led PCB -
(Rear)
J605 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6150 UN30 Bk Pre-Exposure Led PCB -
(Front)
J606 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6121 UN29 Bk Pre-Exposure Led PCB -
(Rear)
J608 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6801 UN70 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (Y) -
J608 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6802 UN71 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (M) -
J608 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6803 UN72 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (C) -
J608 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB - - - J6804 UN73 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor -
(Bk)
J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 - - - UN43 Developing Sub Bias PCB (Y) -
3
J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 - - - UN44 Developing Sub Bias PCB (M) -
4
J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 - - - UN45 Developing Sub Bias PCB (C) -
5
J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 - - - UN46 Developing Sub Bias PCB (Bk) -
6
J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 - - J6114 TS5 ATR Sensor (Y) -
3
J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 - - J6116 TS6 ATR Sensor (M) -
4
J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 - - J6118 TS7 ATR Sensor (C) -
5
J609 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB J509 - - J6120 TS8 ATR Sensor (Bk) -
6
J306 UN3 Front Driver PCB J755 - - J6111 M26 Waste Toner Feed Motor -
J306 UN3 Front Driver PCB J755 - - J600 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB -
J306 UN3 Front Driver PCB J755 - - J607 UN20 Process Unit Relay PCB -
202
J1400(Y)
J1401(Y) J1410(M)
J6044 J1411(M) J1420(C)
J6153 J1421(C)
(Bk) (Bk) J1430(Bk)
J6052 J1431(Bk)
(C) J6452
J6041 J6033(Y) J6034(Y)
(C) J6036(M) J6037(M)
J6039(C) J6040(C)
J6042(Bk) J6043(Bk)
J6151
J6035 (M)
(Y) J6038
J6154 (M)
(Y)
J367
J366
J365
J364
J302
J212
J173

bol bol marks
J173 UN1 DC Controller PCB J350 J501 - J6452 UN66 Bottle New/Old Sensor (Y) -
6
J173 UN1 DC Controller PCB J351 J501 - J6452 UN67 Bottle New/Old Sensor (M) -
9
J173 UN1 DC Controller PCB J352 J502 - J6452 UN68 Bottle New/Old Sensor (C) -
2
J173 UN1 DC Controller PCB J353 J502 - J6452 UN69 Bottle New/Old Sensor (Bk) -
5
J212 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J501 J501 - J1400 UN39 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Y) -
5 6
J212 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J501 J501 - J1410 UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (M) -
8 9
J212 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J502 J502 - J1420 UN41 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (C) -
1 2
203

bol bol marks
J212 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J502 J502 - J1430 UN42 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Bk) -
4 5
J302 UN3 Front Driver PCB - - - J364 SW11 Bottle Cover Open/Close -
Switch (Y)
Switch (M)
Switch (C)
Switch (Bk)
J1401 UN39 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Y) - - - J6034 PS1 Toner Supply Sensor (Y) -
J1401 UN39 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Y) - - - J6035 PS60 Bottle Rotation Sensor (Y) -
J1401 UN39 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Y) - - - J6154 PS64 Bottle Position Sensor (Y) -
J1401 UN39 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Y) - - - J6033 TS1 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Y) -
J1411 UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (M) - - - J6037 PS2 Toner Supply Sensor (M) -
J1411 UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (M) - - - J6038 PS61 Bottle Rotation Sensor (M) -
J1411 UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (M) - - - J6151 PS65 Bottle Position Sensor (M) -
J1411 UN40 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (M) - - - J6036 TS2 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (M) -
J1421 UN41 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (C) - - - J6040 PS3 Toner Supply Sensor (C) -
J1421 UN41 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (C) - - - J6041 PS62 Bottle Rotation Sensor (C) -
J1421 UN41 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (C) - - - J6052 PS66 Bottle Position Sensor (C) -
J1421 UN41 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (C) - - - J6039 TS3 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (C) -
J1431 UN42 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Bk) - - - J6043 PS4 Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) -
J1431 UN42 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Bk) - - - J6044 PS63 Bottle Rotation Sensor (Bk) -
J1431 UN42 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Bk) - - - J6153 PS67 Bottle Position Sensor (Bk) -
J1431 UN42 Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Bk) - - - J6042 TS4 Hopper Toner Level Sensor -
(Bk)
204
J6059
J6060
J6084
J2177 J2114
J2113
J2112 J213
J2176
J2111
J215 J211
J2171
J2172 J217
J226
J2223
J222 J225
J224
J2224
J2225
J2262 J2261
J6008
J6007
J6006
J6011 J6005
J6012
J6013
J6015

bol bol marks
J211 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J2111 M9 Bottle Motor (Y) -
J211 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J2112 M10 Bottle Motor (M) -
J211 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J2113 M11 Bottle Motor (C) -
J211 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J2114 M12 Bottle Motor (Bk) -
J213 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6059 M27 Fixing Shutter Motor -
J215 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6084 M21 Fixing Motor -
J217 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J2171 M18 Multi-Purpose Pickup Motor -
J217 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J2177 M19 Registration Motor -
205

bol bol marks
J217 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J2176 M20 Duplex Feed Motor -
J217 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J2172 M44 Pre-Registration Motor -
J222 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J222 - - J2225 M41 Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor -
2
J222 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J222 - - J2223 M42 Cassette 1 Pullout Motor -
1
J222 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J222 - - J2224 M43 Cassette 2 Pullout Motor -
2
J224 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6060 M28 Laser Shutter Motor -
J225 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6015 M5 Developing Motor (Y) -
J225 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6013 M6 Developing Motor (M) -
J225 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6012 M7 Developing Motor (C) -
J225 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6011 M8 Developing Motor (Bk) -
J225 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6005 CL2 Toner Supply Clutch (Y) -
J225 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6006 CL3 Toner Supply Clutch (M) -
J225 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6007 CL4 Toner Supply Clutch (C) -
J225 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6008 CL5 Toner Supply Clutch (Bk) -
J226 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J2261 M1 Drum Motor (YMC) -
J226 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J2262 M4 Drum Motor (Bk) -
206
J3032 J7010
J3031 J7011
J7013
J700
J701 J3030
M30 M33
M34
J824
M31 J823
J802
J823 J862
J802
M32
J801
M29
J6205
J861
J824 J822
J451
J821
J822
J830 J851
J821
J801
J6244
J303
J171
J9
J416
J224

bol bol marks
J9 - Riser PCB - - - J802 UN13 Laser Driver PCB (Y) -
J9 - Riser PCB - - - J822 UN12 Laser Driver PCB (M) -
J9 - Riser PCB - - - J802 UN15 Laser Driver PCB (C) -
J9 - Riser PCB - - - J822 UN14 Laser Driver PCB (Bk) -
J171 UN1 DC Controller PCB J171 - - J851 UN13 Laser Driver PCB (Y) -
1
J171 UN1 DC Controller PCB J171 - - J862 UN15 Laser Driver PCB (C) -
1
J224 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J620 - - J6244 M45 Recycle Toner Stirring Motor -
4
207

bol bol marks
J224 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J620 - - J451 UN75 Waste Toner Sensor PCB -
4
J224 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J620 - - J6205 SW10 Waste Toner Container Detec- -
4 tion Switch
J303 UN3 Front Driver PCB - - - J3030 M13 ITB Motor -
J303 UN3 Front Driver PCB - - - J3031 M14 ITB Displacement Control Mo- -
tor
J303 UN3 Front Driver PCB - - - J3032 M15 Primary Transfer Roller Disen- -
gagement Motor
J303 UN3 Front Driver PCB - - - J700 UN60 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB -
J416 UN5 Relay PCB J416 - - J830 UN12 Laser Driver PCB (M) -
1
J416 UN5 Relay PCB J416 - - J861 UN14 Laser Driver PCB (Bk) -
1
J701 UN60 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB - - - J7010 PS22 Primary Transfer Detachment -
Sensor 1
J701 UN60 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB - - - J7011 PS23 Primary Transfer Detachment -
Sensor 2
J701 UN60 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB J701 - - J7013 PS24 ITB Steering Sensor -
2
J821 UN12 Laser Driver PCB (M) - - - J801 UN13 Laser Driver PCB (Y) -
J821 UN14 Laser Driver PCB (Bk) - - - J801 UN15 Laser Driver PCB (C) -
J823 UN12 Laser Driver PCB (M) - - - - M29 Laser Scanner Motor (YM) -
J823 UN14 Laser Driver PCB (Bk) - - - - M30 Laser Scanner Motor (CK) -
J824 UN12 Laser Driver PCB (M) - - - - M31 Image Skew Correction Motor -
(Y)
J824 UN12 Laser Driver PCB (M) - - - - M32 Image Skew Correction Motor -
(M
J824 UN14 Laser Driver PCB (Bk) - - - - M33 Image Skew Correction Motor -
(C)
J824 UN14 Laser Driver PCB (Bk) - - - - M34 Image Skew Correction Motor -
(Bk)
208
J1254
J1253
J1252
J6064
J6095
J6094
J6132
J6237
J6201
J6200
J6129
J6137
J6203
J6202
J6214
J6134
J6234
J6130
J6135
J6414
J6236
J6415
J6235
J305
J125
J218
J220
J221
J224

bol bol marks
J125 UN1 DC Controller PCB J125 - - J1252 UN47 Patch Sensor (Front) -
1
J125 UN1 DC Controller PCB J125 - - J1254 UN48 Patch Sensor (Rear) -
1
209

bol bol marks
J125 UN1 DC Controller PCB J125 - - J1253 UN49 Patch Sensor -
1
J218 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6095 PS33 Registration Sensor -
J218 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6094 PS77 Transparency Registration -
Sensor
J220 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J6129 PS49 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor -
0
J220 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J6134 PS50 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor -
1
J220 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J6132 PS55 Cassette 1 Pullout Sensor -
0
J220 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J6200 PS68 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sen- -
0 sor
J220 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J6202 PS69 Cassette 2 Paper Surface Sen- -
1 sor
J220 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J6201 PS74 Cassette 1 Pickup Nip Sensor -
0
J220 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J6137 PS56 Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor -
1
J220 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J6203 PS75 Cassette 2 Pickup Nip Sensor -
1
J220 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J631 - - J6237 PS76 Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor -
8
J221 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J646 - - J6214 M40 Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor -
1
J221 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J646 - - J6130 PS51 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor -
1 A
1 B
1 A
1 B
J221 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J646 J621 - J6234 SW6 Cassette 1 Size Switch -
1 7
J221 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J646 J621 - J6235 SW8 Cassette 2 Size Switch A -
1 6
J224 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J6236 SW9 Cassette 2 Size Switch B -
5
J305 UN3 Front Driver PCB - - - J6064 SL1 Registration Shutter Solenoid -
210
J6087 J6227
J6085 J6226
J6086
J1101
J6077 J6223
J1100
J6225
J1102
J751
J5100 J6224
J6222
J219

bol bol marks
J219 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J1100 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB -
3
J219 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J621 - - J5100 PS19 Right Lower Door Sensor -
3
J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J623 - - J6222 PS47 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Sen- -
2 sor
J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J624 - - J6226 PS70 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper -
0 Length Sensor 1
J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J624 - - J6227 PS71 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper -
0 Length Sensor 2
J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J610 - - J6224 PS72 Multi-Purpose Tray Pullout -
2 Sensor
211

bol bol marks
J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J623 - - J6225 PS73 Multi-Purpose Tray HP Sensor -
2
J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J610 - - J6223 PS78 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roll- -
2 er HP Sensor
J1101 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J624 - - J751 UN52 Multi-Purpose Tray Width -
0 Sensing PCB
J1102 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J506 - - J6087 PS34 Fixing Inlet Sensor -
8
J1102 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J506 - - J6085 PS35 Fixing Arch Sensor 1 -
8
J1102 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J506 - - J6086 PS36 Fixing Arch Sensor 2 -
8
J1102 UN61 Right Door Relay PCB J505 - - J6077 PS38 Duplex Paper Sensor -
4
212
J6076
J6140 J6075
J6065
J6141
J6073
J6092
J6074
J6142
J6078
J6089
J6090
J6103 J6104
J721
J6101
J6102
J720
J722
TP1
J48
J6492
J5007
J6491
J122
J214
J215
J216
J502

bol bol marks
J122 UN1 DC Controller PCB J122 J501 - J720 UN78 Fixing Relay PCB -
1 2
213

bol bol marks
J122 UN1 DC Controller PCB J122 J501 J649 J48 UN79 Fixing IC PCB -
1 2 2
J122 UN1 DC Controller PCB J122 J501 - J6491 TH1 Fixing Heater (Center) -
1 2
J122 UN1 DC Controller PCB J122 J501 - J6491 TH1 Fixing Film (Center) -
1 2
J122 UN1 DC Controller PCB J122 J501 - J6491 TH1 Fixing Heater (Front Edge) -
1 2
J122 UN1 DC Controller PCB J122 J501 - J6491 TH1 Fixing Heater (Rear Edge) -
1 2
J122 UN1 DC Controller PCB J122 J501 - J6492 TH2 Fixing Film (Front Edge) -
1 2
J122 UN1 DC Controller PCB J122 J501 - J6492 TH2 Fixing Film (Rear Edge) -
1 2
J214 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J501 - - J720 UN78 Fixing Relay PCB -
2
J215 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 - - J6142 M23 First & Second Delivery Motor -
1
J215 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 - - J6141 M24 Reverce Motor -
1
J215 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 - - J6140 M25 Third Delivery Motor -
1
J216 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 J510 J508 J6065 SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid -
2 6 3
J216 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 J509 - J6073 SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Sole- -
2 7 noid
J216 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 J509 - J6074 SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid -
2 7
J216 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 J510 - J6090 PS39 Reverse Sensor -
2 6
J216 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 - - J6076 PS40 Duplex Inlet Sensor -
2
J216 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 J510 J508 J6089 PS42 Second Delivery Sensor -
2 6 3
J216 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 - - J6075 PS43 Third Delivery Sensor -
2
J216 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 - - J6092 PS45 Second Delivery Tray Full Sen- -
2 sor
J216 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J503 - - J6078 PS57 Pre-Reverse Sensor -
2
J502 UN6 AC Driver PCB J500 J501 - J5007 H1 Fixing Heater -
6 2
J721 UN78 Fixing Relay PCB - - - J6104 PS30 Fixing Pressure Sensor -
J721 UN78 Fixing Relay PCB - - - J6101 PS37 Inner Delivery Sensor -
J722 UN78 Fixing Relay PCB - - - J6103 PS31 Shutter HP Sensor -
J722 UN78 Fixing Relay PCB - - - J6102 PS32 Shutter Position Sensor -
214
J6067
J6066
J301
J3012
J6061
J6069
J213
J6071
J224
J6068 J217
J412
J6123 J6124
J6122

bol bol marks
J213 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6068 FM5 Fixing Cooling Fan (Front) -
J213 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6069 FM6 Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear) -
J213 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6061 FM7 Delivery Fan 1 -
J213 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6071 FM8 Secondary Transfer Exhaust -
Fan
J217 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6066 FM1 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 -
J217 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6067 FM2 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 -
J224 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6124 FM4 Process Cartridge Fan (Rear) -
J224 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6123 FM10 Process Cartridge Fan (Front) -
J301 UN3 Front Driver PCB - - - J3012 FM9 Delivery Fan 2 -
J412 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J6122 FM3 Power Supply Cooling Fan -
215
J6439
J5060
J5004
J6088
J6091
J3011
J301
J305
J300
J1092/J1091
J302
J109
SW2
J213
J6046
J6096 J217 J409
J224
SW3
J6097 J510
J506

bol bol marks
J109 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J1092 SW1 Main Power Supply Switch -
J109 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J1091 SW1 Main Power Supply Switch -
J213 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6088 PS41 First Delivery Sensor -
J213 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6091 PS44 First Delivery Tray Full Sensor -
J217 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J5004 PS20 Right Door Sensor -
J224 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J6097 PS29 Laser Shutter Sensor -
J300 UN3 Front Driver PCB - - - - SW3 DC Interlock Switch 1 -
J301 UN3 Front Driver PCB J301 - - J3011 PS21 Second & Third Delivery Door -
0 Sensor
J302 UN3 Front Driver PCB - - - J6046 PS17 Toner Container Outer Cover -
Sensor
J305 UN3 Front Driver PCB - - - J6096 PS18 Front Door Sensor -
J409 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J6439 H2 Drum Heater -
J506 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - J5060 H4 Cassette Heater -
J510 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - - SW2 Environment Switch -
216
J101
J109
J1020
J1002 J1021
J1
J1006
J2
J1008
J1
J1
J1001 J1005
J1 J1022
J1007
J1
J1300 J304
J301
J675
J611
J610
J810
J640 J645
J641
J110
J15 J160
J8 J622 J111
J100 J122
J2 J621
J10 J101 J121
J2000 J620
J630 J172 J120
J17 J6
J2010 J657 J173 J123
J7
J1020 J3 J171 J124
J204 J13 J170 J130
J1 J140
J203 J14 J504 J410
J503 J411
J3 J407
J202 J9 J413
J505
J1 J512 J402
J223 J201 J1
J691 J406 J403
J1002 J501
J405 J415
J681 J401
J513 J511
J508 J404
J834 J509
J1001
J835

bol bol marks
J413 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J140 UN1 DC Controller PCB -
J172 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J203 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB -
J170 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J202 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB -
J406 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J201 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB -
J111 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J301 UN3 Front Driver PCB -
J402 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J304 UN3 Front Driver PCB -
J130 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J410 UN5 Relay PCB -
J173 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J505 UN6 AC Driver PCB -
J411 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J504 UN6 AC Driver PCB -
J512 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - J681 UN9 All-Night Power PCB -
J413 UN5 Relay PCB J14 - - J691 UN9 All-Night Power PCB -
J405 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J834 UN10 24V Power Supply PCB -
J511 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - J1002 UN10 24V Power Supply PCB -
J511 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - J1001 UN11 12V Power Supply PCB -
J401 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J835 UN11 12V Power Supply PCB -
217

bol bol marks
J120 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J622 UN17 Primary Transfer/Bk Develop- -
ing Charging High-Voltage
PCB
J121 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J621 UN17 Primary Transfer/Bk Develop- -
PCB
J402 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J620 UN17 Primary Transfer/Bk Develop- -
PCB
J204 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB - - - J630 UN18 Secondary Transfer High-Volt- -
age PCB
J122 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J657 UN18 Secondary Transfer High-Volt- -
age PCB
J171 UN1 DC Controller PCB J171 - - J1300 UN22 Internal Temperature Sensor -
2
J171 UN1 DC Controller PCB J171 - - J810 UN50 Environment Sensor -
3
J124 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J611 UN76 Developing High-Voltage PCB -
(YMC)
J415 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J610 UN76 Developing High-Voltage PCB -
(YMC)
J123 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J641 UN77 Charging High-Voltage PCB -
(YMC)
J610 UN76 Developing High-Voltage PCB - - - J640 UN77 Charging High-Voltage PCB -
(YMC) (YMC)
J100 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J2 - Riser PCB -
J101 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J10 - Riser PCB -
J6 - Riser PCB - - - J1020 - Control Panel CPU PCB -
J3 - Riser PCB - - - J1021 - Control Panel CPU PCB -
J1001 - Control Panel CPU PCB - - - J1 - Control Panel KEY PCB -
J1002 - Control Panel CPU PCB - - - J2 - Control Panel KEY PCB -
J1022 - Control Panel CPU PCB - - - - - Speaker -
J1005 - Control Panel CPU PCB - - - J1 - NFC PCB -
J1006 - Control Panel CPU PCB J12 J14 - J1 - Motion Sensor -
J1006 - Control Panel CPU PCB J12 J11 - J1 - Device Port LED PCB -
J1007 - Control Panel CPU PCB - - - - - Touch Panel -
J1008 - Control Panel CPU PCB - - - - - LCD -
J2000 - Main Controller PCB - - - - - HDD -
J2010 - Main Controller PCB - - - - - HDD -
J15 - Main Controller PCB - - - - FM11 Controller Fan -
J1020 - Main Controller PCB - - - J8 - Riser PCB -
J14 - Riser PCB - - - J413 UN5 Relay PCB -
J14 - Riser PCB - - - J691 UN9 All-Night Power PCB -
J1 - Riser PCB - - - J1 - FAX 1st Line PCB -
J17 - Riser PCB - - - J9 - FAX 1st Line PCB -
J13 - Riser PCB - - - J1 - Wireless LAN PCB -
J7 - Riser PCB - - - J109 UN_ Reader Controlle PCB -
BO1
J407 UN5 Relay PCB J510 J801 - J101 UN_ Reader Controlle PCB -
1 5 BO1
J501 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - - INL3 INLET 120V
HIGH
J501 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - - INL2 INLET 120V
LOW/
230V
J503 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - J5002 - - -
J508 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - - - Paper Deck Heater -
218

bol bol marks
J508 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - J2018 - OUTLET -
J508 UN6 AC Driver PCB - - - J2018 - OUTLET -
J404 UN5 Relay PCB J644 - - J2000 - Option Cassette -
3
J403 UN5 Relay PCB - - - J6440 - Inner Finisher -
J223 UN2 Feed/Drum Driver PCB J640 - - J2001 - Option Cassette -
8
J130 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - - - - -
J110 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J1103 - Finisher -
J170 UN1 DC Controller PCB J357 - - J2091 - Paper Deck Unit -
J160 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J6406 - - -
J160 UN1 DC Controller PCB - - - J6407 - - -
J645 UN77 Charging High-Voltage PCB - - - - - - -
(YMC)
(YMC)
(YMC)
(YMC)
(YMC)
(YMC)
219
■ Reader
J5015
J108
J107
J106
J8013
J110
J101
J102 J5005
J5003 J5004
J5001
J5002
J8014
J1
J401 J2
J7
J509
J No. Symbol Name Relay connector J No. Symbol Name Remarks

J1 UN_BO3 LED PCB(Reader) - - - J401 UN_BO2 CMOS PCB(Reader) -
J2 UN_BO3 LED PCB(Reader) - - - J401 UN_BO2 CMOS PCB(Reader) -
J101 UN_BO2 CMOS PCB(Reader) - - - J106 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB -
J102 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB - - - J5002 PS_A1 Scanner Unit HP Sensor -
J102 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB - - - J5001 PS_N1 Copyboard Cover Open/ -
Closed Sensor (Front)
J102 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB - - - J5003 PS_N2 Copyboard Cover Open/ -
Closed Sensor (Rear)
J107 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB - - - J5004 PS_R1 Original Size Sensor (AB) -
J107 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB - - - J5005 PS_R2 Original Size Sensor (Inch) -
J108 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB - - - J5015 STM1 Scanner Motor -
J110 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB - - - J5007 - - -
J509 UN6 AC Driver PCB J510 J800 - J8013 HTR1 Reader Heater 1 -
2 8
220

J509 UN6 AC Driver PCB J510 J800 - J8014 HTR2 Reader Heater 1 -
2 8
221
■ ADF
J701
J460
J451
J459 J458
J473 J457
J471
J468
J634
J472
J474
J467
J462
J466
J635
J478
J452 J461
J454
J463
J407
J408 J410
J401
J404
J402
J409
J405
J101 J465
J464
J401 J1
J2
J103
J104
J105

J1 UN_BO3 LED PCB(ADF) - - - J401 UN_BO2 CMOS PCB(ADF) -
J2 UN_BO3 LED PCB(ADF) - - - J401 UN_BO2 CMOS PCB(ADF) -
222

J101 UN_BO2 CMOS PCB(ADF) J110 - - J105 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB -
1
J401 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J104 - - J103 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB -
J402 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J104 UN_BO1 Reader Controlle PCB -
J404 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J472 STM1 Registration Motor -
J404 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J471 STM2 Pickup Motor -
J405 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J473 STM3 Read Motor -
J409 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - - FAN_A1 Cooling Fan -
J407 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J474 PS_A1 Arch Sensor -
J407 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J475 - - J461 PS_A2 Delivery Tray Sensor -
J407 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J200 - - J460 PS_N1 Original Sensor -
1
J407 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J451 PS_R1 Post-separation Sensor -
J407 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J464 UN_BO4 Original Display LED -
J407 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J467 CL1 Separation Clutch -
J407 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J475 J478 - J466 SL1 Stamp Solenoid -
J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J459 PS_A5 Cover Open/Closed Sensor -
J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J453 - - J478 PS_A6 Lead Sensor 1 -
J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J454 PS_A7 Lead Sensor 2 -
J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB - - - J462 PS_A9 Glass Movement HP Sensor -
J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J476 - - J452 PS_R2 Registration Sensor -
J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J476 - - J463 UN_BO6 Paper Width Sensor -
J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J476 - - J635 UN_BO7 Double Feed Detection PCB -
(Transmission)
J408 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J102 - - J634 UN_BO8 Double Feed Detection PCB -
7 (Reception)
J410 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J477 - - J465 UN_BO5 Delivery Display LED -
J410 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J477 - - J458 PS_A3 LTR-R/ LGL Sensor -
J410 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J477 - - J457 PS_A4 AB/ Inch Sensor -
J410 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J477 - - J701 PS_R3 Large/Small Sensor -
J410 UN_BO1 ADF Driver PCB J477 - - J468 UN_SNS1 Original Width Volume -
223
Removing the ADF Pre-separation Unit / ADF Separation Roller

■ Procedure
1. Open the Feeder Cover [1].
2. Remove the Pre-separation Unit [2].

• 2 Claws [3]
[1]
2x
[2]
[3]
3. Remove the ADF Separation Roller Shaft [1].
[1]
4. Remove the ADF Separation Roller [1] from the shaft [2].
• 1 Claw [3]
1x [2]
[1]
[3]
224
Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit

■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the ADF Pickup Roller and the ADF Feed Roller.
1. Remove the Feeder Inner Cover (Front) [1] and the Feeder Inner Cover (Rear) [2].
• 2 Claws [3]
• 4 Hooks [4]
[3] [2]
2x
[1]
[4]
[4]
2. Remove the Resin Ring [1].
[1]
3. Pull out the shaft while shifting the 2 bushings [1].
[1]
225
4. Remove the ADF Pickup Roller Unit [1].
[1]
Removing the ADF Pickup Roller and the ADF Feed Roller
■ Preparation
1. Remove the ADF Pickup Roller Unit.“Removing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit” on page 225
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the ADF Pickup Roller and the ADF Feed Roller.
1. Remove the bushing [1] and the 2 Resin Rings [2] from the ADF Pickup Roller Unit.
[2]
[1]
2. Remove the Roller Holder (Front) [1] and the Parallel Pin [2].
[1]
[2]
226
3. Remove the ADF Pickup Roller [1] and the ADF Feed Roller [2].
• 1 Claw [3]
1x [2]
[1]
[3]
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the ADF Pickup Roller [1] with the protrusion [2] on the front side and install the ADF Feed Roller [3] with
the bearing [4] on the rear side.
[4] [3]
[2]
[1]
227
CAUTION:
Installing the Roller Holder (Front) and the Parallel Pin
1. Pass the Roller Holder (Front) [1] through the shaft of the ADF Pickup Roller Unit, and slide it until it comes to the hole
for the Parallel Pin [2].
2. Rotate the gear [3] in the direction shown in the figure below so that the hole for the Parallel Pin is oriented horizontally,
and install the Parallel Pin.
[3]
[1]
[2]
3. Install the Roller Holder (Front) [1] by aligning its grove [2] with the Parallel Pin.
[2]
[1]
Installing the ADF Pickup Roller Unit

■ Procedure
1. Hold the ADF Pickup Roller Unit while lifting the 2 flags [1] with your fingers.
2. Install the bushing [2].
[1]
[2]
228
3. Place the 2 flags [1] of the ADF Pickup Roller Unit on the 2 guides [2] of the feeder, and insert the Pickup Roller Unit
side from above.
[2]
[1]
4. Move the shaft [2] of the ADF Pickup Roller Unit under the 2 flags [1] on the feeder side. Shift the bushing [3] while
compressing the spring, and insert the shaft [2] into the Shaft Support [4] of the feeder. (It is advisable to insert it
from the rear side.)
[1]
[2] [4]
[3]
5. Put the shaft [1] of the ADF Pickup Roller Unit into the Shaft Support (front side) [2] of the feeder, and secure it with
the bushing [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
6. Secure the Resin Ring on the front side.
7. Install the Feeder Inner Cover (Front) and the Feeder Inner Cover (Rear).
229
Removing the ADF

■ Procedure
1. Open the 2 Hinge Covers [1], and remove the 2 Hinge Open/Close Guide Plates [2].
• 4 Screws [3]
4x
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3] [3]
2. Open the ADF.
3. Remove the Reader Cable Cover [1].

• 2 Rubber Caps [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
2x
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and the 2 Flat Cables [2] from the Reader Controller PCB.
• 2 Connectors (with a hook) [3]
3x
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
230
5. Remove the ADF [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the white sheet [1] of the ADF.
• Be careful not to damage the Reader Communication Cable Guide [2] when placing the ADF.
[1]
[2]
4x
[1]
[2]
[2] [2]
Installing the White Plate

■ Preparation
1. Remove the White Plate.
■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF.
231
2. Place the White Plate on the Copyboard Glass while placing "Rear" on the plate on the rear side, and "Front" on the
front side. Be sure to align the Index Sheet with the left side of the White Plate.
3. Close the ADF [1]. Then, open it again.
[1]
4. Press the White Plate [1] from the bottom left shown in the figure.
[1]
232
5. Pull the lever [1] on the upper side of the ADF, and open the cover [2] of the document reading area. Hold down the
8 areas indicated with circles shown in the figure below, and secure the White Plate and the cover of the ADF
document reading area in place.
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Check that the White Plate [1] is not placed on the Index Sheet [2].
[1] [2] [1] [2]
[2] [1] [2] [1]
Removing the ADF Scanner Unit

■ Preparation
1. Removing the ADF Pre-separation Unit“Removing the ADF Pre-separation Unit / ADF Separation Roller” on page
224
233
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Upper Inner Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
[2]
1x
[1]
2. Remove the connector [1] and the round shape terminal [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
• 1 Harness Guide [4]
[3]
1x
1x
[2]
[4]
[1]
3. Free the spring [1] from the hook [2].
[1]
[2]
234
4. While opening the Pickup Tray [1], remove the Delivery Guide [2].
• 4 Screws [3]
• 2 Claws [4]
4x [3] [2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
CAUTION:
Holding the ADF Scanner Unit
• Be sure to hold the handle [1] and the plate [2].
• Do not touch the PCB [3] and the mirror [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5. Disconnect the Flat Cable [2] from the ADF Scanner Unit [1].
• 1 Connector (with a hook) [3]
6. Hold the handle [4] and the plate [5], and remove the ADF Scanner Unit.
• 2 Screws (W Sems) [6]
• 1 Screw (with a spring) [7]
[6]
1x [5]
3x [7]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
235
Cleaning the Paper Back Reading Glass

■ Procedure
1. Pass a sheet of paper on the ADF.
NOTE:
The ADF document reading part is moved to the position for replacing or installing the Paper Back Reading Glass after passing
a sheet of paper on the ADF.
3. Remove the 2 screws [3] of the Front Cover [2].
2x
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4. Open the ADF [1] and remove the 2 screws [3] of the Front Cover [2].
2x [2]
[1] [3]
[3]
5. Open the cover [1] of the ADF document reading part.
236
6. Open the Rear Guide [2] and remove the Paper Back Reading Glass [3].
CAUTION:
Be sure to open the Rear Guide; otherwise, the roller comes in contact with the glass.
[3]
[2]
[1]
7. Clean the front surface [1] and the back surface [2] of the Paper Back Reading Glass with wet and tightly-wrung lint-
free paper [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
CAUTION:
Do not attach the Paper Back Reading Glass over the mylar sheet when installing.
237
Removing the Rear Cover

■ Procedure
2. Remove the 3 screws [3] of the Rear Cover [2].
[1]
3x
[3]
[3]
[2]
NOTE:
The figure below shows the 3 claws [1] and the 2 protrusions [2] of the Rear Cover.
[2]
[1]
3. While opening the Pickup Tray [1], remove the Rear Cover [2].
• 3 Claws [3]
• 2 Protrusions [4]
[1]
3x
[4]
[3]
[2]
[3]
238
4. Remove the parts on the rear side of the ADF as needed.
Cleaning the Lead Roller 1/2/3

■ Procedure
CAUTION:
To clean the Lead Roller 2 and 3, perform the procedure from step 9.
1. Open the ADF Upper Cover [1].
2. Remove the 2 screws [3] of the ADF Front Cover [2].
2x
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
3. Open the ADF [1], and remove the 2 screws [3] of the ADF Front Cover [2].
2x [2]
[1] [3]
[3]
4. Remove the ADF Rear Cover. “Procedure” on page 238
239
5. Remove the ADF Left Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[1]
[2]
6. Remove the screws [2] one each on the front and rear of the Pressure Plate [1] of the Lead Roller 1.
• 1 Screw [3] (P Tightening)
• 1 Screw [4] (RS Tightening)
[3]
1x [2]
[1]
1x
[4]
[2]
240
7. Release the 2 hooks [2] on the front and rear of the Pressure Plate [1], and gently remove the Pressure Plate [1].
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the 6 Compression Springs used inside.
NOTE:
Opening the ADF Upper Cover releases the pressure and makes it easier to perform the work.
[1]
1x 1x
[2]
[2]
8. Clean the Lead Roller 1 [1] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[1]
CAUTION:
When installing the Pressure Plate, check that the 6 Compression Springs are correctly set in the holder on the Lead Roller
side.
NOTE:
Opening the ADF Upper Cover releases the pressure and makes it easier to perform the work.
241
9. When cleaning the Lead Roller 2 [1], open the Rear Guide [3] and cover [2] of the ADF document reading area, and
clean the Lead Roller 2 with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[3]
[2]
10. When cleaning the Lead Roller 3 [1], lift up the ADF Document Pickup Tray, and clean the Lead Roller 3 from the
original delivery outlet side with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[1]
Removing the ADF Driver PCB

■ Preparation
1. Removing the Rear Cover“Removing the Rear Cover” on page 238
242
■ Procedure
1. Remove the ADF Driver PCB [1].
• 8 Connectors [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
[3] [3]
2x
[2]
[2]
8x [1]
[2]
[2]
Removing the Reader Controller PCB

■ Procedure
1. Lift up the hinge part [1] of the ADF to set it to the book original mode.
[1]
2. Open the ADF.
243
3. Remove the Reader Cable Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [3]
2x
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and the 2 Flat Cables [2] from the Reader Controller PCB.
• 2 Connectors (with a hook) [3]
3x
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
5. Remove the Reader Rear Cover [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
4x
[2] [3]
[3] [2]
[2] [2]
[1]
[3]
244
6. Remove the Reader Controller PCB Cover Plate [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
[3]
4x
[1]
[2]
[2]
7. Remove the Flat Cable [2] from the Reader Controller PCB [1].
• 1 Connector (with a hook)
8. Remove the Reader Controller PCB Unit.

• 2 Edge Saddles [4]
• 4 Screws [5]
• 1 Video Cable [6]
[3] [2]
2x [3] 4x
[4]
[1]
5x
[4] [5]
[6]
[1] [5]
9. Remove the Reader Controller PCB [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
[3]
5x
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
When installing the Reader Controller PCB [1], tighten the screw [2] first.
245
Cleaning the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF.
2. Remove the Glass Retainer (Right) [1] and then remove the Copyboard Glass [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
[3]
2x
[3]
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts [1] of the Reader Scanner Unit. If you have touched the grease, be careful not to
put it to other parts.
[1]
3. Move the belt [1], and move the Reader Scanner Unit [2] to the cut-off [3] of the Reader Unit.
[3]
[1]
[2] [2]
4. Loosen the screw [1] to release the tension applied on the belt.
246
5. Remove the 2 screws [2] securing the LED Unit.
2x 1x
[2]
[1]
6. Move the Reader Scanner Unit in the direction of the arrow while paying attention not to make it contact with the
frame of the Reader, and place it as shown in the figure below.
[1] [1]
7. Remove the LED Unit [1].

• 3 Hooks
2x
[1]
[2]
8. Return the Scanner Unit to its original position.
247
9. Clean the mirror [1] with lint-free paper. The following 4 mirrors can be cleaned.
[1]
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
The rearmost mirror [2] cannot be cleaned. However, it is a dustproof mirror, so there is no need to clean it.
Removing the Reader Scanner Unit

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF [1].
248
2. Remove the Glass Retainer (Right) [1] and then remove the Copyboard Glass [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
[3]
2x
[3]
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts [1] of the Reader Scanner Unit. If you have touched the grease, be careful not to
put it to other parts.
[1]
3. Move the belt [1], and move the Reader Scanner Unit [2] to the cut-off [3] of the Reader Unit.
[3]
[1]
[2] [2]
249
4. Loosen the screw [1] to release the tension applied on the belt. After that, remove the belt [3] from the Reader
Scanner Unit [2].
1x
[3]
[1] [2]
CAUTION:
Holding the Reader Scanner Unit
• Be sure to hold both edges [1].
• Do not touch the PCB [2] and the mirror [3].
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
5. Place paper [1] on the Stream Reading Glass, and place the Reader Scanner Unit on it with its upside [2] down.
[2]
[1]
250
6. Disconnect the Flat Cable [1] (with Protection Sheet [2]) from the Reader Scanner Unit.
• 1 Connector (with a hook) [3]
• Guide [A]
[A] [1]
1x
[2]
[3]
CAUTION:
When installing the Reader Scanner Unit, be sure to insert the 4 protrusions [2] of the Flat Cable Protection Sheet [1] into
the guide [A].
[1]
[A]
[2]
[2]
NOTE:
Installation Procedure
When installing the belt to the Reader Scanner Unit, it can be installed easily by removing the belt [2] from the pulley [1].
[1]
[2]
251
Main Controller System
Removing the HDD

■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Actions before Replacement:“Before Replacing” on page 439
1. Open the Right Rear Cover [1].
2. Open the HDD Cap [2].

• 1 Screw [3]
1x
[3] [1]
[2]
3. Remove the HDD Unit [1].
[1]
252
4. Remove the HDD [1] from HDD Support Plate [2].

• 4 Screws [3]
[1]
4x
[2]
[3]
CAUTION:
Actions after Replacement:“Aftter Replacement” on page 441
Removing the Main Controller PCB

■ Preparation
1. Open the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover.
2. Removing the Right Rear Cover

• 3 Screws (Binding)
1)
2)
253
■ Procedure
1. Hold the handle [1] and remove the Main Controller PCB [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
• 1 Board-to-Board Connector [4]
[2] [4]
1x
1x
[3]
[1]
2. Remove the 2 connectors [1], Wire Saddle [2], and Harness Guide [3] from the PCB.
2x
[1] [1]
2x [3]
[2]
3. Turn over the Main Controller PCB and remove the HDD Unit [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
4x
[1]
254
4. Be sure to remove the parts from the old PCB to the new PCB.
CAUTION:
Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial number).
If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to fail the restoration.
• Flash PCB [1]

TPM PCB [2]
Memory PCB [3]
Bypass PCB [4]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
• After replacement of the Main Controller PCB, there is no need to set/register the data again.
CAUTION:
When installing, hold the handle [1], insert the Main Controller PCB [2], check the connection of the Board-to-Board
Connector [3], and secure it with the screw [4].
• 1 Screw
[2] [3]
1x
1x
[4]
[1]
Removing the Riser PCB

■ Preparation
3. Removing the Left Rear Cover
255
4. Removing the Rear Upper Cover

• 1 Rubber Cap
• 4 Screws
• 1 Claw
3)
1)
4)
2)
5. Removing the Main Controller PCB“Removing the Main Controller PCB” on page 253
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Shield Plate [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 4 Screws [3] (to loosen)
[3]
1x
[3]
4x
[2]
[1]
[3]
256
2. If the Fax Unit is installed, disconnect the 3 connectors [1] from the Fax Unit.
CAUTION:
When there are 2 to 4 additional Fax lines, remove them beforehand.
[1]
3x
[1]
3. Remove the Connector Cover [1] avoiding the harness.

• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[1]
[2]
4. Remove the 6 cables [1] and the screw [2].
6x
1x
[1]
[1] [2]
257
5. Remove the Riser PCB [1].

• 7 Screws [3]
[1] [1]
4x 7x
[2] [3]
[2]
[3]
[3]
NOTE:
If the Fax Unit is installed, connect the connectors.
Opening the Controller Box

■ Preparation

• 1 Rubber Cap
• 1 Claw
3)
1)
4)
2)
258
■ Procedure
1. Open the Controller Box [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
2x [2]
[1]
[2]
Removing the DC Controller PCB

■ Preparation
CAUTION:
Actions before Replacement:“Before Parts Replacement” on page 437
2. Removing the Right Rear Cover.
3. Removing the Left Rear Cover.
259
4. Removing the Rear Upper Cover.

• 1 Rubber Cap
• 1 Claw
3)
1)
4)
2)
5. Open the Controller Box.“Opening the Controller Box” on page 258
■ Procedure
1. Remove the DC Controller PCB [1].
• 5 Screws [3]
[2] [3]
18x
[1]
5x
[3]
[2]
[2]
[3]
CAUTION:
When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use the DC Controller PCB which was used with
another machine.
CAUTION:
Actions after Replacement: “Works During Parts Replacement” on page 438
260
Removing the Primary Transfer/Bk Developing Charging High-

Voltage Unit
■ Preparation

• 1 Rubber Cap
• 1 Claw
3)
1)
4)
2)
■ Procedure
1. Remove the harness.
• 6 Wire Saddles [2]
[1]
3x
6x
[2]
261
2. Avoiding the harness [1], remove the Primary Transfer/Bk Developing Charging High-Voltage Unit [2].
• 3 Screws [3]
• 3 Hooks [4]
[3]
3x [2]
[1]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[3]
Removing the Rear Lower Cover

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Connector Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[1]
[2]
2. If the Cassette Pedestal is installed, disconnect the connectors.

• 4 Harness Guides [2]
4x [1]
[1]
[2]
5x [2]
[2]
262
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Claw [3]
• 1 Hook [4]
[4]
2x
[3]
1x
[2] [1]
Removing the Power Supply Unit (12 V/24 V)

■ Preparation
1. Removing the Rear Lower Cover“Removing the Rear Lower Cover” on page 262
■ Procedure
1. Pull the Power Supply Unit [1] out a little.
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 3 Screws [4]
[4]
[2]
2x
1x
3x
[1]
[3]
[4]
263
CAUTION:
When pulling out the Power Supply Unit, be careful not to pull it forcedly because the connector [1] is connected.
[1]
[1]
2. Remove the Fan Duct [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the Power Supply Unit [1].

• 1 Edge Saddle [3]
[1]
2x
1x [3]
[2]
Removing the Feed/Drum Driver PCB

■ Preparation
264

• 1 Rubber Cap
• 1 Claw
3)
1)
4)
2)
■ Procedure
1. Remove the connector on the PCB and then remove the Feed/Drum Driver PCB [1].
• 7 Screws [3]
[3]
[1]
20x [2] [2]
7x
[3]
[3]
[2]
[3]
Removing the Relay PCB

■ Preparation
265

• 1 Rubber Cap
• 1 Claw
3)
1)
4)
2)
■ Procedure
1. Remove the connector on the PCB and then remove the Relay PCB [1].
• 4 Screws [3]
[1] [2]
14x
4x
[3]
[3]
Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage Unit

■ Preparation
266

• 1 Rubber Cap
• 1 Claw
3)
1)
4)
2)
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Hook up the harness [1] freed in step 1 to the 2 hooks [2].
[2]
2x
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
267
1. Open the Feed/Drum Driver PCB [1].

• 2 Screws [4]
1x
[2]
[2] [3]
11x [2] 2x
11x
[4]
[3] [2]
[1] [2]
2. Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage Unit [1].

• 1 Fasten Terminal [3]
• 4 Screws [4]
[2]
2x
[1]
4x
[3] [4]
Removing the AC Driver PCB

■ Preparation
268
■ Procedure
1. Remove all of the connectors on the AC Driver PCB [1].
• 10 Connectors [3] (9 for outside Japan)
6x [2] [3]
10x
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
2. Remove the AC Driver PCB [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
4x
[1]
[2]
Removing the Control Panel

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF [1], and raise the Control Panel [2].
[1]
[2]
269
2. Remove the Reader Front Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [3] (RS Tightening; M3)
• 2 Hooks [4]
• 1 Boss [5]
2x
[5]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
3. Remove the Control Panel Arm Cover [1].

[2]
2x
[2] [3]
[1]
[3]
4. Remove the 3 screws [2] securing the Control Panel Hinge [1].
[2]
3x
[1]
270
5. Place the paper [1] on the Copy Board Glass to prevent damage on the Control Panel.
[1]
6. Free the Control Panel Cable [1] from the 4 Cable Guides [2].
4x
[1]
[2]
7. Pull out the Control Panel [1].
8. Remove the Control Panel Connector Cover [2].

• 5 Claws [3]
9. Remove the Cable Guide [4].
[1] [3]
[2]
5x 1x
[3]
[4]
271
10. Turn over the Control Panel [1] on the Copy Board Glass.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the Control Panel when turning it over.
[1]
11. Remove the Cable Holder [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Hooks [3]
• 1 Boss [4]
1x
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
12. Disconnect the USB Cable [1] and the Control Panel Cable [2].
2x
[2]
[1]
272
13. Remove the 6 screws [2] securing the Control Panel Rear Cover [1].
CAUTION:
The Control Panel is still connected with the Grounding Wire.
[3] [2]
[3]
6x
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
14. Remove the Control Panel Right Hinge [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Boss [3]
[1]
1x
[3]
[2]
15. Turn over the Control Panel Rear Cover [1], remove the screw [2] to disconnect the Grounding Wire [3], and remove
the Control Panel [4].
[2]
[4]
1x
[3]
[1]
CAUTION:
Actions after Replacement:“Actions at Parts Replacement” on page 438
273
Removing the All-night Power Supply PCB

■ Preparation
1. Removing the Rear Lower Cover “Removing the Rear Lower Cover” on page 262
2. Removing the AC Driver Unit

1. Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB, and remove the AC Driver Unit [1].
• 10 Connectors [3] (9 for outside Japan)
• 3 Screws [4]
• 2 Hooks [5]
6x [3] 3x
[2] [5]
[5]
10x [2]
[3] [1] [1]
[4]
[2]
■ Procedure
1. Move the Connector Support Plate [1] so that it does not disturb the work.
• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[1]
[2]
274
2. Remove the All-night Power Supply PCB [1].

• 4 Screws [3]
[2]
2x [1]
4x
[3] [3]
[2]
[3]
Removing the Developing High-Voltage PCB (YMC)/Charging High-

Voltage PCB (YMC)
■ Preparation
1. Pull out the Cassette 2.
2. Open the Waste Toner Container Cover.
3. Pull out the Front Cover.
4. Remove the Left Upper Cover.
5. Remove the Left Lower Cover.
3)
4)
1)
5)
2)
275
■ Procedure
1. Move the guide [1] with the harness attached so that it does not disturb the work.
• 4 Claws [3]
4x
[3]
[1]
4x [2]
[3]
[2]
NOTE:
• To remove the Developing High-Voltage PCB (YMC), perform step 2.
• To remove the Charging High-Voltage PCB (YMC), perform step 3.
2. Remove the Developing High-Voltage PCB (YMC) [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
• 2 Hooks [4]
[4]
1x
2x
[1]
[2]
[3]
276
3. Remove the Charging High-Voltage PCB (YMC) [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
• 3 Hooks [4]
[4]
1x
2x
[1]
[2]
[3]
277
Laser Control System
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass

■ Preparation
1. Open the Front Cover [1].
[1]
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool [1].
[1]
2. Clean the Dustproof Glass from the 4 holes [A] on the Process Unit Front Cover using the Dustproof Glass Cleaning
Tool [1].
[A]
[1]
278
Removing the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Pad

■ Preparation
1. Open the Front Cover [1].
[1]
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool [1].
[1]
2. Remove the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Pad [1].

• 1 Claw [2]
1x
[2]
[1]
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

■ Preparation
1. Removing the ITB Unit“Removing the ITB Unit” on page 283
2. Removing the Process Unit “Removing the Process Unit” on page 322
279
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Before removing the Laser Scanner Unit, be sure to check the serial numbers on the 2 units and the location where the
unit is installed.
Before installing the units, be sure to refer to the serial numbers described above and install each unit to the same location
as that before installation.
If the installation locations of the units are switched by mistake, image displacements may occur.
NOTE:
This procedure shows removal of the Laser Scanner Unit for C/Bk. (The same procedure applies to the Laser Scanner Unit for Y/
M, except for some additional works described later.)
1. Lift and hook the Drum Heater [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Hook [3]
2x [3]
[1] [2]
2. Remove the Image Formation Suction Duct [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Claw [3]
1x [1]
1x
[3]
[2]
NOTE:
The following steps 3 and 4 are required only when removing the Laser Scanner Unit 1 (for Y/M).
280
3. Slide and remove the Left Upper Cover [1] toward the front.
• 5 Screws [2]
• 4 Hooks [3]
5x
[1]
[3]
[2]
4. Remove the Left Duct Unit [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Screws [4]
[1]
1x
[2]
1x
2x [4]
[3]
5. Remove the Scanner Fixation Spring [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[1] [2]
281
6. Remove the Laser Scanner Unit [1].

[1]
[2] [2]
2x 2x
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it requires adjustment.
CAUTION:
When installing the Laser Scanner Unit [1], be sure to insert its protrusion [2] into the hole [2] of the Rear Plate and fit the
boss on the front side with the hole on the plate.
[2] [1]
[3]
[2] [4]
CAUTION:
During the installation, be sure to pass the 2 harnesses [2] through the Sheet Guide [1].
[1]
1x [1] 1x
[2]
[2]
CAUTION:
Actions after Replacement: “Actions after Parts Replacement” on page 441
282
Removing the Toner Filter

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Toner Filter Cover [1].
• 1 Claw [2]
[2]
[1]
1x
2. Remove the Fan Protection Plate [1] and Toner Filter [2].
[2]
[1]
Removing the ITB Unit

■ Preparation
1. Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover, and Right Upper Cover.
[3]
[2]
[1]
283
2. Removing the ITB Cover [1]

2x
[2]
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the surface of the ITB.
• When installing the ITB Cover, be sure to push it to the left. If the pushing is insufficient, the plate is not inserted to the
slit of the ITB Cover, which may cause the damage of the sensor.
■ Procedure
1. Be sure to check that the arrow on the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever [1] is aligned with the triangle mark [2] on
the plate.
(If not, align the arrow on the lever with the triangle mark on the plate.)
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
284
2. Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow until the protrusion [2] on the handle is aligned
with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure.
[2] [2]
[1]
CAUTION:
When operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever, be sure to check that the Right Lower Cover is opened before the
operation.
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
1x [1]
CAUTION:
When pulling out the ITB Unit [1], be sure not to lower the ITB Pressure Release Lever [2] below the position [3] where it
clicks. If the ITB Unit is pulled out while the lever is lowered, the ITB is scraped by the plate and this may cause scratches
on the ITB surface.
Also be sure that the Process Unit is not pulled out. If it is pulled out, the clearance with the ITB Unit becomes smaller,
which may result in damage to the surface of the ITB.
[1] [2]
[3]
285
4. Pull out the ITB Unit [1] to the stop label position [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
[1]
2x
[2]
[3]
[3]
CAUTION:
When pulling out the ITB Unit, be sure not to lift it up as this may cause the unit not to click at the stop position and fall.
286
5. Hold the ITB Unit [1] as shown in the figure and remove it in the direction of the arrow. Put the ITB Unit on paper to
prevent scattering of toner from the ITB Cleaning Unit.
[1]
CAUTION:
• When the ITB Unit is removed even if it is not replaced, execute COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ITB-INIT.
• Be careful not to make mistakes when installing the ITB Unit since there is no compatibility with the existing products
(iR-ADV C52XX/iR-ADV C50XX).
• When installing the ITB Unit [1], be sure to align it with the 2 ends of the rails [2].
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Actions after Replacement:“Adjustment after installing ITB Unit” on page 442
Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor

■ Preparation
287
■ Procedure
1. While pressing the shutter [1], clean the surface [2] of the Registration Patch Sensor in a single direction with a wet
and tightly-wrung cotton swab. After cleaning, check that there is no soiling caused by toner on the surface of the
sensor.
CAUTION:
• Do not use alcohol because it causes melting and clouding of the sensor window.
• Do not dry wipe the sensor window because it is charged to attract toner.
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Removing the Registration Patch Sensor (Front), (Middle), (Rear)

■ Preparation
2. Removing the Process Unit“Removing the Process Unit” on page 322
■ Procedure
1. Remove the 2 screws [1], and then remove the Shutter Drive Unit [2] of the sensor.
2x
[1]
[2]
288
2. Remove the shutter [1] of the sensor.

• 2 Claws [2]
2x [1]
[2]
3. Remove the Pre-secondary Transfer Guide [1].

Take care to not apply too much force to the Pre-secondary Transfer Guide.
• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Grounding Wire [3]
[3]
2x
[1]
[2] [2]
4. Remove the Registration Patch Sensor Unit [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
• 4 Bosses [3]
4x
[1]
[3] [3] [3]
[2] [2]
289
5. Pull out the Registration Patch Sensor Unit [1], and remove the Cover [2]. (Example of the Registration Patch Sensor
(Rear))
[1] [2]
6. Pull out the sensor [1], disconnect the connector, and remove the sensor you want to replace. (Example of the
Registration Patch Sensor (Rear))
• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Connector [3]
2x 1x
[3]
[1] [2]
CAUTION:
Actions after Replacement:“Actions after Parts Replacement” on page 443
Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit

■ Preparation
290
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
When installing/removing, be sure to keep the ITB Cleaning Unit [1] from coming in contact with the ITB [2].
[2]
[1]
NOTE:
Moving the ITB [1] away from the ITB Cleaning Unit [2] will generate a clearance, making the work easier.
[2]
[1]
1. Hold the handles [1] on the right and left side and remove the ITB Cleaning Unit [2] in the direction of the arrow.
• 2 Screws [3]
[1]
[2]
2x
[1]
[3]
291
2. Put the removed ITB Cleaning Unit [1] on the paper [2].
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the handle is not caught when installing the ITB Cleaning Unit.
CAUTION:
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit

■ Preparation
2. Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit“Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit” on page 290
292
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the ITB Cleaning Blade [1].
[1]
1. Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1] and put it on paper.
• 1 Stepped Screw [2]
• 1 Wave Washer [3]
• 1 Blade Alignment Plate [4]
NOTE:
The ITB Cleaning Blade Unit can be removed easily by holding the ends of the 2 screws [1] of the unit.
[1] [1]
[2]
1x [3]
[4]
[1]
CAUTION:
293
Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit

■ Preparation
3. Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit“Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit” on page 292
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the ITB Cleaning Blade [1].
[1]
1. Insert a sheet of A4 size paper [2] between the Blade Unit installation position of the ITB Cleaning Unit and the sheet
[1].
[2]
[1]
294
2. Install the Blade Alignment Plate, and then install the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1]. At this time, be sure to move the
paper [2] inserted in step 1 toward the direction shown in the figure to prevent the sheet [3] from flipping in advance.
[1] 1x
[2]
[4]
[3]
3. While paying attention not to bend the Protection Sheet [1], lift the sheet using a screwdriver. After that, check that
the sheet that is being lifted is above the pad [2].
[1]
[2] [1]
295
4. Apply Tospearl [1] to a whole area [A] shown in the figure below.
[1] [A]
NOTE:
Example when applying Tospearl
CAUTION:
When applying Tospearl, be careful not to scatter it inside the ITB or on the Drive Roller or Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
If it scatters inside the ITB or on the Drive Roller or Secondary Transfer Inner Roller, wipe it off using lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol while rotating the motor by hand. Be sure to rotate the motor counterclockwise only and be careful
not to turn it clockwise.
CAUTION:
Removing the ITB

■ Preparation
296
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the ITB. (When you touch the ITB, touch the areas within 10mm from each edge of the belt.)
■ Procedure
1. Turn over the ITB Unit.
2. Remove the Bush Slider [1].

• 1 E-ring [2]
[2]
[1]
3. Pull the ITB Pressure Release Lever [1] toward the front.
4. Free the harness [2].

[4]
4x
[3]
[2]
[1]
297
5. Remove the pin [1] on the rear side.

• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
Put the ITB Cover with its upside down at the location where you are going to stand the ITB Unit.
6. Lift up the ITB Unit [1], and stand it on the ITB Cover [2].
CAUTION:
• Be sure to check that it has been freed from the hooks [3] on the front and rear side.
• Be sure to align the claws [4] of the ITB Cover with the cut in the Protection Sheet.
• In order to prevent the ITB from being damaged, be sure to place a sheet of paper [5] between the ITB Unit and the
ITB Cover as needed.
• 2 Claws
2x
[1]
[2]
[4]
[4] [5]
[3] [5]
298
7. Remove the pin [1] on the front side.
NOTE:
Hold the ITB Unit with a hand while removing the pin to lock the pressure.
• 1 Screw [2]
[2]
1x
[1]
8. Bend the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit [1] at 90 degrees, and secure it with the pin [2] removed in step 7.
[2]
[1]
9. When removing the ITB [1], insert paper [2] as shown in the figure to prevent it from being damaged by the plate.
[2]
[2]
[1]
299
10. Hold the area within 10mm from the edges of the ITB, and remove it upward.
10mm
10mm
[1]
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the ITB Drive Roller [1], Secondary Transfer Inner Roller [2], and Primary Transfer Roller [3];
otherwise, it can cause an image failure.
[2]
[1] [3]
CAUTION:
Installing the ITB

■ Preparation
3. Removing the ITB“Removing the ITB” on page 296
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be careful not to make mistakes when installing the ITB Unit and ITB since there is no compatibility with the existing products
(iR-ADV-C52XX series / iR-ADV-C50XX series).
300
1. Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever [1] is in the position shown in the figure below.
[1]
2. Stand the ITB Unit [2] straight up on the ITB Cover [1].
• 2 Claws [3]
[2]
2x
[1]
[3]
[3]
NOTE:
If the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet included in the package is available, cover the ITB Unit with it as shown in the figure below.
(Place the slant area [1] to the ITB Motor side.) The framed area [2] is the area where the ITB is easily damaged, so be sure that
the area is covered with the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet. After installing the ITB, remove the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet.
[1]
[2]
3. Place paper [1] on the ITB Cover to prevent bending of the ITB because pressure is applied to a point when installing
the ITB.
301
4. Hold the area within 10mm from the edges of the ITB, and temporarily place the ITB using the marking line [2] as a
guide.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend the ITB when bringing it down fully.
10mm
10mm [2]
[1]
5. Pull out the pin [1] and straighten the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit [2] for approx. 70%. (To stretch the ITB
for approx. 90%.)
[1]
[2]
302
6. Put the ITB [1] under the Belt Retainer Sheet [2] (on the left side of the figure), bring the ITB Displacement Sensor
Flag [3] into contact with the ITB edge (at the center of the figure), and then, align the marking line [4] (on the right
side of the figure) with the position of the ITB.
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
CAUTION:
When installing the ITB, be sure that the sheet [1] on the ITB Unit is inside of the ITB [2].
[2]
[1]
7. Straighten the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit [1] and install the removed pin [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
[3]
1x
[2]
[1]
303
8. Remove the ITB Unit [1] from the ITB Cover [2], and align it with the 2 hooks [3] of the ITB Unit to install it to the
plate (outer frame).
• 2 Claws [4]
2x
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
9. Install the pin [1] on the rear side.

• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[1]
[2]
304
10. Press the ITB Pressure Release Lever [1] and install the Bush Slider [2] to the boss [3].
• 1 E-ring [4]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the ITB Pressure Release Lever [1] and the plate [2].
[3]
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the shaft [1] is attached to the Fixation Member [2].
[1]
[2]
305
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the hooks [1] are hooked to the plates [2].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
11. Install the harness [1].

[3]
4x
[1]
[2]
12. Turn over the ITB Unit.
306
13. Install the ITB Cleaning Unit.
CAUTION:
• When replacing the ITB with a new one, install the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB Unit and then apply lubricant to the
whole area shown in the figure below.
[1] [A]
• When applying lubricant, be careful not to scatter it inside the ITB or on the Drive Roller or Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller.
• If it scatters inside the ITB or on the Drive Roller or Secondary Transfer Inner Roller, wipe it off using lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol while rotating the motor by hand. Be sure to rotate the motor counterclockwise only and be
careful not to turn it clockwise.
NOTE:
Example when applying Tospearl
307
CAUTION:
When the ITB has been replaced, be sure to affix the label [1] included in the package as shown in the figure below. If a
label is already affixed, affix the label over it.
[1]
CAUTION:
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk)

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Drive Roller [1], Secondary Transfer Inner Roller [2] and Primary Transfer Roller [3];
[2]
[1] [3]
1. Pull out the pin [1] and straighten the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit [2].
308
2. Install the pin [1] removed in step 1 back into place.
[1]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the ITB Unit [1] from the ITB Cover [2], install it to the plate (outer frame) and place it on the paper [3] with
the roller side facing up.
• 2 Claws [4]
[1]
2x [1]
[2]
[3] [2]
[4]
CAUTION:
[1]
[2]
309
4. While holding the Bushing [1] on the front side, remove the Stopper [2] by pinching it with fingers.
[1]
[2]
310
5. Remove the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk) [1].

• 1 Shaft Support (Front) [2]
• 1 Spring [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
NOTE:
There is no specified direction for the installation of the Primary Transfer Roller.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to wrap it in paper [2] as shown in the figure below to avoid touching the surface of the Primary Transfer Roller
[1].
• Be sure not to touch the surface of the Primary Transfer Roller [1].
• Grease is applied on the shaft [A] of the Primary Transfer Roller. If you have touched the grease, be careful not to put
it to other parts.
[2]
[A]
[1]
CAUTION:
If the springs for the Primary Transfer Rollers of different colors (Bk/C/M/Y) are mixed, refer to the table shown below.
Name Configuration Characteristics Quanti-

ty
Spring Shorter than other springs. The end of 2 pcs
For Bk the spring is bent.
Spring Longer than the spring of Bk. 6 pcs

For CMY
311
CAUTION:
After installing the Primary Transfer Roller, hold down the Stopper [1] lightly with fingers to check that the claw is fitted
properly.
[1]
CAUTION:
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C, M, Y)

■ Preparation
1. Removing the ITB Unit (Reference: “Removing the ITB Unit” on page 283)
2. Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit (“Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit” on page 290)
3. Removing the ITB (“Removing the ITB” on page 296)
■ Procedure
NOTE:
In this procedure, the procedure for the Primary Transfer Roller (C) is described. Perform the same procedure for (M, Y).
CAUTION:
[2]
[1] [3]
312
2. Install the pin removed in step 1 back into place.
[1]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the ITB Unit [1] from the ITB Cover [2], install it to the plate (outer frame) and place it on the paper [3] with
the roller side facing up.
• 2 Claws [4]
[1]
2x [1]
[2]
[3] [2]
[4]
CAUTION:
[1]
[2]
313
4. Turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever [1] to raise the Primary Transfer Roller (C, M, Y).
(M) (Y)
(C)
[1]
5. While holding down the Shaft Support (Front) [1], remove the Engagement/Disengagement Arm by pinching it with
your fingers [2].
[1] [2]
CAUTION:
If the Engagement/Disengagement Arms for the Primary Transfer Rollers of different colors (Y and C/M) are mixed, refer
to the table shown below.
Name Characteristics Remarks

Engagement/Disengagement Arm Black color for both the front and rear For this machine only
For Y sides
Engagement/Disengagement Arm White color for both the front and rear
For C/M sides
6. While holding the Shaft Support (Front) [1], remove the stopper [3] from the boss [2].
[3]
[2]
[1]
314
7. Remove the Primary Transfer Roller (C) [1].

• 1 Shaft Support (Front) [2]
• 1 Spring [3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
NOTE:
There is no specified direction for the installation of the Primary Transfer Roller.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to wrap it in paper [2] as shown in the figure below to avoid touching the surface of the Primary Transfer Roller
[1].
• Be sure not to touch the surface of the Primary Transfer Roller.
• Grease is applied on the shaft [A] of the Primary Transfer Roller. If you have touched the grease, be careful not to put
it to other parts.
[A]
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
If the springs for the Primary Transfer Rollers of different colors (Bk/C/M/Y) are mixed, refer to the table shown below.
Name Configuration Characteristics Quanti-

ty
Spring Shorter than other springs. The end of 2 pcs
For Bk the spring is bent.
Spring Longer than the spring of Bk. 6 pcs

For CMY
315
CAUTION:
• After installing the Primary Transfer Roller (C, M, Y), turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever [1] to check that the
Primary Transfer Roller (C, M, Y) moves up and down.
• After performing the check, lower the Primary Transfer Roller (C, M, Y).
(C) (M) (Y)
[1]
CAUTION:
Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
[2]
[1] [3]
316
2. Install the pin removed in step 1 back into place.
[1]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the ITB Unit [1] from the ITB Cover [2], and place it on the paper [3] with the roller side facing up.
• 2 Claws [4]
[1]
2x [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
4. Remove the Grounding Plate [1] and the Secondary Transfer Shaft Support Holder [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
1x
[2]
[1]
[3]
317
5. Remove the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller [1].
[1]
6. Apply grease to both ends of the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller [1] by spreading a rice-grain sized grease
(FY9-6006: Super Lubu) in the circumferential direction of the shaft.
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller [1] in the correct direction.
[1]
CAUTION:
318
Removing the Waste Toner Container

■ Procedure
1. Open the Waste Toner Container Cover [1].
[1]
2. Remove the Waste Toner Container [1].
[1]
CAUTION:
Do not tilt the Waste Toner Container.
(To prevent false recognition of the Waste Toner Sensor.)
Pulling out the Process Unit

■ Preparation
1. Open the Front Cover [1], Right Lower Cover [2] and Right Upper Cover [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
319
2. Removing the ITB Cover [1]

2x
[2]
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
• When pulling out the Process Unit, be sure that the ITB Unit is not pulled out because it will make the clearance smaller.
• Do not touch the surface of the ITB.
• When installing the ITB Cover, be sure to push it to the left. If the pushing is insufficient, the plate is not inserted to the
slit of the ITB Cover, which may cause the damage of the sensor.
■ Procedure
the plate.
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
320
CAUTION:
operation.
[2] [2]
[1]
3. Turn the Process Unit Shutter Lever [1] and remove the cover [2].
• 1 Screw [3] (to loosen)
1x
[1]
[2]
[3]
CAUTION:
Do not push down the pin [1] with your finger and turn the lever [2], as doing so will open the shutter and cause toner to
leak.
4. Pull out the Process Unit [1] until it stops.

• 2 Screws [2]
321
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Drum.
2x
[1]
[2]
5. Place 5 or more sheets of paper [1] on the Process Unit to block the light to the Drum Unit.
[1]
Removing the Process Unit

■ Preparation
1. Pull out the Process Unit.“Pulling out the Process Unit” on page 319
■ Procedure
1. Remove the 4 Stepped Screws [4] from the right and left rails.
4x
[1]
[1]
322
2. Hold the front and rear of the Process Unit [1] and remove it horizontally.
[1]
3. Slide the 2 rails [1] of the Process Unit back into the host machine.
[1]
NOTE:
When installing the Process Unit, if the Laser Dustproof Shutter is opened and blocks to install the unit, turn ON and then OFF the
power. Be sure to check that the Dustproof Shutter is closed before installation.
Installing the Process Unit

■ Preparation
1. Pulling out the Process Unit“Pulling out the Process Unit” on page 319
323
■ Procedure
the plate.
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
CAUTION:
operation.
[2] [2]
[1]
3. Slide the 2 rails [1] of the Process Unit out of the host machine.
[1]
324
4. Install the Process Unit by aligning the Positioning Pins [1] of the rails with the 4 grooves [2] of the Process Unit.
[2] [2]
[2]
[1] [1]
[1]
5. Secure the rails on the right and left side and the Process Unit with the 4 Stepped Screws [1].
6. Remove the paper [2] from the Process Unit.
4x
[1]
[2] [1]
CAUTION:
When securing with the screws, be sure to check that there is no gap [A] between the host machine and the Process Unit.
[A]
325
7. Slowly slide the Process Unit [1] back into the host machine, and secure it with the 2 screws [2].
2x
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
After closing the Process Unit, press the 8 grips [1] of Drum Units from the top as shown in the figure below.
If the Drum Unit [2] is not installed properly, it may cause color displacement.
[1]
[2]
8. Install the cover and close the Process Unit Shutter Lever [1].
• 1 Screw (to tighten)
[1]
326
9. Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to apply pressure.
CAUTION:
• When operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever, be sure to check that the Right Lower Cover is opened before the
operation.
• When applying pressure with the ITB Pressure Release Lever, be sure that the protrusion [2] on the handle [1] is
aligned with the triangle mark [3] on the lower side of the plate.
[2]
[3]
[1]
10. Install the ITB Cover [1] and tighten the 2 loosened screws [2].
CAUTION:
When installing the ITB Cover, be sure to push it to the left. If the pushing is insufficient, the plate is not inserted to the slit
of the ITB Cover, which may cause the damage of the sensor.
2x
[2]
[1]
11. Close the Front Cover.
12. Close the Right Upper Cover.
13. Close the Right Lower Cover.
Removing the Drum Unit

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Drum.
327
1. Hold the handles [2] of the Drum Unit [1] with both hands, and pull it out vertically.
CAUTION:
When removing the Drum Unit [1], do not pull only one of the grips.
[1]
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to cover the removed Drum Unit [1] with 5 or more sheets of paper [2] to block light.
[2]
[1]
Installing the Drum Unit

■ Preparation
2. Removing the Drum Unit“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 327
328
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the surface of the Drum.
• Be sure to refer to the following NOTE when installing the Drum at the Bk position.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install it straight from above. Installing it from an oblique direction may cause damage to the shutter.
1. Hold the grips [1] and install it straight from above.
[1]
329
2. Align the guide [1] of the Developing Unit with the guide [2] of the Drum Unit, and install the Drum Unit [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the shutter [2] slides along the rail [1] and is located in the correct position as shown in the figure
below to prevent the rail [1] from being damaged.
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
3. Hold down each of the 8 grips [1] lightly with a finger to check that the Drum Units [2] are installed properly.
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Removing the Developing Unit

■ Preparation
330
■ Procedure
NOTE:
Perform the following procedure to remove the Developing Unit for Bk. Repeat the same procedure to remove the Developing
Units for Y, M, and C.
CAUTION:
• Be sure not to touch the Developing Cylinder during installation/removal.
1. Free the harness [2] from the 2 Harness Guides [1], and disconnect the connector [3].
[2]
2x
1x
[1]
[3]
2. Remove the Stepped Screw [1].
1x
[1]
331
3. Remove the Developing Unit [2] upward while pulling the stopper [1].
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Fit the 2 pins [1] of the Developing Unit into the holes [2] of the Process Unit, and insert the 2 pins [3] of the stopper in the
holes [4] of the Developing Unit when assembling.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the contact point of the drum (on the host machine side) when installing the Developing Unit.
332
Installing a New Developing Unit

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Install the Developing Unit to the Process Unit in the reverse order of "Removing the Developing Unit".
333
2. Hold down the Developing Unit, hold the grip [1] of the Developing Unit Seal, and pull out the Developing Unit Seal
[2] upward.
Repeat this step for each color.
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to hold down the top of each Developing Unit. If the Developing Unit is held down insufficiently, the cover may get
loose when pulling out the seal.
CAUTION:
When removing the Developing Unit Seal, slowly lift it up in the vertical direction.
Lifting the Developing Unit Seal in an oblique direction applies stress on the seal, which can cause the seal to tear.
334
CAUTION:
If the Developing Unit Seal [1] tears by accident, pull out the end of the torn seal in the direction of the arrow.
Be sure that the torn seal does not remain inside the Developing Unit.
[1]
[1]
CAUTION:
• To check that the Developing Unit is properly installed, move the Developing Unit toward the front and rear by hand.
If it won't move at all, check again that the Developing Unit is properly installed.
• Be sure not to touch the Developing Cylinder during the work.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the contact point of the drum (on the host machine side) when installing the Developing Unit.
3. Follow "Installing the Drum Unit" to install the Drum Unit of each color.
CAUTION:
Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit

■ Preparation
335
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Process Unit Shutter Lever [1].
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Parallel Pin [3]
[3]
[2] [1]
2. Remove the Process Unit Front Cover [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]
3x
2x
[1]
[3]
[2]
3. Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit Upper Cover [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
4x
[1]
336
4. Disconnect the 6 connectors from the PCB.

• 1 Harness Guide [3]
6x
[1]
3x
[2]
[1]
[3]
5. Remove the Frame Front Holder [1].

• 5 Screws [2]
[1]
5x
[2]
[2]
6. Remove the Waste Toner Feed Motor [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[2]
[1]
[2]
337
7. Remove the Shutter Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 4 Hooks [3]
• 1 Hook [4]
• 4 Bosses [5]
[2] [3]
2x [2]
[3] [5]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1] [3]
CAUTION:
When installing the Shutter Cover, check that the hook [1] on the back side is hooked to the plate [2] and that the Shutter
Cam Link [3] is joined to the Shutter Cam [4].
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[1]
338
8. Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
3x [2]
[2]
[1] [2]
Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller/Secondary Transfer

Separation Guide Unit
■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Secondary Transfer Roller [1].
[1]
1. Place paper where the Secondary Transfer Roller Unit is to be placed.
339
2. Remove the stopper [1] on the rear side.

• 1 Claw [2]
1x [1]
[2]
3. Hold the claws [1] of the Shaft Support Holder on both sides, and remove the Secondary Transfer Roller Unit [2].
• 4 Claws [1]
[2]
4x
[1]
4. Remove the Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit [1].

• 1 Bushing [2]
• 2 Springs [3]
[3]
[3]
[2] [1]
340
5. Remove the Secondary Transfer Roller [1].

• 2 Shaft Support Holders [2]
• 2 Bearings [3]
[2]
[3] [3]
[2]
[1]
Installing the Secondary Transfer Roller/Secondary Transfer

Separation Guide Unit
■ Preparation
1. Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller/Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit“Removing the Secondary
Transfer Roller/Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit” on page 339
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Secondary Transfer Roller.
1. Install the Secondary Transfer Roller with its longer shaft [1] on the hole side [2] of the Secondary Transfer
Separation Guide Unit.
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
After installing the Secondary Transfer Roller, be sure to check that the Shaft Support Holders rotate.
2. Fit the protrusion [1] into the groove [2] of the guide, and install the bushing.
341
3. Install the springs [3] to the protrusions [4] on both sides.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the springs [1] on the side of the Duplex Unit are not installed askew.
[1]
[1]
4. Align the protrusions [1] on the Shaft Support Holders of the Secondary Transfer Roller Unit with the springs [2] on
the side of the Duplex Unit, and install them alternately, one side at a time.
[1]
[2]
5. Install the stopper.
CAUTION:
Removing the Main Drive Unit
342
■ Preparation
NOTE:
Pulling out the Process Unit for about 5cm in advance will make installation of the Main Drive Unit easier.
2. Remove the Right Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Left Rear Cover.
4. Remove the Connector Cover.

• 1 Screw
7)
3)
1)
6)
2)
4)
5. When the Cassette Pedestal is installed, remove the connector.

• 4 Harness Guides [2]
4x [1]
[1]
[2]
5x [2]
[2]
343
6. Remove the Rear Lower Cover.

• 2 Screws (RS Tightening; M4)
• 1 Claw
• 1 Hook
7. Remove the Rear Upper Cover.

• 1 Rubber Cap
• 4 Screws (Binding; M3)
• 1 Claw
■ Procedure
1. Open the Controller Box [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[1]
[2]
[2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to hook up the harness [1] freed in step 2 to the 2 hooks [2].
[2]
2x
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
344
2. Open the Feed/Drum Driver PCB [1].

• 2 Screws [4]
1x
[2]
[2] [3]
11x [2] 2x
11x
[4]
[3] [2]
[1] [2]
3. Open the Relay PCB [1].

• 1 Fan Relay Connector [2]
• 1 Screw [6] (Binding; M4)
[1]
3x
3x [5]
1x
[4]
[5]
[6] [5]
[3] [4]
[2]
345
4. Remove the Fan Duct [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Claw [3]
1x
[1]
2x
[3] [2]
[2]
346
5. Remove the Main Drive Unit [1].

• 7 Screws [2] (RS Tightening)
7x
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to fit the 2 holes [1] of the Main Drive Unit to the shafts [2] of the host machine, and fit the 4 couplings [3] into the
holes [4] of the host machine when installing.
At this time, pulling out the Process Unit for about 5cm will make installation easier.
[2]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
CAUTION:
When replacing the Drum Motor (M1 [1] / M4 [2]), replace it with the Process Unit installed to prevent phase shift.
[1]
[2]
347
Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Pull up the Control Panel [1] and remove the Right Front Cover [2].
• 1 Screw [3] (to remove)
• 1 Screw [4] (to loosen)
• 1 Claw [5]
[1]
1x 1x
[3]
[5]
[2]
[4]
2. Open the Toner Replacement Cover [1] and remove the Small Plate [2].
1x
[2]
[3]
[1]
348
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover [1].

2x
[3]
[1]
[2]
4. Remove the Front Upper Right Cover [1].
[1]
5. Remove the Inner Delivery Cover (Left Rear) [1].

• 1 Boss [2]
[1] [2]
349
6. Remove the Delivery Tray [1].

• 4 Hooks [2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
7. Remove the Inner Delivery Cover (Left) [1].

• 4 Hooks [2]
[1]
[2]
8. Remove the Inner Delivery Middle Cover [1].

• 2 Bosses [2]
[2]
[1]
350
9. Open the 4 Small Covers [1] and remove the 4 Toner Containers [2].
[2]
[1]
10. Remove the Toner Container Front Inner Cover [1].

• 4 Screws [3]
[1]
4x 2x
[2]
[3]
[3]
Removing the Hopper Unit (M)
■ Preparation
2. Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover“Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover” on page 348
351
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Toner Tray [1].
• 5 Hooks [3]
1x [1]
[2]
[3]
352
2. Remove the Hopper Unit [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Screws [3]
[2]
1x
[4]
[1] 2x
1x
[3]
[3]
[4]
CAUTION:
Be sure to gently place the Hopper Unit [1] on its side on paper [2] as shown in the figure below to prevent scattering of
toner inside the hopper.
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
When installing the Toner Tray, be sure to align the Rod Lever [1] with the Toner Cover Open/Close Rod Lever [2].
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
When installing the removed Toner Container, do not shake it.
CAUTION:
When removing the Main Drive Unit simultaneously, install the Main Drive Unit and Hopper Unit in that order.
Toner supply failure may occur.
353
Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)
■ Preparation
3. Remove the Left Cover.
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Hopper Stay [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
When removing the Hopper Upper Stay, be sure not to bend the [A] part.
[A]
354
2. Remove the Rail Retainer Plate [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
[2]
3x
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the Left Middle Stay [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
4x
[1]
[2]
[2]

• 1 Screw [2]
• 5 Hooks [3]
1x
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
355

• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Screws [3]
[2]
1x [4]
[4]
[3] 2x
1x [3]
[1]
[4]
CAUTION:
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
356
Removing the Hopper Unit (C)
■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. While opening the guide, remove the Hopper Upper Stay [1].
• 2 Hooks [3]
1x
[3] [2]
[1]
CAUTION:
When removing the Hopper Upper Stay, be sure not to bend the [A] part.
[A]
357
2. Remove the Rail Retainer Plate [1].

• 3 Screws [2] (Binding; M4)
[2]
3x
[1]

• 5 Hooks [3]
1x [3]
[1] [2]
[3]
358

• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Screws [3]
[2]
1x
2x
[4]
[4]
1x [3] [3]
[1]
[4]
CAUTION:
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
359
Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk)
■ Preparation
3. Removing the Hopper Unit (C)“Removing the Hopper Unit (C)” on page 357
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Toner Tray [1] for Bk only.
• 5 Claws [3]
[3]
1x
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
360

• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Screws [3]
• 1 Claw [5]
[2]
1x [4]
[4]
2x
[3]
[3]
1x
[1]
[5]
[4]
CAUTION:
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
361
CAUTION:
362
Fixing System
Removing the Fixing Unit

■ Preparation
1. Open the Right Lower Cover [1] and the Right Upper Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
1. Open the Fixing Rail [1], and loosen the 5 screws [2].
[2]
5x
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
2. Hold the tabs [2] and pull out the Fixing Unit [1].
[2] [1]
363
3. Hold the handle [2] and remove the Fixing Unit [1].
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
• When installing the Fixing Unit, be sure to insert it until it stops and then tighten the 5 screws while holding down the
[A] parts as shown in the figure below.
[1]
5x
[1]
[1]
[A]
[A]
• If the Fixing Unit is not installed properly, abnormal noise from the Fixing Gear or E009 may occur.
In such case, remove and then install the Fixing Unit again.
Removing the Film Unit

■ Preparation
2. Removing the Fixing Unit“Removing the Fixing Unit” on page 363
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the Fixing Film or the Pressure Roller during installation/removal.
1. Change the direction of the Fixing Unit. (Place it so that the Drawer Connector [1] is on the top side.)
364
2. Remove the PCB [2].

• 1 Screw [3]
[1]
1x
[3]
[2]
3. Free the harness.

• Harness Guide [A]
[1]
4x
[1]
[2]
[B]
[2]
5x [1]
[A]
4. Turn over the Shutter Unit [1] so that it does not disturb the work.
• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
[2]
4x
[1]
365
CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation
Do not install Shutter Unit [1] askew or move it in the front/back or right/left direction too much at installation. The Fixing
Shutter Cover [A] and the shutters [B] of the Shutter Unit [1] may come in contact with the Fixing Film [2], resulting in damage
of the film.
[A]
[1]
[2]
[B]
NOTE:
How to install the Shutter Unit
1. Fit the holes [A] of the Shutter Unit [1] onto the 3 protrusions [B] and insert the Shutter Unit while keeping it parallel to the
Fixing Assembly.
[A]
[A] [1]
[A] [A]
[B]
[B]
2. Fit the protrusion C] and install the Shutter Unit [1] while pushing the frame [2] of the Fixing Unit in the direction of the arrow.
Check that the holes [A] of the Shutter Unit [1] are fit onto the 5 protrusions [B].
[B]
[B]
[1] [B] [A] [A]
[B]
[2] [C]
366
5. Rotate the Pressure Gear [1] by hand and make the Pressure Roller engaged.
Pressure Roller
Engaged State
[1]
CAUTION:
If you leave the Fixing Unit for a long time, rotate the Pressure Gear [1] by hand and make the Pressure Roller disengaged.
Do not leave the Fixing Unit with the Pressure Roller engaged for a long time.
Pressure Roller
Disengaged State
[1]
6. Open the left and right Pressure Levers [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
2x
[1]
[1]
[1]
367
7. Remove the Fixation Plate [1] on the front side.

• 1 Screw [2]
1x [1]
[2]
8. Free the harness from the Harness Guide [A], and remove the Film Unit [1].
2x
[1]
[A]
368
CAUTION:
How to hold the Film Unit
• Do not hold the Heater Connector [A], and do not hold only one end of the Film Unit.
Otherwise, the heater [B] may be damaged and E002 may occur.
[A]
[A]
[B]
• When holding the Film Unit, be sure to hold the 2 flanges [C] with both hands.
[C]
[C]
• Do not touch the Fixing Film [D].
[D]
9. Remove the Separation Guide [2] from the Film Unit [1].
• 2 Leaf Springs [3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
369
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the Fixing Separation Guide [1] is installed properly.
[1]
[A]
Examples of improper installation

• Illustration at the center: The Fixing Separation Guide is placed on the rib [A].
• Illustration at the right: The Fixing Separation Guide is installed in opposite direction.
Checking method:
• After installing the Fixing Separation Guide, swing the guide with your finger. If it is installed properly, it is stable. If not,
it becomes wobbly.
• When installing the Leaf Spring while the guide is not installed properly, the spring will be expanded awkwardly.
Cleaning the Fixing Shutter Cover

■ Preparation
3. Removing the Film Unit“Removing the Film Unit” on page 364
370
■ Procedure
1. Clean the Fixing Shutter Cover [2] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
Cleaning the Fixing Separation Guide

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the Film Unit or the Pressure Roller during installation/removal.
1. Change the direction of the Fixing Unit. (Place it so that the Drawer Connector [1] is on the top side.)
2. Remove the PCB [2].

• 1 Screw [3]
[1]
1x
[3]
[2]
371
3. Free the harness.

• Harness Guide [A]
[1]
4x
[1]
[2]
[B]
[2]
5x [1]
[A]
4. Remove the Shutter Unit [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
[2]
4x
[1]
5. Clean the Fixing Separation Guide [2] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide

■ Preparation
372
■ Procedure
1. Change the direction of the Fixing Unit. (Place it so that the Drawer Connector is on the top side.)
2. Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[3]
[2]
Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing

■ Preparation
3. Removing the Film Unit“Removing the Film Unit” on page 364
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the Pressure Roller during installation/removal.
1. Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 3 Hooks [3]
1x
[3]
[1]
[3] [2]
CAUTION:
At the time of installation, be sure to fit the 3 hooks into the grooves.
373
2. In order to prevent damage to the Pressure Roller [1] during installation or removal, insert paper [2] (approx. 5 mm
in thickness) between the roller and the Fixing Delivery Lower Guide to create clearance between the Inner Delivery
Guide [3] and the Pressure Roller [1].
[2] [3]
[A]
[1]
[2] [3]
⣙5mmཌ
[1]
3. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the 27T Gear [2].
[2]
[1]
4. Lift up the right side of the Pressure Roller Unit [1] and remove it.
[1]
374
5. Remove the Pressure Roller [1] and the 2 Pressure Roller Bearings [2] from the Pressure Roller Unit.
• 2 Bearing Holders [3]
[3]
[2]
[3] [2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Actions at Replacement
In order to prevent abnormal noise, be sure to apply a small amount (20 mg on each side) of grease to the bearing fitting
part of the Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft shown in the figure below when replacing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit. (Just
apply a thin layer in the circumferential direction.)
Grease that can be used: CK-8102 (HP300), QY-0035 (HP300), and FY9-6036 (SE1107)
Grease : 20 mg
Grease : 20 mg
within 5.0 mm
• Never apply grease to the surface of the Fixing Pressure Roller.

• Do not use grease other than those above.
• This unit is dedicated to iR-ADV C5500 series.
This cannot be used for iR-ADV C5200/C5000 series.
Removing the 27T Gear

■ Preparation
375
■ Procedure
1. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the 27T Gear [2].
[2]
[1]
376
Pickup Feed System
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Guide

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
1. Clean the Secondary Transfer Guide [2] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
[1]
377
Cleaning the Feed Contact Guide

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
1. Clean the Feed Contact Guide [2] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
Cleaning the Registration Roller

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
378
■ Procedure
1. Clean the Registration Roller [2] on the inner side with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
2. Clean the Registration Roller [2] on the outer side with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
Cleaning the Pre-registration Guide Unit

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not soil the ITB.
379
1. Clean the Secondary Transfer Guide [2] (area covered by black sheet) and the inside of the Pre-registration Guide
[3] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
[1]
[3]
2. Clean the outside of the Pre-registration Guide [2] (area covered by black sheet) with lint-free paper [1] moistened
with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
Cleaning the Registration Sensor

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
380
■ Procedure
1. Clean the Registration Sensor [1] in a single direction with lint-free paper [2] moistened with water.
[2]
[1]
2. Clean the prism [1] in a single direction with lint-free paper [2] moistened with water.
[2]
[1]
Cleaning the Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
381
■ Procedure
1. Remove the E-rings [1] on the front side and rear side, and disengage the Arm [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the wire [1] from the machine and further open the Right Lower Cover [2].
[1]
[2]
3. Clean the Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor [1] with dry lint-free paper [2].
[2] [1]
382
Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Guide

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
1. Open the Fixing Delivery Guide.
2. Clean the Fixing Delivery Guide [2] on the inner side with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
[1]
3. Clean the Fixing Delivery Guide [2] on the outer side with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
[1]
383
Cleaning the Fixing Rear Roller

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
2. Clean the Fixing Rear Roller [2] on the inner side with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
[1]
3. Clean the Fixing Rear Roller [2] on the outer side with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
384
Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Roller

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
2. Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller [2] on the inner side with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
[1]
3. Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller [2] on the outer side with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
385
Removing the Duplex Feed Upper Rollers

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
1. Clean the Duplex Feed Upper Roller [2] and Roller [3] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
386
Removing the Duplex Feed Lower Roller

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
1. Clean the Duplex Feed Lower Roller [2] and Roller [3] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
387
Cleaning the Second/Third Delivery Roller, Roller and First, Second,

and Third Delivery Rollers
■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
388
■ Procedure
1. Clean the Second/Third Delivery Roller [2], Roller [3], First Delivery Roller [4], and Second Delivery Roller [5] with
lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
[1]
[3] [1]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[1]
389
2. Clean the Third Delivery Roller [2] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
[1]
Removing the Right Rear Cover 1

■ Procedure
[2]
[1]
390
2. Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 [1].

• 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M4)
• 2 Screws (TP; M3)
• 1 Claw
[1]
391
Removing the Front Right Cover

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Front Right Cover [1].
• 1 Rubber Cap
• 1 Screw (to remove)
• 1 Screw (to loosen)
• 1 Claw
[1]
392
Removing the Reverse Backend Guide and Inner Output Cover

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Reverse Backend Guide [1] and Inner Output Cover [2].
• 1 Screw
• 2 Hooks
[1]
[2]
Removing the Second/Third Delivery Unit

■ Preparation
1. Removing the Right Rear Cover 1“Removing the Right Rear Cover 1” on page 390
2. Removing the Front Right Cover“Removing the Front Right Cover” on page 392
3. Removing the Reverse Backend Guide and Inner Output Cover“Removing the Reverse Backend Guide and Inner
Output Cover” on page 393
■ Procedure
1. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] and remove the 4 Wire Saddles [2].
[2]
4x
[1]
2x
[2]
2. Open the Toner Replacement Cover 1 [1] and the Front Cover [2].
393
3. Remove the Right Front Cover 1 [3].

• 2 Screws [4]
• 2 Hooks [5]
[5]
2x
[4]
[1] [3]
[2] [4]
[5]
4. Remove the Second/Third Delivery Unit [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
4x [1]
[2]
[2]
CAUTION:
After installing the Second/Third Delivery Unit [1], be sure to check that the Sensor Flag [2] works.
• Second Delivery Sensor [3]: Refer to I/O > DC-CON > P023 > 9
[1]
[2]
[3]
394
Removing the First Delivery Unit

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
2. Removing the Right Rear Cover 1“Procedure” on page 390
3. Removing the Front Right Cover“Procedure” on page 392
4. Removing the Reverse Backend Guide and Inner Output Cover“Procedure” on page 393
5. Removing the Second/Third Delivery Unit“Removing the Second/Third Delivery Unit” on page 393
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Right Upper Cover Latch [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
2. Remove the Right Lower Cover Latch [3].

• 2 Screws [4]
[2]
[1]
4x
[4]
[4]
[3]
[2]
395
3. Open the Fixing Unit [1], and remove the Fixing Gear Cover [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
[2]
1x
[3]
[1]
396
4. Remove the First Delivery Unit [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Stepped Screw [3]
[1]
3x
[2]
[3]
CAUTION:
At the time of installation, be sure to align the First Delivery Sensor [1] and First Delivery Tray Full Sensor [2] with the
Sensor Flags [3].
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
CAUTION:
After installing the First Delivery Unit, check that the 2 Sensor Flags [1] work.
• First Delivery Sensor [2]: Refer to I/O > DC-CON > P026 > 12
• First Delivery Tray Full Sensor [3]: Refer to I/O > DC-CON > P032 > 0
[1] [1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
397
Removing the Duplex Unit

■ Preparation
[2]
[1]
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Front Cover [1] of the Right Unit.
• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Claw [3]
1x
1x
[2]
[1] [3]

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Grounding Wire [3]
[5]
2x [4]
1x
1x
[1] [3]
[2]
398
3. Remove the Duplex Unit [1] while holding its sides.
[1]
CAUTION:
Take care when removing the Duplex Unit, as the Right Door Rotation Hinge [1] and spring [2] easily become disassembled.
[1]
[2]
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray/Feed/Separation Roller

■ Procedure
1. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray.
2. Let the shutter [2] escape upwards by pushing down the MP Pickup Roller [1].
[1]
[2]
399
3. Maintaining the situation of step 2, remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover [1].
• 1 Hook [2]
• 3 Claws [3]
3x
[1]
[3]
[3] [2]
4. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [1] and the Feed Roller [2].
[1]
[2]
5. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Guide [1].

• 1 Hook [2]
[1]
[2]
400
6. Pull out the MP Separation Roller [1] from the shaft with the shaft as the center.
[1]
NOTE:
If you have accidentally removed the shaft together with the roller, install it from the front side.
NOTE:
Parts counter: COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-PU-RL / M-SP-RL / M-FD-RL
401
CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation:
1. Because a jam may occur when the MP Separation Roller Guide [1] is not inserted properly, be sure to insert it all the
way to the correct position.
[1]
2. When installing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover, be sure to align (2) with the 3 bosses and 1 claw after
aligning (1) with the boss.
3. In order to prevent jams, check that the Shutter Link Lever [1] is under the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [2].
[1]
[2]
Removing the Pickup/Delivery/Separation Roller (Cassette 1/2)

■ Preparation
1. Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover.
2. Remove the cassette (each paper source).
402
■ Procedure
1. Move the Pickup Guide Holder [1].
[1]
2. Pull out the Pickup Roller [2]/Feed Roller [3]/Separation Roller [4] while holding down the claw [1].
• 3 Claws [1]
[1]
3x
[2]
[3]
[4]
NOTE:
Pickup Roller parts counter (Cassette 1/Cassette 2):
• Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-PU-RL
• Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-PU-RL
Feed Roller parts counter (Cassette 1/Cassette 2):
• Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-FD-RL
• Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-FD-RL
Separation Roller parts counter (Cassette 1/Cassette 2):
• Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-SP-RL
• Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-SP-RL
Removing the Right Door

■ Preparation
1. Pull out the Cassette 1 and Cassette 2.
2. Open the Right Front Cover.
3. Open the Right Lower Cover.
4. Open the Right Door.
5. Remove the Right Rear Cover 3.
6. Remove the cover on the back of the Right Rear Cover 3.
403
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
■ Procedure
• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Reuse Bands [3]
[2]
1x
[1]
3x
[3]
[4]
404
2. Turn the 2 Fixation Members [1] toward the front.

• 2 Screws [2]
2x [1]
[3]
[3]
[2] [1]
[2]
3. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] on the front side and rear side.
[1]
[1]
4. Remove the wire [1] from the host machine.
[1]
405
5. While pressing the Right Door [1], release the 2 arms [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
6. Remove the Right Door [1].
[1]
CAUTION:
The Right Door [1] is heavy, so be careful not to drop it when removing it.
[1]
Removing the Cassette 1/2 Pickup Unit

■ Preparation
1. Pull out the Cassettes 1 and 2.
2. Removing the Right Lower Cover“Removing the Right Door” on page 403
406
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Connector Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
2x
[1]
[2]
407
NOTE:
For the following procedure, the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit is used as an example in the description. Perform the same
procedure for the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit.
2. Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit [1].

• 2 Connectors [2] (1 in the case of the Cassette 2)
4x
[1]
2x
[2]
[3]
[3]
CAUTION:
• When installing the Pickup Unit provided as a service part, if it has the Fixation Member [1] attached as shown in the
figure below, remove it before work.
• In case the Pickup Unit provided as a service part is not used, keep the unit with the Fixation Member [1] installed to
the original position.
[1]
Removing the Transparency Registration Sensor/Registration

Sensor
■ Preparation
1. Pull out the Cassettes 1 and 2.
408
■ Procedure
1. Remove the E-rings [1] on the front side and rear side, and disengage the Arm [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the wire [1] from the machine and further open the Right Lower Cover [2].
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the Pre-registration Guide [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
4x [3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
409
NOTE:
In the following procedure, remove only sensors that require replacement.
• Registration Sensor [1] (4 Claws, 1 Connector)
• Transparency Registration Sensor [2] (5 Claws, 1 Connector)
[1]
[2]
4. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the sensor.
5. Turn over the holder [2].

• 1 Screw [3]
• 1 Boss [4]
• 2 Hooks [5]
6. Release the claws [6] of each sensor, and remove the Transparency Registration Sensor and Registration Sensor.
1x [1] 9x
[6]
[4] [2] [1]
2x
[3]
[5]
410
5 Adjustment
Original Exposure System.................420
Image Formation System.................. 433
Actions at Parts Replacement...........437
5. Adjustment
Pickup Feed System
Image Position Adjustment
CAUTION:
By making an adjustment on the 1st side, the margin on the 2nd side is also changed.
If the difference between the 1st and the 2nd sides is +/- 0.5 mm or less, do not adjust the 2nd side.
<Reference: Standard value>
Leading edge: 4.0+1.5/-1.0 mm (front side, back side)
Left edge: 2.5+/-1.5 mm (front side)/2.5+/-2.0 mm (back side)
1. After setting the following service mode, press the Start key and output a test print (2-sided print) from each of the
paper sources.
• Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG >
TYPE = 5
COLOR-K = 1
COLOR-Y = 0
COLOR-M = 0
COLOR-C = 0
2-SIDE = 1
PG-PICK = each paper source
CAUTION:
At 2-sided printing, paper is output with the 1st side facing up and 2nd side facing down.
When checking the leading edge margin on the 1st side, check the up side of paper, and check the margin on the rear side
with respect to the feed direction.
CAUTION:
When it is out of the specified range, perform adjustment of each cassette in the following order.
Order Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3/4

1 Software adjustment Software adjustment Hardware adjustment
2 - Hardware adjustment Software adjustment
*: Hardware adjustment is not performed for Cassette 1.
■ Hardware Adjustment
1. Pull out the cassette.
412
5. Adjustment
2. Check the value of the scale [1] on the Adjustment Plate.
>@
3. Loosen the Fixation Screw.
1x
4. Move the Adjustment Plate left or right according to the scale [1] value checked in step 2. (As the Adjustment Plate
is moved toward the left of the machine by 1 tooth [2], the left edge margin is increased by 0.5 mm.)
[1]
[2]
413
5. Adjustment
5. Tighten the Fixation Screws.
NOTE:
If you move the Adjustment Plate, it may cause the difference in level of the cassettes.
If you are concerned with the difference in level of the cassettes, adjust it by loosening the 2 screws on the side.
1x 1x
6. Pull out the next upper cassette, and check that the Adjustment Plate is correctly pushed against the frame.
CAUTION:
If the Adjustment Plate is not correctly pushed against the frame, image cannot be correctly adjusted.
When checking Cassette 3, the Between-cassette Cover needs to be removed.
414
5. Adjustment
7. Output and check that the margin is within the standard values.
■ Software adjustment
Use the following service mode to make an adjustment.
1. Leading edge
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ >
Service Mode Items Description of adjustment

REGIST 1/1 speed
REG-DUP1 1/1 speed, 2nd
REG-THCK 1/2 speed
REG-DUP2 1/2 speed, 2nd
As the input value is changed by 1, the margin on the leading edge of paper is changed by 0.1 mm.
2. Left edge
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ >
Service Mode Items Description of adjustment

ADJ-C1 Cassette 1, front side
ADJ-C1RE Cassette 1, back side
ADJ-MF Multi-purpose Tray, front side
ADJ-MFRE Multi-purpose Tray, back side
As the input value is changed by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is changed by 0.1 mm.
3. If the service mode setting value has been changed, write down the new adjustment value on the service label.
<Reference: Standard value>
Leading edge: 4.0+1.5/-1.0 mm (front side, back side)
Left edge: 2.5+/-1.5 mm (front side)/2.5+/-2.0 mm (back side)
Feeding direction
㻯㻻㻼㻵㻱㻾㻪㻭㻰㻶㼁㻿㼀㻪㻲㻱㻱㻰㻙㻭㻰㻶 COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
㻾㻱㻳㻵㻿㼀㻛㻾㻱㻳㻙㻰㼁㻼㻝 ADJ-xx/ADJ-xxRE
㻾㻱㻳㻙㼀㻴㻯㻷㻛㻾㻱㻳㻙㻰㼁㻼㻞 xx = C1/C2/C3/C4/MF
+
- + -
Geometric Characteristics Adjustment

Geometric characteristics adjustment is executed when image distortion (on the entire image and the trailing edge only) occurs.
The following 3 adjustments are available as the geometric characteristics adjustment.
1. Pre-secondary transfer guide adjustment
2. Registration pressure adjustment
415
5. Adjustment
3. Fixing alignment adjustment
Applicable image error Adjustable maximum value Adjustment order

Pre-secondary transfer guide Fan-shaped distortion +/- 0.7 mm *1 1
adjustment
Registration pressure adjust- Distortion on the trailing edge +/- 0.3 mm *1 2
ment
Fixing alignment adjustment Distortion on the trailing edge +/- 0.3 mm *1 3
*1: The maximum adjustable value is a reference in case of using paper which paper weight is 81 g/m2. Above values are only
for reference, because the amount of change differs depending on the paper types being used and individual variability.
■ Pre-secondary transfer guide adjustment

Adjustment is possible by loosening the screws as shown in the figure below and moving the Pre-secondary Transfer Guide
toward the inside of the machine.
The range which can be adjusted by this adjustment is maximum of approx. 0.7 mm. (Differs according to the paper type)
Symptom Operation
The right side of image is distorted. Push out the front side.
The left side of image is distorted. Push out the rear side.
• When the right side of image is distorted

Push out the front side.
Loosen
Feed direction
416
5. Adjustment
• When the left side of image is distorted

Push out the rear side.
Loosen
Feed direction
■ Registration Roller Pressure Adjustment

Adjustment is possible by turning the screw located as shown in the figure below. Check the position of the Adjustment Plate
before adjustment.
Symptom Operation Points to check

The left side of the trailing edge of image is Turn the screw counterclockwise. The Adjustment Plate moves to the right.
distorted.
The right side of the trailing edge of image is Turn the screw clockwise. The Adjustment Plate moves to the left.
distorted.
Screw
Adjustment
Plate
Evaluation
Objective
417
5. Adjustment
• When the left side of the trailing edge of image is distorted

Turn the screw counterclockwise.
Feed direction
• When the right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted

Turn the screw clockwise.
Feed direction
■ Fixing alignment adjustment

Adjustment is possible by loosening the screw located as shown in the figure below and moving the Adjustment Plate up and
down. Check the position of the Adjustment Plate before adjustment.
Symptom Operation
The right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted. Move the Adjustment Plate up.
The left side of the trailing edge of image is distorted. Move the Adjustment Plate down.
418
5. Adjustment
Evaluation
Objective
Adjustment
Plate
NOTE:
This procedure cannot be performed correctly when the Fixing Unit is installed. Be sure to remove the Fixing Unit before making
adjustments.
• When the right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted

Move the Adjustment Plate up.
Loosen
Feed direction
• When the left side of the trailing edge of image is distorted

Move the Adjustment Plate down.
Loosen
Feed direction
419
5. Adjustment
Reader Assembly
■ Service Mode Backup
Adjustment is made to every machine at the time of shipment to write the adjustment value in the service label.
Be sure to adjust the value in the field, and in the case of changing the service mode value, be sure to write down the changed
value in the service label.
When the corresponding item is not found on the service label, write the value in blank field.
The service label is affixed to the back of the Reader Front Cover.
It is also possible to backup and restore using service modes. This backup will take approx. 10 seconds.
Backup: Service mode (Lv.2)

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP
Restoration: Service mode (Lv.2)

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES
NOTE:
When changing the service mode setting values, it is recommended to back them up in the above service mode. Performing backup
makes the work easier when replacing the Reader Controller PCB, etc.
■ Actions after Clearing the RAM of the Reader Controller PCB

1. Using SST, download the latest system software (R-CON).
2. Execute the RAM clear in the following service mode.

• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON
3. Turn OFF and then ON the connected equipment.
4. Depending on the status of backup, perform one of the following measures.

• When backup is performed normally
Execute the following service mode (Lv.2) to restore the backup data.
• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES
NOTE:
Work is completed when backup was normally performed.
420
5. Adjustment
• When backup is not performed normally

Enter the values written on the service label (on the back of the Reader Front Cover) to the following service mode
items.
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL >
Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST >
List of Items to Enter the Values of Service Label
Path for Service Modes Service Mode Items

COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ- ADJ-Y-DF, ADJ-X-MG, ADJY-DF2, ADJ-Y, STRD-POS
XY >
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD W-PLT-X, DFTBK-R, DFCH2G2, DFCH-B10, W-PLT-Y, DFTBK-G, DFCH2G10, DFCH-G2, W-
> PLT-Z, DFTBK-B, DFCH2K2, DFCH-G10, SH-TRGT, DFTBK-BW, DFCH2K10, DFCH-K2,
DFTAR-R, DFCH2R2, DFCH-R2, DFCH-K10, DFTAR-G, DFCH2R10, DFCH-R10, 100-RG,
DFTAR-B, DFCH2B2, DFCH-B2, 100-GB, DFTAR-BW, DFCH2B10, MTF2-M1, MTF2-M7,
MTF2-S1, MTF2-S7, MTF2-M2, MTF2-M8, MTF2-S2, MTF2-S8, MTF2-M3, MTF2-M9, MTF2-
S3, MTF2-S9, MTF2-M4, MTF2-M10, MTF2-S4, MTF2-S10, MTF2-M5, MTF2-M11, MTF2-S5,
MTF2-S11, MTF2-M6, MTF2-M12, MTF2-S6, MTF2-S12, MTF-M1, MTF-M7, MTF-S1, MTF-
S7, MTF-M2, MTF-M8, MTF-S2, MTF-S8, MTF-M3, MTF-M9, MTF-S3, MTF-S9, MTF-M4,
MTF-M10, MTF-S4, MTF-S10, MTF-M5, MTF-M11, MTF-S5, MTF-S11, MTF-M6, MTF-M12,
MTF-S6, MTF-S12
(Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > 100DF2RG, 100DF2GB
CCD >
COPIER > ADJUST > PAS- OFST-P-Y, OFST-P-M, OFST-P-C, OFST-P-K
CAL >
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED, LA-SPD2, DOCST, DOCST2
5. In the following service mode, calculate the MTF filter coefficient.

• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > MTF-CLC
6. In the following service mode, calculate for matching paper front and back linearity.
• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-LNR
7. In the following service mode, execute either AB or Inch configuration tray width adjustment.
• To execute AB configuration adjustment
1. Highlight the service mode item.
• Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4
2. Align the Slide Guide with "A4/A3".
• Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R
4. Align the Slide Guide with "A5R".
5. Press the OK key and register the width of A5R.
• To execute Inch configuration adjustment
• Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR
2. Align the Slide Guide with "LTR/11x17".
3. Press the OK key and register the width of Letter.
• Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR
5. Align the Slide Guide with "STMT/LTRR/LGL".
6. Press the OK key and register the width of LTRR.
8. In the following service mode, output P-PRINT.

• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT
Keep the output P-PRINT in service book case.
ADF
■ Preparation or Creation of the Test Charts
Prepare a test chart. If test chart is not available, create a test chart.
421
5. Adjustment
Create a test chart using a A4 or LTR size paper, by drawing a rectangle 10 mm smaller than the paper at four corners.
10 mm
10 mm 10 mm
10 mm
NOTE:
Write a character or a symbol to indicate the orientation of the printed image.
■ Eased Angle Guide (Opening Angle of 90 Degrees)

Change the opening angle of the ADF from 70 degrees to 90 degrees.
NOTE:
Some operation become easier by making the DADF opening angle wider.
1. Turn over the cover and remove the Angle Guide Plate.
• 4 Screws
4x Hinge Covers
Hinge Open/Close Hinge Open/Close

Guide Plate Guide Plate
CAUTION:
After adjustment, be sure to install the Angle Guide Plate.
■ Adjustment of the Tray Width

Execute either "AB configuration adjustment" or "Inch configuration adjustment" for this adjustment.
● AB Configuration Adjustment
1. Highlight the service mode item in the following service mode.
• FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4
3. Press the OK key and register the width of A4.
422
5. Adjustment

• FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R
6. Press the OK key and register the width of A5R.
● Inch Configuration Adjustment

• FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR
3. Press the OK key and register the width of Letter.

• FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR
6. Press the OK key and register the width of LTRR.
■ Height Adjustment
● Checking the Height
1. Close the ADF.
2. Check that the 2 Height Adjustment Bosses [1] at the left front and rear side are in contact with the Stream Reading
Glass [2].
NOTE:
Checking becomes easier by lighting the LED using the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > SCANLAMP
[2]
[1]
3. If they are not in contact, perform the height adjustment.

Also, if it could not be checked visually, check with the following methods.
• “Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the Front Side” on page 424
• “Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the Rear Side” on page 424
423
5. Adjustment
Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the Front Side
1. Put a sheet of paper [2] on the place where the protrusions touch the Stream Reading Glass [1], and check whether
there is any resistance of the paper when closing the ADF.
[1]
[2]
2. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.
Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the Rear Side
1. Put a sheet of paper [2] on the place where the protrusions touch the Stream Reading Glass [1], and check whether
there is any resistance of the paper when closing the ADF.
[2]
[1]
2. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.
● Adjustment procedure
1. Make adjustment by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of the Left Hinge.
If the front side is not installed properly: Turn the screw clockwise (black arrow).
If the rear side or both sides are not installed properly: Turn the screw counterclockwise (white arrow).
[1]
2. Check the height again and see if it is at an appropriate height.
424
5. Adjustment
■ Right Angle Adjustment (Slant Adjustment)
NOTE:
There are two adjustment methods: One for reading the front side (Scanner Unit on the Reader side) and another for reading the
back side (Scanner Unit on the DADF side).
● Adjustment of the Paper Front Reading

1. Place a test chart on the ADF and perform 1-sided print.
2. Check the A part of the printed paper for the squareness of the image. Make adjustment if it is not at a right angle.
Image on test chart

Printed image
Feed direction
3. Remove the ADF White Plate [1].
4. Loosen the 4 Knurled Screws [1] at the front part of the Right and Left Hinge Unit.
5. Rotate the screw [2] of the right hinge to move the Fixation Member.
A = Less than 90 degrees: Turn the screw counterclockwise
A = 90 degrees or more: Turn the screw clockwise
[2]
[1]
[1]
6. After adjustment, tighten the 4 Knurled Screws.
7. Print the test chart again, and check that the A part is at a right angle.
8. Install the White Plate removed in step 3. Check that the White Plate is not placed on the Index Sheet.
● Adjustment of the Paper Back Reading

1. Place a test chart facing down on the ADF and perform 2-sided print.
425
5. Adjustment
2. Check the A part of the printed paper for the squareness of the image. Make adjustment if it is not at a right angle.
Image on test chart

Printed image
Feed direction
3. Remove the Front Cover.
4. Loosen the adjustment screw.
5. Adjust the position of the guide supporting the Scanner Unit.

A = less than 90 degrees: Move the Guide to the left side (black arrow).
A = 90 degrees or more: Move the Guide to the right side (white arrow).
[2]
[1]
6. Tighten the screws after adjustment.
7. Print the test chart again, and check that it is at a right angle.
■ Adjustment of the Stream Reading

1. Execute the following service mode item.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
■ Side registration adjustment
NOTE:
back side (Scanner Unit on the ADF side).

1. Place a test chart on the Document Pickup Tray and perform a 1-sided print.
2. Overlay the printed paper onto the test chart.
426
5. Adjustment
3. Check that the rear side of the printed image is within the standard range.
Standard range: A </= 1 mm
< If the image is displaced toward rear > < If the image is displaced toward front >
Rear side of
printed image Image rear side of
test chart
A
A
Image rear side of

test chart Rear side of
printed image
Feed direction Feed direction
4. If it is not within the standard range, make an adjustment with the following service mode
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF
If the printed image is displaced toward the rear side: Increase the value (by moving the image toward the front side).
If the printed image is displaced toward the front side: Decrease the value (by moving the image toward the rear side).
• Amount of change per increment: 0.1 mm
• Adjustment range: 2 to 202 (Default: 102)
5. Print the test chart again, and check that the image is within the ranges of the standard.

1. Place a test chart facing down on the Document Pickup Tray and perform 2-sided print.
3. Check that the rear side of the printed image is within the standard range.
< If the image is displaced toward rear > < If the image is displaced toward front >
Rear side of
printed image Image rear side of
test chart
A
A
Image rear side of

test chart Rear side of
printed image
427
5. Adjustment
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJY-DF2
If the printed image is displaced toward the front side: Increase the value (by moving the image toward the rear side).
If the printed image is displaced toward the rear side: Decrease the value (by moving the image toward the front side).
• Adjustment range: 56 to 220 (Default: 124)
■ Leading edge registration adjustment
NOTE:
back side (Scanner Unit on the ADF side).

1. Place a test chart on the Document Pickup Tray and perform a 1-sided print.
3. Check that the leading edge of the printed image is within the standard range.
< If the image is displaced toward trailing edge > < If the image is displaced toward leading edge >
Leading edge of Image leading edge of

Image leading edge of printed image Leading edge of test chart
test chart printed image
A A
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
If the printed image is displaced toward the trailing edge: Increase the value (by moving the image toward the leading
edge).
If the printed image is displaced toward the leading edge: Decrease the value (by moving the image toward the trailing
edge).
• Adjustment range: -50 to +50

1. Place a test chart facing down on the Document Pickup Tray and perform 2-sided print.
428
5. Adjustment
3. Check that the leading edge of the printed image is within the standard range.
< If the image is displaced toward trailing edge > < If the image is displaced toward leading edge >
Leading edge of Image leading edge of

Image leading edge of printed image Leading edge of test chart
test chart printed image
A A
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
If the printed image is displaced toward the trailing edge: Increase the value (by moving the image toward the leading
edge).
If the printed image is displaced toward the leading edge: Decrease the value (by moving the image toward the trailing
edge).
■ Magnification ratio adjustment
NOTE:
• There are two adjustment methods: One for reading the front side (Scanner Unit on the Reader side) and another for reading
the back side (Scanner Unit on the DADF side).
• This adjustment is performed by comparing the images printed by stream reading and Copyboard reading.

1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass of the connected equipment and print. This is called Print 1.
2. Place a test chart on the Document Pickup Tray and perform a 1-sided print. This is called Print 2.
3. Overlay the Print 2 onto the Print 1.
429
5. Adjustment
4. Check that the trailing edge of the image on the Print 2 is within the standard range.
< If the image of print 2 is longer > < If the image of print 2 is shorter >
Trailing edge of Trailing edge of

print 1 print 2
print 2 print 1
A A
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED
If the image on the Print 2 is longer: Make the numeric value larger (by making the stream reading of the original "faster").
If the image on the Print 2 is shorter: Make the numeric value smaller (by making the stream reading of the original
"slower").
• Amount of change per increment: 0.1%

1. Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass of the connected equipment and print. This is called Print 1.
2. Place a test chart facing down on the Document Pickup Tray and perform 2-sided print. This is called Print 2.
3. Overlay the Print 2 onto the Print 1.
4. Check that the trailing edge of the image on the Print 2 is within the standard range.
< If the image of print 2 is longer > < If the image of print 2 is shorter >

print 1 print 2
print 2 print 1
A A
430
5. Adjustment
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2
If the image on the Print 2 is longer: Make the numeric value larger (by making the vertical scanning length of the image
shorter).
If the image on the Print 2 is shorter: Make the numeric value smaller (by making the vertical scanning length of the
image longer).
• Amount of change per increment: 0.1%
■ White level adjustment

1. Place a sheet of blank A4 or LTR size paper on the Copyboard Glass and close the ADF.
CAUTION:
When executing the white level adjustment using paper with smaller width, adjustment may not be executed properly.
2. Execute the service mode item.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. Remove the blank paper from the Copyboard Glass, and place it on the Document Pickup Tray of ADF.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD >DF-WLVL2
5. Place the blank paper on the Copyboard Glass again and close the ADF.

7. Remove the blank paper from the Copy Board Glass, and place it on the Document Pickup Tray of ADF.

■ Hinge pressure adjustment

1. Open the ADF, and find out the lowest position it stays open without holding it by hands.
2. Find out if the height of the position checked in step 1 is within the standard range.
Standard range: 19 cm or more
431
5. Adjustment
3. If the height is not within the standard range, execute the following adjustments.
If the height is 19 cm or less: Turn the hexagon wrench counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Service Tool: Hexagon wrench (2.5 mm)
[1]
4. Check that the "height adjustment boss" does not contact with the Stream Reading Glass after adjustment.
432
5. Adjustment
ITB Alignment Adjustment
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
2. Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.
3. Open the Front Cover and remove the ITB Cover.

• 2 Screws (Loosen)
2x
4. Remove the ITB Motor.

• 1 Connector
• 4 Screws
1x 4x
433
5. Adjustment
5. Loosen the 3 screws, and rotate the ITB Motor Support Plate clockwise or counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Be sure to check the initial position of the Adjustment Plate before loosening the screw because it moves when the screw is
loosened.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the plate is not placed on the boss which serves as the axis of rotation.
3x
CAUTION:
The appropriate range is from -350 to +350.
• Make an adjustment by 1 scale mark (0.5 mm) or less at a time.
• Moving it by 1 scale mark (0.5 mm) changes the values of ITB-POS and ITB-POS2 by approx. 250.
• When moving the scale to the full extent of the range, the value of POS may change significantly and E075 may light
up.
434
5. Adjustment
• <When the values are above +350>

Rotate the ITB Motor Support Plate clockwise.
• <When the values are below -350>

Rotate the ITB Motor Support Plate counterclockwise.
435
5. Adjustment
6. Tighten 3 screws loosened on the previous step.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the plate is not placed on the boss which serves as the axis of rotation.
3x
7. Install the ITB Motor. (4 Screws, 1 Connector)
8. Install the ITB Cover (2 screws) and close the Front Cover.
9. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
10. Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
11. Perform steps 2 to 4 of "Detecting the ITB equilibrium position".
436
5. Adjustment
Actions at Parts Replacement
MP Pickup Tray Unit

■ Actions after Parts Replacement
1. Remove the Wire Cover [1] on the rear side of the MP Pickup Tray Unit [1].
• 1 Hook [2]
[2] [1]
2. Enter the values shown on the label on the rear side of the MP Pickup Tray Unit in service mode.
• Service mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4
• Service mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A5R
• Service mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4R
• Service mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-MAX
• Service mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-MIN
3. Install the Wire Cover removed in step 1.
4. Write down the service mode values entered in step 2 on the service label.
DC Controller PCB
How to Replace the Parts:“Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 259
■ Before Parts Replacement
CAUTION:
When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use the DC Controller PCB which was used with
another machine.
437
5. Adjustment
1. Execute the following service mode to output setting values for just in case of restoration failure of backup data.
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT
2. Execute the following service mode to back up the service mode setting values.
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP
During execution, "ACTIVE" flashes in the status column of the service mode.
It takes approx. 2 minutes. Upon success, [OK!] is displayed in the status column.
3. After confirming that [OK!] is displayed in the status column of the service mode, turn OFF the power of the machine.
■ Works During Parts Replacement

1. When the setting value data is backed up before parts replacement, execute the following service mode to restore
the backed-up setting value data.
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES
During execution, "ACTIVE" flashes in the status column of the service mode.
It takes approx. 2 minutes. Upon success, [OK!] is displayed in the status column.
2. When setting values cannot be backed up before replacement or when the backed-up data cannot be restored in
this step due to reasons such as damage of the DC Controller PCB, enter the values of each service mode item
written on the service label or P-PRINT before parts replacement.
Control Panel CPU PCB

When replacing the Control Panel KEY PCB/Control Panel CPU PCB, perform the following work.
■ Actions at Parts Replacement

Sensitivity Calibration
Perform the sensitivity calibration when replacing the Control Panel KEY PCB or the Control Panel CPU PCB to correct electrical
error of the Static Touch Panel.
CAUTION:
While performing the sensitivity calibration, remove the Clear Film protecting the Control Panel Unit because detection may
not be performed correctly.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Touch Panel during the work; otherwise, calibration cannot be properly processed.
1. Shut down the machine and turn OFF the power.
438
5. Adjustment
2. While pressing the Reset button [A] on the Control Panel and the button [B] to reduce brightness of the LCD, turn
ON the power of the machine and keep both the buttons [A] and [B] pressed until the normal end sound is heard.
[B]
[A]
CAUTION:
When turning ON the power while touching the Touch Panel or releasing your fingers off from the Reset button and the
button to reduce brightness of the LCD before the end sound, turn OFF the power and perform the work again.
Hard disk
How to Replace the Parts:“Removing the HDD” on page 252
■ Before Replacing
1. Back up the necessary data based on the table shown below.
2. Printing the set/registered data

• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT
Backup List
Backup target data Backup Method

User Service DCM Power OFF
(excluding DCM)
Address List Yes*1 - Yes*9 -
Forwarding Settings Yes*1 - Yes*9 -
Settings / Registration
Preferences (Except for Paper Type Management Settings) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Adjustment/Maintenance(*) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Function Settings (Except for Printer Custom Settings,Forwarding Set- - - Yes*9 Yes*10
tings)
Set Destination (Except for Address List) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Management Settings (Except for Address List) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
User authentication information used for local device authentication of UA Yes*2 - Yes*9 -
(User Authentication)
Printer Settings Yes*1 - Yes*9 Yes*10
Set Paper Information Yes*1 - Yes*9 -
Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox)
Favorite Settings Yes*1 Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Default Settings - Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Shortcut settings for “Options” - Yes*8 Yes*9 -
439
5. Adjustment
Backup target data Backup Method

User Service DCM Power OFF
(excluding DCM)
Previous Settings - Yes*8 - -
Setting items for Quick Menu
Button Size information - - Yes*9 -
Wallpaper Setting - - Yes*9 -
Button information in Quick Menu - - Yes*9 -
Restrict Quick Menu - - Yes*9 -
Setting items for Main Menu
Button settings in Main Menu - - Yes*9 -
Button settings on the top of the screen - - Yes*9 -
Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu - - Yes*9 -
Other settings for Main Menu - - Yes*9 -
Function Settings > Store/Access Files
Mail Box Settings (Register Box Name, PIN, Time Until File Auto Delete, Yes*4 - Yes*9 -
Printer upon Storing from Printer Driver)
Image data in Mail Box, Fax Inbox, and Memory RX Inbox Yes*4 - - -
Network Place Settings - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Web browser settings
Web Access setting information - Yes*8 Yes*9 -
MEAP settings
MEAP application - Yes*8 - -
License files for MEAP applications Yes*5 - - -
Data saved using MEAP applications Yes*5 Yes*8 Yes*9 -
SMS (Service Management Service) password - Yes*8 - -
Universal data settings
Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send - - - -
mode)
Job logs - - - -
Audit Log Yes*6 - - -
Key Pair and Server Certificate in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings in - - Yes*9 -
Network Set-tings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen)
Auto Adjust Gradation setting values - - - -
PS font - - - -
Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF - - - -
Key and settings information to be used for encryption when TPM is ON Yes*7 - - -
Personal Settings
Display Language - - Yes *9 -
Accessibility Settings - - Yes *9 -
Default Screen - - Yes *9 -
Default Job Settings - - Yes *9 -
Quick Menu (Personal, layout of the Personal tab, and background of the - - Yes *9 -
Personal tab)
Address Book (Personal/Group) Yes *1 - Yes *9 -
Key ring (for host machine functions) - - Yes *9 -
Personal settings of MEAP Yes *11 Yes *8 Yes *9 -
Service Mode
Service Mode setting values (MN-CON) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
*1: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import or Export
*2: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > User Management > Authentication Management > User
Management
*3: Remote UI > Quick Menu > Export
*4: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up or Restore
*5: Remote UI > Service Management Service
440
5. Adjustment
*6: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Device Management > Save Audit Log
Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported.
*7: Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings
*8: Download mode > [5]: Backup/Restore > [3] : MEAP Backup > Meapback.bin Backup is possible using SST or USB memory
The data saved using a MEAP application can be backed up only when the MEAP application has a backup function.
*9: Backup Method using DCM When You set it in COPIER> OPTION> USER> SMD-EXPT> ON, a backup/restore is possible
in Service Mode Settings from the Remote UI.There is a backup button on the TOP page of the service mode.
1. Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export All
2. Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
3. Service mode top screen > BACKUP
4. Web Service
*10: The setting value that was set when the main power was turned OFF the last time is automatically backed up to the Flash
PCB. When a HDD is replaced with a new one, the setting value is automatically inherited from the Flash PCB at the time of HDD
formatting.
*11: iWEMC DAM plug-in
■ Aftter Replacement
1. HDD format
Start the machine in safe mode, and format all partitions using SST or a USB memory.
2. Turning OFF and ON the main power switch
3. Restoring the backup data
4. Resetting/registering the data

While referring to the list which was printed before replacement, reset/register the data.
5. When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate, request the user to generate
them again.
6. Execute auto gradation adjustment.

Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust
7. Execute register correction pattern.

Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct Color Tone Settings > Register
Correction Pattern
Laser Scanner Unit

How to Replace the Parts:“Removing the Laser Scanner Unit” on page 279

• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
2. Execute horizon scan color displacement correct among process speeds.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER > H-PS-ADJ
3. Execute auto color displacement correction.

• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct Color Mismatch
4. Execute uneven density correction.

• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Correct Shading
ITB Unit
How to Replace the Parts:“Removing the ITB Unit” on page 283
441
5. Adjustment
■ Adjustment after installing ITB Unit

1. After installing the ITB Unit, put the machine into a standby state.
2. When the machine is in a standby state, execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > Function > MISC-P > ITB-INIT
• COPIER > Function > MISC-P > DRM-ASPD
3. After execution of the service mode, execute the following settings after the machine gets into a standby state.
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct Color Mismatch
ITB
How to Replace the Parts:“Removing the ITB” on page 296

2. When the machine is in a standby state, execute auto gradation adjustment.

3. After executing auto gradation adjustment, see the alarm log to check that 10-0006/10-0007/10-0022 has not
occurred.
When an alarm occurs, perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm.
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller

How to Replace the Parts:“Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller” on page 316

2. When the machine is in a standby state, execute auto gradation adjustment.

3. Execute the ITB equilibrium position detection in service mode.

• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ITB-INIT
4. After execution, check that the values of the following service modes are both within a range of -350 to 350.
• Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > ITB-POS
• Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > ITB-POS2
CAUTION:
If the values are outside the range, perform “ITB Alignment Adjustment” on page 433.
Secondary Transfer Roller

How to Replace the Parts: “Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller/Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit” on page
339“Installing the Secondary Transfer Roller/Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit” on page 341

1. Execute the following service mode.
• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > TNR-COAT
442
5. Adjustment

Drum Unit
How to Replace the Parts:“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 327“Installing the Drum Unit” on page 328

Developing Unit
How to Replace the Parts: “Removing the Developing Unit” on page 330“Installing a New Developing Unit” on page 333
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform the work according to the color that was replaced.
1. Execute the following service modes to initialize the Developing Unit.

• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y
• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M
• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-C
• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K

Patch Sensor
How to Replace the Parts:“Removing the Registration Patch Sensor (Front), (Middle), (Rear)” on page 288

1. Execute the following service mode to adjust the target value of S-wave light intensity of the Patch Sensor.
• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > PATCH-S

3. After executing auto gradation adjustment, see the alarm log to check that 10-0006/10-0007/10-0022 has not
occurred.
When an alarm occurs, perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm.

How to Replace the Parts:“Removing the Reader Controller PCB” on page 243
■ Actions before Parts Replacement

1. Output the latest service mode setting values.
443
5. Adjustment
2. Perform back p in the following service mode (Lv.2).

• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP

1. Upgrade the firmware to make the combination of firmware appropriate so that the machine operates normally.
* The use of automatic update function is recommended.
2. Depending on the status of backup, perform one of the following measures.

• When backup is performed normally
Execute the following service modes to restore the backup data.
• Service Mode > (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES
NOTE:
Work is completed when backup was normally performed.
• When backup is not performed normally

Enter the values written on the service label (on the back of the Reader Front Cover) in the following service modes.
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY >
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD >
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL >
Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST >
List of Service Mode Items to Enter Values
Path for Service Modes Service Mode Items to Enter Values

COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X, ADJ-Y, STRD-POS, ADJ-X-MG, ADJ-Y-DF, ADJY-DF2, ADJ-S
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > SH-TRGT, DFTBK-R, DFCH-R2, DFCH2R2, W-PLT-X, DFTBK-G, DFCH-R10,
DFCH2R10, W-PLT-Y, DFTBK-B, DFCH-G2, DFCH2G2, W-PLT-Z, DFTBK-BW, DFCH-
G10, DFCH2G10, DFTAR-R, 100-RG, DFCH-B2, DFCH2B2, DFTAR-G, 100-GB, DFCH-
B10, DFCH2B10, DFTAR-B, 100DF2RG, DFCH-K2, DFCH2K2, DFTAR-BW, 100DF2GB,
DFCH-K10, DFCH2K10, MTF-M1, MTF-S1, MTF2-M1, MTF2-S1, MTF-M2, MTF-S2,
MTF2-M2, MTF2-S2, MTF-M3, MTF-S3, MTF2-M3, MTF2-S3, MTF-M4, MTF-S4, MTF2-
M4, MTF2-S4, MTF-M5, MTF-S5, MTF2-M5, MTF2-S5, MTF-M6, MTF-S6, MTF2-M6,
MTF2-S6, MTF-M7, MTF-S7, MTF2-M7, MTF2-S7, MTF-M8, MTF-S8, MTF2-M8, MTF2-
S8, MTF-M9, MTF-S9, MTF2-M9, MTF2-S9, MTF-M10, MTF-S10, MTF2-M10, MTF2-S10,
MTF-M11, MTF-S11, MTF2-M11, MTF2-S11, MTF-M12, MTF-S12, MTF2-M12, MTF2-S12
COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL OFST-P-Y, OFST-P-M, OFST-P-C, OFST-P-K
>
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED, LA-SPD2, DOCST, DOCST2
3. In following service mode, calculate the MTF filter coefficient.

4. In following service mode, calculate for matching paper front and back linearity.
• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-LNR
5. In following service mode, execute either AB or Inch configuration tray width adjustment.
• To execute AB configuration adjustment
2. Select the service mode, press the OK key, and register the width of A4.
• Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4
4. Select the service mode, press the OK key, and register the width of A5R.
• Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R
• To execute Inch configuration adjustment
2. Select the service mode, press the OK key, and register the width of LTR.
• Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR
4. Select the service mode, press the OK key, and register the width of LTRR.
• Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR
444
5. Adjustment
6. In the following service mode, output P-PRINT.

Keep the output P-PRINT in service book case.
Scanner Unit (Paper Front)

1. Enter the values written on the label included with the Scanner Unit.
• Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
• Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB
2. Adjust the shading position.

• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RDSHDPOS
3. Adjust the stream reading position.

• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
4. Adjust the white level.

Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper.
1. Place the paper on the Copyboard Glass.
• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
2. Place the paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
3. Place the paper on the Copy Board Glass.
5. Execute the following service mode to calculate the MTF filter coefficient.
6. Write down the following service mode values in the service label (on the back of the Reader Front Cover).
List of Service Mode Items to Write Down the Values on Service Labels
Path for Service Modes Service Mode Items to Write Down the Values on Service Labels
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 100-RG, 100-GB, SH-TRGT, DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B, DFTAR-BW
Scanner Unit (Paper Back)

1. Enter the values written on the label included with the Scanner Unit.
• Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2GB
• Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG

• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RDSHDPOS
3. Adjust the stream reading position.

• Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
4. Adjust the white level.

Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper.
1. Place the paper on the Copyboard Glass.
445
5. Adjustment
3. Place the paper on the Copy Board Glass.

5. Execute the following service mode to calculate the MTF filter coefficient.
6. Write down the following service mode values in the service label (on the back of the Reader Front Cover).
List of Service Mode Items to Write Down the Values on Service Labels
Path for Service Modes Service Mode Items to Write Down the Values on Service Labels
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 100-RG, 100-GB, DFTBK-G, DFTBK-B, DFTBK-R, DFTBK-BW
Copyboard Glass
1. Enter the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the Barcode Label affixed at the upper right of the Copy Board Glass.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-X W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y

• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RDSHDPOS
3. Set the target value of B&W shading.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT
4. Adjust the white level. Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper.

1. Set a sheet of paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2. Set a sheet of paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
3. Set a sheet of paper on the Copyboard Glass.
4. Set a sheet of paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
5. Write the service setting values on the service label inside of the reader front cover.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
List of Service Mode Items to Write the Service Setting Values on Service Label
Path for Service Mode Service Mode Items to Write Down the Values on Service Labels
COPIER > ADJUST > SH-TRGT, DFTAR-R , DFTAR-G , DFTAR-B , DFTAR-BW , DFTBK-G , DFTBK-B , DFTBK-R , DFTBK-
CCD BW
446
6 Troubleshooting
Initial Check.......................................448
Test Print...........................................449
Troubleshooting Items.......................454
Startup System Failure Diagnosis.....459
Debug Log.........................................476
6. Troubleshooting
Initial Check
Item No. Detail Check

Site Environment 1 The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%).
2 The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water
boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fi re
or dust.
3 The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
4 The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)
5 The site is well ventilated, and the fl oor keeps the machine level.
6 The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.
Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type.
8 The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
Checking the Place- 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a
ment of Paper specifi c level.
10 If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation
in the manual feed tray.
Checking the Dura- 11 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.
bles
Checking the Periodi- 12 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table, and replace
cally Replaced Parts any part that has reached the time of replacement.
448
6. Troubleshooting
Test Print
Overview
This machine have the following test print TYPE and you can judge the image failure that is checked as “Yes” in the following
image check items with each test print.
If the image failure occurred on normal output does not reappear on the test print, it may be caused by the PDL input or reader
side.
PG TYPE Items Origi-

TYPE Pattern Grada- Fog- Trans- Black White Uneven Un- Right Straight Color nator
tion ging fer line line Density even- Angle Lines dis-
Fault (Color Density place-
line) at the ment,
Front /
Rea
0 Normal ----
copy /
print
1 to 3 --- (For ----
R&D)
4 16 gra- Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
dations control-
ler PCB
5 Full half- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
tone control-
ler PCB
6 Grid Yes Yes Yes Main
control-
ler PCB
7 to 9 --- (For ----
R&D)
10 MCYBk Yes Yes Yes Main
horizon- control-
tal ler PCB
stripes
(sub
scanning
direc-
tion)
11 --- (For ----
R&D)
12 64-gra- Yes Yes Yes Main
dation control-
ler PCB
13 --- (For ----
R&D)
14 Full color Yes Yes Main
16-gra- control-
dation ler PCB
15 to 100 --- (For ----
R&D)
■ Steps to select the test print TYPE

1. Set the number of print, paper size etc.
2. Select: COPIER > TEST > PG.
3. Select: COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE.
4. Enter the desired TYPE number and press OK key.
5. Select the corresponding color (setting 1 means output) in COLOR-Y/M/C/K.
449
6. Troubleshooting
6. Set the density in DENS-Y/M/C/K (this is enabled for TYPE=5 only).

7. Press start key.
How to use the test print

■ 16 gradations (TYPE=4)
This test print is for mainly checking the gradation, fogging, white line and uneven density at front & rear.
Check item Check method Assumed cause

Gradation Check that 16 density gradation is properly Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
reproduced. Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Fogging Check that fogging occurs on white image Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
area only. Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
White line Check that white line does not appear on Failure of Developing Assembly
entire image.
Uneven density at front & rear Check that uneven density does not appear Failure of Photosensitive Drum (approx.
at front & rear. 94mm)
Failure of Developing Cylinder (approx.
63mm)
■ Full half tone (TYPE=5)
This test print is for mainly checking the black line, white line and uneven density.
450
6. Troubleshooting
NOTE:
1. Select: service mode > COPIER > TEST > PG and specify developing color “COLOR-Y/M/C/K” to output the print by
developing color.
2. To change the density of test print, select: service mode > TEST > PG > DENS-Y/M/C/K and set the density.

Transfer failure Check that the transfer failure does not ap- Failure of ITB (scratch, dirt)
pear on entire image. Failure of Primary Transfer Roller (scratch,
dirt)
Failure of Secondary Transfer Roller
(scratch, dirt)
Black line Check that black line does not appear on Scratch on Photosensitive Drum
(color line) entire image. Dirt on Primary Charging Roller
White line Check that white line does not appear on Failure of ITB Unit
entire image. Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Dirt on laser light path
Uneven pitch Check that uneven pitch does not appear on Failure of Photosensitive Drum (approx.
entire image. 94mm)
Failure of Developing Cylinder (approx.
63mm)
Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear Dirt on Dustproof Glass
on entire image. Deterioration of ITB
■ Grid (TYPE=6)
This test print is for mainly checking the color displacement, right angle accuracy and straight line accuracy.
Check items Check method Assumed cause

Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
on solid area of each color Failure of developer in Developing Assem-
bly
Failure of Primary Transfer Roller
Black line (color line) Check that black line (color line) does not Scratch on Photosensitive Drum
appear on solid area of each color Dirt on Primary Charging Roller
solid area of each color Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Dirt on Laser Light Path
451
6. Troubleshooting
■ MCYBk horizontal stripe (TYPE=10)

4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
2.5 +1.5mm/-1.5mm
This test print is for mainly checking the dark area density of each color, each color balance and white line on development.
Check items Check method Assumed cause

Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
on solid area of each color Failure of developer in Developing Assem-
bly
Failure of Primary Transfer Roller
Black line (color line) Check that black line (color line) does not Scratch on Photosensitive Drum
appear on solid area of each color Dirt on Primary Charging Roller
solid area of each color Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Dirt on Laser Light Path
■ 64-gradations (TYPE=12)
This test print is for mainly checking the gradations of YMCBk single color at one time.

Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
reproduced. Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Fogging Check that fogging appears on white image Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
452
6. Troubleshooting

White line Check that there is no white line on entire Failure of Developing Assembly
image.
■ Full color 16-gradations (TYPE=14)
Light areas
White White
This test print is for mainly checking the gray balance, gradations of YMCBk singe color and fogging.

Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
reproduced in each color. Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Fogging Check that fogging appears on white image Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
Gray balance Check that density is even in each color on Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
gray scale area.
453
6. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Items
Fixing Wrinkle/Jams Caused by Deterioration in the Rib of the Fixing

Inlet Guide
[Location]
Fixing Inlet Guide
[Cause]
When making 2-sided copies of solid image continuously in high temperature & high humidity environment, rib side on the
Fixing Inlet Guide is deteriorated and resin part may be scraped.
This causes the paper leading edge to be caught by the scraped rib when it enters the Fixing Inlet Guide, generating a slack in
the paper and causing wrinkles in the paper and jams.
[Condition]
When making 2-sided copies of solid image continuously in high temperature & high humidity environment.
[Field Remedy]
1. Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide and the Shutter Cover.
2. Replace the Fixing Inlet Guide.
Fixing Inlet Guide
454
6. Troubleshooting
Display of "Non-Canon Product" Message

The following shows the remedy to be performed when a "non-Canon product" message is displayed even though Canon-made
toner, drums, and Fixing Units are used.
Remedy:
Perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm.
1. Toner Bottle
Alarm code: At the same time, 10-0091 - 0094 occurs.

2. Drum Unit
Alarm code: At the same time, 09-0010 - 0013 occurs.
455
6. Troubleshooting
3. Fixing Assembly
Alarm code: At the same time, 06-0012 occurs.
Forcible stop of paper feed

[Function Overview]
Forcibly stop the paper at a specified position.
Next time a job occurs, the paper is forcibly stopped at the stop position (leading edge) shown in the figure
[70]
[42]
[40]
[32,33]
[30,31,99]
[71]
[20,21]
[1]
[Use case]
• When bent paper/skew/wrinkles occur
• When jam occurs frequently
• When checking an image on the ITB
456
6. Troubleshooting
[Points to note when using]

• Remove the paper being stopped with the normal jam removal procedure. After jam removal, the job is automatically
recovered.
• Display of standard jam code indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified position.
• When a job in which the paper does not pass the specified stop position is executed, the setting to forcibly stop the paper
becomes disabled.
• Unfixed toner may be attached depending on the stop position. Use caution when handling it.
[How to use]
Use this function from SITUATION mode.
Service Mode > SITUATION > Troubleshooting > Forcible stop of paper feed
The following service modes can be operated from this SITUATION mode.
• COPIER > TEST > P-STOP > PRINTER
• COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE
• COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK
• COPIER > TEST > PG > 2-SIDE
• COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-Y
• COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-M
• COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-C
• COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-K
• COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-Y
• COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-M
• COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-C
• COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-K
• COPIER > TEST > PG > F/M-SW
[Stop positions and check items]

Items that can be checked differ depending on the position where paper stops.
Check for fold/skew/crease/operation check/jam/checking of image on ITB with reference to the table below.
Stop position Fold Skew Crease Operation Checking on im-

check / Jam age on ITB
0 OFF - - - - -
1 Outlet of the Cassette Pickup As- Yes Yes - Yes -
sembly
20 Registration Roller Yes Yes - Yes -
21 Registration Roller (2nd side) Yes Yes - Yes -
30 Inlet of the Fixing Assembly Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
31 Inlet of the Fixing Assembly (2nd Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
side)
32 Outlet of the Fixing Assembly Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
33 Outlet of the Fixing Assembly (2nd Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
side)
40 Outlet of the First Delivery *1 Yes - - Yes -
457
6. Troubleshooting
Stop position Fold Skew Crease Operation Checking on im-

check / Jam age on ITB
42 Outlet of the Second Delivery *1 Yes - - Yes -
70 Reverse Mouth *2 Yes Yes - Yes -
71 Duplex standby position *2 Yes Yes - Yes -
99 Inlet of the Fixing Assembly (1st - - - - Yes
side, for checking image)
*1 : Paper may not be stopped depending on the delivery destination setting.

*2 : Paper is stopped after being reversed for a 2-sided job.
458
6. Troubleshooting
Startup System Failure Diagnosis
Overview
The purpose of this diagnosis is to identify the cause when the host machine would not start up.
A combination of the following three identification methods is used to identify the cause.
• A method for identifying the failure on the basis of the LED/LCD display status
• A method for identifying the failure on the basis of the power supply/signal route
• Identification of the location of the controller-related failure with the controller self-diagnosis function
The diagnosis is made according to the startup system failure diagnosis flow in order to perform basic identification of the cause
and perform the remedy.
If it turned out that the failure was caused by the controller or the Power Supply Assembly, perform a controller self-diagnosis or
check the Power Supply Assembly, and perform the remedy.
If the diagnosis result shows that replacement of parts is required, perform the works in the order shown below.
1. Check if the connectors (of a cable, etc.) are connected properly.
2. Replace the cable.
3. Replace the parts.
After performing the works shown above, be sure to restart the host machine and check if the symptom occurs again.
WARNING:
When a tester is used to perform a check, the AC voltage may be measured. There is a possibility of electrical shock, so
caution is required during the work.
NOTE:
The numbers such as (1) and (2) shown in the flow diagram indicate that there is a check item table showing the items to be
checked in the flow chart, location, and procedure.
Each number in the flow diagram is linked with the item number of the corresponding check item table to be referenced.
Flow Check item list

Start
Has only Yes

the backlight gone off?
No [Assumed failure location]

1. Control Panel Unit
(1) 2. Main Controller PCB1
Is 12V supplied to J1001 Yes
of the Control Panel
CPU PCB?
[Assumed failure location]
No
(2) 1. Control Panel CPU PCB
2. Main Controller PCB1
3. Control Panel Unit The location of each check item
can be referenced by the
corresponding number in the flow
diagram.
CAUTION:
Before using a tester to perform a check, be sure to turn OFF the Environment Heater Switch.
If a check is performed with the Environment Heater Switch ON, the diagnosis may not be performed correctly.
NOTE:
When replacing the cable, disconnect the cable from the connector and check the continuity.
459
6. Troubleshooting
Startup System Failure Diagnosis Flow

If the host machine would not start up, follow the flow shown below to identify the location of the trouble.
If a number such as (1) or (2) is shown in the flow diagram box, be sure to refer to the check item table and make a judgment.
Start
Turn OFF the main power switch, and check

for disconnection of the power plug and
the Power Supply Cord.
Turn ON the power switch.
-1-
Is the Control YES
Panel LCD "blank"?
Perform the Control

NO Panel check flow.
-2-
Does the bar remain YES
displayed on the Control
Panel LCD?
NO Perform a controller
self-diagnosis.
-3-
Does the logo remain YES
Panel LCD?
Perform the following work or replace
NO the following parts
- Reinstall the system.
- Replace the HDD.
-4-
Is an error code YES
Panel LCD?
NO Execute countermeasures by
referring to the error code
correspondence table
Check that the machine can be
started without any problem
Finish
Check Item Table
No. Check item Check point

1 Blank
460
6. Troubleshooting

2 Only the bar is displayed
3 The logo is displayed
4 E-code is displayed
E602-0001
An error has occurred.
Turn OFF the main power
461
6. Troubleshooting
■ Control Panel LED Check Flow

Follow the flow shown below to identify the location of failure on the basis of the Control Panel LED status and fix the failure.
If a number such as (1) or (2) is shown in the flow diagram box, be sure to refer to the check item table and make a judgment.
Start
-1-
Is the Control NO
Panel Main Power LED
blinking?
-1-
YES Is the Control NO
Panel MainPower LED
ON?
Perform the 5-V
YES Power Supply
Assembly check
-3- flow.
Is the LED8 of NO
the Main Controller
PCB ON?
YES
- Replace the micro-USB cable connecting the Riser

PCB (J3) and the Control Panel Unit (J1021).
- Replace the mini-HDMI cable connecting the Riser
PCB (J6) and the Control Panel Unit (J1020).
- Replace the Control Panel.
- If the above does not resolve the problem, replace
the Main Controller PCB and Riser PCB.
Replace the following parts.

- Main Controller PCB
-1-
Which is the Pattern 2
blink pattern of the Control
Panel Main Power
LED?
Pattern 1
Turn OFF the main Perform the 12 V
power, remove the Flash Power Supply
PCB, and turn ON the Assembly check
main power again. flow.
-2-
Is an error code NO
Panel LCD?
YES
Replace the following parts. Replace the following parts.
- Flash PCB - Main Controller PCB
Finish
462
6. Troubleshooting
Check Item Table

1 Control Panel
Main Power LED
On/Off/Blink
Blink pattern of the Control Panel Main Power LED

Pattern 1 (The Main Power LED blinks 2 times in 4 seconds: Con-
troller error)
...
1 sec
4 sec
Pattern 2 (The Main Power LED blinks 3 times in 4 seconds: Power

Supply error)
. . .
1 sec
4 sec
2 Control Panel LCD

E-code is displayed
E602-0001
An error has occurred.
Turn OFF the main power
3 Main Controller PCB

LED8
LED8
■ 5 V Power Supply Assembly Check Flow

The following diagram shows the 5 V power supply route.
If 5 V power is not supplied to the PCB, the location of the problem can be identified by checking the PCB, jack, and pins supplying
power to the PCB.
463
6. Troubleshooting
Main
Controller
PCB
J501 J512 J681 J691 J14 J3 J1021

All-night
AC Driver Power Operation
Riser PCB
AC PCB AC Supply DC 5V DC 5V Panel
PCB
5 V Power Supply Assembly Block Diagram
Refer to the flow shown below, and solve the 5 V power supply system trouble.
Start
(1)Is the Control YES

Panel Energy Saver LED
lit or blinking?
Check the mini-HDMI cable connecting the Riser
NO PCB(J6) and the Control Panel Unit (J1020).
If the cable is properly connected, replace it.
(2) DC 5 V
is supplied to YES
the Riser PCB J14.
NO - Riser PCB
- Control Panel
- Cable connecting the Riser PCB and the Control
Panel
(3) AC power
is supplied from the AC YES
Driver PCB J512.
- All-night Power Supply
NO
- Cable connecting the AC Driver PCB and
the All-night Power Supply
- Cable connecting the All-night Power Supply and
the Riser PCB
(3) AC power
is supplied to the AC YES
Driver PCB J501.
Replace the AC Driver PCB.

NO
Replace the AC Driver PCB.
End
5 V Power Supply Assembly Check Flow
NOTE:
If the Control Panel Energy Saver LED is OFF in step (1), there is a possibility that the machine is in sleep mode. In this case,
press a button to check that the LED is not lit or blinking.
464
6. Troubleshooting
Check item

1 Control Panel Energy Saver
LED
2 Riser PCB
Connector side of J14
Pin 1 (5 V) and pin 5 (GND)
Normal value: DC 5 V
1pin 5pin
J14
3 AC Driver PCB Type 1

Pin 1 and pin 3
Normal value: AC voltage
1pin 3pin
WARNING:
Be careful when you
measure the AC volt-
age.
J512
Type 2
1pin 3pin
J512
465
6. Troubleshooting

Pin 1 and pin 2
J501
WARNING:
1pin
Be careful when you
age. 2pin
Type 2
J501
1pin
2pin
■ 12 V Power Supply Assembly Check Flow

If 12 V power is not supplied to the PCB, the location of the problem can be identified by checking the PCB, jack, and pins supplying
power to the PCB.
J501 J511 J1001 J835 J401 J413 J14 J3 J1021

12V
AC Driver Operation
Power Relay PCB Riser PCB
AC PCB AC DC 12V DC 12V DC 12V Panel
Supply
12 V power is output when a signal from the Main Controller PCB is received and AC power is supplied from the AC Driver PCB
to the 12V Power Supply PCB. If there is no problem with the power supply route, it may be a problem with the signal route. Note
that power of the Relay PCB (DC 5 V) is supplied from the Riser PCB.
J504 J411 J410 J130 J101 J10

Main
AC Driver PCB Relay PCB DCON PCB Riser PCB Controller
DC 3.6 to 4.4V DC 3.3V DC 3.3V PCB
J413 J14
DC 5V
Refer to the flow shown below, and solve the 12 V power supply system trouble.
466
6. Troubleshooting
Start
NO
(1)
Riser PCB LED YES
6002 (green) on?
Replace the cable connecting the Riser PCB and the Relay
NO PCB.
If there is no problem, replace the Main Controller PCB.
(2)
Is DC 12 V supplied to YES
the Riser PCB J14?
- Riser PCB
NO
(3)
Is DC 12 V output from YES
the Relay PCB J413?
NO - Cable connecting the Riser PCB and the Relay PCB.
(4)
Is DC 12 V supplied to YES
the Relay PCB
J401?
NO - Replace the Relay PCB.
(5)
Is AC supplied from YES
the AC Driver PCB
J511? Replace the following parts.
- Cable connecting the Relay PCB and 12V Power Supply PCB
NO - 12V Power Supply PCB.
- Cable connecting the AC Driver PCB and the 12V Power
Supply
(6)
Is DC 5 V output YES
from the Riser PCB
J14?
(7)
NO Is DC 5 V supplied YES
to the Relay PCB
J413?
NO - AC Driver PCB
- Relay PCB
Replace the following parts. Replace the following parts. - DCON PCB
- Main Controller PC and - Cable connecting the Riser - Riser PCB
the Riser PCB. PCB and the Relay PCB. - Cable connecting the
foregoing PCBs
End
12 V Power Supply Assembly Check Flow
467
6. Troubleshooting
Check item

1 LED6002 (green) of the Riser
PCB
2 Riser PCB
5pin 7pin
J14
3 Connector side of
the Relay PCB J413
5pin
4pin
J413
4 Relay PCB
4pin
1pin
J401
468
6. Troubleshooting

Pin 5 and pin 7
5pin 7pin
WARNING:
Be careful when you
age.
J511
Type 2
5pin 7pin
J511
6 12V Power Supply PCB

4pin
1pin
J835
7 12V Power Supply PCB

Pin 1 and pin 4 J835
4pin
WARNING:
Be careful when you
measure the AC volt- 1pin
age.
469
6. Troubleshooting

8 Riser PCB
5pin 9pin
J14
9 Connector side of
the Relay PCB J413
Normal value: DC 5V 6pin
5pin
J413
■ OPTION (Specification setting mode)
Controller Self Diagnosis

In order to reduce the time for identifying the cause of error occurred in the field and improve the accuracy of identifying the error
locations, operation of the controller system error diagnosis tool added to the host machine and the remedies for errors are
described.
This manual can be used when the host machine is in the following conditions.
• When a failure of the Main Controller PCB and the related PCBs (child PCBs such as TPM installed on the Main Controller
PCB) is suspected
PCBs and units diagnosed by the tool are as follow:
• Main Controller PCB
• HDD
• TPM PCB
• Riser PCB
• Flash PCB
• Counter Memory PCB
• Terminal PCB
• Open I/F PCB (option)
470
6. Troubleshooting
HDD Operation panel

Option DC Controler PCB Reader
Main Controller PCB Riser PCB
Flash PCB Open I/F PCB

Controller system (Option)
failure diagnosis tool
TPM PCB Memory PCB
Fax All-night/Non-allnight Power Supply
The area framed in blue (dotted line) in the figure shows the components to be checked by the controller system error diagnosis
tool.
The Main Controller PCB, child PCBs installed on the Main Controller PCB and HDD are automatically checked, and the result
is displayed on the Control Panel.
■ Boot Method
1. Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4' simultaneously.
2. Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears on the Control Panel.
===============================================
BOX Checker Ver 0. 58
SCENARIO-1 Processing BoxMode check start. . .
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-1 IA-DDR2 SDRAM check start. . .
471
6. Troubleshooting
NOTE:
When this tool is not installed correctly, the regular Startup screen is displayed.
In this case, perform the following remedy.

Turn OFF the Main Power Switch again, and execute steps 1 and 2 shown above.
If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT (Box Checker Test) is deleted, so install BCT.
If BCT is not installed correctly, "- - . - -" is displayed in Service Mode (BCT) in the host machine.
• COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > BCT
■ Diagnosis Result
Diagnosis Time
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
The result is displayed on the Control Panel.
When the diagnosis result is normal
When an error is detected by diagnosis

Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name of the test where the error was
detected is displayed.
How to view the error result

The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above.
Explanation of the detailed error information is described.
472
6. Troubleshooting
>> The result of Box checker is displayed below.

[no] : SN-9 PCI Configuration PCI-Bridge
[NG] : SN-13 TPM
[no] : SN-19 O-SDRAM
>> Please Turn off main switch.
[NO] means that optional PCBs are not mounted.

A fault has occurred when [NO] is displayed irrespective of whether the Option PCB is attached.
[NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard.
● Controller System Error Diagnosis Table

The error locations are identified according to the following table.
Test name Detailed test name Presumed failure loca- Remedy Relevant Er-
tion ror Code
SN-1 MN- Check the SDRAM of • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
DDR3 SDRAM the Main Controller
PCB
SN-2 SM BUS Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
MN DDR3 On Main Controller PCB
Board
SN-6 PCI Con- Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
figuration Main Controller PCB
SN-9 CPLD Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
Main Controller PCB
SN-10 LANC Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
FLASH Main Controller PCB
SN-11 RTC Check RTC setting • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
CHECK time
SN-12 TPM Check TPM PCB de- • Main Controller PCB 1. Replacement of the TPM PCB E746
vice • TPM PCB 2. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB
Remarks: It is always
[NG] in machines for
China because the
TPM PCB is not instal-
led.
SN-13 M- Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
DDR3 SDRAM Main Controller PCB • Riser PCB
SN-14 FLASH Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
ROM Main Controller PCB
SN-15 P-DDR3 Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
SDRAM Main Controller PCB
SN-17 S-DDR3 Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
SDRAM Main Controller PCB
SN-18 Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB 1. Check the connection of the Open I/F PCB -
GOR(O)- Open I/F PCB • Open I/F PCB 2. Replace the Open I/F PCB
DDR2 SDRAM 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
Remarks: [NO] is displayed when the Open I/F
PCB is not installed.
SN-19 GU Check the connection • Main Controller PCB 1. Check the connection of the Open I/F PCB -
BUS between the Main Con- • Open I/F PCB 2. Replace the Open I/F PCB
troller PCB and Open I/ 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
F PCB Remarks: [NO] is displayed when the Open I/F
PCB is not installed.
SN-20 FRAM Check the Memory • Memory PCB 1. Check the Memory PCB installation E355
PCB lead 2. Replace the Memory PCB
473
6. Troubleshooting
Test name Detailed test name Presumed failure loca- Remedy Relevant Er-
tion ror Code
SN-23 HDD Check the HDD lead • HDD In case of a single HDD configuration E602
(see the display exam- 1. Check the HDD connection
ple shown below) 2. (If it is displayed in a mirroring config-
uration, it indicates that the HDD 1 is
faulty.)
Replace the HDD Cable
3. Replace the HDD
In case of an HDD mirroring configuration -
1. Check the connection of the HDD in-
dicated in the diagnosis result
2. Replace the cable of the HDD indica-
ted in the diagnosis result
3. Replace the HDD indicated in the di-
agnosis result
SN-25 FAN1 Check the rotation of • Main Controller PCB Check the connection of the Controller Fan E880
the Controller Fan
SN-100 HDD Check the S.M.A.R.T. • HDD • If the S.M.A.R.T. Check displays a numeric -
HEALTH acquisition and lead value apart from [0], a backup of customer
CHECK performance (see the data is recommended.
example displayed in • If the CheckResult is judged as CAUTION,
the figure below) a backup of customer data is recommen-
ded.
• If the Performance is displayed as [20
MB/s] or less, replacement of the HDD is
recommended.
• If Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK is
judged as NG, replace the HDD.
SN-23 HDD
>0%V@
&KHFN5HVXOW !>1250$/@
([HF61+''+($/7+&+(&. !>2.@
([HF6&(1$5,23URFHVVLQJ%R[0RGH !>2.@

[Rebuilding] = During rebuilding of mirrored HDD
[HDD1 Failure] = Failure of the HDD1
!!7KHUHVXOWRI%R[FKH[FNHULVGLVSOD\HGEHORZ
>:DUQLQJ@61+''>+'')DLOXUH@ [HDD2 Failure] = Failure of the HDD2
3OHDVHKLW5HVHW.H\WRVWDUWVKXWGRZQ
SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-23 FAN check start. . .
Exec SN-23 FAN => [OK] S.M.A.R.T Check -----
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK check start. . .
05: Reallcated Sectors Count:[000000000000] Refer to <S.M.A.R.T Check>.
S.M.A.R.T Check -----
05 : Reallocated Sectors Count :[00000000000000] See below.
c5 : Current Pending Sector Count :[00000000000000] C5: Current Pending Sector Count:[000000000000]
c6 : Uncorrectable Sector Count :[00000000000000]
Read Performance Check -----
136. 8 [MB/s]
C6: Uncorrectable Sector Count:[000000000000] The average transfer speed of
CheckResult => [NORMAL] a normal HDD displays [80-90MB/s].
Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK]
========================================== Read Performance Check ----- If "Performance" is [20 MB/s] or less,
Exec SCENARIO-1 Processing BoxMode => [OK]
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% [90.8MB/s]
recommend to replace the HDD.
%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%% %%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%% %%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %% %%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%% CheckResult => [NORMAL]
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%
%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%% %%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%
If the result is CAUTION,
%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%% Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK] recommend the backup of user data.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
>> The result of Box chexcker is displayed below. ===================================
[NO] : SN-8 PCI Configuration PCI-Bridge
[NO] : SN-18 GOR(0)-DDR2 SDRAM
Exec SCENARIO-1 Preocessing BoxMode => [OK]
--- Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown. ---
If the result is NG, replace the HDD.
474
6. Troubleshooting
HDD S.M.A.R.T Information

S.M.A.R.T Check
S.M.A.R.T Check Description Remedy

05: Reallocated Sectors Count: Number of alternative processed defec- If a numeric value besides [0000000000000] is displayed,
[000000000000] tive sectors backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data.
c5: Current Pending Sector Number of pending sectors (sectors If a numeric value apart from [0000000000000] is displayed,
Count: [000000000000] that may have defective sectors) backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data.
c6: Uncorrectable Sector Number of defective sectors (uncorrect- If a numeric value apart from [0000000000000] is displayed,
Count: [0000000000000] able sectors) which do not allow alter- • backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data.
native processing • Replace the HDD
* Alarm 31-0008 may have occurred in the Host Machine.
NOTE:
When replacing one of the mirrored HDDs, replace the HDD indicated in the controller self-diagnosis result or indicated by the
error display of the HDD LED.
Of the two HDDs installed, the HDD installed on the front side is the HDD 1 (on the left in the picture), and the HDD installed on
the rear side is the HDD 2 (on the right in the picture).
The location of the LED and the location of the HDD differ depending on the model. A reference example is shown below.
HDD1 HDD2
HDD LED
Reference example
■ Limitations
• If there is a problem with the test name (SN-1, 2, 9, 13, 14), this diagnosis tool itself will not startup.
• When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB, the following judgment results are displayed.
Standard PCB: [NG]
Optional PCB: [OK]
However, [NO] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.
475
6. Troubleshooting
Debug Log
Function Overview
Debug logs are used for analysis of program operations of the machine and identification of the problem by the developer.
This machine has a function for compiling operation history of each software module as debug logs and outputting them as unified
logs for analyzing problems.
Since the frequency of outputting debug logs and the type of logs can be changed by the settings, the settings need to be changed
according to the trouble that occurs and the situation.
Whether to change the settings is instructed by the Support Dept. of the sales company, and on-site service technicians do not
have to decide it.
Cases where logs need to be collected

• When the result of identification of the cause shows that the trouble was caused by the iR-ADV machine (firmware, hardware-
related controller)
• When the failure occurs only at the customer's site and cannot be reproduced by the department in charge of quality
management or Canon Inc.
Type of log
Type of log Description

Sublogs Manual logs
Logs that are saved when log saving is executed.
Logs of the Main Controller, RCON, and DCON are saved together with automatic logs as up to 10 logs
in total.
Automatic logs
Logs that are automatically saved to the machine when an event (exceptional behavior, error code, or
reboot) occurs.
Logs of the Main Controller, RCON, and DCON are saved together with manual logs as up to 10 logs
in total.
Continuous logs
Logs that are continuously saved while the machine is running.
Up to 100 logs of only the Main Controller can be stored.
Key operation logs History of key operations.
Network packet logs Logs of network packet data sent from or received by the host machine.
Storage location and types of Sublogs

The locations where Sublogs are stored and the types of logs are shown below. Logs may be stored in controllers and parts other
than those shown below.
Type Event logs Manual logs Continuous logs

Main Controller Yes (more detailed than continu- Yes (more detailed than continu- Yes
ous logs) ous logs)
DCON Yes Yes No
RCON Yes Yes No
■ Sublogs
Sublog is the general term for the unified logs for analyzing problem in which operation histories of software modules are compiled
as debug logs.
When a problem relating to the host machine occurs in the field and it is difficult to identify the cause of it at the user site, collecting
Sublogs and sending them to Design Dept./R&D can improve the efficiency of analyzing the problem and reduce the time it takes
to deal with the problem.
476
6. Troubleshooting
CAUTION:
• Since Sublogs are basically stored in volatile memory, almost all information will be lost by turning OFF and then ON
the power. Therefore, it is important to perform log collection operation without turning OFF and then ON the power
while the symptom occurs.
• Once the Sublog files are collected, they are deleted from the host machine. In the case of collecting Sublogs
consecutively, the number of continuous log files may be fewer than usual.
■ Key Operation Logs

The key operation log function is used to collect user's key operation logs in order to distinguish between a host machine failure
and a user's operation mistake when, for example, a fax transmission error occurred.
If it cannot be denied the possibility that the user operation caused the error, collect the key operation logs.
Key operation logs are not recorded by default, therefore, the function needs to be enabled.
In order to save key operation logs, configure the setting of the following Settings/Registration menu to ON (enabled).
[Management Settings] > [Device Management] > [Store Key Operation Log]
Only when the foregoing setting is enabled, it is judged that user's permission has been obtained, and user operation logs start
to be recorded.
User operation logs are saved together with Sublogs and collected as logs contained in Sublog files.
Among the saved user operation logs, the confidential information shown below is masked.
• Password entered from the software keyboard
• PIN, PIN code, etc. entered from the Numeric Keypad
• Information that is hidden by turned letters on the UI screen
CAUTION:
Be sure to obtain user's permission in advance to record key operation logs for analyzing problems.
NOTE:
• When logs are output, passwords, PIN, and turned letters are masked, and these confidential information never leak out.
• Collect this log when it is determined that analysis of the firmware debug log is required.
■ Network Packet Logs

With this function, network packet data sent from or received by the host machine is collected (captured) in the HDD without the
need for special equipment.
When it is expected that the trouble was caused by network, collect network packet logs.
Note that this function is not a standard function because packet data on the network contains customer information. To use this
function, it needs to be activated as a license option and then enabled in service mode.
CAUTION:
When collecting network packet logs using this function, be sure to obtain user's permission in advance by explaining about
it.
CAUTION:
In the case of a heavy-load network environment, some of the packets may be left uncollected.
477
6. Troubleshooting
Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs

Flow of determining the procedure for obtaining logs
Check the following flow to determine the procedure for obtaining logs according to the type of problem.
Service call for trouble
Does the problem

repeat restart?
Key operation logs need to be collected
Does the problem

cause the Control Panel
to be locked?
Network packet logs need to be collected
<DEBUG SRAM PCB ASSY Board: Required>
Does the problem

repeat restart? See Case A of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
Does the problem

cause the Control Panel See Case B of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
to be locked?
Is the problem related

See Case C of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
to the sleep mode?
<DEBUG SRAM PCB ASSY Board: Not required>
Is the problem still

occurring or just finished See Case D of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
occurring?
See Case D of the "Procedure

for Obtaining Logs"
When the user's operation such as wrong fax transmission may be the cause of the problem, enable [Store Key Operation Log].
478
6. Troubleshooting
Procedure for obtaining logs

Log Collection Procedure List
Problem Details of Problem DEBUG SRAM Procedure for Obtaining Logs

Case PCB ASS'Y
Board
Case A Problem that repeats re- Necessary 1. Install the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board.
start 2. Execute [Saving Manual Logs] immediately after restart.
3. Execute [Collection of Log] with SST, etc.
Case B Problem causing the Necessary 1. Install the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board.
Control Panel to be 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power immediately after the Control Panel
locked is locked.
3. Execute [Saving Manual Logs] after startup.
Case C Problem related to the Necessary 1. Install the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board.
sleep mode 2. After the problem occurs, turn OFF and then ON the power if necessary,
and execute [Saving Manual Logs].
Case D Problem when execut- Not necessary 1. Execute [Saving Manual Logs] while the problem is occurring.
ing a job (Example: 2. Execute [Collection of Log] with SST, etc.
Printing is not per-
formed ,etc.)
When an E code error Not necessary Execute [Collection of Log] with SST, etc. However, if the background of the
has occurred Control Panel is blank and an error code is displayed in text, logs cannot be
obtained.
Case E Problems other than Not necessary Execute [Collection of Log] with SST, etc. Check with the user on the date
above and time when the problem occurred and the procedure.
NOTE:
When an unexpected error, E code error, or problem of restart occurs, the log can be automatically saved to the hard disk. To
automatically save logs to the hard disk, confirm that the following service mode is set to the default value. For models without the
service mode item, no check is needed because it is already set to the default value.
• (Level2) COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > LOG-TRIG > 101
Saving and Collecting Sublogs

■ Tools Required
The following tools are necessary to save/collect Sublogs of the machine.
Exporting to a USB Device

• USB Device
When exporting Sublogs to a USB device, use a USB device in which the system software for the machine is registered
using SST.
Since the size and number of log files to collect varies according to the device status and the logs that have been saved,
the size of the collected files may be several hundred MB. Therefore, it is recommended that you use a USB device with
1 GB or more space.
The USB device must be formatted with the FAT file system.
Exporting to a PC
• PC with SST installed
• Network connection cable
When exporting Sublogs to a PC, a PC with SST installed and a network connection cable are required.
479
6. Troubleshooting
Common (When Exporting to a USB Device, or When Exporting to a PC)

• DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board
In the following conditions, Sublogs cannot be saved, therefore the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board is required when
exporting Sublogs to a USB Device or a PC.
• When restart is repeated
• When all the operations of the device are frozen and manual logs cannot be collected.
• When the machine would not recover from sleep mode
Refer to the following regarding installation on to the Controller PCB.
DEBUG SRAM PCB
Reference example of installation
■ Work Flow
The flow of saving/collecting Sublogs is shown below.
1. Preparation
Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs” on page 478, and make the preparation as needed according
to a situation where an event has occurred.
2. Reproduction of the symptom

Reproduce the symptom.
3. Saving of manual logs

Save manual logs that require manual operation.
4. Output of reports
Output reports necessary for escalation.
5. Collecting log files

Start the machine in download mode, and save (collect) the log files to a USB device or a PC.
CAUTION:
In the case of analysis using Sublog, the following information needs to be obtained together with the Sublog.
• Symptom that has occurred (from service technician's viewpoint as far as possible)
• Date and time of the event (from an hour before the event to an hour after the event)
• Reports (P-Print, HIST-PRT, job logs, communication management report, etc.)
• Printed data and original at the time of reproduction (depends on the trouble that has occurred)
Besides Sublog, the above-mentioned information is required due to the following reasons:
• Failures such as a process being stopped due to an error or an unintended behavior are easy to find, but failures such
as "the behavior is slow" are difficult to analyze based on operation logs only.
• Since the number and size of the files are huge, the information helps to find the operation log where the problem
occurred.
• When R&D reproduces the failure, it is necessary to use information such as the procedure used by the customer,
frequency of use, and job data at the time of occurrence of the failure.
6. Remove the board installed in step 1 and return the settings back to the original values.
■ Preparation
Follow the procedure shown below to make preparations for collecting debug logs.
480
6. Troubleshooting
1. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs” on page 478 and when it is judged that DEBUG
SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board is required, install the board.
DEBUG SRAM PCB
2. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs” on page 478 and when it is judged that collection
of the key operation logs is required, enable [Store Key Operation Log] by following the procedure shown below.
1. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Device Management] > [Store Key Operation Log].
2. Select [ON] and press [OK] to start saving key operation logs.
CAUTION:
When collecting the key operation logs, be sure to obtain user's permission in advance.
3. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs” on page 478 and when it is judged that collection
of the network packet logs is required, enable the network packet log collection function by following the procedure
shown below and start the function.
1. Enter a license in the following menu to enable network packet capture.
[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Register License]
2. Enable the setting (ON) in the following menu.
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Store Network Packet Log]
3. Set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON
4. Refer to “Initial setting of Collecting Network Packet Logs” on page 481, and configure the required option settings.
5. Set "0" or "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2) to start capture of network packets.
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > STT-STP
• 0: Not automatically collect at startup (factory default setting)
• 1: Automatically collects at startup
6. Execute the following service mode (Lv.2) to check the status of the capture.
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPSTATE
The following types of status are displayed.
• RUNNING: Packets are being captured.
• STOP: Packet capturing is stopped.
• HDDFULL: The maximum amount of 1 GB of packets has been captured.
CAUTION:
When collecting the key operation logs, be sure to obtain user's permission in advance.
● Initial setting of Collecting Network Packet Logs

Configure initial settings as needed.
Setting the overwrite function
481
6. Troubleshooting
1. To enable this function, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > OVERWRIT
NOTE:
When this setting is enabled, old logs will be overwritten. If the symptom cannot be reproduced, disable this setting (setting value:
0) and secure logs (save them using SST or USB).
After securing the logs, enable the setting (setting value: 1) again.
Behavior when HDD reaches the limit

When this setting is enabled (setting value: 1), the following behaviors will occur when the HDD reaches the limit.
• When overwrite setting is ON
• The oldest packet file is deleted. This "oldest file" is judged not by the date and time allocated to the file but
by the last update time of the file.
• If the HDD reaches the maximum size while retrieving packets, the oldest file will be deleted, and CAPSTATE
of the capture, which continues the retrieval process for the file which is being saved, remains "RUNNING".
• When overwrite setting is OFF
• The capture is stopped.
• The CAPSTATE of the capture will be "HDDFULL". However, STT-STP will remain as Start (1) status. By
changing STT-STP (0) to STTSTP (1), the capture resumes.
• When the capture resumes, the capture starts if HDDFULL has been solved.
• The CAPSTATE of the capture will be "RUNNING".
• If HDDFULL has not been solved, an error is generated as the result of resuming the capture.
• The CAPSTATE of the capture remains "HDDFULL".
• If the capture is stopped while the CAPSTATE is "HDDFULL", the CAPSTATE of the capture remains "STOP".
Setting the encryption function
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > ENCDATA
• 0: Encrypted when data is extracted (factory default setting).
• 1: Not encrypted when data is extracted.
• 2: When data is extracted, a ciphertext file and a plaintext file are extracted.
The extension of extracted packet data will be "XXX.can" when encryption settings are enabled.
The extension of extracted packet data will be "XXX.cap" when encryption settings are disabled.
This setting only applies when extracting data by the USB flash drive.
NOTE:
When SST is used to collect data, both plaintext data and ciphertext data are extracted, and this setting is ignored.
Setting the payload drop function
1. To enable this setting, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PAYLOAD
• 0: Not drop the payload (factory default settings)
• 1: Drop the payload
The obtained packet data includes a header part and data part. The header part includes data such as the TCP header and
IP header. The data part includes the actual data.
Enabling this function discards the actual payload data and extracts only the data from the header part, which has the following
effects.
• Can be used when customer data is not allowed to be extracted
• Can be used in an environment where traffic is highly overloaded
Header part
Data part
Discarded part
Packet data structure image
482
6. Troubleshooting
Setting the filter function
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > SIMPFILT
• 0: All data is collected without being filtered (factory default setting).
• 1: Data is filtered.
If this function is enabled, only packet data that includes the machine's MAC address in the packet header is captured.
Setting the startup collection function
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PONSTART
• 0: Not automatically collect at startup (factory default setting)
• 1: Data is filtered.
If this function is enabled, only packet data that includes the machine's MAC address in the packet header is captured.
■ Saving Manual Logs

Follow the procedure shown below to save manual logs that require manual operation to the backup area of the host machine.
1. Reproduce the symptom.
2. When network packet logs have been collected and necessary network packets have been captured, stop the
capture from the following menu.
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Store Network Packet Log]
NOTE:
When this setting is disabled, all the service mode settings configured in step 3 are initialized.
CAUTION:
After completion of analysis of the network trouble, be sure to disable the network capture function. It is therefore necessary
to disable and then transfer the license, but it is not necessary to transfer the LMS license after that.
3. Hold down the Counter key on the Control Panel for approx. 10 seconds, and then press 1, 2, and 3 in that order on
the Numeric Keypad.
2 1
4. Check that "Storing System Information..." is displayed on the Control Panel.
483
6. Troubleshooting
CAUTION:
• While logs are being saved, other operations cannot be performed.
• "Storing System Information..." is not displayed, press the Reset button and then try again.
■ Saving and Collecting Reports

Follow the procedure shown below to save reports to the HDD in the host machine and collect them using a USB device.
1. Execute the following service mode to save report files to the HDD.
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE
2. Execute the following service mode with the USB device connected to the host machine to collect the report stored
in the HDD into the USB device.
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > RPT2USB
■ Collection of Log
Save the Sublogs stored in the host machine to a USB device or a PC with SST installed.
The procedure for storing Sublogs to a USB device differs from that for storing Sublogs to a PC
● Collecting into a USB Device

To save (collect) Sublogs to a USB device, perform the procedure shown below to collect the logs.
If SST is used to save (collect) Sublogs to a PC, this work is not necessary.
484
6. Troubleshooting
1. Execute the following service mode with a USB flash drive connected to the host machine.
COPIER > Function > System > Download
2. The host machine will enter download mode. Press [8] on the Numeric Keypad.
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Root Menu (USB) <v14.06> ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v14.06)

-------------------------------------------------------
[ 1 ] : SYSTEM Version
[ 4 ] : Clear/Format
[ 5 ] : Backup/Restore
[ 8 ] : Download File
[ 9 ] : Version Information
[ Reset ] : Start shutdown sequence
3. [Download File Menu] will appear. Press [1] on the Numeric Keypad.
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Download File Menu (USB) <v14.06> ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v14.06)

-------------------------------------------------------
[ 1 ] : SUBLOG Download
[ 4 ] : ServicePrint Download
[ 5 ] : NetCap Download
[ C ] : Return to Menu
4. Check the files to be downloaded and the number of files that are displayed, and press [0] on the Numeric Keypad.
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Sublog Download (EventLog + CuntinuousLog ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Event Logs ( lastest 10 files) :
20161010_14-00--V_exception
ContinuousLog :
Period : 20161012_0521-15 to 20161013_1733-36
Toral : 102files
/ Execute ? /
-(OK) : 0 / (CANCEL) : Any other keys -
● Saving to a PC with SST installed

Follow the procedure shown below to save (collect) Sublogs to a PC using SST.
If a USB device is used to save (collect) Sublogs, this work is not necessary.
1. Connect a PC with SST installed to the network where the host machine is connected.
2. Start SST, and select the model name of the machine from Model List. Press the Start button.
485
6. Troubleshooting
3. Click [Upload Data].
486
6. Troubleshooting
4. Check that continuous logs are stored in the device.

When connection with the device is completed, the screen shown below will appear. Select [Upload Data].
The set of data stored in the device is shown on the right. Click "+" at "Log" to expand the tree, and check that there are
continuous logs (date_model number_clog.bin).
5. Select the data to upload, and click [Start].

Select the check box on the left of "Log", and click the "Start" button.
It is not necessary to select MeapBack.bin and SramImg.bin because they are not necessary for analysis.
6. Enter a file name (arbitrary), and click the SAVE button to save the file to the PC.
487
6. Troubleshooting
● Checking the Saved Files

Sublog files
See the folder shown below to check that the collected Sublogs are correctly stored.
In case of a USB device

Root folder of the USB device
In case of SST
PC's C:\ServData\<model name>\serial number folder
Image file name
Type Example of the file name

Continuous logs
20161013_1733-36_ZZZ99999_1406_clog.bin
YYYYMMDD_HHMM-SS Serial Number Firmware Version Identification indicating
that it is a continuous log
488
6. Troubleshooting
Type Example of the file name

Automatic logs
20161012_14-48_ZZZ99999_V1406_Fatal00-exception
YYYYMMDD_HH-MM Serial Number Firmware Version Cause of occurrence
20161012_14-48_ZZZ99999_V1406_ServiceCall-E719-0031
YYYYMMDD_HH-MM Serial Number Firmware Version Cause of occurrence
Manual logs
20161013_10-10_ZZZ99999_V 1308_Debuglog@Cnt123
YYYYMMDD_HH-MM Serial Number Firmware Version Identification indicating that
a key operation was performed
CAUTION:
The event log and manual log are collected as one file shown below:
20161013_19-34-ZZZ99999-V1406_SAFE.bin
YYYYMMDD_HH-MM Serial Number Firmware Version
CAUTION:
LOGLIST.TXT contains a list of downloaded files, and you can see the list to check whether the necessary files have been
downloaded.
If it is opened using Windows standard Notepad, it cannot be displayed correctly due to line feed codes. Use WordPad or
a text editor to open it.
Report files
Report files saved to the USB device are stored in the folder under the name shown below where the firmware is stored.
• [Serial No.] + [Date (year, month, day, hour, minute (12 digits))]
489
7 Error/Jam/Alarm
Overview........................................... 491
Error Code.........................................494
Jam Code..........................................639
Alarm Code....................................... 652
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Overview
This section describes the error codes that are displayed when failure has occurred. The codes are divided into three categories.
Code types Description Reference

Error Codes This code is displayed when a failure caused by the host machine “Error Code” on page 494
has occurred.
Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine. “Jam Code” on page 639
Alarm code This code is displayed when some functions are disabled. “Alarm Code” on page 652
Display of error codes

The 7-digit "E000XXX"error code is displayed on the display of the Control Panel. However, since "000" of the 2nd to 4th digits
is not used, the 5th to 7th digits are described as "EXXX" in the Service Manual. (Example: E012 -> E000012)
Location Code
The error codes, jam codes, and alarm codes of this machine contain information on the location.
The location is displayed in 2 digits and has the meaning shown below: (In the jam display screen, the "L" row corresponds to
the location code.)
Device JAM ERR ALARM

Host machine 00 Main Controller: 00 Other than those
Printer engine: 05 below
Reader/ADF 01 04 02,50
2-cassette Pedestal-AM1 00 05 04
High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-A1 00 05 04
Paper Deck Unit-F1 00 05 04
Buffer Path Unit-L1 02 02 -
Booklet Finisher/External Finisher-Y1 02 02 61
Inner Finisher-H1 02 02 61
Pickup Position Code

When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code. (In the jam display screen, the "P" row
corresponds to the pickup position code.)
Pickup position Pickup position code

At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup 00
operation (at SEND, BOX, etc.)
Cassette 1 01
Cassette 2 02
Cassette 3 (2-cassette Pedestal-AM1 / High Capacity Cassette 03
Feeding Unit-A1)
Cassette 4 (2-cassette Pedestal-AM1) 04
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly 05
Side Paper Deck 06
Duplex (At duplex printing, jam occurs after paper passes through F0
the Duplex Paper Sensor (PS38).)
Pickup size
When a jam occurs, a paper size is displayed. (The row displaying "SIZE" on the jam screen refers to the paper size.)
Due to the limitation of displayable number of characters, some paper size names are omitted. The following is the list of displayed
row of texts and corresponding paper sizes.
* The following is based on the display specification and not all paper sizes can actually be used.
491
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Display Paper Size Display Paper Size

A0 A0 LDR LEDGER
A1 A1 LDRFB LEDGERFULLBLEED
A2 A2 LGL LEGAL
A3 A3 LTR LETTER
A3FB A3FULLBLEED EXE EXECUTIVE
A4 A4 STMT STATEMENT
A5 A5 10x8 10x8
A6 A6 12x18 12x18
A7 A7 13x19 13x19
I-B0 ISOB0 15x11 15x11
I-B1 ISOB1 17x22 17x22
I-B2 ISOB2 18x24 18x24
I-B3 ISOB3 A-FLS Australian-FOOLSCAP
I-B4 ISOB4 ALGL Argentina-LEGAL
I-B5 ISOB5 ALTR Argentina-LETTER
I-B6 ISOB6 OFI OFICIO
I-B7 ISOB7 A-OFI Argentina-OFICIO
I-C0 ISOC0 B-OFI Bolivia-OFICIO
I-C1 ISOC1 E-OFI Ecuador-OFICIO
I-C2 ISOC2 M-OFI Mexico-OFICIO
I-C3 ISOC3 KLGL Korea-LEGAL
I-C4 ISOC4 GLGL Government-LEGAL
I-C5 ISOC5 GLTR Government-LETTER
I-C6 ISOC6 IND-LGL India-LEGAL
I-C7 ISOC7 COM10 COM10
I-SRA3 SRA3 DL DL
J-B0 JISB0 E_C2 Nagagata 2
J-B4 JISB4 E-K2 Kakugata 2
J-B5 JISB5 E_K3 Kakugata 3
K16 K16 E_K6 Kakugata 6
K8 K8 E_K7 Kakugata 7
ND-PCD Newdry Postcard E_K8 Kakugata 8
OTHER OTHER E_Y1 Yougata 1
PCARD Postcard E-Y2 Yougata 2
PCARD4 4 on 1 Postcard E_Y3 Yougata 3
F4A F4A E-Y4 Yougata 4
F4B F4B E_Y5 Yougata 5
FLSC FOOLCAP E_Y6 Yougata 6
FOLIO FLIO E_Y7 Yougata 7
FREE FREE SIZE EVLP_YN3 Yougatanaga 3
ICARD INDEXCARD E-B5 B5 Envelope
USER Custom E-C5 C5 Envelope
MONA MONARCH
EVLP Unknown size envelope
492
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON

• Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Adjustment/
Maintenance, Function Settings, Set Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings), etc. Before execution of this
operation, ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation.
• When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than User Authentication is, error such as not displayed login screen
occurred. In this case, access SMS once and switch login application to User Authentication to recover to the normal status.
Points to Note When Clearing HDD

As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX, E611-0000), HDD partition is selected and the target partition may be cleared.
When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of HDD partition1-26 and explain to the
user before starting work.
493
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Error Code
Error Code Details

001-0001-05 Fixing Thermistor high temperature detection error
Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a high temperature error.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness connecting from the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J213) to the Fixing Cooling Fan
(Front) and (Rear) (FM5/J6068 and FM6/J6069)
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J122), the Drawer Unit (J5012) and the Main
Thermistor (TH1/J6492)
- Fixing Cooling Fan (Front) (FM5)
- Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM6)
- Main Thermistor (TH1)
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
- Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2)
- DC Controller PCB (UN1)
[Remedy]
- Check COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-E.
a. In the case of below 283 deg C, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power.
b. In the case of 283 deg C or higher, check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and
parts.
[CAUTION] Do not turn ON the power before replacing the Fixing Film Unit.
After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.
[Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2
min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

Detection Description The Fixing Thermistor (Front) detected a high temperature error.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
[Remedy]
- Check COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-E2.
parts.
494
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Thermistor (Rear) detected a high temperature error.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
[Remedy]
- Check COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-E3.
parts.

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Middle) detected a high temperature error.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
[Remedy]
- Check COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-C.
parts.
495
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Front) detected a high temperature error.
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J122), the Drawer Unit (J5012) and the Sub
- Sub Thermistor (TH2)
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
[Remedy]
- Check COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-F.
parts.

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Rear) detected a high temperature error.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
[Remedy]
- Check COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-R.
parts.
496
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Thermistor detected a high temperature error by hardware detection.
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J122), the Drawer Unit (J5012) and the Fixing
Thermistors (TH2/J6491 and TH1/J6492)
- Fixing Thermistors (TH1 and TH2)
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
[Remedy]
- Check the detected temperatures of all the Fixing Thermistors.
a. If it is the upper limit temperature or lower, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER>
b. If it exceeds the upper limit temperature, check/replace the related harness/cable, connector
and parts.
002-0001-05 Fixing Thermistor temperature increase detection error

Detection Description After the Fixing Heater was turned ON, the Fixing Main Thermistor detected no temperature
increase.
- Harnesses connecting the AC Driver PCB (UN6/J502),the Drawer Unit (J5012) and the Fixing
Heater (J5007)
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. Then, turn
OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
497
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Startup control was not completed although 60 sec had passed.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter

Detection Description After the Fixing Heater was turned ON, the Fixing Main Thermistor detected error in temperature
increase.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter

Detection Description After the Fixing Heater was turned ON, the Fixing Thermistor (Front) detected error in temperature
increase.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
498
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description After the Fixing Heater was turned ON, the Fixing Thermistor (Rear) detected error in temperature
increase.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Middle) detected no temperature increase.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Front) detected no temperature increase.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
499
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Rear) detected no temperature increase.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Middle) detected error in temperature increase.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Front) detected error in temperature increase.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
500
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Rear) detected error in temperature increase.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
003-0001-05 Fixing Thermistor low temperature detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor detected an abnormally low temperature during print control.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter

Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) detected an abnormally low temperature during print control.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
501
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) detected an abnormally low temperature during print control.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Middle) detected an abnormally low temperature during print control.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Front) detected an abnormally low temperature during print control.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
502
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Film Thermistor (Rear) detected an abnormally low temperature during print control.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter

Detection Description An error in temperature difference between the Fixing Film Thermistor (Front) and (Rear) was
detected during print control.
- Film Assembly
- Fan Shutter
004-0000-05 Fixing Thermistor disconnection detection error

Detection Description Open circuit of the Fixing Thermistor or connector disconnection was detected.
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J122), the Drawer Unit (J5012) and the Fixing
Thermistors (TH1/J6492 and TH2/J6491)
- Fixing Thermistors (TH1 and TH2)
- Film Assembly
1. Check that the Fixing Assembly is properly installed.
503
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
004-0001-05 Fixing relay welding detection error

Detection Description Welding of the fixing relay on the AC Driver PCB was detected.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Replace the AC Driver PCB (UN6).
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
[CAUTION] If it is left as it is, other fixing-related errors (E001 to E003) may occur.
009-0000-05 Fixing pressure timeout error

Detection Description The Fixing Pressure Sensor did not detect ON status within 5 sec after the start of pressure
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J215) and the Fixing Motor (M21/J6084)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J172 and J170) and the Feed/Drum Driver PCB
(UN2/J203 and J202)
- Fixing Motor (M21)
- Fixing Drive Assembly
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
009-0001-05 Fixing disengagement timeout error

Detection Description The Fixing Pressure Sensor did not detect OFF status within 5 sec after the start of fixing
disengagement operation.
(UN2/J203 and J202)
- Fixing Drive Assembly
009-0002-05 Fixing pressure error

Detection Description The gears did not stop at pressure application position within 10 times after the start of pressure
Remedy Clean the grease scattered on the gears in the Fixing Assembly.
1. Remove the Fixing Assembly and the Pressure Release Plate Assembly.
2. Wipe off the grease scattered on/around the Pressure Release Cam and the Pressure Plate
with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
3. Wipe off the excess grease on the side of the gears and shaft in the host machine.
504
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
012-0101-05 Drum Motor error

Detection Description Rotation speed error of the Drum Motor (YMC) was detected.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J226) and the Drum Motor (YMC) (M1/J2261)
- Drum Motor (YMC) (M1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
012-0401-05 Drum Motor error

Detection Description Rotation speed error of the Drum Motor (Bk) was detected.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J226) and the Drum Motor (Bk) (M4/J2262)
- Drum Motor (Bk) (M4)
012-1000-05 ITB Motor error

Detection Description Lock signal error of the ITB Motor was detected while the ITB was being driven.
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J303) and the ITB Motor (M13/J3030)
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J304) and the Relay PCB (UN5/J402)
- ITB Motor (M13)
- Transfer Cleaning Blade
- Front Driver PCB (UN3)
1. Check that the ITB is not displaced.
012-1001-05 ITB Motor error

Detection Description Lock signal error of the ITB was detected consecutively when starting the drive of the ITB.
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J303) and the ITB Motor (M13/J3030)
- ITB Motor (M13)
- Transfer Cleaning Blade
1. Check that the ITB is not displaced.
013-0001-05 Waste Toner Stirring Motor error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Waste Toner Stirring Motor was detected consecutively.
- Harnesses connecting the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J224), the Relay Connector (J6204/9P)
and the Waste Toner Stirring Motor (M45/J6244)
- Waste Toner Stirring Motor (M45)
- Waste Toner Container
1. Check for toner amount and clogging in the Waste Toner Container.
505
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
013-0002-05 Waste Toner Feed Motor error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Waste Toner Feed Motor was detected consecutively.
- Harnesses connecting the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J306), the Drawer Unit (J755) and the Waste
Toner Feed Motor (M26/J6111)
- Waste Toner Feed Motor (M26)
- Waste Toner Container
1. Check for toner amount and clogging in the Waste Toner Container and the Waste Toner Feed
Pipe.
014-0001-05 Fixing Motor error

Detection Description Lock error of the Fixing Motor was detected.
- Film Assembly
1 Check that the Fixing Assembly is properly installed.
020-0124-05 ATR output error

Detection Description The ATR Patch (Y) detected that the output value (SigD) was below the lower limit at initialization
of the Developing Assembly.
- Drum Unit
- Developing Assembly (Y)
1. Check that the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit are properly installed.
2. Remove soiling on the exposure window and the Drum Unit.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit.

Detection Description The ATR Patch (Y) detected that the output value (SigD) exceeded the upper limit at initialization
- Drum Unit
2. Remove soiling on the Drum Unit.
020-01A8-05 ATR output error

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Y) detected that the output value was below the lower limit during printing.
- Harnesses connecting the Process Unit Relay PCB (UN20/J609), the Relay Connector
(J5093/5P) and the ATR Sensor (Y) (TS5/J6114)
506
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Y) detected that the output value exceeded the upper limit during printing.
020-01B8-05 ATR output error

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Y) detected a control voltage less than 2.5 V at initialization of the Developing
Assembly.

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Y) detected 4.5 V or more of control voltage at initialization of the Developing
Assembly.

Detection Description The ATR Patch (M) detected that the output value (SigD) was below the lower limit at initialization
- Drum Unit
- Developing Assembly (M)

Detection Description The ATR Patch (M) detected that the output value (SigD) exceeded the upper limit at initialization
- Drum Unit

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (M) detected that the output value was below the lower limit during printing.
(J5094/5P) and the ATR Sensor (M) (TS6/J6116)
507
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (M) detected that the output value exceeded the upper limit during printing.

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (M) detected a control voltage less than 2.5 V at initialization of the Developing
Assembly.

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (M) detected 4.5 V or more of control voltage at initialization of the Developing
Assembly.

Detection Description The ATR Patch (C) detected that the output value (SigD) was below the lower limit at initialization
- Drum Unit
- Developing Assembly (C)

Detection Description The ATR Patch (C) detected that the output value (SigD) exceeded the upper limit at initialization
- Drum Unit

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (C) detected that the output value was below the lower limit during printing.
(J5095/5P) and the ATR Sensor (C) (TS7/J6118)
508
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (C) detected that the output value exceeded the upper limit during printing.

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (C) detected a control voltage less than 2.5 V at initialization of the Developing
Assembly.

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (C) detected 4.5 V or more of control voltage at initialization of the Developing
Assembly.

Detection Description The ATR Patch (Bk) detected that the output value (SigD) was below the lower limit at initialization
- Drum Unit
- Developing Assembly (Bk)

Detection Description The ATR Patch (Bk) detected that the output value (SigD) exceeded the upper limit at initialization
- Drum Unit

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Bk) detected that the output value was below the lower limit during printing.
(J5096/5P) and the ATR Sensor (Bk) (TS8/J6120)
509
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Bk) detected that the output value exceeded the upper limit during printing.

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Bk) detected a control voltage less than 2.5 V at initialization of the Developing
Assembly.

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Bk) detected 4.5 V or more of control voltage at initialization of the Developing
Assembly.
021-0100-05 Developing Motor error

Detection Description Lock signal error of the Developing Motor (Y) was detected consecutively.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J225) and the Developing Motor (Y) (M5/
J6015)
- Developing Motor (Y) (M5)
1. Turn the gears of the Developing Assembly by hand. If it does not turn, replace the Developing
Assembly.
021-0120-05 Developing Screw rotation detection error

Detection Description The difference between the maximum and the minimum of sampling values detected by the ATR
Sensor (Y) in the Developing Assembly (Y) was 12 or less during rotation of the Developing Screw.
J6015)
- Harnesses connecting the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J306), the Drawer Unit (J755) and the Process
Unit Relay PCB (UN20/J607)
510
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Lock signal error of the Developing Motor (M) was detected consecutively.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J225) and the Developing Motor (M) (M6/
J6013)
- Developing Motor (M) (M6)
Assembly.

Sensor (M) in the Developing Assembly (M) was 12 or less during rotation of the Developing Screw.
J6013)

Detection Description Lock signal error of the Developing Motor (C) was detected consecutively.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J225) and the Developing Motor (C) (M7/
J6012)
- Developing Motor (C) (M7)
Assembly.

Sensor (C) in the Developing Assembly (C) was 12 or less during rotation of the Developing Screw.
J6012)
511
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Lock signal error of the Developing Motor (Bk) was detected consecutively.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J225) and the Developing Motor (Bk) (M8/
J6011)
- Developing Motor (Bk) (M8)
Assembly.

Sensor (Bk) in the Developing Assembly (Bk) was 12 or less during rotation of the Developing
Screw.
J6011)
025-0100-05 Toner Bottle Motor error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Bottle Motor (Y) was detected.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J211) and the Bottle Motor (Y) (M9/J2111)
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J212) and the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Y)
(UN39/J1400)
- Harness between the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Y) (UN39/J1401) and the Bottle Rotation Sensor
(Y) (PS60/J6035)
- Bottle Rotation Sensor (Y) (PS60)
- Bottle Motor (Y) (M9)
- Toner Bottle (Y)
- Set-on Hopper Assembly
- Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Y) (UN39)
1. Turn the Toner Bottle counterclockwise by hand, and if turning becomes heavy, check/replace
the Toner Bottle.
2. Turn the Bottle Drive Gear of the Set-on Hopper Assembly by hand, and if turning becomes
heavy, check/replace the assembly.
025-0150-05 Hopper Motor error

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Y) consecutively detected that the output (Vsig_ind) was 40 or less.
- Process Unit Relay PCB (UN20)
512
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Y) consecutively detected that the output (Vsig_ind) was 231 or higher.
025-01C0-05 Toner Bottle Inner Door open detection error

Detection Description Open state of the Bottle Replacement Inner Door was not detected when removing the Toner Bottle
(Y).
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J302) and the Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (Y)
(SW11/J364)
- Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (Y) (SW11)
- Set-on Drive Assembly
- Set-on Hopper Assembly (CL)
- Bottle Base Assembly (CL)
- Bottle Front Inner Door Assembly
1. Check opening and closing operation of the Bottle Front Inner Door.
2. Check that the Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (Y) is properly installed.
3. Turn the gear of the Set-on Drive Assembly counterclockwise while the Delivery Tray is removed
to check opening and closing of the Inner Door.

Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Bottle Motor (M) was detected.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J211) and the Bottle Motor (M) (M10/J2112)
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J212) and the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (M)
(UN40/J1410)
- Harness between the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (M) (UN40/J1411) and the Bottle Rotation Sensor
(M) (PS61/J6038)
- Bottle Rotation Sensor (M) (PS61)
- Bottle Motor (M) (M10)
- Toner Bottle (M)
- Toner Sensor Relay PCB (M) (UN40)
the Toner Bottle.

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (M) consecutively detected that the output (Vsig_ind) was 40 or less.
513
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (M) consecutively detected that the output (Vsig_ind) was 231 or higher.

(M).
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J302) and the Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (M)
(SW12/J365)
- Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (M) (SW12)
2. Check that the Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (M) is properly installed.

Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Bottle Motor (C) was detected.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J211) and the Bottle Motor (C) (M11/J2113)
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J212) and the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (C)
(UN41/J1420)
- Harness between the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (C) (UN41/J1421) and the Bottle Rotation Sensor
(C) (PS62/J6041)
- Bottle Rotation Sensor (C) (PS62)
- Bottle Motor (C) (M11)
- Toner Bottle (C)
- Toner Sensor Relay PCB (C) (UN41)
the Toner Bottle.

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (C) consecutively detected that the output (Vsig_ind) was 40 or less.
514
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (C) consecutively detected that the output (Vsig_ind) was 231 or higher.

(C).
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J302) and the Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (C)
(SW13/J366)
- Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (C) (SW13)
2. Check that the Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (C) is properly installed.

Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Bottle Motor (Bk) was detected.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J211) and the Bottle Motor (Bk) (M12/J2114)
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J212) and the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Bk)
(UN42/J1430)
- Harness between the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Bk) (UN42/J1431) and the Bottle Rotation
Sensor (Bk) (PS63/J6044)
- Bottle Rotation Sensor (Bk) (PS63)
- Bottle Motor (Bk) (M12)
- Toner Bottle (Bk)
- Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Bk) (UN42)
the Toner Bottle.

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Bk) consecutively detected that the output (Vsig_ind) was 40 or less.
515
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ATR Sensor (Bk) consecutively detected that the output (Vsig_ind) was 231 or higher.

(Bk).
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J302) and the Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (Bk)
(SW14/J367)
- Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (Bk) (SW14)
- Set-on Hopper Assembly (BK)
- Bottle Base Assembly (BK)
2. Check that the Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (Bk) is properly installed.
027-0100-05 Error in supply with Y Developing Assembly

Detection Description The Toner Supply Screw Rotation Sensor detected rotation error within the specified period of
time.
J6015)
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J212) and the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Y)
(UN39/J1400)
- Main Drive Assembly
1. Check that the Developing Coupling of the Developing Assembly is not damaged.
2. Check that the Developing Coupling of the Main Drive Assembly is not damaged.
516
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
027-0200-05 Error in supply with M Developing Assembly

time.
J6013)
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J212) and the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (M)
(UN40/J1410)
027-0300-05 Error in supply with C Developing Assembly

time.
J6012)
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J212) and the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (C)
(UN41/J1420)
027-0400-05 Error in supply with K Developing Assembly

time.
J6011)
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J212) and the Toner Sensor Relay PCB (Bk)
(UN42/J1430)
517
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
029-1000-05 Patch Sensor error

Detection Description The Patch Sensor detected light intensity error of the LED for B&W printing at initialization of the
Developing Assembly.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J125) and the Patch Sensor (UN49/J1253)
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J305) and the Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL1/
J6064)
- Patch Sensor (UN49)
- Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL1)
1. Remove soiling on the Patch Sensor.
2. Check the operation of the Registration Shutter Solenoid.
029-1001-05 Patch Sensor error

Detection Description The Patch Sensor detected light intensity error of the LED for color printing at initialization of the
J6064)
1. Remove soiling on the Patch Sensor.
2. Check the operation of the Registration Shutter Solenoid.
029-6001-05 Registration Shutter Solenoid error

Detection Description Light intensity lower limit error was detected during light intensity correction of the regular reflection
LED.
J6064)
518
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
074-0001-05 ITB HP time out error

Detection Description The Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 detected home position error during disengagement
operation of the ITB.
- Harnesses connecting the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J303), the ITB Displacement Sensor PCB
(UN60/J700 and J701) and the Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 (PS23/J7011)
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J303) and the Primary Transfer Roller
Disengagement Motor (M15/J3032)
- Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 (PS23)
- Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor (M15)
- ITB Displacement Sensor PCB (UN60)
- Intermediate Transfer Belt Assembly
074-0002-05 ITB HP time out error

Detection Description The Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 detected home position error during engagement
operation of the ITB.
(UN60/J700 and J701) and the Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 (PS22/J7010)
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J303) and the Primary Transfer Roller
Disengagement Motor (M15/J3032)
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J304) and the Relay PCB (UN5/J402)
- Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor (M15)
074-0003-05 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor error

Detection Description Both the Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 and 2 detected home position at the same time
during engagement/disengagement operation of the ITB.
(UN60/J700 and J701) and the Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 and 2 (PS22/J7010 and
PS23/J7011)
075-0002-05 ITB displacement control error

Detection Description The ITB Steering Sensor did not detect change in home position signal.
(UN60/J700 and J701) and the ITB Steering Sensor (PS24/J7013)
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J303) and the ITB Displacement Control Motor
(M14/J3031)
- ITB Steering Sensor (PS24)
- ITB Displacement Control Motor (M14)
519
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ITB Steering Sensor detected that the ITB was at full displacement position at the rear.
(M14/J3031)
- Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
a. If the ITB is not at full displacement position,
b. If the ITB is at full displacement position,
1. Correct displacement of the ITB.
1-1. Remove the Intermediate Transfer Belt Assembly.
1-2. Lift the left front side (where the cleaner and the ITB Motor are located) and hold the
Intermediate Transfer Belt Assembly as if to twist it.
1-3. Turn the ITB Motor counterclockwise to rotate the ITB.
1-4. As the ITB is getting closer to the center, adjust the ITB position.
2. Check/replace the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
3. Execute COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ITB-INIT.
4. If the value displayed in COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC> ITB-POS/ITB-POS2 is out of the
appropriate reference value range, execute the ITB alignment.

Detection Description ITB displacement position could not be detected due to error in the Displacement Control Sensor.
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J303) and the ITB Displacement Sensor PCB
(UN60/J700)

Detection Description The ITB Steering Sensor detected home position error.
520
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Displacement Control Sensor did not detect equilibrium position although a specified period
of time had passed.
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J303) and the ITB Displacement Sensor PCB
(UN60/J700)
(M14/J3031)

Detection Description The ITB Steering Sensor detected that the ITB was at full displacement position at the front.
(M14/J3031)
- Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
a. If the ITB is not at full displacement position,
b. If the ITB is at full displacement position,
1. Correct displacement of the ITB.
1-1. Remove the Intermediate Transfer Belt Assembly.
1-2. Lift the left rear side (opposite side of where the cleaner and the ITB Motor are located) and
hold the Intermediate Transfer Belt Assembly as if to twist it.
1-3. Turn the ITB Motor counterclockwise to rotate the ITB.
1-4. As the ITB is getting closer to the center, adjust the ITB position.
2. Check/replace the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
3. Execute COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ITB-INIT.
4. If the value displayed in COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC> ITB-POS/ITB-POS2 is out of the
appropriate reference value range, execute the ITB alignment.
521
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
100-0100-05 Laser Scanner error

Detection Description BD signal was not detected although a specified period of time had passed during operation of the
Laser Scanner (Y, M).
- Small-diameter Coaxial Cable connecting from the Riser PCB (J9) to the Laser Driver PCB (Y)
and (M) (UN13/J101 and UN12/J822)
- Connector between the Main Controller PCB and the Riser PCB
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J171) and the Laser Driver PCB (Y) (UN13/J851)
- Harness between the Relay PCB (UN5/J416) and the Laser Driver PCB (M) (UN12/J830)
- Laser Driver PCB (Y) (UN13)
- Laser Driver PCB (M) (UN12)
- Riser PCB

Detection Description Correction in timing of laser exposure to the Polygon Mirror (Y, M) was not completed within the
specified period of time.
and (M) (UN13/J101 and UN12/J822)
- Riser PCB

Detection Description BD signal was not detected although a specified period of time had passed during operation of the
Laser Scanner (C, Bk).
- Small-diameter Coaxial Cable connecting from the Riser PCB (J9) to the Laser Driver PCB (C)
and (Bk) (UN15/J802 and UN14/J822)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J171) and the Laser Driver PCB (C) (UN15/J862)
- Laser Driver PCB (C) (UN15)
- Laser Driver PCB (Bk) (UN14)
- Riser PCB
522
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Correction in timing of laser exposure to the Polygon Mirror (C, Bk) was not completed within the
specified period of time.
- Riser PCB
102-0101-05 EEPROM error

Detection Description An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner was detected (Y, M).
and (M) (UN13/J101 and UN12/J822)
- Riser PCB

Detection Description An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner was detected (C, Bk).
- Riser PCB
112-0000-05 Laser Shutter Error

Detection Description Home position of the Laser Shutter was not detected.
- Harness connecting from the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J224) to the Laser Shutter Motor and
Laser Shutter Sensor (M28/J6060 and PS29/J6123)
- Laser Shutter Sensor (PS29)
- Laser Shutter Motor (M28)
1. Check that the Laser Shutter Motor is properly installed.
2. Check that there is no damage or deformation with the Laser Shutter Sensor Flag.
523
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Home position was not detected although the Laser Shutter was closed.

Detection Description Change in home position was not detected while the Laser Shutter was open.
197-0000-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Laser Scanner (Y, M) was
detected.
and (M) (UN13/J802 and UN12/J822)
- Riser PCB

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Laser Scanner (C, Bk) was
detected.
- Riser PCB
524
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error of ASIC (HV_KONA) in the DC Controller PCB was detected.
Remedy Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Side Paper Deck was detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J170) and the Side Paper Deck Controller PCB
(J357)
- Side Paper Deck Controller PCB

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Front Driver PCB was detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J111) and the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J301)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J100 and J101) and the Riser PCB (J2 and J10)
- Riser PCB

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Feed/Drum Driver PCB was
detected.
(UN2/J202 and J203)
525
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Feed/Drum Driver PCB was
detected.
(UN2/J202 and J203)
199-0101-05 Error in high voltage sequence (Y)

Detection Description Error for collecting log.
Remedy [Remedy] Collect debug log and contact to the sales company.
[Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> SELF-CHK" to "1", it is handled
as an error.
199-0102-05 Error in high voltage sequence (M)

as an error.
199-0103-05 Error in high voltage sequence (C)

as an error.
199-0104-05 Error in high voltage sequence (K)

as an error.

as an error.

as an error.

as an error.
526
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

as an error.

as an error.

as an error.

as an error.

as an error.
202-0001-04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation.
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO2/J102) and the Scanner Unit HP Sensor
(PS_A1/J5002)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO2/J108) and the Scanner Motor (STM1/
J5015)
- Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_A1)
- Scanner Motor (STM1)
- Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO2)
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
527
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.
(PS_A1/J5002)
J5015)

Detection Description An error in the Reader Scanner Unit position was detected when reading of a job was started.
(PS_A1/J5002)
J5015)

Detection Description Home position error of the Reader Scanner Unit was detected when reading of a job was
completed.
(PS_A1/J5002)
J5015)
202-0101-04 DADF Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation.
- Harness between the ADF Driver PCB (UN_BO1/J408) and the Glass Movement HP Sensor
(PS_A9/J462)
- Glass Movement HP Sensor (PS_A9)
- Glass Movement Gear 18T
- ADF Driver PCB (UN_BO1)
528
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
202-0102-04 DADF Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.
- Harness between the ADF Driver PCB (UN_BO1/J408) and the Glass Movement HP Sensor
(PS_A9/J462)
- Glass Movement HP Sensor (PS_A9)
- Glass Movement Gear 18T
- ADF Driver PCB (UN_BO1)
227-0001-04 Power supply error

Detection Description The Reader Controller PCB did not detect 24 V when the main power was turned ON.
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J104) and the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/
J402)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J4) and the Relay PCB (UN5/J407)
- Harness between the Relay PCB (UN5/J405) and the 24V Power Supply PCB (UN10/J834)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
- Relay PCB (UN5)
- 24V Power Supply PCB (UN10)
[Reference]
- When an error is detected, conduction of 24 V is stopped. At power check, check if 24 V is
conducted or rated voltage is output by repeating power cycling of the machine.
- Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and
restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

Detection Description The DADF Driver PCB did not detect 24 V when the main power was turned ON.
J402)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J4) and the Relay PCB (UN5/J407)
- Harness between the Relay PCB (UN5/J405) and the 24V Power Supply PCB (UN10/J834)
- Relay PCB (UN5)
- 24V Power Supply PCB (UN10)
[Reference]
- When an error is detected, conduction of 24 V is stopped. At power check, check if 24 V is
conducted or rated voltage is output by repeating power cycling of the machine.
- Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and
Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
529
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
240-0002-05 Controller communication error

Detection Description A communication error occurred between the Main Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J100 and J101) and the Riser PCB (J2 and J10)
- Riser PCB
246-0001-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the service company office

Remedy Contact to the sales company.







Detection Description The Main Controller PCB detected reading error of the Reader backup value in the Reader
Controller PCB.
Remedy Check/replace the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1).
530
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB failed writing of the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB detected an error at inspection after completion of writing of the Reader
backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.

Detection Description An error in 3.3 VA power supply was detected at startup.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J171) and the Environment Sensor (UN50/J810)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J120) and the Primary Transfer/Bk Developing
Charging High-Voltage PCB (UN17/J622)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J122) and the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage
PCB (UN18/J657)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J123) and the Charging High-Voltage PCB (YMC)
(UN77/J641)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J124) and the Developing High-Voltage PCB
(YMC) (UN76/J611)
- DC Controller PC (UN1)

Detection Description An error in 5 V power supply was detected at startup of CPU.
Remedy [Related parts] 1.00
- Sensor harness for 5 V power supply
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J214) and the Drawer Unit (J5012)
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J216) and the Second/Third Delivery Unit
(J5032)
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J219) and the Right Door Relay PCB (UN61/
J1100)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J111) and the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J301)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J170) and the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J202)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J110) and the Finisher (J1103)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J101) and the Riser PCB (J10)
- Right Door Relay PCB (UN61)
- Riser PCB
531
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
280-0001-04 Communication error

Detection Description Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was not
completed within the specified period of time.
- Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2/J1101 (J2101)) and the Reader Controller
PCB (UN_BO1/J105 (J106))
- Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2)

Detection Description Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was
detected.
PCB (UN_BO1/J105 (J106))

Detection Description Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was not
completed within the specified period of time.
J401)

Detection Description Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was
detected.
J401)
532
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
302-0001-04 Error in paper front white shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper front white shading RAM or a paper front white shading value out of
specification was detected.
PCB (UN_BO1/J105 (J106))
302-0002-04 Error in paper front black shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper front black shading RAM or a paper front black shading value out of
PCB (UN_BO1/J105 (J106))
302-0101-04 Error in paper back white shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper back white shading RAM or a paper back white shading value out of
J401)
302-0102-04 Error in paper back black shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper back black shading RAM or a paper back black shading value out of
J401)

533
7. Error/Jam/Alarm





Detection Description Main Controller PCB communication error.
Remedy Check/replace the Main Controller PCB







Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was
detected.
J401)
J402)
534
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was
detected.
J401)
J402)

Detection Description Disconnection of the harness between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was
detected.
J401)
J402)
412-0005-04 Fan error

Detection Description Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
- DADF Cooling Fan (FAN_A1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related parts.
412-0006-04 Fan error

Detection Description Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
- DADF Cooling Fan (FAN_A1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related parts.
423-0001-04 SDRAM error in the Reader Controller PCB

Detection Description Either an access error to SDRAM in the Reader Controller PCB or an error at data inspection was
detected.
Remedy Replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1).
490-0001-04 Different Scanner Unit model error

Detection Description A wrong Scanner Unit was installed.
Remedy Install the Scanner Unit for this model.
535
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
490-0101-04 Different DADF model error

Detection Description A wrong DADF was installed.
- Flat Cable between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J401) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN_
BO1/J4)
1. Check if the installed DADF model matches the model that was set in "COPIER> OPTION>
CUSTOM> SCANTYPE". If not matched, install the appropriate DADF.
2. Check/replace the related parts.
501-0000-02 Communication error (Finisher-H1)

Detection Description A communication error between the host machine and the Finisher was detected.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the DC Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Finisher
Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
[Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore
the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
503-0021-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Saddle Unit (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
was detected. (Command transmission error)
Remedy STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle
Stitcher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
3. Replace the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.
536
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
503-0022-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Saddle Unit (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
was detected. (Command reception error)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle
Stitcher Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.
503-0031-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-H1/Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB was
detected. (Command transmission error)
Remedy a. INNER FIN-H1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB1)
b.STAPLE FIN-Y1/BOOKLET FIN-Y1
[Related parts]
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher
Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Puncher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
537
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
503-0032-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-H1/Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB was
detected. (Command reception error)
[Related parts]
[Related parts]
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher
Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Puncher Controller PCB.
503-0041-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Buffer Pass (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Buffer Pass Controller PCB
was detected. (Command transmission error)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Buffer Pass Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Buffer Pass Controller PCB (PCB401)
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Buffer Pass Controller PCB and the
Finisher Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Buffer Pass Controller PCB.
503-0042-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Buffer Pass (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Buffer Pass Controller PCB
was detected. (Command reception error)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Buffer Pass Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Buffer Pass Controller PCB and the
Finisher Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Buffer Pass Controller PCB.
538
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
503-0061-02 Error in communication between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description Communication error between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB was detected. (Command
transmission error)
[Related parts]
[Remedy] Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
503-0062-02 Error in communication between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description Communication error between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB was detected. (Command
reception error)
[Related parts]
505-0001-02 a. Finisher data error (Finisher-H1) b. Finisher data error (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The data read from Finisher Controller PCB has an error. (The read data doesn't match with the
written data.)
[Related parts] Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
[Related parts]
505-0004-02 Puncher unit data error (Inner Puncher-B1/Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The data read from Puncher Controller PCB has an error. (The read data doesn't match with the
written data.)
Remedy a. INNER PUNCH-B1
[Related parts]
b. PUNCHER UNIT-A1
[Related parts]
[Remedy] Replace the Puncher Controller PCB.
505-0005-02 Buffer Pass data error (Buffer Pass unit-L1)

Detection Description The data read from Puncher Controller PCB has an error. (The read data doesn't match with the
written data.)
Remedy BUFFER PASS UNIT-L1
[Related parts]
539
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
514-0002-02 Assist Motor error (Finisher-H1)

Detection Description - The Assist HP Sensor was not turned ON although 3 seconds had passed after the Assist Motor
operation started.
- The Assist HP Sensor was not turned ON when starting operation.
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist Motor
- Assist HP Sensor (PS7)
- Assist Motor (M5)
[Remedy] Check/replace the corresponding harnesses/cables or connectors or the parts.
514-8001-02 a. Assist Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Error in the Paper End Assist Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Assist HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Assist Motor
operation started.
b. The assist belt does not come off the Paper End Assist HP Sensor when the Paper End Assist
Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist Motor
- Assist HP Sensor (PS7)
- Assist Motor (M5)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Assist Motor (M113) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123)
- Paper End Assist Motor (M113)
514-8002-02 Error in the Paper End Assist Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Paper End Assist HP Sensor does not detect the assist belt when the Paper End Assist Motor
has been driven for 2 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Assist Motor (M113) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123)
- Paper End Assist Motor (M113)
540
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
516-0001-02 Paddle Motor error (Finisher-H1)

Detection Description - The Paper Fold HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 3 seconds had passed after the Paddle
Motor operation started.
- The last paper fold operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paper Fold HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Motor
- Paper Fold HP Sensor (PS8)
- Paddle Motor (M10)

Detection Description - The Paper Fold HP Sensor was not turned ON although 3 seconds had passed after the Paddle
- The last paper fold operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paper Fold HP Sensor
- Paper Fold HP Sensor (PS8)
530-8001-02 a. Rear Alignment Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Error in the Front Alignment Motor (Finisher-
Y1)
Detection Description a. The Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after
the Rear Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The front alignment plate does not come off the Front Alignment HP Sensor when the Front
Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Plate HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Motor
- Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS5)
- Rear Alignment Motor (M4)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Front Alignment Motor (M107) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115)
- Front Alignment Motor (M107)
[Points to note at work] When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection
timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before
checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
541
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
530-8002-02 a. Rear Alignment Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Error in the Front Alignment Motor (Finisher-
Y1)
Detection Description a. The Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after
the Rear Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The Front Alignment HP Sensor does not detect the Front Alignment plate when the Front
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Plate HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Motor
- Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS5)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Front Alignment Motor (M107) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115)
531-8001-02 a. Stapler Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Error in the Staple Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Staple HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0.4 seconds had passed after the Stapler
b. The staple unit does not come off the Staple HP Sensor when the Staple Motor has been driven
for 0.4 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Unit
- Stapler Unit (including the Stapler Motor and the Staple HP Sensor)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stapler Unit to the Stapler Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Stapler Unit Relay PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stapler Unit
- Stapler Unit Relay PCB (PCB102)
542
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
531-8002-02 a. Stapler Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Error in the Staple Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Staple HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.4 seconds had passed after the Stapler
b. The Staple HP Sensor does nor detect the staple unit when the Staple Motor has been driven
for 0.4 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Unit
- Stapler Unit (including the Stapler Motor and the Staple HP Sensor)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stapler Unit to the Stapler Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Stapler Unit Relay PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stapler Unit
- Stapler Unit Relay PCB (PCB102)
532-8001-02 a. Stapler Shift Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Error in the Stapler Shift Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Stapler
Shift Motor operation started.
b. The stapler unit does not come off the Stapler Shift HP Sensor when the Stapler Shift Motor has
been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Shift HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Shift Motor
- Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS11)
- Stapler Shift Motor (M7)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS124) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stapler Shift Motor (M114) to the Finisher Controller PCB
543
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
532-8002-02 a. Stapler Shift Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Error in the Stapler Shift Motor (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor was not turned ON although 10 seconds had passed after the
Stapler Shift Motor operation started.
b. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor does not detect the stapler unit when the Stapler Shift Motor has
been driven for 15 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Shift HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Shift Motor
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS124) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stapler Shift Motor (M114) to the Finisher Controller PCB
535-0001-02 Return Belt Motor error (Finisher-H1)

Detection Description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Return
Belt Motor operation started.
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt Motor
- Return Belt HP Sensor (PS3)
- Return Belt Motor (M2)
535-0002-02 Return Belt Motor error (Finisher-H1)

Detection Description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Return
Belt Motor operation started.
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt Motor
- Return Belt Motor (M2)
544
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
535-8001-02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The swing guide does not come off the Swing Guide HP Sensor when the Swing Guide Motor has
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide Motor (M110) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119)
- Swing Guide Motor (M110)
535-8002-02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Swing Guide HP Sensor does not detect the swing guide when the Swing Guide Motor has
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide Motor (M110) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119)
- Swing Guide Motor (M110)
545
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
537-8001-02 a. Front Alignment Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Error in the Rear Alignment Motor (Finisher-
Y1)
Detection Description a. The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after
the Front Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The rear alignment plate does not come off the Rear Alignment HP Sensor when the Rear
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Plate HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Motor
- Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS4)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Rear Alignment Motor (M108) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116)
537-8002-02 a. Front Alignment Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Error in the Rear Alignment Motor (Finisher-
Y1)
Detection Description a. The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after
the Front Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The Rear Alignment HP Sensor does not detect the rear alignment plate when the Rear
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Plate HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Motor
- Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS4)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Rear Alignment Motor (M108) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116)
546
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
540-8001-02 a. Tray Shift Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Stack tray time out error (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after
the Tray Shift Motor operation started.
b. The operation of the stack tray don't finish when the Stack Tray Shift Motor has been driven for
28 seconds.
The stack tray does not come off the same area when the Stack Tray Shift Motor has been driven
for 15 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Tray Paper Height
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray Shift Motor
- Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor (PS9)
- Tray Shift Motor (M6)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109) to the Finisher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PS110) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106)
- Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109)
- Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105)
547
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
540-8002-02 a. Tray Shift Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Stack tray area error (Finisher-Y1)
Detection Description a. The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF or the Stack Tray Lower Limit Sensor
was not turned ON although 3.5 seconds had passed after the Front Alignment Motor operation
started in the tray down operation.
The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF after the tray was moved down in the
paper level detection operation.
b. The stack tray detects the discontinuous area during the operation.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Tray Paper Height
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray Shift Motor
- Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor (PS9)
- Tray Shift Motor (M6)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109) to the Finisher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PS110) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106)
- Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109)
540-8004-02 Stack tray paper surface detection error (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor does not turn off when the stack tray has been lowered for
10 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-emitting) (PBA101) to the Finisher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-receiving) (PBA102/PBA103) to the
Finisher Controller PCB
- Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-emitting) (PBA101)
- Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-receiving) (PBA102/PBA103)
548
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
551-0003-02 Error in the Cooling Fan (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The lock signal is detected 1.2 seconds or more while the fan operates.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Cooling Fan (FM101) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Cooling Fan (FM101)
551-0004-02 Error in the Cooling Fan of the Finisher (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The lock status is released when the fan stops.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Cooling Fan (FM101) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Cooling Fan (FM101)
553-8001-02 Error in the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The lower escape delivery roller does not come off the Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor when
the Escape Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112)
- Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106)
553-8002-02 Error in the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor does not detect the escape delivery roller when the Escape
Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112)
- Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106)
549
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
553-8011-02 Error in the Flapper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The flapper does not come off the Flapper HP Sensor when the Flapper Motor has been driven
for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Flapper Motor (M104) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Flapper HP Sensor (PS105)
- Flapper Motor (M104)
553-8012-02 Error in the Flapper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Flapper HP Sensor does not detect the flapper when the Flapper Motor has been driven for
1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Flapper Motor (M104) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Flapper HP Sensor (PS105)
- Flapper Motor (M104)
553-80F1-02 Error in the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The paddle does not come off the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor when the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor
has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206)
- Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201)
550
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
553-80F2-02 Error in the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Paddle HP Sensor does not detect the paddle when the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206)
- Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201)
554-8001-02 Safety switch ON error (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Swing Guide Safety Switch is turned ON for 0.3 seconds.
The Front Cover Switch is turned OFF for 0.3 seconds when the Front Cover Sensor is ON.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)

Detection Description - The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Paddle
- The last paddle operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
551
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
577-8001-02 a. Paddle Motor error (Finisher-H1) b. Error in the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-
Y1)
Detection Description a. The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Paddle
Motor operation started. The last paddle operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
b. The paddle does not come off the Paddle HP Sensor when the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor
[Related parts]
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paddle HP Sensor (PS120)
- Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103)
577-8002-02 Error in the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Paddle HP Sensor does not detect the paddle when the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor has
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paddle HP Sensor (PS120)
- Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103)
552
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
578-8001-02 Error in the Return Roller Lift Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The return roller does not come off the Return Roller HP Sensor when the Return Roller Lift Motor
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121)
- Return Roller Lift Motor (M111)
578-8002-02 Error in the Return Roller Lift Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Return Roller HP Sensor does not detect the return roller when the Return Roller Lift Motor
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121)
- Return Roller Lift Motor (M111)
553
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
57B-8001-02 Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The paper end pushing guide does not come off the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor when
the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122) to the Finisher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122)
- Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112)
57B-8002-02 Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor does not detect the paper end pushing guide when the
Paper End Pushing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122) to the Finisher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122)
- Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112)
583-8001-02 Error in the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The tray auxiliary guides don't come off the Front/Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensors when the
Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) to the Finisher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117)
- Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118)
- Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109)
554
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
583-8002-02 Error in the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Front/Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensors don't detect the tray auxiliary guides when the
Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) to the Finisher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117)
- Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118)
- Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109)
590-0002-02 Error in the Punch (Inner Puncher-B1)

Detection Description The Puncher does not come on the Punch HP Sensor after driving stopped during initialization.
The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch when the Punch Motor has been driven for 0.4
seconds for returning the punch after the punch jam.
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 1 (S5) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (S7) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor (M2) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Punch HP Sensor 1 (S5)
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (S7)
- Punch Motor (M2)
- Puncher Relay PCB (PCB5)
555
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
590-8001-02 a. Error in the Punch (Inner Puncher-B1) b. Error in the Punch Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)
Detection Description a. The punch does not come off the Punch HP Sensor when the Punch Motor has been driven for
0.2 seconds.
b. The punch does not come off the Punch HP Sensor when the Punch Motor has been driven for
0.2 seconds.
Remedy a. INNER PUNCH-B1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (S7) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (S7)
- Punch Motor (M2)
b. PUNCHER UNIT-A1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303)
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305)
- Punch Motor (M301)
556
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
590-8002-02 Error in the Punch Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch during initialization.
The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch when the Punch Motor has been driven for 0.4
seconds for returning the punch after the punch jam.
Remedy Puncher Unit-A1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305)
- Punch Motor (M301)
593-0001-02 Error in the Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (Inner Puncher-B1)

Detection Description The Horizontal Registration HP Sensor does not detect the punch unit when shifting the punch
unit by 37mm toward rear.
- Harnesses from the Horizontal Registration HP Sensor (S1) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (M1) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- PHorizontal Registration HP Sensor (S1)
- Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (M1)
593-0002-02 Error in the Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (Inner Puncher-B1)

Detection Description The Horizontal Registration HP Sensor does not detect the punch unit when shifting the punch
unit by 37mm toward rear.
- Harnesses from the Horizontal Registration HP Sensor (S1) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (M1) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- PHorizontal Registration HP Sensor (S1)
- Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (M1)
557
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
593-8001-02 Error in the Punch Shift Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The punch unit does not come off the Punch Slide HP Sensor when shifting the punch unit by 9mm
toward rear.
- Harnesses from the Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Shift Motor (M302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302)
- Punch Shift Motor (M302)
593-8002-02 Error in the Punch Shift Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The Punch Slide HP Sensor does not detect the punch unit when shifting the punch unit by 37mm
toward front.
Remedy Puncher Unit-A1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Shift Motor (M302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302)
- Punch Shift Motor (M302)
5F0-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle paper end stopper does not come off the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor when
the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
- Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210)
- Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206)
558
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
5F0-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper end stopper when
the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
- Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210)
- Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206)
5F1-8003-02 Saddle Delivery Motor clock error (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The lock state of Saddle Delivery Motor is detected 0.2 seconds or more while the motor operates.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PS211) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Delivery Motor (M207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PS211)
- Saddle Delivery Motor (M207)
5F3-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Alignment Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle alignment plate does not come off the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor when the Saddle
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207)
- Saddle Alignment Motor (M203)
559
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
5F3-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Alignment Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Alignment HP Sensor does not detect the saddle alignment plate when the Saddle
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207)
- Saddle Alignment Motor (M203)
5F4-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Stitcher Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle stitcher does not come off the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor when the Saddle Stitcher
Motor has been driven for 1.2 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215)
- Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208)
5F4-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Stitcher Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor does not detect the saddle stitcher when the Saddle Stitcher Motor
has been driven for 1.2 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215)
- Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208)
560
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
5F6-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle paper pushing plate does not come off the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor
when the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208)
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204)
5F6-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper pushing plate when
the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208)
561
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
5F6-8003-02 Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor clock error (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The lock state of Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor is detected 0.2 seconds or more while
the motor operates.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PS212) to the
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PS212)
5F8-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle switching lever does not come off the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor when the
Saddle Switching Lever Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205)
- Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202)
562
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
5F8-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor does not detect the saddle switching lever when the
Saddle Switching Lever Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205)
- Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202)
5FA-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Gripper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The saddle gripper does not come off the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor when the Saddle Gripper
Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209)
- Saddle Gripper Motor (M205)
5FA-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Gripper Motor (Finisher-Y1)

Detection Description The Saddle Gripper HP Sensor does not detect the saddle gripper when the Saddle Gripper Motor
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209)
- Saddle Gripper Motor (M205)
563
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-0001-00 HDD error

Detection Description HDD failed to be Ready, or HDD was not formatted.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
- Harness between Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
[Reference] All the partitions that can be deleted are deleted.
3. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software
using SST or a USB memory.
602-0101-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the PDL-related file storage area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
- HDD
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to
4.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list.
[Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Adjustment> Main Controller System" and
"Appendix> Backup Data List" in the Service Manual.
[Reference] Only the data in the corresponding partitions is deleted.
564
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-0111-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the PDL-related file storage area. (File could not be written in the HDD
after startup or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.
602-0201-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup
or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.
565
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-0211-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (File could not be written in
the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.
602-0301-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- HDD
4.
566
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-0311-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.
602-0401-00 HDD error

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.
567
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-0411-00 HDD error

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error
after startup)
- HDD
4.
602-0501-00 HDD error

- HDD
4.
568
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-0511-00 HDD error

- HDD
4.
602-0601-00 HDD error

- HDD
4.
569
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-0611-00 HDD error

- HDD
4.
602-0701-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area (temporary file). (Initialization failed
at startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.
570
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-0711-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area (temporary file). (File could not be
written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.
602-0801-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
- HDD
4.
571
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-0811-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD
- HDD
4.
602-0901-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data (temporary file). (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error
at startup)
- HDD
4.
572
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-0911-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data (temporary file). (File could not be written in the HDD
- HDD
4.
602-1001-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- HDD
4.
573
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-1011-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
- HDD
4.
602-1101-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the update-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- HDD
4.
574
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-1111-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the update-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
- HDD
4.
602-1201-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- HDD
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
575
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-1211-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
- HDD
602-1301-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
602-1311-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or
I/O error after startup)
- HDD
576
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-1401-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in SWAP (temporary file/alternative memory area). (Initialization failed at
startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.
602-1411-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in SWAP (temporary file/alternative memory area). (File could not be written
in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.
577
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-1701-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.
602-1711-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or
- HDD
4.
578
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-1801-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box. (Initialization failed at
startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.
602-1811-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box. (File could not be written
in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.
579
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-1901-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
- HDD
4.
602-1911-00 HDD error

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing. (File could not be written in the HDD
- HDD
4.
580
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-2000-00 HDD error

Detection Description I/O error was detected in the file system after startup.
1. Check that the HDD optional board is properly installed.
2. Turn ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
3. Execute the key clear using SST (to make an unformatted disk).
[CAUTION] E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with the unformatted disk.
Therefore, be sure to format the HDD.
using SST or a USB flash drive.
602-2001-00 HDD error

Detection Description Mismatch on encryption operation
1. Check that the Main Controller PCB is properly installed.
602-2002-00 HDD error

Detection Description Failure of encryption board and others
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB
602-5001-00 Encryption Chip error

Detection Description Error of the encryption chip on the Main Controller
Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB
[Remedy] Replace the Main Controller PCB
602-5002-00 HDD error

Detection Description A non-genuine HDD was detected.
Remedy 1. Replace the HDD with a genuine one.
2. Format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
602-FF01-00 HDD error

Detection Description An unidentified HDD error was detected at startup.
- HDD
581
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
602-FF11-00 HDD error

Detection Description An unidentified HDD error was detected after startup.
- HDD
604-0512-00 Faulty/insufficient image memory (Main Controller PCB1)

Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB 1
Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB 1 as indicated by 0512.


613-0512-00 Faulty/insufficient image memory

Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB
Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PC as indicated by 0512.

Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB as indicated by 1024.

Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB as indicated by 1536.
614-0001-00 Flash PCB error

Detection Description The Flash PCB could not be recognized, or the Flash PCB was not formatted.
- SATA Flash PCB
- Reinstall the necessary application software once the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the SATA Flash PCB again to check
that it is properly installed.
2. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and execute Flash Format using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. After replacing the SATA Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash
drive.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
582
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
614-0002-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description The file system could not be initialized normally at startup.
- SATA Flash PCB
drive.

Detection Description Bootable was not found on the Flash PCB.
- SATA Flash PCB
drive.

- SATA Flash PCB
drive.
583
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup
- SATA Flash PCB
drive.

- SATA Flash PCB
drive.

- SATA Flash PCB
drive.
584
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- SATA Flash PCB
drive.

- SATA Flash PCB
drive.

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
- SATA Flash PCB
drive.
585
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or
- SATA Flash PCB
drive.
614-0501-00 Error in file system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
- Sata Flash PCB
4.
586
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (File could not be written in the Flash
PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)
- Sata Flash PCB
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- SATA Flash PCB
drive.

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after
startup or I/O error after startup)
- SATA Flash PCB
drive.
587
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area. (Initialization failed
at startup or I/O error at startup)
- Sata Flash PCB
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area. (File could not
be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)
- Sata Flash PCB
4.
588
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The OS could not be recognized.
drive.

Detection Description The OS boot file was not found.
drive.

Detection Description The OS kernel was not found.
drive.

Detection Description The OS boot loader was not found.
drive.

Detection Description The OS in safe mode could not be recognized.
drive.
589
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The file for booting the OS in safe mode was not found.
drive.

Detection Description The kernel in safe mode was not found.
drive.

Detection Description SRAM device access-related error (at startup)
drive.

Detection Description Error in memory allocation/invalid memory (at startup)
drive.

Detection Description Setting file error was detected at startup.
drive.
590
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Parameter error was detected at startup.
drive.

Detection Description Startup error was detected.
drive.
614-FF01-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An unidentified Flash error was detected at startup. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- SATA Flash PCB
drive.
614-FF11-00 Error in system on the Flash PCB

Detection Description An unidentified Flash error was detected at startup. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB
- SATA Flash PCB
drive.
591
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
615-0001-00 Error in self-diagnosis of the encryption module

Detection Description An error was detected in self-diagnosis of the encryption library.
Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
- Reinstall the necessary application software and restore the backup data once the error is
cleared.
1. After reinstalling the system software using SST or a USB memory, turn OFF and then ON the
main power.
3. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and execute [4] Clear/Format> [2] Flash Format (Flash
format) using a USB memory.
4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory.
674-0001-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description An error was detected for the specified number of times in communication with the Fax Board.
- Harness between the Fax Board and the Riser PCB
- Fax Board
- Riser PCB

Detection Description An error was detected for the specified number of times in communication with the Fax Board.
- Fax Board
- Riser PCB

Detection Description A communication error occurred when accessing the modem IC used for fax.
- Fax Board
- Riser PCB

Detection Description A communication error occurred when accessing the port IC used for fax.
- Fax Board
- Riser PCB

Detection Description A communication error occurred when opening the Timer Device used for fax.
Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB

Detection Description A communication error occurred when starting the Timer Device used for fax.
592
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error occurred in the modem IC used for fax.
- Fax Board
- Riser PCB

Detection Description A Fax Board for non-supported modem has been connected.
Remedy Replace it with a genuine Fax Board (for 1-line, 2-line, or 3/4-line).

Detection Description Check sum error
Remedy System software download for 2 line FAX

Detection Description After completion of fax communication, writing of the communication information (log) failed, and
the log could not be read.
Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
[CAUTION] The previous communication information (log) will be cleared by turning OFF and then
ON the main power.
674-0300-07 Fax configuration error

Detection Description It was detected that there was a Fax Board for multiple lines installed while the IP Fax license was
enabled.
Remedy - Remove the Fax Board for multiple lines to use the machine as an IP Fax model.
- Uninstall the IP Fax license to use the machine as a G3 Fax model.
674-0301-07 Fax configuration error

Detection Description It was detected that there was no 1-line Fax Board installed while the IP Fax license was enabled.
Remedy - Install the Fax Board (1-line) to use the machine as an IP Fax model.
- Uninstall the IP Fax license and install the G3 Fax Board to use the machine as a G3 Fax model.
677-0001-00 Print server error

Detection Description Abnormality detected on the exhaust fan operation of printer server
Remedy 1. Check supplying power to the exhaust fan
2. Exhaust fan replacement

Detection Description An error in the fan of the Print Server was detected.
- Print Server Fan

Detection Description Abnormality detected on the CPU fan operation of printer server
Remedy 1. Check supplying power to the CPU fan
2. CPU fan replacement

Detection Description Failure was detected in operation of the CPU fan on the print server.
Remedy 1. Replace the board of the print server.
2. Reinstall the Print Server (For details, refer to "Service Manual image PASS P2.")
593
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Error is detected at the Mother Board check when print server is started.
Remedy 1. Check the cable connection and turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Reinstall the print server (For details, refer to "Service Manual image PASS P2.")
713-0010-05 Finisher communication error

Detection Description Timeout was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher.
Remedy a. STAPLE/BOOKLET FINISHER-Y1
[Related parts] R1.00
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J110), the Relay Path Unit and the Finisher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses connecting the Relay PCB (UN5/J403), the Relay Path Unit and the Finisher Controller
PCB
- Relay PCB (UN5)
- Relay Path Unit
- Finisher Controller PCB
b. INNER FINISHER-H1
[Related parts]
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J110) and the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harness between the Relay PCB (UN5/J403) and the Finisher Controller PCB
- Relay PCB (UN5)
[Reference]
- Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and
Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES
- After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher.

Detection Description Retransmission of NACK was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine
and the finisher.
Controller PCB
PCB
- Relay PCB (UN5)
- Relay Path Unit
[Related parts]
- Relay PCB (UN5)
[Reference]
594
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Invalid BCC in received data was detected in communication between the host machine and the
finisher.
Controller PCB
PCB
- Relay PCB (UN5)
- Relay Path Unit
[Related parts]
- Relay PCB (UN5)
[Reference]

Detection Description Reception incomplete was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine
and the finisher.
Controller PCB
PCB
- Relay PCB (UN5)
- Relay Path Unit
[Related parts]
- Relay PCB (UN5)
[Reference]
595
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An undefined error was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine and
the finisher.
Controller PCB
PCB
- Relay PCB (UN5)
- Relay Path Unit
[Related parts]
- Relay PCB (UN5)
[Reference]

Detection Description An initialization error was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher.
Controller PCB
PCB
- Relay PCB (UN5)
- Relay Path Unit
[Related parts]
- Relay PCB (UN5)
[Reference]
596
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
719-0001-00 Error in Coin Vendor.

Detection Description Error in starting of the CoinVendor
- The Coin Vendor, which should have been connected before the power was turned OFF, is not
connected when the power is turned ON.
Remedy Check the connection between charging management equipment and machine, and check that
the Cable is not open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management equipment is connected to operate and when
switching to the operation without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging management equipment, this error code is
displayed.)

Detection Description Error in IPC when CoinVendor is running.
- In the case of disconnection of IPC or an error in which IPC communication failed to be recovered.
- When disconnection of the pickup delivery signal is detected.
- When illegal connection is detected (short-circuit with Tx and Rx of IPC)
displayed.)

Detection Description - In the case of communication error with the coin vendor while obtaining the unit price at start-up.
displayed.)
719-0004-00 Coin vendor error

Detection Description The coin vendor was connected to a model that does not support the coin vendor
Remedy 1. Disconnect the coin vendor
719-0031-00 Error in serial communication at the start of the New Card Reader
Detection Description Failure in communication with the serial New Card Reader at start-up.
Remedy - Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is disconnected.
- Take out the serial New Card Reader.
- COPIER > Function > CLEAR > CARD
- COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR
719-0032-00 Error in serial communication at the start of the New Card Reader
Detection Description Communication failed in the middle of the operation although communication with the serial New
Card Reader was successful at start-up.
Remedy - Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is disconnected.

Detection Description Communication with the coin vendor could not be established at startup of the host machine.
(Charge mode (COIN = 6) has been set.)
Remedy 1. If it operates in charge mode (COIN = 6)
- Check that it is the supported charging management equipment.
- Check the cable to be connected.
- Check the power of the charging management equipment.
2. If charge mode is canceled
- Select COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN> "0", and turn OFF and then ON the main power.
597
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Communication with the coin vendor could not be established at startup of the host machine.
(Charge mode (COIN = 6) has been set.)
Remedy 1. If it operates in charge mode (COIN = 6)
- Check that it is the supported charging management equipment.
- Check the cable to be connected.
- Check the power of the charging management equipment.
2. If charge mode is canceled
- Select COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN> "0", and turn OFF and then ON the main power.
720-0001-05 Error due to non-compatible Finisher

Detection Description Non-compatible Finisher was connected.
Remedy Connect either the Staple Finisher-Y1 or Saddle Stitch Finisher-Y1.
730-C001-00 Error in HDD access

Detection Description An error occurred when accessing the HDD.
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- HDD
731-3000-00 Main Controller PCB error

Detection Description Unable to recognize the SURF Board.

Detection Description Failure of SURF initialization.

Detection Description Failure of SURF initialization.

Detection Description Video data is not transmitted to CL1-G even though there is no problem in the software.

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was
detected.
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J109) and the Riser PCB (J7)
- Riser PCB
598
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

detected.
- Riser PCB

detected.
- Riser PCB

detected.
- Riser PCB

detected.
- Riser PCB
599
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

detected at startup/recovery from sleep.
- Riser PCB
732-0F01-04 Communication error

Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot
If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E732-0001 is generated.
Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log
collection.

collection.

collection.

collection.

collection.

Detection Description Scanner for a different model was detected at communication with the Reader.
Remedy Replace the Reader Unit with the one for this model.
600
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
733-0000-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected
at startup.
- Harnesses between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J100, J101) and the Riser PCB (J2, J10)
- Riser PCB

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected.
- Riser PCB

Detection Description Signal error was detected after establishment of communication between the DC Controller PCB
and the Main Controller PCB.
- Riser PCB
733-0F00-05 Printer communication error

collection.

collection.

collection.
601
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Finisher connection information error was detected between the DC Controller PCB and the
Main Controller PCB.
Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the power

Detection Description The Reader Controller PCB detected a communication error between the Main Controller PCB
and the Reader Controller PCB.
- Riser PCB
743-0001-04 DDI communication error

Detection Description Software sequence error
Remedy [Remedy] Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
744-0001-00 Language file error

Detection Description The language file in HDD was not supported by the version of Bootable.
Remedy Reinstall the correct language file using SST or USB memory reinstall the entire software.

Detection Description Size of the language file in HDD was too big.

Detection Description The language file to be switched to that was described in the Config.txt in HDD was not found.

Detection Description Switching to the language file in the HDD failed.
744-2000-00 Controller firmware mismatch

Detection Description Invalid controller firmware was detected at startup.
Remedy Replace the ECO-ID PCB with the one for this model.
744-5000-07 Mismatch of software version for fax

Detection Description After the Fax Board (option) has been installed, mismatch of version of software in the Fax Board
was detected at transmission and reception.
Remedy Upgrade the system software version to the latest one.
746-0011-00 Voice Board error

Detection Description Because both the voice composition board and the composition recognition board are inserted.
Remedy Insert only 1 board of the appropriate voice board.
746-0021-00 Image Analysis Board error

Detection Description Self-check NG of Image Analysis Board
1. Remove and then install the Image Analysis Board.
2. If the error is not cleared, replace the Image Analysis Board.
3. After replacing the Image Analysis Board, reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or
the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB flash drive.
602
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Different version of Image Analysis Board (PCB used for PCAM)
Remedy Reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is
supported by this model using SST or a USB flash drive.

Detection Description No response from Image Analysis Board (PCB used for PCAM)

Detection Description Failure in behavior of Image Analysis Board (PCB used for PCAM)
746-0031-00 TPM error

Detection Description A communication error has occurred between the Main Controller PCB and the TPM PCB at
startup.
Remedy Check/replace the TPM PCB.
[Reference] After replacing the TPM PCB, if the TPM key was backed up, restore the key.
1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key.
2. Execute "Settings/Registration> Log In> Management Settings> Data Management> TPM
Settings> Restore TPM Key".
[CAUTION] Ask the customer to enter "System Manager ID" and "System Manager PIN" when
logging in.
3. Enter the password set at backup operation.
4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click "OK". Remove the USB memory,
and turn OFF and then ON the main power.
746-0032-00 TPM error

Detection Description Mismatch of the TPM key was detected.
2. Replace the TPM PCB.
[Reference] After replacing the TPM PCB, if the TPM key was backed up, restore the key.
logging in.
603
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
746-0033-00 TPM error

Detection Description It was detected that data in TPM was inconsistent.
Remedy If the TPM key was backed up,
- Restore the TPM key.
logging in.
If the TPM key was not backed up,
- Format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
746-0034-00 TPM auto recovery error

Detection Description The error occurred when clearing HDD while TPM setting was ON.
Remedy It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power.
If the error is not cleared, format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB
flash drive.
746-0035-00 TPM version error

Detection Description TPM PCB which cannot be used in this machine was installed.
Remedy Install the TPM PCB for this model.
747-0000-00 Board error

Detection Description There was unexpected interruption from ASIC.
- Harness betweens the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J109) and the Riser PCB (J7)
- Bypass PCB (when non-Canon-made controller is installed)
- Open I/F PCB (when non-Canon-made controller is installed)
- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-001E-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
604
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
747-011A-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-011B-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
605
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
606
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-051C-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-051D-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
607
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
608
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
609
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
610
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
747-0A18-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-0A19-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-0A1A-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-0A1B-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-0B18-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
611
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
747-0B19-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-0B1A-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-0B1B-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-0C18-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
612
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
747-0C1A-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-0C1B-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
613
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
614
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
615
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
616
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
747-201F-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
617
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-3D00-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-3F00-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
618
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
619
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
620
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
621
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
622
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
623
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
747-6A1F-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-6B1F-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-6C1E-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-6C1F-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-6F1F-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
624
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
625
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-7D00-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
626
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
627
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
628
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
629
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-C000-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-C51A-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-C51B-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
630
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
747-C51C-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-C51D-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-C51F-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD

- Riser PCB
- HDD
631
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
747-DC00-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-DF00-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-FF00-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
747-FF01-00 Board error

- Riser PCB
- HDD
748-2000-00 Main Controller PCB access error

Detection Description Main Controller PCB Chip access error.

Detection Description Main Controller PCB memory access error.
632
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description IPL (startup program) was not found, or the HDD could not be recognized.
- Cable between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD
- SATA-FLASH PCB
1. Disconnect the cable between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD, and turn ON the main
power.
a. When the error code has not been changed:
2. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and execute [4] Clear/Format> [2] Flash Format (Flash
format) using a USB memory.
3. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory.
4. Restore the backup data.
b. When the error code has been changed to another one, see the remedy for the corresponding
code.

Detection Description OS was not found at startup.
Remedy Replace the SataFlash PCB.

Detection Description The OS could not be installed or there was no OS start script at startup in safe mode.
Remedy Replace the SataFlash PCB.

Detection Description Main controller board access errors



- Bypass PCB
[Remedy] Check/replace the related connector and parts.



633
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
749-0006-00 Error due to change in hardware configuration

Detection Description Change in option configuration could not be detected.
Remedy [Remedy] Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
[Reference] Options are recognized again by turning OFF and then ON the main power.
In the case of changing option configuration, disconnect the power plug or turn OFF the breaker
after turning OFF the main power so that an error does not occur.
753-0001-00 Download Error

Detection Description Update of the system software failed.
2. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory.
3. Replace the FLASH PCB, and reinstall the system software.
4. Collect debug log and contact the sales company.
760-0001-00 Main Controller PCB internal error

Detection Description An error was detected in the Main Controller PCB.
804-0000-00 Power Supply Cooling Fan error

Detection Description It was detected that the Power Supply Cooling Fan was locked.
- Harnesses from the Relay PCB (UN5/J412) and the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM3/J6122)
- Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM3)
- Relay PCB (UN5)
805-0000-05 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan Error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 was detected.
- Rotation signal was detected while the fan was being stopped, or the signal was not detected
during operation.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J217) and the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1
(FM1/J6066)
- Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 (FM1)
805-0001-05 Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan Error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 was detected.
during operation.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J217) and the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2
(FM2/J6067)
- Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 (FM2)
806-0000-05 Delivery fan Error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Delivery Fan 1 was detected.
during operation.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J213) and the Delivery Fan 1 (FM7/J6061)
- Delivery Fan 1 (FM7)
634
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
806-0001-05 Delivery fan Error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Delivery Fan 2 was detected.
during operation.
- Harness between the Front Driver PCB (UN3/J301) and the Delivery Fan 2 (FM9/J3012)
- Delivery Fan 2 (FM9)
806-0002-05 Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan Error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan was detected.
during operation.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J213) and the Secondary Transfer Exhaust
Fan (FM8/J6071)
- Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan (FM8)
807-0000-05 Process cartridge fan Error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Process Cartridge Fan (Rear) was detected.
during operation.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J224) and the Process Cartridge Fan (Rear)
(FM4/J6124)
- Process Cartridge Fan (Rear) (FM4)
807-0001-05 Process cartridge fan Error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Process Cartridge Fan (Front) was detected.
during operation.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J224) and the Process Cartridge Fan (Front)
(FM10/J6123)
- Process Cartridge Fan (Front) (FM10)
808-0000-05 Zero Cross Error

Detection Description Zero cross signal was not detected after fixing relay was ON.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J173) and the AC Driver PCB (UN6/J505)
- AC Driver PCB (UN6)
[Remedy]
- Check the voltage of the outlet, and connect the machine to the correct outlet if it is wrong.
- Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
635
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
840-0000-05 Fixing Shutter HP error

Detection Description Home position error of the Fixing Shutter was detected.
- Harness between the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J213) and the Fixing Shutter Motor (M27/
J6059)
- Harnesses connecting the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2/J214), the Drawer Unit and the Fixing
Relay PCB (UN78/J720)
- Harness connecting from the Fixing Relay PCB (UN78/J722) to the Shutter HP Sensor and
Shutter Position Sensor (PS31/J6103 and PS32/J6102)
- Fixing Shutter Motor (M27)
- Shutter HP Sensor (PS31)
- Shutter Position Sensor (PS32)
880-0001-00 Controller Fan error

Detection Description It was detected that the Controller Fan was locked.
- Cable between the Main Controller PCB (J15) and the Controller Fan (FM11)
- Controller Fan (FM11)
- Check the connectors of the Controller Fan.
- Visually check rotation of the Controller Fan.
a. If it is not rotated, replace the Controller Fan.
b. If it is rotated, replace the Main Controller PCB.
880-0003-00 Controller Fan error

Detection Description It was detected that the Controller Fan was locked.
- Cable between the Main Controller PCB (J15) and the Controller Fan (FM11)
- Controller Fan (FM11)
- Check the connectors of the Controller Fan.
- Visually check rotation of the Controller Fan.
a. If it is not rotated, replace the Controller Fan.
b. If it is rotated, replace the Main Controller PCB.
880-0005-00 Error in Controller Fan

Detection Description Fan lock of the HDD Cooling Fan was detected
Remedy Check if the connector is connected.
It the connection is OK, replace the HDD Cooling Fan.
881-0001-00 Board over heat error

Detection Description Abnormal temperature of the Main Controller CPU was detected.
Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
a. If the error occurred during a service visit and then occurred again, replace the Main Controller
PCB.
b. If the error does not occur during a service visit but is found in the log:
1. Clean the inlet on the side where the fan is installed and remove dust.
2. Remove dust from the Controller fan.
3. If the space on the side where the fan is installed is less than 10 cm, ask the customer to secure
enough space.
636
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
882-0002-05 Main Power Supply Switch error

Detection Description The main power was not turned OFF due to the solenoid in the Main Power Switch not working.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Power Supply Switch (SW/
J1091 and J1092)
- Main Power Supply Switch (SW1)
- Riser PCB- DC Controller PCB (UN1)
a. If the fuse (FU5) of the Riser PCB is blown out,
1. Check the harness and connector (caught cable, short circuit).
2. Check/replace the Riser PCB.
b. If the fuse (FU5) of the Riser PCB is not blown out,
1. Check for any open circuit of the harness.
2. Check/replace the Main Power Supply Switch.
3. Check/replace the DC Controller PCB.
996-0071-04 Error for collecting sequence jam log (ADF)

Detection Description Error for collecting jam log (ADF)
[Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-R" to "1", it is handled
as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence.
996-0CA1-05 Error for collecting log (Printer)

Detection Description Error for collecting log (Printer)
Continuous 0CA1 jam was detected.
[Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D" to "1", it is handled





637
7. Error/Jam/Alarm


996-0CAA-05 Error for collecting log (Printer)

Continuous 0CAA jam was detected.
996-0CAB-05 Error for collecting log (Printer)

Continuous 0CAB jam was detected.
996-0CAC-05 Error for collecting log (Printer)

Continuous 0CAC jam was detected.
996-0CAE-05 Error for collecting log (Printer)

Continuous 0CAE jam was detected.
638
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Jam Code
Jam Type
Type Overview of detection Check items (in arbitrary order)
Delay A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned • Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
ON although a specified period of time had passed • Soiling on the target sensor
after the start of detection by the sensor. • Displacement of the target sensor position
• Failure of the target sensor
• Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located
upstream of the target sensor
• Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller lo-
cated upstream of the target sensor
Stationary A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not • Remaining paper near the target sensor
turned OFF although a specified period of time had • Soiling on the target sensor
passed after the sensor was turned ON. • Displacement of the target sensor position
• Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located
upstream of the target sensor
• Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller lo-
cated upstream of the target sensor
Door open A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected • Door open during printing
door open during printing operation.
Sequence A sequence jam occurs when there was an error in • Opening/closing of the door
sensor detection signal at printing operation se- • Turning OFF and then ON the power
quence. • Error near the target sensor (soiling/displacement/failure of
Since the jam may occur due to sporadic noise with the sensor, error in harness/open circuit of harness, soiling
software of each equipment or communication line (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor, or soiling (pa-
(interruption of communication), failure of the part per dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller)
is not the cause of the jam. After the jam is removed,
the machine works.
Power-on A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON • Remaining paper in the machine
state at power-on. • Soiling on the target sensor
• Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)
Error avoidance An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the • Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
machine (excluding parts failure) was detected. • Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error oc-
currence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not
the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of
the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and
printing operation is suspended. In such case, serv-
ice technician should perform remedial work for the
error code.
Size error A size error jam occurs when the difference be- • Difference in paper size
tween the paper length detected by the Cassette • Wrong paper size setting
Guide Plate/specified on the Control Panel and the • Error in the Document Size Sensor (soiling/displacement/
length measured by the Registration Sensor is out failure of the sensor)
of the specified range. • Error in the Paper Size Detection Unit (failure of mechanical
structure for size detection, failure of the Guide Plate, or fail-
ure of the Cassette Size Switch)
Forcible stop of It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position • Using at problem analysis.
paper feed specified in service mode.
Jam screen display specification

Due to one jam code being used for multiple options, the illustration for the different option may be displayed on the jam screen.
In this case, "1/2" or similar information is displayed on top left side of the screen and this area can be pushed. This operation
can be used to switch information on the screen.
639
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Main Unit
PS39
PS57
PS42
PS43
PS41 PS40
PS37
PS34
PS38
PS33
PS72
PS55
PS76
PS56
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID

00 0101 DELAY Cassette 1 Pullout Sensor PS55
00 0105 DELAY Registration Sensor PS33
00 0106 DELAY Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34
00 0107 DELAY Inner Delivery Sensor PS37
00 0108 DELAY First Delivery Sensor PS41
00 0109 DELAY Second Delivery Sensor PS42
00 010A DELAY Reverse Sensor PS39
00 010B DELAY Third Delivery Sensor PS43
00 010C DELAY Duplex Inlet Sensor PS40
00 010D DELAY Duplex Paper Sensor PS38
00 010E DELAY Multi-Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor PS72
00 0114 DELAY Pre-Reverse Sensor PS57
00 0115 DELAY Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor PS76
00 0190 DELAY - -
00 0201 STNRY Cassette 1 Pullout Sensor PS55
640
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

00 0205 STNRY Registration Sensor PS33
00 0206 STNRY Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34
00 0207 STNRY Inner Delivery Sensor PS37
00 0208 STNRY First Delivery Sensor PS41
00 0209 STNRY Second Delivery Sensor PS42
00 020A STNRY Reverse Sensor PS39
00 020B STNRY Third Delivery Sensor PS43
00 020C STNRY Duplex Inlet Sensor PS40
00 020D STNRY Duplex Paper Sensor PS38
00 020E STNRY Multi-Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor PS72
00 0214 STNRY Pre-Reverse Sensor PS57
00 0215 STNRY Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor PS76
00 0A01 POWER ON Cassette 1 Pullout Sensor PS55
00 0A05 POWER ON Registration Sensor PS33
00 0A06 POWER ON Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34
00 0A07 POWER ON Inner Delivery Sensor PS37
00 0A08 POWER ON First Delivery Sensor PS41
00 0A09 POWER ON Second Delivery Sensor PS42
00 0A0A POWER ON Reverse Sensor PS39
00 0A0B POWER ON Third Delivery Sensor PS43
00 0A0C POWER ON Duplex Inlet Sensor PS40
00 0A0D POWER ON Duplex Paper Sensor PS38
00 0A0E POWER ON Multi-Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor PS72
00 0A14 POWER ON Pre-Reverse Sensor PS57
00 0A15 POWER ON Cassette 1/2 Vertical Pass Sensor PS76
00 0B00 DOOR OP Door Open -
00 0CA1 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam -
00 0CAA SEQUENCE Sequence Jam -
00 0CAB SEQUENCE Sequence Jam -
00 0CAC SEQUENCE Sequence Jam -
00 0CAE SEQUENCE Sequence Jam -
00 0CAF SEQUENCE Sequence Jam -
00 0CF1 ERROR Error Avoidance Jam -
00 0D91 SIZE ERR Size Error -
00 0F75 ERROR Error Avoidance Jam -
00 AA01 P-STOP Forcible stop of paper feed -
641
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ADF/ Reader
PS_R3
PS_N1
PS_A3
PS_A5 PS_A4
PS_R1
UN_BO8
UN_BO7
PS_A9
PS_R2
PS_A6 PS_A1
PS_A2
PS_A7
UN_BO6
642
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
PS_N2
PS_N1

01 0001 DELAY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 0002 STNRY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 0003 DELAY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0004 STNRY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0005 DELAY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0006 STNRY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0007 DELAY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
01 0008 STNRY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
01 0020 DOUBLE Double Feed Detection PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0021 OTHER Double Feed Detection PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0042 STNRY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 0043 DELAY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0044 STNRY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0045 DELAY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0046 STNRY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0060 DOUBLE Double Feed Detection PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0062 ERROR Double Feed Detection PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0071 OTHER - -
01 0076 OTHER LTR-R/ LGL Sensor, Large/Small Sensor PS_R3, PS_A3
01 0090 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front/Rear) PS_N1, PS_N2
01 0091 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front/Rear) PS_N1, PS_N2
643
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

01 0092 COVER OP Cover Open/Closed Sensor PS_A5
01 0093 COVER OP Cover Open/Closed Sensor PS_A5
01 0095 OTHER Original Sensor PS_N1
01 0096 OTHER - -
01 00A1 POWER ON Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 00A2 POWER ON Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS_A1
01 00A3 POWER ON Original Size Sensor (Inch) PS_R2
01 00A4 POWER ON Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
01 00A5 POWER ON Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7
Cassette Feeding Unit-AM1
PS108
PS106
PS102
PS104

644
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-A1
PS113 PS107
PS122
PS101
PS103

00 0103 DELAY High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor PS101
00 0203 STNRY High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor PS101
00 0A03 POWER ON High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor PS101
645
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Paper Deck Unit-F1
PS2
PS1

00 010F DELAY Deck Pullout Sensor PS2
00 020F STNRY Deck Pullout Sensor PS2
00 0A0F POWER ON Deck Pullout Sensor PS2
646
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Inner Finisher-H1
MSW1
PS1

02 1001 DELAY Delivery Sensor PS1
02 1101 STNRY Delivery Sensor PS1
02 1200 TIMING - -
02 1301 POWER ON Delivery Sensor PS1
02 1400 COVER OP Front cover switch MSW1
02 1500 STAPLE - -
02 1701 INIT ROT Delivery Sensor PS1
02 1801 ERROR - -
02 1802 ERROR - -
02 1803 ERROR - -
02 1804 ERROR - -
02 1805 ERROR - -
02 1C14 ERROR - -
02 1C16 ERROR - -
02 1C30 ERROR - -
02 1C32 ERROR - -
02 1C35 ERROR - -
02 1C37 ERROR - -
02 1C40 ERROR - -
02 1C77 ERROR - -
02 1F01 OTHER - -
02 1F32 OTHER - -
02 1F90 SEQUENCE - -
647
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Staple Finisher-Y1/ Booklet Finisher-Y1
PS111
PS102
PS130 PS101
PS114 PS103
PS128 PS104
PS129 SW101
PS125 PS201
PS203 PS215
PS202

02 1001 DELAY Inlet Sensor PS101
02 1002 DELAY Delivery Sensor PS102
02 1003 DELAY Buffer Sensor PS103
02 1004 DELAY Escape Delivery Sensor PS111
02 1008 DELAY Saddle Delivery Sensor* PS203*
02 1009 DELAY Saddle Inlet Sensor* PS201*
02 1101 STNRY Inlet Sensor PS101
02 1102 STNRY Delivery Sensor PS102
02 1103 STNRY Buffer Sensor PS103
02 1104 STNRY Escape Delivery Sensor PS111
02 1108 STNRY Saddle Delivery Sensor* PS203*
02 1109 STNRY Saddle Inlet Sensor* PS201*
02 1200 TIMING - -
02 1301 POWER ON Inlet Sensor PS101
02 1302 POWER ON Delivery Sensor PS102
02 1303 POWER ON Buffer Sensor PS103
02 1304 POWER ON Escape Delivery Sensor PS111
02 1307 POWER ON Saddle Processing Tray Paper Sensor* PS202*
02 1308 POWER ON Saddle Delivery Sensor* PS203*
02 1309 POWER ON Saddle Inlet Sensor* PS201*
02 1400 COVER OP Front Cover Sensor/Front Cover Switch PS104, SW101
02 1500 STAPLE Staple HP Sensor PS125
02 1501 SDL STP Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor* PS215*
02 1801 ERROR Staple-free Binding Motor Clock Sensor PS130
02 1802 ERROR Staple-free Binding HP Sensor PS129
02 1803 ERROR - -
648
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

02 1804 ERROR - -
02 1805 ERROR - -
02 1C14 ERROR - -
02 1C30 ERROR - -
02 1C32 ERROR - -
02 1C35 ERROR - -
02 1C37 ERROR - -
02 1C40 ERROR - -
02 1C53 ERROR - -
02 1C54 ERROR - -
02 1C77 ERROR - -
02 1C78 ERROR - -
02 1C7B ERROR - -
02 1C83 ERROR - -
02 1CF0 ERROR - -
02 1CF1 ERROR - -
02 1CF3 ERROR - -
02 1CF6 ERROR - -
02 1CF8 ERROR - -
02 1CFA ERROR - -
02 1F01 OTHER - -
02 1F32 OTHER - -
02 1F90 SEQUENCE - -
*Only Booklet Finisher-Y1
2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
PS303 PS304
PS301
649
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

02 1600 PUNCH Punch HP Sensor 1/Punch HP Sensor 2 PS303,PS304
02 1C90 ERROR - -
02 1C93 ERROR - -
Inner 2/4 Hole Puncher-B1
S2
S5 S6
PCB3
S4

02 1002 DELAY Punch Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3
02 1003 DELAY No.2 path sensor S2
02 1102 STNRY Punch Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3
02 1103 STNRY No.2 path sensor S2
02 1302 POWER ON Punch Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3
02 1303 POWER ON No.2 path sensor S2
02 1600 PUNCH Punch HP Sensor 1/Punch HP Sensor 2 S5, S6
02 1601 PUNCH Punch Waste Box Sensor S4
02 1C90 ERROR - -
02 1C93 ERROR - -
650
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Buffer Pass Unit-L1
PS403
PS402 PS401

02 100A DELAY Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401
02 100B DELAY Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402
02 110A STNRY Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401
02 110B STNRY Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402
02 1201 TIMING Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401
02 130A POWER ON Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401
02 130B POWER ON Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402
02 1405 COVER OP OPEN detection sensor PS403
02 1F3E ERROR - -
651
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Alarm Code
Alarm Code Details

00-0085 A notice of stat
A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy
00-0246 Error code display (4-digit)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Soft counter PCB cannot write normally.
C. Remedy
00-0247 Error code display (4-digit)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Soft counter PCB cannot restore data.
C. Remedy
01-0001 Notification of disabled to obtain counter values for a certain period of time
A. Operation / B. Cause / Counter information is not set to UGW
C. Remedy * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW
01-0002 No change in device status after specified period of time has passed (RDS server creates)
C. Remedy
01-0004 Notification of IP address change

A. Operation / B. Cause / IP address has been changed
01-0005 Restricted operation notification

A. Operation / B. Cause / The device entered limited function mode for some reason.
02-0025 Insufficient Scanner Unit (Paper Front) LED light intensity alarm (Some of the LEDs are OFF.
Scanning can be continued.)
A. Operation / B. Cause / In the case that the light intensity is insufficient at LED lighting.
C. Remedy
652
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
04-0001 Cassette 1 Lifter error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Error in the Lifter Motor or Lifter Sensor
C. Remedy Detection condition/timing: When failure of the Cassette Lifter was detected
When rising of the lifter was not completed (the Paper Surface Sensor was not turned ON) within
the specified period of time after the start of rising
Movement/symptom: While failure has occurred (an alarm has occurred), the target paper source
cannot be used because it is in no paper state.
Measures:
While the Cassette 1 is removed, turn ON the power and then insert the Cassette 1, and check
the operation sound of the motor.
When there is operation sound of the motor, check if the Middle Plate has been lifted up.
- When the Middle Plate has been lifted up:
1. Check that the Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor is properly installed.
2. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller and the Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor.
3. Check the Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor.
- When the Middle Plate has not been lifted up:
1. Check the gear on the host machine side (missing teeth, swing).
2. Check the Cassette 1 Lifter Motor.
- When there is no operation sound of the motor, check the followings:
1. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller and the Cassette 1 Lifter Motor.
2. Check conduction of the fuse in the DC Controller.
5. Replace the DC Controller.

Measures:
653
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Measures:

Measures:
654
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
04-0007 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Lifter error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Error in the Pickup Motor or HP Sensor
C. Remedy Detection condition/timing: When failure of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller lifting mechanism
was detected
When lifting of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller was not completed within the specified period
of time after the start of lifting
Measures:
Operate the Multi-purpose Pickup Motor in the direction opposite to the direction of the Multi-
purpose Tray feed direction, and check the operation sound of the motor.
When there is operation sound of the motor, check the lifting operation of the Pickup Roller.
- When the Pickup Roller moves up and down:
1. Check that the HP Sensor is properly installed.
2. Check the Sensor Shield Plate.
3. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller and the HP Sensor.
4. Check the HP Sensor.
- When the Pickup Roller does not move up and down:
1. Check the gear on the host machine side and the gear on the Right Door side (missing teeth,
rotation, swing, etc.).
2. Check the Multi-purpose Pickup Motor.
3. Check the DC Controller.
- When there is no operation sound of the motor:
1. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller and the Multi-purpose Pickup Motor.
4. Check the Multi-purpose Pickup Motor.
5. Replace the DC controller.
04-0010 Notification of jam left untouched

A. Operation / B. Cause / Jam is left untouched
04-0011 Cassette 1 pickup retry error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Although pickup retry operation was performed predetermined number of times, paper
C. Remedy could not be picked up.
Detection condition/timing: When pickup jam occurred multiple times in the Cassette 1
Movement/symptom: There is a possibility that pickup jam occurs frequently.
Measures: Check the life of the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller of the Cassette 1. =>
Check that there is no paper lint at the pickup slot. Replace the Pickup Roller if necessary.


655
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

04-0017 Multi-purpose Tray pickup retry error

Detection condition/timing: When pickup jam occurred multiple times at the Multi-Purpose Tray
Measures: Check the life of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller/Multi-purpose Tray Pullout Roller.
=> Check that there is no paper lint at the pickup slot. Replace the Pickup Roller if necessary.
04-1537 Lifter alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy - Deck Lifter Motor alarm
- The lifter cannot be lowered.
Detection condition/timing: The Bottom Sensor or the Relay Sensor was not turned ON within the
specified period of time when lowering the lifter.
Movement/symptom:
While failure has occurred (an alarm has occurred), the target paper source cannot be used
because it is in no paper state.
Measures:
- Forcibly open the receptacle and check for any foreign matter in it.
- Check that the Lifter Plate is not caught by the Side Guide.
- Remove the Front Cover, and check that the lifter wire is properly installed (no coming off,
disconnection, slack, or winding in the reverse direction).
- If there is an error, repair it and close the receptacle.
- Execute service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DK-RCV.
- Execute the recovery command, and check that the Side Deck is initialized properly.
- Push the Paper Supply Sensor and check that the Lifter Plate being lowered stops at the lowest
position.
1) If it is not lowered:
- If it is not lowered and no motor drive sound is heard, check for improper connection of the
connector (J303) of the Relay PCB (FM1-P802).
- If it is not operated after checking the connector connection, replace the Relay PCB and the Lifter
Motor in that order.
2) If it is lowered:
- Check if the Lifter Plate stops at the bottom of the receptacle.
656
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
04-1539 Paper Surface Sensor alarm

C. Remedy - Deck Lifter Motor alarm
- The lifter cannot be raised.
Detection condition/timing: The Paper Surface Sensor was not turned ON within the specified
period of time when raising the lifter.
Movement/symptom:
Measures:
- Forcibly open the receptacle.
- Check that the Lifter Plate is not caught by the Side Guide.
- Remove the Front Cover, and check that the lifter wire is properly installed (no coming off,
disconnection, slack, or winding in the reverse direction).
- Remove the Deck Right Cover.
- Close the receptacle, and check if the Lifter Plate is raised from the right side.
1) If it is not raised:
- If it is not raised and no motor drive sound is heard, check for improper connection of the connector
(J303) of the Relay PCB (FM1-P802) and the Paper Surface Sensor (PS6).
- If it is not operated after checking the connector connection, replace the Paper Surface Sensor
(PS6), the Relay PCB, and the Lifter Motor in that order.
2) If it is raised:
- Check if the Lifter Plate stops at the upper limit position.
- Check for improper connection of the Paper Surface Sensor (PS6).
- Check for any foreign matters on the bottom of the receptacle.
- Replace the Bottom Sensor (PS9) and the Lower Limit Switch 3.
04-1542 Lifter upper limit alarm

C. Remedy Deck Lifter upper limit detection alarm
Detection condition/timing: The Upper Limit Sensor was turned ON while raising the lifter.
Movement/symptom:
Measures:
- Check the position of the Lifter Plate.
- Check for any improper connection, caught harness and disconnection of the Upper Limit Sensor
1 and 2 (PS3 and PS4).
- Execute service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DK-RCV, and check if the machine is
recovered.
- If the machine is not recovered, replace the Upper Limit Sensor 1 and 2 (PS3 and PS4).
04-1543 Lifter lower limit alarm

C. Remedy Deck Lifter lower limit detection alarm
Detection condition/timing: The Lower Limit Detection Switch was turned ON while lowering the
lifter.
Movement/symptom:
Measures:
- Check the position of the Lifter Plate.
- Check for any improper connection, caught harness and disconnection of the Bottom Sensor
(PS9) and the Lower Limit Detection Switch (SW3).
recovered.
- If the machine is not recovered, replace the Bottom Sensor (PS9) and the Lower Limit Detection
Switch (SW3).
657
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
04-1586 Deck interlock alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Side Paper Deck interlock error
C. Remedy Detection condition/timing: The interlock was not detected with the Receptacle Open/Close Sensor
ON.
Movement/symptom:
Measures:
- Check if the receptacle is halfway closed.
- Remove the Deck Right Cover, and check for any improper connection, caught harness and
disconnection of the Interlock Switch (SW1) and the Receptacle Open/Close Sensor (PS8).
recovered.
- If the machine is not recovered, close the receptacle, and check the operation of the Interlock
Switch (SW1) and the Receptacle Open/Close Sensor (PS8).
- Replace the Interlock Switch (SW1) and the Receptacle Open/Close Sensor (PS8).
04-1587 Pickup Motor disengagement alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Side Paper Deck Pickup Motor disengagement error
C. Remedy Detection condition/timing: The HP Sensor did not respond when disengaging the Feed/Separation
Roller.
Movement/symptom:
Measures:
- Remove the Top Cover.
- Press the Receptacle Open/Close Button, and check if the Feed/Separation Roller is disengaged.
1) If it is not disengaged:
- Replace the Pickup Motor (M1).
- Replace the Pickup Unit.
2) If it is disengaged:
- Check for any improper connection and caught harness of the Separation Roller Disengagement
Sensor (PS7).
04-1937 Lifter error detection alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Error in the Lifter paper height detection
C. Remedy Detection condition/timing: When paper height was not detected within the specified period of time
while lifting up the lifter
Measures:
- Check the connector of the Pickup Unit.
- Check the paper surface detection of the Pickup Unit.
- Check the Pickup Roller of the Pickup Unit.
- Check the motor, gear and timing belt for driving the lifter in the receptacle.
04-1942 Upper limit detection alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Upper limit of the lifter was detected.
C. Remedy Detection condition/timing: When detecting the upper limit three times
Measures:
- Check for any foreign matter in the receptacle.
- Check the connector of the Pickup Unit.
- Check the Upper Limit Sensor of the Pickup Unit.
- Check the Pickup Roller of the Pickup Unit.
658
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
04-1976 Receptacle error detection alarm: High Capacity Cassette

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Error in the sensor in the receptacle
C. Remedy Detection condition/timing:
- When paper stack was not detected three times within the specified period of time while shifting
a paper stack
- When Right Deck paper loading detection failed three times although paper stack shift detection
was turned ON within the specified period of time while shifting a paper stack
- When the Division Plate detection failed three times although the Division Plate Solenoid was
turned ON while shifting a paper stack
- When the Lifter HP detection failed three times within the specified period of time while the Lifter
was moving to the HP
Measures:
- Check for any foreign matter in the receptacle.
- Check the connector and the cable connector of the receptacle.
- Check the motor, gear and timing belt for shifting paper stack in the receptacle.
- Check the Paper Stack Shift Sensor in the receptacle.
- Check the Division Plate Solenoid and the Division Plate Sensor in the receptacle.
- Check the Right Deck and the Lifter Sensor in the receptacle.
- Adjust the paper settings by referring to the Service Manual [High Capacity Cassette Pedestal >
Adjustment > Switching the Size between LTR and A4].
Method for clearing the alarm
1. Perform a remedy for the failure.
2. Place paper in the Left Tray with no paper in the Right Tray, and close the receptacle.
The alarm is cleared when shifting of stack is performed normally.
3. Press the [Status Monitor/Cancel] key, and check that the status of the Cassette 3 is "paper
present".
06-0012 Fixing memory detection alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of the Fixing Film Unit could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Check the connection of the Fixing Unit, and check for any soiling or damage.
2. Check the connector of the Fixing Memory PCB (UN79).
3. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J122) of the DC Controller (UN1).
4. Replace the Fixing Film Unit.
5. Replace the DC Controller (UN1).
09-0010 Drum memory detection error (Y)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The memory of the Drum Unit (Y) could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit (Y).
2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit New/Old PCB (Y) (UN70).
3. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J608) of the Process Unit Relay PCB (UN20).
5. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J306) of the Font Driver PCB (UN3).
6. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J301) of the Front Driver PCB (UN3).
8. Replace the Drum Unit (Y).
9. Replace the Front Driver PCB (UN3).
659
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
09-0011 Drum memory detection error (M)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The memory of the Drum Unit (M) could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit (M).
2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit New/Old PCB (M) (UN71).
8. Replace the Drum Unit (M).
09-0012 Drum memory detection error (C)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The memory of the Drum Unit (C) could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit (C).
2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit New/Old PCB (C) (UN72).
8. Replace the Drum Unit (C).
09-0013 Drum memory detection error (Bk)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The memory of the Drum Unit (Bk) could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit (Bk).
2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit New/Old PCB (Bk) (UN73).
8. Replace the Drum Unit (Bk).
10-0001 Toner Low (Black) alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Low toner was detected and UGW generated an alarm.
10-0002 Toner Low (Cyan) alarm

10-0003 Toner Low (Magenta) alarm

10-0004 Toner Low (Yellow) alarm

660
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
10-0006 Patch Sensor error 1

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: Patch control (not to execute Dmax, real-time multiple tone control and ATR control)
C. Remedy Cause: P-wave intensity of LED was out of the specified range (soiled window, failure of the sensor)
Measures:
1. Clean the window of the Patch Sensor, and execute light intensity correction. (Turn OFF and
then ON the main power and execute the correction at warm-up rotation.)
2. Check the Guide Plate (soiling, etc.).
3. Check the operation of the Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL1).
4. Check the connector between the DC Controller PCB and the sensor.
5. Replace the Registration Patch Sensor Unit.
6. Replace the DC Controller PCB. (At this time, be sure to perform backup and restoration
according to the steps to be taken before/after replacing the DC Controller.)
10-0007 Patch Sensor error 2

C. Remedy Cause: S-wave intensity of LED was out of the specified range (soiled window, failure of the sensor)
Measures:
2. Check the Guide Plate (soiling, etc.).
10-0017 Toner (Y) prior delivery alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / An alarm for requesting a prior delivery is sent to UGW as the value of Toner level detect value
C. Remedy has reached the value set in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-CL/T-DLV2CL.
10-0018 Toner (M) prior delivery alarm

10-0019 Toner (C) prior delivery alarm

10-0020 Toner (Bk) prior delivery alarm

C. Remedy has reached the value set in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK.
10-0022 Patch detection light intensity abnormal change alarm

C. Remedy Cause: The average light intensity of P-wave after light intensity correction was out of the specified
range.
Measures:
2. Check the ITB (soiling, etc.).
661
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
10-0091 Toner memory detection alarm (Y)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of toner (Y) could not be detected.
C. Remedy 1. Remove and then install the Toner Bottle.
2. Check for any scar or soiling on the memory area of the Toner Bottle.
3. Check the connector between the Bottle New/Old Sensor (Y) (UN66) and the DC Controller
PCB.
4. Check for any soiling or damage on the Bottle New/Old Sensor (Y) (UN66).
5. Replace the Toner Bottle (Y).
10-0092 Toner memory detection alarm (M)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of toner (M) could not be detected.
3. Check the connector between the Bottle New/Old Sensor (M) (UN67) and the DC Controller
PCB.
4. Check for any soiling or damage on the Bottle New/Old Sensor (M) (UN67).
5. Replace the Toner Bottle (M).
10-0093 Toner memory detection alarm (C)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of toner (C) could not be detected.
3. Check the connector between the Bottle New/Old Sensor (C) (UN68) and the DC Controller
PCB.
4. Check for any soiling or damage on the Bottle New/Old Sensor (C) (UN68).
5. Replace the Toner Bottle (C).
10-0094 Toner memory detection alarm (Bk)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of toner (Bk) could not be detected.
3. Check the connector between the Bottle New/Old Sensor (Bk) (UN69) and the DC Controller
PCB.
4. Check for any soiling or damage on the Bottle New/Old Sensor (Bk) (UN69).
5. Replace the Toner Bottle (Bk).
10-0100 Toner bottle replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / The replacement of the Toner Container was detected.
C. Remedy
10-0401 Toner Bottle empty alarm (Y)

A. Operation / B. Cause / When the Toner Bottle empty was detected
C. Remedy
10-0402 Toner Bottle empty alarm (M)

C. Remedy
10-0403 Toner Bottle empty alarm (C)

C. Remedy
10-0404 Toner Bottle empty alarm (Bk)

C. Remedy
11-0001 Waste toner alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Detected waste toner bottle full.
C. Remedy
662
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
11-0010 Near-full state of the Waste Toner Container

A. Operation / B. Cause / Detection of near-full state of the Waste Toner Container
C. Remedy
13-00FE For R&D

C. Remedy
13-00FF For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0100 For R&D

C. Remedy
14-0000 For R&D

C. Remedy
14-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
14-1000 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-0006 HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function

A. Operation / B. Cause / HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function
C. Remedy
31-0008 HDD failure prediction alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a short time due to occurrence of physical error in
C. Remedy HDD. It does not occur in the HDD of mirroring configuration.
Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of HDD
Measures:
1. Back up the data stored in HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.
3. Restore the data.
S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology): Self-diagnosis function built in
the HDD. The occurrence rate of reading error, reading and writing speed, the total number of
Motor start-up and stop times, the total length of power-on time, etc. are monitored.
31-0010 The configuration of an option controlled by the Main Controller has been changed
A. Operation / B. Cause / A change in configuration of an option such as a change in the configuration of the Fax Board, a
C. Remedy change in the configuration of the Voice Board, or a change in the configuration of the option HDD,
which requires turning OFF and then ON the power, was detected.
Detection condition/timing:At the time of startup only
Remedy:Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
31-0020 The configuration of an option controlled by the RCON has been changed
A. Operation / B. Cause / Due to a change in the configuration related to the scanner, a change in the hardware configuration
C. Remedy which requires turning OFF and then ON the power was detected.
31-0030 The configuration of an option controlled by the DCON has been changed
A. Operation / B. Cause / Due to a change in the configuration related to the printer, a change in the hardware configuration
C. Remedy which requires turning OFF and then ON the power was detected.
663
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
31-0040 Communication with RTC was not available.

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Communication with RTC could not be established.
- When a communication error occurred with RTC
Movement/symptom:
- FCOT may become longer.
Measures:
1. Check the connector/cable connected to the J109 Main Switch.
2. Check the Main Switch.
31-0051 External Environment Sensor temperature upper limit detection alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: External Temperature Sensor error (A temperature higher than the specified value was
C. Remedy detected.)
Detection condition/timing:
- Detection is always performed and an alarm occurs when a value that exceeds the threshold
value is detected.
Movement/symptom:
- While failure has occurred (an alarm has occurred), color displacement/density error, or toner
scattering inside the machine in the worst case may occur.
Measures:
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the Environment Sensor (UN50).
2. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J171) of the DC Controller PCB.
3. Check if the harness of the External Temperature Sensor is short circuit.
4. Replace the Environment Sensor (UN50).
31-0052 External Environment Sensor temperature lower limit detection alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: External Temperature Sensor error (A temperature lower than the specified value was
value is detected.
Movement/symptom:
Measures:
3. Check if the harness of the Environment Sensor is open circuit.
31-0053 External Environment Sensor humidity upper limit detection alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: External Temperature Sensor error (A temperature higher than the specified value was
value is detected.
Movement/symptom:
Measures:
3. Check if the harness of the Environment Sensor is open circuit.
664
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
31-0054 Internal Environment Sensor temperature upper limit detection alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Internal Temperature Sensor error (A temperature was higher than the specified value.)
value is detected.
Movement/symptom:
Measures:
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the Internal Temperature Sensor (UN22).
3. Check if the harness of the Internal Temperature Sensor is short circuit.
4. Replace the Internal Temperature Sensor (UN22).
31-0055 Internal Environment Sensor temperature lower limit detection alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Internal Temperature Sensor error (A temperature was lower than the specified value.)
value is detected.
Movement/symptom:
Measures:
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the Internal Temperature Sensor (UN22).
3. Check if the harness of the Internal Temperature Sensor is open circuit.
4. Replace the Internal Temperature Sensor (UN22).
31-0106 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-0116 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-0126 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-0136 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F1 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F2 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F3 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F4 For R&D

C. Remedy
665
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
31-01F5 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F6 For R&D

C. Remedy
33-0011 Fixing Cooling Fan error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: While an alarm has occurred, productivity is decreased.
C. Remedy Cause: At rotation of the Fixing Cooling Fan, rotation of the fan cannot be detected for a specified
period of time.
Clearing: When rotation of the Fixing Cooling Fan can be detected
Measures: Perform the measures in the order shown below.
1. Check the harness of the Fixing Cooling Fan (Front) (the caught cable, open circuit, connector
disconnection).
Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2) J213 to J6068
2. Check the harness of the Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM6) (the caught cable, open circuit,
connector disconnection).
Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2) J213 to J6069
3. Replace the Feed/Drum Driver PCB (UN2).
4. Replace the Fixing Cooling Fan (Front) (FM5).
5. Replace the Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM6).
34-0003 Auto registration adjustment

C. Remedy - Timeout occurred due to failure of reading 10 sets of auto registration patterns.
Failure of the Registration Sensor, the Registration Sensor Cleaning Member covered the
Registration Sensor, or no image was drawn on the belt.
- When Auto Correct Color Mismatch is executed
Movement/symptom:
- Color displacement may occur because result of auto registration is not reflected.
Measures:
1. Execute service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>LD-ADJ-X(X=Y,M,C,K). End of
operation if the problem is solved.
2. Check if the link of the Registration Detection Shutter is disengaged.
3. Check if the window of the Registration Detection Sensor is soiled.
4. Check if the connector of the Registration Detection Sensor is disconnected.
5. If the measures 1 to 4 do not solve the problem, replace the Registration Detection Sensor.
38-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
38-0002 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0070 [Reserve]
C. Remedy
40-0071 [Reserve]
C. Remedy
40-0072 [Reserve]
C. Remedy
666
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
40-0073 [Reserve]
C. Remedy
40-0076 [Reserve]
C. Remedy
40-0120 [Reserve]
C. Remedy
40-0121 [Reserve]
C. Remedy
40-0122 [Reserve]
C. Remedy
40-0123 [Reserve]
C. Remedy
43-0070 Drum Unit (Y) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / - The replacement of the Drum Unit was detected.
C. Remedy - It was detected that the DC Controller PCB was replaced.
43-0071 Drum Unit (M) replacement completion alarm

43-0072 Drum Unit (C) replacement completion alarm

43-0073 Drum Unit (Bk) replacement completion alarm

43-0076 Fixing Assembly replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / - The counter of the Fixing Assembly was cleared.
50-0010 Successive occurrence of separation alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Condition unable to separate 1st sheet of original from the ADF occurs 3 times in a row. Check
C. Remedy rotation of the Pickup Motor -> Check the life of the Pickup Roller -> Check if paper lint is at the
pickup slot.
50-0014 Insufficient Scanner Unit (Paper Back) LED light intensity alarm (Some of the LEDs are OFF.
Scanning can be continued.)
A. Operation / B. Cause / In the case that the light intensity is insufficient at LED lighting.
C. Remedy
667
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
50-0015 Failure of the ADF Double Feed Sensor

C. Remedy Failure of the Double Feed Sensor installed in the ADF
- When a paper feed error of the Double Feed Sensor was detected at power-on
- When an error of the output value of the Double Feed Sensor was detected during ADF job (While
an ADF job is being executed, it is handled as a jam once and retry is performed.)
Clearing condition:
- When communication and the sensor output value are normal at power-on
Movement/symptom: "Check area where multi. sheet feed was detected. (Call serv. rep.)" is
displayed in the status line. Although reading from the ADF is possible, double feed cannot be
detected when it occurs.
Measures:
Check for any foreign matter, clean paper lint, disconnect and then connect the connectors, replace
the Double Feed Detection PCB, replace the RCON/DF Driver PCB, replace the harnesses
61-0002 Finisher Staple Free Stapling alarm: Fin-H1/Y1

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The staple free staple unit is broken.
C. Remedy Operation : Operation stops as jam. After jam processing, the paper is delivered without stapling
until a job is finished.
Recovery method : Replace the Staple free staple unit. After performing the remedy work, go
through the following to clear the alarm: SORTER> FUNCTION> EMSG-CLR.
70-0086 For R&D

C. Remedy
70-0087 Firmware combination mismatch

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: An option with the firmware which version is newer than that of the firmware installed in
C. Remedy the host machine was detected. It is an alarm when the automatic update cancellation message
is displayed on the Control Panel.
Detection condition:
When the following two conditions are satisfied:
1. "1" is set in COPIER>Option>FNC-SW>VER-CHNG.
2. The version of the firmware installed in the option that has been installed to the host machine
is newer than that of the firmware in the host machine.
Timing: At startup
Movement/symptom: Cancel the automatic update.
Measures: Update the firmware of the host machine.
73-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0008 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0009 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0011 For R&D

C. Remedy
668
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
73-0014 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0015 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0017 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0008 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0009 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0011 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0014 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0015 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0017 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0024 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0026 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9101 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9102 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9103 For R&D

C. Remedy
669
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
75-9104 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9105 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9106 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9107 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9108 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9109 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-910A For R&D

C. Remedy
75-910B For R&D

C. Remedy
75-910C For R&D

C. Remedy
75-910D For R&D

C. Remedy
75-910E For R&D

C. Remedy
75-910F For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9110 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9111 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9112 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9113 For R&D

C. Remedy
670
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
75-9114 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9115 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9116 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9117 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9118 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9119 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-911A For R&D

C. Remedy
75-911B For R&D

C. Remedy
75-911C For R&D

C. Remedy
75-911D For R&D

C. Remedy
75-911E For R&D

C. Remedy
75-911F For R&D

C. Remedy
75-9120 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B101 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B102 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B103 For R&D

C. Remedy
671
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
75-B104 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B105 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B106 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B107 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B108 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B109 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B10A For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B10B For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B10C For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B10D For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B10E For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B10F For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B110 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B111 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B112 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B113 For R&D

C. Remedy
672
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
75-B114 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B115 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B116 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B117 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B118 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B119 For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B11A For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B11B For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B11C For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B11D For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B11E For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B11F For R&D

C. Remedy
75-B120 For R&D

C. Remedy
76-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
76-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
76-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
673
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
77-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
77-0002 For R&D

C. Remedy
77-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
77-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
77-0006 For R&D

C. Remedy
78-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
78-0002 For R&D

C. Remedy
78-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
78-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
78-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
79-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
79-0002 For R&D

C. Remedy
79-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
79-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
674
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
80-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0008 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0009 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0010 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0011 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0012 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0013 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0015 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0016 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0019 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0006 For R&D

C. Remedy
675
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
81-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
83-0005 CanonPDF
A. Operation / B. Cause / PDF memory full
C. Remedy
83-0015 CanonPDF
A. Operation / B. Cause / PDF data decode error
C. Remedy
83-0017 CanonPDF
A. Operation / B. Cause / PDF error
C. Remedy
83-0020 Reception of ESCP unanalyzable data

A. Operation / B. Cause / Since PDL automatic judgment may be wrong, select the appropriate PDL in Settings/Registration
C. Remedy > Function Settings > Printer > Printer Settings > Settings > Printer Operation Mode, and send the
data.
83-0021 Reception of I5577 unanalyzable data

data.
83-0022 Reception of HPGL unanalyzable data

data.
83-0023 Reception of N201 unanalyzable data

data.
83-1001 Network linked service

C. Remedy - Resource full error of network linked service
Detection condition/timing: -
Movement/symptom:
- Memory or disk space enough for executing conversion process using network linked service
cannot be allocated.
Measures: -

C. Remedy - Parameter error of network linked service
Movement/symptom:
- Printing cannot be performed because of specifying unsupported document data or making the
unsupported print settings during data conversion process using network linked service.
Measures:
- Check that the format of the document data is correct.
- Check that the print settings are correct.
676
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy - Timeout error of network linked service
- When there is a problem with server or document data
Movement/symptom:
- Conversion process using network linked service was not completed within the specified period
of time.
Measures:
- If the problem occurs due to an error in the server, wait for a while and execute the job again.
- If the problem occurs due to an error in the document data, make the document data size smaller
and execute the job again.

C. Remedy - Conversion server connection error of network linked service
Movement/symptom:
- During data conversion process using network linked service, the LAN Cable is physically
removed or communication with the server is not available due to an error in the communication
path or the conversion server.
Measures:
- Check if the LAN Cable is properly connected.
- If the LAN Cable is properly connected, check that the server operates properly and there is no
problem with the communication path to the server.

C. Remedy - Conversion server not available error of network linked service
Movement/symptom:
- Unrecoverable error occurred in the conversion server during data conversion process using
network linked service.
Measures: -
84-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0006 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0008 For R&D

C. Remedy
677
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
84-0009 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0002 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0006 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0008 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0009 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-000A For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0011 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0012 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0013 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0014 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0015 For R&D

C. Remedy
678
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-001A For R&D

C. Remedy
85-002A For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0101 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0102 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0103 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0104 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0105 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0111 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0112 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0113 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0114 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0115 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0201 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0202 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0203 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0204 For R&D

C. Remedy
679
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-0205 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0211 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0212 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0213 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0214 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0215 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0301 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0302 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0303 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0304 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0305 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0311 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0312 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0313 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0314 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0315 For R&D

C. Remedy
680
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-0401 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0402 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0403 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0404 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0405 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0411 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0412 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0413 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0414 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0415 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0501 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0502 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0503 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0504 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0505 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0511 For R&D

C. Remedy
681
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-0512 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0513 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0514 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0515 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0601 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0602 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0603 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0604 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0605 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0611 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0612 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0613 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0614 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0615 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0701 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0702 For R&D

C. Remedy
682
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-0703 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0704 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0705 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0711 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0712 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0713 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0714 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0715 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0801 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0802 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0803 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0804 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0805 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0811 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0812 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0813 For R&D

C. Remedy
683
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-0814 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0815 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0901 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0902 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0903 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0904 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0905 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0911 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0912 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0913 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0914 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0915 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0A01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0A02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0A03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0A04 For R&D

C. Remedy
684
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-0A05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0A11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0A12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0A13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0A14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0A15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0B01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0B02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0B03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0B04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0B05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0B11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0B12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0B13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0B14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0B15 For R&D

C. Remedy
685
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-0C01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0C02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0C03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0C04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0C05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0C11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0C12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0C13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0C14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0C15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0D01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0D02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0D03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0D04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0D05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0D11 For R&D

C. Remedy
686
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-0D12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0D13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0D14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0D15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0E01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0E02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0E03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0E04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0E05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0E11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0E12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0E13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0E14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0E15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0F01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0F02 For R&D

C. Remedy
687
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-0F03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0F04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0F05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0F11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0F12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0F13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0F14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0F15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1001 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1002 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1003 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1004 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1005 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1011 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1012 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1013 For R&D

C. Remedy
688
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-1014 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1015 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1101 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1102 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1103 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1104 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1105 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1111 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1112 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1113 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1114 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1115 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1201 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1202 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1203 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1204 For R&D

C. Remedy
689
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-1205 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1211 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1212 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1213 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1214 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1215 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1301 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1302 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1303 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1304 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1305 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1311 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1312 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1313 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1314 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1315 For R&D

C. Remedy
690
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-1401 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1402 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1403 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1404 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1405 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1411 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1412 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1413 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1414 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1415 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1501 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1502 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1503 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1504 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1505 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1511 For R&D

C. Remedy
691
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-1512 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1513 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1514 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1515 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1601 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1602 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1603 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1604 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1605 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1611 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1612 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1613 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1614 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1615 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1701 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1702 For R&D

C. Remedy
692
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-1703 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1704 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1705 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1711 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1712 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1713 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1714 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1715 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1801 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1802 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1803 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1804 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1805 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1811 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1812 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1813 For R&D

C. Remedy
693
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-1814 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1815 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1901 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1902 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1903 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1904 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1905 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1911 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1912 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1913 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1914 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1915 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1A01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1A02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1A03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1A04 For R&D

C. Remedy
694
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-1A05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1A11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1A12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1A13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1A14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1A15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1B01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1B02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1B03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1B04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1B05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1B11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1B12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1B13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1B14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1B15 For R&D

C. Remedy
695
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-1C01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1C02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1C03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1C04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1C05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1C11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1C12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1C13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1C14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1C15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1D01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1D02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1D03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1D04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1D05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1D11 For R&D

C. Remedy
696
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-1D12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1D13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1D14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1D15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1E01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1E02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1E03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1E04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1E05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1E11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1E12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1E13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1E14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1E15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1F01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1F02 For R&D

C. Remedy
697
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-1F03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1F04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1F05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1F11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1F12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1F13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1F14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-1F15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2001 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2002 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2003 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2004 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2005 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2011 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2012 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2013 For R&D

C. Remedy
698
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-2014 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2015 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2101 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2102 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2103 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2104 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2105 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2111 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2112 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2113 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2114 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2115 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2201 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2202 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2203 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2204 For R&D

C. Remedy
699
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-2205 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2211 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2212 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2213 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2214 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2215 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2301 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2302 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2303 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2304 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2305 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2311 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2312 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2313 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2314 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2315 For R&D

C. Remedy
700
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-2401 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2402 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2403 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2404 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2405 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2411 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2412 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2413 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2414 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2415 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2501 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2502 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2503 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2504 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2505 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2511 For R&D

C. Remedy
701
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-2512 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2513 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2514 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2515 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2601 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2602 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2603 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2604 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2605 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2611 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2612 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2613 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2614 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2615 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2701 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2702 For R&D

C. Remedy
702
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-2703 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2704 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2705 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2711 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2712 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2713 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2714 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2715 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2801 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2802 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2803 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2804 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2805 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2811 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2812 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2813 For R&D

C. Remedy
703
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-2814 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2815 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2901 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2902 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2903 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2904 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2905 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2911 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2912 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2913 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2914 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2915 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2A01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2A02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2A03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2A04 For R&D

C. Remedy
704
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-2A05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2A11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2A12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2A13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2A14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2A15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2B01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2B02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2B03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2B04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2B05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2B11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2B12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2B13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2B14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2B15 For R&D

C. Remedy
705
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-2C01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2C02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2C03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2C04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2C05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2C11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2C12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2C13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2C14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2C15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2D01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2D02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2D03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2D04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2D05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2D11 For R&D

C. Remedy
706
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-2D12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2D13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2D14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2D15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2E01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2E02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2E03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2E04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2E05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2E11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2E12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2E13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2E14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2E15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2F01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2F02 For R&D

C. Remedy
707
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-2F03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2F04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2F05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2F11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2F12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2F13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2F14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-2F15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3001 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3002 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3003 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3004 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3005 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3011 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3012 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3013 For R&D

C. Remedy
708
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-3014 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3015 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3101 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3102 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3103 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3104 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3105 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3111 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3112 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3113 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3114 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3115 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3201 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3202 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3203 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3204 For R&D

C. Remedy
709
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-3205 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3211 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3212 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3213 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3214 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3215 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3301 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3302 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3303 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3304 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3305 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3311 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3312 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3313 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3314 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3315 For R&D

C. Remedy
710
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-3401 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3402 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3403 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3404 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3405 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3411 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3412 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3413 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3414 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3415 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3501 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3502 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3503 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3504 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3505 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3511 For R&D

C. Remedy
711
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-3512 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3513 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3514 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3515 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3601 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3602 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3603 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3604 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3605 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3611 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3612 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3613 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3614 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3615 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3701 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3702 For R&D

C. Remedy
712
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-3703 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3704 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3705 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3711 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3712 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3713 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3714 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3715 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3801 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3802 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3803 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3804 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3805 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3811 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3812 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3813 For R&D

C. Remedy
713
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-3814 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3815 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3901 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3902 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3903 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3904 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3905 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3911 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3912 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3913 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3914 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3915 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3A01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3A02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3A03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3A04 For R&D

C. Remedy
714
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-3A05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3A11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3A12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3A13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3A14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3A15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3B01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3B02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3B03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3B04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3B05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3B11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3B12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3B13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3B14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3B15 For R&D

C. Remedy
715
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-3C01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3C02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3C03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3C04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3C05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3C11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3C12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3C13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3C14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3C15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3D01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3D02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3D03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3D04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3D05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3D11 For R&D

C. Remedy
716
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-3D12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3D13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3D14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3D15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3E01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3E02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3E03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3E04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3E05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3E11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3E12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3E13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3E14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3E15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3F01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3F02 For R&D

C. Remedy
717
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-3F03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3F04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3F05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3F11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3F12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3F13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3F14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-3F15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4001 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4002 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4003 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4004 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4005 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4011 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4012 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4013 For R&D

C. Remedy
718
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-4014 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4015 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4101 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4102 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4103 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4104 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4105 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4111 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4112 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4113 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4114 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4115 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4201 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4202 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4203 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4204 For R&D

C. Remedy
719
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-4205 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4211 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4212 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4213 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4214 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4215 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4301 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4302 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4303 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4304 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4305 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4311 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4312 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4313 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4314 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4315 For R&D

C. Remedy
720
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-4401 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4402 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4403 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4404 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4405 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4411 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4412 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4413 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4414 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4415 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4501 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4502 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4503 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4504 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4505 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4511 For R&D

C. Remedy
721
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-4512 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4513 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4514 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4515 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4601 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4602 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4603 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4604 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4605 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4611 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4612 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4613 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4614 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4615 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4701 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4702 For R&D

C. Remedy
722
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-4703 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4704 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4705 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4711 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4712 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4713 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4714 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4715 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4801 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4802 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4803 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4804 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4805 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4811 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4812 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4813 For R&D

C. Remedy
723
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-4814 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4815 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4901 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4902 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4903 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4904 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4905 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4911 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4912 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4913 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4914 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4915 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4A01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4A02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4A03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4A04 For R&D

C. Remedy
724
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-4A05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4A11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4A12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4A13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4A14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4A15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4B01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4B02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4B03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4B04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4B05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4B11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4B12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4B13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4B14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4B15 For R&D

C. Remedy
725
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-4C01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4C02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4C03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4C04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4C05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4C11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4C12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4C13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4C14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4C15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4D01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4D02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4D03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4D04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4D05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4D11 For R&D

C. Remedy
726
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-4D12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4D13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4D14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4D15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4E01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4E02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4E03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4E04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4E05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4E11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4E12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4E13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4E14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4E15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4F01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4F02 For R&D

C. Remedy
727
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-4F03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4F04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4F05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4F11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4F12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4F13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4F14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-4F15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5001 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5002 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5003 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5004 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5005 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5011 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5012 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5013 For R&D

C. Remedy
728
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-5014 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5015 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5101 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5102 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5103 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5104 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5105 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5111 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5112 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5113 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5114 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5115 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5201 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5202 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5203 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5204 For R&D

C. Remedy
729
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-5205 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5211 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5212 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5213 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5214 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5215 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5301 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5302 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5303 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5304 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5305 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5311 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5312 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5313 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5314 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5315 For R&D

C. Remedy
730
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-5401 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5402 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5403 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5404 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5405 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5411 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5412 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5413 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5414 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5415 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5501 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5502 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5503 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5504 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5505 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5511 For R&D

C. Remedy
731
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-5512 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5513 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5514 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5515 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5601 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5602 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5603 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5604 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5605 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5611 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5612 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5613 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5614 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5615 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5701 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5702 For R&D

C. Remedy
732
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-5703 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5704 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5705 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5711 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5712 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5713 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5714 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5715 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5801 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5802 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5803 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5804 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5805 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5811 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5812 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5813 For R&D

C. Remedy
733
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-5814 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5815 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5901 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5902 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5903 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5904 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5905 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5911 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5912 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5913 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5914 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5915 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5A01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5A02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5A03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5A04 For R&D

C. Remedy
734
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-5A05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5A11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5A12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5A13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5A14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5A15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5B01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5B02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5B03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5B04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5B05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5B11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5B12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5B13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5B14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5B15 For R&D

C. Remedy
735
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-5C01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5C02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5C03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5C04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5C05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5C11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5C12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5C13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5C14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5C15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5D01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5D02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5D03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5D04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5D05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5D11 For R&D

C. Remedy
736
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-5D12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5D13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5D14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5D15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5E01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5E02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5E03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5E04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5E05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5E11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5E12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5E13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5E14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5E15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5F01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5F02 For R&D

C. Remedy
737
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-5F03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5F04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5F05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5F11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5F12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5F13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5F14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-5F15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6001 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6002 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6003 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6004 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6005 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6011 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6012 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6013 For R&D

C. Remedy
738
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-6014 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6015 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6101 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6102 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6103 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6104 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6105 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6111 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6112 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6113 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6114 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6115 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6201 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6202 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6203 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6204 For R&D

C. Remedy
739
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-6205 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6211 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6212 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6213 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6214 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6215 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6301 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6302 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6303 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6304 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6305 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6311 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6312 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6313 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6314 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6315 For R&D

C. Remedy
740
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-6401 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6402 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6403 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6404 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6405 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6411 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6412 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6413 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6414 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6415 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6501 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6502 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6503 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6504 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6505 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6511 For R&D

C. Remedy
741
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-6512 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6513 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6514 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6515 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6601 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6602 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6603 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6604 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6605 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6611 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6612 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6613 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6614 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6615 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6701 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6702 For R&D

C. Remedy
742
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-6703 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6704 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6705 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6711 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6712 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6713 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6714 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6715 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6801 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6802 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6803 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6804 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6805 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6811 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6812 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6813 For R&D

C. Remedy
743
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-6814 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6815 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6901 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6902 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6903 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6904 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6905 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6911 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6912 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6913 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6914 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6915 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6A01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6A02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6A03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6A04 For R&D

C. Remedy
744
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-6A05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6A11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6A12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6A13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6A14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6A15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6B01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6B02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6B03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6B04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6B05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6B11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6B12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6B13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6B14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6B15 For R&D

C. Remedy
745
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-6C01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6C02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6C03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6C04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6C05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6C11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6C12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6C13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6C14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6C15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6D01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6D02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6D03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6D04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6D05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6D11 For R&D

C. Remedy
746
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-6D12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6D13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6D14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6D15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6E01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6E02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6E03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6E04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6E05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6E11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6E12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6E13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6E14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6E15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6F01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6F02 For R&D

C. Remedy
747
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-6F03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6F04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6F05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6F11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6F12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6F13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6F14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-6F15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7001 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7002 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7003 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7004 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7005 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7011 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7012 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7013 For R&D

C. Remedy
748
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-7014 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7015 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7101 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7102 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7103 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7104 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7105 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7111 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7112 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7113 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7114 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7115 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7201 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7202 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7203 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7204 For R&D

C. Remedy
749
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-7205 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7211 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7212 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7213 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7214 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7215 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7301 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7302 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7303 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7304 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7305 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7311 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7312 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7313 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7314 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7315 For R&D

C. Remedy
750
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-7401 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7402 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7403 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7404 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7405 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7411 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7412 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7413 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7414 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7415 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7501 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7502 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7503 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7504 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7505 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7511 For R&D

C. Remedy
751
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-7512 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7513 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7514 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7515 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7601 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7602 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7603 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7604 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7605 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7611 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7612 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7613 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7614 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7615 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7701 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7702 For R&D

C. Remedy
752
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-7703 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7704 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7705 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7711 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7712 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7713 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7714 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7715 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7801 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7802 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7803 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7804 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7805 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7811 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7812 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7813 For R&D

C. Remedy
753
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-7814 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7815 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7901 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7902 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7903 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7904 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7905 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7911 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7912 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7913 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7914 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7915 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7A01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7A02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7A03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7A04 For R&D

C. Remedy
754
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-7A05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7A11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7A12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7A13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7A14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7A15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7B01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7B02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7B03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7B04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7B05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7B11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7B12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7B13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7B14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7B15 For R&D

C. Remedy
755
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-7C01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7C02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7C03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7C04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7C05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7C11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7C12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7C13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7C14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7C15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7D01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7D02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7D03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7D04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7D05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7D11 For R&D

C. Remedy
756
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-7D12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7D13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7D14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7D15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7E01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7E02 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7E03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7E04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7E05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7E11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7E12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7E13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7E14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7E15 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7F01 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7F02 For R&D

C. Remedy
757
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-7F03 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7F04 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7F05 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7F11 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7F12 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7F13 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7F14 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-7F15 For R&D

C. Remedy
758
8 Service Mode
Overview........................................... 760
COPIER (Service mode for copier)... 776
FEEDER (ADF service mode).........1176
SORTER (Service mode for delivery
options)........................................1181
BOARD (Option board setting mode)
.....................................................1202
8. Service Mode
Overview
It is possible to see each item of service mode so that those who access to service mode can understand how to use them.
The main types of this machine's service mode are shown below.
Points to Note when Executing Service Mode

• When setting/executing service mode, do not open/close the cover or turn off the power while "active" is displayed. Otherwise,
it may not set/execute correctly.
• Depending on the service mode, some items are listed as "Do not use this item at the normal service" in "Caution". The item
is created on the basis that it will be used in the following situations, so it must not be used for any other situations.
• When entering setting values while replacing the PCB or clearing RAM data (mentioned in "Use case")
• When there was an instruction from a service office (for reasons such as a large adverse effect or setting is difficult)
• When taking individual measures (tender business, etc.)
Service Mode Menu

Press the button to display the initial screen of each mode.
The differences between these modes are described below.
Top screen
MODELIST
In this mode, functions for referring to each item in service mode, etc. are available.
Updater
This button is used to access the CDS and UGW servers and update system software.
BACKUP
This button is used to back up the service mode setting values.
RESTORE
This button is used to restore the service mode setting values backed up by [BACKUP].
SITUATION
This function displays service mode items according to the situation.
LUI MASK
This button is used to display a mask screen to prevent operations from being performed from the Control Panel while the
service mode is being accessed from a remote PC.
Description of Service Mode Items

The description of the initial screen, the main items, the intermediate items and the sub items can be displayed.
After selecting any item of the initial screen, main item, the intermediate item or the sub item, pressing "i" (Information Button)
displays the description of the selected item (hereinafter referred to as the service mode contents).
760
8. Service Mode
CAUTION:
• Displayed language of the service mode contents can be selected from J/E/F/I/G/S.
• The service mode contents can be upgraded with the SST (just like the other system software).
e.g.) COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION screen
1. Press the [i] button.
2. The title of each sub item is displayed.
To check the details of each item, select the relevant item and press the [ i ] button.
3. A detailed description of the sub item (specifications and use methods, setting screen, etc.) is displayed .
Operation Check of Electrical Components

In situation mode of service mode, among electrical components used (motors, fans, solenoids, and clutches), operation of those
that can operate alone can be checked on the Parts Check screen.
NOTE:
The service mode used below utilizes the system where electrical components used are operated by control signals sent from the
DC Controller. If a control signal is sent but the electrical component does not operate, a failure of the electrical component, open
circuit of the cable for transmitting control signals, or poor contact of the connector is suspected.
1. Select SERVICE MODE > SITUATION > Parts Check.
761
8. Service Mode
2. Press a button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type.
Example: In the case of a motor of the host machine, press the button (red dotted frame) at "COPIER"/"MOTOR".
Device classification
Electrical parts
classification
3. A list of electrical component types for the selected device whose operation can be checked is displayed.
4. Select the electrical component you want to operate and then press the Start button to send a signal for driving the
selected electrical component for a specified period of time from the DC Controller.
5. "ACTIVE" is displayed while the electrical component is driven. After the electrical component has been driven for
a specified period of time, "OK!" is displayed if transmission of the drive signal succeeded, or "NG !" is displayed
if failed.
762
8. Service Mode
[ i ] : Press the button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components.
763
8. Service Mode
6. The screen showing the locations of electrical components is displayed.
Enhanced I/O Information

In situation mode of service mode, the searchability of an electrical component has been improved. Moreover, the signal input/
output (I/O) state of the electrical components (sensors, motors, fans, etc.) in use can be checked on the screen.
1. Start service mode.
2. Select "SITUATION".
3. On the "SITUATION MODE" screen, select "Sensor Check".
764
8. Service Mode
4. Press a button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type.
Example: In the case of the Registration Sensor of the host machine, press the button (red dotted frame) at "COPIER"/"P-
SENSOR".
Device classification
Electrical parts
classification
5. A list of electrical component types for the selected device is displayed.
6. Select an electrical component to display the details in the frame (red dotted frame) at the bottom of the screen.
765
8. Service Mode
7. Press the [i] button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components.
Security Support
A password can be specified to prevent unauthorized access to the service mode.
Related Service Mode:

Setting password type when the screen is switched to the service mode
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (Level 1)
The password for service engineer when the screen is switched to the service mode
• (Level 2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD
■ Procedure for Setting Password

1. Set "1" or "2" in the following service mode.
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW
<Setting range>
0: No password [Default]
1: Service technician
2: System administrator + Service technician
CAUTION:
• This setting is enabled without restarting the host machine.
• After setting the password, the following screen will be displayed by accessing service mode.
• Therefore, when the PSWD-SW is set to "2" (system administrator + service technician), enter the system administrator
password ([System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN] in [Settings/Registrations] > [Management Settings] >
[User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]), and then press the [OK] button.
2. Follow the following procedure to check that you can login to service mode.
1. When setting PSWD-SW to "1" (system administrator) or "2" (ServiceMode_070Backup) in step 1, the system
administrator password entry screen will be displayed, so enter the system administrator ID in [Sys Manager ID ] (1)
and system administrator password in [Password] (2), and then press the [OK] button.
(1)
(2)
766
8. Service Mode
2. When setting PSWD-SW to "2" (system administrator + service technician) in step 1, the service technician password
entry screen will be displayed after step 2. Enter the service technician password in [Password] (1), and then press the
[OK] button.
(1)
CAUTION:
• The service technician password is the password set in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD.
• If you forget the password for service technician, disable the password function using the Service Support Tool (SST).
Check that you can access service mode and finish the work.
Switching the Screen Display (Level 1 <->2)

Switching of screens between Level 1 and Level 2 becomes easier.
By pressing <LEVEL 1> at the upper right of the screen while Level 1 screen is displayed, the screen is switched to Level 2
screen.
Service Mode Backup

Adjustment is made to every machine at the time of shipment to write the adjustment value in the service label.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM, the adjusted values of ADJUST and OPTION return to the default;
therefore, be sure to adjust the value in the field, and in the case of changing the service mode value, be sure to write down the
changed value in the service label. When the corresponding item is not found on the service label, write the value in blank field.
767
8. Service Mode
DCON Setting Items
Service Label
RCON Setting Items
Output of Service Print Data

■ Overview
• Output of the service print data such as P-PRINT has been supported.
• Select Service Mode Level 1 > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE and press "OK" to generate data at that time in the
HDD.
• Generated (saved) data will be deleted when exporting to SST or a USB flash drive.
• When multiple service data such as P-PRINT and HIST-PRINT are saved in the HDD of the host machine, it will be exported
collectively to SST or a USB flash drive.
• It can be exported to SST or a USB flash drive by entering download mode even when the host machine has stopped because
of no papers.
NOTE:
• Service print data cannot be output when an error has occurred.
• When connecting USB devices that run on external power, turn on the power before starting the host machine. USB devices
connected after the host machine was started will not be recognized.
768
8. Service Mode
■ Service Print and Data File Name Supported for File Output
Service Mode Description
P-PRINT Output of service mode setting values
HIST-PRT Output of jam and error logs
USER-PRT Output of user mode list
D-PRINT Output of service mode (DISPLAY)
ENV-PRT Output of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log
PJH-P-1 Output of details on print job history (100 jobs)
PJH-P-2 Output of details on print job history (all jobs)
USBH-PRT Output of USB device information report
■ Moving the file in service mode

● Preparation
• USB memory device
FAT32 format file system, with no password locks.
● Overall flow
1. Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE; and then press OK.
2. Generating report file

After the “ACTIVE” blinks for 3 to 4 minutes, generation of a report file is complete as “OK!” is displayed.
3-+3
86%+357
537),/( 2.
53786%
3. Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
769
8. Service Mode
4. Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT2USB; and then press OK.
3-+3
86%+357
537),/(
53786%
OK
NOTE:
• If the downloaded file is opened as plain text, the paragraphs are misaligned, which makes it difficult to read the data.
• When the file is dragged to WordPad, an image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some cases.
■ Moving the file in download mode

● Preparation
• USB memory device
FAT32 format file system, with no password locks.
● Overall flow
1. Selecting RPT-FILE
Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE; and then press OK.
2. Generating report file

After the “ACTIVE” blinks for 3 to 4 minutes, generation of a report file is complete as “OK!” is displayed.
3-+3
86%+357
537),/( 2.
53786%
770
8. Service Mode
3. Execute Download mode > [5]: Download File > [4]: ServicePrint Download.
>>>>>>>'RZQORDG)LOH0HQX 86% @@@@@@@

>@68%/2*'RZQORDG
>@6HUYLFH3ULQW'RZQORDG
>&@5HWXUQWR0DLQ0HQX
>5HVHW@6WDUWVKXWGRZQVHTXHQFH
>@KDVEHHQVHOHFWHG([HFXWH"
2. &$1&(/ $Q\RWKHUNH\V
NOTE:
• If the downloaded file is opened as plain text, the paragraphs are misaligned, which makes it difficult to read the data.
• When the file is dragged to WordPad, an image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some cases.
■ Moving the service report file to a PC using SST

The following shows an example case of SST Ver.4.74.
1. Start up the SST.
2. Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click
[START].
[1]
[2]
771
8. Service Mode
3. Click [Upload Data].
4. Select 'P-PRINT-RPT.txt', and click [Start].
5. Select the name of the Folder to store and, as necessary, a brief description; then, click [Save].
6. Click [OK].
772
8. Service Mode
SITUATION Mode
Situation mode has been implemented in this machine to improve workability and searchability at the site. This mode makes it
possible to easily use the service mode appropriate for the scene at the site.
The following three points are made available depending on each situation:
1. Display of related service mode that needs adjustment
2. Display of causes and remedies
3. Display of related images
Function to Mask the Screen during Remote Access

This function ensures security during servicing work using remote connection.
The machine has an option called Remote Operation Viewer for remote control via a network. This option enables a service
technician to perform maintenance on the machine from a remote location.
However, the same screen is displayed on the Remote Operation Viewer screen and the Control Panel during the work, which
carries the following risks.
• The screen being operated can be seen by the user.
• During remote operation, the user may perform an operation on the Control Panel and an unexpected processing may be
executed.
To solve these security problems, a function has been added to display a message on the Control Panel screen when the machine
is being operated remotely using Remote Operation Viewer in order to prevent the user from performing unexpected operations.
773
8. Service Mode
As shown in the figure below, the mask screen is displayed when this function is enabled.
Canon Remote Operation Viewer screen Operation Panel
The mask screen is

displayed on
the Control Panel
screen when this
function is enabled.
Examples of Screen Display
Functional Specification
The specifications of this function are shown below.
• When this function is enabled, a mask screen is displayed on the Control Panel. When the function is disabled, the original
screen is displayed again.
Example of the displayed mask screen

• This function is disabled when the following operations are performed.
• Press [LUI MASK] on the service mode top screen.
• Exit Remote Operation Viewer.
• The remote access is disconnected due to a network failure, etc.
• The machine is shut down (power down) or restarted.
• If this function is disabled while the service mode is being operated, the service mode is forcibly exited, and the previous
screen is displayed. (However, the service mode is not forcibly terminated if the Updater screen has been accessed from
service mode.)
• When this function is enabled, all operations (operations from the Touch Panel or hardware keys) other than screen
brightness adjustment and operation on the Energy Saver key are disabled.
■ Procedure for Enabling This Function

The procedure for enabling this function is shown below.
1. Use the Remote Operation Viewer to access the machine, and start service mode.
774
8. Service Mode
2. Press [LUI MASK], and check that the button is enabled (has turned light blue).
■ Procedure for Disabling This Function

The procedure for disabling this function is shown below.
1. Perform one of the following operations.

• Access the service mode, press [LUI MASK], and check that the button is disabled (has turned gray).
• Exit the Remote Operation Viewer.

• Disconnect the network (disconnect the network cable, disable the network function, etc.).
• Shut down or restart the machine.
775
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier)
DISPLAY (State display mode)

■ VERSION
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
DC-CON 1 Display of DCON firmware version
Detail To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99
R-CON 1 Display of RCON firmware version

Detail To display the RCON firmware version in the Main Controller firmware.
PANEL 1 Dspl of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM ver

Detail To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB.
ECO 1 Display of ECO-ID PCB firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of the ECO-ID PCB.
SORTER 1 Display of FIN-CONT firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB.
NIB 1 Display of network software version

Detail To display the version of the network software.
SDL-STCH 1 Dspl of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver

Detail To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.
776
8. Service Mode
OP-CON 1 Display of Option Controller PCB ROM ver
Detail To display the ROM version of Option Controller PCB.
MN-CONT 1 Display of MNCON firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
PUNCH 1 Display of Finisher Inner Punch Unit

Detail To display the version of Finisher Inner Punch Unit.
LANG-FR 1 Display of French language file version

Detail To display the version of French language file.
LANG-DE 1 Display of German language file version

Detail To display the version of German language file.
LANG-IT 1 Display of Italian language file version

Detail To display the version of Italian language file.
LANG-CS 2 Display of Czech language file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file.
LANG-DA 2 Display of Danish language file version

Detail To display the version of Danish language file.
LANG-EL 2 Display of Greek language file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file.
777
8. Service Mode
LANG-ES 1 Display of Spanish language file version
Detail To display the version of Spanish language file.
LANG-ET 2 Display of Estonian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file.
LANG-FI 2 Display of Finnish language file version

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file.
LANG-HU 2 Display of Hungarian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file.
LANG-KO 2 Display of Korean language file version

Detail To display the version of Korean language file.
LANG-NL 2 Display of Dutch language file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file.
LANG-NO 2 Display of Norwegian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file.
LANG-PL 2 Display of Polish language file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file.
LANG-PT 2 Display of Portuguese language file ver

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file.
778
8. Service Mode
LANG-RU 2 Display of Russian language file version
Detail To display the version of Russian language file.
LANG-SL 2 Display of Slovenian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file.
LANG-SV 2 Display of Swedish language file version

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file.
LANG-TW 2 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: trad

Detail To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional).
LANG-ZH 2 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: smpl

Detail To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified).
ECO-ID 2 Display of ECO-ID code

Detail To display the ECO-ID code.
Display/Adj/Set Range ASCII character string (12 digits)
GDI-UFR 1 Display of UFR II function version

Detail To display the version of UFR II function.
LANG-BU 2 Display of Bulgarian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file.
LANG-CR 2 Display of Croatian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file.
779
8. Service Mode
LANG-RM 2 Display of Romanian language file ver
Detail To display the version of Romanian language file.
LANG-SK 2 Display of Slovak language file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file.
LANG-TK 2 Display of Turkish language file version

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file.
BOOTROM 1 [Not used]

LANG-CA 2 Display of Catalan language file version
Detail To display the version of Catalan language file.
MEDIA-JA 2 Dspl of Japanese media information ver

Detail To display the version of Japanese media information.
MEDIA-EN 2 Dspl of English media information ver

Detail To display the version of English media information.
MEDIA-DE 2 Dspl of German media information version

Detail To display the version of German media information.
MEDIA-IT 2 Dspl of Italian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Italian media information.
780
8. Service Mode
MEDIA-FR 2 Dspl of French media information version
Detail To display the version of French media information.
MEDIA-ZH 2 Dspl of Chinese media info ver: smpl

Detail To display the version of Chinese media information (simplified).
MEDIA-SK 2 Dspl of Slovak media information version

Detail To display the version of Slovak media information.
MEDIA-TK 2 Dspl of Turkish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Turkish media information.
MEDIA-CS 2 Dspl of Czech media information version

Detail To display the version of Czech media information.
MEDIA-EL 2 Dspl of Greek media information version

Detail To display the version of Greek media information.
MEDIA-ES 2 Dspl of Spanish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Spanish media information.
MEDIA-ET 2 Dspl of Estonian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Estonian media information.
MEDIA-FI 2 Dspl of Finnish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Finnish media information.
781
8. Service Mode
MEDIA-HU 2 Dspl of Hungarian media information ver
Detail To display the version of Hungarian media information.
MEDIA-KO 2 Dspl of Korean media information version

Detail To display the version of Korean media information.
MEDIA-NL 2 Dspl of Dutch media information version

Detail To display the version of Dutch media information.
MEDIA-NO 2 Dspl of Norwegian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Norwegian media information.
MEDIA-PL 2 Dspl of Polish media information version

Detail To display the version of Polish media information.
MEDIA-PT 2 Dspl of Portuguese media information ver

Detail To display the version of Portuguese media information.
MEDIA-RU 2 Dspl of Russian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Russian media information.
MEDIA-SL 2 Dspl of Slovenian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Slovenian media information.
MEDIA-SV 2 Dspl of Swedish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Swedish media information.
782
8. Service Mode
MEDIA-TW 2 Dspl of Chinese media info version:trad
Detail To display the version of Chinese media information (traditional).
MEDIA-BU 2 Dspl of Bulgarian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian media information.
MEDIA-CR 2 Dspl of Croatian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Croatian media information.
MEDIA-RM 2 Dspl of Romanian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Romanian media information.
MEDIA-CA 2 Dspl of Catalan media information ver

Detail To display the version of Catalan media information.
FAX1 1 Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version

Detail To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB.
"NULL" is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
FAX2/3/4 1 Display of 2-line FAX PCB ROM version

Detail To display the ROM version of 2-line FAX PCB.
Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
Use Case When checking the version
IOCS 1 Display of BIOS version

Detail To display the BIOS version.
783
8. Service Mode
S-LNG-JP 1 Dspl of service mode Japanese file ver
Detail To display the version of Japanese language file in service mode.
S-LNG-EN 1 Dspl of service mode English file ver

Detail To display the version of English language file in service mode.
S-LNG-FR 1 Dspl of service mode French file version

Detail To display the version of French language file in service mode.
S-LNG-IT 1 Dspl of service mode Italian file ver

Detail To display the version of Italian language file in service mode.
S-LNG-GR 1 Dspl of service mode German file version

Detail To display the version of German language file in service mode.
S-LNG-SP 1 Dspl of service mode Spanish file ver

Detail To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode.
SEND-AP 1 Display of SEND (JAVA UI) version

Detail To display the version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
TSP-JLK 1 Dspl of Image Data Analyzer PCB version

Detail To display the version of Image Data Analyzer PCB.
COPY-FR 1 Dspl of COPY appli French file version

Detail To display the French language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
784
8. Service Mode
COPY-IT 1 Dspl of COPY appli Italian file version
Detail To display the Italian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-DE 1 Dspl of COPY appli German file version

Detail To display the German language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-ES 1 Dspl of COPY appli Spanish file version

Detail To display the Spanish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-ZH 2 Dspl COPY appli Chinese file ver: smpl

Detail To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-TW 2 Dspl of COPY appli Chinese file ver:trad

Detail To display the traditional Chinese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-KO 2 Dspl of COPY appli Korean file version

Detail To display the Korean language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-CS 2 Dspl of COPY appli Czech file version

Detail To display the Czech language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-DA 2 Dspl of COPY appli Danish file version

Detail To display the Danish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-EL 2 Dspl of COPY appli Greek file version

Detail To display the Greek language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
785
8. Service Mode
COPY-ET 2 Dspl of COPY appli Estonian file version
Detail To display the Estonian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-FI 2 Dspl of COPY appli Finnish file version

Detail To display the Finnish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-HU 2 Dspl of COPY appli Hungarian file ver

Detail To display the Hungarian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-NL 2 Dspl of COPY appli Dutch file version

Detail To display the Dutch language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-NO 2 Dspl of COPY appli Norwegian file ver

Detail To display the Norwegian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-PL 2 Dspl of COPY appli Polish file version

Detail To display the Polish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-PT 2 Dspl of COPY appli Portuguese file ver

Detail To display the Portuguese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-RU 2 Dspl of COPY appli Russian file version

Detail To display the Russian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-SL 2 Dspl of COPY appli Slovenian file ver

Detail To display the Slovenian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
786
8. Service Mode
COPY-SV 2 Dspl of COPY appli Swedish file version
Detail To display the Swedish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-ID 2 Dspl of COPY appli Indonesian file ver

Detail To display the Indonesian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-BU 2 Dspl of COPY appli Bulgarian file ver

Detail To display the Bulgarian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-CR 2 Dspl of COPY appli Croatian file version

Detail To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-RM 2 Dspl of COPY appli Romanian file version

Detail To display the Romanian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-SK 2 Dspl of COPY appli Slovak file version

Detail To display the Slovak language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-TK 2 Dspl of COPY appli Turkish file version

Detail To display the Turkish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-CA 2 Dspl of COPY appli Catalan file version

Detail To display the Catalan language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-TH 2 Dspl of COPY appli Thai file version

Detail To display the Thai language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
787
8. Service Mode
COPY-VN 2 Dspl of COPY appli Vietnamese file ver
Detail To display the Vietnamese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-AR 2 Dspl of COPY appli Arabic file ver

Detail To display the Arabic language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-MS 2 Dspl of COPY appli Malay file ver

Detail To display the Malay language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-HI 2 Dspl of COPY appli Hindi file ver

Detail To display the Hindi language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-EU 2 Dspl of COPY appli Euskera file ver

Detail To display the Euskera language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
SEND-FR 1 Dspl of SEND appli French file version

Detail To display the French language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-IT 1 Dspl of SEND appli Italian file version

Detail To display the Italian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-DE 1 Dspl of SEND appli German file version

Detail To display the German language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-ES 1 Dspl of SEND appli Spanish file version

Detail To display the Spanish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
788
8. Service Mode
SEND-ZH 2 Dspl SEND appli Chinese file ver: smpl
Detail To display the simplified Chinese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-TW 2 Dspl of SEND appli Chinese file ver:trad

Detail To display the traditional Chinese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-KO 2 Dspl of SEND appli Korean file version

Detail To display the Korean language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-CS 2 Dspl of SEND appli Czech file version

Detail To display the Czech language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-DA 2 Dspl of SEND appli Danish file version

Detail To display the Danish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-EL 2 Dspl of SEND appli Greek file version

Detail To display the Greek language file version of the SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-ET 2 Dspl of SEND appli Estonian file version

Detail To display the Estonian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-FI 2 Dspl of SEND appli Finnish file version

Detail To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-HU 2 Dspl of SEND appli Hungarian file ver

Detail To display the Hungarian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
789
8. Service Mode
SEND-NL 2 Dspl of SEND appli Dutch file version
Detail To display the Dutch language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-NO 2 Dspl of SEND appli Norwegian file ver

Detail To display the Norwegian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-PL 2 Dspl of SEND appli Polish file version

Detail To display the Polish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-PT 2 Dspl of SEND appli Portuguese file ver

Detail To display the Portuguese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-RU 2 Dspl of SEND appli Russian file version

Detail To display the Russian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-SL 2 Dspl of SEND appli Slovenian file ver

Detail To display the Slovenian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-SV 2 Dspl of SEND appli Swedish file version

Detail To display the Swedish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-ID 2 Dspl of SEND appli Indonesian file ver

Detail To display the Indonesian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-BU 2 Dspl of SEND appli Bulgarian file ver

Detail To display the Bulgarian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
790
8. Service Mode
SEND-CR 2 Dspl of SEND appli Croatian file version
Detail To display the Croatian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-RM 2 Dspl of SEND appli Romanian file version

Detail To display the Romanian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-SK 2 Dspl of SEND appli Slovak file version

Detail To display the Slovak language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-TK 2 Dspl of SEND appli Turkish file version

Detail To display the Turkish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-CA 2 Dspl of SEND appli Catalan file version

Detail To display the Catalan language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-TH 2 Dspl of SEND appli Thai file version

Detail To display the Thai language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-VN 2 Dspl of SEND appli Vietnamese file ver

Detail To display the Vietnamese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-AR 2 Dspl of SEND appli Arabic file ver

Detail To display the Arabic language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-MS 2 Dspl of SEND appli Malay file ver

Detail To display the Malay language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
791
8. Service Mode
SEND-HI 2 Dspl of SEND appli Hindi file ver
Detail To display the Hindi language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-EU 2 Dspl of SEND appli Euskera file ver

Detail To display the Euskera language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
INTRO-FR 1 Dspl of usful feat intro French file ver

Detail To display the version of French language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-IT 1 Dspl useful feat intro Italian file ver

Detail To display the version of Italian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-DE 1 Dspl of usful feat intro German file ver

Detail To display the version of German language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-ES 1 Dspl useful feat intro Spanish file ver

Detail To display the version of Spanish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-ZH 2 Useful feat intro Chinese file ver: smpl

Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file of Introduction to Useful Features
application.
INTRO-TW 2 Useful feat intro Chinese file ver: trad

Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file of Introduction to Useful Features
application.
792
8. Service Mode
INTRO-KO 2 Dspl of usful feat intro Korean file ver
Detail To display the version of Korean language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-CS 2 Dspl of useful feat intro Czech file ver

Detail To display the version of Czech language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-DA 2 Dspl of usful feat intro Danish file ver

Detail To display the version of Danish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-EL 2 Dspl of useful feat intro Greek file ver

Detail To display the version of Greek language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-ET 2 Dspl useful feat intro Estonian file ver

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-FI 2 Dspl useful feat intro Finnish file ver

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-HU 2 Dspl usful feat intro Hungarian file ver

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-NL 2 Dspl of useful feat intro Dutch file ver

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-NO 2 Dspl usful feat intro Norwegian file ver

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
793
8. Service Mode
INTRO-PL 2 Dspl of usful feat intro Polish file ver
Detail To display the version of Polish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-PT 2 Dspl usful feat intro Portuguese filever

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-RU 2 Dspl useful feat intro Russian file ver

Detail To display the version of Russian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-SL 2 Dspl usful feat intro Slovenian file ver

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-SV 2 Dspl useful feat intro Swedish file ver

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-ID 2 Dspl of useful feat intro Indon file ver

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-BU 2 Dspl usful feat intro Bulgarian file ver

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-CR 2 Dspl useful feat intro Croatian file ver

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-RM 2 Dspl useful feat intro Romanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Romanian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
794
8. Service Mode
INTRO-SK 2 Dspl of usful feat intro Slovak file ver
Detail To display the version of Slovak language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-TK 2 Dspl useful feat intro Turkish file ver

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-CA 2 Dspl useful feat intro Catalan file ver

Detail To display the version of Catalan language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-TH 2 Dspl useful feat intro Thai file version

Detail To display the version of Thai language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-VN 2 Useful feat intro Vietnamese file ver

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-AR 2 Dspl useful func intro Arabic file ver

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-MS 2 Dspl useful func intro Malay file ver

Detail To display the version of Malay language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-HI 2 Dspl useful func intro Hindi file ver

Detail To display the version of Hindi language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
INTRO-EU 2 Dspl useful func intro Euskera file ver

Detail To display the version of Euskera language file of Introduction to Useful Features application.
795
8. Service Mode
CSTMN-FR 1 Dspl of custom menu French file version
Detail To display the version of French language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-IT 1 Dspl of custom menu Italian file version

Detail To display the version of Italian language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-DE 1 Dspl of custom menu German file version

Detail To display the version of German language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-ES 1 Dspl of custom menu Spanish file version

Detail To display the version of Spanish language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-ZH 2 Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver: smpl

Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-TW 2 Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver:trad

Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-KO 2 Dspl of custom menu Korean file version

Detail To display the version of Korean language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-CS 2 Dspl of custom menu Czech file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-DA 2 Dspl of custom menu Danish file version

Detail To display the version of Danish language file for custom menu application.
796
8. Service Mode
CSTMN-EL 2 Dspl of custom menu Greek file version
Detail To display the version of Greek language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-ET 2 Dspl of custom menu Estonian file ver

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-FI 2 Dspl of custom menu Finnish file version

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-HU 2 Dspl of custom menu Hungarian file ver

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-NL 2 Dspl of custom menu Dutch file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-NO 2 Dspl of custom menu Norwegian file ver

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-PL 2 Dspl of custom menu Polish file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-PT 2 Dspl of custom menu Portuguese file ver

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-RU 2 Dspl of custom menu Russian file version

Detail To display the version of Russian language file for custom menu application.
797
8. Service Mode
CSTMN-SL 2 Dspl of custom menu Slovenian file ver
Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-SV 2 Dspl of custom menu Swedish file version

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-ID 2 Dspl of custom menu Indonesian file ver

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-BU 2 Dspl of custom menu Bulgarian file ver

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-CR 2 Dspl of custom menu Croatian file ver

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-RM 2 Dspl of custom menu Romanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-SK 2 Dspl of custom menu Slovak file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-TK 2 Dspl of custom menu Turkish file version

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-CA 2 Dspl of custom menu Catalan file version

Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for custom menu application.
798
8. Service Mode
CSTMN-TH 2 Dspl of custom menu Thai file version
Detail To display the version of Thai language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-VN 2 Dspl of custom menu Vietnamese file ver

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-AR 2 Dspl of custom menu Arabic file ver

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-MS 2 Dspl of custom menu Malay file ver

Detail To display the version of Malay language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-HI 2 Dspl of custom menu Hindi file ver

Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for custom menu application.
CSTMN-EU 2 Dspl of custom menu Euskera file ver

Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for custom menu application.
ACSBT-FR 1 Dspl of accessibility French file ver

Detail To display the version of French language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-IT 1 Dspl of accessibility Italian file ver

Detail To display the version of Italian language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-DE 1 Dspl of accessibility German file ver

Detail To display the version of German language file for Accessibility application.
799
8. Service Mode
ACSBT-ES 1 Dspl of accessibility Spanish file ver
Detail To display the version of Spanish language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-ZH 2 Dspl Accessibility Chinese file ver:smpl

Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-TW 2 Dspl accessibility Chinese file ver:trad

Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-KO 2 Dspl of accessibility Korean file ver

Detail To display the version of Korean language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-CS 2 Dspl of accessibility Czech file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-DA 2 Dspl of accessibility Danish file ver

Detail To display the version of Danish language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-EL 2 Dspl of accessibility Greek file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-ET 2 Dspl of accessibility Estonian file ver

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-FI 2 Dspl of accessibility Finnish file ver

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for Accessibility application.
800
8. Service Mode
ACSBT-HU 2 Dspl of accessibility Hungarian file ver
Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-NL 2 Dspl of accessibility Dutch file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-NO 2 Dspl of accessibility Norwegian file ver

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-PL 2 Dspl of accessibility Polish file ver

Detail To display the version of Polish language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-PT 2 Dspl accessibility Portuguese file ver

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-RU 2 Dspl of accessibility Russian file ver

Detail To display the version of Russian language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-SL 2 Dspl of accessibility Slovenian file ver

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-SV 2 Dspl of accessibility Swedish file ver

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-ID 2 Dspl accessibility Indonesian file ver

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for Accessibility application.
801
8. Service Mode
ACSBT-BU 2 Dspl of accessibility Bulgarian file ver
Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-CR 2 Dspl of accessibility Croatian file ver

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-RM 2 Dspl of accessibility Romanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-SK 2 Dspl accessibility Slovak file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-TK 2 Dspl of accessibility Turkish file ver

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-CA 2 Dspl of accessibility Catalan file ver

Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-TH 2 Dspl of accessibility Thai file version

Detail To display the version of Thai language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-VN 2 Dspl accessibility Vietnamese file ver

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-AR 2 Dspl of accessibility Arabic file ver

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file for Accessibility application.
802
8. Service Mode
ACSBT-MS 2 Dspl of accessibility Malay file ver
Detail To display the version of Malay language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-HI 2 Dspl of accessibility Hindi file ver

Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-EU 2 Dspl of accessibility Euskera file ver

Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for Accessibility application.
ERS-FR 1 Display of ERS French file version

Detail To display the version of French language file for ERS application.
Supplement/Memo ERS: Error Recovery System
ERS-IT 1 Display of ERS Italian file version

Detail To display the version of Italian language file for ERS application.
ERS-DE 1 Display of ERS German file version

Detail To display the version of German language file for ERS application.
ERS-ES 1 Display of ERS Spanish file version

Detail To display the version of Spanish language file for ERS application.
ERS-ZH 2 Display of ERS Chinese file ver:smpl

Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for ERS application.
803
8. Service Mode
ERS-TW 2 Display of ERS Chinese file ver:trad
Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for ERS application.
ERS-KO 2 Display of ERS Korean file version

Detail To display the version of Korean language file for ERS application.
ERS-CS 2 Display of ERS Czech file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file for ERS application.
ERS-DA 2 Display of ERS Danish file version

Detail To display the version of Danish language file for ERS application.
ERS-EL 2 Display of ERS Greek file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file for ERS application.
ERS-ET 2 Display of ERS Estonian file version

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for ERS application.
ERS-FI 2 Display of ERS Finnish file version

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for ERS application.
804
8. Service Mode
ERS-HU 2 Display of ERS Hungarian file version
Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for ERS application.
ERS-NL 2 Display of ERS Dutch file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for ERS application.
ERS-NO 2 Display of ERS Norwegian file version

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for ERS application.
ERS-PL 2 Display of ERS Polish file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file for ERS application.
ERS-PT 2 Display of ERS Portuguese file ver

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for ERS application.
ERS-RU 2 Display of ERS Russian file version

Detail To display the version of Russian language file for ERS application.
ERS-SL 2 Display of ERS Slovenian file version

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for ERS application.
805
8. Service Mode
ERS-SV 2 Display of ERS Swedish file version
Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for ERS application.
ERS-ID 2 Display of ERS Indonesian file ver

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for ERS application.
ERS-BU 2 Display of ERS Bulgarian file version

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for ERS application.
ERS-CR 2 Display of ERS Croatian file version

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application.
ERS-RM 2 Display of ERS Romanian file version

Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application.
ERS-SK 2 Display of ERS Slovak file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for ERS application.
ERS-TK 2 Display of ERS Turkish file version

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for ERS application.
806
8. Service Mode
ERS-CA 2 Display of ERS Catalan file version
Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for ERS application.
ERS-TH 2 Display of ERS Thai file version

Detail To display the version of Thai language file for ERS application.
ERS-VN 2 Display of ERS Vietnamese file version

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for ERS application.
ERS-AR 2 Display of ERS Arabic file version

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file for ERS application.
BCT 1 Display of self diagnosis tool version

Detail To display the version of self diagnosis tool.
LANG-TH 2 Display of Thai language file ver

Detail To display the version of Thai language file.
LANG-VN 2 Dspl of Vietnamese language file version

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file.
BOX-FR 1 Display of BOX appli French file version

Detail To display the version of French language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
807
8. Service Mode
BOX-IT 1 Dspl of BOX appli Italian file version
Detail To display the version of Italian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-DE 1 Display of BOX appli German file version

Detail To display the version of German language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-ES 1 Dspl of BOX appli Spanish file version

Detail To display the version of Spanish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-ZH 2 Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver:smpl

Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-TW 2 Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver:trad

Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-KO 2 Display of BOX appli Korean file version

Detail To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-CS 2 Display of BOX appli Czech file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-DA 2 Display of BOX appli Danish file version

Detail To display the version of Danish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-EL 2 Display of BOX appli Greek file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
808
8. Service Mode
BOX-ET 2 Dspl of BOX appli Estonian file version
Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-FI 2 Dspl of BOX appli Finnish file version

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-HU 2 Dspl of BOX appli Hungarian file version

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-NL 2 Display of BOX appli Dutch file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-NO 2 Dspl of BOX appli Norwegian file version

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-PL 2 Display of BOX appli Polish file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-PT 2 Display of BOX appli Portuguese file ver

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-RU 2 Dspl of BOX appli Russian file version

Detail To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-SL 2 Dspl of BOX appli Slovenian file version

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
809
8. Service Mode
BOX-SV 2 Dspl of BOX appli Swedish file version
Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-ID 2 Display of BOX appli Indonesian file ver

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-BU 2 Dspl of BOX appli Bulgarian file version

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-CR 2 Dspl of BOX appli Croatian file version

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-RM 2 Dspl of BOX appli Romanian file version

Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-SK 2 Display of BOX appli Slovak file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-TK 2 Dspl of BOX appli Turkish file version

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-CA 2 Dspl of BOX appli Catalan file version

Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-TH 2 Dspl of BOX appli Thai file version

Detail To display the version of Thai language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
810
8. Service Mode
BOX-VN 2 Dspl of BOX appli Vietnamese file ver
Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-AP 1 Display of job hold application version

Detail To display the version of the job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-FR 1 Dspl of job hold French file version

Detail To display the French language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-IT 1 Dspl of job hold Italian file version

Detail To display the Italian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-DE 1 Dspl of job hold German file version

Detail To display the German language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-ES 1 Dspl of job hold Spanish file version

Detail To display the Spanish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-ZH 2 Job hold Chinese file version: smpl

Detail To display the simplified Chinese language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-TW 2 Job hold Chinese file version: trad

Detail To display the traditional Chinese language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-KO 2 Dspl of job hold Korean file version

Detail To display the Korean language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
811
8. Service Mode
HOLD-CS 2 Dspl of job hold Czech file version
Detail To display the Czech language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-DA 2 Dspl of job hold Danish file version

Detail To display the Danish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-EL 2 Dspl of job hold Greek file version

Detail To display the Greek language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-ET 2 Dspl of job hold Estonian file version

Detail To display the Estonian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-FI 2 Dspl of job hold Finnish file version

Detail To display the Finnish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-HU 2 Dspl of job hold Hungarian file version

Detail To display the Hungarian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-NL 2 Dspl of job hold Dutch file version

Detail To display the Dutch language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-NO 2 Dspl of job hold Norwegian file version

Detail To display the Norwegian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-PL 2 Dspl of job hold Polish file version

Detail To display the Polish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
812
8. Service Mode
HOLD-PT 2 Dspl of job hold Portuguese file version
Detail To display the Portuguese language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-RU 2 Dspl of job hold Russian file version

Detail To display the Russian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-SL 2 Dspl of job hold Slovenian file version

Detail To display the Slovenian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-SV 2 Dspl of job hold Swedish file version

Detail To display the Swedish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-BU 2 Dspl of job hold Bulgarian file version

Detail To display the Bulgarian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-CR 2 Dspl of job hold Croatian file version

Detail To display the Croatian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-RM 2 Dspl of job hold Romanian file version

Detail To display the Romanian language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-SK 2 Dspl of job hold Slovak file version

Detail To display the Slovak language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-TK 2 Dspl of job hold Turkish file version

Detail To display the Turkish language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
813
8. Service Mode
HOLD-CA 2 Dspl of job hold Catalan file version
Detail To display the Catalan language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-TH 2 Dspl of job hold Thai file version

Detail To display the Thai language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-VN 2 Dspl of job hold Vietnamese file version

Detail To display the Vietnamese language file version of job hold application (JAVA UI).
IMLUT 1 Dspl image processing coefficient file

Detail To display the version of image processing coefficient.
BOX-AR 2 Dspl of BOX appli Arabic file ver

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-MS 2 Dspl of BOX appli Malay file ver

Detail To display the version of Malay language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-HI 2 Dspl of BOX appli Hindi file ver

Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-EU 2 Dspl of BOX appli Euskera file ver

Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
LANG-AR 2 Dspl of Arabic language file ver

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file.
814
8. Service Mode
LANG-MS 2 Dspl of Malay language file ver
Detail To display the version of Malay language file.
LANG-HI 2 Dspl of Hindi language file ver

Detail To display the version of Hindi language file.
LANG-EU 2 Dspl of Euskera language file ver

Detail To display the version of Euskera language file.
RPTL-CS 2 Dspl RUI Portal Czech file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-DA 2 Dspl RUI Portal Danish file version

Detail To display the version of Danish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-EL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Greek file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-ET 2 Dspl RUI Portal Estonian file version

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-FI 2 Dspl RUI Portal Finnish file version

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-HU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Hungarian file version

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
815
8. Service Mode
RPTL-NL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Dutch file version
Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-NO 2 Dspl RUI Portal Norwegian file version

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-PL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Polish file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-PT 2 Dspl RUI Portal Portuguese file version

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-RU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Russian file version

Detail To display the version of Russian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-SL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Slovenian file version

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-SV 2 Dspl RUI Portal Swedish file version

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-ID 2 Dspl RUI Portal Indonesian file version

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-BU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Bulgarian file version

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
816
8. Service Mode
RPTL-CR 2 Dspl RUI Portal Croatian file version
Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-RM 2 Dspl RUI Portal Romanian file version

Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-SK 2 Dspl RUI Portal Slovak file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-TK 2 Dspl RUI Portal Turkish file version

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-CA 2 Dspl RUI Portal Catalan file version

Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-TH 2 Dspl RUI Portal Thai file version

Detail To display the version of Thai language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-VN 2 Dspl RUI Portal Vietnamese file version

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
BF-PASS 1 Display of BF-CONT firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Buffer Pass Unit Controller PCB.
SORT-SLV 1 Dspl of FIN-CONT (Sub) firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB (Sub).
817
8. Service Mode
CONT-PF 1 Display of Controller firmware version
Detail To display the platform version of the controller.
Use Case When checking the platform version at upgrade/problem occurrence
PPA-AR 2 Dspl of PPA appli Arabic file version

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
"--.--" is displayed when no file is found.
Supplement/Memo PPA (Personal Print Application): A function to hold print job. It contains the function of secured
print.
PPA-BU 2 Dspl of PPA appli Bulgarian file version

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-CA 2 Dspl of PPA appli Catalan file version

Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-CR 2 Dspl of PPA appli Croatian file version

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-CS 2 Dspl of PPA appli Czech file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
818
8. Service Mode
PPA-DA 2 Dspl of PPA appli Danish file version
Detail To display the version of Danish language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-DE 1 Dspl of PPA appli German file version

Detail To display the version of German language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-EL 2 Dspl of PPA appli Greek file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file for the PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-ES 1 Dspl of PPA appli Spanish file version

Detail To display the version of Spanish language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-ET 2 Dspl of PPA appli Estonian file version

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-EU 2 Dspl of PPA appli Euskera file version

Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
819
8. Service Mode
PPA-FI 2 Dspl of PPA appli Finnish file version
Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-FR 1 Display of PPA appli French file version

Detail To display the version of French language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-HI 2 Display of PPA appli Hindi file version

Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-HU 2 Dspl of PPA appli Hungarian file version

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-ID 2 Dspl PPA appli Indonesian file version

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-IT 1 Dspl of PPA appli Italian file version

Detail To display the version of Italian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
820
8. Service Mode
PPA-KO 2 Display of PPA appli Korean file version
Detail To display the version of Korean language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-MS 2 Display of PPA appli Malay file version

Detail To display the version of Malay language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-NL 2 Display of PPA appli Dutch file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-NO 2 Dspl of PPA appli Norwegian file version

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-PL 2 Display of PPA appli Polish file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-PT 2 Dspl PPA appli Portuguese file version

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
821
8. Service Mode
PPA-RM 2 Dspl of PPA appli Romanian file version
Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-RU 2 Dspl of PPA appli Russian file version

Detail To display the version of Russian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-SK 2 Display of PPA appli Slovak file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-SL 2 Dspl of PPA appli Slovenian file version

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-SV 2 Dspl of PPA appli Swedish file version

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-TH 2 Display of PPA appli Thai file version

Detail To display the version of Thai language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
822
8. Service Mode
PPA-TK 2 Dspl of PPA appli Turkish file version
Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-TW 2 Dspl of PPA appli Chinese file ver: trad

Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-VN 2 Display of PPA appli Vietnamese file ver

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-ZH 2 Dspl of PPA appli Chinese file ver: smpl

Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
DEA-AR 2 Dspl of mobile appli Arabic file version

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-BU 2 Dspl mobile appli Bulgarian file version

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
823
8. Service Mode
DEA-CA 2 Dspl mobile appli Catalan file version
Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-CR 2 Dspl mobile appli Croatian file version

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-CS 2 Dspl of mobile appli Czech file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-DA 2 Dspl of mobile appli Danish file version

Detail To display the version of Danish language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-DE 2 Dspl of mobile appli German file version

Detail To display the version of German language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-EL 2 Dspl of mobile appli Greek file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file for the mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-ES 2 Dspl mobile appli Spanish file version

Detail To display the version of Spanish language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
824
8. Service Mode
DEA-ET 2 Dspl mobile appli Estonian file version
Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-EU 2 Dspl mobile appli Euskera file version

Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-FI 2 Dspl mobile appli Finnish file version

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-FR 2 Dspl of mobile appli French file version

Detail To display the version of French language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-HI 2 Dspl of mobile appli Hindi file version

Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-HU 2 Dspl mobile appli Hungarian file version

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-ID 2 Dspl of mobile appli Indonesian file ver

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
825
8. Service Mode
DEA-IT 2 Dspl mobile appli Italian file version
Detail To display the version of Italian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-KO 2 Dspl of mobile appli Korean file version

Detail To display the version of Korean language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-MS 2 Dspl of mobile appli Malay file version

Detail To display the version of Malay language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-NL 2 Dspl of mobile appli Dutch file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-NO 2 Dspl mobile appli Norwegian file version

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-PL 2 Dspl of mobile appli Polish file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-PT 2 Dspl of mobile appli Portuguese file ver

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
826
8. Service Mode
DEA-RM 2 Dspl mobile appli Romanian file version
Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-RU 2 Dspl mobile appli Russian file version

Detail To display the version of Russian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-SK 2 Dspl of mobile appli Slovak file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-SL 2 Dspl mobile appli Slovenian file version

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-SV 2 Dspl mobile appli Swedish file version

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-TH 2 Dspl of mobile appli Thai file version

Detail To display the version of Thai language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-TK 2 Dspl mobile appli Turkish file version

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
827
8. Service Mode
DEA-TW 2 Dspl mobile appli Chinese file ver: trad
Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-VN 2 Dspl of mobile appli Vietnamese file ver

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-ZH 2 Dspl mobile appli Chinese file ver: smpl

Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
SYSMO-AR 2 Dspl status mon appli Arabic file ver

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
Supplement/Memo Status monitor application: An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor/Cancel key
is pressed.
SYSMO-BU 2 Dspl status mon appli Bulgarian file ver

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-CA 2 Dspl status mon appli Catalan file ver

Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-CR 2 Dspl status mon appli Croatian file ver

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
828
8. Service Mode
SYSMO-CS 2 Dspl status mon appli Czech file version
Detail To display the version of Czech language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-DA 2 Dspl status mon appli Danish file ver

Detail To display the version of Danish language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-DE 2 Dspl status mon appli German file ver

Detail To display the version of German language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-EL 2 Dspl status mon appli Greek file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file for the status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-ES 2 Dspl status mon appli Spanish file ver

Detail To display the version of Spanish language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-ET 2 Dspl status mon appli Estonian file ver

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
829
8. Service Mode
SYSMO-EU 2 Dspl status mon appli Euskera file ver
Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-FI 2 Dspl status mon appli Finnish file ver

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-FR 2 Dspl status mon appli French file ver

Detail To display the version of French language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-HI 2 Dspl status mon appli Hindi file version

Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-HU 2 Dspl status mon appli Hungarian file ver

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-ID 2 Dspl sta mon appli Indonesian file ver

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
830
8. Service Mode
SYSMO-IT 2 Dspl status mon appli Italian file ver
Detail To display the version of Italian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-KO 2 Dspl status mon appli Korean file ver

Detail To display the version of Korean language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-MS 2 Dspl status mon appli Malay file version

Detail To display the version of Malay language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-NL 2 Dspl status mon appli Dutch file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-NO 2 Dspl status mon appli Norwegian file ver

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-PL 2 Dspl status mon appli Polish file ver

Detail To display the version of Polish language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
831
8. Service Mode
SYSMO-PT 2 Dspl sta mon appli Portuguese file ver
Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-RM 2 Dspl status mon appli Romanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-RU 2 Dspl status mon appli Russian file ver

Detail To display the version of Russian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-SK 2 Dspl status mon appli Slovak file ver

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-SL 2 Dspl status mon appli Slovenian file ver

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-SV 2 Dspl status mon appli Swedish file ver

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
832
8. Service Mode
SYSMO-TH 2 Dspl status mon appli Thai file version
Detail To display the version of Thai language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-TK 2 Dspl status mon appli Turkish file ver

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-TW 2 Dspl sta mon app Chinese file ver: trad

Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-VN 2 Dspl sta mon appli Vietnamese file ver

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-ZH 2 Dspl sta mon app Chinese file ver: smpl

Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
HOLD-AR 2 Dspl of job hold Arabic file version

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file for job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-EU 2 Dspl of job hold Euskera file version

Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for job hold application (JAVA UI).
833
8. Service Mode
HOLD-HI 2 Dspl of job hold Hindi file version
Detail To display the version of Hindi language file for job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-MS 2 Dspl of job hold Malay file version

Detail To display the version of Malay language file for job hold application (JAVA UI).
ACSBT-HE 2 Dspl of accessibility Hebrew file ver

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-LT 2 Dspl accessibility Lithuanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for Accessibility application.
ACSBT-LV 2 Dspl of accessibility Latvian file ver

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for Accessibility application.
BOX-HE 2 Dspl of BOX appli Hebrew file version

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-LT 2 Dspl of BOX appli Lithuanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
BOX-LV 2 Dspl of BOX appli Latvian file version

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
COPY-HE 2 Dspl of COPY appli Hebrew file version

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for COPY application (JAVA UI).
834
8. Service Mode
COPY-LT 2 Dspl of COPY appli Lithuanian file ver
Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for COPY application (JAVA UI).
COPY-LV 2 Dspl of COPY appli Latvian file version

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for COPY application (JAVA UI).
CSTMN-HE 2 Dspl of quick menu Hebrew file version

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for Quick Menu application.
CSTMN-LT 2 Dspl of quick menu Lithuanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for Quick Menu application.
CSTMN-LV 2 Dspl of quick menu Latvian file version

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for Quick Menu application.
DEA-HE 2 Dspl of mobile appli Hebrew file version

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-LT 2 Dspl of mobile appli Lithuanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
DEA-LV 2 Dspl of mobile appli Latvian file ver

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for mobile application (JAVA UI).
835
8. Service Mode
ERS-HE 2 Display of ERS Hebrew file version
Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for ERS application.
ERS-LT 2 Display of ERS Lithuanian file version

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for ERS application.
ERS-LV 2 Display of ERS Latvian file version

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for ERS application.
HOLD-HE 2 Dspl of job hold Hebrew file version

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-LT 2 Dspl of job hold Lithuanian file version

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for job hold application (JAVA UI).
HOLD-LV 2 Dspl of job hold Latvian file version

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for job hold application (JAVA UI).
INTRO-HE 2 Display of Tutorial Hebrew file version

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for Tutorial application.
INTRO-LT 2 Dspl of Tutorial Lithuanian file version

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for Tutorial application.
836
8. Service Mode
INTRO-LV 2 Display of Tutorial Latvian file version
Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for Tutorial application.
LANG-HE 2 Display of Hebrew language file version

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file.
LANG-LT 2 Dspl of Lithuanian language file version

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file.
LANG-LV 2 Display of Latvian language file version

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file.
PPA-HE 2 Display of PPA appli Hebrew file version

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-LT 2 Dspl of PPA appli Lithuanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
PPA-LV 2 Dspl of PPA appli Latvian file version

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for PPA application (JAVA UI).
print.
837
8. Service Mode
SEND-HE 2 Dspl of SEND appli Hebrew file version
Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-LT 2 Dspl of SEND appli Lithuanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for SEND application (JAVA UI).
SEND-LV 2 Dspl of SEND appli Latvian file version

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for SEND application (JAVA UI).
SYSMO-HE 2 Dspl of status mon appli Hebrew file ver

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-LT 2 Dspl status mon app Lithuanian file ver

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
SYSMO-LV 2 Dspl status mon appli Latvian file ver

Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for status monitor application (JAVA UI).
is pressed.
■ USER
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > USER
SPDTYPE 1 Display of engine speed type
Detail To display the engine speed type of this machine.
Use Case When checking the engine speed type
838
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > USER
BRWS-STS 1 Display of service browser ON/OFF
Detail To display whether the service browser can be used.
If the value is 1, [Service Browser] button is displayed on the service mode initial screen.
The value of BRWS-STS switches whenever BRWS-ACT is executed, but ON/OFF of service
browser is enabled after reboot. If the service browser does not start even though the value of
BRWS-STS is 1, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Use Case When checking the usage status of service browser
Caution The value of BRWS-STS is linked with BRWS-ACT, but the service browser cannot start even
though 1 is displayed unless the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: OFF (Only at the time of factory shipment, not connected to the UGW server), 1: ON (Available),
2: OFF (Not available)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUCNTION> INSTALL> BRWS-ACT
■ ACC-STS
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ACC-STS
FEEDER 1 Display of DADF connection state
Detail To display the connecting state of DADF.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and DADF
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
SORTER 1 Connect state of Finisher-related option

Detail To display the connection state of Finisher-related options.
Use Case When checking the connection of Finisher-related options
Display/Adj/Set Range Left column (connection state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 5
1: Without Saddle
2: With Saddle
3 to 5: Not Used
Right column (connection state of Finisher-belonged Puncher): 0 to 4
0: No hole, 1: 2-hole, 2: 2/3-hole, 3: 4-hole, 4: 4-hole (SW)
DECK 1 Dspl of Paper Deck connection state

Detail To display the connecting state of the Paper Deck.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Paper Decks
0: Not connected, 1: Connected, 2 to 4: Not used, 5: Multi-purpose Tray only
CARD 1 Dspl of connection state of Card Reader

Detail To display the connecting state of Card Reader.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Card Reader
0: No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is not available.)
1: Card Reader is not connected, or card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy
is available.)
839
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ACC-STS
RAM 1 Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity
Detail To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When checking the memory capacity of the machine
Unit MB
COINROBO 1 Dspl of Coin Manager connection state

Detail To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin Manager
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
NIB 1 Display of Network PCB connection state

Detail To display the connection state of the Network PCB.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Network PCB
0: Not yet connected, 1: Ethernet PCB connected, 2: Token Ring PCB connected, 3: Ethernet PCB
+ Token Ring PCB connected
NETWARE 1 Install state dspl of NetWare firmware

Detail To display the installation state of the NetWare firmware.
Use Case When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the machine
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
SEND 1 Dspl SEND support PCB installation state

Detail To display the installation state of the PCB that supports SEND function.
If the PCB is installed, SEND function can be used.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the PCB that supports SEND function
HDD 1 Display of HDD model name

Detail To display the model name of HDD.
Use Case When checking the model name of HDD used on the machine
IA-RAM 1 Display of MNCON PCB memory(IA) capacity

Detail To display the memory (IA) capacity of the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB
Unit MB
840
8. Service Mode
■ ANALOG
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ANALOG
TEMP 1 Display of outside temperature
Detail To display the temperature outside the machine.
This is measured by the Environment Sensor 2 that detects the outside air.
Use Case When checking the temperature outside the machine
Unit deg C
Appropriate Target Value 20 - 27
Amount of Change per 1
Unit
HUM 1 Display of outside humidity

Detail To display the humidity outside the machine.
Use Case When checking the humidity outside the machine
Unit %
Unit
ABS-HUM 1 Display of outside moisture content

Detail To display the absolute moisture content outside the machine.
Use Case When checking the moisture content outside the machine
Unit g/kg
Unit
FIX-C 1 Dspl of Fixing Film center temperature

Detail To display the center temperature of the Fixing Film detected by the Main Thermistor 2.
Use Case When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Film
Unit deg C
Unit
FIX-E 1 Dspl of Fixing Heater center temperature

Detail To display the center temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Main Thermistor 1.
Use Case When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Heater
Unit deg C
Unit
841
8. Service Mode
FIX-E2 1 Dspl Fixing Heater front edg temperature
Detail To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Sub Thermistor 1.
Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater
Unit deg C
Unit
TEMP2 1 Display of inside temperature

Detail To display the temperature inside the machine measured by Environment Sensor 1.
Use Case When checking the temperature inside the machine
Unit deg C
Unit
HUM2 1 Display of inside humidity

Detail To display the humidity inside the machine measured by Environment Sensor 1.
Use Case When checking the humidity inside the machine
Unit %
Unit
FIX-E3 1 Dspl Fixing Heater rear edge temperature

Detail To display the rear edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Sub Thermistor 2.
Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater
Unit deg C
Unit
FIX-F 1 Dspl Fixing Film front edge temperature

Detail To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Film detected by the Sub Thermistor 3.
Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Film
Unit deg C
Unit
842
8. Service Mode
FIX-R 1 Dspl Fixing Film rear edge temperature
Detail To display the rear edge temperature of the Fixing Film detected by the Sub Thermistor 4.
Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Film
Unit deg C
Unit
■ CST-STS
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CST-STS
WIDTH-MF 2 Dspl of Multi-Purpose Tray paper width
Detail To display the width (mm) of paper set on the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Use Case When checking the width of paper on the Multi-Purpose Tray
Unit mm
■ HV-STS
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HV-STS
1ATVC-Y 2 Dspl of primary transfer current (Y)
Detail To display the current that flows to the Primary Transfer Roller (Y) by the primary transfer ATVC
control.
The decuple values of the detected value 1, detected value 2 and target value are displayed in
that order from the left.
When the left two values are out of the appropriate target value range (100 to 700), the appropriate
control can be executed by clearing the log information (1TR-CLR).
If they are still out of the appropriate target value range, it may indicate the end of the life of the
Primary Transfer Roller or failure of the Primary Transfer/Bk Developing Charging High-Voltage
PCB.
Use Case When identifying the cause of image failure (including the life of the Primary Transfer Roller)
Unit uA
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> 1TR-CLR
Unit
843
8. Service Mode
1ATVC-M 2 Dspl of primary transfer current (M)
Detail To display the current that flows to the Primary Transfer Roller (M) by the primary transfer ATVC
control.
PCB.
Unit uA
Unit
1ATVC-C 2 Dspl of primary transfer current (C)

Detail To display the current that flows to the Primary Transfer Roller (C) by the primary transfer ATVC
control.
PCB.
Unit uA
Unit
844
8. Service Mode
1ATVC-K4 2 Dspl prmry trns current(Bk):full clr mod
Detail To display the current that flows to the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk) by the primary transfer ATVC
control in color mode.
PCB.
Unit uA
Unit
2ATVC 2 Dspl secondary transfer ATVC tgt current

Detail To display the decuple values of the two target values of the current that flows to the Secondary
Transfer Roller by the secondary transfer ATVC control.
When the left two values are out of the appropriate target value range (110 to 800), it may indicate
that the secondary transfer ATVC control is not executed properly.
The rightmost column is not used (0 is displayed).
Use Case When identifying the cause of image failure
Unit uA
Unit
■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
TARGET-B 2 Shading target value (B)
Detail To display the shading target value of Blue.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 65535 (maximum) is considered a failure of the Reader
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
845
8. Service Mode
TARGET-G 2 Shading target value (G)
Detail To display the shading target value of Green.
Controller PCB.
TARGET-R 2 Shading target value (R)

Detail To display the shading target value of Red.
Controller PCB.
GAIN-OB 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(B):frt

Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller
PCB.
GAIN-OG 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(G):frt

Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
PCB.
846
8. Service Mode
GAIN-OR 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(R):frt
Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
PCB.
GAIN-EB 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(B):frt

Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
PCB.
GAIN-EG 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(G):frt

Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
PCB.
GAIN-ER 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(R):frt

Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
PCB.
847
8. Service Mode
LAMP-BW 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL:B&W, front
Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for front side) in B&W scanning
mode.
Use Case When image failure occurs at front side scanning in black mode
Supplement/Memo LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit.
LAMP-CL 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL:clr, front

Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for front side) in color scanning
mode.
Use Case When image failure occurs at front side scanning in color mode
LAMP2-BW 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL: B&W, back

Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for back side) in B&W scanning
mode.
Use Case When image failure occurs at back side scanning in black mode.
LAMP2-CL 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL: clr, back

Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color scanning
mode.
Use Case When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode
OFST-BW 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value:B&W, front

Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side) in B&W scanning
mode.
OFST-CL 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value:clr, front

Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side) in color scanning
mode.
Use Case When image failure occurs at front side scanning in color mode
848
8. Service Mode
OFST2-BW 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value: B&W, back
Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side) in B&W scanning
mode.
GAIN-BW1 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL1: B&W, frt

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit (for front side).



GAIN2BW1 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL1:B&W, back

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit (for back side).

849
8. Service Mode

GAIN2-OR 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(R):back

Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for back side).
PCB.
GAIN2-OG 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(G):back

Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
PCB.
GAIN2-OB 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(B):back

Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
PCB.
850
8. Service Mode
GAIN2-ER 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(R):back
Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
PCB.
GAIN2-EG 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(G):back

Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
PCB.
GAIN2-EB 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(B):back

Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
PCB.
OFST2-CL 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value:clr, back

Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color scanning
mode.
Use Case When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode
■ DPOT
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DPOT
2TR-PPR 2 For R&D
Unit
2TR-BASE 2 For R&D

Unit
1TR-DC-Y 2 For R&D

Unit
851
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DPOT
1TR-DC-M 2 For R&D
Unit
1TR-DC-C 2 For R&D

Unit
1TR-DC-K 2 For R&D

Unit
CHG-AC-Y 2 For R&D

Unit
CHG-AC-M 2 For R&D

Unit
CHG-AC-C 2 For R&D

Unit
CHG-AC-K 2 For R&D

Unit
LPWR-Y 2 For R&D

LPWR-M 2 For R&D
LPWR-C 2 For R&D
LPWR-K 2 For R&D
PVCONT-Y 2 For R&D
Unit
PVCONT-M 2 For R&D

Unit
PVCONT-C 2 For R&D

Unit
PVCONT-K 2 For R&D

Unit
852
8. Service Mode
■ DENS
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DENS
DENS-Y 1 Dspl of Y developer density change ratio
Detail To display difference between Y-color developer density and the target value in % (percentage).
Intolerable difference will trigger E020. This may be caused by deterioration of the developer,
failure/open circuit of the ATR Sensor or error in toner supply system.
The value is updated upon print operation after power-on.
Use Case - When the density varies dramatically
- When the density is unstable even after gradation correction
Display/Adj/Set Range -7 to 7
Unit %
Appropriate Target Value -4.5 - 4.5
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-Y
Unit
DENS-M 1 Dspl of M developer density change ratio

Detail To display difference between M-color developer density and the target value in % (percentage).
Unit %
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-M
Unit
DENS-C 1 Dspl of C developer density change ratio

Detail To display difference between C-color developer density and the target value in % (percentage).
Unit %
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-C
Unit
853
8. Service Mode
DENS-K 1 Dspl Bk developer density change ratio
Detail To display difference between Bk-color developer density and the target value in % (percentage).
Unit %
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-K
Unit
DENS-S-Y 2 Display of Y-color patch image density

Detail To display the Y-color patch image density detected by the Patch Sensor.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem
DENS-S-M 2 Display of M-color patch image density

Detail To display the M-color patch image density detected by the Patch Sensor.
DENS-S-C 2 Display of C-color patch image density

Detail To display the C-color patch image density detected by the Patch Sensor.
DENS-S-K 2 Display of Bk-color patch image density

Detail To display the Bk-color patch image density detected by the Patch Sensor.
D-Y-TRGT 2 Dspl of Y patch target density: ATR ctrl

Detail To display the target density for Y patch image created by ATR control.
854
8. Service Mode
D-M-TRGT 2 Dspl of M patch target density: ATR ctrl
Detail To display the target density for M patch image created by ATR control.
D-C-TRGT 2 Dspl of C patch target density: ATR ctrl

Detail To display the target density for C patch image created by ATR control.
SGNL-Y 1 Display of Y-color developer density

Detail To display the measured value of Y-color developer density.
The density is measured with the ATR Sensor for each job. The value is updated upon print
operation after power-on.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-Y
SGNL-M 1 Display of M-color developer density

Detail To display the measured value of M-color developer density.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-M
SGNL-C 1 Display of C-color developer density

Detail To display the measured value of C-color developer density.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-C
SGNL-K 1 Display of Bk-color developer density

Detail To display the measured value of Bk-color developer density.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-K
855
8. Service Mode
DEV-DC-Y 2 Display of developing DC bias (Y)
Detail To display the Y developing DC bias Vdc applied at the latest.
Use Case - When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence
- When fogging occurs/is deteriorated
Display/Adj/Set Range -800 to -200
Unit V
Unit
DEV-DC-M 2 Display of developing DC bias (M)

Detail To display the M developing DC bias Vdc applied at the latest.
Unit V
Unit
DEV-DC-C 2 Display of developing DC bias (C)

Detail To display the C developing DC bias Vdc applied at the latest.
Unit V
Unit
DEV-DC-K 2 Display of developing DC bias (Bk)

Detail To display the Bk developing DC bias Vdc applied at the latest.
Unit V
Unit
CHG-DC-Y 2 Dspl Y-color primary charge DC voltage

Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of Y-color.
Use Case When decrease in density/fogging occurs
Unit V
Appropriate Target Value -900 - 400
Unit
856
8. Service Mode
CHG-DC-M 2 Dspl M-color primary charge DC voltage
Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of M-color.
Unit V
Unit
CHG-DC-C 2 Dspl C-color primary charge DC voltage

Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of C-color.
Unit V
Unit
CHG-DC-K 2 Dspl Bk-color primary charge DC voltage

Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of Bk-color.
Unit V
Unit
D-K-TRGT 2 Dspl of Bk patch target density:ATR ctrl

Detail To display the target density for Bk patch image created by ATR control.
D-CRNT-P 2 For R&D

D-CRNT-S 2 For R&D
DENS-Y-H 2 Dspl of Y-clr TD ratio log: ATR control
Detail To display the latest 8 Y-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected by the ATR Sensor at ATR
control.
Sharp change in values may indicate open circuit/failure of ATR Sensor, whereas gradual change
in values may indicate failure in toner supply system.
Use Case When checking toner density in the Developing Assembly at low density or fogging deterioration
857
8. Service Mode
DENS-M-H 2 Dspl of M-clr TD ratio log: ATR control
Detail To display the latest 8 M-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected by the ATR Sensor at ATR
control.
DENS-C-H 2 Dspl of C-clr TD ratio log: ATR control

Detail To display the latest 8 C-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected by the ATR Sensor at ATR
control.
DS-S-Y-H 2 Dspl of Y-color patch image density log

Detail To display the latest 8 Y-patch image density log data.
It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence, etc.
Sharp change in values may indicate the failure in Patch Sensor, Shutter or laser, whereas gradual
change may indicate failure in toner supply system. This is particularly caused by Patch Sensor.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of E020
DS-S-M-H 2 Dspl of M-color patch image density log

Detail To display the latest 8 M-patch image density log data.
DS-S-C-H 2 Dspl of C-color patch image density log

Detail To display the latest 8 C-patch image density log data.
858
8. Service Mode
DS-S-K-H 2 Dspl of Bk-color patch image density log
Detail To display the latest 8 Bk-patch image density log data.
P-LED-DA 2 Dspl Patch Sensor LED intensity: P-wave

Detail To display the P-wave light intensity of the Patch Sensor LED.
The soiled Sensor window or soiled ITB (ITB cleaning failure) is suspected if the background light
intensity (P-wave) is too low even with sufficient LED light intensity.
Use Case When checking the Patch Sensor
SPL-LG-Y 2 Display of Y-color toner supply log

Detail To display the latest 8 Y-toner supply log data.
Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper.
Use Case When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence, low density or fogging deterioration
Appropriate Target Value 0-4
SPL-LG-M 2 Display of M-color toner supply log

Detail To display the latest 8 M-toner supply log data.
SPL-LG-C 2 Display of C-color toner supply log

Detail To display the latest 8 C-toner supply log data.
DENS-K-H 2 Dspl of Bk-clr TD ratio log: ATR control

Detail To display the latest 8 Bk-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected by the ATR Sensor at ATR
control.
859
8. Service Mode
SPL-LG-K 2 Display of Bk-color toner supply log
Detail To display the latest 8 Bk-toner supply log data.
Use Case When checking the toner supply status at low density or fogging deterioration
P-LEDDAS 2 Dspl Patch Sensor LED intensity: S-wave

Detail To display the S-wave light intensity of the Patch Sensor LED.
The soiled sensor window or soiled ITB (ITB cleaning failure) is suspected if the sensor output (S-
wave) is too low although the LED light intensity is sufficient.
Use Case When checking the Patch Sensor
■ MISC
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > MISC
ENV-TR 1 Dspl of environment: sec trns ATVC ctrl
Detail To display the environment (moisture content) at the time of the latest secondary transfer ATVC
control execution.
Use Case When adjusting the paper allotted voltage in secondary transfer ATVC control
1: Low humidity, 2: Normal humidity, 3: High humidity
ITB-POS 1 Dspl ITB reference position: black mode

Detail To display the reference position of the ITB displacement correction control (black mode).
The initial adjustment result is displayed right after execution of ITB-INIT, but it is changed as the
machine operates.
As the value is closer to 0, the ITB is likely to be a state of equilibrium.
Use Case - At installation
- At replacement of ITB-related parts
Unit pulse
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ITB-INIT
COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC> ITB-POS2
Unit
860
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > MISC
ITB-POS2 1 Dspl ITB reference position: color mode
Detail To display the reference position of the ITB displacement correction control (color mode).
A value at initial adjustment by ITB-INIT is displayed. It will not be changed until next execution of
ITB-INIT.
As the value is closer to 0, the ITB is likely to be a state of equilibrium.
Unit pulse
COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC> ITB-POS
Unit
TNRB-IDY 1 Display of Y-color Toner Container ID

Detail To display the ID of Y-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine
Use Case When checking whether the barcode ID on the Toner Container is read correctly
Display/Adj/Set Range 12-digit decimal number
TNRB-IDM 1 Display of M-color Toner Container ID

Detail To display the ID of M-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine
TNRB-IDC 1 Display of C-color Toner Container ID

Detail To display the ID of C-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine
TNRB-IDK 1 Display of Bk-color Toner Container ID

Detail To display the ID of Bk-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine
FX-ID 2 Display of Fixing Unit ID

Detail To display the ID of the Fixing Unit that is installed to the machine.
Use Case When checking the ID of the Fixing Unit
861
8. Service Mode
■ HT-C
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HT-C
TGT-A-Y 2 Multi tone scrnA Y-patch tgt VL: H-SPD
Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at high speed.
Among 10-gradation patch images formed by each dithering method (error diffusion/low screen
ruling/high screen ruling), 5th patch image is the target.
When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto
gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not corrected.
Use Case When hue variation occurs
TGT-A-M 2 Multi tone scrnA M-patch tgt VL: H-SPD

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at high
speed.
TGT-A-C 2 Multi tone scrnA C-patch tgt VL: H-SPD

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at high
speed.
TGT-A-K 2 Multi tone scrnA C-patch tgt VL: H-SPD

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at high
speed.
862
8. Service Mode
TGT-B-Y 2 Multi tone scrnB Y-patch tgt VL: H-SPD
Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at high speed.
TGT-B-M 2 Multi tone scrnB M-patch tgt VL: H-SPD

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at high
speed.
TGT-B-C 2 Multi tone scrnB C-patch tgt VL: H-SPD

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at high
speed.
TGT-B-K 2 Multi tone scrnB Bk-patch tgt VL: H-SPD

Detail To display the Bk-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at high
speed.
863
8. Service Mode
TGT-C-Y 2 Multi tone scrnC Y-patch tgt VL: H-SPD
Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at high
speed.
TGT-C-M 2 Multi tone scrnC M-patch tgt VL: H-SPD

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at high
speed.
TGT-C-C 2 Multi tone scrnC C-patch tgt VL: H-SPD

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at high
speed.
TGT-C-K 2 Multi tone scrnC Bk-patch tgt VL: H-SPD

Detail To display the Bk-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at high
speed.
SGNL-A-Y 2 For R&D

SGNL-A-M 2 For R&D
SGNL-A-C 2 For R&D
SGNL-A-K 2 For R&D
SGNL-B-Y 2 For R&D
SGNL-B-M 2 For R&D
864
8. Service Mode
SGNL-B-C 2 For R&D
SGNL-B-K 2 For R&D
SGNL-C-Y 2 For R&D
SGNL-C-M 2 For R&D
SGNL-C-K 2 For R&D
SGNL-C-C 2 For R&D
TGT-A-Y2 2 Multi tone scrnA Y-patch tgt VL: M-SPD
Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
TGT-A-M2 2 Multi tone scrnA M-patch tgt VL: M-SPD

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
TGT-A-C2 2 Multi tone scrnA C-patch tgt VL: M-SPD

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
TGT-A-K2 2 Multi tone scrnA C-patch tgt VL: M-SPD

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
865
8. Service Mode
TGT-A-Y3 2 Multi tone scrnA Y-patch tgt VL: L-SPD
Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at low speed.
TGT-A-M3 2 Multi tone scrnA M-patch tgt VL: L-SPD

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at low speed.
TGT-A-C3 2 Multi tone scrnA C-patch tgt VL: L-SPD

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at low speed.
TGT-A-K3 2 Multi tone scrnA Bk-patch tgt VL: L-SPD

Detail To display the Bk-color patch target value of screen A in real-time multiple tone control at low
speed.
TGT-B-Y3 2 Multi tone scrnB Y-patch tgt VL: L-SPD

Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at low speed.
TGT-B-M3 2 Multi tone scrnB M-patch tgt VL: L-SPD

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at low speed.
866
8. Service Mode
TGT-B-C3 2 Multi tone scrnB C-patch tgt VL: L-SPD
Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at low speed.
TGT-B-K3 2 Multi tone scrnB Bk-patch tgt VL: L-SPD

Detail To display the Bk-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at low
speed.
TGT-B-Y2 2 Multi tone scrnB Y-patch tgt VL: M-SPD

Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
TGT-B-M2 2 Multi tone scrnB M-patch tgt VL: M-SPD

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
TGT-B-C2 2 Multi tone scrnB C-patch tgt VL: M-SPD

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
867
8. Service Mode
TGT-B-K2 2 Multi tone scrnB Bk-patch tgt VL: M-SPD
Detail To display the Bk-color patch target value of screen B in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
TGT-C-Y2 2 Multi tone scrnC Y-patch tgt VL: M-SPD

Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
TGT-C-M2 2 Multi tone scrnC M-patch tgt VL: M-SPD

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
TGT-C-C2 2 Multi tone scrnC C-patch tgt VL: M-SPD

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
868
8. Service Mode
TGT-C-K2 2 Multi tone scrnC Bk-patch tgt VL: M-SPD
Detail To display the Bk-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at middle
speed.
TGT-C-Y3 2 Multi tone scrnC Y-patch tgt VL: L-SPD

Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at low speed.
TGT-C-M3 2 Multi tone scrnC M-patch tgt VL: L-SPD

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at low speed.
TGT-C-C3 2 Multi tone scrnC C-patch tgt VL: L-SPD

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at low speed.
TGT-C-K3 2 Multi tone scrnC Bk-patch tgt VL: L-SPD

Detail To display the Bk-color patch target value of screen C in real-time multiple tone control at low
speed.
869
8. Service Mode
■ DRSTS-Y
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DRSTS-Y
DR-I-D-Y 1 Dspl of Drum Unit (Y) installed date
Detail To display the installed date of the Drum Unit (Y).
At initial installation, the date of the first power supply after assembling at factory is displayed.
When the Drum Unit is replaced, the date of the first power supply after replacement is displayed.
Use Case When checking the installed date of the Drum Unit
Caution The date may differ from that at the location due to compliance with GMT.
DRM-ID-Y 1 Display of Drum Unit (Y) ID

Detail To display the ID of the Drum Unit (Y) that is installed to the machine.
Use Case - When outputting the drum report
- When checking the ID of the Drum Unit
DR-O-D-Y 1 Dspl of Drum Unit (Y) removed date

Detail To display the removed date of the Drum Unit (Y).
The date on which the machine recognized that the ID of the replaced Drum Unit is different is
displayed.
D-ST-Y 1 Display of Drum Unit (Y) status

Detail To display the status of the Drum Unit (Y).
- When checking the state of the Drum Unit
INI-S-Y 1 Dspl of Drum Unit installed station: Y

Detail To display the color of the station where the Drum Unit was installed first.
- When checking the station information
1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk, 0: Others
REP-S-Y 1 Dspl Drum Unit replacement station: Y

Detail To display the color of the station where the Drum Unit has been replaced.
1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk, 0: Others
870
8. Service Mode
■ DRSTS-C
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DRSTS-C
DR-I-D-C 1 Dspl of Drum Unit (C) installed date
Detail To display the installed date of the Drum Unit (C).
DRM-ID-C 1 Display of Drum Unit (C) ID

Detail To display the ID of the Drum Unit (C) that is installed to the machine.
DR-O-D-C 1 Dspl of Drum Unit (C) removed date

Detail To display the removed date of the Drum Unit (C).
displayed.
D-ST-C 1 Display of Drum Unit (C) status

Detail To display the status of the Drum Unit (C).
INI-S-C 1 Dspl of Drum Unit installed station: C

1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk, 0: Others
REP-S-C 1 Dspl Drum Unit replacement station: C

1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk, 0: Others
871
8. Service Mode
■ DRSTS-M
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DRSTS-M
DR-I-D-M 1 Dspl of Drum Unit (M) installed date
Detail To display the installed date of the Drum Unit (M).
DRM-ID-M 1 Display of Drum Unit (M) ID

Detail To display the ID of the Drum Unit (M) that is installed to the machine.
DR-O-D-M 1 Dspl of Drum Unit (M) removed date

Detail To display the removed date of the Drum Unit (M).
displayed.
D-ST-M 1 Display of Drum Unit (M) status

Detail To display the status of the Drum Unit (M).
INI-S-M 1 Dspl of Drum Unit installed station: M

1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk, 0: Others
REP-S-M 1 Dspl Drum Unit replacement station: M

1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk, 0: Others
872
8. Service Mode
■ DRSTS-K
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DRSTS-K
DR-I-D-K 1 Dspl of Drum Unit (Bk) installed date
Detail To display the installed date of the Drum Unit (Bk).
DRM-ID-K 1 Display of Drum Unit (Bk) ID

Detail To display the ID of the Drum Unit (Bk) that is installed to the machine.
DR-O-D-K 1 Dspl of Drum Unit (Bk) removed date

Detail To display the removed date of the Drum Unit (Bk).
displayed.
D-ST-K 1 Display of Drum Unit (Bk) status

Detail To display the status of the Drum Unit (Bk).
INI-S-K 1 Dspl of Drum Unit installed station: Bk

1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk, 0: Others
REP-S-K 1 Dspl Drum Unit replacement station: Bk

1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk, 0: Others
I/O (I/O display mode)

■ Host Machine (DC-CON > P005 to P035)
Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks
P005 15-0 - - -
P006 15-0 - - -
873
8. Service Mode

P007 15-0 - - -
P008 15-0 - - -
P009 15-0 - - -
P010 15-0 - - -
P011 15-0 - - -
P012 15-0 - - -
P013 15-0 - - -
P014 15-0 - - -
P015 15-0 - - -
P016 15-0 - - -
P017 15 Toner Container Outer Cover Sensor PS17 L: OPEN
14 Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (Bk) SW14 L: OPEN
13 Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (C) SW13 L: OPEN
12 Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (M) SW12 L: OPEN
11 Bottle Cover Open/Close Switch (Y) SW11 L: OPEN
10 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 PS22 H: ON
9 Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 PS23 H: ON
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P018 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 Second & Third Delivery Door Sensor PS21 L: OPEN
5 Front Door Sensor PS18 L: OPEN
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P019 15-0 - - -
P020 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB (Sensor 5) UN60_5 H: ON
874
8. Service Mode

P020 4 ITB Displacement Sensor PCB (Sensor 4) UN60_4 H: ON
0 ITB Steering Sensor PS24 H: ON
P021 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Shutter Position Sensor PS32 H: ON
0 Shutter HP Sensor PS31 H: ON
P022 15 Multi-Purpose Tray HP Sensor PS73 H: ON
14 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller HP Sensor PS78 H: ON
13 Inner Delivery Sensor PS37 H: ON
12 - - -
11 Cassette 2 Pickup Nip Sensor PS75 H: ON
10 Cassette 1 Pickup Nip Sensor PS74 H: ON
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Transparency Registration Sensor PS77 H: ON
0 Multi-Purpose Tray Pullout Sensor PS72 H: ON
P023 15 Pre-Reverse Sensor PS57 H: ON
14 Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34 H: ON
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 Third Delivery Sensor PS43 H: ON
9 Second Delivery Sensor PS42 H: ON
8 Reverse Sensor PS39 H: ON
7 Duplex Inlet Sensor PS40 H: ON
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 Duplex Paper Sensor PS38 H: ON
1 Fixing Arch Sensor 2 PS36 H: ON
0 Fixing Arch Sensor 1 PS35 H: ON
P024 15 - - -
875
8. Service Mode

P024 14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 Registration Sensor PS33 H: ON
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P025 15-0 - - -
P026 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 First Delivery Sensor PS41 L: ON
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 Second Delivery Tray Full Sensor PS45 L: Full
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P027 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS53 H: ON
11 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B PS54 H: ON
8 Cassette 1 Size Switch_SW0 SW6_0 L: ON
5 Cassette 2 Size Switch A_SW0 SW8_0 L: ON
2 Cassette 2 Size Switch B_SW0 SW9_0 L: ON
P028 15 Cassette 2 Paper Surface Sensor PS69 L: Paper present
14 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor PS50 L: Paper present
13 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor PS68 L: Paper present
12 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS49 L: Paper present
11 Right Lower Door Sensor PS19 L: OPEN
10 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2 PS71 H: ON
876
8. Service Mode

P028 9 Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1 PS70 H: ON
8 - - -
7 Right Door Sensor PS20 L: OPEN
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P029 15 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Bk) TS4 H: ON
14 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (C) TS3 H: ON
13 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (M) TS2 H: ON
12 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Y) TS1 H: ON
11 Bottle Position Sensor (Bk) PS67 H: ON
10 Bottle Position Sensor (C) PS66 H: ON
9 Bottle Position Sensor (M) PS65 H: ON
8 Bottle Position Sensor (Y) PS64 H: ON
7 Laser Shutter Sensor PS29 H: ON
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P030 15-0 - - -
P031 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Bottle Rotation Sensor (C) PS62 L: ON
0 - - -
P032 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
877
8. Service Mode

P032 4 - - -
3 Toner Supply Sensor (M) PS2 L: ON
2 - - -
1 Waste Toner Container Detection Switch SW10 H: ON
0 First Delivery Tray Full Sensor PS44 L: Full
P033 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 Bottle Rotation Sensor (M) PS61 L: ON
12 - - -
11 Toner Supply Sensor (Y) PS1 L: ON
10 - - -
9 Bottle Rotation Sensor (Y) PS60 L: ON
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P034 15 Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) PS4 L: ON
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 Bottle Rotation Sensor (Bk) PS63 L: ON
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P035 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 Toner Supply Sensor (C) PS3 L: ON
12 Cassette 2 Pre-Registration Sensor PS56 H: ON
11 Cassette 1 Pre-Registration Sensor PS55 H: ON
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 Between-Cassette 1/2 Sensor PS76 H: ON
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
878
8. Service Mode
■ Reader (R-CON > P001 to P006)

Address bit Name Symbol Remarks
P001 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Rear) PS_N2 H: ON
2 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front) PS_N1 H: ON
1 - - -
0 - - -
P002 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS_A1 H: ON
0 - - -
P003 15-0 - - -
P004 15-0 - - -
P005 15-0 - - -
P006 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Original Size Sensor (Inch) PS_R2 L: Paper
0 Original Size Sensor (AB) PS_R1 L: Paper
879
8. Service Mode
■ ADF (R-CON > P002, FEEDER > P002 to P009)

● R-CON
P002 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 Glass Movement HP Sensor PS_A9 H: ON
● FEEDER
P002 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 Cover Open/Closed Sensor PS_A5 H: OPEN
6 Large/Small Sensor PS_R3 L: ON
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P003 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 LTR-R/ LGL Sensor PS_A3 H: Paper
2 AB/ Inch Sensor PS_A4 H: Paper
1 Delivery Tray Sensor PS_A2 H: Paper
880
8. Service Mode

P003 0 Original Sensor PS_N1 L: Paper
P004 15-0 - - -
P005 15-0 - - -
P006 15-0 - - -
P007 15-0 - - -
P008 15-0 - - -
P009 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7 H: Paper
3 Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6 H: Paper
2 Registration Sensor PS_R2 H: Paper
1 Arch Sensor PS_A1 H: Paper
0 Post-separation Sensor PS_R1 H: Paper
■ Cassette Feeding Unit-AM1 (DC-CON > P036 to P038)

P036 15 Cassette 3 Paper Sensor PS105 L: Paper
14 Cassette 3 Paper Surface Sensor PS107 L: Paper
13 Cassette 3 Pullout Sensor PS101 H: Paper
12 Cassette 3 Pickup Nip Sensor PS103 H: Paper
11 Cassette 4 Paper Sensor PS106 L: Paper
10 Cassette 4 Paper Surface Sensor PS108 L: Paper
9 Cassette 4 Pullout Sensor PS102 H: Paper
8 Cassette 4 Pickup Nip Sensor PS104 H: Paper
2 - - -
1 - - -
P037 15 Cassette 3 Size Switch A_SW1 SW101_1 L: ON
9 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
881
8. Service Mode

P037 3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P038 15 Right Door Open/Close Switch SW105 L: OPEN
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
■ High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit-A1 (DC-CON > P036 to P038)

P036 15 High Capacity Cassette Paper Sensor PS122 H: Paper
14 High Capacity Cassette Paper Surface Sensor PS107 L: Paper
13 High Capacity Cassette Pullout Sensor PS101 H: Paper
12 High Capacity Cassette Pickup Nip Sensor PS103 H: Paper
11 Right Cassette Paper Sensor PS121 H: Paper
10 High Capacity Cassette Paper Level Sensor PS118 H: ON
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P037 15-0 - - -
P038 15 Right Door Open/Close Switch SW105 L: OPEN
14 - - -
13 High Capacity Cassette Open/Close Detect Sensor PS123 H: OPEN
12 High Capacity Cassette Upper Limit Sensor PS113 L: Paper
11 Left Cassette Paper Sensor PS120 H: Paper
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
882
8. Service Mode

P038 2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
■ Paper Deck Unit-F1 (DC-CON > P012 to P016)

P012 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 Paper level sensor PS6 H: ON
2 Deck paper sensor PS11 H: ON
1 Deck lifter upper limit sensor 1 PS4 H: ON
0 - - -
P013 15 Deck pull-out sensor PS2 H: Paper
14 Deck pickup sensor PS1 H: Paper
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P014 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Deck connection switch SW2 L: Disengage
883
8. Service Mode

P014 0 Compartment open/close sensor PS8 H: OPEN
P015 15 Deck open sensing switch SW1 H: ON
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 Deck lifter upper limit sensor 2 PS3 H: ON
P016 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 Relay paper sensor PS5 H: ON
7 Deck lifter lower limit switch SW3 L: ON
6 Deck lifter lower position sensor PS9 H: ON
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 Separation roller sensor PS7 H: ON
1 - - -
0 - - -
■ Inner Finisher-H1 (SORTER > P001 to P006)

P001 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 Stack Tray HP Sensor PS14 H: HP
1 - - -
0 - - -
P002 15 Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor PS9 L: Paper
884
8. Service Mode

P002 14 - - -
13 - - -
12 Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS6 H: Paper
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P003 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 Paper Fold HP Sensor PS8 H: Paper
10 Assist HP Sensor PS7 H: Paper
9 Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor PS5 H: Paper
8 Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor PS4 H: Paper
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P004 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 Disengaging Sensor PS16 H: Connect
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 Manual Staple Sensor PS12 L: Paper
3 Manual Staple Switch PCB PCB3 H: ON
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P005 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 Delivery Sensor PS1 H: Paper
10 Stack Tray Lower Limit Sensor PS10 H: ON
9 Stapler Shift HP Sensor PS11 H: HP
885
8. Service Mode

P005 8 Return Belt HP Sensor PS3 H: HP
7 - - -
6 Clinch Motor Drive Detection Sensor PS13 H: ON
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Clinch HP Sensor PS15 H: ON
0 - - -
P006 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 Paddle HP Sensor PS2 H: Paper
12 - - -
11 Front Cover Switch MSW1 H: OPEN
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
■ Staple Finisher-Y1/ Canon Booklet Finisher-Y1 (SORTER > P001 to P021)

P001 15 Buffer Sensor PS103 H: Paper
14 - - -
13 Inlet Sensor PS101 H: Paper
12 - - -
11 Delivery Sensor PS102 H: Paper
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P002 15 Escape Delivery Sensor PS111 H: Paper
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 Swing Guide HP Sensor PS119 H: ON
8 - - -
7 - - -
886
8. Service Mode

P002 6 - - -
5 - - -
4 Paper End Assist HP Sensor PS123 H: ON
3 Manual Staple Switch SW103 H: ON
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P003 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS114 H: Paper
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P004 15 Flapper HP Sensor PS105 H: ON
14 Front Alignment HP Sensor PS115 H: ON
13 Rear Alignment HP Sensor PS116 H: ON
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 Front Cover Switch SW101 L: ON
2 - - -
1 Paddle HP Sensor PS120 H: ON
0 - - -
P005 15-0 - - -
P006 15-0 - - -
P007 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor PS117 H: ON
7 - - -
6 Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor PS122 H: ON
5 - - -
4 Return Roller HP Sensor PS121 H: ON
3 - - -
887
8. Service Mode

P007 2 - - -
1 Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor PS118 H: ON
0 - - -
P008 15-0 - - -
P009 15-0 - - -
P010 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 Front Cover Sensor PS104 L: OPEN
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P011 15-0 - - -
P012 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 Staple Edging Sensor PS126 L: ON
6 Staple Sensor PS127 H: ON
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 Escape Tray Full Sensor PS113 L: FULL
2 - - -
1 Manual Staple Paper Sensor PS128 L: Paper
0 - - -
P013 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 Swing Guide Safety Switch SW102 H: ON
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Stack Tray HP Sensor PS106 H: ON
0 Stack Tray Full Sensor 1 PS107 H: FULL
888
8. Service Mode

P014 15-0 - - -
P015 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 Staple-free Binding HP Sensor PS129 H: ON
11 Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor PS112 H: ON
10 - - -
9 Stapler Shift HP Sensor PS124 H: ON
8 Staple HP Sensor PS125 L: ON
5 Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor PS110 H: ON
4 - - -
3 Stack Tray Peper Surface Sensor (Upper) (light-receiving) PBA102 L: Paper
2 Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (Lower) (light-receiving) PBA103 L: Paper
1 - - -
0 - - -
P016 15-0 - - -
P017 15-0 - - -
P018 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 Saddle Inlet Sensor PS201 H: Paper
6 Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor PS210 H: ON
5 Saddle Alignment HP Sensor PS207 H: ON
4 Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor PS205 H: ON
3 Saddle Gripper HP Sensor PS209 H: ON
2 Saddle Unit Set Sensor PS204 H: ON
1 - - -
0 - - -
P019 15-0 - - -
P020 15-0 - - -
P021 15 Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor PS208 H: ON
14 Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor Clock Sensor PS212 H: ON
13 Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor PS211 H: ON
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203 H: Paper
8 Saddle Paddle HP Sensor PS206 H: ON
7 Front Saddle Stitcher Staple Sensor PS214 H: ON
6 Rear Saddle Stitcher Staple Sensor PS213 H: ON
5 Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor PS215 L: ON
4 - - -
3 Saddle Delivery Tray Paper Sensor PS216 H: Paper
2 - - -
1 Saddle Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS202 L: Paper
0 - - -
889
8. Service Mode
■ 2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1 (SORTER > P051 to P052)

P051 15 - - -
14 Punch Horizontal Registration Sensor 5 (light-receiving) PBA302 H: Paper
13 Punch HP Sensor 1 PS303 L: ON
12 Punch Motor Clock Sensor PS305 H: ON
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
P052 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 Punch Inlet Sensor PS301 H: Paper
10 Punch HP Sensor 2 PS304 H: ON
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 Punch Slide HP Sensor PS302 H: ON
0 - - -
■ Inner 2/4 Hole Puncher-B1 (SORTER > P009 to P011)

P009 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 Punch HP Sensor 1 S5 L: ON
12 - - -
11 Horizontal Registration Sensor 4 PCB3-4 H: Paper
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
890
8. Service Mode

P010 15 Punch Waste Box Sensor S4 H: ON
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 Trailing Edge Sensor PCB3-5 H: Paper
10 Punch HP Sensor 2 S6 H: ON
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 No.2 Delivery Tray Full Sensor S3 H: ON
1 Horizontal Registration HP sensor S1 H: HP
0 - - -
P011 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 No.2 Path Sensor S2 H: Paper
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
■ Buffer Pass Unit-L1 (SORTER > P065)

P065 15 - - -
14 - - -
13 - - -
12 - - -
11 - - -
10 - - -
9 - - -
8 - - -
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 OPEN Detection Sensor PS403 L: OPEN
1 Buffer Pass Exit Sensor PS402 L: Paper
0 Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PS401 L: Paper
891
8. Service Mode
ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

■ ADJ-XY
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY
ADJ-X 1 Adj start pstn in book mode: vert scan
Detail To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in the vertical scanning
direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value.
Increase the value when out of original area is copied.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Amount of Change per 0.1
Unit
ADJ-Y 1 Adj start pstn in book mode: horz scan

Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading.
Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value.
Increase the value when out of original area is copied.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
892
8. Service Mode
ADJ-S 1 Adjustment of Reader shading position
Detail To adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when reading the White Plate
on the left edge of the Copyboard Glass.
When replacing the Scanner Unit, execute RDSHDPOS and write the value of this item in the
service label.
When clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the reading position moves to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When black lines/white lines appear
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
- When clearing the Reader-related RAM data
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RDSHDPOS
Unit
ADJ-Y-DF 1 Adj start pstn:DADF mode, horz scan, frt

Detail To adjust the front side image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at DADF
reading.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
STRD-POS 1 Adj frt side read pstn: DADF stream read

Detail To adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when stream reading original
with DADF.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS
Unit
893
8. Service Mode
ADJ-X-MG 1 Fine adj img ratio: book mode, vert scan
Detail To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at copyboard
reading.
As the value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01 %.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJY-DF2 1 Adj start pstn:DADF mode, horz scan, bck

Detail To adjust the back side image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at DADF
reading.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
W-PLT-X 1 Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (X) entry
Detail To enter the white level data (X) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the
glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Default Value 8271
Unit
894
8. Service Mode
W-PLT-Y 1 Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Y) entry
Detail To enter the white level data (Y) for the Standard White Plate.
glass.
Default Value 8735
Unit
W-PLT-Z 1 Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Z) entry

Detail To enter the white level data (Z) for the Standard White Plate.
glass.
Default Value 9418
Unit
SH-TRGT 1 Shading target VL (B&W) entry: Copyboard

Detail To enter the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Scanner Unit, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, and write
the value which is automatically set in the service label.
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Default Value 1126
Unit
895
8. Service Mode
100-RG 1 Img Sensr RG color displace crrct: front
Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
100-GB 1 Img Sensr GB color displace crrct: front

Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
DFTAR-R 1 Shading target VL (R) entry: front side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Red on the front side at DADF reading.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER>
FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the
service label.
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side)
Default Value 1159
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2
Unit
896
8. Service Mode
DFTAR-G 1 Shading target VL (G) entry: front side
Detail To enter the shading target value of Green on the front side at DADF reading.
service label.
Default Value 1189
Unit
DFTAR-B 1 Shading target VL (B) entry: front side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Blue on the front side at DADF reading.
service label.
Default Value 1209
Unit
MTF2-M1 1 MTF value 1 entry: horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 1 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
Unit
897
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
898
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
899
8. Service Mode
MTF2-S1 1 MTF value 1 entry: vert scan, front side
Detail To enter the setting value 1 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction.
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
900
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
901
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit
100DF2GB 2 Img Sensr GB color displace crrct: back

Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
100DF2RG 2 Img Sensr RG color displace crrct: back

Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
DFCH2R2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (R) entry: front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
902
8. Service Mode
DFCH2R10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (R) entry:front
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
DFCH2B2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B) entry: front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
DFCH2B10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B) entry:front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
DFCH2G2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (G) entry: front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the front side of No.2 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
903
8. Service Mode
DFCH2G10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (G) entry:front
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the front side of No.10 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
MTF-M1 1 MTF value 1 entry: horz scan, back side

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
904
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
905
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
MTF-S1 1 MTF value 1 entry: vert scan, back side

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
906
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
907
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
DFCH-R2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (R) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
908
8. Service Mode
DFCH-R10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (R) entry: back
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
DFCH-B2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
DFCH-B10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
DFCH-G2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (G) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the back side of No.2 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
909
8. Service Mode
DFCH-G10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (G) entry: back
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the back side of No.10 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
MTF2-M10 1 MTF value 10 entry:horz scan, front side

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
910
8. Service Mode
MTF2-S10 1 MTF value 10 entry:vert scan, front side
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
MTF-M10 1 MTF value 10 entry:horz scan, back side

Default Value 50
Unit
911
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
MTF-S10 1 MTF value 10 entry:vert scan, back side

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
912
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit
DFCH2K2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) entr: frt

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
DFCH2K10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) entr: frt

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the front side of No.10 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
DFCH-K2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) entr: bck

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
913
8. Service Mode
DFCH-K10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) entr: bck
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the back side of No.10 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
DFTAR-BW 1 Shading target VL (B&W) entry: front

Detail To enter the B&W shading target value on the front side at DADF reading.
service label.
Default Value 1209
Unit
DFTBK-G 1 Shading target VL (G) entry: back side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Green on the back side at DADF reading.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side), execute COPIER>
service label.
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Default Value 1136
Unit
914
8. Service Mode
DFTBK-B 1 Shading target VL (B) entry: back side
Detail To enter the shading target value of Blue on the back side at DADF reading.
service label.
Default Value 1126
Unit
DFTBK-R 1 Shading target VL (R) entry: back side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Red on the back side at DADF reading.
service label.
Default Value 1156
Unit
DFTBK-BW 1 Shading target VL (B&W) entry: back

Detail To enter the B&W shading target value on the back side at DADF reading.
service label.
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side)
Default Value 1126
Unit
915
8. Service Mode
■ IMG-REG
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG
REG-H-Y 1 Ruf adj Y-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan
Detail To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When Y-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-H-C 1 Ruf adj C-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When C-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-H-K 1 Ruf adj Bk-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When Bk-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-HS-Y 1 Fine adj Y-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel or less.
Use Case When Y-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel)
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Amount of Change per 1/32
Unit
916
8. Service Mode
REG-HS-C 1 Fine adj C-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan
Detail To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel or less.
Use Case When C-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel)
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-HS-K 1 Fine adj Bk-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of less than 1 pixel.
Use Case When Bk-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel)
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-V-Y 1 Ruf adj Y-clr wrt start pstn:vert scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When Y-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-V-C 1 Ruf adj C-clr wrt start pstn:vert scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When C-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
917
8. Service Mode
REG-V-K 1 Ruf adj Bk-clr wrt start pstn:vert scan
Detail To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When Bk-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-H-M 1 Ruf adj M-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When M-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-V-M 1 Ruf adj M-clr wrt start pstn:vert scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When M-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-HS-M 1 Fine adj M-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of less than 1 pixel.
Use Case When M-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel)
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
MAG-H 1 For R&D

Unit
MAG-V 1 For R&D

Unit
918
8. Service Mode
■ DENS
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS
SGNL-Y 1 Enter Y toner dens VL: initialization
Detail To enter the Y toner density value when initializing the Patch Sensor (Center).
Use Case When checking the value before RAM clear and re-entering it after RAM clear
Default Value 0
SGNL-M 1 Enter M toner dens VL: initialization

Detail To enter the M toner density value when initializing the Patch Sensor (Center).
Default Value 0
SGNL-C 1 Enter C toner dens VL: initialization

Detail To enter the C toner density value when initializing the Patch Sensor (Center).
Default Value 0
REF-Y 1 Y toner dens target VL entry

Detail To enter the target value of ATR control for the ATR Sensor (Y).
Be sure to check the value before clearing RAM and enter it again after RAM clear.
Default Value 111
REF-M 1 M toner dens target VL entry

Detail To enter the target value of ATR control for the ATR Sensor (M).
Default Value 111
REF-C 1 C toner dens target VL entry

Detail To enter the target value of ATR control for the ATR Sensor (C).
Default Value 111
919
8. Service Mode
SGNL-K 1 Enter Bk toner dens VL: initialization
Detail To enter the Bk toner density value when initializing the Patch Sensor (Center).
Default Value 0
DMAX-Y 2 Adj D-max ctrl Y-color dens target VL

Detail An image failure may occur because the density target value of D-max control becomes out of the
setting table due to environment change.
Adjust the offset of the Y-color density target value of D-max control.
The setting is reset when auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) is executed.
Use Case When an image failure occurs due to environment change
Caution Use this item only for the printer models.
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation> Full Adjust
Mode
DMAX-M 2 Adj D-max ctrl M-color dens target VL

Adjust the offset of the M-color density target value of D-max control.
Default Value 0
Mode
DMAX-C 2 Adj D-max ctrl C-color dens target VL

Adjust the offset of the C-color density target value of D-max control.
Default Value 0
Mode
920
8. Service Mode
P-TG-Y 2 Adj of ATR control Y-color target value
Detail To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for Y.
When the target value determined upon initialization is changed, the TD ratio is also changed.
Fogging and density increase are alleviated when the value is smaller, and carrier adherence is
alleviated when it is larger.
Use Case When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur
3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times.
4) Execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
Caution Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density. If you adjust the offset of the
target value, fogging might get worse.
Default Value 0
Mode
P-TG-M 2 Adj of ATR control M-color target value

Detail To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for M.
Default Value 0
Mode
P-TG-C 2 Adj of ATR control C-color target value

Detail To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for C.
Default Value 0
Mode
921
8. Service Mode
P-TG-K 2 Adj of ATR control Bk-color target value
Detail To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for Bk.
Default Value 0
Mode
DMAX-K 2 Adj D-max ctrl Bk-color dens target VL

Adjust the offset of the Bk-color density target value of D-max control.
Default Value 0
Mode
REF-K 1 Bk toner dens target VL entry

Detail To enter the target value of ATR control for the ATR Sensor (Bk).
Default Value 128
CONT-Y 1 ATR Sensor (Y) control voltage entry

Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (Y).
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is changed by 1, the control voltage is changed by 0.01 V.
Use Case When the backup data is cleared by RAM clear, etc.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Unit V
Unit
922
8. Service Mode
CONT-M 1 ATR Sensor (M) control voltage entry
Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (M).
Unit V
Unit
CONT-C 1 ATR Sensor (C) control voltage entry

Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (C).
Unit V
Unit
CONT-K 1 ATR Sensor (Bk) control voltage entry

Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (Bk).
Unit V
Unit
■ BLANK
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > BLANK
BLANK-T 1 Adjustment of leading edge margin
Detail To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel
(0.0423 mm).
Use Case - Upon user's request (to reduce the margin)
- When increasing the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation
Unit pixel
Default Value 94
Unit
923
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > BLANK
BLANK-L 1 Adjustment of left edge margin
Detail To adjust the margin on the left edge of paper.
(0.0423 mm).
Unit pixel
Default Value 59
Unit
BLANK-R 1 Adjustment of right edge margin

Detail To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper.
(0.0423 mm).
Unit pixel
Default Value 59
Unit
BLANK-B 1 Adjustment of trailing edge margin

Detail To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper.
(0.0423 mm).
Unit pixel
Default Value 59
Unit
924
8. Service Mode
■ V-CONT
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > V-CONT
VCONT-Y 2 Adj of Y-color contrast potential
Detail To adjust the contrast potential Vcont for Y-color.
As the value is changed by 1, the contrast potential is changed by 10 V.
+: Image becomes darker.
-: Image becomes lighter.
When the value is too large, paper winds around the Fixing Roller or a transfer failure occurs.
In principle, adjustment of the density should be made by auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment). However, if the adjustment cannot be executed, use this item as a temporary
measure.
Use Case When density is not appropriate even though auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) is
executed
Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-M/C/K
Mode
Unit
VCONT-M 2 Adj of M-color contrast potential

Detail To adjust the contrast potential Vcont for M-color.
measure.
executed
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-Y/C/K
Mode
Unit
925
8. Service Mode
VCONT-C 2 Adj of C-color contrast potential
Detail To adjust the contrast potential Vcont for C-color.
measure.
executed
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-Y/M/K
Mode
Unit
VCONT-K 2 Adj of Bk-color contrast potential

Detail To adjust the contrast potential Vcont for Bk-color.
measure.
executed
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-Y/M/C
Mode
Unit
926
8. Service Mode
VBACK-Y 2 Adj Y-color fogging removal potential
Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y-color.
A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Correct Color Cast] in [Settings/Registration] to
the setting value of this item is applied as the correction value.
As the value is changed by 1, the fogging removal potential is changed by 5 V.
+: Fogging, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are alleviated.
-: Coarseness, blanking of image edge, and carrier adherence are alleviated.
Use Case When Y-color fogging occurs
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-M/C/K
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast
Mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation> Full Adjust
Unit
VBACK-M 2 Adj M-color fogging removal potential

Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M-color.
Use Case When M-color fogging occurs
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y/C/K
Unit
927
8. Service Mode
VBACK-C 2 Adj C-color fogging removal potential
Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C-color.
Use Case When C-color fogging occurs
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y/M/K
Unit
VBACK-K 2 Adj Bk-color fogging removal potential

Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk-color.
Use Case When Bk-color fogging occurs
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y/M/C
Unit
928
8. Service Mode
■ PASCAL
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL
OFST-P-Y 1 Y density adj at test print reading
Detail To adjust the offset of Y-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Default Value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment
Unit
OFST-P-M 1 M density adj at test print reading

Detail To adjust the offset of M-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
Unit
OFST-P-C 1 C density adj at test print reading

Detail To adjust the offset of C-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
Unit
929
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL
OFST-P-K 1 Bk density adj at test print reading
Detail To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
Unit
■ COLOR
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR
ADJ-Y 1 Adjustment of color balance for Y-color
Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for Y-color when the density of Y-color varies
between devices.
As the value is larger, the image gets darker. If the value is too large, a transfer failure and/or a
fixing failure occurs.
Use Case Upon user's request (to reduce density difference between devices)
Default Value 0
ADJ-M 1 Adjustment of color balance for M-color

Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for M-color when the density of M-color varies
between devices.
Default Value 0
ADJ-C 1 Adjustment of color balance for C-color

Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for C-color when the density of C-color varies
between devices.
Default Value 0
930
8. Service Mode
ADJ-K 1 Adjustment of color balance for Bk-color
Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for Bk-color when the density of Bk-color varies
between devices.
Default Value 0
OFST-Y 1 Adj Y-clr brit area dens&color balance

Detail To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Y-color.
As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Decrease the value when the background cannot be read correctly because the density of a
document is dark and increase the value when the density of a document is light.
Decrease the value when removal of the background is not performed correctly and a fogging-like
image appears.
This setting is linked with [Correct Density], [Correct Shading] and [Auto Correct Color Mismatch]
in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case - When the background of a document cannot be read correctly
- When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging-like image appears
Default Value 0
OFST-M 1 Adj M-clr brit area dens&color balance

Detail To adjust the bright area density and color balance of M-color.
image appears.
Default Value 0
931
8. Service Mode
OFST-C 1 Adj C-clr brit area dens&color balance
Detail To adjust the bright area density and color balance of C-color.
image appears.
Default Value 0
OFST-K 1 Adj Bk-clr brit area dens&color balance

Detail To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Bk-color.
image appears.
Default Value 0
LD-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y low dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y-color for copy operation.
A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in the main menu to the
setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
e.g.: When the value of this item is "-4" and the value of [Fine Adjust Density] is "5", the density
value is "1".
Note that the density value must be within the rage from -8 to 8.
e.g.: When the value of this item is "7" and the value of [Fine Adjust Density] is "5", the density
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Copy> Options> Color Balance> Fine Adjust Density
Mode Access Stored Files> Mail Box> Print> Change Print Settings> Options> Color Balance> Fine
Adjust Density
Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Color Balance> Non-Coated> Fine Adjust
Density
Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Color Balance> Coated> Fine Adjust Density
Supplement/Memo In [Fine Adjust Density] in [Adjustment/Maintenance], the same value is set as the density for copy
operation and file storage.
In [Fine Adjust Density] under [Copy] and [Access Stored Files] in the main menu, the density value
can be set individually. Although the setting value of this item is just one value, the density may
differ for copy operation and file storage.
932
8. Service Mode
LD-OFS-M 2 Adj M low dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
LD-OFS-C 2 Adj C low dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
933
8. Service Mode
LD-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk low dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
MD-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y mid dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
934
8. Service Mode
MD-OFS-M 2 Adj M mid dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
MD-OFS-C 2 Adj C mid dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
935
8. Service Mode
MD-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk mid dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
HD-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y hi dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
Unit
936
8. Service Mode
HD-OFS-M 2 Adj M hi dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
HD-OFS-C 2 Adj C hi dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
937
8. Service Mode
HD-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk hi dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PL-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y-clr low dens area clr balance: PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y-color at PDL print.
In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box, a value obtained by adding
the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in [Access Stored Files] to the setting value of this item
is applied as the actual density value.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
938
8. Service Mode
PL-OFS-M 2 Adj M-clr low dens area clr balance: PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PL-OFS-C 2 Adj C-clr low dens area clr balance: PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
939
8. Service Mode
PL-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk-clr low dens area clr balance:PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PM-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y-clr mid dens area clr balance: PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
940
8. Service Mode
PM-OFS-M 2 Adj M-clr mid dens area clr balance: PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PM-OFS-C 2 Adj C-clr mid dens area clr balance: PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
941
8. Service Mode
PM-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk-clr mid dens area clr balance:PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PH-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y-clr hi dens area clr balance: PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
942
8. Service Mode
PH-OFS-M 2 Adj M-clr hi dens area clr balance: PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PH-OFS-C 2 Adj C-clr hi dens area clr balance: PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
943
8. Service Mode
PH-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk-clr hi dens area clr balance: PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
■ HV-PRI
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-PRI
DIS-TGY 2 Discharge crrnt ctrl Y tgt crrnt: H-SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the target current of discharge current control for Y-color at high process
speed.
As the value is changed by 1, the current is changed by 5 micro A.
Use Case When an image failure (sand-like image) occurs
Caution - Use OFSTAC-Y only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGY. In such case, be sure
to change the setting value of this item back to the original one. If both the settings are enabled,
an over discharge occurs.
- Do not use this item if adjustment has been made with OFSTAC-Y first.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTAC-Y
Unit
944
8. Service Mode
DIS-TGM 2 Discharge crrnt ctrl M tgt crrnt: H-SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the target current of discharge current control for M-color at high process
speed.
Caution - Use OFSTAC-M only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGM. In such case, be
sure to change the setting value of this item back to the original one. If both the settings are enabled,
- Do not use this item if adjustment has been made with OFSTAC-M first.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTAC-M
Unit
DIS-TGC 2 Discharge crrnt ctrl C tgt crrnt: H-SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the target current of discharge current control for C-color at high process
speed.
Caution - Use OFSTAC-C only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGC. In such case, be sure
- Do not use this item if adjustment has been made with OFSTAC-C first.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTAC-C
Unit
DIS-TGK 2 Discharge crrnt ctrl Bk tgt crrnt: H-SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the target current of discharge current control for Bk-color at high process
speed.
Caution - Use OFSTAC-K only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGK. In such case, be sure
- Do not use this item if adjustment has been made with OFSTAC-K first.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTAC-K
Unit
945
8. Service Mode
DIS-TGY2 2 Discharge crrnt ctrl Y tgt crrnt: L-SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the target current of discharge current control for Y-color at low process
speed.
Caution - Use OFSTACY2 only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGY2. In such case, be
- Do not use this item if adjustment has been made with OFSTACY2 first.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACY2
Unit
DIS-TGM2 2 Discharge crrnt ctrl M tgt crrnt: L-SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the target current of discharge current control for M-color at low process
speed.
Caution - Use OFSTACM2 only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGM2. In such case, be
- Do not use this item if adjustment has been made with OFSTACM2 first.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACM2
Unit
DIS-TGC2 2 Discharge crrnt ctrl C tgt crrnt: L-SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the target current of discharge current control for C-color at low process
speed.
Caution - Use OFSTACC2 only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGC2. In such case, be
- Do not use this item if adjustment has been made with OFSTACC2 first.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACC2
Unit
946
8. Service Mode
DIS-TGK2 2 Discharge crrnt ctrl Bk tgt crrnt: L-SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the target current of discharge current control for Bk-color at low process
speed.
Caution - Use OFSTACK2 only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGK2. In such case, be
- Do not use this item if adjustment has been made with OFSTACK2 first.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACK2
Unit
OFSTAC-Y 1 Adj Y-color charging AC voltage: H-SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for Y-color at high process speed.
The setting is applied to paper which paper weight is 128 g/m2 or less (excluding coated paper).
As the value is changed by 1, the voltage is changed by 20 Vpp.
Decrease the value when image smear occurs, and increase the value when an image failure
(sand-like image) occurs.
Use Case - When image smear occurs
- When an image failure (sand-like image) occurs
Caution - Use OFSTAC-Y only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGY. In such case, be sure
to change the setting value of DIS-TGY back to the original one. If both the settings are enabled,
- If the value is too large, the life of the Photosensitive Drum becomes shorter.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> DIS-TGY
Unit
947
8. Service Mode
OFSTAC-M 1 Adj M-color charging AC voltage: H-SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for M-color at high process speed.
Caution - Use OFSTAC-M only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGM. In such case, be
sure to change the setting value of DIS-TGM back to the original one. If both the settings are
enabled, an over discharge occurs.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> DIS-TGM
Unit
OFSTAC-C 1 Adj C-color charging AC voltage: H-SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for C-color at high process speed.
Caution - Use OFSTAC-C only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGC. In such case, be sure
to change the setting value of DIS-TGC back to the original one. If both the settings are enabled,
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> DIS-TGC
Unit
948
8. Service Mode
OFSTAC-K 1 Adj Bk-color charging AC voltage: H-SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for Bk-color at high process speed.
Caution - Use OFSTAC-K only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGK. In such case, be sure
to change the setting value of DIS-TGK back to the original one. If both the settings are enabled,
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> DIS-TGK
Unit
OFSTACY2 1 Adj Y-color charging AC voltage: L-SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for Y-color at low process speed.
The setting is applied to paper which paper weight is 129 g/m2 or more and coated paper.
Caution Use OFSTACY2 only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGY2. In such case, be sure
to change the setting value of DIS-TGY2 back to the original one. If both the settings are enabled,
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> DIS-TGY2
Unit
949
8. Service Mode
OFSTACM2 1 Adj M-color charging AC voltage: L-SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for M-color at low process speed.
Caution Use OFSTACM2 only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGM2. In such case, be
sure to change the setting value of DIS-TGM2 back to the original one. If both the settings are
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> DIS-TGM2
Unit
OFSTACC2 1 Adj C-color charging AC voltage: L-SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for C-color at low process speed.
Caution Use OFSTACC2 only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGC2. In such case, be
sure to change the setting value of DIS-TGC2 back to the original one. If both the settings are
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> DIS-TGC2
Unit
950
8. Service Mode
OFSTACK2 1 Adj Bk-color charging AC voltage: L-SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the charging AC voltage for Bk-color at low process speed.
Caution Use OFSTACK2 only when an image failure is not alleviated with DIS-TGK2. In such case, be sure
to change the setting value of DIS-TGK2 back to the original one. If both the settings are enabled,
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> DIS-TGK2
Unit
■ HV-TR
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR
1TR-TGY 2 Adj Y-clr pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: H-SPD
Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for Y-color at high process speed.
Increase the value when low-voltage mottled image occurs, and decrease the value when fogging
occurs (especially in the 94 mm portion of the image leading edge).
By setting this item, primary transfer ATVC control is automatically executed during initial rotation
for next image formation and the setting value is reflected.
Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs
2) Execute 1ATVC-EX.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> 1ATVC-EX
Unit
1TR-TGM 2 Adj M-clr pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: H-SPD

Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for M-color at high process speed.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
951
8. Service Mode
1TR-TGC 2 Adj C-clr pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: H-SPD
Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for C-color at high process speed.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
1TR-TGK1 2 Adj sgl Bk pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:H-SPD

Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for Bk-color at high process speed in
black mode.
Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs in black mode
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
1TR-TGKT 2 Adj clr Bk pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:H-SPD

Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for Bk-color at high process speed in
color mode.
Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs in color mode
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
952
8. Service Mode
2TR-OFF 1 Uniform adj sec trn ATVC ppr allot voltg
Detail To uniformly adjust paper allotted voltage in secondary transfer ATVC control regardless of paper
type, 1st/2nd side or environment.
When transfer failure occurs on an image, increase/decrease the value in the -30 to 30 (-900 to
900 V) range in increments of 10 (300 V).
When white dots occur on an image, increase/decrease the value in the -100 to -10 (-3000 to -300
V) range in increments of 10 (300 V). When the value is decreased too much, transfer failure
occurs.
Use Case When similar image failures occur regardless of the conditions
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
1TR-TGY2 2 Adj Y-clr pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: L-SPD

Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for Y-color at low process speed.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
1TR-TGM2 2 Adj M-clr pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: L-SPD

Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for M-color at low process speed.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
953
8. Service Mode
1TR-TGC2 2 Adj C-clr pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: L-SPD
Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for C-color at low process speed.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
1TR-TK12 2 Adj sgl Bk pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:L-SPD

Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for Bk-color at low process speed in
black mode.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
1TR-TGY3 2 Adj Y-clr pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: M-SPD

Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for Y-color at middle process speed.
Caution This item is enabled only when using heavy paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2) with 60 ppm machine.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
954
8. Service Mode
1TR-TGM3 2 Adj M-clr pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: M-SPD
Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for M-color at middle process speed.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
1TR-TGC3 2 Adj C-clr pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt: M-SPD

Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for C-color at middle process speed.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
1TR-TK13 2 Adj sgl Bk pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:M-SPD

Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for Bk-color at middle process speed
in black mode.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
955
8. Service Mode
1TR-TK42 2 Adj clr Bk pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:L-SPD
Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for Bk-color at low process speed in
color mode.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
1TR-TK43 2 Adj clr Bk pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:M-SPD

Detail To adjust the target current of primary transfer ATVC control for Bk-color at middle process speed
in color mode.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
T2TR-LNG 2 Adj of lead edge weak bias apply length

Detail To adjust the length (distance from the leading edge of paper) to apply leading edge weak bias.
Increase the value when white spots occur in a broad area of the leading edge of paper.
Use Case When an image failure (white spots at the leading edge) occurs
Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
956
8. Service Mode
B2TR-LNG 2 Adj end edg weak bias apply lngth:sgl Bk
Detail To adjust the length (distance from the trailing edge of paper) to apply trailing edge weak bias in
single Bk-color mode.
As the value is changed by 1, it is changed by 0.1 mm.
Increase the value when white spots occur in a broad area of the trailing edge of paper.
Use Case When an image failure (white spots at the trailing edge) occurs in single Bk-color mode
Default Value 0
Unit
T2TR-H51 2 Adj of lead edge weak bias: heavy 5, 1st

Detail To adjust the offset of the leading edge weak bias applied to the 1st side of heavy paper 5.
As the value is changed by 1, the bias is changed by 30 V.
Decrease the value if white spots occur.
Increase the value if density on the leading edge of paper is low (transfer is weak).
Unit V
Default Value 0
Amount of Change per 30V
Unit
T2TR-H52 2 Adj of lead edge weak bias: heavy 5, 2nd

Detail To adjust the offset of the leading edge weak bias applied to the 2nd side of heavy paper 5.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Amount of Change per 30V
Unit
957
8. Service Mode
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
958
8. Service Mode
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
WK-TGTN 2 Lead/end edg weak bias crrnt: Bk-m, pln

Detail To adjust the offset value of current to be flowed to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller when
applying leading/trailing edge weak bias in the case of printing on plain paper in single Bk-color
mode.
Increase the value when white spots at the leading/trailing edge occur.
Use Case When an image failure (white spots at the leading/trailing edge) occurs
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
WK-TGTC 2 Lead/end edg weak bias crrnt: Bk-m, coat

applying leading/trailing edge weak bias in the case of printing on 2-/1-sided coated paper in single
Bk-color mode.
Unit uA
Unit
959
8. Service Mode
WK-TGTH1 2 Lead/end edg weak bias crrnt: Bk-m, hvy1
applying leading/trailing edge weak bias in the case of printing on heavy paper 1 in single Bk-color
mode.
Unit uA
Unit
WK-TGTH2 2 Lead/end edg weak bias crrnt:Bk-m,hvy2-7

applying leading/trailing edge weak bias in the case of printing on heavy paper 2 to 7 in single Bk-
color mode.
Unit uA
Unit
■ FEED-ADJ
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
REGIST 1 Adj registration start timing: 1/1 speed
Detail To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor at 1/1 speed.
As the value is changed by 1, the leading edge margin is changed by 0.1 mm.
-: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.)
+: Leading edge margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.)
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
960
8. Service Mode
ADJ-C1 1 Write start pstn in horz scan:Cassette 1
Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper
from the Cassette 1. (Paper width is 320 mm or smaller.)
As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.1 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
961
8. Service Mode
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJ-MF 1 Write start pstn in horz scan: MP Tray

from the Multi-purpose Tray. (Paper width is 320 mm or smaller.)
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJ-DK 1 Write start pstn in horz scan:Paper Deck

from the Paper Deck. (Paper width is 320 mm or smaller.)
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
962
8. Service Mode
ADJ-C1RE 1 Write start pstn in horz scan: Cst1,2nd
Detail To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction
when feeding paper from the Cassette 1.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
963
8. Service Mode
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJ-DKRE 1 Write start pstn in horz scan:P-Deck,2nd

when feeding paper from the Paper Deck.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJ-MFRE 1 Write start pstn in horz scan:MP Tr, 2nd

when feeding paper from the Multi-purpose Tray.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
964
8. Service Mode
REG-THCK 1 Adj registration start timing: 1/2 speed
Detail To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor at 1/2 speed.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm.
-: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.)
+: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.)
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-OHT 1 Adj register start timing: transparency

Detail To adjust the leading edge margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when
feeding transparency.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the leading edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-DUP1 1 Adj register start timing: 1/1 SPD, 2nd

Detail To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding 2nd side at 1/1 speed.
Use Case When adjusting the leading edge margin
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-DUP2 1 Adj register start timing: 1/2 SPD, 2nd

Detail To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding 2nd side at 1/2 speed.
Use Case When adjusting the leading edge margin
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
965
8. Service Mode
LP-FEED1 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: plain, Casstt
Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for plain paper fed from a cassette.
As the value is changed by 1, the arch amount is changed by 0.1 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 1st side of plain paper fed from a cassette is skewed
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
LP-MULT1 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: plain, MP Tray

Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for plain paper fed from the Multi-purpose Tray.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 1st side of plain paper fed from the Multi-purpose Tray is skewed
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
LP-DUP1 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: plain, 2-sided

Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for plain paper fed in 2-sided mode.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 2nd side of plain paper fed in 2-sided mode is skewed
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-SPD 1 Adjustment of Registration Motor speed

Detail To adjust the speed of the Registration Motor.
As the value is changed by 1, the speed is changed by 0.2%.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
As the value is reduced, blur image in the area of 40 to 45 mm from the trailing edge is alleviated.
Use Case When blur image occurs in the area of 40 to 45 mm from the trailing edge
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
966
8. Service Mode
EXRV-SPD 1 For R&D
Unit
■ CST-ADJ
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CST-ADJ
MF-A4R 1 Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width
Detail To adjust the width of A4R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
When replacing the Multi Tray Unit, register a new value of the service label included in the
package. Write the value in the service label on the host machine.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Multi Tray Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value and press OK key.
Caution - After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
- Be sure to adjust MF-MAX/MIN/A4/A5R together with this item.
Default Value According to the setting at shipment
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MAX/MIN/A4/A5R
MF-A4 1 Adj of MP Tray A4 paper width

Detail To adjust the width of A4 paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
- Be sure to adjust MF-MAX/MIN/A4R/A5R together with this item.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MAX/MIN/A4R/A5R
MF-MAX 1 Adj of Multi-purpose Tray maximum width

Detail To adjust the maximum width of the Multi-purpose Tray.
- Be sure to adjust MF-MIN/A4/A4R/A5R together with this item.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MIN/A4/A4R/A5R
967
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CST-ADJ
MF-MIN 1 Adj of Multi-purpose Tray minimum width
Detail To adjust the minimum width of the Multi-purpose Tray.
- Be sure to adjust MF-MAX/A4/A4R/A5R together with this item.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MAX/A4/A4R/A5R
MF-A5R 1 Adj of MP Tray A5R paper width

Detail To adjust the width of A5R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
- Be sure to adjust MF-MAX/MIN/A4/A4R together with this item.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MAX/MIN/A4/A4R
■ MISC
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC
SEG-ADJ 1 Set criteria for text/photo: front side
Detail To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map mode.
As the value is larger, the original is more likely judged as a photo document, and as the value is
smaller, the original is more likely judged as a text document.
Use Case When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/Photo/Map mode
Default Value 0
K-ADJ 1 Set criteria for black text: front side

Detail To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing.
As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black.
Use Case When preferring the text to be judged as black
Default Value 0
968
8. Service Mode
ACS-ADJ 1 Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:front
Detail To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value
is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document.
Use Case When adjusting the color detection level in ACS mode
Default Value 0
ACS-EN 2 Set judgment area in ACS mode:front side

Detail To set the judgment area in ACS mode.
As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened.
Use Case When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode
Default Value 1
ACS-CNT 2 Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front

Detail To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode.
Use Case When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode
Default Value 0
ACS-EN2 2 Set ACS mode jdgmt area in DADF mode

Detail To set the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading.
Use Case When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading
Default Value 1
ACS-CNT2 2 Set ACS jdgmt pixel count area in DADF

Detail To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode at DADF reading.
Use Case When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode at DADF
reading
Default Value 0
969
8. Service Mode
SEG-ADJ3 1 Set criteria for text/photo: back side
Detail To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map mode when reading the back
side.
As the value is larger, the original is more likely judged as a photo document, and as the value is
smaller, the original is more likely judged as a text document.
Use Case When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/Photo/Map mode on the back side
Default Value 0
K-ADJ3 1 Set Bk text jdgmt stdrd: back side

Detail To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing (back side at duplex reading with
1 path).
As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black.
Use Case When preferring the text to be judged as black (back side at duplex reading with 1 path)
Default Value 0
ACS-ADJ3 1 Set ACS B&W/color jdgmt stdrd:back side

Detail To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1
path).
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value
is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document.
Use Case When adjusting the color detection level in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path)
Default Value 0
ACS-EN3 2 Set of ACS mode jdgmt area: back side

Detail To set the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path).
Use Case When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path)
Default Value 1
ACS-CNT3 2 ACS mode jdgmt pixel count area: back

Detail To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode (back side at
duplex reading with 1 path).
As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widen.
Use Case When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode (back
side at duplex reading with 1 path)
Default Value 0
970
8. Service Mode
SH-ADJ 1 Adj of sharpness: Copyboard, DADF front
Detail To adjust the sharpness of image in copyboard reading mode and image on the front side in duplex
stream reading mode that is set in Settings/Registration menu.
As the value is larger, the image gets sharper. If the value is too large, moire is likely to occur in
an output image of COPY and SEND.
To match the image quality with that of the back side in the duplex stream reading mode, decrease
the value when moire on the front side is stronger than the back side and increase the value when
it is weaker.
Use Case When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ2
SH-ADJ2 1 Adjustment of sharpness: DADF back side

Detail To adjust the sharpness of image on the back side in duplex stream reading mode that is set in
Settings/Registration menu.
As the value is larger, the image gets sharper. If the value is too large, moire is likely to occur in
an output image of COPY and SEND.
To match the image quality with that of the front side in the duplex stream reading mode, decrease
the value when moire on the front side is stronger than the back side, and increase the value when
it is weaker.
Use Case When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ
■ EXP-LED
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > EXP-LED
PR-EXP-Y 2 Adj of Y Pre-exposure LED current
Detail To adjust the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y).
As the current is increased, light intensity of the LED becomes strengthened so the potential of
the Photosensitive Drum is decreased.
Set 15 (the maximum current) when drum ghost (uneven density at intervals of drum
circumference) occurs.
If the image is still dark (potential is not applied well) even though adjustment has been made with
VCONT-Y or VBACK-Y, decrease the value a little at a time from 13 while checking the adjustment
result (the current is decreased in increments of approx. 7%).
Use Case - When drum ghost occurs
- When the image is still dark even though contrast potential and fogging removal potential are
adjusted
Caution When the value is decreased too much, drum ghost may occur.
0: Normal, 1: OFF, 2: Approx. 7%, 3: Approx. 14%, ..., 13: Approx. 86%, 14: Approx. 93%, 15:
Approx. 100%
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-Y, VBACK-Y
971
8. Service Mode
PR-EXP-M 2 Adj of M Pre-exposure LED current
Detail To adjust the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M).
VCONT-M or VBACK-M, decrease the value a little at a time from 13 while checking the adjustment
adjusted
Approx. 100%
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-M, VBACK-M
PR-EXP-C 2 Adj of C Pre-exposure LED current

Detail To adjust the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C).
VCONT-C or VBACK-C, decrease the value a little at a time from 13 while checking the adjustment
adjusted
Approx. 100%
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-C, VBACK-C
972
8. Service Mode
PR-EXP-K 2 Adj of Bk Pre-exposure LED current
Detail To adjust the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk).
VCONT-K or VBACK-K, decrease the value a little at a time from 13 while checking the adjustment
adjusted
Approx. 100%
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-K, VBACK-K
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

■ INSTALL
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
STIR-Y 1 Stirring of Y-color developer
Detail To stir developer in the Y-color Developing Unit.
Use Case - At installation of the machine
- When an image failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Required Time 60 sec
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-M/C/K/4
STIR-M 1 Stirring of M-color developer

Detail To stir developer in the M-color Developing Unit.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y/C/K/4
STIR-C 1 Stirring of C-color developer

Detail To stir developer in the C-color Developing Unit.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y/M/K/4
973
8. Service Mode
STIR-K 1 Stirring of Bk-color developer
Detail To stir developer in the Bk-color Developing Unit.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y/M/C/4
STIR-4 1 Stirring of all colors of developers

Detail To stir developer in the Developing Units of 4 colors (Y/M/C/Bk).
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y/M/C/K
STRD-POS 1 Auto adj frt side read pstn: DADF stream

Detail To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when stream
reading original with DADF.
The adjustment result is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS.
Use Case At DADF installation/uninstallation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Close the DADF.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The operation automatically stops after the adjustment.
3) Write the value displayed by COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS in the service label.
Caution Write the adjusted value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS
CARD 1 Card number setting

Detail To set the card number to be used for Card Reader.
A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards specified by CARD-RNG
can be used.
Use Case - At installation of the Card Reader
- After replacement of the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the number, and then press OK key.
Caution The card management information (department ID and password) is initialized.
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CARD-RNG
974
8. Service Mode
INISET-Y 1 Exe of Dev Unit (Y) initial install mod
Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Unit (Y).
1. Idle rotation of the Developing Unit
2. Initialization of the ATR Sensor
3. Secondary transfer ATVC control
4. Patch light intensity correction
5. Background correction
6. Discharge current control
7. Primary transfer ATVC control
8. Initialization of the Patch Sensor
9. Color displacement correction control
10. D-max control
11. D-half control
12. Real-time multiple tone control-Lite (creation of target)
13. Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller (twice)
14. Reset of the Developing Unit counter
Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit (Y)
Caution When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Unit of other color, do not use this item.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: xxx second (remaining time), At normal termination: OK, At abnormal
termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M/C/K/4
INISET-M 1 Exe of Dev Unit (M) initial install mod

Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Unit (M).
10. D-max control
11. D-half control
Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit (M)
termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/C/K/4
975
8. Service Mode
INISET-C 1 Exe of Dev Unit (C) initial install mod
Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Unit (C).
10. D-max control
11. D-half control
Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit (C)
termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/M/K/4
E-RDS 1 ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS

Detail To set whether to use the Embedded-RDS.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.
0: Not used, 1: Used (All the counter information is sent.)
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERDS-DAT
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol
RGW-PORT 1 Set port number of Sales Co's server

Detail To set the port number of the sales company's server to be used for Embedded-RDS.
Default Value 443
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, COM-TEST, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR
976
8. Service Mode
COM-TEST 1 Dspl connect result w/ Sales Co's server
Detail To display the result of the connection test with the sales company's server.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK, When connection is failed: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR
COM-LOG 1 Dspl connect error w/ Sales Co's server

Detail To display error information when the connection with the sales company's server failed.
Display/Adj/Set Range Year, date, time, error code, error detail information (maximum 128 characters)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, RGW-ADR
RGW-ADR 1 URL setting of Sales Company's server

Detail To set the URL of the sales company's server to be used for Embedded-RDS.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the URL.
2) Enter the URL, and then press OK key.
Caution - Do not use Shift-JIS character strings.
- Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range URL
Default Value https://b01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG
CNT-DATE 1 Set counter send start date to SC server

Detail To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter information to the sales company's
server.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available.
Use Case When the Embedded-RDS third-party expanded function is available
Display/Adj/Set Range YYYYMMDDHHMM (12 digits)
YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date, HH: Hour, MM: Minute
Default Value 000000000000
977
8. Service Mode
CNT-INTV 1 Set counter send interval to SC server
Detail To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales company's server in a unit of one
hour.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available.
Use Case When the Embedded-RDS third-party expanded function is available
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 168 (=1 week)
Unit hour
Default Value 24
Unit
INISET-4 1 All colors Dev Units initial instal mode

Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Units for all
colors.
2. Initialization of the ATR Sensors for all colors
10. D-max control
11. D-half control
- When replacing the Developing Units for all colors
Caution Use this item only when replacing Developing Units for 4 colors simultaneously.
termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/M/C/K
978
8. Service Mode
INISET-K 1 Exe of Dev Unit (Bk) initial install mod
Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Unit (Bk).
10. D-max control
11. D-half control
Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit (Bk)
termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/M/C/4
BRWS-ACT 1 ON/OFF of service browser

Detail To set ON/OFF of service browser.
ON/OFF of service browser switches whenever the main power switch is turned OFF/ON after
execution.
If connection with the UGW server is successful, "OK!" is displayed. If "NG!" is displayed, execute
a communication test using COM-TEST.
The setting is enabled after reboot. Whether the service browser is ON or OFF can be checked in
COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS-STS (1: ON, 2: OFF).
Use Case - When using the service browser
- At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution After execution, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After reboot, be sure to check the usage
status in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS-STS.
Display/Adj/Set Range At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> COM-TEST
COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS-STS
CDS-CTL 1 Set country/area when using CDS

Detail To set country/area to enable CDS.
Use Case When enabling CDS
Display/Adj/Set Range Country/area set in COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG, CA (Canada), LA (Latin America)
and HK (Hong Kong)
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG
Supplement/Memo CDS: Contents Delivery System
979
8. Service Mode
RDSHDPOS 1 Auto adj of Reader shading position
Detail To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when reading
the White Plate on the left edge of the Copyboard Glass.
The adjustment result is reflected to ADJ-S.
Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Display/Adj/Set Range At start of operation: START, During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-S
Supplement/Memo Shading: It determines the white color reference by reading the White Plate.
BIT-SVC 1 OFF/ON of Web service of E-RDS

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set ON/OFF of Web service function of E-RDS.
When OFF is selected, authentication information cannot be obtained from E-RDS.
Use Case Upon user's request
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
NFC-USE 1 ON/OFF of NFC option

Detail To set whether to enable the installed NFC option.
Set 1 when using the NFC option. [Use NFC Card Emulation] is displayed in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When installing the NFC option
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Management Settings> Device Management> Use NFC Card Emulation
Mode
BLE-USE 1 ON/OFF of BLE module option

Detail To set whether to enable the installed BLE module option.
Set 1 when using the BLE module option. The BLE setting screen is displayed in [Settings/
Registration].
Use Case When installing the BLE module option
Caution Do not set 1 when the BLE module option is not installed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
PATCH-S 2 Adj Patch Sensor S-wave intensity tgt VL

Detail To adjust the target value of the S-wave light intensity when replacing the Patch Sensor.
The light intensity of the Guide Plate under the condition of no soiling on the sensor window is
obtained.
Use Case When replacing the Patch Sensor
Caution Execute this item only for a new Patch Sensor.
980
8. Service Mode
■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
DF-WLVL1 1 White level adj in book mode: color
Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set a paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2
DF-WLVL2 1 White level adj in DADF mode: color

Detail To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually
used by the user on the DADF.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
DF-LNR 1 Deriving of DADF front/back linearity

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity in DADF mode based on the scanning data which has been
backed up at factory.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the value of the reader's service label.
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-K2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10,
DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10, DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2, DFCH2R10, DFCH2G10,
DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-K2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10,
DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10, DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2, DFCH2R10, DFCH2G10,
DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
MTF-CLC 1 Deriving of MTF filter coefficient

Detail To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the MTF value which has been
backed up.
Caution Be sure to enter the MTF values for the Scanner Unit (DADF/Reader) in MTF-M1 to 12/S1 to 12
and MTF2-M1 to 12/S1 to 12 in advance.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-M1 - M12, MTF-S1 - S12, MTF2-M1 - M12, MTF2-S1 - S12
Supplement/Memo MTF values are written on the label of the Scanner Unit in the DADF/Reader.
981
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
DF-WLVL3 1 White level adj in book mode: B&W
Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting a paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set a paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
DF-WLVL4 1 White level adj in DADF mode: B&W

Detail To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually
used by the user on the DADF.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.
BW-TGT 1 Set of B&W shading target value

Detail After the white level data (X/Y/Z) for the Standard White Plate is set, read the Standard White Plate
and set the black and white shading target value.
Use Case When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit
Caution Be sure to execute this item after execution of COPIER> ADJUST> CCD>W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-
PLT-Z.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z, SH-TRGT
■ LASER
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > LASER
LD-ADJ-Y 2 Return Y Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn
Detail When Y-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger than estimation, the Skew
Correction Motor (Y) is locked, and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color
displacement correction control is executed. This item places the Skew Correction Motor (Y) to
the center position in such cases.
Use Case When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit to identify the failure position
Caution If the cover is opened and then closed during operation, execute this item again. The operation is
not completed even if "OK!" is displayed.
982
8. Service Mode
LD-ADJ-M 2 Return M Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn
Detail When M-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger than estimation, the Skew
Correction Motor (M) is locked, and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color
displacement correction control is executed. This item places the Skew Correction Motor (M) to
LD-ADJ-C 2 Return C Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn

Detail When C-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger than estimation, the Skew
Correction Motor (C) is locked, and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color
displacement correction control is executed. This item places the Skew Correction Motor (C) to
LD-ADJ-K 2 Return Bk Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn

Detail When Bk-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger than estimation, the Skew
Correction Motor (Bk) is locked, and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color
displacement correction control is executed. This item places the Skew Correction Motor (Bk) to
H-PS-ADJ 1 Horz scan clr displc crrct among procSPD

Detail To automatically correct color displacement in horizontal scanning direction that occurs among
process speeds.
Use Case - When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit/harness
- When replacing the DC Controller PCB
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
- When color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs
2) Execute auto color displacement correction.
Caution - If this item is executed after H-PS-CK/YM, the result of manual correction is disabled.
- After execution, execute auto color displacement correction.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> LASER> H-PS-YM/CK
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Mode
983
8. Service Mode
H-PS-YM 1 Horz scan displc crrct manual crrct: Y-M
Detail To manually correct color displacement of Y- and M-color in horizontal scanning direction that
occurs among process speeds.
If color displacement is not alleviated by executing H-PS-ADJ, adjust the write start position of Y/
M-color image.
As the value is changed by 1, the image is moved by 1/32 pixel.
Use Case When color displacement in horizontal scanning direction is not alleviated with H-PS-ADJ
Caution Do not execute H-PS-ADJ after executing this item. Otherwise, the result of manual correction is
disabled.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> LASER> H-PS-ADJ/CK
Mode
H-PS-CK 1 Horz scan displc crrct manual crrct:C-Bk

Detail To manually correct color displacement of C- and Bk-color in horizontal scanning direction that
occurs among process speeds.
If color displacement is not alleviated by executing H-PS-ADJ, adjust the write start position of C/
Bk-color image.
As the value is changed by 1, the image is moved by 1/32 pixel.
Use Case When color displacement in horizontal scanning direction is not alleviated with H-PS-ADJ
Caution Do not execute H-PS-ADJ after executing this item. Otherwise, the result of manual correction is
disabled.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> LASER> H-PS-ADJ/YM
Mode
■ DPC
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > DPC
DRMRSETY 1 Forcible exe of Y Drum replacement mode
Detail To forcibly execute an operation same as warm-up rotation to the Drum Unit (Y). (Drum
replacement mode)
When this item is executed, laser power value, etc., that were corrected according to the drum
counter for Y-color, total charging time, target Vd value for potential control and drum life, are reset.
Use Case - When the machine failed to recognize replacement of the Drum Unit
- When continuously using a drum unit that had been used in another machine for a while
Caution Do not execute this item when temporarily using a drum unit that had been used in another machine
for a while for checking.
Required Time 2 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> LF> Y-DRM-LF
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETM, DRMRSETC, DRMRSETK
Supplement/Memo If, after replacing the Drum Unit, the value of COPIER> COUNTER> LF> Y-DRM-LF is larger than
21 (%), it is considered that the machine failed to recognize the replacement of the unit.
984
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > DPC
DRMRSETM 1 Forcible exe of M Drum replacement mode
Detail To forcibly execute an operation same as warm-up rotation to the Drum Unit (M). (Drum
replacement mode)
counter for M-color, total charging time, target Vd value for potential control and drum life, are
reset.
Required Time 2 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> LF> M-DRM-LF
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETY, DRMRSETC, DRMRSETK
Supplement/Memo If, after replacing the Drum Unit, the value of COPIER> COUNTER> LF> M-DRM-LF is larger than
DRMRSETC 1 Forcible exe of C Drum replacement mode

Detail To forcibly execute an operation same as warm-up rotation to the Drum Unit (C). (Drum
replacement mode)
counter for C-color, total charging time, target Vd value for potential control and drum life, are reset.
Required Time 2 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> LF> C-DRM-LF
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETY, DRMRSETM, DRMRSETK
Supplement/Memo If, after replacing the Drum Unit, the value of COPIER> COUNTER> LF> C-DRM-LF is larger than
DRMRSETK 1 Forcible exe of Bk Drum replacement mode

Detail To forcibly execute an operation same as warm-up rotation to the Drum Unit (Bk). (Drum
replacement mode)
counter for Bk-color, total charging time, target Vd value for potential control and drum life, are
reset.
Required Time 2 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> LF> K-DRM-LF
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETY, DRMRSETM, DRMRSETC
Supplement/Memo If, after replacing the Drum Unit, the value of COPIER> COUNTER> LF> K-DRM-LF is larger than
985
8. Service Mode
■ CST
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CST
DK1-SPAD 1 Set Paper Deck Unit lifter stop position
Detail To open the compartment of the Paper Deck Unit while the lifter stops at the pickup position.
The height of the Pre-separation Plate can be adjusted because the lifter is at the pickup position.
Use Case When adjusting pre-separation position after replacing the Pickup Unit/compartment
■ CLEANING
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEANING
2TR-CLN 1 Clean of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Detail To clean soiling adhered on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
Transfer toner to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller once and then execute bias cleaning to
remove soiling.
Use Case - When the backside of the paper is soiled by the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
- When contacting with the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller at the time of jam processing, etc.
TNR-COAT 1 Exe toner application to Sec Trns Roller

Detail When the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is replaced with a new one, substances leaking from
the new roller may adhere to the ITB.
By executing this item after replacement, Y-color toner is applied onto the surface of the roller, so
adhesion of substances leaking from the roller can be prevented.
Use Case When replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Caution Be sure to execute this item to the roller which surface is not soiled.
■ FIXING
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > FIXING
NIP-CHK 1 Checking of fixing nip width
Detail To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing.
When this item is executed, 2-sided print is started. A single Bk-color solid image is printed on the
1st side. Nothing is printed on the 2nd side but the paper is stopped briefly at the fixing nip.
There will be fixing nip trace at the center of the image on the 1st side of the delivered paper. Fixing
nip with at 5 mm from each edge of paper and at the center of the paper is within 8 to 10 mm, it
can be judged as appropriate.
Otherwise, a fixing failure may occur.
Use Case - When replacing the fixing-related parts (Fixing Film Unit, Pressure Roller)
- When a fixing failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set A4/LTR plain paper 2 (76 to 90 g/m2) on the Multi-purpose Tray.
2) Select "MPT", and then press OK key.
Two-sided printing is started, and a paper is automatically stopped at the fixing nip (10 seconds)
and then is automatically delivered.
3) Measure the nip width.
986
8. Service Mode
■ PANEL
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PANEL
LCD-CHK 1 Check of LCD Panel dot missing
Detail To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Control Panel.
Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel
2) Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white, black, red, green and blue.
3) Press STOP key to terminate checking.
LED-CHK 1 Check of Control Panel LED

Detail To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up.
2) Check that the LED lights up in the order.
3) Use LED-OFF to terminate checking.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-OFF
LED-OFF 1 End check of Control Panel LED

Detail To terminate the check of LED on the Control Panel.
Use Case During execution of LED-CHK
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-CHK
KEY-CHK 1 Check of key entry

Detail To check the key input on the Control Panel.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel.
2) Check that the input value is displayed.
3) Cancel the selection to terminate checking.
TOUCHCHK 1 Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel

Detail To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control Panel.
2) Press the nine "+" keys in sequence.
■ PART-CHK
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK
CL 1 Specification of operation clutch
Detail To specify the clutch to operate.
Use Case When replacing the clutch/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the value, and then press OK key.
1: Not used, 2: Toner Supply Clutch (Y) (CL2), 3: Toner Supply Clutch (M) (CL3), 4: Toner Supply
Clutch (C) (CL4), 5: Toner Supply Clutch (Bk) (CL5), 6: Not used
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL-ON
987
8. Service Mode
CL-ON 1 Operation check of clutch
Detail To start operation check of the clutch specified by CL.
ON/OFF of the clutch is repeated at intervals of 3 seconds.
Use Case When replacing the clutch/checking the operation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Drive the ITB and the drum (specify "13" in MTR and execute MTR-ON).
3) Check the gear of the Transfer Cleaning Assembly.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL, MTR, MTR-ON
FAN 1 Specification of operation fan

Detail To specify the fan to operate.
Use Case When replacing the fan/checking the operation
1: Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 (FM1), 2: Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 (FM2), 3: Not used, 4: Process
Cartridge Fan (Rear) (FM4), 5: Fixing Cooling Fan (Front) (FM5), 6: Fixing Cooling Fan (Rear)
(FM6), 7: Delivery Fan 1 (FM7), 8: Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan (FM8), 9: Delivery Fan 2
(FM9), 10: Process Cartridge Fan (Front) (FM10), 11 to 98: Not used, 99: All fans
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN-ON
FAN-ON 1 Operation check of fan

Detail To start operation check of the fan specified by FAN.
Use Case When replacing the fan/checking the operation
Required Time 1 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN
988
8. Service Mode
MTR 1 Specification of operation motor
Detail To specify the motor to operate.
Use Case When replacing the motor/checking the operation
Caution - The Image Skew Correction Motors (M31 to 34) do not operate since there is a possibility of color
displacement.
- The ITB Displacement Control Motor (M14) does not operate since there is a possibility of
damage.
- Do not operate the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor (M15) repeatedly. Otherwise,
it may be damaged.
- Motors relating to cassette (M40 to 43, M101 to 105) do not operate when cassette is closed to
prevent pickup and too much lifting of the Lifter Plate.
- The Deck Shift Motor (M106) does not operate when cassette is closed. If the High Capacity
Cassette Shift Plate is operated while the cassette is closed, it may get damage.
1: Image Skew Correction Motor (Y) (M31) *1
2: Image Skew Correction Motor (M) (M32) *1
3: Image Skew Correction Motor (C) (M33) *1
4: Image Skew Correction Motor (Bk) (M34) *1
5: Developing Motor (Y) (M5)
6: Developing Motor (M) (M6)
7: Developing Motor (C) (M7)
8: Developing Motor (Bk) (M8)
9: Bottle Motor (Y) (M9)
10: Bottle Motor (M) (M10)
11: Bottle Motor (C) (M11)
12: Bottle Motor (Bk) (M12)
13: Drum Motor (YMC) (M1), Drum Motor (Bk) (M4) and ITB Motor (M13) *2
14: ITB Displacement Control Motor (M14) *1
15: Primary Transfer Disengagement Motor (M15) *3
16: Fixing Motor (M21) (264 mm/sec)
20: Waste Toner Feed Motor (M26) and Waste Toner Stirring Motor (M45) *4
21: Fixing Shutter Motor (M27)
22: Laser Shutter Motor (M28)
23: High Capacity Cassette Shift Motor (M106) *7
24: Cassette 1, 2 Lifter Motor (M40) (Cassette 1) *5
25: Cassette 1, 2 Lifter Motor (M40) (Cassette 2) *5
26: Cassette 1, 2 Pickup Motor (M41) (Cassette 1) *5
27: Cassette 1, 2 Pickup Motor (M41) (Cassette 2) *5
28: MP Pickup Motor (M18)
29: MP Pickup Motor (M18) (Lifting and lowering of the MP Tray Pickup Roller)
30: Registration Motor (M19)
31: Duplex Feed Motor (M20)
32: Pre-Registration Motor (M44)
33: First & Second Delivery Motor (M23)
34: Reverse Motor (M24)
35: Third Delivery Motor (M25)
36: Cassette 1 Pullout Motor (M42)
37: Cassette 2 Pullout Motor (M43)
38: Cassette 3 Pullout Motor (M103) *6/ High Capacity Cassette Pullout Motor (M103) *7
39: Cassette 4 Pullout Motor (M104) *6
40: Cassette 3,4 Lifter Motor (M101) (Cassette 3) *6
41: Cassette 3,4 Lifter Motor (M101) (Cassette 4) *6
42: Cassette 3,4 Pickup Motor (M102) (Cassette 3) *6/High Capacity Cassette Pickup Motor
(M102) *7
43: Cassette 3,4 Pickup Motor (M102) (Cassette 4) *6
989
8. Service Mode
44: Deck pull-out motor (M2) (Paper Deck Unit)
45: Deck pickup motor (M1) (Paper Deck Unit)
*1: It does not operate.
*2: The three motors operate at the same time.
*3: It performs engagement/disengagement operation only once.
*4: The two motors operate at the same time.
*5: It does not operate when the Cassette 1/2 is closed.
*6: For the 2-cassette Pedestal. It does not operate when the Cassette 3/4 is closed.
*7: For the High Capacity Cassette Pedestal. It does not operate when the Cassette 3 is closed.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR-ON
Supplement/Memo Process speed (reference)
iR-ADV C5560 series: 264/222/132 mm/sec
iR-ADV C5550/5540 series: 222/132 mm/sec
iR-ADV C5535 series: 145/132 mm/sec
MTR-ON 1 Operation check of motor

Detail To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR.
After the motor operates for the specified period of time (2 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops.
Use Case When replacing the motor/checking the operation
Caution Check operation of the motor with your eyes and ears. When the specified time has passed after
the DC Controller sent a command, "OK!" is displayed even if the motor does not actually operate
due to connection failure of connector or open circuit.
When an error occurs with the target motor or operation of the machine is not available, "NG" is
displayed.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK!, At failure occurrence: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR
SL 1 Specification of operation solenoid

Detail To specify the solenoid to operate.
Use Case When replacing the solenoid/checking the operation
1: Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL1), 2 to 4: Not used, 5: First Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL5),
6: Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL6), 7: Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL7), 8 to 9: Not
used
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL-ON
SL-ON 1 Operation check of solenoid

Detail To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL.
The operation stops after "ON for 0.5 sec" => "OFF for 10 sec" => "ON for 0.5 sec" => "OFF for
10 sec" => "ON for 0.5 sec".
Use Case When replacing the solenoid/checking the operation
Required Time 1 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL
990
8. Service Mode
■ CLEAR
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
ERR 1 Clear of error code
Detail To clear the specific error code.
Use Case At error occurrence
DC-CON 1 RAM clear of DC Controller PCB

Detail To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When clearing the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB
Caution - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter
necessary setting values.
- The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
R-CON 1 RAM clear of Reader Controller PCB

Detail To clear the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB.
Use Case When clearing RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB
- The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
JAM-HIST 1 Clear of jam history

Detail To clear the jam history.
Use Case When clearing the jam history
ERR-HIST 1 Clearing of error log

Detail To clear the error logs.
Use Case When clearing the error logs
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ERR
PWD-CLR 1 Clear of system administrator password

To clear the password of the system administrator set in Settings/Registration menu.
Use Case When clearing the password of the system administrator
ADRS-BK 1 Clearing of address book

To clear the address book data.
Use Case When clearing the address book data
Caution The address book data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
991
8. Service Mode
CNT-MCON 1 Clear of Main Controller service counter
Detail To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER
Supplement/Memo See COUNTER for the target counter.
CNT-DCON 1 Clear of DC Controller service counter

Detail To clear the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When clearing the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB
MMI 1 Clear Settings/Registration setting VL

To clear the Settings/Registration setting values.
- Preferences (excluding values for Paper Type Management Settings)
- Adjustment/Maintenance
- Function Settings
- Set Destination (excluding Address Lists)
- Management Settings (excluding Department ID Management)
Use Case When clearing various setting values of Settings/Registration
Caution - The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
- If this item is executed while a login application other than User Authentication is running, it
switched to User Authentication after reboot. Set the login application using SMS as needed.
Supplement/Memo SMS (Service Management Service): An application for management which can be used on
remote UI.
MN-CON 1 Deletion of setting values

To delete the setting values of address lists, forwarding settings, Settings/Registration and service
mode.
For details, refer to "Backup Data List" in the Service Manual.
Use Case When initializing the setting values
The machine is automatically rebooted.
necessary setting value.
- RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
- If this item is executed while a login application other than User Authentication is running, it
switched to User Authentication after reboot. Set the login application using SMS as needed.
Supplement/Memo SMS (Service Management Service): An application for management which can be used on
remote UI.
CARD 1 Clear of card ID-related data

To clear the data related to the card ID (department).
Use Case When clearing the data related to the card ID
Caution The value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
992
8. Service Mode
ALARM 1 Clear of alarm log
Detail To clear alarm log.
Use Case When clearing alarm log
Caution The alarm log is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
CA-KEY 2 Deletion of CA certificate and key pair

To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered by the
user.
Use Case When a service person replaces/discards the device
2) Check that OK is displayed.
Caution - Unless this item is executed at the time of replacement/discard of the device, the CA certificate
and key pair which are additionally registered by the user remain in the HDD, which is a problem
in terms of security.
- Do not execute this item carelessly because the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally
registered are deleted when it is executed. If they are deleted mistakenly, they need to be again
registered by the user. If no CA certificate and key pair are additionally registered, the machine
condition becomes the same as the one at the time of factory shipment.
- When NG is displayed in 2), there is a possibility that deletion was not executed. In this case,
surely execute the deletion by initializing the HDD, etc.
Supplement/Memo - The CA certificate is used in the MEAP application with E-RDS and SSL client connection, and
the key pair is used in the SSL function of IPP, RUI and MEAP.
- When the main power switch is turned OFF/ON, the CA certificate and key pair which were
registered at the time of factory shipment are decompressed from the archive (/BOOTDEV/
KCMNG), and become available in the E-RDS/SSL function.
ERDS-DAT 1 Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data

Detail To initialize the SCM value of the Embedded-RDS stored in the SRAM.
SCM values are ON/OFF of E-RDS, server's port number, server's SOAP URL, and
communication schedule with the server (how often the data is acquired), etc.
The value set by E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG is cleared.
Use Case When upgrading the Bootable in the E-RDS environment
Caution Usage of the SRAM in E-RDS differs depending on the Bootable version. Therefore, unless the
SRAM data is cleared at the time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG
993
8. Service Mode
REG-CLR 2 Clear of image position correction value
Detail To clear the correction value when the value which is adjusted by image position correction control
is erratic value for some reason.
When color displacement is not corrected by image position correction control, clear the correction
value once with this item. Then, either turn OFF/ON the power or execute auto gradation
adjustment (quick adjustment) so that image position correction control is performed again.
If color displacement occurs due to image skew, use LD-ADJ-Y/M/C/K in parallel.
Use Case - When color displacement cannot be corrected although image position correction control is
performed
- When color displacement occurs due to image skew
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> LASER> LD-ADJ-Y/M/C/K
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation> Quick Adjust
Mode
USBM-CLR 1 Initialize USB MEAP priority rgst info

Detail To initialize the registered ID data retained in the OS field by calling the API provided by the OS.
Use Case When a failure occurs in USB MEAP priority registration
1TR-CLR 2 Clear primary transfer ATVC control log

Detail To clear the primary transfer ATVC control log.
Although primary transfer ATVC control is executed based on the log information, dramatic
changes in the resistance of the Primary Transfer Roller, etc. may prevent an optimum transfer
bias from being set because the control does not work properly.
When the current value (1ATVC-Y/M/C/K4) flowed to the Primary Transfer Roller at ATVC control
is out of the appropriate target value range (50 to 700), the appropriate control can be executed
by clearing the log information.
Use Case - When replacing the Primary Transfer Roller
- When the environment (temperature and humidity) changes dramatically
- When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> 1ATVC-Y/M/C/K4
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> 1TR-CLR
JV-CACHE 1 Cache clear of JAVA application

To clear the cache information used by JAVA application.
Use Case When initializing the JAVA application
LANG-CLR 2 Uninstallation of language files

Detail To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English files installed in HDD.
When installing a new language file while the maximum number of language files (11 files) have
been already installed, an existing language file needs to be uninstalled.
Use Case When deleting/switching language files
2) Download the firmware in which the necessary language files are included using SST or a USB
flash drive.
Caution A language file is not uninstalled unless the downloaded language files are installed by SST or a
USB flash drive after the execution of this item. If installation is not executed, uninstallation will be
canceled. (Status of the machine remains the same as it was before execution.)
Supplement/Memo - After the execution, language displayed on the screen becomes English. Switch the language as
needed.
- There are 9 language files (JEFIGSCKT) installed at the time of shipment.
994
8. Service Mode
FIN-MCON 1 Initial delvry dest info in controller
Detail To initialize the delivery destination information which is stored in the Main Controller.
The information needs to be cleared when the delivery destination is changed due to change in
configuration of delivery options; otherwise, malfunction occurs.
After execution, set the delivery destination again in [Output Tray Settings] in [Settings/
Registration].
Use Case When changing the configuration of delivery options
Additional Functions Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings
Mode
PLPW-CLR 2 Clear security policy setting password

To clear the password of the security administrator set in the security policy settings.
Use Case When clearing the password of the security administrator
JV-TYPE 1 Specification of MEAP cache clear target

To specify the MEAP cache area to be cleared.
The target area is divided into the 4 parts:
- A jar file of MEAP application bundled as standard
- Data of the application mentioned above
- A jar file of MEAP application installed additionally
- Data of the application mentioned above
When JV-CACHE is executed, the area specified with this item is cleared.
For details, refer to the Service Manual.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem due to MEAP application
0: Entire MEAP cache area
1: A jar file of MEAP application bundled as standard
2: A jar file and data of MEAP application bundled as standard
3: Data of MEAP application which has been installed additionally
4: A jar file and data of MEAP application which has been installed additionally
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> JV-CACHE
Supplement/Memo MEAP applications bundled as standard: system application, built-in login application
MEAP applications installed additionally: non-Canon-made login application, general application,
etc.
DK-RCV 1 Clearing of Paper Deck alarm

Detail To clear the alarm occurred in the Paper Deck.
Use Case At recovery
CUSTOM2 2 [For customization]
995
8. Service Mode
■ MISC-R
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R
SCANLAMP 1 Lighting check of Scanner Unit (frt) LED
Detail To light up the Scanning Lamp for 3 seconds under the White Plate and the Copyboard Glass
respectively.
Use Case When replacing the LED of the Scanner Unit
1PSCLB-A 1 DADF 2 faces color differ crrct (front)

Detail To acquire scanning data on the front side in order to correct the color difference between the front
and back side at the time of duplex stream reading.
A significant color difference may occur between the front and back side of the image scanned on
DADF caused by variations in the LED and changes in durability. Such a color difference is
corrected by executing 1PSCLB-B following 1PSCLB-A.
Use Case When a significant color difference occurs between the front and back side at DADF duplex reading
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the main power switch before executing 1PSCLB-B even though OK is
displayed by 1PSCLB-A.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-B
1PSCLB-B 1 DADF 2 faces color differ crrct (back)

Detail To acquire scanning data on the back side in order to correct the color difference between the front
and back side at the time of duplex stream reading.
A significant color difference may occur between the front and back side of the image scanned on
DADF caused by variations in the LED and changes in durability. Such a color difference is
corrected by executing 1PSCLB-B following 1PSCLB-A.
Use Case When a significant color difference occurs between the front and back side at DADF duplex reading
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set the document used by 1PSCLB-A on DADF, so that the front side is faced down and the
cyan image is placed at the left rear side.
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the main power switch before executing 1PSCLB-B even though OK is
displayed by 1PSCLB-A.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-A
1PCLBSET 1 DADF 2 faces color differ crrct ref side

Detail To set which side (the front or back side) should be the reference side when correcting a color
difference at the time of duplex stream reading.
The correction result is reflected after executing the following operation: specify the reference side,
execute a series of color difference correction processing, and then turn OFF/ON the power.
Use Case Before correcting color difference in DADF duplex reading
0: N/A, 1: Front side, 2: Back side
Default Value 0
996
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R
1PCLBUDR 1 DADF 2 faces clr differ crrct lowr limit
Detail To keep colors which do not need to be corrected at DADF duplex stream reading, the correction
amount is adjusted so that the effect of correction is weakened.
The result is reflected when correction of color difference is executed again after the setting is
made.
When 1 is set, unnecessary correction is not executed, but an expected effect may not be obtained
for other colors.
Use Case When color difference occurs on the colors which did not have any difference before correction
Caution Expected correction result may not be obtained.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
1PCLBOVR 1 DADF 2 faces clr differ crrct upr limit

Detail Excessive correction is sometimes made when correcting color difference in duplex stream
reading. To prevent it happens, adjust the correction amount to weaken the effect of the correction.
The result is reflected when correction of color difference is executed again after the setting is
made.
When 1 or 2 is set, excessive correction is not executed, but an expected effect may not be
obtained for other colors.
Use Case When color difference occurs on the colors which did not have any difference before correction
Caution Expected correction result may not be obtained.
0: No control, 1: Weak control, 2: Strong control
SCANLMP2 1 Lighting check of Scanner Unit (bck) LED

Detail To light up the LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) for 3 sec.
Check whether there is a missing block or no lighting in LED.
Use Case When replacing the LED of the Scanner Unit
RD-SHPOS 2 Moving to Reader Scanner Unit fix pstn

Detail To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is secured in when moving.
When moving the Reader after installation, the Reader Scanner Unit may move and get damage.
By moving the Scanner Unit to the specified position and securing it in place with a screw before
moving, damage can be prevented.
Use Case When moving the Reader after installation
Caution Be sure to move the Scanner Unit to the fixing position and secure it in place with a screw when
moving the Reader after installation. Otherwise, the Scanner Unit may get damage.
■ MISC-P
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P
P-PRINT 1 Output of service mode setting value
Detail To print the service mode setting value.
Use Case Before executing the CLEAR service mode, etc.
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
997
8. Service Mode
HIST-PRT 1 Output of jam and error history
Detail To print the jam history and error history.
Use Case When printing the jam/error history
TRS-DATA 2 Moving memory reception data to Inbox

To move the data received in memory to Inbox.
Use Case When moving the data received in memory to Inbox
Additional Functions Fax/I-Fax Inbox> Memory RX Inbox
Mode
USER-PRT 1 Settings/Registration menu list output

Detail To output Settings/Registration menu list.
Use Case When outputting Settings/Registration menu list.
LBL-PRNT 1 Output of service label

Detail To print the service label.
Use Case When printing the service label
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Place A4/LTR paper in Cassette 1.
1ATVC-EX 1 Exe of primary transfer ATVC control

Detail To execute the primary transfer ATVC control.
Execute this item for 1/1 speed and 1/2 speed in order.
Use Case When reflecting the changed target current of primary transfer ATVC control
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 1TR-TGY/TGM/TGC/TGK1/TGKT
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> 1ATVC-Y/M/C/K4
ENV-PRT 1 Temp&hmdy/surface temp of Fix Roll log

Detail To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/surface temperature of the
Fixing Roller as a log.
Use Case When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine/fixing temperature information at
trouble analysis
998
8. Service Mode
PJH-P-1 1 Detail info of print job history:100 job
To print the print job history for the latest 100 jobs with detailed information.
In the case of less than 100 jobs, the history of all print jobs is printed.
Use Case When printing the print job history with detailed information
Supplement/Memo Output the print job history with detailed information which is not displayed/printed in the job history
screen under "System Monitor>Print>Log>Printer" and in the report of the print job history.
PJH-P-2 1 Detail info of print job history:all job

To print the history of all print jobs stored in the machine with detailed information (for maximum
5000 jobs).
The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of jobs printed.
Use Case When printing the print job history with detailed information
Supplement/Memo Output the print job history with detailed information which is not displayed/printed in the job history
screen under "System Monitor>Print>Log>Printer" and in the report of the print job history.
AT-IMG-X 1 Exe image position correction control

Detail To execute a series of image position correction control operation at parts replacement.
The printer engine usually executes image position correction control at the specific timing
according to the operation status and environment change.
Use Case - When removing the Drum Unit
- When releasing pressure from the ITB
USBH-PRT 1 Output of USB device information report

Detail To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a report.
ITB-INIT 1 Initial adj of ITB reference position

Detail To make an initial adjustment of the reference position of the ITB displacement correction control.
The reference position in black mode can be checked by ITB-POS, and it in color mode can be
checked by ITB-POS2.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after closing all covers.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> MISC> ITB-POS/POS2
RPT-FILE 1 Output of report print file

Detail To save various service reports in HDD as a file.
The files can be obtained using PC to which SST has been installed or USB flash drive after starting
the machine in download mode.
Use Case When obtaining the service report as a file instead of printing the report out
Supplement/Memo File size: Approx. 1 MB at a maximum
999
8. Service Mode
RPT2USB 1 Write serv rpt file to USB flash drive
Detail To store the report file of service mode saved in HDD by RPT-FILE to a USB flash drive.
Use Case When storing the report file of service mode to a USB flash drive
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE
TNRB-PRT 1 Output of Toner Container ID report

Detail To output the ID of the Toner Container in the form of a report.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (TNRB-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When checking the ID of the Toner Container
Display/Adj/Set Range 12-digit alphanumeric
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE
1000
8. Service Mode
PSCL-PRT 1 Output grdtn/clr tone crrct log report
Detail To output the execution log of auto gradation adjustment/auto correction color tone in the form of
a report.
Use Case When checking the correction log
Caution FUL-01: Auto gradation adjustment => Full adjustment => [Start Printing]
FUL-02: Same as above (Paper type 2)
FUL-03: Same as above (Paper type 3)
FULR-01: Full adjustment => End of test pattern reading
FULR-02: Same as above (Paper type 2)
FULR-03: Same as above (Paper type 3)
FULQ-01: Full adjustment => End of internal calibration
FULQ-02: Same as above (Paper type 2)
FULQ-03: Same as above (Paper type 3)
QUI-01: Auto gradation adjustment => Quick adjustment => [Start] => or start quick adjustment at
the specified time for auto gradation adjustment
QUI-02: Same as above (Paper type 2)
QUI-03: Same as above (Paper type 3)
QUIT: Start quick adjustment at the specified time for auto gradation adjustment
QUIR-01: Quick adjustment => End of internal calibration
QUIR-02: Same as above (Paper type 2)
QUIR-03: Same as above (Paper type 3)
SHA: Uneven density correction => [Store and Finish]
Display/Adj/Set Range COLR-02: Auto correction color tone settings => Registration of correction pattern => Registration
of correction pattern 2
COLR-03: Auto correction color tone settings => Registration of correction pattern => Registration
COL: Auto correction color tone settings => Complete
MED-01: Auto gradation adjustment => Registration of paper to adjust => Registration of paper to
adjust 1
MED-04: Same as above (Paper type 2)
adjust 2
adjust 3
RADJERR: Abnormal termination of internal gradation calibration
Y-DRPRT 1 Output of drum report (Y)

Detail To output the Y-color drum report.
M-DRPRT 1 Output of drum report (M)

Detail To output the M-color drum report.
C-DRPRT 1 Output of drum report (C)

Detail To output the C-color drum report.
K-DRPRT 1 Output of drum report (Bk)

Detail To output the Bk-color drum report.
FIXPRT 1 Output of Fixing Unit report

Detail To output the Fixing Unit report.
1001
8. Service Mode
DRM-ASPD 1 Auto adjustment of Drum Motor speed
Detail To automatically adjust the rotation speed of the Drum Motor to make the peripheral speeds of the
Photosensitive Drum and ITB matched.
When this item is executed, patches are formed on the ITB while changing the rotation speed in
5 levels. Rotation speed at which the patch intervals read by the Patch Sensor are the most stable
is selected.
Use Case - When replacing the ITB Unit/ITB/Drive Roller
- When color displacement occurs
Caution Use this item when color displacement is not alleviated by executing ITB-INIT or auto color
displacement correction.
Mode
■ SYSTEM
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM
DOWNLOAD 1 Shift to download mode
Detail To make the machine enter the download mode and wait for a command.
Perform downloading by SST or a USB flash drive.
Use Case At upgrade
2) Perform downloading by SST or a USB flash drive.
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power during downloading.
Supplement/Memo SST: Service Support Tool
1002
8. Service Mode
CHK-TYPE 1 Spec HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK exe partition No.
Detail To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK.
Use Case When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK
0: All partitions (only the areas where the operation can be executed)
1: PDL-related file storage area
2: Image data storage area
3: MEAP-related area
4: Not used
5 to 6: Image data storage area
7: General application temporary area (temporary file)
8: General application-related area
9: PDL spool data (temporary file)
10: SEND-related area
11: Update-related area
12: License-related area
13: System area
14: SWAP (temporary file/memory alternative area)
15 to 16: Not used
17: Debug log area
18: Advanced Box image data storage area
19: Print data storage area
20 to 32: Not used
* When 4, 12, 13, 15 or 16 is set, nothing is cleared even if HD-CLEAR is executed.
* For 2, 5 and 6, HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK is executed to all of the areas by selecting one of them.
* By selecting 8, HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK is also executed to 7, 9, 11 and 17.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> HD-CLEAR, HD-CHECK
HD-CHECK 1 File system check of specified partition

Detail To execute system check of the partition specified by CHK-TYPE at the next startup.
Use Case When E602/E614 error (file corruption, etc.) occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter 1, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
0: Not executed, 1: Executed at next startup
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE
HD-CLEAR 1 Initialization of specified partition

To initialize the partition specified by CHK-TYPE at next startup.
Use Case When E602/E614 error (file corruption, etc.) occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter 1, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
0: Not executed, 1: Executed at next startup
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE
1003
8. Service Mode
DSRAMBUP 2 Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM
Detail To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data
which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and
the old data is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES
DSRAMRES 2 Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM

Detail To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
RSRAMBUP 2 Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM

Detail To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
RSRAMRES 2 Restore of Reader Controller PCB SRAM

Detail To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
R-REBOOT 1 Reboot of host machine (Remote)

Detail To reboot the host machine.
Use Case When the reboot is carried out with the remote control by VNC
1004
8. Service Mode
■ DBG-LOG
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > DBG-LOG
LOG2USB 2 Storage of debug log to USB memory
Detail To store a set of debug logs to the USB memory at the error occurrence.
A type of log to be collected is set in LOG-TRIG.
If there is a debug log which has been automatically saved, it is archived at this time.
Required time differs according to the device conditions and volume of log data.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory.
Caution - Wait until the machine recognizes the USB memory (approx. 10 sec.).
- During the data transfer ("ACTIVE" display), do not turn OFF the power/remove the USB memory/
use the screen for operations.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG
LOG2SRVR 2 For R&D

LOG-TRIG 2 Set of debug log storage condition
Detail To set the conditions (timing, types, etc.) to automatically store the debug logs (stored as an archive
file).
By reading the operation setting file of the setting value from the Main Controller, the conditions
written in the file are set.
When setting a new condition is necessary, read the operation setting file provided by R&D from
the USB memory.
Use Case - When changing the conditions of debug log to automatically store
- When setting a new condition
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG2USB, LOG2SRVR
HIT-STS 2 Display of debug log state

Detail To display whether archive file of the debug log which is matched with the conditions set in LOG-
TRIG exists or not.
Use Case When checking the debug log automatically saved
Display/Adj/Set Range At normal state: OK, At failure occurrence: --
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG
SYSLOG 2 For R&D

DEFAULT 2 Reset of debug log setting
Detail To clear all debug log settings and return to the state before debug log collection operation.
Use Case - When returning the device in which analyzing the cause of a problem was completed
- When resetting the debug log settings
LOG-DEL 2 Clearing of debug logs

Detail To delete the debug log file.
The debug log setting is not reset.
Use Case When clearing the debug log
HIT-STS2 2 For R&D
1005
8. Service Mode
OPTION (Specification setting mode)

■ FNC-SW
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
MODEL-SZ 1 Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size
Detail To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection size with DADF.
It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader according to the location.
0: AB configuration (6R5E) for Japan, 1: Inch configuration (5R4E) for North/Middle/South
America, 2: A configuration (3R3E) for Europe, 3: AB/Inch configuration (6R5E) for Asia, Oceania,
South America
SCANSLCT 2 ON/OFF of scan area calculate function

Detail To set ON/OFF of the function to calculate scanning area from the specified paper size.
When the paper size is larger than the original size, selecting ON reduces productivity because
the scanning area gets larger.
Use Case When matching the scanning area with the paper size
0: OFF (calculated from the detected original size)
1: ON (calculated from the specified paper size)
Default Value 0
DH-SW 2 For R&D

SENS-CNF 2 Setting of original detection size
Detail To set original detection size according to AB configuration/Inch configuration.
Set 0 for AB configuration machine, and set 1 for Inch configuration machine.
0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration
Default Value 0
1006
8. Service Mode
CONFIG 1 Set country/regn/lang/location/ppr size
Detail To set the country/region, language, location, paper size configuration for multiple system software
in HDD.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the setting item.
2) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range XX YY.ZZ.AA
XX: Country/region
JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany, IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG:
Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea, CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT:
Portugal, NO: Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ: Czech Republic,
SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia, SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG:
Bulgaria, TR: Turkey, TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam, AR: Argentina, IN: India
YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese)
ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON)
AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch configuration, 02: A configuration, 03:
Inch/AB configuration)
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
W/SCNR 1 Setting of Reader Unit installation

Detail To set installation of the Reader Unit.
1 (Installed) is automatically selected once the Reader Unit is detected at the start of the machine.
Use Case When installing/removing the Reader Unit
Default Value 0 (Printer model)/1 (Copier model)
ORG-LGL 2 Special paper size set in DADF mode: LGL

Detail To set the size of special paper (LGL configuration) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream
reading mode.
Use Case - Upon user's request
- When picking up special paper size original from DADF
0: LEGAL-R, 1: FOOLSCAP-R/FOLIO-R, 2: OFICIO-R, 3: Not used, 4: Australian FOOLSCAP-R,
5: Ecuador OFICIO-R, 6: Bolivia OFICIO-R, 7: Argentine OFICIO-R, 8: Not used, 9: Government
LEGAL-R, 10: Mexico OFICIO-R, 11: F4A, 12: India LEGAL-R
Default Value 0
ORG-LTR 2 Special paper size set in DADF mode: LTR

Detail To set the size of special paper (LTR configuration) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream
reading mode.
0: LETTER, 1: EXECUTIVE, 2: Argentine LETTER, 3: Government LETTER
Default Value 0
1007
8. Service Mode
ORG-LTRR 2 Special paper size set in DADF mode:LTRR
Detail To set the size of special paper (LTR-R configuration) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream
reading mode.
0: LTR-R, 1: G-LTR-R, 2: A-LTR-R, 3: EXECUTIVE-R, 4: OFICIO-R, 5: Ecuador OFICIO-R
Default Value 0
ORG-LDR 2 Special paper size set in DADF mode: LDR

Detail To set the size of special paper (LDR configuration) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream
reading mode.
0: LEDGER-R, 1: Argentine LETTER
Default Value 0
ORG-B5 2 Special paper size set in DADF mode: B5

Detail To set the size of special paper (B5) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode.
0: B5, 1: Korean government office paper
Default Value 0
INTROT-1 1 Set ppr interval auto adj exe interval

Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute automatic adjustments (discharge current
control and primary transfer ATVC control) at paper interval.
When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, the adjustments are executed at next
paper interval. After starting a job, however, the adjustments are not executed until the number of
sheets reaches the value set in INTPPR-2.
As the value is increased, frequency of the automatic adjustments becomes low so productivity is
increased.
Caution If the value is too large, image failure may occur.
Unit sheet
Default Value 250
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> INTPPR-2
Unit
1008
8. Service Mode
INTROT-2 1 Set auto adj exe intvl at last rotation
Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute automatic adjustments (D-max control and
real-time multiple tone control) at last rotation.
As the value is changed by 1, the number of sheets is changed by 1 sheet.
As the value is increased, frequency of the automatic adjustments becomes low so productivity is
increased.
Caution If the value is too large, image failure may occur.
Unit sheet
Default Value 1000
Unit
BK-4CSW 2 Set color mode: 1/2 SPD, single Bk mode

Detail To set the color mode of single Bk-color image at 1/2 speed.
0: Black mode, 1: Color mode
Default Value 1
MODELSZ2 2 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode

Detail To set whether to enable global support of original size detection at Copyboard reading.
Use Case Upon user's request (original consists of mixed media (AB/Inch configuration))
Caution The Document Size Sensor (Photo Sensor) is additionally required to correctly detect the
document size when the original consists of mixed media (AB/Inch configuration).
0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected with AB/Inch mixed media.
Default Value 0
SVMD-ENT 2 Setting of entry method to service mode

Detail To set the way to get in service mode to prevent information leak.
Use Case As needed
0: Factory default
1: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [4] and [9] at the same time - [Settings/Registration]
Default Value 0
1009
8. Service Mode
FXWRNLVL 2 Set Fix Film life display threshold VL
Detail To set the threshold value to display the life of Fixing Film.
This item is used to prevent the occurrence of fixing failure caused by the continuous use of the
Fixing Film beyond its life.
When FXMSG-SW is 1, this setting is enabled.
The counter for life judgment is stored in the DC Controller. The counter value cannot be changed
and checked.
Use Case When continuing to use the Fixing Unit beyond the life of the Fixing Film
0: Warning is hidden.
1: Warning is displayed when the counter for life judgment reaches the specified value. (Driving
time: 375 hours)
2: Warning is displayed when the counter for life judgment reaches the specified value. (Number
of sheets: 300000 sheets)
3: Warning is displayed when the counter for life judgment reaches the specified value. (Both
driving time and number of sheets)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSG-SW
KSIZE-SW 2 Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support

Detail To set to detect/display the Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K, 16K).
Use Case When using K size paper
Caution Go through the following: COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ; and if MODEL-SZ is "0: AB
configuration", this mode is enabled.
0: Not supported, 1: Supported
Default Value JP:0, USA:0, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:1, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
Supplement/Memo 8K paper: 270 x 390 mm, 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm
ORG-A4R 2 Special paper size set in DADF mode: A4R

Detail To set the size of special paper (A4R) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode.
When picking up A4R size original from the DADF of the Inch/AB configuration models, the size
is converted into the specified size so that an image can be formed properly.
0: A4R, 1: FOLIO-R
Default Value 0
PDF-RDCT 2 PDF reduction set at forwarding

Detail To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting the image received by IFAX
into PDF for e-mail/file transmission.
0: Following the current setting, 1: Image reduction
Default Value 0
1010
8. Service Mode
REBOOTSW 2 [Not used]
SJB-UNW 2 Reserve upper limit of secured print job
To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secured print job.
0: 50 jobs, 1: 90 jobs, 2: No limit
Default Value 1
CARD-RNG 2 Card number setting (department number)

Detail To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the Card Reader.
Use Case When setting the number of cards (departments)
Default Value 1000
SJOB-CL 1 Set of scan job canceling by logout

To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the user.
Caution The job with scanning completed cannot be canceled.
0: Cancel only scan job in waiting state, 1: Cancel all scan jobs, 2: Not canceled
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Scan job: A job after the scanning operation is completed.
DELV-FN2 2 Set of Delivery Fan 2 airflow at 1-sided

Detail To set the airflow amount of the Delivery Fan 2 (FM9) at a 1-sided job.
Use Case When the stacking condition of paper is low at the time of delivery of a 1-sided job
Caution When setting 1 or 2, be sure to receive approval from the user in advance by explaining the
following.
- Fan noise becomes louder.
- Curl may get worse (especially with moist paper).
0: OFF, 1: Half speed, 2: Full speed
Default Value 0
1011
8. Service Mode
MIBCOUNT 2 Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB
Detail To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB (Management Information
Base).
0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only displayed counter* is obtained, 2: All charge counters
are not obtained
* : Counter specified by the following: COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER 1 to 6
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 - 6
CNTR-SW 1 Init of parts counter replacement timing

Detail To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial value.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: Returned to the initial value
Default Value 0
W/RAID 1 Set of HDD Mirroring Kit installation

Detail To set installation condition of HDD Mirroring Kit.
Select "1: Installed" when installing the HDD Mirroring Kit. Select "0: Not installed" when removing
the HDD Mirroring Kit.
Use Case When installing/removing HDD Mirroring Kit
Default Value 0
PSWD-SW 1 Password type set to enter service mode

Detail To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into service mode.
2 types are available: one for "service technician" and the other for "system administrator + service
technician".
When selecting the type for "system administrator + service technician", enter the password for
service technician after the password entry by the user's system administrator.
Use Case Upon request from the user who concerns security
0: No password, 1: Service technician, 2: System administrator + service technician
Default Value 0
SM-PSWD 2 Password setting for service technician

Detail To set password for service technician that is used when getting into service mode.
Use Case When password is required to get into service mode
Caution Be sure to select 1 or 2 with PSWD-SW in advance.
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW
1012
8. Service Mode
RPT2SIDE 1 Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output
Detail To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service mode.
Use Case When making 1-sided report output
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default Value 1
PSCL-MS 1 Set of auto gradation adj (full) tgt SPD

Detail To set the speed to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
When 0 is set, it is executed only at 1/1 speed. When 2 is set, it is executed at all speeds.
0: 1/1 speed, 1: Not used, 2: All speeds
Default Value 2
DMX-DISP 1 ON/OFF auto grdtn adj D-max PASCAL ctrl

Detail To set whether to execute D-max PASCAL control at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
When 0 is set, D-max PASCAL control and PASCAL control are executed. Four A4-size sheets
are used for test print (one for D-max PASCAL control and three for PASCAL control).
When 1 is set, only PASCAL control (gradation adjustment) is executed. Three A4-size sheets are
used for test print (for PASCAL control).
Use Case According to the usage of the user
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
INVALPDL 1 Disable of PDL license

To disable the registered PDL license.
When "1: Disabled" is set, PDL is disabled even if a PDL license is registered. This is set to the
machines installed at convenience stores, which do not allow PDL to be used.
Use Case When prohibiting the use of PDL
0: Registered PDL license is enabled, 1: Disabled
Default Value 0
IMGCNTPR 1 Setting of image quality mode

Detail To set the image quality mode.
When 0 is set, "image quality priority" mode is applied. When 1 is set, "counter priority" mode is
applied. When 2 is set, "counter priority (image quality priority for image only)" mode is applied.
0: Image quality priority mode, 1: Counter priority mode, 2: Counter priority mode (image quality
priority for image only)
Default Value 1
1013
8. Service Mode
CDS-FIRM 1 Set to allow firmware update by admin
To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user (administrator).
When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater can be activated from the user mode.
Use Case When allowing the administrator to update the firmware
Caution Do not use it for purposes other than collecting log files. In Japan, the firmware cannot be updated
by user. Be sure to return the value to 0 after use.
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
CDS-MEAP 1 Set to allow MEAP installation by admin

To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to install MEAP applications and enable iR options
from CDS.
When 1 is set, Updater can be activated from Settings/Registration menu.
Use Case When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and enable iR options from CDS
Default Value 1
CDS-UGW 1 Set to allow firmware update from UGW

To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server.
When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater accepts the operation from the UGW server in cooperation with
CDS.
Use Case When allowing update of the firmware from the UGW server
LOCLFIRM 1 Set to allow firmware update by file

To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the firmware from the remote UI using
a local file.
This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency situations.
Use Case When allowing the administrator to update the firmware using a file
Default Value 1
1014
8. Service Mode
MC-FANSW 1 Setting of Controller Fan speed
Detail To set full speed/half speed to the Controller Fan 1 and 2 .
When 1 is set, the heat exhaust efficiency is increased.
Use Case - When HDD damage occurs multiple times
- When the machine is installed in a high temperature environment in which HDD damage is likely
to occur
0: Half speed, 1: Full speed
Default Value 0
BXNUPLOG 2 [Not used]

SDLMTWRN 1 Cpcty warn dspl ON/OFF: E-mail/I-Fax TX
Detail To set whether to display the warning message when sending data that exceeds the upper limit
value for the transmission data size via E-mail/I-Fax.
Use Case For customization
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending
Mode
AUTO-OUT 1 ON/OFF of jammed ppr auto ejctn function

Detail To set ON/OFF of jammed paper automatic ejection function.
When 1 is set, jammed paper is not delivered to the ejection position, but it stays at the current
position at jam occurrence.
Use Case - When user does not need automatic ejection of jammed paper
- When location of jammed paper is necessary to analyze the cause of a problem
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
JLK-PWSC 2 ON/OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan

To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication document with the MEAP application.
Use Case When scanning the PCAM password authentication document
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
FAX-INT 2 Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode

Detail To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception print automatically.
0: Normal, 1: Interruption operation mode
Default Value 0
1015
8. Service Mode
PDL-Z-LG 1 Setting of drawing algorithm
Detail To switch the drawing algorithm of the iR C series and the iR-ADV C series to obtain output
expected by the user.
When 0 is set, image is output as displayed on the screen by the new algorithm adopted from the
iR-ADV C Series. Pseudo outline (boundary for processing divided graphics separately) occurred
with the iR C series does not occur. However, when PDL job with special data structure is sent,
output expected by the user may not be obtained.
When 1 is set, the drawing algorithm adopted by the conventional iR C series is used. Output
equivalent to that of the iR C Series can be obtained; however, drawing-related phenomenon
occurred with the series occurs.
Caution Do not use setting value 2 and 3.
0: Drawing algorithm of iR-ADV C series, 1: Drawing algorithm of the conventional iR C series, 2,
3: For R&D use
Default Value 0
CDS-LVUP 1 Set to allow CDS periodical update

To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform periodical update linked with CDS.
When 1 is set, setting of periodical update can be made in Settings/Registration menu/via remote
UI.
When 2 is set, setting of periodical update can be made on the Updater screen in service mode.
Use Case When allowing the user/service technician to perform periodical update
0: Prohibited periodical update
1: Display the periodical update setting screen in Settings/Registration menu/on remote UI
2: Display the periodical update setting screen on the Updater in service mode
Related Service Mode Updater
Additional Functions Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Periodical Update
Mode
1016
8. Service Mode
AMSOFFSW 1 Enabling of AMS mode
Detail To enable the AMS mode.
When 0 is set, the AMS mode is enabled. The AMS mode is automatically enabled when the
following 2 conditions are satisfied.
- AMS license for an iR option is installed.
- AMS-supported Login application (User Authentication, etc.) is activated.
Use Case When enabling AMS mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Check that AMS-supported Login application is activated.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
4) Check that [Role Management] is displayed on remote UI.
0: AMS mode enabled, 1: AMS mode disabled
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR> ST-AMS
Additional Functions (Remote UI) User Management> Authentication Management> Role Management
Mode
Supplement/Memo AMS: Access Management System
In AMS mode, [Role Management] is displayed on remote UI.
UA-OFFSW 1 ON/OFF of unified auth function

To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function.
Set 0 when not preferring to use the Unified Authentication function because of security concern.
Use Case Upon user's request (not to use the Unified Authentication function)
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Unified Authentication: A function with which it is considered that login authentication under it is
performed by logging in it using SSO-H.
MIB-NVTA 1 RFC-compatible character stringMIB write

Detail As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in order to link with LUI entry value.
This violates RFC order, so a problem like garbled 2-byte characters may occur in the SNMP
monitoring system, such as the 3rd vendor's MPS.
Whether non-RFC-compatible character strings are written in MIB can be set using this mode.
When 1 is set, only the character strings which are strictly compatible with RFC are written. (Writing
operation is executed from the SNMP manager.) LUI is not linked.
Use Case Upon user's request (operation with RFC-compatible system)
0: Compatible in a conventional manner, 1: RFC-compatible, 2 to 3: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo RFC: Document of internet-related technical standards
NVT-ASCII: Network Virtual Terminal-ASCII
MIB-EXT 1 For R&D
1017
8. Service Mode
SVC-RUI 1 Enabling of RUI function for servicing
Detail To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing (not provided to end users).
When 0 is set, the RUI function is disabled.
When setting the value other than 0, RUI function is enabled. The value entered becomes
password to use the RUI function.
Use Case When preferring to use the import function of background image file of main menu/custom menu
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (other than 0), and then press OK key.
Default Value 0
LCDSFLG 1 Enabling of local CDS server

Detail To set whether to use the local CDS server.
When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
Use Case When using the local CDS server
Caution When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CDS-FIRM
Additional Functions Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Software Management
Mode Setting> Setting
Supplement/Memo When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plug-in is required.
STNDBY-B 1 Setting of duration of standby mode

Detail To set the duration of standby mode.
In standby mode, the Fixing Film and the Pressure Roller are heated/rotated while they are
engaged so it is possible to make an output at specified FCOT. Set 1 to 4 to maintain the FCOT.
Increase the value when standby mode is cleared because of taking a long time for login
authentication.
When 4 is set, the time set in [Auto Sleep Time] in [Settings/Registration] is applied.
Use Case - Upon user's request (to maintain FCOT)
- At login authentication
Caution By setting a value other than 0 when the machine is not frequently used, the life may become
shorter than the estimated life.
0: OFF, 1: 1 minute, 2: 5 minutes, 3: 10 minutes, 4: Sleep shift time
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time
Mode
1018
8. Service Mode
BXSHIFT 1 Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin
Detail To set whether to judge the job as a job "without binding" when storing a PDL job in Inbox while
the binding margin is set to "0".
By setting the binding margin to 0 mm while "0" is set, the job is processed as "without binding".
"Booklet" in "Options" on the Inbox screen can be also used.
When "1" is set, it is judged as "with binding" even the binding margin is 0 mm so "Booklet", which
has an exclusive relationship with "binding", cannot be used.
Caution When storing a PDL job in Inbox while 1 is set, "Booklet" in "Options" on the Inbox screen cannot
be used.
0: Without binding, 1: With binding
Default Value 0
SELF-CHK 2 For R&D

HOME-SW 1 Set screen displayed with Main Menu key
Detail To set whether to display the main menu screen or the screen registered as the startup screen
when pressing Main Menu key.
Use Case Upon user's request (to change the startup screen)
0: Main Menu screen, 1: Screen registered as the startup screen
Default Value 0
NO-LGOUT 1 Display/hide of logout button

To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button.
When 0 is set, [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout with the ID key is enabled.
(Normal)
When 1 is set, [Logout] button is not displayed, and logout with the ID key is disabled.
Use Case Upon user's request (for customization, etc.)
0: Display, 1: Hide
Default Value 0
T-DLV-BK 1 Bk Tonr Cont prior dvry alarm notice tmg

Detail To set the toner level as the timing to notify the prior delivery alarm for the Bk-color Toner Container.
Use Case When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the usage status
Caution Since toner level is calculated based on the toner supply count, some errors may occur.
Unit %
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T-DLV-CL
Unit
1019
8. Service Mode
T-DLV-CL 1 YMC Tonr Cont prior dvry alm notice tmg
Detail To set the toner level as the timing to notify the prior delivery alarm for the Y/M/C-color Toner
Container.
Caution Since toner level is calculated based on the toner supply count, some errors may occur.
Unit %
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T-DLV-BK
Unit
JM-ERR-D 2 Set of error display of 0CAx jam (DCON)

Detail To set whether to display "0CAx" jam as the error "E996-0CAx".
In the case of a jam, log cannot be obtained depending on the timing.
By selecting 1 when the jam "0CAx" occurs, it is displayed as the error "E996-0CAx" so that the
log can be obtained.
Use Case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0CAx jam
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-R
JM-ERR-R 2 Set of error display of 0071 jam (RCON)

Detail To set whether to display 0071 jam as the error "E996-0071".
In the case of a jam, a log may not be able to be obtained depending on the timing.
By selecting 1 when the 0071 jam occurs, it is displayed as an error so that a log can be obtained.
Use Case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D
ASLPMAX 1 Set auto sleep shift time maximum value

Detail Set auto sleep shift time maximum value.
0: 4 hours, 1: 60 minutes
1020
8. Service Mode
SEND-SPD 2 ON/OFF of SEND operation speed-up
Detail To set whether to speed up the SEND operation.
Usually, speed of SEND/XBOX is increased by performing image conversion during SEND and
Scan.
Reading speed may decrease when scanning large size color original at high resolution or when
competing operation occurs with another job during scanning. Set 1 to keep the speed.
When failure with MEAP application occurs, set 1.
Use Case - When reading speed is decreased during SEND and Scan
- When failure with MEAP application occurs
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
2TR-TBLS 1 Set sec transfer bias correction table

Detail To set the secondary transfer bias correction table according to the paper to be used.
Since physical properties of paper are different for each location, use the table according to the
paper to be used.
Use Case When using paper for a location other than the intended one
0: According to the location, 1: For Japan, 2: For Europe, 3: For USA, 4: For Asia
Default Value 0
VER-CHNG 2 Setting of firmware update operation

Detail To set how to update firmware of PCB/option which has been installed/replaced by comparing the
version of it with the version stored in the Flash PCB of the Main Controller.
If combination of firmware versions of PCB/option stored in the Main Controller and the version in
PCB/option after installation/replacement is not appropriate (operation with the combination of
firmware versions has not yet been checked), failure where analysis is difficult may occur.
It is possible to check the firmware versions at the start of the machine, and automatically write
the firmware stored in the Main Controller in PCB/option collectively as needed.
When 0 is set, versions are not checked and firmware update is not performed. Therefore, it is
necessary to manually update the versions using a USB flash drive/SST.
When 1 is set, firmware is updated if the version in PCB/option is old. However, it is not updated
if the version is new or old and new versions are mixed.
When 2 is set, a compatible firmware (the version where operation has been checked) is written
from the Main Controller regardless of whether the version in PCB/option is old or new.
Use Case When installing/replacing PCB/option having firmware
0: Keep the current firmware version.
1: Update the firmware if the version in PCB/option is older than that stored in the Main controller.
If the version is new or old and new versions are mixed, firmware is not updated.
2: Update the firmware regardless of whether the version is old or new if the version in PCB/option
differs from that stored in the Main Controller.
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo When updating the firmware, the main menu is displayed on the Control Panel at startup and then
a message prompting to update firmware is displayed.
By pressing [Update], the machine reboots immediately and firmware is updated.
By pressing [Skip], it returns to the main menu. The message is displayed again at next startup.
FAX-STR 1 [For customization]

CE-SW 1 [Reserve]
LIMFNC-M 2 [For customization]
1021
8. Service Mode
DP-DRM-Y 1 [Reserve]
Unit
DP-DRM-M 1 [Reserve]
Unit
DP-DRM-C 1 [Reserve]
Unit
DP-DRM-K 1 [Reserve]
Unit
PICLOGIN 1 ON/OFF of Picture Login display

Detail To set whether to display "Picture Login" in Settings/Registration menu.
Use Case When switching the Picture Login function
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Management Settings> User Management> Authentication Management> Use User
Mode Authentication> Picture Login
DP-DV-Y 1 [Reserve]
Unit
DP-DV-M 1 [Reserve]
Unit
DP-DV-C 1 [Reserve]
Unit
DP-DV-K 1 [Reserve]
Unit
DP-FIX 1 [Reserve]
Unit
1022
8. Service Mode
1TRDELAY 2 ON/OFF of image formation timing delay
Detail To set whether to delay the image formation timing when density at image leading edge is low.
Image writing starts while the potential of the Photosensitive Drum is still unstable, density at image
leading edge may become low.
When 1 is set, the timing to start image writing is delayed so the image quality is improved.
However, time required for preprocessing is increased for each job so that productivity is
decreased.
Use Case When low leading edge density occurs
Caution When 1 is set, productivity for each job is decrease.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
T-DLV2CL 1 YMC Tonr Cont (Small) prior dvry alm tmg

Detail To set the toner level as the timing to notify the prior delivery alarm for the Y/M/C-color Toner
Container (Small).
Unit %
Unit
TRYFLOFF 2 ON/OFF of full detection

Detail To set whether to perform full detection.
When a finisher is disconnected from the host machine, full detection becomes unavailable so
operation of the machine is disabled.
If there is full detection flag which has been removed from the host machine at installation of a
finisher, reinstall it so the operation of the host machine alone becomes available.
If there is no full detection flag, set 1 for this item to disable the full detection so the operation of
the host machine becomes available.
Use Case When temporarily operating the host machine without a finisher due to failure/repair
Caution - When 1 is set, stacking failure or paper jam may occur.
- Be sure to change the value back to 0 after connecting the disconnected finisher again.
0: ON (Normal), 1: OFF
Default Value 0
1023
8. Service Mode
ITBGST 2 ON/OFF ITB static elim mode for coat ppr
Detail To set whether to neutralize electric charge on the ITB.
With coated paper where paper allotted voltage is low, potential difference on the ITB surface tends
to be large depending on whether there is toner. Therefore, when coated papers are fed
continuously, ghost image may occur on location that differs for each paper.
When 1 is set, paper interval becomes wider extremely only for coated paper. Primary transfer
current flows to a much larger area of the ITB so residual charge is removed. Ghost image can be
reduced, but productivity is decreased.
Use Case When ghost image occurs on coated paper at intervals of ITB circumference
Caution When 1 is set, productivity for coated paper is decreased extremely (approx. 15%).
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Ghost image at intervals of ITB circumference: An image failure that occurs only when feeding
coated paper continuously. It does not occur when feeding a single sheet of the paper.
DCONRTRY 2 Set of retry at DCON comctn error occur

Detail To set whether to perform retry processing when communication error occurs between the Main
Controller and the DC Controller.
Set 1 to 3 when E733 occurs. Communication error may be avoided by retry. (It is effective
especially when E733-0001/0002/0005 occurs.)
If communication error occurs during finishing job while 3 is set, duplicated pages may be output
due to retry. In such case, set 0 to 2. Since retry is not performed during finishing job, duplication
of pages does not occur, but E733 occurs.
Use Case When E733 occurs
Caution When 3 is set, duplication of pages may occur during finishing job.
0: OFF
1: OFF during job, ON in other states
2: OFF during finishing job, ON in other states
3: ON
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo Finishing job: Job that 2-sided print, binding and/or collate set in "Finishing" of the printer driver.
FL-START 2 [For customization]
1024
8. Service Mode
STAY-OUT 1 ON/OFF jammed ppr ejctn: MP Tray pickup
Detail To set whether to forcibly eject jammed paper when a size mismatch jam or a stationary jam occurs
at the time of pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray.
When 0 is set, the host machine stops at the time of occurrence of a jam. Manually perform jam
removal.
When 1 is set, the host machine does not stop even if a jam occurs. When the delivery destination
specified by the user is the host machine, jammed paper is ejected. When an option is specified
as the delivery destination, it is not ejected.
Use Case When reducing the number of jam removal which occurs frequently because of setting paper
whose length is longer than the specified length of the Multi-Purpose Tray
Caution - When 1 is set, jammed paper is forcibly fed in the event of a stationary jam not caused by paper
size, and consequently noise or abrasion of roller may occur.
- It takes time until pickup of the second paper because paper size is judged with the first paper
at the time of pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray (productivity is decreased).
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> MF-LG-ST
Supplement/Memo When 1 is set, jammed paper being ejected may trigger another jam. When a jam is removed, size
mismatch jam is displayed.
JLG-FLT 2 Set job log tiered billing cntr record

Detail To set whether to record the values of tiered billing counters in job log.
When 1 is set, counter values are recorded.
When a value other than 0 is set for VC-CNT, this setting is enabled.
This item is displayed only with the machines for North America and Europe.
Use Case When the tiered billing counter values are required
0: OFF (Not recorded), 1: ON (Recorded)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> VC-CNT
■ DSPLY-SW
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
UI-COPY 2 Display/hide of copy screen
Detail To set whether to display or hide the copy function.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
1025
8. Service Mode
UI-BOX 2 Display/hide of Inbox screen
Detail To set whether to display the Inbox function.
The setting value1 and 2 of this item are linked with the values (ON and OFF) of Store Location
Display Settings> Main Box in Settings/Registration menu respectively. The setting is reflected
after turning OFF/ON the power.
0: No Inbox function (Storing is not available even with PDL to Inbox.)
1: Inbox function is active
2: Inbox function is active (with limitation; Storing is available with PDL to Inbox despite no display
on the Control Panel/remote UI)
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Mail Box
Mode
UI-SEND 2 Display/hide of send screen

Detail To set whether to display or hide the SEND function.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
UI-FAX 2 Display/hide of FAX screen

Detail To set whether to display or hide the FAX function.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
NWERR-SW 2 OFF/ON of network-related error display

Detail To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display.
When setting "0: OFF" while the machine is not connected to network, the error message "Check
the network connection." is not displayed.
Use Case When using the machine as a copy machine
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0 (Copier model)/1 (Printer model)
1026
8. Service Mode
T-CRG-SW 2 ON/OFF of Toner Cntner rplce scrn dspl
Detail To set whether to display the specified toner replacement screen in [Settings/Registration].
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner
Mode
FXMSG-SW 2 ON/OFF Fixing Ass'y replacement message

Detail To set whether to display the message prompting to replace the Fixing Assembly on the Control
Panel when the counter for life judgment reaches the specified value.
When the setting values of FXMSG-SW and FXWRNLVL are 1, the Fixing Assembly life detection
is performed.
When the Fixing Assembly reaches its life, the Fixing Assembly replacement message "Fixing
roller needs to be replaced. (Call service representative.)" is displayed. In this case, perform the
following procedure.
1) Turn OFF the main power switch, and replace the Fixing Film Unit and Pressure Roller.
2) Turn ON the main power switch and execute CNT-DCON.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> FXWRNLVL
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CNT-DCON
UI-PRINT 2 Set of secured print-related UI display

Detail To set whether to display UI related to secured print.
0: Hide all UIs related to secured print
1: Display all UIs related to secured print
2: Hide Secured Print button in the main menu and the simple authentication settings in Settings/
Registration menu
Default Value 0
IMGC-ADJ 1 ON/OFF of img adj item display: Set/Reg

Detail To set whether to display the item relating to image adjustment in Settings/Registration menu.
When 1 is set, detailed image adjustment procedure will be displayed only for the duplicated paper
specified with the following settings: Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Type Management
Settings.
Use Case As needed
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Paper Settings> Set Paper Type Management
Mode
1027
8. Service Mode
UI-RSCAN 2 ON/OFF of remote scan screen display
Detail To set whether to display the remote scan screen on the Control Panel.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
UI-WEB 2 Display/hide of Web browser screen

Detail To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
UI-HOLD 2 ON/OFF of hold job screen display

Detail To set whether to display the hold job screen on the Control Panel.
0: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is OFF)
1: Display (when POD function is ON and JAL is OFF)
2: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is ON)
3: Hide (when POD function is ON and JAL is ON)
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo POD function: JDF + HOLD functions
JAL function: A function to save the print result as a thumbnail.
TNR-WARN 1 ON/OFF of toner warning display

Detail To set whether to display the toner level warning.
0: ON, 1: OFF
RMT-CNSL 1 Allow console application connection

Detail To set whether to allow connection from a console application (RemoteConsole).
When 1 is set, logs of MEAP application can be collected via the console application activated on
a PC.
Use Case When collecting logs of MEAP application
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
1028
8. Service Mode
UI-SBOX 2 ON/OFF of Advanced Box screen display
Detail To set ON/OFF of the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel.
Display Settings> Advanced Box/Network in Settings/Registration menu respectively. The setting
is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power.
Use Case When not displaying the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel
0: OFF, 1: ON
Additional Functions Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Advanced Box/Network
Mode
UI-MEM 2 ON/OFF of memory media screen display

Detail To set ON/OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control Panel.
Display Settings> Memory Media in Settings/Registration menu respectively. The setting is
reflected after turning OFF/ON the power.
Use Case When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Memory Media
Mode
UI-NAVI 2 Display/hide of useful feat intro

Detail To set whether to display or hide "Introduction to Useful Features" in the main menu.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
FCOT-DSP 1 [Not used]

UI-CUSTM 2 ON/OFF of custom menu screen display
Detail To set ON/OFF of the custom menu screen display on the Control Panel.
Use Case When not displaying the custom menu screen on the Control Panel
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
CNTCNFSW 1 [Not used]
1029
8. Service Mode
SDTM-DSP 1 ON/OFF of auto shutdown shift time dspl
Detail To set whether to display [Auto Shutdown Time] and [Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer] in [Settings/
Registration].
Use Case When switching to display or hide the items related to auto shutdown
Caution When 0 is set, automatic shutdown is not executed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Additional Functions Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Shutdown Time, Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer
Mode
WT-WARN 1 Dspl/hide of Wst Tonr Cntner prep mssg

Detail To set whether to display the preparation warning message of the Waste Toner Container on the
status area of LUI.
Use Case When there is no need to notify the preparation timing of the Waste Toner Container to the user
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
UI-PPA 2 ON/OFF of PPA screen display

Detail To set whether to display PPA-related information on the Control Panel or remote UI.
The setting is linked with LGCY-SCP. When LGCY-SCP is set to 0, the setting of this item becomes
1. When LGCY-SCP is set to 1, the setting of this item becomes 0.
Use Case When not displaying PPA-related information on the screen
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0 (non PPA-installed machine)/1 (PPA-installed machine)
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> LGCY-SCP
print.
CE-DSP 2 [Reserve]
LOCAL-SZ 1 ON/OFF area-spec stdrd size ppr set scrn
Detail To set whether to display the area-specific standard size paper on the paper settings screen in
Settings/Registration menu.
When 1 is set, paper type (FOOLSCAP, OFFICIO, etc.) can be set on the paper settings screen
for each paper source.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Additional Functions Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings
Mode
1030
8. Service Mode
VC-HIST 2 ON/OFF tiered base pricing log display
Detail To set whether to display the video count logs of the tiered base pricing.
When 1 is set, logs of video count correction value can be displayed on the Check Counter screen.
Use Case When explaining the tiered base pricing status to the user
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> VC-AVE
Supplement/Memo Video count correction value: Average of the video count values for 3 colors (Y/M/C) or 4 colors
(Y/M/C/Bk). Whether to include Bk-color needs to be set in VC-AVE.
MD-PSCL 2 For R&D

T-LW-BK 1 Set Bk-clr Tonr Cont level warn thrshld
Detail To set the threshold value for the toner level in the Bk-color Toner Container.
When the toner level becomes below the threshold value while TNR-WARN is 0, a toner level
warning message "Toner is low. Replacement not yet needed." is displayed on the Control Panel.
As the value is incremented by 1, the threshold value is increased by 1%. As the value is larger,
the timing to display the message becomes earlier.
Use Case When changing the timing to display the toner level warning message for the user to whom toner
is not delivered automatically
Unit %
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> TNR-WARN
Supplement/Memo It is not linked with COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T-DLV-BK.
Unit
T-LW-CL 1 Set Y/M/C Tonr Cont level warn thrshld

Detail To set the threshold value for the toner level in the Y/M/C-color Toner Container.
Unit %
Supplement/Memo It is not linked with COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T-DLV-CL.
Unit
1031
8. Service Mode
T-LW2-CL 1 Set Y/M/C Tonr Cont (S) lvl warn thrshld
Detail To set the threshold value for the toner level in the Y/M/C-color Toner Container (Small).
Unit %
Unit
SND-NAME 1 Setting of [Scan and Send] button name

Detail To set the name of [Scan and Send] button displayed in the main menu.
0: [Scan and Send], 1: [Scan], 2: [Scan]
Default Value 0
PCMP-DSP 1 Set copy cmpl scrn dspl:chg w/devc alone

Detail To set whether to display the screen indicating completion of copying at the time of charging with
a device alone.
When 0 is set, a message "Copying is complete. Do you want to start the job again with the same
settings?" is not displayed in a pop-up screen.
When COIN is 4, this setting is enabled.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN
FXUF-DSP 1 [Reserve]
FXLR-DSP 1 [Reserve]
DVLF-DSP 1 [Reserve]
1032
8. Service Mode
■ NETWORK
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
RAW-DATA 2 Setting of received data print mode
Detail To set print mode for the received image data.
This item is used to identify the cause whether it's due to image data or image processing in the
case of problem with received image.
Use Case When a problem with received image occurs
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after recovering from the problem.
0: Normal print operation, 1: Print with original data without image processing
Default Value 0
IFAX-LIM 2 No. of max print lines at IFAX reception

Detail To set the maximum number of lines for e-mail text to be printed when receiving IFAX.
Setting of this item can prevent endless printing of the attached file data in the case of receiving
an error e-mail or failure in interpretation of the context.
Selecting 0 prints the header/footer in 1 sheet when receiving e-mail text without attached file.
Use Case When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception
0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited
Default Value 500
SMTPTXPN 2 Setting of SMTP TX port number

To set SMTP transmission port number.
Default Value 25
SMTPRXPN 2 Setting of SMTP reception port number

To set SMTP reception port number.
Default Value 25
POP3PN 2 Setting of POP3 reception port number

To set POP3 reception port number.
Default Value 110
1033
8. Service Mode
FTPTXPN 2 Specification of SEND port (FTP) number
To specify address port (FTP) number for SEND.
Default Value 21
STS-PORT 2 [Not used]

CMD-PORT 2 [Not used]
NS-CMD5 2 Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method at SMTP auth
To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.
NS-GSAPI 2 Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth

To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
Default Value 0
NS-NTLM 2 Limit NTLM auth method at SMTP auth

To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
Default Value 0
1034
8. Service Mode
NS-PLNWS 2 Limit plaintext auth at SMTP auth encry
To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP
authentication under the environment where the communication packet is encrypted.
Default Value 0
NS-PLN 2 Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry

To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP
authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted.
Default Value 0
NS-LGN 2 Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth

To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP authentication.
Default Value 0
MEAP-PN 2 HTTP port No.setting of MEAP application

To set HTTP port number of MEAP application.
Caution Do not specify port 8080 when the Print Server is connected. Otherwise, you cannot browse the
device RUI in which MEAP authentication application is running (Port 8080 is reserved for
redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side.)
Default Value 8000
1035
8. Service Mode
CHNG-STS 2 [Not used]
CHNG-CMD 2 [Not used]
MEAP-SSL 2 HTTPS port setting of MEAP
To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP of MEAP.
Use Case When specifying the setting of HTTPS port for MEAP
Default Value 8443
LPD-PORT 2 Setting of LPD port number

To set the LPD port number.
Default Value 515
Supplement/Memo LPD port: Network port for TCP/IP communication when making prints through network.
WUEV-SW 2 Setting of sleep notification execution

Detail To set whether to notify the sleep mode to the application (imageWARE, etc) on the network when
shifting to/recovering from the sleep mode.
0: Notified, 1: Not notified
Default Value 0
WUEV-INT 2 Setting of sleep notification interval

Detail To set the interval of sleep notification.
Caution This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is set to 0: Notified.
Unit sec
Default Value 600
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW
Unit
1036
8. Service Mode
WUEV-POT 2 Port number setting for sleep notice
Detail To set port number of the PC to notify the sleep mode.
Default Value 11427
WUEV-RTR 2 Setting of sleep notification range

Detail To set the number of available routers to the target for sleep notification.
Default Value 3
WUEN-LIV 2 Recovery time setting after sleep notice

Detail To set the time from the sleep start from network without job assignment until the mode is shifted
to the sleep mode.
Use Case When setting the startup time after sleep notification
Unit sec
Default Value 15
Unit
IFX-CHIG 1 Set operation by IFAX recv mail content

Detail To set the number of characters for the IFAX received mail content, so that the mail is not printed/
forwarded when the characters in the text is less than the number of specified characters.
This machine can output blank paper because some senders send e-mail text consists of linefeed
codes only. In such case, specify 2 (number of characters) so that there will be no output of blank
paper.
In the case of specifying any number other than 0, header/footer is printed/forwarded in 1 sheet
only if the e-mail (body) text is less than the specified value while no TIFF file is attached.
As the value is incremented by 1, the number of target characters in e-mail body text is increased
by 1 character.
Use Case When reducing print of blank paper due to e-mail received by IFAX
Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no print of e-mail (body) text if
the number of characters is less than the specified value.
0: E-mail (body) text is not ignored.
Unit char
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo 1 Japanese Kanji character is calculated as 2 bytes, and the control codes (such as linefeed code,
etc) are included in the number of characters.
1037
8. Service Mode
DNSTRANS 1 Setting of DNS query priority protocol
To set priority of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) for DNS query.
In the case of using both IPv6 and IPv4 while the DNS server supports IPv4, it takes time because
of timeout when executing DNS query with priority on IPv6. Giving priority on query by IPv4 can
shorten the time.
Use Case When it takes time to execute DNS query with priority on IPv6 because the DNS server supports
IPv4
0: IPv4, 1: IPv6
Default Value 1
PROXYRES 2 Setting of proxy response to Windows

To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status when an inquiry is received
via Windows while the device is in sleep mode.
Use Case When executing status response for query from Windows correctly
0: No proxy response, 1: Proxy response
Default Value 1
WOLTRANS 1 ON/OFF sleep recover by packet reception

To set whether to recover from deep sleep when receiving unicast packets to the machine
(excluding proxy response).
1: ON, 2: OFF
Default Value 1
802XTOUT 1 Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout

To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication.
If the device executes 802.1X authentication, change the wait time for response from the
authentication server.
Use Case When response from the authentication server is slow/fast
Unit sec
Default Value 30
Unit
1038
8. Service Mode
IKERETRY 1 Setting of IKE retry times
To set the number of retries in the case of no response from the communication target at the time
of IKE packet transmission.
Unit time
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo IKE: Internet Key Exchange
SPDALDEL 2 Initialization of SPD value

To initialize all the SPD values that are under management.
SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM.
Use Case At the time of SPD value mismatch when IPSec Board is added
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SPD: Database that manages SA (Security Association).
SPD value is managed when IPSec Board is used. Normally, SRAM needs to be cleared in the
case of mismatch in SPD value.
NCONF-SW 1 ON/OFF of Network Configurator function

To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function.
If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote attack through network.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo Network Configurator function is a function to be used for communication with NetSpot Device
Installer, etc., and the network setting can be changed from the remote.
IKEINTVL 1 Setting of IKE retry interval

To set retry interval in the case of no response from the communication target at the time of IKE
packet transmission.
Unit sec
Default Value 5
Supplement/Memo IKE: Internet Key Exchange
Unit
IPSDEBLV 2 For R&D
1039
8. Service Mode
AFS-JOB 1 Set of FAX server job reception port
To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends jobs.
Use Case When changing the job reception port of the fax server
Default Value 20317
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFC-EVNT
AFC-EVNT 1 Set of FAX client event reception port

To set the event notification reception port of a fax client.
Use Case When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client
Default Value 29400
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB
ILOGMODE 1 Setting of filter log target packet

To set the target packet to be recorded in the filter log.
Usually, only the unicast packets to the machine are recorded in the filter log by PFW (personal
firewall).
When 1 is set, address filter is enabled for all protocols so all packets are recorded in the filter log.
However, logs of multicast/broadcast packets sent from a harmless device or an address that are
subject to rejection and have no direct relation to the machine are also recorded, and consequently
the number of logs is increased.
Use Case Upon user's request (to collect all filter logs)
Caution When 1 is set, the number of logs is increased because logs of packets which have no direct
relation to the machine are recorded.
0: Unicast packets to the machine only, 1: All packets
Default Value 0
ILOGKEEP 1 Set of IP address block log hold time

To set the retention time from the log time of IP block.
When access is made again from a same IP address which was blocked before, if it is within the
retention time of the previous log, its log is not recorded.
If access is frequently made from a same IP address, the log record of the UI might be filled with
its logs. If the user considers that a single log for a same IP address is enough, set the longer
retention time.
0: 1 minute (special mode)
1 to 48: 1 hour to 48 hours
Default Value 1
1040
8. Service Mode
IPTBROAD 1 Set to allow broad/multicast TX
To set whether to permit transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets.
Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is permitted without specifying an
exception address. It is permitted within the device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the
IPv4/v6 transmission filter.
Set "1: Disabled" when the user does not want to send them.
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled, 2 to 5: Not used
Default Value 0
PFWFTPRT 1 Set of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND

When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets from a specific remote PC are
rejected, SYN is returned to the port 113 if the PC supports authentication of the FTP port 113.
However, since the IP filter blocks the packets, the block logs are increased and the performance
is lowered.
When 1 is set, RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking packets.
Use Case When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports authentication of the FTP port 113
while the IP filter is enabled
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
IPMTU 1 Setting of MTU size

Detail To set MTU size of network packet.
This item is used when performing SEND communication between locations connected with
Ethernet in a field environment where MTU black hole problem occurs.
Use Case When MTU black hole problem occur
Caution With IPv6, use of MTU which size is less than 1280 bytes is not recommended by RFC.
Therefore, when setting IPv6 to ON and MTU to 7 or smaller, communication using IPv6 may not
be available.
1: 600 byte, 2: 700 byte, ..., 9: 1400 byte, 10: 1500 byte
Unit byte
Default Value 10
Supplement/Memo MTU: The maximum size of data unit that can be transmitted with a single transfer (1 frame) over
network.
MTU black hole: A problem which occurs when ICMP packets are filtered by firewall, etc. (Since
no message is sent to the sender, the sender does not notice that the packets are discarded and
timeout occurs.)
Unit
1041
8. Service Mode
DDNSINTV 1 Set of DDNS periodical update interval
Detail DNS registration is executed only once at start-up with the current iR, so the registered contents
are deleted in an environment where the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals.
To set the interval of DDNS periodical update for not deleting the registered contents.
Use Case When the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals
0: No periodical update, 1: 1-hour interval, 2: 2-hour interval, ..., 47: 47-hour interval, 48: 48-hour
interval
Unit hour
Default Value 24
SIPAUDIO 2 Set of SIP session establishment order

Detail To set whether to establish audio session or T.38 session first with SIP.
Usually, audio session followed by T.38 session is established when using IPFAX in an intranet
environment. However, this order is not specified by the standard.
Set 1 when connecting the SIP server or terminal where the session starts with T.38 session.
Use Case When connecting the SIP server or terminal where the session starts with T.38 session
Caution When 1 is set, IPFAX fails with the destination where the session starts with audio session.
0: audio, 1: T.38
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
SIPINOUT 2 Set of internal/external number to URI

Detail To set whether to store the external number or the internal number in From URI when using NGN.
Use Case When a call cannot be made with external number while using NGN
0: External number, 1: Internal number
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo NGN: Next Generation Network
URI: Uniform Resource Identifier
SIPREGPR 2 Setting of registrar server use protocol

Detail To set the protocol used for communication with registrar server.
Although the protocol that is the same as the one for proxy server is usually used, another protocol
can be used in accordance with user and environment.
Use Case Upon user's request (to use a protocol different from the one for proxy server)
0: Protocol set in Settings/Registration menu, 1: UDP, 2: TCP, 3: SSL
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> SIP Settings> Intranet Settings
Mode
1042
8. Service Mode
PRCLTYPE 2 Setting of dedicated protocol type
Detail To set the type of dedicated protocol (CPCA protocol).
When 1 is set, only the commands where security has been improved are accepted, whereas
conventional commands are rejected.
Use Case Upon user's request (for customization)
- Job assignment from Print/Scan/Fax driver at department management
- AiRFAX transmission job assignment
- Setting/changing of system administrator function from a remote utility such as iWEMC
Caution With TYPE 1, compatibility with conventional drivers and iW products may be lost.
0: TYPE 0 (Compatible in a conventional manner), 1: TYPE 1
Default Value 0
VLAN-SW 2 ON/OFF VLAN participation packets send

Detail To set whether to send packets for participating in dynamic VLAN at link-up.
Use Case When participating in dynamic VLAN
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo - VLAN (Virtual LAN): A method for realizing grouping of terminals depending on the hub, switch
connection port, MAC address, protocol, etc.
- At link-up: At startup, when LAN cable is connected, when recovering from deep sleep, when
pressing the button to reflect the setting (dynamic update)
- If IP address of the machine has not been set, an IP address is assigned after participating in
VLAN.
FTPMODE 1 Set of FTP print default operation mode

Detail To set the default operation mode of FTP print.
Switch the default operation mode between ASCII mode and BIN mode in accordance with user's
environment.
Use Case At installation
0: ASCII mode, 1: BIN mode
Default Value 0
SSLMODE 2 Setting of HTTP/HTTPS port open/close

To set whether to open or close HTTP/HTTPS port.
When 1 is set while [Use HTTP] is ON and [SSL Settings] is OFF in Settings/Registration menu,
HTTP port is opened whereas HTTPS port is closed.
When 2 is set while both [Use HTTP] and [SSL Settings] are ON in Settings/Registration menu,
HTTP port is closed whereas HTTPS port is opened.
Use Case When limiting the port to open because of security concern
0: Normal, 1: Open HTTP port (80/8000) only, 2: Open HTTPS port (443/8443) only
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> Use HTTP
Mode Management Settings> License/Other> MEAP Settings> SSL Settings
1043
8. Service Mode
SSLSTRNG 2 Allow weak encryption algorithm for SSL
Detail To set whether to allow using weak encryption algorithm for SSL.
When 1 is set, weak encryption algorithm cannot be used.
Use Case When prohibiting weak encryption algorithm because of security concern
0: Normal mode, 1: Secured mode (TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA and TLS_RSA_WITH_
RC4_128_MD5 are not used)
Default Value 1
NW-WAIT 2 Set connect wait at deep sleep recovery

Detail To set whether to send wakeup notice after the time set in Settings/Registration menu has elapsed
when recovering from deep sleep.
When 0 is set, wakeup notice is sent after "Waiting Time for Connection at Startup" has elapsed.
When 1 is set, wakeup notice is sent when the machine becomes ready for communication.
Use Case When a failure of the device management tool occurs
0: Wait, 1: Not wait
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Network> Waiting Time for Connection at Startup
Mode
WLAN-USE 2 Setting of wireless LAN invalidation

Detail To set whether to disable the wireless LAN.
Bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment may be prohibited depending on user.
In such case, set 0 to prevent the wireless LAN to be used. When 0 is set, [Wireless Connection
Settings] is not displayed in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment is prohibited
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> Network> Wireless Connection Settings
Mode
WLANPORT 2 Set of port filter at wireless LAN side

To set whether to open all ports at the wireless LAN side.
When 0 is set, only the specific port is opened (filter is enabled).
Set 1 when using an application which uses a port other than the specific port. All ports are opened
(filter is disabled).
0: Open the specific port, 1: Open all ports
Default Value 0
RAW-PORT 2 [For customization]
1044
8. Service Mode
LINKWAKE 2 Set of deep sleep recovery at link-up
Detail To set whether to recover from deep sleep when link-up (disconnection and then connection of
LAN cable) is detected.
Set 0 if the closest hub or switch chatters at link-up. It can prevent recovery from deep sleep
triggered by chattering.
Use Case When the machine recovers from deep sleep due to chattering of the closest hub or switch
0: Not recovered, 1: Recovered
Default Value 1
WIFIRFCH 2 For R&D

Unit
BLEPOWER 2 Set of Bluetooth radio field strength

Detail To set the radio field strength for transmission over BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy).
As the value is changed by 1, the radio field strength is changed by 1 dBm.
Use Case When radio field strength of BLE is not appropriate
Caution Do not change the setting in Singapore. It is prohibited by law.
Display/Adj/Set Range -10 to -1 (-10 to -1 dBm)
Default Value -5
WSMC-USE 2 [Not use]

WSMC-RST 2 [Not use]
■ ENV-SET
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ENV-SET
ENVP-INT 1 Temp&hmdy/Fix Film temp log get cycle
Detail To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine and the surface
temperature of the Fixing Film.
As the value is incremented by 1, the cycle is increased by 1 minute.
Collected log can be displayed in COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT.
Use Case At problem analysis
Unit min
Default Value 60
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT
Unit
1045
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ENV-SET
DRY-CISU 1 ON/OFF of condensation prevention mode
Detail To set ON/OFF of condensation prevention mode.
Set 1 when an image failure or E225 occurs due to condensation in the Scanner Unit. From the
next startup, the Scanner Unit (for front side) stops the fan for 15 sec and the Scanner Unit (for
back side) lights LED for 30 sec.
Use Case When droplets appear on the Scanner Unit due to condensation and image failure or E225 occurs
0: OFF (Normal mode), 1: ON (Condensation prevention mode)
Default Value 0
■ CLEANING
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CLEANING
OHP-PTH 2 Set of ITB clean transp threshold value
Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute ITB cleaning when feeding transparency.
When a large number of transparencies is fed, surface active agent adheres to the ITB, and
consequently the transfer efficiency is lowered, causing an image failure. Normally, a patch is
formed on the ITB and surface active agent is removed together with the toner at paper interval
for every 30 sheets and at last rotation for every 22 sheets.
As the value is changed by 1, the number of sheets at paper interval and last rotation is changed
by 1 sheet.
When the value is decreased in the case of using transparency to which surface active agent is
more likely to be adhered, image failure can be alleviated.
When the value is increased, downtime and toner consumption can be reduced, but image failure
may occur.
Use Case When an image failure occurs due to decrease in the transfer efficiency
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1046
8. Service Mode
ITBB-TMG 2 Set of ITB toner band formation interval
Detail To set the conditions to form toner band to reduce friction between the ITB and the ITB Cleaning
Blade.
Environment: In high/all environments
Paper interval: Every 30/60/100 sheets
At last rotation: Every 30/60/100 sheets
Band length: 20/100 mm
As the interval is shorter and the band length is longer, the lubricating effect is high, but downtime
and toner consumption are increased.
Use Case When noise occurs due to the ITB Cleaning Blade
0: Depending on the environment (temperature and humidity)
1: In a high temperature environment, at paper interval for every 60 sheets, at last rotation for every
60 sheets, 20 mm in band length
2: In a high temperature environment, at paper interval for every 30 sheets, at last rotation for every
30 sheets, 20 mm in band length
3: In all environments, at paper interval for every 60 sheets, at last rotation for every 60 sheets, 20
mm in band length
4: In all environments, at paper interval for every 30 sheets, at last rotation for every 30 sheets, 20
mm in band length
5: In all environments, at paper interval for every 100 sheets, at last rotation for every 100 sheets,
100 mm in band length
Default Value 0
DRMB-TMG 2 Set of toner band form interval: Drum

Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to form toner band on the Photosensitive Drum at
paper interval/last rotation.
When 0 is set, the interval is automatically determined based on the image duty and absolute
moisture content. As both values increase, the interval is changed as follow.
1. Not forming toner band
2: At paper interval for every 200 sheets, at last rotation for every 140 sheets
3: At paper interval/last rotation for every 60 sheets
If flip of Drum Cleaning Blade or fusion of toner on the Photosensitive Drum occurs, reduce the
interval.
Use Case - When flip of the Drum Cleaning Blade occurs
- When fusion of toner on the Photosensitive Drum occurs
Caution - As the interval is reduced, productivity is decreased.
- When dealing with fusion of toner, set the same setting value for DRMR-TMG.
0: Auto, 1: 60 sheets, 2: 30 sheets
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> DRMR-TMG
1047
8. Service Mode
DRMR-TMG 2 Setting of drum idle rotation interval
Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to perform idle rotation of the Photosensitive Drum at
paper interval/last rotation.
When 0 is set, the interval is automatically determined based on the image duty and absolute
moisture content. As both values increase, the interval is changed as follow.
1. Not performing idle rotation
3: At paper interval/last rotation for every 480 sheets
If fusion of toner on the Photosensitive Drum occurs, reduce the interval.
Use Case When fusion of toner on the Photosensitive Drum occurs
Caution - As the interval is reduced, productivity is decreased.
- Set the same setting value for DRMB-TMG.
0: Auto, 1: 480 sheets, 2: 240 sheets
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> DRMB-TMG
DRMR-MNG 2 Set additional exe: wrmup rtn,1st pw-on

Detail To set whether to form toner band on the Photosensitive Drum and extend idle rotation time of the
drum at warm-up rotation performed first time for the day.
Set 1 or 2 when image smear occurs. When absolute moisture content is 19.8 g/m3 or more, toner
band is formed and idle rotation of the drum is extended.
Set 3 or 4 when an image failure occurs after replacement of the ITB with a new one. When absolute
moisture content is 19.8 g/m3 or more and the ITB parts counter is less than 50,000 sheets, toner
band is formed and idle rotation of the drum is extended. When the ITB parts counter shows 50,000
sheets or more, the setting is disabled.
Set 5 or 6 to form toner band and extend idle rotation of the drum regardless of usage environment.
- When an image failure occurs after replacement of the ITB
- White lines at intervals of drum circumference (engagement position of the Photosensitive Drum
and the ITB)
- White lines/black lines at intervals of ITB circumference
- When the foregoing image failures are expected to occur (19.8 g/m3 or more of absolute moisture
content)
Caution When 1to 6 is set, FCOT becomes longer. Switch the setting according to the usage environment.
0: OFF
1: 30 seconds (Moisture content: 19.8 g/m3 or more)
2: 60 seconds (Moisture content: 19.8 g/m3 or more)
3: 30 seconds (Moisture content: 19.8 g/m3, TR-BLT < 50000)
4: 60 seconds (Moisture content: 19.8 g/m3, TR-BLT < 50000)
5: 30 seconds
6: 60 seconds
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-BLT
1048
8. Service Mode
■ FEED-SW
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW
EVLP-SPD 1 Setting of envelope feeding speed
Detail To set the feeding speed of envelope.
By feeding an envelope at 1/2 speed (default) in the case of a high humidity environment, the glue
flap may adhere at the time of fixing. As a result of that, the envelope may not be opened.
When 1/1 speed is set, adhesion can be prevented, but fixing performance is decreased in a low
humidity environment.
Use Case When a glue flap of envelope adheres
Caution When 1 is set in a low humidity environment, fixing performance is decreased.
0: 1/2 speed, 1: 1/1 speed
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> EVLP-FS
EVLP-FS 2 Setting of fixing speed: envelope

Detail To set fixing speed when feeding envelope.
As the value is changed by 1, the fixing speed is changed by 0.1%.
Decrease the value when fine line displacement occurs on trailing edge of envelope, and increase
the value when wrinkles occur.
Use Case When fine line displacement or wrinkles occur on trailing edge while feeding envelope
Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time. Otherwise, fine line displacement/wrinkles occur
when setting an extreme value.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> EVLP-SPD
Unit
TFL-RTC 1 Set delvry dest at rcvry after tray full

Detail To select the delivery destination for a job with multiple pages after recovering the Delivery Tray
that reaches the full level.
When 0 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination again from which the last job was
delivered.
When 1 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination which priority is set as high at "Output
Tray Settings" in Settings/Registration menu.
Use Case When changing the delivery tray
0: Output from the tray from which the last job was output, 1: Output from the delivery destination
which priority is high among the delivery trays
Default Value 0
Mode
USZ-FEED 1 [Not used]
1049
8. Service Mode
■ IMG-SPD
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-SPD
FX-D-TMP 1 Set of down sequence start temperature
Detail To set a temperature to start the down sequence control when overheating occurs on the edge of
the Fixing Film.
As the value is changed by 1, the temperature is changed by 5 deg C from the initial setting
temperature.
Use Case - When fixing offset occurs on the edge of paper
- Upon user's request (to improve productivity)
-4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3:
+15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FIX-ROT 1 Set idle rtn stop cndtn after s-ppr feed

Detail Temperature on the edges of the Fixing Film becomes higher than the temperature at the center
when feeding large size paper after small size paper through the Fixing Assembly. Idle rotation is
executed until temperature is decreased to the specified value after feeding small size paper to
prevent occurrence of fixing offset or wrinkles.
To set the temperature and time as the conditions to stop idle rotation.
Temperature: Offset value from the specified temperature (deg C)
Time: Tolerance (seconds) When the time exceeds the tolerance, idle rotation is stopped even if
the temperature is not decreased to the desired temperature.
Increase the value when fixing offset or wrinkles occur. Because temperature is decreased, image
quality is improved, but productivity is decreased.
When the value is decreased, temperature is increased. As a result, productivity is increased, but
image quality may be decreased.
Use Case - When fixing offset occurs on the edge of paper
-2: +20 deg C, 10 seconds
-1: +10 deg C, 20 seconds
0: 0 deg C
1: -10 deg C, 45 seconds
2: -20 deg C, 60 seconds
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1050
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-SPD
INTPPR-2 2 Set multi tone ctrl (light) stop intvl
Detail To set the number of sheets which the real-time multiple tone control (light) and automatic
adjustments (discharge current control and primary transfer ATVC control) at paper interval are
not executed, from the start of a job.
If interruption occurs immediately after starting a job, process speed cannot be maintained. Disable
each control not to interrupt an ongoing job until a specified number of sheets are fed to prevent
decrease in productivity.
Increase the value when prioritizing productivity over image quality, and decrease the value when
the density varies dramatically.
Caution Do not set a value larger than those of INTPPR-1 and INTROT-1.
Unit sheet
Default Value 60
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> INTROT-1
Unit
■ IMG-RDR
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR
DFDST-L1 1 ON/OFF dust detection: ppr intvl, front
Detail To set whether the Scanner Unit (for front side) performs dust detection at paper interval.
Set one of 1 to 255 when black lines appear. Dust detection is performed at paper interval, and
then dust detection correction control is performed as needed.
Set 0 if a fine image portion is unclear as a result of dust detection correction.
0: OFF, 1 to 255: ON
Default Value 200
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the
image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.
DFDST-L2 1 Adj dust detect level: 1st stream, front

Detail To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed by the Scanner
Unit (for front side) at the first stream reading after power-on.
Decrease the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust
detection. As the value is smaller, dust is less likely to be detected. When 0 is set, the cleaning
instruction is not displayed.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely to
be detected.
Caution If the value is too small, black lines may appear on the image.
0: OFF
Default Value 200
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With the dust detection correction control that
is executed after power-on, reading position is adjusted to minimize dust to be detected.
1051
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR
DF2DSTL1 1 ON/OFF dust detection: ppr intvl, back
Detail To set whether the Scanner Unit (for back side) performs dust detection at paper interval.
Set one of 1 to 255 when black lines appear. Dust detection is performed at paper interval, and
then dust detection correction control is performed as needed.
Set 0 if a fine image portion is unclear as a result of dust detection correction.
0: OFF, 1 to 255: ON
Default Value 200
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the
image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.
DF2DSTL2 1 Adj dust detect level: 1st stream, back

Detail To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed by the Scanner
Unit (for back side) at the first stream reading after power-on.
Decrease the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust
detection. As the value is smaller, dust is less likely to be detected. When 0 is set, the cleaning
instruction is not displayed.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely to
be detected.
Caution If the value is too small, black lines may appear on the image.
0: OFF
Default Value 200
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With the dust detection correction control that
is executed after power-on, reading position is adjusted to minimize dust to be detected.
■ IMG-MCON
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON
PASCAL 1 Set of auto gradation adjustment data
Detail To set the gradation adjustment data that is used at image formation.
When 0 is set, the initial LUT is used.
When 1 is set, the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT that is generated by auto gradation
adjustment (full/quick adjustment) control is used.
Use Case When PASCAL-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of PASCAL-related failure
0: Initial LUT, 1: Auto gradation adjustment data, 2 to 3: Not used
Default Value 1
1052
8. Service Mode
SCR-SLCT 2 Halftone process in Photo Printout mode
Detail To set halftone process (error diffusion, screen 2 types) in Photo Printout mode when making a
copy.
Change the setting if the copy image has a problem with the initial setting (Low screen ruling).
Select 0 (error diffusion) in the case of moire (suitable for character reproduction).
Select 2 (High screen ruling) in the case of rough dots.
Use Case When moire image or rough dots occurs on copy image
0: Error diffusion, 1: Low screen ruling, 2: High screen ruling
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Function Settings> Copy> Photo Printout mode
Mode
TMC-SLCT 2 Set error diffusion process coefficient

Detail To set coefficient to be used for error diffusion processing.
Make the setting according to the level of granularity and dot stability.
0: Small granularity/low dot stability
1: Small granularity/low dot stability (color mode), Large granularity/high dot stability (black mode)
2: Large granularity/high dot stability
Default Value 2
PRN-FLG 2 Select of image area flag (PDL image)

Detail To set the image area flag for image processing which is performed when a PDL image fails to be
compressed at a specified compression rate.
If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate, the following processing is
performed by default:
- Processing to prioritize text reproduction
- Replacement of the processed black with single Bk-color
Set 1 when moire occurs or jaggy is significant. Set 2 when not preferring to replace the processed
black with single Bk-color.
Use Case - When moire occurs or jaggy is significant in case of printing an image containing many halftone
dots or photos
- When avoiding to replace the processed black with single Bk-color
Caution This setting trades off with reproducibility of text.
0: High screen ruling, gray compensation LUT
1: Error diffusion, gray compensation LUT
2: High screen ruling, normal LUT
Default Value 0
1053
8. Service Mode
SCN-FLG 2 Select of image area flag (copy image)
Detail To set the image area flag for image processing which is performed when a scanned image fails
to be compressed at a specified compression rate.
If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate, processing to prioritize
reproduction of text is performed by default.
Set 1 when an image contains many halftone photo images. Set 2 when an image contains many
printed photos.
Use Case When copying an image which contains many halftone dots and photos
Caution This setting trades off with reproducibility of text.
0: Text, 1: Halftone photo image, 2: Printed photo
Default Value 0
TMIC-BK 2 ON/OFF of TMIC Bk_LUT end edge correct

Detail To set ON/OFF of the trailing edge adjustment of Bk_LUT for PDL and for copy which are used
by TMIC.
When the trailing edge adjustment is set to ON, the density of the high density area becomes high,
and consequently text and thin lines become clear. While an image becomes clear, hue of the
gradation area of photos, etc. is changed.
Use Case When thin lines are partly missing or characters are faded
0: ON for PDL, OFF for copy
1: OFF for PDL, OFF for copy
2: ON for PDL, ON for copy
3: OFF for PDL, ON for copy
Default Value 2
MIX-FLG 2 Set img processing at img composition

Detail To set the image processing which is performed when an image fails to be compressed at a
specified compression rate by the Main Controller upon image composition.
Use Case When an image processing failure occurs
0: Equivalent to PDL text mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Error diffused image. The
hue of the photo area is more vivid than that of 2.)
1: Equivalent to PDL photo mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Screen processed image.)
2: Equivalent to scanned text mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Error diffused
image. The hue of the photo area might be different from that of 0.)
3: Equivalent to scanned photo mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Screen
processed image.)
Default Value 0
1054
8. Service Mode
REPORT-Z 1 Set of image processing at report print
Detail To set the image processing which is performed when printing a report.
Use Case When there is a request for image improvement
hue of the photo area is more vivid than 2.)
2: Equivalent to scanned text mode (Black text is reproduced with black plain color. Error diffused
image. The hue of the photo area might be different from 0.)
3: Equivalent to scanned photo mode (Black text is reproduced with black plain color. Screen
processed image.)
Default Value 0
IFXEML-Z 1 Set img proc at clr iFAX,mail recv print

Detail To set the image processing which is performed when printing color iFAX or received e-mail.
processed image.)
Default Value 0
BMLNKS-Z 1 Set img proc at BMLinkS reception print

Detail To set the image processing which is performed when printing received BMLinkS.
processed image.)
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo BMLinkS (Business Machine Linkage Service): An integrated network OA device interface
1055
8. Service Mode
REDU-CNT 2 Set toner deposit amount limt at clr adj
Detail To set whether to limit the toner deposit amount at color adjustment (color balance, fine adjustment
of density).
When 0 is set, the color adjustment value is reflected to an image precisely, but toner scattering
in the transfer section and fixing section may occur or paper may wind around the Fixing Film.
When setting 1 for IMGC-ADJ, this setting can be also made in [Adjust Toner Volume Used for
Color Printing] in [Settings/Registration].
- When reflecting the color adjustment value to an image precisely
Caution When 1 is set, toner scattering in the transfer section and fixing section may occur or paper may
wind around the Fixing Belt.
0: Toner deposit amount is not limited.
1: Toner deposit amount is limited to the specified amount.
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMGC-ADJ
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Adjust Toner Volume Used for Color Printing
Mode
VP-ART 2 Setting of line art processing

Detail To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF.
In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as
line art, and is converted into vector data.
Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data or to recognize it as one line
(as a thin line). For the thin line, the line width can be specified.
Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a wide-width line as one line rather than
as an outline (when you want to prioritize edit operation as a line rather than image quality).
Default Value 1
VP-TXT 2 Setting of character vectorization

Detail To set vector conversion processing for text on scalable PDF.
In the vector conversion processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is
recognized as text, and is converted into vector data.
In regular vector conversion, function approximation is not used for small text because the image
quality is not changed.
When the value is changed, function approximation processing is executed for small text, which
realizes smooth text although the image quality is changed.
Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small text.
Default Value 1
1056
8. Service Mode
PASCL-TY 2 Set of paper type for auto gradation adj
Detail Auto gradation adjustment is normally executed with the recommended paper specified for each
location. However, if you want to change the paper type, use this setting to change the paper type.
Use Case When executing the auto gradation adjustment using a paper other than the recommended paper
type
Caution Do not change the setting in the normal operation.
1: CS-680 (For Japan), 2: Canon Multipurpose Paper (For USA), 3: Oce RED Label80 (Except for
Japan and USA. Mainly for EU)
AST-SEL 2 Adj of advanced smoothing effect

Detail To adjust the smoothing effect which is set in the advanced smoothing UI.
Set 3 if no smoothing effect is obtained even though High is set in the advanced smoothing UI.
Set 0 if too much effect is obtained even though Low is set in the advanced smoothing UI.
Use Case When image failures (jaggy, moire) occur
Default Value 2
Supplement/Memo AST: Advanced Smoothing Technology
PSCL-TBL 1 Setting of Bk-color density increase

Detail To set whether to increase the density of Bk-color.
When 1 is set, the parameters of auto gradation adjustment are adjusted so that Bk-color becomes
darker. As the Bk-color toner deposit amount is increased, toner deposit amounts of Y/M/C-color
which are mixed with Bk-color are decreased.
Use Case When black color density is low on plain paper with rough surface (rough paper)
Caution Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after the setting is done.
0: Normal, 1: Only the density of Bk-color is high
Default Value 0
BGE-OFS 2 Fine adj at bckgd adj (bckgd removal)

Detail To make a fine adjustment of the background adjustment (background removal) level which can
be set manually.
Break up the adjustment values into smaller ones when user does not satisfy with the default
adjustment values.
Use Case When color fogging occurs on the output image when copying yellowed blank paper as an original
Caution Since the background color is set to be washed out with this mode, not only the background of
yellowed blank paper, but also other light colors (light blue, etc.) are washed out.
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Copy> Options> Density> Background Density
Mode
1057
8. Service Mode
DITH-FB 2 Real-time multi tone ctrl crrct: dither
Detail To set the extent of the correction result of gradation that has been corrected by low screen ruling
dithering of real-time multiple tone control to be reflected to other dithering methods in percentage
(%).
When PTN-INT is 1, this setting is enabled.
Unit %
Default Value 10
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> PTN-INT
FL-FB 2 Set multi tone ctrl (full) feedback rate

Detail To set the extent of the gradation correction result of real-time multiple tone control (full) to be
reflected to LUT in percentage.
If the value is large, gradation will be closer to the target value with a single execution of the control.
However, the hue may be changed dramatically before and after the execution. Decrease the value
when prioritizing hue continuity. Degree of correction by the control will be small.
Unit %
Default Value 100
Unit
INT-FB 2 Set multi tone ctrl(light) feedback rate

Detail To set the extent of the gradation correction result of real-time multiple tone control (light) to be
reflected to LUT in percentage.
If the value is large, gradation will be closer to the target value with a single execution of the control.
However, the hue may be changed dramatically before and after the execution. Decrease the value
when prioritizing hue continuity. Degree of correction by the control will be small.
Unit %
Default Value 30
Unit
PTN-INT 2 Set of multi tone control patch pattern

Detail To set the patch patter formed by real-time multiple tone control (light).
When 0 is set, 1-gradation patches are formed by each dithering method (error diffusion/low screen
ruling/high screen ruling) for each color (Y/M/C/Bk).
When 1 is set, 3-gradation patches are formed by low screen ruling dithering method for each color
(Y/M/C/Bk). In this case, the gradation correction result is reflected to other dithering methods at
the rate set in DITH-FB.
0: Patch pattern 1, 1: Patch pattern 2
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> DITH-FB
BOLD-SEL 1 For R&D
1058
8. Service Mode
■ IMG-DEV
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV
INTPPR-1 2 Set multi tone control (light) exe intvl
Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute real-time multiple tone control (light).
When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, the control is executed by interrupting an
ongoing job. After starting a job, however, it is not executed until the number of sheets reaches
the value set in INTPPR-2.
Increase the value when prioritizing productivity over image quality, and decrease the value when
the density varies dramatically.
Caution If the value is too large, the density of image becomes different before and after the interruption.
If the value is too small, productivity is decreased.
Unit sheet
Default Value 200
Unit
DVTGT-K 2 Adj of ATR Sensor (Bk) gain value offset

Detail To actually correct the TD ratio by setting the offset of the gain value of ATR Sensor (Bk).
When the value is increased (TD ratio is increased), uneven density due to poor stirring by screw
is alleviated, but fogging may occur.
The target value of TD ratio changes when changing the value. Therefore, after the setting has
been changed, it is necessary to make TD ratio stable by executing toner ejection sequence.
When the Developing Unit is replaced, the value is returned to 0.
Use Case When uneven density due to poor stirring by screw occurs
3) Execute toner ejection sequence.
Caution After the value is changed, execute the toner ejection sequence. Note that toner ejection sequence
must be executed for each color even though values for multiple colors are changed.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-K, DENS-K, PG-QTY, TYPE
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance> Clean Inside Main Unit
Mode
Supplement/Memo Procedure to execute toner ejection sequence
1) Execute [Clean Inside Main Unit} in [Settings/Registration] (which takes time).
2) Place 10 sheets of A4 size paper for test print in a paper source.
3) Set 1 for COLOR-K.
4) Set 255 (solid black) for DENS-K.
5) Set 10 for PG-QTY.
6) Set 5 (whole-area halftone image) for TYPE.
1059
8. Service Mode
DVTGT-Y 2 Adj of ATR Sensor (Y) gain value offset
Detail To actually correct the TD ratio by setting the offset of the gain value of ATR Sensor (Y).
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-Y, DENS-Y, PG-QTY, TYPE
Mode
3) Set 1 for COLOR-Y.
4) Set 255 (solid black) for DENS-Y.
DVTGT-M 2 Adj of ATR Sensor (M) gain value offset

Detail To actually correct the TD ratio by setting the offset of the gain value of ATR Sensor (M).
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-M, DENS-M, PG-QTY, TYPE
Mode
3) Set 1 for COLOR-M.
4) Set 255 (solid black) for DENS-M.
1060
8. Service Mode
DVTGT-C 2 Adj of ATR Sensor (C) gain value offset
Detail To actually correct the TD ratio by setting the offset of the gain value of ATR Sensor (C).
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-C, DENS-C, PG-QTY, TYPE
Mode
3) Set 1 for COLOR-C.
4) Set 255 (solid black) for DENS-C.
AUTO-DH 1 ON/OFF D-max/multi tone ctrl: wrmup rtn

Detail To set whether to execute D-max control and real-time multiple tone control (full) at warm-up
rotation.
When 0 is set, the control is not executed.
When 1 is set, it is executed only in an HH (high temperature and high humidity) environment.
When 2 is set, it is executed in all environments.
Use Case When image smear occurs in an HH environment
0: OFF, 1: ON (HH environment only), 2: ON (all environments)
Default Value 0
PCHINT-1 2 Setting of ATR patch formation interval

Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute patch detection by ATR control.
Decrease the value when hue variation occurs, and increase the value to increase the productivity.
Use Case - When hue variation occurs
- Upon user's request (to reduce downtime)
Default Value 2
Unit
1061
8. Service Mode
PCHINT-V 2 Adj ATR patch VD counter total VL intvl
Detail To adjust the interval of the total video counter value, that is the condition to execute patch detection
by ATR control.
Decrease the value when hue variation occurs, and increase the value to increase the productivity.
Use Case - When hue variation occurs
- Upon user's request (to reduce downtime)
Default Value 2
DELV-THY 2 Set image ratio for Y-color toner eject

Detail To set the threshold value of average image ratio of Y-color, that is the condition to perform the
low duty toner ejection sequence.
When fogging occurs while making a large number of outputs of low duty images, increase the
value. Execution frequency of the toner ejection is increased so fogging is alleviated, but toner
consumption is increased.
If the user does not want too many waste toner when low duty image is output, decrease the value.
Toner consumption is decreased, but fogging is likely to occur.
0: 0%, 1: 1%, 2: 2%, 3: 3%, 4: 4%, 5: 5%
Default Value 1
DELV-THC 2 Set image ratio for C-color toner eject

Detail To set the threshold value of average image ratio of C-color, that is the condition to perform the
0: 0%, 1: 1%, 2: 2%, 3: 3%, 4: 4%, 5: 5%
Default Value 1
DELV-THM 2 Set image ratio for M-color toner eject

Detail To set the threshold value of average image ratio of M-color, that is the condition to perform the
0: 0%, 1: 1%, 2: 2%, 3: 3%, 4: 4%, 5: 5%
Default Value 1
1062
8. Service Mode
DELV-THK 2 Set image ratio for Bk-color toner eject
Detail To set the threshold value of average image ratio of Bk-color, that is the condition to perform the
0: 0%, 1: 1%, 2: 2%, 3: 3%, 4: 4%, 5: 5%
Default Value 1
ADJ-VPP 2 Adj of developing AC bias Vpp

Detail To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias.
Decrease the value when ring marks occur. Increase the value when white spots occur.
Use Case When image failures (ring marks, white spots) occur
Caution When decreasing the value too much, density may be lowered.
Default Value 0
SL-RATIO 1 Set Dev Cylndr perif SPD ratio: 1/2 SPD

Detail To set whether to increase the peripheral speed ratio of the Developing Upper Cylinder and the
Developing Lower Cylinder at 1/2 speed.
Set 1 when vertical black lines appear on the left edge of the image under the following conditions.
- Paper length is 12 inches or longer
- At 1/2 speed (heavy paper 2 to 7 (129 to 300 g/m2)/coated paper)
- Image ratio is high
Use Case When black vertical lines appear on the left edge of the image at 1/2 speed
Caution The setting is applied only at 1/2 speed.
0: OFF (Normal), 1: ON
Default Value 0
DMX-OF-Y 2 Adj of Y-color D-max target density

Detail To adjust the target density of D-max control in the case where density of solid area on Y-color
image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed.
Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high.
Use Case When density of solid area is not appropriate even though auto gradation adjustment is executed
Default Value 0
1063
8. Service Mode
DMX-OF-M 2 Adj of M-color D-max target density
Detail To adjust the target density of D-max control in the case where density of solid area on M-color
Default Value 0
DMX-OF-C 2 Adj of C-color D-max target density

Detail To adjust the target density of D-max control in the case where density of solid area on C-color
Default Value 0
DMX-OF-K 2 Adj of Bk-color D-max target density

Detail To adjust the target density of D-max control in the case where density of solid area on Bk-color
Default Value 0
1064
8. Service Mode
ZAB-TH 2 Set of toner band form duration at stop
Detail To set the duration of toner band formation on the Photosensitive Drum for Bk-color (number of
fed sheets) while drive is stopped.
While drive is stopped, the Photosensitive Drum for Bk-color is in contact with the ITB. If the contact
state remains, the coating agent of the ITB penetrates to the surface, causing no toner deposit on
the contact area of the drum. As the result, white lines appear on Bk-color image at intervals of
drum circumference (94 mm). The newer the ITB is, the more likely the component penetrates.
Therefore, toner band is formed on the contact area of the drum and the ITB while drive is stopped
until the number of sheets set in ZAB-TH is fed.
When 0 is set, toner band is not formed.
When 1 to 5 is set, toner band is formed until the value of TR-BLT (ITB parts counter) reaches the
specified number of sheets. After that, toner band is not formed.
When 6 is set, toner band is always formed.
Increase the value when white lines appear.
Use Case When white lines appear on Bk-color image at 94 mm intervals
Caution - If the value is too small, white lines appear.
- Be sure to change the value back to the default when replacing the ITB.
0: OFF, 1: ON up to 100,000 sheets, 2: ON up to 200,000 sheets, 3: ON up to 300,000 sheets, 4:
ON up to 400,000 sheets, 5: ON up to 500,000 sheets, 6: Always ON
Default Value 3
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> ZAB-DENS
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-BLT
Unit
ZAB-DENS 2 Setting of Bk-toner band density at stop

Detail To set the density of toner band to be formed on the Photosensitive Drum for Bk-color while drive
is stopped.
While drive is stopped, the Photosensitive Drum for Bk-color is in contact with the ITB. If the contact
state remains, the coating agent of the ITB penetrates to the surface, causing no toner deposit on
the contact area of the drum. As the result, white lines appear on Bk-color image at intervals of
drum circumference (94 mm). The newer the ITB is, the more likely the component penetrates.
Therefore, toner band is formed on the contact area of the drum and the ITB while drive is stopped
until the number of sheets set in ZAB-TH is fed.
Increase the value when white lines appear. Because toner band becomes darker, white lines can
be alleviated, but soiled back of paper with Bk-toner may occur.
Use Case - When white lines appear on Bk-color image at 94 mm intervals
- When soiled back of paper with Bk-color occurs
Caution - If the value is too small, white lines appear. If the value is too large, soiled back of paper occurs.
- Be sure to change the value back to the default when replacing the ITB.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> ZAB-TH
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-BLT
Supplement/Memo When the value of TR-BLT (ITB parts counter) is larger than the number of sheets specified in
ZAB-TH, toner band is not formed so setting result cannot be checked.
Unit
1065
8. Service Mode
IMG-FEED 1 Setting of coated paper pickup timing
Detail To set whether to pick up coated paper before or after the start of image formation.
Usually, before the start of image formation, a paper is picked up and fed to the position where it
is in contact with the Pre-registration Roller and stays there.
Set 1 when trace of roller appears on the image on coated paper. Image failure can be alleviated,
but productivity is decreased because the 1st sheet of paper is picked up after the start of image
formation.
Use Case When trace of roller appears on the leading edge (76 mm) of coated paper
Caution When 1 is set, productivity is decreased.
0: Before the start of image formation, 1: After the start of image formation
Default Value 0
■ IMG-FIX
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX
FX-S-TMP 1 Set ITOP control temp: plain paper 1
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for plain paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2).
As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94 mm)
-2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TBL2 1 Set fixing control temp: heavy paper 1

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2).
As the value is changed by 1, the temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs, and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs.
Use Case When offset/fixing failure occurs on heavy paper 1
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1066
8. Service Mode
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TBL5 1 Set fixing control temp: thin paper 2

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for thin paper 2 (52 to 59 g/m2).
Use Case When offset/fixing failure occurs on thin paper 2
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1067
8. Service Mode
TMP-TBL6 1 Set fixing control temperature: envelope
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for envelope.
Use Case When offset/fixing failure occurs on envelope
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TMP2 1 Set ITOP control temp: heavy paper 1

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for heavy paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2).
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1068
8. Service Mode
FXS-TMP5 1 Set ITOP control temp: thin paper 2
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for thin paper 2 (52 to 59 g/m2).
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TMP6 1 Set ITOP control temperature: envelope

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for envelope.
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXST2-N2 1 Set ITOP wait time in LL env: plain ppr

Detail To set initial rotation time when plain paper 1 to 3 is fed with a room temperature of 18 deg C or
lower.
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs.
Use Case When a fixing failure occurs in an low temperature environment
Unit sec
Default Value 0
Unit
FXST2-UH 1 Set ITOP wait time in LL env: heavy ppr

Detail To set initial rotation time when heavy paper 1 to 7 is fed with a room temperature of 18 deg C or
lower.
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs.
Use Case When a fixing failure occurs in an low temperature environment
Unit sec
Default Value 0
Unit
1069
8. Service Mode
FN-ENTMP 1 Set of Fixing Cooling Fan ON/OFF temp
Detail To set the ON/OFF temperature of the Fixing Cooling Fan (Front/Rear).
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the edge of small size paper, and decrease the
value when fixing offset occurs.
Use Case When fixing offset/fixing failure occurs on the edge of small size paper
-4: -15 deg C, -3: -13 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3:
+13 deg C, 4: +15 deg C
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FLYING 2 ON/OFF of flying start temperature ctrl

Detail To set whether to execute flying start temperature control.
When 1 is set, flying start temperature control is not performed. Selecting 1 has an advantage over
selecting 0 in terms of the life of the Fixing Unit. However, selecting 1 does not always extend the
life.
Use Case When preferring to extend the life of the Fixing Unit
Caution When 1 is set, FCOT becomes longer.
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
TMP-TBL7 1 Set fixing control temp: plain paper 2

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 2 (76 to 90 g/m2).
Use Case When offset/fixing failure occurs on plain paper 2
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1070
8. Service Mode
TMP-TBL8 1 Set fixing control temp: transparency
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for transparency.
Use Case When offset/fixing failure occurs on transparency
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TBL9 1 Set fix control temp: 1-side coat ppr 1

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for 1-sided coated paper 1 (106 to 163 g/m2).
Use Case When offset/fixing failure occurs on 1-sided coated paper 1
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TB10 1 Set fix control temp: 1-side coat ppr 2

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TMP7 1 Set ITOP control temp: plain paper 2

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1071
8. Service Mode
FXS-TMP8 1 Set ITOP control temp: transparency
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for transparency.
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TM10 1 Set ITOP control temp: 1-side coat ppr 2

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for 1-sided coated paper 2 (164 to 220 g/m2).
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TMP9 1 Set ITOP control temp: 1-side coat ppr 1

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
THIN-LP 2 Set of fixing arch amount: thin paper

Detail To set the arch amount between secondary transfer and fixing when feeding thin paper 1 and 2.
Usually, in case of thin paper, fixing arch control is performed to make the arch large.
Set 0 when an image failure occurs on the trailing edge. The arch becomes small when feeding
thin paper.
Set 2 or 3 if paper length (in feed direction) causes the image failure.
Use Case When an image failure on the trailing edge occurs with thin paper
0: Small arch
1: Large arch
2: Small arch for paper whose length is 220.0 mm or less, large arch for paper whose length
exceeds 220.0 mm
3: Large arch for paper whose length is 220.0 mm or less, small arch for paper whose length
exceeds 220.0 mm
Default Value 1
1072
8. Service Mode
TMP-TB11 1 Set fixing control temp:recycled paper 1
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2).
Use Case When offset/fixing failure occurs on recycled paper 1
-3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TM11 1 Set ITOP control temp: recycled paper 1

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for recycled paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2).
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper, and decrease the
value when uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94 mm).
Use Case - When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper
- When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (94 mm)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
PLN-LP 2 Set of fixing arch amount: plain/colored

Detail To set the arch amount between secondary transfer and fixing when feeding plain paper 1 to 3
and colored paper.
Usually, in case of plain paper/colored paper, fixing arch control is performed to make the arch
small.
Set 1 when an image failure (crepe marks) occurs. The arch becomes large when feeding plain
paper/colored paper.
Use Case When an image failure (crepe marks) occurs with plain paper/colored paper
0: Small arch
1: Large arch
exceeds 220.0 mm
exceeds 220.0 mm
Default Value 0
1073
8. Service Mode
TRC-LP 2 Set of fixing arch amount: tracing paper
Detail To set the arch amount between secondary transfer and fixing when feeding tracing paper.
Usually, in case of tracing paper, fixing arch control is performed to make the arch small.
Set 1 when an image failure (crepe marks) occurs. The arch becomes large when feeding tracing
paper.
Use Case When an image failure (crepe marks) occurs with tracing paper
0: Small arch
1: Large arch
exceeds 220.0 mm
exceeds 220.0 mm
Default Value 0
FXS-T001 1 Set ITOP control temp: thin paper 1

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for thin paper 1 (60 to 63 g/m2).
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-T002 1 Set ITOP control temp: plain paper 3

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-T003 1 Set ITOP control temp: heavy paper 4

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1074
8. Service Mode
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-T007 1 Set ITOP control temp: 1-side coat ppr 3

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1075
8. Service Mode
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-T012 1 Set ITOP control temp: recycled paper 2

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1076
8. Service Mode
FXS-T013 1 Set ITOP control temp: recycled paper 3
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TB01 1 Set fixing control temp: thin paper 1

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for thin paper 1 (60 to 63 g/m2).
Use Case When offset/fixing failure occurs on thin paper 1
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TB02 1 Set fixing control temp: heavy paper 4

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1077
8. Service Mode
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TB04 1 Set fixing control temp: plain paper 3

Use Case When offset/fixing failure occurs on plain paper 3
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1078
8. Service Mode
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1079
8. Service Mode
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-T010 1 Set fix control temp: 2-side coat ppr 3

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
TMP-T011 1 Set fixing control temp:recycled paper 2

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-T012 1 Set fixing control temp:recycled paper 3

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
1080
8. Service Mode
REC-LP 2 Set of fixing arch amount: recycled
Detail To set the arch amount between secondary transfer and fixing when feeding recycled paper 1 to
3.
Usually, in case of recycled paper, fixing arch control is performed to make the arch small for paper
whose length (in feed direction) is 220.0 mm or less, whereas the control is performed to make
the arch large for paper whose length exceeds 220.0 mm.
Set 1 when an image failure (crepe marks) occurs. The arch becomes large when feeding recycled
paper regardless of paper length.
Set 0 when an image failure occurs on the trailing edge. The arch becomes small when feeding
recycled paper regardless of paper length.
Use Case When an image failure (crepe marks/image failure on the trailing edge) occurs with recycled paper
0: Small arch
1: Large arch
exceeds 220.0 mm
exceeds 220.0 mm
Default Value 2
■ CUSTOM
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
TEMP-TBL 1 Set fixing control temp: plain paper 1
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on plain paper 1
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
SC-L-CNT 1 Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan

Detail To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use B4 or LTR to determine large
size.
The threshold is determined by the combination with the setting of B4-L-CNT.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=0: paper exceeding B4 is determined as large size, paper with B4 or
smaller is determined as small size.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=1: paper with B4 or larger is determined as large size, paper smaller than
B4 is determined as small size.
Use Case As needed
0: B4 size, 1: LTR size
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> B4-L-CNT
SCANTYPE 1 [Not used]
1081
8. Service Mode
ABK-TOOL 1 Allow access from address book mntc tool
To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance tool.
Use Case When executing import from the address book maintenance tool
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Address book maintenance tool: Tool provided from CMJ.
DEV-SP1 2 Device special settings 1

Detail To execute the device special settings 1.
Caution Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division.




1082
8. Service Mode


USEUPTNR 1 Set Toner Container use-up mode

Detail To set the maximum number of rotations of the Toner Container to use up toner in the container.
When the machine is slanted, it is judged that toner in the Toner Container is empty before actual
life.
When 2 is set, the Toner Container Motor is driven longer than when setting to 1, so toner in the
Toner Container can be used up more.
Caution When high duty image is printed frequently, downtime may occur.
0: Not used, 1: 20 times, 2: 30 times
Default Value 1
DFEJCLED 1 ON/OFF of DADF delivery LED

Detail To set whether to light up the delivery LED of DADF.
Use Case Upon user's request (The LED is too bright)
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
RDEV-SP1 2 RCON device special settings 1

Detail To execute the device special setting.
Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
Default Value 0
1083
8. Service Mode
Default Value 0

Default Value 0

Default Value 0

Default Value 0

Default Value 0
1084
8. Service Mode
Default Value 0

Default Value 0
PSCL-QS 2 [For customization]

PAP-TYPE 2 [For customization]
TIFFJPEG 2 [For customization]
DCM-EXCL 1 [For customization]
Default Value 0
FPOT-MD 2 [For customization]
■ USER
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
COPY-LIM 1 Setting of upper limit for copy
Detail To set the upper limit value for copy.
Default Value 999
SLEEP 1 Setting of auto sleep function

Detail To set ON/OFF of auto sleep function.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time
Mode
Supplement/Memo The time to shift to the sleep mode can be set in Settings/Registration> Preferences> Timer/Energy
Settings> Auto Sleep Time.
1085
8. Service Mode
SIZE-DET 2 ON/OFF of original size detect function
Detail To set ON/OFF of original size detection function.
Use Case Upon user's request (The LED is too bright, etc.)
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
COUNTER1 1 Display of software counter 1

Detail To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Caution Display only. No change is available.
0: No registration
COUNTER2 1 Setting of software counter 2

Detail To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check screen.
0: No registration

0: No registration

0: No registration

0: No registration
Default Value 0
1086
8. Service Mode
0: No registration
Default Value 0
DATE-DSP 2 Setting of data/time display format

To set date/time display format according to the country or region.
After the display format is set with this mode, the order of date is reflected to the followings:
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Date/Time Settings, and report output.
0: YYMM/DD, 1: DD/MMYY, 2: MM/DD/YY
Additional Functions Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Date/Time Settings
Mode
MB-CCV 2 Control card usage limit for Mail Box

To restrict use of control card for Mail Box.
0: Unlimited, 1: Limited
Default Value 1
CONTROL 1 Charge setting of PDL job

To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting charging management device (Coin
Manager or non-Canon-made control card).
0: No charge, 1: Charge
Default Value 0
1087
8. Service Mode
B4-L-CNT 1 Count setting of B4 size
Detail To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 8 as to whether B4 is counted as large size or small
size.
Selecting 1 counts B4 or larger size paper as large size while paper smaller than B4 size as small
size.
0: Small size, 1: Large size
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SC-L-CNT
MF-LG-ST 2 Display/hide of long strip mode

Detail To set whether to display or hide the [Long Original] button.
When 1 is set, [Long Original] button is displayed in Copy > Options screen and the long strip paper
becomes available.
Use Case Upon user's request (use of long strip original or long strip paper)
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Copy> Options
Mode
Supplement/Memo Up to 630mm length paper is supported when DADF is used.
CNT-DISP 2 Display/hide of serial No.

Detail To set whether to display or hide the serial No. on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case When setting to display/hide serial No. on the Counter Check screen.
0: Display, 1: Hide
Default Value 0
COPY-JOB 1 Setting of copy job reservation

Detail To set to enable/disable copy job reservation when the Card Reader/Coin Manager is used.
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Default Value 0
OP-SZ-DT 2 Orgnl size dtct ON/OFF at copyboard open

Detail To set ON/OFF of original size detection while the Copyboard is opened.
When "0: OFF" is set, enter original size manually from the Control Panel.
When "1: ON" is set, original size is detected automatically.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
1088
8. Service Mode
JOB-INVL 2 Job intvl setting at interruption copy
Detail To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy.
Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous output of the next job. Paper
interval becomes longer when starting pickup for the next job after the last sheet of the previous
job is delivered.
0: Continuous output of the interruption copy and the next job
1: Starting pickup for the next job after the interruption copy is delivered all.
2: Starting pickup for the next job after the previous job is delivered all. (For all jobs)
Default Value 0
TAB-ROT 1 Set of landscape img rotn at PDL:tab ppr

Detail To set whether to rotate landscape image by 180 degrees when PDL print is made on tab paper.
When "1: Rotated" is set, image is rotated.
0: Not rotated, 1: Rotated
Default Value 0
PR-PSESW 1 ON/OFF Pause All Print Jobs button dspl

Detail To set whether to display [Pause All Print Jobs] button on the Status Monitor/Cancel screen.
- When preferring to promptly stop the print job in operation or under reservation
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
IDPRN-SW 1 Charge target job set of dept mngm cntr

To set the job type that advances the department management counter.
0:
PRINT category: Inbox Print, Report Print, PDL Print
COPY category: COPY
1:
PRINT category: Report Print, PDL Print
COPY category: COPY, Inbox Print
Default Value 0
CPRT-DSP 1 [For customization]
1089
8. Service Mode
PCL-COPY 2 Set of PCL COPIES command control method
Detail To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL.
Select whether to use the control method of Canon-made PCL or use the same control method of
non-Canon-made PCL.
0: Control method of Canon-made PCL (following the value of COPIES command that is specified
for each page to control on a page basis)
1: Control method of non-Canon-made PCL (handling the value of COPIES command, which is
specified for page 1 at the time of Collate mode, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command
for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon-made PCL at the time of non-
sorted mode)
2 to 65535: For future use
Default Value 0
CNT-SW 1 Set default dspl items on charge counter

Detail To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen.
For details of each type, refer to the Service Manual.
0:Type1 , 1:Type2
Default Value 0
TAB-ACC 1 [Not used]

BCNT-AST 1 Set of box print charge target job
To set the job type that advances the count in box print with NE Controller (ASSIST).
Use Case When switching the job type that is subject to counting of the box print with NE Controller
0: PDL job, 1: Copy job
Default Value 0
PRJOB-CP 2 Set count TX at RX/report print

Detail To set to enable/disable a page-basis count pulse transmission to the charging management
device at the time of reception print or report print.
0: No transmission, 1: Transmission
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Charging management device: Coin Manager, Non-Canon-made control card
1090
8. Service Mode
DFLT-CPY 1 Setting of color mode for copy
Detail To set the default color mode for copy operation.
To reflect the change, it is necessary to initialize the default settings of copy function in one of the
following two ways.
- Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Copy> Change Default Settings> Initialize
- Main Menu> Copy> Logo icon in upper right of the screen> Change Default Settings> Initialize
2) Initialize the default settings of copy function.
Caution Be sure to initialize the default settings of copy function after change.
0: Based on Auto/ACS/Printer Driver settings, 1: Color mode, 2: Black mode
Additional Functions Function Settings> Copy> Change Default Settings> Initialize
Mode Function Settings> Copy> Select Color Settings for Copy> Use Auto (Color/Black & White)
DFLT-BOX 1 Setting of color mode for Mail Box scan

Detail To set the default color mode for Mail Box scan operation.
To reflect the change, it is necessary to initialize the default settings of scan and store function in
the screen displayed by pressing [Scan] in the main menu with one of the following methods.
- Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Store/Access Files> Common Settings> Scan and
Store Settings/Access Stored Files Settings> Change Default Settings> Initialize
- Logo icon in upper right of the screen> Change Default Settings> Initialize
2) Initialize the default settings of scan and store function.
Caution Be sure to initialize the default settings of scan and store function after change.
0: Based on Auto/ACS settings, 1: Color mode, 2: Black mode
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Main Menu> Scan and Store> Mail Box> (Box number)> Scan
Mode Function Settings> Store/Access Files> Common Settings> Scan and Store Settings/Access
Stored Files Settings> Change Default Settings> Initialize
DOC-REM 1 Display/hide of original removal message

Detail To set whether to display or hide the message to remove original when scanning with DADF without
opening/closing DADF after scanning with the Copyboard.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
1091
8. Service Mode
DPT-ID-7 2 Password entry set at dept ID reg/auth
To set whether to require a password entry at the time of registration/authentication of department
ID.
With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required as well as entry of department
ID.
0: Department ID only, 1: 7-digit (password) entry
Default Value 0
RUI-RJT 2 Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI

To set to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives invalid authentication from remote UI
3 times.
0: Continued connection, 1: Disconnected
Default Value 0
SND-RATE 2 Set compress ratio at SEND high compress

Detail To set the compression ratio when the data compression ratio for SEND (transmission) is set to
"High Rati".
As the value is larger, the compression ratio is higher (the file size becomes small).
Use Case When making the transmission file size smaller
Caution As the value is larger, image quality is decreased.
0: Compression ratio 1/16, 1: Compression ratio 1/20, 2: Compression ratio 1/24
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Function Settings> Send> Common Settings> Data Compression Ratio
Mode
FREG-SW 2 For R&D

IFAX-SZL 2 Setting of IFAX send size limit
Detail To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that does not go through the server.
With the setting to restrict the data size, there will be #830 error in the case of sending data that
exceeds the upper limit value.
In the case that the data goes through the server, the size of transmission data is always restricted.
0: Limited, 1: Not limited (Restriction applies when data goes through the server.)
Default Value 1
Mode
Supplement/Memo Set the upper limit value for transmission data size in Settings/Registration menu.
1092
8. Service Mode
IFAX-PGD 2 Set page split TX at IFAX Simple mode TX
Detail To set to enable/disable split-data transmission on a page basis in the case that the transmission
size in IFAX Simple mode exceeds the upper limit value.
Caution In the case to enable split-data transmission, be sure to get approval from the user by explaining
the following:
- No guarantee for page order on the reception side
- There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between pages.
Default Value 0
Mode
Supplement/Memo Set the upper limit value for transmission data size in Settings/Registration menu.
MEAPSAFE 2 Setting of MEAP safe mode

To set safe mode for MEAP platform.
MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode.
In safe mode, MEAP application is stopped while just the system application, which starts with
initial state, is activated. Logs for cause analysis of MEAP failure can be obtained.
Use Case Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to be activated due to resource
confliction between MEAP applications, service registration or use order.
0: Normal mode, 1: Safe mode
Default Value 0
TRAY-FLL 2 [Not used]

PRNT-POS 2 ON/OFF of all pauses at error job cancel
To set whether to pause the print operation of following jobs when a job is canceled due to an error
inside the machine (#037, etc.) except service calls during PDL print.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
AFN-PSWD 2 Setting of Set/Reg menu access limit

To set restriction on accessing Settings/Registration menu by entering password.
With the setting to enable this mode, password entry of system administrator is required after
pressing Settings/Registration key.
0: Password is not required, 1: Password is required
Default Value 0
1093
8. Service Mode
PTJAM-RC 2 Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam
Detail To set to automatically restart printing after jam recovery that occurs with PDL print.
0: Not automatically reprinted, 1: Automatically reprinted
Default Value 1
PDL-NCSW 2 Card mngm setting for PDL print job

To set to make PDL print job to be subject to card management by the Card Reader.
With the setting to enable this mode, PDL print is available only when the card ID of the card
inserted to the Card Reader matches the department ID.
0: PDL print is available with no card inserted.
1: PDL print is available only when the card ID matches the department ID in the case that the
card is inserted.
Default Value 0
PS-MODE 2 Setting of compatible mode at PS usage

Detail To set the image processing at PS print.
Set 8 when line width differs depending on the drawing position although the same line width is
set.
0 to 7: Spare
8: Strokeadjustment is enabled.
9 to 65535: Spare
Default Value 0
CNCT-RLZ 2 Setting of connection serialize function

Detail Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of imageWARE Output Manager
Select Edition V1.0.
The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement because the machine does not
receive job data from other connection until it completes job data reception from the current
connection.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Connection: Connection to be established through network between multiple hosts (PC, etc).
Job grouping function: A function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0. This is to
prevent job interruption from other PC by group job (sending multiple jobs in 1 session at job
transmission).
1094
8. Service Mode
0: No registration
Default Value 0

0: No registration
Default Value 0
2C-CT-SW 2 Set of color counter at 2-color mode

Detail To set whether to use the single color counter or full color counter for count-up in 2-color mode.
Use Case When supporting 2-color mode
0: Single color counter, 1: Full color counter
JA-FUNC 2 Display of job archive function ON/OFF

Detail To display ON/OFF of job archive function.
Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving.
Use Case When using the job archive function
Caution Setting cannot be made with this item.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
JA-JOB 2 Display of job archive target job

Detail To display the job type subject to job archive.
When the job archive function is ON, archive operation is executed when executing the target job.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> JA-FUNC
1095
8. Service Mode
JA-RESTR 2 Display of job archive restriction items
Detail To display restriction items for job archive specification.
When the job archive function is ON, follow the setting to execute operation to restrict specification.
0: OFF, 1: ON
32 specification restrictions with Bit definition
Bit0: Function to obtain image file (0: OFF, 1:ON)
Bit1: Function to compose form registration (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit2: Function to edit document (0:OFF, 1: ON)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> JA-FUNC
LDAP-SW 1 Retrieval condition set for LDAP server

Detail To set the condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server.
Use Case When specifying condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server
0: Includes the next, 1: Not include the next, 2: Equivalent to the next, 3: Not equivalent to the next,
4: Starts with the next, 5: Finishes with the next
Default Value 4
Supplement/Memo LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): Registering LDAP server enables to search e-mail
address, etc. from LDAP server and the result can be registered in the Address Book, etc.
Registration is available by the following: Set Destination > Register LDAP Server
FROM-OF 1 Deletion of mail sender's address

To set whether to delete the sender's address (From) at the time of e-mail transmission.
0: Retained, 1: Deleted
Default Value 0
DOM-ADD 2 Additional entry of mail destn domain

To set to automatically add the domain specified in Settings/Registration menu to the sending
address (To) entered at the time of e-mail transmission.
If specifying "xxx.com" as a domain in Settings/Registration menu in advance, just entering "aaa"
enables to display "aaa@xxx.com" when sending e-mail.
0: Not added, 1: Added
Default Value 0
1096
8. Service Mode
FILE-OF 1 Set file transmission to entered address
To set whether to allow file transmission to a newly entered address.
When 1 is set, file transmission is not available by entering the address because "File" is not
displayed on the transmission screen.
The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used.
Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses
registered in the Address Book can be used.
0: Allowed, 1: Prohibited
Default Value 0
MAIL-OF 1 Setting of e-mail TX to entered address

To set whether to allow e-mail transmission to a newly entered address.
When 1 is set, e-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because "E-mail" is not
Default Value 0
IFAX-OF 1 Setting of I-Fax TX to entered address

To set whether to allow I-Fax transmission to a newly entered address.
When 1 is set, I-Fax transmission is not available by entering the address because "I-Fax" is not
Default Value 0
1097
8. Service Mode
LDAP-DEF 1 Initial condtn set of LDAP server search
Detail To set initial condition for search target attribute that is specified at the time of LDAP server Details
search.
0: Name, 1: E-mail, 2: FAX, 3: Organization, 4: Organization unit, 5: No registration 1 (any setting),
6: No registration 2 (any setting)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> LDAP-SW
JA-DPI 2 Display of job archive record resolution

Detail To display the resolution of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX reception and
I-Fax reception, etc.
In service mode, display is available, but settings cannot be made. To make the settings, use the
MEAP application which supports job archiving.
Caution In service mode, display is available, but settings cannot be made. To make the settings, use the
0: No conversion, 1: 100 x 100 dpi, 2: 200 x 200 dpi, 3: 300 x 300 dpi
Default Value 3
JA-COMPR 2 Dspl job archive record compress ratio

Detail To display the compression ratio of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX
reception and I-Fax reception, etc.
In service mode, display is available, but settings cannot be made. To make the settings, use the
Caution In service mode, display is available, but settings cannot be made. To make the settings, use the
0: No conversion, 1: Compression ratio 1/4, 2: Compression ratio 1/8, 3: Compression ratio 1/16,
4: Compression ratio 1/32, 5: Compression ratio 1/64
Default Value 3
FREE-DSP 2 Display/hide of charge disable screen

Detail To set whether to display or hide the Use Charge Management screen for switching between
charge and no charge.
The hardware switch for switching charge/no charge in the Coin Manager enables the mode in
which all the services are available for free (store manager mode) by temporarily releasing the
charging system.
Even without the hardware switch, the mode can be switched with the software switch when it is
set to display the Use Charge Management screen in Settings/Registration.
Use Case When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily releasing the charging system
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Management Settings> Charge Management> Use Charge Management
Mode
1098
8. Service Mode
TNRB-SW 2 Set of Toner Container counter display
Detail To set whether to display the Toner Container counter on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case When switching to display or hide toner consumption status
0: Hide, 1: Display (Toner Container counter 70/870s), 2: Display (Toner Container counter
70/870s and ejection counter), 3: Display (Toner Container counter 70/870s and 180s)
JA-FORMT 2 Display of job archive record format

Detail To display the format of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX reception and
IFAX reception, etc.
Whether the images processed by Packet JPEG are recorded in Packet JPEG, or converted into
Raster JPEG and then recorded is displayed.
0: Packet JPEG, 1: Raster JPEG
Default Value 0
HDCR-DSW 1 ON/OFF of HDD complete deletion display

Detail To set whether to display "Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion" in [Settings/Registration].
When 1 is set, unneeded data in the hard disk can be deleted completely on the HDD Data
Complete Deletion screen.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Management Settings> Data Management> HDD Data Complete Deletion> Hard Disk Data
Mode Complete Deletion
BWCL-DSP 2 ON/OFF of color/B&W selection screen

Detail To set whether to display the color/B&W selection screen to select the default of the color mode.
Use Case When displaying the color mode default selection screen
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
SCALL-SW 1 [Not used]

SCALLCMP 1 [Not used]
1099
8. Service Mode
USBH-DSP 2 Display/hide of "Use USB Host"
Detail To set whether to display "Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host".
By selecting "1: Display", whether to use USB host on USB Settings screen can be selected.
Use Case When switching to display or hide "Use USB Host" on USB Settings screen
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host
Mode
USBM-DSP 2 ON/OFF USB ex-mem device MEAP driver use

Detail To set whether to display "Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device" in Settings/Registration
menu.
When 0 is set, the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the setting.
Use Case When not allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver
Caution When setting 0, be sure to make the setting after the specified setting is completed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device
Mode
USBI-DSP 2 ON/OFF USB input device MEAP driver use

Detail To set whether to display "Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device" in Settings/Registration menu.
When 0 is set, the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the setting.
Use Case When not allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver
Caution When setting 0, be sure to make the setting after the specified setting is completed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device
Mode
CTCHKDSP 1 Display/hide of counter print

Detail To set whether to display or hide "Print List" on the Counter Check screen.
Model name, model number information, counter check date and counter information can be output
as a total count management report.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
1100
8. Service Mode
USBR-DSP 2 ON/OFF USB infrared devc MEAP driver use
Detail To set whether to display "Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device" in Settings/Registration
menu.
When 1 is set, whether to use MEAP driver can be selected on USB Settings screen.
Use Case When allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device
Mode
POL-SCAN 1 Dspl/hide Rights Management Server set

Detail When "1: Display" is set, the Rights Management Server function screen is displayed.
While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature, it is possible to hide if not
necessary.
0: Hide, 1: Display
JA-SBOX 2 Setting of linking with Advanced Box:SAM

To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, linking with Advanced Box is enabled.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Default Value 0
JA-DFAX 2 Setting of direct fax transmission: SAM

To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the direct fax transmission is enabled.
Default Value 0
1101
8. Service Mode
JA-REP 2 Setting of TX Report with image: SAM
To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the TX Report with image is enabled.
Default Value 0
JA-FREP 2 Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM

To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled.
Default Value 0
JA-BOX 2 Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM

To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated.
Default Value 0
JA-FORM 2 Setting of image composition: SAM

To set the image composition when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the image composition is enabled.
Default Value 0
JA-PREV 2 Setting of preview page deletion: SAM

To set whether a page is deleted from the scan preview screen at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, a page is deleted from the scan preview screen.
Default Value 0
1102
8. Service Mode
JA-PULL 2 Setting of network scan: SAM
To set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the network scan is enabled.
Default Value 0
JA-PDLB 2 Set of printer driver multi box save:SAM

To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver
at the time of iW SAM.
When 1 is set, a document can be saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver.
Default Value 0
JA-JOBK 2 Setting of job merge allowance:SAM

To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, jobs can be merged.
Default Value 0
JA-JDF 2 Setting of JDF: SAM

To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, JDF can be used.
Default Value 0
JA-RUI 2 Setting of Inbox document access: SAM

To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is enabled.
Default Value 0
1103
8. Service Mode
JA-WEB 2 Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM
To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time of iW SAM.
When 1 is set uploading to the Inbox document with the Web Browser is enabled.
Default Value 0
EXP-CRYP 1 Confdntial encrypt ON/OFF:add book exprt

To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the Address Book when exporting
the Address Book and device settings via RUI.
When 0 is set, the confidential part in the Address Book is exported without encryption.
Use Case When there is a need to export password without encryption because of operation and tool
Caution Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption because of security concern.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
SMD-EXPT 1 Setting of export target data: remote UI

Detail To set whether to export "service mode data" from remote UI.
When 1 is set, "service mode data" is displayed as the target data of export on remote UI. When
installing more than 1 machine at the same time, the same service mode data can be registered.
Use Case When installing more than 1 machine at the same time
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo If selecting "service mode data" as the target data of export on remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT
to 1, service mode data can be exported.
SNDSTREN 1 Set of setting delete aftr scan and send

Detail To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from
the "Scan and Send" screen.
0: Deleted, 1: Retained only the transmission setting, 2: Retained the transmission setting and
address
1104
8. Service Mode
FAXSTREN 1 Set of setting delete aftr fax transmit
Detail To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from
the "Fax" screen.
0: Delete, 1: Retain
SJ-UNMSK 2 ON/OFF secured job masking cancellation

Detail To set whether to mask other people's secured jobs.
When 0 is set, operation of other people's secured jobs is not possible because they are masked.
When COIN is set to 6 or 7 (charge mode: Type-C), set 1. Masking is canceled and other people's
secured jobs can be operated.
It is enabled at MEAP authentication.
Use Case When operating secured jobs in charge mode Type-C
0: OFF (Masking enabled), 1: ON (Masking canceled)
Default Value 0
SJ-CLMSK 2 ON/OFF secured job stop button display

Detail To set whether to display the button to stop a secured job.
When 0 is set, the stop button is displayed.
When COIN is set to 6 or 7 (charge mode: Type-C), set 1. Since the stop button is not displayed,
the secured job cannot be stopped.
Use Case When prohibiting to stop the secured job in charge mode Type-C
0: OFF (Display), 1: ON (Hide)
Default Value 0
PRTDP-SW 1 Set delivery side for 1-page job:2-sided

Detail To set whether to deliver paper face-up or face-down when printing only 1 page although 2-sided
print is set.
When 0 is set, paper is delivered face-down like 1-sided job. (Paper does not pass through the
Duplex Path.)
When 1 is set, paper is delivered face-up via the Duplex Path. Paper feed distance becomes longer
so productivity is decreased.
Use Case When changing the delivery side of 1-page print although 2-sided print is set
0: Face-down delivery, 1: Face-up delivery
Default Value 0
1105
8. Service Mode
PDFD-MSW 2 Set output paper size: direct print PDF
Detail To set output paper size at direct print PDF.
Usually, the region defined by MediaBox is output. However, in some cases, the region defined
(trimmed) by CropBox is judged as output paper size depending on PDF file.
Set 1 when output result differs from what is defined at direct print PDF.
Use Case When preferring to output a PDF file with paper which size is defined by CropBox while the sizes
of MediaBox and CropBox are different
0: MediaBox (Normal), 1: CropBox
Default Value 0
SFT-OUT 2 Setting of offset priority delivery

Detail To set whether to deliver a job where offset and collate/offset group is set to the delivery destination
with offset function.
When 0 is set, a job is delivered to the delivery destination set in [Settings/Registration] even
though the offset function is not available.
When 1 is set, a job is delivered to the delivery destination with offset function even though a
delivery destination without offset function is set in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When preferring to deliver a job to the delivery destination with offset function
0: Based on Output Tray Settings, 1: Priority on job settings (deliver to a delivery destination where
offset is possible)
Default Value 1
Mode
LGCY-SCP 2 Setting of PPA/secured print switch

To set whether to use the PPA function or the conventional secured print function.
Set 0 when using the PPA function. The conventional secured print function is disabled.
Set 1 when using the conventional secured print function (when the EFI Controller is connected,
etc.). The PPA function is disabled.
When IMG-CONT is set to 3 or 4 for connecting the EFI Controller, the setting of this item becomes
1.
When this item is set to 0, the setting of UI-PPA becomes 1. When this item is set to 1, the setting
of UI-PPA becomes 0.
Use Case When using the conventional secured print function (when the EFI Controller is connected, etc.)
Caution The PPA function cannot be used when the EFI Controller is connected.
0: Use the PPA function, 1: Use the conventional secured print function
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-PPA
COPIER> OPTION> INT-FACE> IMG-CONT
print.
1106
8. Service Mode
VC-CNT 2 Set tiered base pricing oprtn method
Detail To set the operation method of the tiered base pricing.
Name of the tiered base pricing counter displayed on the Check Counter screen is switched
according to the selected operation method.
Use Case When starting operation of the tiered base pricing
0: Normal charge, 1: Tiered base pricing 1, 2: Tiered base pricing 2, 3: Tiered base pricing 3
Default Value 0
VC-AVE 2 Set tiered base pricing calculate method

Detail To set the calculation method of video count correction value to be used for the tiered base pricing.
When 0 is set, the correction value is derived by averaging the video count values for 3 colors (Y/
M/C). When 1 is set, it is derived by averaging the video count values for 4 colors (Y/M/C/Bk).
0: (Y+M+C)/3, 1: (Y+M+C+Bk)/4
Default Value 0
VC-HIGH 2 Tiered base pricing cntr "High" thrshld

Detail To set the threshold value for the tiered base pricing counter "High".
To enter the value 10 times higher than the estimated video count value (%).
Video count correction value higher than the value (setting value x 0.1 (%)) is judged as "High".
As the value is changed by 1, the threshold is changed by 0.1%.
Display/Adj/Set Range 50 to 2000 (5 to 200%)
Default Value 100
VC-LOW 2 Tiered base pricing cntr "Low" thrshld

Detail To set the threshold value for the tiered base pricing counter "Low".
To enter the value 10 times higher than the estimated video count value (%).
Video count correction value lower than the value (setting value x 0.1 (%)) is judged as "Low".
As the value is changed by 1, the threshold is changed by 0.1%.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 50 (0 to 5%)
Default Value 10
1107
8. Service Mode
FLM-DSPL 2 ON/OFF of Clear Film usage
Detail To set whether to use the Clear Film.
When 0 is set, the Clear Film cannot be used.
When 1 is set, "Clear Film" is displayed on the paper type screen for the Multi-purpose Tray and
POD Deck Lite so it can be registered as the paper to be used.
Use Case When using large size transparency or special film (for customization)
Caution After the setting is made, be sure to check that it can be fed. If there is an error, set the value back
to 0.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings> Paper Type
Mode
CNT-PRT 2 ON/OFF of parts counter report output

Detail To set whether to print parts counter values on the counter report.
Use Case When grasping the estimated life of parts while the monitoring service function is not used
0: OFF (Not print), 1: ON (Print)
Additional Functions Check Counter> Print List
Mode
DRS-ADR 2 [Not used]

DRS-USER 2 [Not used]
DRS-PSWD 2 [Not used]
JA-WIFI 2 Setting of SAM Wi-Fi direct print
To set whether to allow Wi-Fi direct print when iW SAM is enabled.
Wi-Fi direct print cannot be used when iW SAM is enabled. However, when 1 is set, it can be used.
Default Value 0
1108
8. Service Mode
■ CST
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CST
CST1-P1 1 Setting of Cst1 paper size (A5R/STMTR)
Detail To set the paper size (A5R/STMTR) used in the Cassette 1.
Use Case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Additional Functions Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
Mode

0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Additional Functions Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
Mode

0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Mode

0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Mode
1109
8. Service Mode
CST-K-SW 2 Set of EXEC/16K size support: Cassette 1
Detail To set whether to support EXEC or 16K size (K-size paper) by the Cassette 1.
This setting is enabled only for the location where K-size paper can be selected in [Settings/
Registration]. For other locations, only EXEC can be set.
Caution When K-size paper cannot be selected in [Settings/Registration], only the setting value 0 can be
set.
0: EXEC, 1: 16K
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> KSIZE-SW
Supplement/Memo 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm
C2-K-SW 2 Set of EXEC/16K size support: Cassette 2

set.
0: EXEC, 1: 16K
Default Value 0

set.
0: EXEC, 1: 16K
Default Value 0
1110
8. Service Mode
set.
0: EXEC, 1: 16K
Default Value 0
1111
8. Service Mode
■ ACC
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC
COIN 1 Setting of charge management
To set charge management method.
Use Case At installation of Coin Manager
Caution Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 3 (from 0 to 2) when setting
3. The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 3) once the mode
has been changed.
- COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL, AFN-PSWD=1
- COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> DA-CNCT=1
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX=0
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv4 Settings> IP Address Range Settings> RX/Print
Range: Allow IPv4 Address=ON
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv6 Settings> IP Address Range Settings> RX/Print
Range: Allow IPv6 Address=ON
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> FTP Print Settings> Use FTP Printing=OFF
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPP Print Settings=ON
- Preferences> Network> SMB Server Settings> SMB Printer Settings> Use SMB=ON
- Function Settings> Send> E-mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication Settings> SMTP Receive,
POP=OFF
Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 4 (from 0 to 2) when setting
4. The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 4) once the mode
has been changed.
- COPIER> OPTION> USER> AFN-PSWD=1
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX, UI-RSCAN, UI-EPRNT, UI-
HOLD=0
- Management Settings> Device Management> Display Log=OFF
0: No charge
1: Charge with Coin Manager
2: Charge with remote counter
3: Charge with DA (only in Japan)
4: Charge with this machine itself
5: New SC mode
6: External charge mode 6
7: External charge mode 7
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> PDL-THR
Additional Functions Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication Settings
Mode Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> DNS Settings> FTP Print Settings, IPP Print Settings
Supplement/Memo Control card can be used with "No charge".
DA: Digital Accessory
DK-P 1 Setting of Paper Deck paper size

Detail To set the paper size used in the Paper Deck.
0: A4, 1: LTR, 2: B5
Default Value 0
1112
8. Service Mode
CARD-SW 1 Set screen dspl: Coin Manager connected
Detail To set coin or card that the user is prompted to insert on the Control Panel when the Coin Manager
is connected.
When 1 is set, authentication operation using the Coin Manager is also required.
0 and 3: Card, 1: Card + authentication, 2: Coin/Card
Default Value 0
STPL-LMT 2 Set number of sheets for saddle stitch

Detail To set the number of sheets for saddle stitch
0: 5 sheets without blank band (6 sheets when a cover is included)
1: 10 sheets without blank band (11 sheets when a cover is included)
2: 10 sheets with blank band (11 sheets when a cover is included)
3: 15 sheets with blank band (16 sheets when a cover is included)
Default Value 3
OUT-TRAY 1 Presence/absence of Third Delivery Tray

Detail To set whether the Third Delivery Tray is installed or not.
When it is installed, set 1.
Use Case When the Third Delivery Tray is installed
Default Value 0
CC-SPSW 2 Setting of control card I/F support

Detail To set support level of control card (CCIV/CCV) interface.
To keep processing performance of the printer engine, set 1.
To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets, set 2.
Use Case Upon user's request (when connecting to the external counter management system using the
control card interface)
Caution When 1 is set, output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets.
When 2 is set, processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup
location.
0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets
Default Value 0
1113
8. Service Mode
UNIT-PRC 2 Setting of Coin Manager currency unit
Detail To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager
0: Japanese yen, 1: Euro, 2: Pound, 3: Swiss Franc, 4: Dollar, 5: No currency unit (no fractional
unit), 6: No currency unit (with fractional unit)
Default Value 0
IN-TRAY 1 Presence/absence of Second Delivery Tray

Detail To set whether the Second Delivery Tray is installed or not.
When it is installed, set 1.
Use Case When the Second Delivery Tray is installed
Default Value 0
MIN-PRC 1 Set of Coin Manager minimum price

Detail To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 10 when specifying 10 Japanese yen as the minimum amount to be handled with the Coin
Manager that supports Japanese yen.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by going through the following:
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> UNIT-PRC, entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($
0.50).
Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN.
Default Value 10
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/Memo When a value smaller than the minimum amount is entered in Settings/Registration menu as the
charging amount, it causes an error.
MAX-PRC 1 Set of Coin Manager maximum price

Detail To set the maximum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 8800 when specifying 8800 Japanese yen as the maximum amount to be handled with the
Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen.
Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN.
Default Value 8800
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/Memo When a value larger than the maximum amount is entered in Settings/Registration menu as the
charging amount, it causes an error.
1114
8. Service Mode
MIC-TUN 1 Manual adj of voice recognize microphone
Detail To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the connected voice recognition
microphone.
Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in Settings/Registration menu; however, adjust it
manually as needed.
Use Case When the sensitivity of microphone is not improved by auto tuning
Default Value 128
Additional Functions Preferences> Accessibility> Voice Navigation Settings> Tune Microphone
Mode
SRL-SPSW 1 Setting of Serial I/F Kit support

Detail To set the support level of the Serial Interface Kit.
To keep processing performance of printer engine, select "1: Priority on speed".
To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets, select "2: Priority on upper limit
number of sheets".
Use Case At installation of Serial Interface Kit
Caution With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets.
With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing performance of the printer engine is
decreased depending on pickup location.
0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets
Default Value 0
PDL-THR 2 ON/OFF PDL print: external charge mode

To set whether to execute normal PDL print when COIN is set to external charge mode 6/7.
Use Case When executing normal PDL print in external charge mode
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
CR-TYPE 1 [Not used]

MEAP-SRL 1 Set to allow serial comctn from MEAP app
To set whether to allow serial communication of MEAP application.
When 1 is set, serial communication of the machine is stopped and only the serial communication
with MEAP application is available.
Use Case When performing serial communication from MEAP application
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0
1115
8. Service Mode
HCC-P 1 Setting of Cst3 paper size (CST-FD2)
Detail To set the paper size used in the High Capacity Cassette Pedestal.
2) Adjust the Guide Plate position.
0: A4, 1: LTR
CV-CSZ 1 Set outpt info notice:chg w/device alone

Detail To set whether to notify the Coin Manager of color mode and paper size at the time of charging
with a device alone.
Use Case When Coin Manager (CV3) is connected
Caution Set 0 when a coin manager other than CV3 is connected. When 1 is set, an error occurs.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
IMG-RTRY 1 ON/OFF of img form proc for Coin Manager

Detail To set whether to perform image formation process supporting the connected Coin Manager.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
■ INT-FACE
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > INT-FACE
IMG-CONT 1 Connection setting of print server
Detail To set connection with print server.
When Secure print is set to 3 or 4, Conventional secured print function becomes effective(LGCY-
SCP becomes 1).
When Conventional secured print function becomes effective, Forced Hold Printing becomes
invalid(UI-PPA become 0).
If IMG-CONT is changed back from 3 or 4 to 0, LGCY-SCP do not link with each other.
Use Case At installation/Removal
0: Print server not yet connected (normal), 1, 2: Not used, 3: Print server (color machine)
connected, 4: Print server (B&W machine) connected, 5: Not used
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> LGCY-SCP
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-PPA
Supplement/Memo PPA (Personal Print Application): A function to Forced Hold Printing. It contains the function of
secured print.
AP-OPT 2 [Not used]

AP-ACCNT 2 [Not used]
AP-CODE 2 [Not used]
1116
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > INT-FACE
NWCT-TM 2 Timeout setting of network connection
To set the time to keep network connection between this machine and the PC application (keep-
alive setting).
As the value is incremented by 1, the time is increased by 1 minute.
Unit min
Default Value 5
Supplement/Memo Expected PC application: Network print application, E-mail function, cascade copy, MEAP network
application, etc.
Unit
CNT-TYPE 1 Display of print server ID

Detail To display the ID of the print server being recognized by the machine.
Use Case At installation of print server
1: Not yet connected, 400 to 499: EFI print server, 600 to 699: Creo print server, 700 to 799: Oce
print server
Default Value 1
VTRNS-TO 2 For R&D

Unit
■ LCNS-TR
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-SEND 2 Installation state dspl of SEND function
Detail To display installation state of SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether SEND function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SEND.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
TR-SEND 2 Trns license key dspl of SEND function

Detail To display transfer license key to use SEND function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SEND.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits
1117
8. Service Mode
ST-ENPDF 2 Install state dspl of Encryption PDF
Detail To display installation state of Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Encryption PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
TR-ENPDF 2 Trns license key dspl of Encryption PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
ST-SPDF 2 Install state dspl of Searchable PDF

Detail To display installation state of Searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Searchable PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF.
TR-SPDF 2 Trns license key dspl of Searchable PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF.
ST-EXPDF 2 Instal state of Encry PDF + Searchbl PDF

Detail To display installation state of Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-EXPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF.
1118
8. Service Mode
TR-EXPDF 2 Trns lcns key of Encry PDF+Searchbl PDF
Detail To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-EXPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan.
ST-PDFDR 2 Install state dspl of Direct Print PDF

Detail To display installation state of Direct Print PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Direct Print PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PDFDR.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR.
TR-PDFDR 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Direct Print PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PDFDR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR.
ST-SCR 2 Install state dspl of Encry Secure Print

Detail To display installation state of Encrypted Secure Print when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Encrypted Secure Print is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCR.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR.
TR-SCR 2 Trns license key dspl: Encry Secure Pnt

Detail To display transfer license key to use Encrypted Secure Print when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR.
Caution This mode is enabled when there is "3DES+USH-H" Board.
1119
8. Service Mode
ST-BRDIM 2 Install state dspl: PCL Barcode Printing
Detail To display installation state of Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Barcode Printing for PCL is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
TR-BRDIM 2 Trns lcns key dspl: PCL Barcode Printing

Detail To display transfer license key to use Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
ST-VNC 2 Install state dspl of Remote Oprtr Soft

Detail To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-VNC.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC.
TR-VNC 2 Trns lcns dspl of Remote Operators Soft

Detail To display transfer license key to use Remote Operators Software when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-VNC.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC.
ST-WEB 2 Install state dspl: Web Access Software

Detail To display installation state of Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Web Access Software is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WEB.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB.
1120
8. Service Mode
TR-WEB 2 Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft
Detail To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WEB.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB.
ST-HRPDF 2 Install state dspl of High Compress PDF

Detail To display installation state of High Compression PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether High Compression PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HRPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF.
TR-HRPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of High Compress PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use High Compression PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HRPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF.
ST-TRSND 2 Install state dspl: Trial SEND function

Detail To display installation state of Trial SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Trial SEND function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TRSND.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND.
TR-TRSND 2 Trns lcns key dspl: Trial SEND function

Detail To display transfer license key to use Trial SEND function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TRSND.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND.
1121
8. Service Mode
ST-WTMRK 2 Install state dspl of Secure Watermark
Detail To display installation state of Secure Watermark when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Secure Watermark is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WTMRK.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK.
TR-WTMRK 2 Trns license key dspl: Secure Watermark

Detail To display transfer license key to use Secure Watermark when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WTMRK.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK.
ST-TSPDF 2 Install state dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP

Detail To display installation state of Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Time Stamp PDF (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TSPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.
TR-TSPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TSPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.
ST-USPDF 2 Install state dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF

Detail To display installation state of Digital User Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Digital User Signature PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-USPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF.
Default Value 0
1122
8. Service Mode
TR-USPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF
Detail To display transfer license key to use Digital User Signature PDF when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-USPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF.
ST-DVPDF 2 Install state dspl of Device Sign PDF

Detail To display installation state of Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Device Signature PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-DVPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
TR-DVPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Device Sign PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-DVPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
ST-SCPDF 2 Install state dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF

Detail To display installation state of Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Trace & Smooth PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF.
TR-SCPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF.
1123
8. Service Mode
ST-AMS 2 Install state dspl of Access Mngm System
Detail To display installation state of Access Management System when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Access Management System is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AMS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS.
TR-AMS 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Access Mngm System

Detail To display transfer license key to use Access Management System when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AMS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS.
ST-ERDS 2 Install state dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn

Detail To display installation state of E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function when disabling and
then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ERDS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
Supplement/Memo Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the non-Canon-made charge
server.
TR-ERDS 2 Trns lcns key dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn

Detail To display transfer license key to use E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function when disabling
and then transferring the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ERDS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
Supplement/Memo Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the non-Canon-made charge
server.
ST-PS 2 Install state display of PS function

Detail To display installation state of PS function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
1124
8. Service Mode
TR-PS 2 Transfer license key dspl of PS function
Detail To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
ST-PCL 2 Install state display of PCL function

Detail To display installation state of PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCL.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
TR-PCL 2 Transfer license key dspl: PCL function

Detail To display transfer license key to use PCL function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
ST-PSLI5 2 Install state dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP

Detail To display installation state of PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) when disabling and then
Use Case When checking whether PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLI5.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5.
Default Value 0
TR-PSLI5 2 Trns lcns key dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) when disabling and
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLI5.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5.
1125
8. Service Mode
ST-LIPS5 2 Install state dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP
Detail To display installation state of LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then
Use Case When checking whether LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LIPS5.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5.
TR-LIPS5 2 Trns lcns key dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5.
ST-LIPS4 2 Install state display of LIPS4 func: JP

Detail To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4.
TR-LIPS4 2 Trns license key dspl of LIPS4 func: JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring
the license.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4.
ST-PSPCL 2 Install state dspl of PS/PCL function

Detail To display installation state of PS/PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS/PCL function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCL.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL.
1126
8. Service Mode
TR-PSPCL 2 Transfer license key dspl of PS/PCL func
Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL.
ST-PCLUF 2 Install state dspl: PCL/UFR II function

Detail To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL/UFR II function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCLUF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF.
TR-PCLUF 2 Trns license key dspl of PCL/UFR II func

Detail To display transfer license key to use PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCLUF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF.
ST-PSLIP 2 Install state dspl of PS/LIPS4 func: JP

Detail To display installation state of PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLIP.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP.
TR-PSLIP 2 Trns license key dspl: PS/LIPS4 func:JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLIP.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP.
1127
8. Service Mode
ST-PSPCU 2 Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func
Detail To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCU.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU.
TR-PSPCU 2 Trns lcns key dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCU.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU.
ST-LXUFR 2 Install state display of UFR II function

Detail To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether UFR II function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LXUFR.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR.
TR-LXUFR 2 Trns license key dspl of UFR II function

Detail To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LXUFR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR.
ST-HDCR2 2 Install state dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set

Detail To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data/Settings is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HDCR2.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2.
Default Value 0
1128
8. Service Mode
TR-HDCR2 2 Trns lcns key dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set
Detail To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HDCR2.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2.
ST-JBLK 2 Install state dspl of Document Scan Lock

Detail To display installation state of Document Scan Lock when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Document Scan Lock is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-JBLK.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK.
Default Value 0
TR-JBLK 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Document Scan Lock

Detail To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-JBLK.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK.
ST-AFAX 2 Installation state display of Remote Fax

Detail To display installation state of Remote Fax when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Remote Fax is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AFAX.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
TR-AFAX 2 Transfer license key dspl of Remote Fax

Detail To display transfer license key to use Remote Fax when disabling and then transferring the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AFAX.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
1129
8. Service Mode
ST-REPDF 2 Install state dspl:Reader Extensions PDF
Detail To display installation state of Reader Extensions PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Reader Extensions PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-REPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF.
TR-REPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl:Reader Extensions PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Reader Extensions PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-REPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF.
ST-OOXML 2 Install state display of Office Open XML

Detail To display installation state of Office Open XML when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Office Open XML is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OOXML.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML.
TR-OOXML 2 Trns lcns key display of Office Open XML

Detail To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OOXML.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML.
ST-XPS 2 Install state dspl of Direct Print XPS

Detail To display installation state of Direct Print XPS when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Direct Print XPS is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-XPS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS.
1130
8. Service Mode
TR-XPS 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print XPS
Detail To display transfer license key to use Direct Print XPS when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-XPS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS.
ST-2600 2 Instal state dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func

Detail To display installation state of the IEEE2600.1 security function when disabling and then
Use Case When checking whether the IEEE2600.1 security function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-2600.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600.
TR-2600 2 Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func

Detail To display transfer license key to use IEEE2600.1 security function when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-2600.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600.
ST-OPFNT 2 Install state display of PCL Font Set

Detail To display installation state of PCL Font Set when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL Font Set is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OPFNT.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT.
TR-OPFNT 2 Trns license key display of PCL Font Set

Detail To display transfer license key to use the PCL Font Set when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OPFNT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT.
1131
8. Service Mode
ST-NCAPT 2 Install state display of NetCap function
Detail To display installation state of network packet capture function when disabling and then
Use Case When checking whether network packet capture function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT.
TR-NCAPT 2 Transfer license key dspl of NetCap func

Detail To display transfer license key to use the network packet capture function when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT.
ST-IPFAX 2 Installation state display of IPFAX

Detail To display installation state of IPFAX when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether IPFAX is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-IPFAX.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-IPFAX.
Default Value 0
TR-IPFAX 2 Transfer license key dspl of IPFAX

Detail To display transfer license key to use IPFAX when disabling and then transferring the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-IPFAX.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-IPFAX.
ST-U-RDS 2 Install state display of E-RDS function

Detail To display installation state of Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Embedded-RDS function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS
1132
8. Service Mode
TR-U-RDS 2 Trns license key dspl of E-RDS function
Detail To display transfer license key to use Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then
Use Case - When replacing the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
ST-OFIC 2 Install state dspl:MS Office direct func

Detail To display installation state of MS Office direct function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether MS Office direct function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OFIC.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OFIC.
TR-OFIC 2 Trns lcns key dspl:MS Office direct func

Detail To display transfer license key to use MS Office direct function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OFIC.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OFIC.
ST-SMLG 2 Install state dspl of picture login func

Detail To display installation state of picture login function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether picture login function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SMLG.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SMLG.
TR-SMLG 2 Trns lcns key dspl: picture login func

Detail To display transfer license key to use picture login function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SMLG.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SMLG.
1133
8. Service Mode
ST-TCFNT 2 Inst state dspl:PCL Asian Font, trad CHI
Detail To display installation state of PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) when disabling and then
transfer the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TCFNT.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TCFNT.
Caution When replacing the HDD, check that "PCL Traditional Chinese Fonts" and "PCL Traditional
Chinese Fonts (HKSCS)" are installed with [Font List] in [Settings/Registration].
Additional Functions Function Settings> Printer> Output Report> PCL> Font List
Mode
TR-TCFNT 2 Trn lic key dspl:PCL Asian Font,trad CHI

Detail To display transfer license key to use PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) when disabling and
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TCFNT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TCFNT.
Additional Functions Function Settings> Printer> Output Report> PCL> Font List
Mode
TR-DRS 2 [Not used]

ST-DRS 2 [Not used]
TR-FRWEB 2 Trn lcns key dspl:Web Access SW,free ver
Detail To display transfer license key to use the free version of Web Access Software when disabling
and then transferring the license of it.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-FRWEB.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-FRWEB.
ST-FRWEB 2 Instl state dspl:Web Access SW, free ver

Detail To display installation state of the free version of Web Access Software when disabling and then
transferring the license of it.
Use Case When checking whether the free version of Web Access Software is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-FRWEB.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-FRWEB.
■ CUSTOM2
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2
SP-B01 2 [For customization]
1134
8. Service Mode
1135
8. Service Mode
SP-V01 2 [For customization]
1136
8. Service Mode
1137
8. Service Mode
1138
8. Service Mode
TEST (Print test mode)

■ PG
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > TEST (Print test mode) > PG
TYPE 1 Test print
Detail To execute the test print.
Test print is executed.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test print output.
0: Image from CCD (normal print)
1 to 3: For R&D use
4: 16 gradations
5: Whole-area halftone image
6: Grid
7 to 9: For R&D use
10: MCYBk horizontal stripes
11: For R&D use
12: YMCBk 64 gradations
13: For R&D use
14: Full color 16 gradations
15 to 100: For R&D use
Default Value 0
TXPH 1 Setting of test print image mode

Detail To set the image mode at the time of test print output.
This mode is enabled for test print only.
0: 600 dpi error diffusion (no trailing edge correction of Bk), 1: "Gradation" screen (no trailing edge
correction of Bk), 2: "Resolution" screen (no trailing edge correction of Bk), 3 to 4: None, 5: 600
dpi error diffusion (with trailing edge correction of Bk), 6: "Resolution" screen (with trailing edge
correction of Bk), 7: 1200 dpi error diffusion (no trailing edge correction of Bk), 8: 1200 dpi error
diffusion (with trailing edge correction of Bk), 9: "Gradation" screen (with trailing edge correction
of Bk)
THRU 1 Set image correct table use: test print

Detail To set whether to use the image correction table at the time of test print output.
0: "Auto Adjust Gradation": ON, "Auto Correct Full Color": OFF
1: "Auto Adjust Gradation": OFF, "Auto Correct Full Color": OFF
2: "Auto Adjust Gradation": ON, "Auto Correct Full Color": ON
DENS-Y 1 Adj of Y-color density at test print

Detail To adjust Y-color density when performing test print (TYPE = 5).
Use Case At test print (TYPE = 5)
1139
8. Service Mode
DENS-M 1 Adj of M-color density at test print
Detail To adjust M-color density when performing test print (TYPE = 5).
DENS-C 1 Adj of C-color density at test print

Detail To adjust C-color density when performing test print (TYPE = 5).
DENS-K 1 Adj of Bk-color density at test print

Detail To adjust Bk-color density when performing test print (TYPE = 5).
Default Value 128
COLOR-Y 1 Setting of Y-color output at test print

Detail To set whether to output Y-color at the time of test print.
The setting is applied to all types.
When setting COLOR-Y to 1 and COLOR-M/C/K to 0, a single Y-color is output.
Use Case At test print
0: Not output, 1: Output
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-M/C/K
COLOR-M 1 Setting of M-color output at test print

Detail To set whether to output M-color at the time of test print.
When setting COLOR-M to 1 and COLOR-Y/C/K to 0, a single M-color is output.
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-Y/C/K
COLOR-C 1 Setting of C-color output at test print

Detail To set whether to output C-color at the time of test print.
When setting COLOR-C to 1 and COLOR-Y/M/K to 0, a single C-color is output.
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-Y/M/K
1140
8. Service Mode
COLOR-K 1 Setting of Bk-color output at test print
Detail To set whether to output Bk-color at the time of test print.
When setting COLOR-K to 1 and COLOR-Y/M/C to 0, a single Bk-color is output.
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-Y/M/C
F/M-SW 1 Setting of PG full color/single color

Detail To set whether to output PG in full color or single color.
Use Case When identifying the cause whether it's due to full color or single color
0: Full color, 1: Single color
Default Value 0
PG-PICK 1 Setting of test print paper source

Detail To set the paper source at the time of test print output.
1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3: Cassette 3, 4: Cassette 4, 5: Multi-purpose Tray, 6: Paper Deck,
7 to 8: Not used
2-SIDE 1 Setting of PG 2-sided mode

Detail To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default Value 0
PG-QTY 1 Setting of PG output quantity

Detail To set the number of sheets for PG output.
Unit sheet
Default Value 1
Unit
1141
8. Service Mode
FINISH 1 Accessory processing function test print
Detail To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function.
Use Case When checking operation of accessory processing function
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the number of sheets for PG-QTY, and then press OK key.
2) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
3) Press Start button.
The machine outputs a test print.
0: N/A
1: Staple (Finisher, front)
2: Staple (Finisher, 2 points)
3: Staple (Finisher, rear)
5: Z-fold (Finisher)
8: Saddle fold (Finisher)
11: Punch (Inner Puncher)
Any values other than those mentioned above: Not used
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-QTY
■ NETWORK
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > TEST (Print test mode) > NETWORK
PING 1 Network connection check
Detail To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network.
Use Case - When checking network connection at the time of installation
- At network connection failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Turn OFF the main power switch.
2) Connect the network cable to this machine, and then turn ON the main power switch.
3) Inform the system administrator at user's site that installation of this machine is complete, and
ask for network setting.
4) Ask the system administrator to check the network connection, and check the remote host
address of PING transmission target.
5) Select the item and enter the remote host address, and then press OK key and Start key.
OK: Connection is normal. Checking procedure is complete.
NG: Connection failed. Go to step 6) if the cable connection is OK. In case of cable connection
failure, connect again and then go to step 5).
6) Select the item and enter loopback address, and then press OK key and Start key.
OK: TCP/IP setting of this machine is normal. Go to step 7) to check NIC.
NG: TCP/IP setting of this machine has failure. Go to step 3) to check the setting again.
7) Select the item and enter the local host address, and then press OK key.
OK: Network setting of this machine and NIC are normal. Inform the system administrator that the
trouble is due to network environment and ask for countermeasure.
NG: Connection failure/fault with NIC. Check connection of NIC/ replace NIC.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
At normal state: OK, At failure occurrence: NG
Supplement/Memo - Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal in network.
- Loopback address: 127.0.0.1. Checking TCP/IP of this machine is available because the signal
is returned before NIC.
- NIC: Network interface board
- Local host address: IP address of this machine
1142
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > TEST (Print test mode) > NETWORK
BML-DISP 2 Set System Monitor scrn: BMlinks support
Detail To set whether to display only the device configuration in the System Monitor screen when
supporting BMlinks.
When the setting is switched, the job status and logs are not displayed.
Use Case When supporting BMlinks
0: Ordinary System Monitor screen, 1: Screen in which only the device configuration is displayed
Default Value 0
IPV6-ADR 1 Setting of PING send address (IPv6)

Detail To set the IPv6 address to send PING.
When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6, the network
connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked.
Caution - Enter a consistent character string as an address of IPv6.
- Enter an address within 39 characters including hexadecimal numbers (0-9, a-f) and a separator
(:).
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6
PING-IP6 1 PING transmission to IPv6 address

Detail To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR.
The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked.
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> IPV6-ADR
■ NET-CAP
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > TEST (Print test mode) > NET-CAP
CAPOFFON 2 ON/OFF of NetCap function
Detail To set ON/OFF of network packet capture function.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP
Additional Functions Store Network Packet Log
Mode
STT-STP 2 Start and stop of network packet capture

Detail To start and stop network packet capture.
0: Stop, 1: Start
Default Value 0
Mode
1143
8. Service Mode
CAPSTATE 2 State display of network packet capture
Detail To display the state of network packet capture.
Mode
PONSTART 2 Set network packet capture start timing

Detail To set whether to perform network packet capture from power-on.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Mode
OVERWRIT 2 Setting of NetCap data overwriting

Detail To set whether to finish network capturing or overwrite when HDD becomes full.
0: No overwriting (finish network packet capture), 1: Overwriting
Default Value 1
Mode
PAYLOAD 2 Set network packet capture data save

Detail To set whether to discard payload when saving the captured packet data.
0: Save captured packet data as is, 1: Discard payload and save the packet data
Default Value 0
Mode
FILE-CLR 2 Deletion of network packet capture data

Detail To delete the captured packet data.
SIMPFILT 2 For R&D

ENCDATA 2 For R&D
1144
8. Service Mode
CAPIF 2 Setting of network packet capture target
Detail To set the network interface to capture the packet data.
Make this setting before starting network packet capture.
Use Case When changing the target of network packet capture
1: Local loopback, 2: Wired LAN, 3: Wireless LAN, 4: Not used, 5: Wi-Fi direct/Wireless Soft AP
mode
Unit °
Default Value 2
■ P-STOP
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > TEST (Print test mode) > P-STOP
PRINTER 1 Forcible stop of paper feed
Detail To forcibly stop paper for the next job at the specified position (only once).
Leading edge of paper stops at the specified position so that the cause of a problem can be
identified.
Set 99 when checking an image on the ITB.
When the operation is stopped forcibly, jam code "AAxx" is displayed.
When a normal jam occurs at a position other than the specified position or paper is delivered
without being forcibly stopped, this setting is automatically cleared.
Use Case - When bent paper/skew/wrinkles occur
- When jam occurs frequently
- When checking an image on the ITB
2) Execute a job (copy/test print).
Paper stops at the specified position.
Caution - Remove the paper being stopped with the normal jam removal procedure. After jam removal, the
job is automatically recovered.
- Display of standard jam code indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified
position. Setting of forcible stop is enabled until paper stops at the specified position.
- The setting is disabled for job where paper does not pass through the specified position.
- Unfixed toner may be adhered on paper depending on the stop position. Thus, handle it with
care.
0: OFF
1: Outlet of the Cassette Pickup Assembly
20: Registration Roller, 21: Registration Roller (2nd side)
30: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly, 31: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly (2nd side)
32: Outlet of the Fixing Assembly, 33: Outlet of the Fixing Assembly (2nd side)
40: Outlet of the First Delivery *1
42: Outlet of the Second Delivery *1
70: Reverse Mouth *2
71: Duplex standby position *2
99: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly (1st side, for checking image)
Any value other than those mentioned above: Not used
*1: Paper may not be stopped depending on the delivery destination setting.
*2: Paper is stopped after being reversed for a 2-sided job.
Default Value 0
1145
8. Service Mode
COUNTER (Counter mode)

■ TOTAL
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL
SERVICE1 1 Service-purposed total counter 1
Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
SERVICE2 1 Service-purposed total counter 2

COPY 1 Total copy counter

PDL-PRT 1 PDL print counter

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter
at PDL print.
FAX-PRT 1 FAX reception print counter

at FAX reception.
BOX-PRT 1 Inbox print counter

at Inbox print.
RPT-PRT 1 Report print counter

at report print.
1146
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL
2-SIDE 1 2-sided copy/print counter
Detail To count up when the copy/printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge
counter at 2-sided copy/print.
SCAN 1 Scan counter

Detail To count the number of scan operations according to the charge counter when the scanning
operation is complete.
■ PICK-UP
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP
C1 1 Cassette 1 pickup total counter
Detail Total pickup counter value of the Cassette 1
Use Case When checking the counter
Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit
1147
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP
Unit sheet
Unit
MF 1 Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter

Detail Total pickup counter value of the Multi-purpose Tray
Unit sheet
Unit
DK 1 Paper Deck pickup total counter

Detail Total pickup counter value of the Paper Deck
Unit sheet
Unit
2-SIDE 1 2-sided pickup total counter

Detail Total pickup counter value of 2-sided print
Unit sheet
Unit
■ FEEDER
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > FEEDER
FEED 1 DADF original pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of originals picked up from the DADF.
Use Case When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF
Unit sheet
Unit
1148
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > FEEDER
DFOP-CNT 1 DADF hinge open/close counter
Detail To count up the number of open/close of the DADF hinge.
Use Case When checking the DADF hinge open/close counter
Unit time
Unit
■ JAM
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM
TOTAL 1 Host machine total jam counter
Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the host machine
Use Case When checking the jam counter
Unit time
Unit
FEEDER 1 DADF total jam counter

Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the DADF
Unit time
Unit
SORTER 1 Finisher total jam counter

Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the Finisher
Unit time
Unit
MF 1 Multi-purpose Tray jam counter

Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Multi-purpose Tray
Unit time
Unit
C1 1 Cassette 1 jam counter

Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 1
Unit time
Unit

Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 2
Unit time
Unit
1149
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM
Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 3 (Upper Cassette of the 2-cassette
Pedestal)
Unit time
Unit

Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 4 (Lower Cassette of the 2-cassette
Pedestal)
Unit time
Unit
DK 1 Paper Deck jam counter

Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Paper Deck
Unit time
Unit
■ MISC
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC
T-SPLY-Y 1 Y toner supply counter
Detail Number of Y-color toner supply blocks.
Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw.
Use Case When checking the usage status of toner
Unit block
Default Value 0
Unit
T-SPLY-M 1 M toner supply counter

Detail Number of M-color toner supply blocks.
Unit block
Default Value 0
Unit
1150
8. Service Mode
T-SPLY-C 1 C toner supply counter
Detail Number of C-color toner supply blocks.
Unit block
Default Value 0
Unit
T-SPLY-K 1 Bk toner supply counter

Detail Number of Bk-color toner supply blocks.
Unit block
Default Value 0
Unit
ALLPW-ON 1 Number of DCON PCB power-on times

Detail Number of power-on times (Non-all-night Power Unit).
To count up when power is turned ON (Non-all-night Power Unit).
Use Case When checking the usage status of the product
Unit time
Unit
HDD-ON 1 Number of hard disk start-up times

Detail To count up when power of the hard disk is turned ON.
Use Case When judging whether to shift the machine to power-saving state after using the printer or scanner
for a job
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
SUC-A-Y 2 For R&D

SUC-A-M 2 For R&D
SUC-A-C 2 For R&D
SUC-A-K 2 For R&D
FIN-PTH 1 For R&D
Unit
FR-STPL 1 For R&D

Unit
1151
8. Service Mode
MSTP-B 1 For R&D
Unit
MSTPL 1 For R&D

Unit
STPL-2P 1 For R&D

Unit
STPL-F 1 For R&D

Unit
STPL-R 1 For R&D

Unit
SWG-RL 1 For R&D

Unit
FIN-RBLT 1 For R&D

Unit
APW-TIME 2 For R&D

Unit
CPW-TIME 2 For R&D

Unit
BAT-TIME 2 For R&D

Unit
FUSE-CNT 2 For R&D

Unit
SPW-TIME 2 For R&D

Unit
■ JOB
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JOB
DVPAPLEN 1 For R&D
Unit
DVRUNLEN 1 For R&D

Unit
1152
8. Service Mode
■ DRBL-1
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1
T/S-UNIT 1 Transfer Separation Guide Unit prts cntr
Detail Transfer Separation Guide Unit
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life value: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
T-CLN-BD 1 ITB Cleaning Blade parts counter

Detail ITB Cleaning Blade
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
TR-BLT 1 ITB parts counter

Detail ITB
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1153
8. Service Mode
2TR-ROLL 1 Sec Transfer Outer Roller parts counter
Detail Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
2TR-INRL 1 Sec Transfer Inner Roller parts counter

Detail Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
FX-LW-GR 1 Fixing Gear parts counter

Detail Fixing Gear
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
PT-DRM 1 Drum Unit (Bk) parts counter

Detail Drum Unit (Bk)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1154
8. Service Mode
DV-UNT-C 1 Developing Unit (C) parts counter
Detail Developing Unit (C)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
DV-UNT-Y 1 Developing Unit (Y) parts counter

Detail Developing Unit (Y)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
DV-UNT-M 1 Developing Unit (M) parts counter

Detail Developing Unit (M)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1155
8. Service Mode
DV-UNT-K 1 Developing Unit (Bk) parts counter
Detail Developing Unit (Bk)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
C1-PU-RL 1 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller parts counter

Detail Cassette 1 Pickup Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
C1-SP-RL 1 Cassette 1 Separation Roller parts cntr

Detail Cassette 1 Separation Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1156
8. Service Mode
C1-FD-RL 1 Cassette 1 Feed Roller parts counter
Detail Cassette 1 Feed Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1157
8. Service Mode
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
M-PU-RL 1 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roll prts cntr

Detail Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
M-SP-RL 1 Multi-purpose Tray Sprtn Roll prts cntr

Detail Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1158
8. Service Mode
M-FD-RL 1 Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roll prts cntr
Detail Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
FX-LW-RL 1 Pressure Roller parts counter

Detail Pressure Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
FX-UP-FR 1 Fixing Film Unit parts counter

Detail Fixing Film Unit
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1159
8. Service Mode
FX-LW-BR 1 Fixing Bearing parts counter
Detail Fixing Bearing
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
WST-TNR 1 Waste Toner Container parts counter

Detail Waste Toner Container
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
TN-FIL1 1 Toner Filter parts counter

Detail Toner Filter
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1160
8. Service Mode
PT-DR-Y 1 Drum Unit (Y) parts counter
Detail Drum Unit (Y)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
PT-DR-M 1 Drum Unit (M) parts counter

Detail Drum Unit (M)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
PT-DR-C 1 Drum Unit (C) parts counter

Detail Drum Unit (C)
2nd line: Estimated life
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1161
8. Service Mode
TR-ROLK 1 Primary Transfer Roller(Bk) prts counter
Detail Primary Transfer Roller (Bk)
Due to engagement/disengagement of the roller, the counter is advanced separately from Y, M,
and C.
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-ROLC
Unit
TR-ROLC 1 Prmry Transfer Roll(Y,M,C) parts counter

Detail Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C)
Due to engagement/disengagement of the roller, the counter is advanced separately from Bk.
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-ROLK
Unit
■ DRBL-2
DF-PU-RL 1 Pickup Roller parts counter: DADF
Detail Pickup Roller (DADF)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1162
8. Service Mode
DF-FD-RL 1 Feed Roller parts counter: DADF
Detail Feed Roller (DADF)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed.
Unit
DF-SP-RL 1 Separation Roller parts counter: DADF

Detail Separation Roller (DADF)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
STAMP 1 Stamp parts counter: DADF

Detail Stamp (DADF)
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
1163
8. Service Mode
PD-PU-RL 1 Pickup Roller parts counter: Deck
Detail Pickup Roller (Front/Rear) of Paper Deck
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
PD-SP-RL 1 Separation Roller parts counter: Deck

Detail Separation Roller of Paper Deck
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
PD-FD-RL 1 Feed Roller parts counter: Deck

Detail Feed Roller of Paper Deck
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1164
8. Service Mode
C3-PU-RL 1 Casstt3 Pickup Roller prts cntr: CST-FD1
Detail Cassette 3 Pickup Roller (Cassette Feeding Unit)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
C3-SP-RL 1 Casstt3 Sprtn Roller prts cntr: CST-FD1

Detail Cassette 3 Separation Roller (Cassette Feeding Unit)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
C3-FD-RL 1 Casstt3 Feed Roller prts cntr: CST-FD1

Detail Cassette 3 Feed Roller (Cassette Feeding Unit)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1165
8. Service Mode
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1166
8. Service Mode
FIN-STPR 1 Stapler parts counter: Fin-H1/Y1
Detail Staple Unit
Unit time
Unit
PUNCH 1 Punch unit parts counter: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail Punch Unit
1st line: total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts or replacing the parts.
Unit time
Unit
TRY-TQLM 1 Tray Torq Limt pts cntr: Fin-Y1

Detail Stack Tray Torque Limiter
Unit sheet
Unit
DL-STC 1 Stack Tray Dvry Ass'y Sttc Elim: Fin-Y1

Detail Stack Tray Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator
Unit sheet
Unit
1167
8. Service Mode
FIN-MPDL 1 Paddle Unit parts counter: Fin-Y1
Detail Paddle Unit
Unit time
Unit
FR-STPL 1 Staple free stapling counter: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail Number of executions of staple free stapling (including at the time of paper dust removal)
Unit time
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> FR-ST-RP
Unit
ESC-CL 1 Escape Feed Clutch parts counter: Fin-Y1

Detail Escape Feed Clutch
Unit time
Unit
SDL-STC 1 Saddle Delvry Ass'y Sttc Elim: Fin-Y1

Detail Saddle Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator
Unit sheet
Unit
1168
8. Service Mode
TRY-STC1 1 Escape Dvry Ass'y Static Eliminat: Fin-Y
Detail Escape Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator
Unit sheet
Unit
SW-RL-CL 1 Low Stck Delvry Rol Clt prts cntr:Fin-Y1

Detail Lower Stack Delivery Roller Clutch
Unit time
Unit
HCCPU-RL 1 Casstt3 Pickup Roller prts cntr: CST-FD2

Detail Cassette 3 Pickup Roller (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
HCCSP-RL 1 Casstt3 Sprtn Roller prts cntr: CST-FD2

Detail Cassette 3 Separation Roller (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
1169
8. Service Mode
HCCFD-RL 1 Casstt3 Feed Roller prts cntr: CST-FD2
Detail Cassette 3 Feed Roller (High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
SDL-STP 1 Saddle stitcher parts counter: Fin-Y1

Detail Saddle stitcher unit
1st line: total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: estimated life
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts or replacing the parts.
Unit time
Unit
DF-PR-PD 1 Pre-separation Unit parts counter: DADF

Detail Pre-separation Unit (DADF)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
■ T-CNTR
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > T-CNTR
YELLOW 1 For R&D
MAGENTA 1 For R&D
CYAN 1 For R&D
BLACK 1 For R&D
1170
8. Service Mode
■ LF
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LF
Y-DRM-LF 1 Drum Unit (Y) estimated life value
Detail To display how much the Drum Unit (Y) is close to the end of life in % (percentage).
When a new part is set, the value becomes 0.
Use Case When checking the life of Drum Unit
Unit %
M-DRM-LF 1 Drum Unit (M) estimated life value

Detail To display how much the Drum Unit (M) is close to the end of life in % (percentage).
Unit %
C-DRM-LF 1 Drum Unit (C) estimated life value

Detail To display how much the Drum Unit (C) is close to the end of life in % (percentage).
Unit %
K-DRM-LF 1 Drum Unit (Bk) estimated life value

Detail To display how much the Drum Unit (Bk) is close to the end of life in % (percentage).
Unit %
Y-DV-LF1 1 [Reserve]
M-DV-LF1 1 [Reserve]
C-DV-LF1 1 [Reserve]
K-DV-LF1 1 [Reserve]
FX-LR-LF 1 [Reserve]
FX-UF-LF 1 [Reserve]
■ MISC2
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC2
APW-TIME 2 For R&D
Unit
CPW-TIME 2 For R&D

Unit
BAT-TIME 2 For R&D

Unit
FUSE-CNT 2 For R&D

Unit
1171
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC2
SPW-TIME 2 For R&D
Unit
■ PAPER
COPIER (Service mode for copier) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PAPER
G52-59 1 Delivered sheet counter: 52 to 59 g/m2
Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 52 to 59 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit
1172
8. Service Mode
Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit
1173
8. Service Mode
Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit
1174
8. Service Mode
G351OVER 1 Delivered sheet counter:351 g/m2 or more
Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 351 g/m2 or more.
Unit sheet
Unit
1175
8. Service Mode
FEEDER (ADF service mode)
DISPLAY (State display mode)

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > DISPLAY (State display mode)
FEEDSIZE 1 Dspl of original size detected by DADF
Detail To display the original size detected by DADF.
TRY-WIDE 1 Distance of Original Width Detect Slider

Detail To display the distance between the Original Width Detection Sliders.
Use Case At incorrect detection of original size
Caution Even if a value larger than 297.0 mm which is the maximum readable width is displayed, it does
not mean that the reading range changes. When reading an original of 297.1 mm or larger in width,
the edge of an image may be missing.
Unit mm
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-A4
Supplement/Memo If the edge of an image is still missing after adjustment of A4 paper width (297.0 mm) with TRY-
A4, the original width may be larger than 297.1 mm.
Unit

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
DOCST 1 Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: front
Detail To adjust the leading edge margin on the front side at DADF reading.
Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.)
Use Case - When installing DADF
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
1176
8. Service Mode

LA-SPEED 1 Fine adj img ratio: DADF,vert scan,front
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction
at DADF reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in vertical scanning direction. (The
feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
DOCST2 1 Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: back

Detail To adjust the leading edge margin on the back side at DADF reading.
Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.)
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
LA-SPD2 1 Fine adj img ratio: DADF,vert scan,back

Detail To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction
at DADF reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.01% in vertical scanning direction.
(The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Display/Adj/Set Range -200 to 200 (-2.00 to 2.00%)
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJMSCN1 1 Fine adj img ratio:2-sided,horz scan,frt

Detail To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning
direction at DADF 2-sided reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is enlarged by 0.1% in horizontal scanning direction.
Use Case When image magnification ratio on the front side and back side are different at 2-sided reading
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
1177
8. Service Mode

ADJMSCN2 1 Fine adj img ratio:2-sided,horz scan,bck
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning
direction at DADF 2-sided reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is enlarged by 0.1% in horizontal scanning direction.
Use Case When image magnification ratio on the front side and back side are different at 2-sided reading
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)
MTR-CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation motor
Detail To specify the motor of DADF to operate.
The motor is activated by MTR-ON.
Use Case At operation check
0: Pickup Motor (STM2)
1: Regist Motor (STM1)
2: Read Motor (STM3)
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON
TRY-A4 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: A4

Detail To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1 for the DADF Original Pickup
Tray. (A4)
Use Case - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR)
TRY-A5R 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 2: A5R

Tray. (A5R)
TRY-LTR 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: LTR

Tray. (LTR)
TRY-LTRR 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref2: LTRR

Tray. (LTRR)
1178
8. Service Mode

FEED-CHK 1 Specify DADF individual feed operation
Detail To specify the feed mode for DADF.
Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON.
0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation, 1: Not used, 2: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp),
3: Not used
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON
FAN-CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation fan

Detail To specify the fan of DADF to operate.
The fan is activated by FAN-ON.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: Cooling Fan (FAN_A1)
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-ON
FAN-ON 1 Operation check of DADF fan

Detail To start operation check of the fan specified by FAN-CHK.
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after
approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not
displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK
SL-CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation solenoid

Detail To specify the solenoid of DADF to operate.
The solenoid is activated by SL-ON.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: Stamp Solenoid (SL1)
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON
SL-ON 1 Operation check of DADF solenoid

Detail To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL-CHK.
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press OK key.
displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK
1179
8. Service Mode

MTR-ON 1 Operation check of DADF motor
Detail To start operation check for the motor specified by MTR-CHK.
The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops.
2) Press OK key.
displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK
ROLL-CLN 1 Rotation of DADF rollers

Detail To rotate the rollers of DADF for cleaning.
Check the rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while they are rotating.
Use Case When cleaning the rollers
2) Clean the rotating rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
3) Press OK key.
The rollers stop.
FEED-ON 1 Operation check of DADF individual feed

Detail To start operation check of the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK.
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
R-ATM 1 Set DADF double feed dtct highland mode
Detail To set the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF to the highland mode.
Set 1 if the installation site is above the altitude of 2000 meters.
Use Case When the installation site is above the altitude of 2000 meters at installation
0: Normal, 1: Highland mode
Default Value 0
R-OVLPLV 2 Set DADF double feed dtct threshold VL

Detail To set the threshold value at which the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF judges whether papers
are double fed.
Decrease the value if single feed of paper is incorrectly detected as double feed.
Increase the value if double feed of paper is incorrectly detected as single feed.
Use Case When double feed is incorrectly detected with special paper not defined in the specifications
Caution In the case of highlands, be sure to set R-ATM in advance.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode FEEDER> OPTION> R-ATM
1180
8. Service Mode
SORTER (Service mode for delivery options)

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
PNCH-Y 1 Adj punch hole horz rgst pstn: Fin-H1/Y1
Detail To adjust the punch hole in horizontal registration direction.
As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case When the punch hole is misaligned in the horizontal registration direction
Caution FIN-Y1
When the setting of "PUN-Y-SW" is 0, the adjustable range is from -3 to 15.
FIN-H1
When the setting of "PUN-Y-SW" is 0, the adjustable range is from -13 to 15.
Unit mm
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> PUN-Y-SW
Unit
STP-F1 1 Front 1-staple position: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the front 1-staple position.
As the value is changed by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the front 1-stapling mode
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Unit mm
Unit
STP-R1 1 Rear 1-staple position: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the rear 1-staple position.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the rear 1-stapling mode
Unit mm
Unit
1181
8. Service Mode
STP-2P 1 Adj 2-stapling position: Fin-H1/Y1
Detail To adjust the 2-staple position.
As the value is changed by 1, the staples position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case When the staples position in front/rear direction is displaced in the 2-stapling mode
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-H1: -50 to 50
Fin-Y1: -30 to 30
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
BFF-SFT 1 Ppr displace amount on buffer: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the paper displacement amount on Finisher Buffer Assembly.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper position moves by 0.1mm.
+: The 1st sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the inlet side
-: The 1st sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the delivery side
Use Case When the paper displacement occurs on the 1st to 2nd sheets of buffered paper.
Unit mm
Unit
PNCH-X 1 Punch hole pstn in feed way: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To adjust the punch hole position on puncher unit in feed direction.
As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole moves by 0.1mm.
+: Toward delivery direction
-: Toward inlet direction
Use Case When the punch hole is displaced in feed direction
Caution Fin-Y1: When selecting the precision priority by operation panel menu, this adjustment cannot be
executed.
Unit mm
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> PUCH-SW
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Switch Finisher Puncher Mode
Mode
Unit
1182
8. Service Mode
BFF-SFT2 1 Ppr displace amount on buffer: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the paper displacement amount on Finisher Buffer Assembly.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper position moves by 0.1mm.
+: The 2nd sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the inlet side
-: The 2nd sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the delivery side
Use Case When the paper displacement occurs on the 2nd to 3rd sheets of buffered paper.
Unit mm
Unit
SDL-STP 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch stpl pstn: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1mm.
+: The staple position moves toward the left at open page of the book
-: The staple position moves toward the right at open page of the book
When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB,
Use Case When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced.
When replacing the Finiser Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finiser Controller PCB.
Unit mm
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-STP2
Supplement/Memo Because the staple position of the thin paper is changed by this adjustment at the same time,
perform the adjustment of SDL-STP2 as needed after performing this adjustment if the staple
position of the thin paper has been adjusted by SDL-STP2.
Unit
SDL-FLD 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch fold pstn: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm.
Use Case When the fold position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced
Unit mm
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-FLD2
Supplement/Memo Because the fold position of the thin paper is changed by this adjustment at the same time, perform
the adjustment of SDL-FLD2 as needed after performing this adjustment if the fold position of the
thin paper has been adjusted by SDL-FLD2.
Unit
1183
8. Service Mode
SDL-ALG 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch align wid: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the alignment width of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the alignment width is increased by 0.1 mm.
+: The width of the adjustment plate becomes narrow.
-: The width of the adjustment plate becomes wide.
Use Case When the misalignment occurs within a paper stack on the Saddle Stitcher
Unit mm
Unit
PUNCH-SB 1 [Not used]

Default Value 0
Unit
ST-ALG1 1 Adj Stacker A4 align pstn: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the A4 size paper alignment position of the Process Tray.
As the value is incremented by 1, the position of the adjustment plate is increased by 0.1 mm.
+: Inward
-: Outward
Use Case When misalignment occurs in A4 size paper.
2) The alignment plate moves to position of the A4 width.
3) Set the A4 paper on the processing tray.
5) Check the adjustment movement of the alignment plate.
6) Repeat steps 4) and 5) and adjust alignment width.
7) After completion of the adjustment, remove paper on the processing tray.
Unit mm
Unit
1184
8. Service Mode
ST-ALG2 1 Adj Stacker LTR align pstn: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the LTR size paper alignment position of the Process Tray.
As the value is incremented by 1, the position of the adjustment plate is increased by 0.1 mm.
+: Inward
-: Outward
Use Case When misalignment occurs in LTR size paper.
2) The alignment plate moves to position of the LTR width.
3) Set the LTR paper on the processing tray.
5) Check the adjustment movement of the alignment plate.
6) Repeat steps 4) and 5) and adjust alignment width.
7) After completion of the adjustment, remove paper on the processing tray.
Unit mm
Unit
SW-UP-RL 1 Adj of swing unit height: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the height of the swing unit.
As the value is incremented by 1, the height of the swing unit is changed by angle of 0.1 degree.
+: Downward
-: Upward
Use Case When misalignment occurs by failure of the paper feeding to processing tray.
Unit °
Unit
INSTP-F1 1 Adj front 1-stapling position: Fin-H1

Detail To adjust the front 1-staple position.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the front 1-stapling mode
Unit mm
Unit
1185
8. Service Mode
INSTP-R1 1 Adj rear 1-stapling position: Fin-H1
Detail To adjust the rear 1-staple position.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the rear 1-stapling mode
Unit mm
Unit
NST-SPD 1 Adj dvry speed at non-collate: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray in non-collate mode.
As the value is incremented by 1, the delivery speed is increased by 10 mm/sec.
Use Case When the stacking condition in non-collate mode is poor
Unit mm/s
Unit
FR-ST-PS 1 Adjust staple free pressure: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To adjust the staple pressure in the staple free stapling mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the staple pressure changes by 1 mNm.
+: Increased
-: Decreased
Use Case Upon user's request (When changing the binding pressure)
Caution The life of staple-free binding unit becomes shorter when increasing the setting value.
Unit mNm
Unit
1186
8. Service Mode
FR-STP-X 1 Adj stpl free stpl pstn (Fd way): Fin-H1
Detail To adjust the staple position for paper feed direction in the staple free stapling mode.
+: Toward inlet direction
-: Toward delivery direction
Use Case When the staple position in paper feed direction is displaced in the staple free stapling mode
Unit mm
Supplement/Memo Change the paper shift amount in the paper feed direction. The staple free stapler position is not
changed.
Unit
FR-STP-Y 1 Adj stpl free stpl pstn (F/R):Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To adjust the staple position for front/rear direction in the staple free stapling mode.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the staple free stapling mode
Fin-Y1: -20 to 15
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Change the paper shift amount in the front/rear direction. The staple free stapler position is not
changed.
Unit
1187
8. Service Mode
RBLT-PRS 1 Adj return belt pressure: Fin-H1/Y1
Detail To adjust the amount of pressure of the Return Belt.
Fin-H1
As the value is changed by 1, the Return Belt is moved up or down by 0.1 mm so the amount of
pressure is increased or decreased.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Fin-Y1
As the value is changed by 1, the Return Belt is moved up or down by 0.1 degrees so the amount
of pressure is increased or decreased.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When the paper alignment position is displaced.
Caution Fin-H1:
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Fin-Y1:
The height of Return Belt during the paper alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting
values of RBLT-PRS and PBLT-PS2, so adjust again the setting value of RBLT-PS2 if necessary
because the height of Return Roller during the paper alignment on the processing tray changes
too by changing the setting value of RBLT-PRS.
Fin-Y1: -50 to 100
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode Fin-Y1:
SORTER> ADJUST> RBLT-PS2
Supplement/Memo Fin-Y1:
The height of Return Belt when stacking the first sheet of paper or buffering the paper: The height
of Return Belt is double of the setting value. (Escape position of Return Belt)
The height of Return Belt when stacking the sheet of paper except for first sheet: The height of
Return Belt is the setting value. (Paper feed position of Return Belt)
Unit
1188
8. Service Mode
MSTP-2P 1 Adj manual stapling position:Fin-H1/Y1
Detail To adjust the staple position for front/rear direction in the manual stapling mode.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced in the manual stapling mode
Fin-Y1: -20 to 30
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
INF-ALG1 1 Adj alignment position (A4): Fin-H1

Detail To adjust the position of the Alignment Plate when aligning A4 paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, distance between the Alignment Plates is narrowed by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When the paper alignment position is displaced.
- When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
The Alignment Plate moves to the A4 paper width position.
2) Set A4 paper on the Processing Tray.
3) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
4) Check the operation of the Alignment Plate.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the completion of adjustment.
6) Remove the paper on the Processing Tray.
Unit mm
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG2
Supplement/Memo The adjustment result is reflected in SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG2.
Unit
1189
8. Service Mode
INF-ALG2 1 Adj alignment position (LTR): Fin-H1
Detail To adjust the position of the Alignment Plate when aligning LTR paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, distance between the Alignment Plates is narrowed by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When the paper alignment position is displaced.
The Alignment Plate moves to the LTR paper width position.
2) Set LTR paper on the Processing Tray.
3) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
4) Check the operation of the Alignment Plate.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the completion of adjustment.
6) Remove the paper on the Processing Tray.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in INF-ALG1 of the service label.
Unit mm
Related Service Mode SORTER>ADJUST>INF-ALG1
Supplement/Memo The adjustment result is reflected in SORTER> ADJUST> INF-AL1.
Unit
CENT-ALG 1 Adj ctr align standard pstn: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To adjust the standard position for the center alignment
As the value is incremented by 1, the standard position for the center alignment moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case - When the standard position for the center alignment is misaligned
- When the paper alignment position is displaced.
Caution This adjustment influences alignment operation and staple position.
Fin-H1:
Adjust the alignment width with INF-ALG1/2.
Fin-Y1:
Adjust the alignment width with ST-ALG1/2.
Fin-Y1: -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode Fin-H1:
SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG1, INF-ALG2
Fin-Y1:
SORTER> ADJUST> ST-ALG1, ST-ALG2
Unit
1190
8. Service Mode
SDL-STP2 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch stpl pstn: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher (when using the thin paper; the paper that the paper
weight is less than 64 g/m2).
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1mm.
Use Case When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced with the thin paper
Unit mm
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-STP
Supplement/Memo Perform this adjustment after performing the adjustment of SDL-STP.
Because the staple position of the thin paper is adjusted by the total setting values of SDL-STP
and SDL-STP2, the actual adjustment of the staple position is performed in the staple position
adjustable range (-20 to 20) even if entering the setting value beyond the mechanical staple
position adjustable range.
Unit
SDL-FLD2 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch fold pstn: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher (when using the thin paper; the paper that the paper
weight is less than 64 g/m2).
As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm.
+: The fold position moves toward the left at open page of the book
-: The fold position moves toward the right at open page of the book
Use Case When the fold position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced with the thin paper
Unit mm
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-FLD
Supplement/Memo Perform this adjustment after performing the adjustment of SDL-FLD.
Because the fold position of the thin paper is adjusted by the total setting values of SDL-FLD and
SDL-FLD2, the actual adjustment of the fold position is performed in the fold position adjustable
range (-20 to 20) even if entering the setting value beyond the mechanical fold position adjustable
range.
Unit
ESC1-SPD 1 Adj Escape Tr delivery speed: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the escape tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed to the lower escape tray changes by 10 mm/sec.
Use Case When the paper stacking to the escape tray is misalignment
Unit mm/s
Unit
1191
8. Service Mode
SFT-SPD 1 Adj dvry speed at collate mode: Fin-Y1
Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray at collate mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed changes by 10 mm/sec.
Use Case When the paper stacking of stack tray at collate mode is misalignment
Caution - When the value is decreased, the productivity is decreased.
- When the buffer operation is performed, delivery speed does not change. (The buffer operation
is the operation to deliver the stacking paper on the processing tray.)
The ON/OFF of buffer operation is set by BUFF-SW.
Unit mm/s
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> BUFF-SW
Unit
STP-SPD 1 Adj dvry speed at staple mode: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray at staple mode or staple-free binding mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed changes by 10 mm/sec.
Use Case When the paper stacking at staple mode or staple-free binding mode is misalignment
Caution - When the value is decreased, the productivity is decreased.
- When the buffer operation is performed, delivery speed does not change. (The buffer operation
is the operation to deliver the stacking paper on the processing tray.)
The ON/OFF of buffer operation is set by BUFF-SW.
Unit mm/s
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> BUFF-SW
Unit
RBLT-PS2 1 Adj of Return Belt height: Fin-Y1

Detail To adjust the height of the Return Belt when aligning the paper on the processing tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the height of the return belt changes by angle of 0.1 degree.
+: Downward
-: Upward
Use Case When the misalignment of paper stack occurs during alignment operation on the processing tray.
Caution The height of Return Belt during the paper alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting
values of RBLT-PRS and PBLT-PS2, so adjust again the setting value of RBLT-PS2 if necessary
when changing the setting value of RBLT-PRS.
Unit °
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER>ADJUST>RBLT-PRS
Supplement/Memo Perform this adjustment after executing adjustment of RBLT-PRS.
Unit
1192
8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)
FN-SENS1 1 Adj Punch Horz Rgst Sensor: Fin-H1/Y1
Detail To automatically adjust the output of the Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 to 5 of the Puncher Unit
in sequence.
Horizontal Registration Sensor 1: A3/A4, 2: LDR/LTR, 3: B4/B5, 4: A4R/LTRR/LGL, 5: B5R
Use Case - When installing/replacing the Puncher Unit
- When replacing the Horizontal Registration Sensor of the Puncher Unit
Caution When the sheet of paper is on the sensor, the adjustment fails.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
FN-SENS2 1 Adj Punch Waste Full Sensor: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To automatically adjust the output of Punch Waste Full Sensor (Punch Waste Full Detection PCB)
of the Puncher Unit.
Use Case - When installing/replacing the Puncher Unit
- When replacing the Punch Waste Full Sensor
Caution When the sheet of paper is on the sensor, the adjustment fails.
FIN-BK-R 1 Finisher backup data saving: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail The backup data is read from the finisher controller PCB and saved to HDD.
Use Case When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-W
FIN-BK-W 1 Writing of Fin backup data: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail The backup data saved in HDD is written to the finisher controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-R
FIN-CON 1 FIN-Controller PCB RAM clear: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To execute the RAM clear of Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the adjustment contents. (except
the counter information)
Use Case When clearing RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB
Caution - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter the
- RAM clear is executed after the main power is turned OFF/ON.
Supplement/Memo The adjustment values stored to the puncher controller PCB does not cleared.
1193
8. Service Mode
MTR-CHK 1 Select motor to check operate: Fin-H1/Y1
Detail To specify the motor to operate.
Use Case - When checking whether there is any failure in the motor
- When checking the operation of the replaced motor
Caution When setting the staple motor (Fin-H1/Y1) and the saddle stitcher motor (Fin-Y1), remove the
staple cartridge. When the staple cartridge is installed, the motor is not driven.
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-H1: 1 to 15
1: Feed Motor (M1)
2: Return Belt Motor (M2)
3: Front Alignment Motor (M3)
4: Rear Alignment Motor (M4)
5: Assist Motor (M5)
6: Stapler Shift Motor (M7)
7: Paddle Motor (M10) (Paddle up/down)
8: Paddle Motor (M10) (Paper retainer up/down)
9: Stapler Motor (M8)
10: Clinch Motor (M9)
11: Tray Shift Motor (M6)
12: Not Used
13: Punch Feed Motor (M3)
14: Punch Motor (M2)
15: Punch Horizontal Registration Motor (M1)
Fin-Y1: 16 to 46
16: Inlet Feed Motor (M101)
17: Pre-processing/Buffer Motor (M102)
18: Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103)
19: Not Used
20: Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112)
21: Stapler Shift Motor (M114)
22: Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105)
23: Swing Guide Motor (M110)
24: Front Alignment Motor (M107)
25: Rear Alignment Motor (M108)
26: Return Roller Lift Motor (M111)
27: Flapper Motor (M104)
28: Not Used
31: Paper End Assist Motor (M113)
30: Not Used
31: Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106)
32: Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109)
33: Cooling Fan (FM101)
34: Staple Motor (M115)
35: Staple-free Binding Motor (M116)
36: Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201)
37: Saddle Delivery Motor (M207)
38: Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202)
39: Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208)
40: Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206)
41: Saddle Gripper Motor (M205)
42: Saddle Alignment Motor (M203)
43: Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204)
44: Punch Motor (M301)
45: Punch Shift Motor (M302)
46: Buffer Pass Feed Motor (M401)
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON
1194
8. Service Mode
MTR-ON 1 Motor operation check: Fin-H1/Y1
Detail To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR-CHK.
After the motor operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops.
Use Case - When checking whether there is any failure in the motor
- When checking the operation of the replaced motor
Caution - When the job starts during the operation of the motor, the finisher sequence error jam occurs.
- When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the motor, the jam becomes the
error immediately.
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK
SL-CHK 1 Specification of oprtn Solenoid (Fin-H1)

Detail To specify the Solenoid to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
Display/Adj/Set Range 1: Paper trailing edge pushing guide solenoid (SL1)
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> SL-ON
SL-ON 1 Operation check of solenoid: Fin-H1

Detail To start operation check for the Solenoid specified by SL-CHK.
After the solenoid operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically
stops.
Use Case When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK
CNT-FCON 1 Parts Counter clear: Finisher: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To clear the parts counter that the Finisher Controller PCB counts.
Use Case When clearing the parts counter of the Finisher
FR-ST-RP 1 Ppr dust remov at stpl free stpl:All Fin

Detail To remove the paper dust from the staple-free binding unit, the staple-free binding operation
repeatedly is executed 30 times without paper.
When this mode is executed, the performance of the staple-free binding unit recovers.
Use Case When the performance of the staple-free binding unit deteriorates
Caution Finisher-H1/Y1:
- The part counter value of the staple-free binding operation increases.
Finisher-Y1:
- When the job starts during the operation of this mode, the finisher sequence error jam occurs.
- When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of this mode, the jam becomes the
error immediately.
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-2> FR-STPL
Supplement/Memo The removed paper dust accumulates on the lower frame under the paper path, so it does not
influence to the machine performance.
The part counter value of the staple free stapling operation is counted.
1195
8. Service Mode
CL-CHK 1 Specify of operation Clutch: Fin-Y1
Detail To specify the Clutch to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
1: Lower stack delivery roller clutch (CL102)
2: Escape feed clutch (CL101)
3: Paddle clutch (CL103)
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> CL-ON
CL-ON 1 Operation check of Clutch: Fin-Y1

Detail To start operation check for the Clutch specified by CL-CHK.
After the clutch operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops.
Use Case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Caution - When the job starts during the operation of the clutch, the finisher sequence error jam occurs.
- When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the clutch, the jam becomes the
error immediately.
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> CL-CHK
PUN-BK-R 1 Puncher backup data saving: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To read the backup data from Puncher Controller PCB and save in HDD.
Use Case When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> PUN-BK-W
PUN-BK-W 1 Puncher backup data writing: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To write the backup data saved in HDD to Puncher Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> PUN-BK-R
EMSG-CLR 1 Clear Fin limited functions mssg:All Fin

Detail To clear the message related to staple free stapling that is displayed when functions of Finisher
are limited.
The staple free stapling alarm (61-0002) is released.
Use Case When clearing the message related to limited functions mode that is displayed after
troubleshooting of finisher is performed
Caution Only the messages related to staple free stapling can be cleared.
1196
8. Service Mode

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
MD-SPRTN 1 Restricted oprtn at Fin error: Fin-H1/Y1
Detail To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher.
The result set in [Limited Functions Mode] in [Settings/Registration] is displayed.
Set 0 when canceling restriction on operations.
When switching whether to restrict operations for each function, make the setting in [Limited
Functions Mode].
Use Case When canceling restriction on operations of the finisher
Caution Do not set any value other than 0.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: Without restriction
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Management Settings> Device Management> Limited Functions Mode
Mode
BUFF-SW 1 Set of fin buffer opertn: Fin-Y1

Detail To set ON/OFF of buffer operation in the Finisher.
When 1 is set, the buffer operation is not performed for all modes. The alignment performance is
improved, but the productivity decreases.
When 2 is set, the buffer operation is performed only for collated mode.
Use Case When the misalignment of the buffered paper stack occurs on the processing tray
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value and press OK.
Caution When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity is decreased.
0: ON, 1: OFF, 2: ON for collated mode only
PUCH-SW 1 Hi-prdctvty/accurcy punch mod: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To switch the high-productivity punch mode or high-accuracy punch mode of Finisher.
Use Case When switching the high-productivity punch mode or high-accuracy punch mode
0: high-accuracy, 1: high-productivity
Mode
Supplement/Memo The settings of this service mode and the "Switch Finisher Puncher Mode" of the "Settings/
Registration" change at the same time.
1197
8. Service Mode
1SHT-SRT 1 Set collate dvry of 1-sheet: Fin-Y1
Detail To set ON/OFF of collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper.
When 1 is set, the collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper is not performed.
Caution The stacking condition decreases when the collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper
enables.
A sheet of paper is delivered by non-sort decreases when the collated delivery operation for a
sheet of paper disables.
0: ON, 1: OFF
Additional Functions Setting/Registration> Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Offset Jobs
Mode
Supplement/Memo The collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper works in the following condition.
The setting of a sheet of paper and a copy
This service mode is ON.
The job from a printer driver
Oddset jobs is ON.
FIN-SP1 2 Finisher special setting 1: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To execute the Finisher special settings 1.
Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division.
FIN-SP2 2 Finisher special setting 2: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To execute the Finisher special settings 2.
Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division.
MSTP-TMG 1 Set of manual stpl tmg: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To set the duration of time before executing automatic stapling at manual staple mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the time is changed by 1 second.
+: Timing is delayed
-: Timing becomes earlier
Unit sec
Default Value 3
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Time Unitil Stapling Starts in Stapler Mode
Mode
Supplement/Memo The setting of the service mode links the setting of the user mode.
Unit
1198
8. Service Mode
FR-ST-PO 1 Set staple free staple position: Fin-H1
Detail To set the staple position of staple free stapling.
When 1 is set, staple position becomes the center so paper is more likely to be come off. The
staple position moves to the delivery direction for 4.0 mm and the alignment direction for 2.0 mm
inside.
0: Corner-stapling (normal), 1: Center-stapling
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST >FR-STP-X, FR-STP-Y
MSTP-WT 1 Set wait time after manual stpl: Fin-H1

Detail To set the duration of time to keep manual staple mode enabled after execution of manual stapling.
While manual stapling mode is enabled, other jobs are not accepted.
Unit sec
Default Value 0
Unit
TRY-PSTN 1 Set tray pstn after job complete: Fin-H1

Detail To set the tray position after the completion of job.
When 1 is set, the tray stops at the lower limit position. Visibility of the delivered papers is improved,
but FCOT becomes longer.
Use Case Upon user's request (to improve visibility of the delivered papers)
Caution When 1 is set, FCOT becomes longer.
0: Normal (priority on productivity), 1: Lower limit position (priority on visibility)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> TRY-STP
Supplement/Memo When 1 in SORTER> OPTION> TRY-STP is set, the tray of the inner finisher does not down after
paper full detection.
PUN-Y-SW 1 Set of punch horz reg oprtn: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To set whether or not to perform the horizontal registration operation of puncher unit for matching
with the center of the paper.
Use Case When the adjustable range of the punch hole horizontal registration adjustment (PNCH-Y) is
enlarged.
Caution Fin-Y1
When a punch hole position precision improvement mode were set, this mode is given priority to.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: The horizontal registration operation is performed.
1: The horizontal registration operation is not performed. (fixed in the center position)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> PNCH-Y
SORTER> OPTION> PUCH-SW, PNCH-SW3 (Fin-Y1 only)
Additional Functions Fin-Y1
Mode Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Switch Finisher Puncher Mode
1199
8. Service Mode
PNCH-SW2 1 Setting of punch hole spec: Fin-H1/Y1
Detail To set the punch hole specification of puncher unit.
Use Case When replacing the Puncher Unit
Caution When the punch hole specification is not set, malfunction may occur in the punch operation.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: 2/4 holes puncher unit
1: 2/3 holes puncher unit
2: SWE 4 holes puncher unit
Default Value 0
PNCH-SW3 1 Set punch hole hi precision mode: Fin-Y1

Detail To set ON/OFF of the mode to improve the precision of the punch hole position.
When 1 is set, the punch hole position is decided by the paper trailing edge standard.
Use Case When the position of the punch hole is misaligned
Caution - When setting to ON, the productivity is decreased.
- When setting the punch mode to the precision priority, this mode enables.
cannot be executed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Related Service Mode SORTER>OPTION>PUCH-SW
SORTER>OPTION>PUN-Y-SW
Mode
SFT-CHNG 1 Set dvry number of stck ppr: Fin-Y1

Detail Setting the number of paper in a stack delivery for small sizes at shift sort mode.
Changing the setting to "1", the number of paper in a stack delivery changes as follows:
- For plain paper 1 and 2: Number of paper in a stack changes from 5 to 2.
- For plain paper 3: Number of paper in a stack changes from 3 to 2.
The above setting is not effective for the paper that is more than 106 g/m2 or tab paper ,coated
paper.
Use Case When improving the stacking alignment during the delivery of the stacking paper except for the
paper that is more than 106 g/m2 or tab paper ,coated paper.
Caution - When setting of SORTER>OPTION>BUFF-SW is "1", the number of paper in a stack is fixed at
5 for plain paper 1, 2 and 3 regardless of the setting of this mode.
- There is no simultaneous stack ejection operation for small sizes in the shift sort mode.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode SORTER>OPTION>BUFF-SW
STP-ALG 1 Set align plate oprtn at stpl mod:Fin-Y1

Detail To set the operation of alignment plates at staple mode and staple-free binding mode.
Set to 1 when the alignment operation by the alignment plates is changed from one time to two
times at the staple mode and staple-free binding mode.
Use Case When improving the alignment (front/rear) of the paper at staple mode
Caution When setting to ON, productivity is decreased.
0: OFF, 1: ON
1200
8. Service Mode
SDL-ALG 1 Set paddle oprtn in sddl unit: Fin-Y1
Detail To set the paddle operation when stacking the paper in the saddle stitcher unit.
Set to 1 when the paddle operation of the last stack paper in the saddle stitcher unit is changed
from one rotation to two rotations.
Use Case When improving the paper alignment of the feed direction at stacking the paper in the saddle
stitcher unit
Caution When setting to ON, productivity is decreased.
0: OFF, 1: ON
TRY-STP 1 Stpl/fold stck limit clear: Fin-H1/Y1

Detail To set whether to limit the stack capacity of the stapled copies/folded sheets.
When clearing the limit, the tray height limit is applied instead.
Use Case When stacking papers beyond the maximum number of stapled copies/folded sheets
Caution When the stacking limit is cleared, stacking capacity increases, but stacking performance
decreases.
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-H1: 0 to 1
Fin-Y1: 0 to 3
0: Normal specification
1: Clear the limit of stack capacity of the stapled copies, and apply the tray height limit
2: Clear the limit of stack capacity of the folded sheets, and apply the tray height limit
3: Clear the limit of stack capacity of both the stapled copies and folded sheets, and apply the tray
height limit
Default Value 0
TRY-LMT 1 Set stack limit of stack tray: Fin-Y1

Detail To set whether to limit the stack capacity of the stack tray.
Set to 1 when the stack capacity of the stack tray for the small size paper except the thin paper
and coated paper is changed from about 3,000 sheets to about 2,000 sheets.
Use Case When the stacking performance decreases by the curled paper during stacking a large amount of
the small size paper except the thin paper and coated paper
0: OFF, 1: ON
FR-ST-SW 1 Stp-free Stp Set in No Stp Ctrdg: Fin-H1

Detail When the staple cartridge is absent, staple-free stapling is not actually performed in the default
setting while a job with staple-free stapling has executed since the finisher behaves in non-sort
mode. Set to "1" to enable the staple-free stapling without staple cartridge.
Use Case When utilize the staple-free stapling without staple cartridge
Caution If a staple cartridge should be left in the finisher with the setting turns to "1" and the cartridge sits
unstable, error; 1C32 or E532 may come out when staple-free stapling is performed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
1201
8. Service Mode
BOARD (Option board setting mode)

BOARD (Option board setting mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
MENU-1 2 [Not used]
MENU-2 2 [Not used]
MENU-3 2 [Not used]
Default Value 0
MENU-4 2 [Not used]

SURF-OFF 1 [Not used]
TR-DSP 2 [Not used]
1202
9 Installation
How to Check this Installation
Procedure.................................... 1205
Points to Note at Installation........... 1206
Checking before Installation............1207
Combination Table of Accessory
Installation................................... 1209
Unpacking....................................... 1210
Checking the Contents....................1211
Installation Procedure..................... 1212
Printer Cover-J1.............................. 1252
Platen Cover Type W...................... 1256
NFC Kit-B1 (Flat Control Panel)......1261
Reader Heater Unit - J1 / J2........... 1270
Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1............ 1275
Inner 2-Way Tray-J1....................... 1286
Copy Tray-J2...................................1288
Utility Tray-B1..................................1291
Copy Card Reader-F1/Copy Card
Reader Attachment-B5................ 1295
IC Card Reader Box-C1.................. 1304
Serial Interface Kit-K3, Copy Control
Interface Kit-A1............................1310
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1........... 1315
Voice Operation Kit-D1................... 1319
Pre-checks for HDD-related Option
.....................................................1327
9. Installation
Removing the HDD (Preparation)....................................... 1328

[TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB)............................................... 1330
[TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit.............................................1333
[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit........... 1339
[TYPE-4] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + HDD
Mirroring Kit..................................................................... 1346
[TYPE-5] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + Removable
HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit........................................... 1352
[TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit.......... 1361
[TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD
Mirroring Kit..................................................................... 1368
Connection Kit-A1 for Bluetooth LE.....................................1378
Voice Guidance Kit-G1........................................................1381
NFC Kit-C1.......................................................................... 1389
1204
9. Installation
How to Check this Installation Procedure
Symbols
The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure.
Screw
1x 1x 1x 1x
Packaged Item Unused Parts Install Remove Tighten Loosen
Harness
(Common for Guides Connector Power Cord
and Clamps)
1x 1x 1x 1x
Install Remove Connect Disconnect Connect Disconnect
Power
ON OFF Check the sound Check visually Check Push Cleaning
1205
9. Installation
CAUTION:
Marked portion
When tightening the screws, do not tighten them too tightly. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw
holes.
1206
9. Installation
2. Be sure to keep 100 mm or more distance from the

Checking before Installation wall to make enough room for performing the
operation.
Following shows requirements for the installation site. • When option is not installed
Therefore, it is desirable to see the installation site in advance
4” (100 mm) or more
before bringing in the machine to the user's site.
19 3/4”
70 7/8” (1,800 mm) or more

(500 mm)
Checking Power Supply or more
1. There must be a properly grounded source of power

that can be used exclusively by the following
machines:
• USA: 120V-127V/16A
(500 mm)
or more
19 3/4”
19 3/4”
• EUR/ASIA/CHINA/KBS: 220-240V/10A (500 mm)
• TW: 110V-120V/16A or more
Checking the Installation 82 3/4” (2,100 mm) or more
• Booklet Finisher-Y1 + Paper Deck Unit-F1 is

Environment installed
1. The environment of the installation site must be in 4” (100 mm) or more

the range as shown below. Avoid installation near
19 3/4”
the faucet, water boiler, humidifier or refrigerator.
70 7/8” (1,800 mm) or more

(500 mm)
• Guaranteed range for operation/image or more
Temperature: 10.0 to 30.0 deg C, Humidity: 20 to
80%
2. The machine must not be installed near a source of

fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas.
If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun,
(500 mm)
or more
19 3/4”
19 3/4”
provide curtains to the window. (500 mm)
or more
3. Be sure to provide adequate ventilation of the room
to keep the work environment comfortable. Room
126 ” (3,200 mm) or more
odor can be bothering when running the machine for
a long time in a poorly-ventilated room although the
3. To install the host machine, install it in a well-
ozone amount generated while running this
ventilated place. Especially when there are multiple
equipment does not harm human health.
host machine s, be sure to locate the machine where
the machine is free from direct exhaust of other
machines. Be sure to keep the machine away from
Checking the Installation the air-inlet duct which is used for ventilation of the
Space room.
1. Be sure that the feet of this machine are properly set.

In addition, be sure to keep the machine horizontal. Points to Note before
Installation
When installing the machine, be sure to note the following
points.
1. When the machine is moved from a cold location to

a warm location, condensation may occur resulting
in water drops on the metal surfaces. Use of the host
machine when there is condensation may result in
image failure. After moving the machine from a cold
location to a warm location, leave it unpacked for at
least 2 hours or more to let it warm up to room
temperature before installation.
1207
9. Installation
2. The maximum weight of the machine is approx. 139

kg Be sure to perform the work in accordance with
the standard to handle a heavy load in each country.
In addition, be sure to keep the machine leveled
when lifting it..
1208
9. Installation
Combination Table of
Accessory Installation
NOTE:
• The following table shows the combination of options
installed of the host machine. Before installing the
following options, refer to the table to check the
combination of options.
• When using options and the Copy Card Reader
together, install the Copy Card Reader first.
• To install the Copy Card Reader, the Copy Card
Reader Attachment Kit is required.
Copy Voice Voice Utility Serial Copy

Card Opera- Guid- Tray Inter- Con-
Read- tion ance face trol In-
er Kit Kit Kit ter-
face
Kit
Copy - Yes Yes Yes No No
Card
Reader
Voice Yes - No No Yes Yes
Opera-
tion Kit
Voice Yes No - No Yes Yes
Guid-
ance
Kit
Utility Yes No No - Yes Yes
Tray
Serial No Yes Yes No - No
Inter-
face Kit
Copy No Yes Yes No No -
Control
Inter-
face Kit
Yes: installation is available No: installation is not available
1209
9. Installation
Unpacking 3
1
2
1120 mm
2350 mm
1230 mm
769 mm 840 mm
1210
9. Installation
Checking the Contents
1x
2x
4x
USA and LTN 3x EUR 4x
KOREA and THAILAND 1x
1x
1x 2x
1x
230V
1x
1x 1x
1x 1x
EUR Only EUR Only

2x 1x
<Others>
Including guides
1x 1x
1x 1x 1x
1x
1x
1x 1x
1211
9. Installation
Installation Procedure 2
Removing the Packaging CAUTION:
• Remvoe the tape of Front Cover in step 6.
Materials • Be sure not to remove the Scanner System
Fixation Screw before installation of the scanner.
NOTE:
• When installing the Cassette Pedestal, be sure to
place the host machine on the Cassette Pedestal.
NOTE:
(Refer to cassette pedestal Installation Procedure)
• Remove the attached tapes and packaging materials.
• In the following procedure, pictures of a host machine
• Although pictures or illustrations used for
with the Cassette Feeding Unit are used, but the
explanationmay differ from the actual things, the
procedure is the same.
1
CAUTION:
• The maximum weight of the host machine is
approx. 139 kg Be sure to perform the work in
accordance with the standard to handle a heavy
load in each country.
• Be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting
it.
1212
9. Installation
4 6
NOTE: NOTE:
• Remove the attached tapes and packaging materials. The Front Cover opens when the tape of Front Cover is
• Although pictures or illustrations used for removed.
5
8
NOTE:
Although pictures or illustrations used for explanationmay
differ from the actual things, the procedure is the same.
1213
9. Installation
9 10
NOTE: NOTE:
Install while pressing the claw of Right Front Cover. Install while pressing the claw of Right Rear Cover.
1214
9. Installation
11 2
NOTE:
Although pictures or illustrations used for explanationmay
differ from the actual things, the procedure is the same.
Installing the Drum Unit
1
CAUTION:
Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is
positioned in the direction of the arrow. If not, adjust its
position by turning it clockwise.
Installing the Scanner
1
NOTE:
Be sure to keep the Scanner System Fixation Screws in a
safe place for moving the machine.
2x
1215
9. Installation
2 4
NOTE:
Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of 1x
the arrow until the protrusion is aligned with the triangle
mark on the plate, check that the Right Door is open, and
then release the pressure.
5
2x
NOTE:
The removed screws will be used in step 16.
1216
9. Installation
6 CAUTION:
Points to Note when Removing the Dummy DrumWhen
<For India only> removing the Dummy Drum, be sure to lift it slowly and
vertically.
If lifting it in an oblique direction, the Seal on the
NOTE:
Place a sheet of paper on the Front Cover.
Developing Assembly is stressed, and may cause tear
of the seal.
Perform the removal procedure for each color.
7
CAUTION:
If the Developing Seal is torn, remove the torn seal by
pulling the end of it in the direction of the arrow.
At that time, be careful not to leave the torn seal in the
1217
9. Installation
CAUTION:
• To check that the Developing Assembly is properly
installed, move the Developing Assembly toward
the front and rear by hand. If it won't move at all,
check again that the Developing Assembly is
properly installed.
• Be sure not to touch the Developing Cylinder
during the work.
8
<For India only>
NOTE: 9
Remove the tape from the Developing Assembly.
<For India only>
NOTE:
CAUTION:
Remove the Plastic Film Sheet from the Developing
Do not touch the sleeve. Assembly, and remove the.
1218
9. Installation
10 CAUTION:
Points to Note at Drum Unit Installation
<For India only> • Be sure not to rotate the Drum counterclockwise
while taking it out from the Container Box,
removing the Drum Cover and installing to the
NOTE:
Remove the paper you placed in step 6.
main body. The Scoop-up Sheet may be flipped,
causing toner scattering.
• Be sure not to reinstall the removed Drum Cover;
otherwise, the Scoop-up Sheet may be flipped,
causing toner scattering.
11 Unpack the Drum Unit.
CAUTION:
Make sure to use a new Drum Unit. If not, this may
cause the control of the machine to not operate
properly.
Be sure to pay attention to the below in doing the next

procedure.
• Do not touch the Drum area.
• Be careful not to hit the cover against the Drum area.
• Place 5 or more sheets of paper on the Process Unit to
block the light to the Drum Unit.
NOTE:
Step 12 to 15 is to install the Drum Unit of each color.
1219
9. Installation
12 13
CAUTION: NOTE:
The joint between the Drum Unit and the cover might Hold the handles at right and left of the Drum Unit.
be stiff.
Proceed with extra care to avoid hitting the Drum area
or dropping the Drum Unit when removing the cover
from the Drum Unit.
1220
9. Installation
CAUTION:
If pushing it in the angle, the shutter may breaks. Thus
14
make sure to install it from just above.
NOTE:
Fit the guide of the Process Unit to the guide of the Drum
Unit to install the Drum Unit.
1221
9. Installation
15 16
NOTE: NOTE:
Hold down each of the 8 grips lightly with a finger to check • Use the screw removed in step 5.
that the Drum Units are installed properly. • Remove paper covering the Drum units.
CAUTION:
Check that there is no gap between the host machine
and the Process Unit, and then secure with the screw.
1222
9. Installation
19
NOTE:
Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of
the arrow, and then fit the projection to the triangle mark
on the plate to apply pressure.
CAUTION:
When pressuring the ITB Pressure Release Lever, be
sure that the Right Door is opened first before
2x
pressuring.
17
1x
20
18
1223
9. Installation
21 Setting the Environment

Heater Switch
2x CAUTION:
If the installation environment is a high humidity
environment (*) or low humidity environment (*2), be
sure to turn ON the Environment Heater Switch.
Image smear is likely to occur in the high humidity
environment and charging failure is likely to occur in the
low humidity environment.
* This is the case that the value of the absolute water
volume outside of the machine is about 12g or more.
Service Mode (Level1) > COPIER > DISPLAY >
ANALOG > ABS-HUM
22 *2The temperature inside the machine is below 15 deg
C.
Service Mode (Level1) > COPIER > DISPLAY >
ANALOG > TEMP2
2x
23 2
1224
9. Installation
CAUTION:
When removing the cover, do not insert a screwdriver
2
in the oval hole.
2x
Installing IC Card Reader (EUR

Only)
CAUTION:
Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation
may differ from the actual things, the procedure is the
same.
1225
9. Installation
4 6
NOTE:
Although the LED Cable is disconnected in the illustration,
the procedure is the same.
1x
NOTE:
The removed CR BOX Upper Unit will be used in step 14.
5
NOTE:
Although the LED Cable is disconnected in the illustration,
the procedure is the same.
NOTE:
The removed screw and Base Plate Under Cover will be
used in step 11.
NOTE:
The removed Base Small Cover will be used in step 13.
1226
9. Installation
8 10
NOTE:
Secure the cables asshown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Makesure to avoid putting too much load on the
connectionport of Wi-Fi cable.
1x
4x
1227
9. Installation
11 12
NOTE:
Use the screw and Base Plate Under Coverremoved in
step 6.
13
NOTE:
Usethe Base Small Cover removed in step 5.
1x
NOTE:
Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to the
thickness of the Card Reader.
1228
9. Installation
14 16
NOTE:
Usethe CR BOX Upper Unit removed in step 4.
17
15
2x
1229
9. Installation
18 3
4
Setting the Cassette
NOTE:
1 explanationmay differ from the actual things, the
• Affix the Cassette Size Label matching to the
loadedpaper size.
• Keep the Paper Size Label for use when changing
papersize.
• Affix the label with its lower edge aligned with the
loweredge of the number label, approx. 5.0 mm away
from thenumber label.
5.0 mm
2
NOTE:
• Holding the Guide Plate Lever, adjust each
GuidePlate to the specified size.
• Adjust the position of each Guide Plate according
tothe paper size.
1230
9. Installation
Installing Stamp Cartridge 4

1
CAUTION:
Be sure to place paper in order to prevent the Copy
Board Glass from being damaged when the cover of
the document reading area is opened.
5
2
3 6
1231
9. Installation
7 2
Installing the Cleaning Tool
NOTE:
Be sure to install the Cleaning Cloth Storage Box to a
position after checking with the user on where to install it.
3
1
NOTE:
Clean the position where the Cleaning Cloth Storage Box
is to be installed with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
Securing the Host Machine
1
NOTE:
• Move the main body to the installation position, and
secure it in place by turning the 4 adjusters of the
Cassette Pedestal with a screwdriver.
• Be sure to secure it in place to prevent overturning.
• Securing with the adjusters is not an earthquake
countermeasure.
1232
9. Installation
CAUTION:
• In case of the host machine with the Toner
Container, once the machine goes to standby
state, drum initialization, developing assembly
initialization and toner refill are completed.
• In case of the host machine without the Toner
Container, execute the following procedures.
4. Open the Toner Replacement Cover.
5. Add check marks to each color displayed on the

operation screen, and press [Remove Toner
Cartridges] to open the Small Cover.
Turning the Main Power ON /
Setting the Toner Container
CAUTION:
Only for Korea and China, the Toner Container is
installed on the host machine.
1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

power outlet.
2. Remove the protection sheet on the control panel.
3. Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power

switch.
6. Hold the Toner Container as shown in the figure and
shake it approx. 10 times.
NOTE:
• Supply of toner and initialization of the Developing
Assembly and the Drum are automatically performed.
• When toner supply is completed, the operation stops.
(Approx. 2 to 3 minutes)
• Even turning OFF the main power during drum
initialization, developing assembly initialization and De 9 a 10
toner fill, they will be re-executed when turning ON
the power again.
NOTE:
Turning OFF the Main Power Switch
2. Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power
Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the
power plug.
1233
9. Installation
Host Machine Settings

7. Be sure to insert the Toner Container horizontally
with your hand supporting its bottom until approx. (Starting the Setup Guide)
half of it is inserted.
CAUTION:
• The Setup Guide screen appears when the power
is turned ON for the first time after the machine is
installed. Follow the instructions displayed on the
Touch Panel Display to configure the settings of
the host machine.
• It is not possible to exit Setup Guide halfway
through.
• Setup Guide can be started again from [Settings/
Registration] ( [Settings/Registration] >
[Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Start
Setup Guide]).
• What has been registered in Setup Guide can be
changed from items in (Settings/Registration).
When configuring settings using Setup Guide,
excluding some of the setting items, it is possible
to proceed to the next setting without entering the
current setting. To configure skipped settings,
configure the settings one by one after exiting
Setup Guide. If the host machine is turned OFF
during registration using Setup Guide, Setup
Guide is automatically started by turning ON the
power again. Once registration using Setup Guide
has been completed, Setup Guide is not
automatically started by turning ON the host
machine.
8. Close the Toner Cover. Toner Replacement Cover
and Small Cover.
CAUTION:
Register the information of paper loaded during
installation of the host machine.
Be sure to register the correct paper type. Especially in
the case of special paper types such as heavy paper,
registering a wrong paper type may result in image
failure, and when the Fixing Assembly becomes soiled
or paper wraparound occurs, repair by a service
technician becomes necessary.
NOTE:
• Initialization of toner supply, initialization of the
Developing Unit, initialization of the drum, and color
displacement correction, etc. are automatically
performed while Setup Guide is running.
• When all initializations have been completed, Setup
Guide stops (approx.4 minutes).
When not executing Setup Guide, it can be canceled by

pressing [Cancel] on the Touch Panel Display. When
executing Setup Guide, follow the Setup Guide to specify
the items in the order shown below:
1. <Switch Language/Keyboard>
Select the displayed language and keyboard layout.
1234
9. Installation
2. <Paper Settings> 9. <Country/Region> (FAX-TYPE settings)

1. Select the paper source for which you want to Select Country/Region.
specify the paper type, and press [Set].
10. <Register Unit Telephone Number>
2. Select the paper type, and press [OK].
3. If [Plain] is selected, the basis weight can be specify Set the phone number, the name the machine will
from [Plain Paper Weight Set]. appear as on the network, and the line type.
4. If a button corresponding to the paper that has been 11. <Auto Adjust Gradation>
set is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] and
Select [Full Adjust].
make a selection on the detailed settings screen.
12. <Output Report>
NOTE: Select the Setting Value List , [Start Printing] > OK.
• If the corresponding paper type is not displayed on
the simple settings screen, press [Detailed Settings]
NOTE:
and make a selection on the detailed settings screen.
Be sure to keep the report which has been output.
• If the type of loaded paper is not displayed on the
detailed settings screen, you can register it.
13. <Setup Guide Done>

3. <Authentication Login> When Setup Guide is completed, the machine is
automatically restarted.
NOTE:
Pressing [Skip] proceeds to auto gradation adjustment ■ Informing the System Administrator
instead of the setting of system administrator privilege. That Installation Is Complete
When the installation is completed, ask the system
Press [Log in], and enter a password. administrator to change the password. Also ask the system
administrator to keep the changed password in a safeplace
CAUTION: to prevent leakage.
• Do not change Administrator here.
• Enter the initial value "7654321" in the password
entry field. Other Installations
4. <Use Optional Output Tray> 1

Set whether to use the optional output tray.
CAUTION:
Make sure the output tray that is set to On is attached
to the device, or the output tray will not function
correctly.
5. <Date/Time Settings>
Set the date and time.
CAUTION:
Perform the network settings according to the user's
request.
6. <Use IP Address>
Specify IPv4 and/or IPv6, and each IP address.
7. <DNS Server Address Settings>

Configure the DNS Server Address Settings, the DNS
Host/Domain Name Settings, and the DNS Dynamic
Update Settings.
8. <Proxy Settings>
Specify the Proxy Settings.
1235
9. Installation
2 4
NOTE:
Only when the Cassette Pedestal is not installe
5
NOTE:
• Affix the label of the appropriate language as shown
in the figure below.
• If a label is already affixed, affix over the existing
label.
USA and LTN 3x EUR 4x

KOREA and THAILAND 1x
1236
9. Installation
Installing the Envelope ● When the Kit Is Not Used
Attachment 1
■ Installing the Envelope Attachment
A
CAUTION:
• Use the Envelope Attachment A for the Cassette
1 or Cassette 2.
• Do not use the Cassette 3 or Cassette 4.
NOTE:
Install/remove the Envelope Attachment A only if
requested by the customer.
● Envelope Standards
Cassette1
Type (Short side (X)×Long Side

(Y))
4 1/8" x 9 1/2"(inch)/ 104.7 x
No. 10 (COM10)
241.3 mm
DL 110 x 220 mm
ISO-C5 162 x 229 mm
Cassette2 2
Type (Long Side (X)×Short side
(Y))
7 1/2" x 3 7/8"(inch)/ 190.5 x
Monarch
98.4 mm
9 1/2" x 4 1/8"(inch)/ 241.3 x
No. 10 (COM10)
104.7 mm
DL 220 x 110 mm
ISO-C5 229 x 162 mm
1237
9. Installation
● When the Kit Is Used

3
1
2
● Settings after Installation
1. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >

[Paper Settings] > [Paper Settings] > [Cassette 1/
Cassette 2] > [Envelope]
2. Select the type of envelope to be used and then

press [OK] to register it.
● Display/Operation Check
1. Check that "Envelope" is selected for Cassette 1 or

Cassette 2 on the Control Panel's "Paper Settings"
screen.
2. Check that the envelope is picked up.
1238
9. Installation
■ Installing the Envelope Attachment

B
2
CAUTION:
Use the Envelope Attachment B for the Cassette 1.
NOTE:
• Install/remove the Envelope Attachment B only if
requested by the customer.
• If the Envelope Attachment B is not used, give it to
the customer and ask to store it.
● Envelope Standards
Type (Short side (X)×Long Side
(Y))
4 1/8" x 9 1/2"(inch)/ 104.7 x
No. 10 (COM10)
241.3 mm
DL 110 x 220 mm
● When the Kit Is Used

3
1
CAUTION:
In order to prevent skew, use it together with the
Envelope Attachment A.
1239
9. Installation
5 2. Check the result of initialization of developing toner

ratio in Service Mode.
Check that each value is within the range of 200 to 450,
and then write down the value on the service label at the
rear side of the Front Cover.
• Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST >
DENS > CONT-Y/M/C/K
3. Check the Developing Patch initialization.

Check that each value is within the range of 200 to 680
(around 440), and then write down the value on the
service label at the rear side of the Front Cover.
• Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST >
DENS > SGNL-Y/M/C/K
● Settings after Installation

Auto Adjust Gradation
1. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > Execute auto gradation adjustment the used paper type as
[Paper Settings] > [Paper Settings] > [Cassette 1] > needed.
[Envelope] However, when using 2 or more types of paper, it is
necessary to execute all the modes corresponding to the
types of paper.
2. Select the type of envelope to be used and then
press [OK] to register it. CAUTION:
Note that if a type of paper to which auto gradation
● Display/Operation Check adjustment is not performed is used, it may cause
negative effects on image or the host machine.
1. Check that "Envelope" is selected for Cassette 1 on

the Control Panel's "Paper Settings" screen. ■ In the case of imageRUNNER
ADVANCE C5560i
2. Check that the envelope is picked up. ● [Plain Paper 1/2/3]
Checking after the Installation 1. Clean the glass surface of Copyboard Glass on the
host machine.
2. Load A3, A4, 11x17 or LTR paper to the cassette.

1. In Service Mode, check the result of Drum Unit
(Refer to the cassette setting.)
initialization.
Make sure that the value of the installed color is [0 ]. 3. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/
• Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > Counter > LF Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
> Y/M/C/K-DRM -LF Adjust Gradation] >[Plain Paper] > [Full Adjust].
4. Select the pickup source of a test print and press

NOTE: [OK].
If an error code [E061-xxxx] is displayed on the screen or
the value is not appropriate, 5. Follow the below UI and perform the operation.
1. Turn OFF the power, refit the Drum Unit and turn On the
power again. ● [Heavy 1]
2. If the above work does not solve the problem, execute
initialization of the Drum Unit for each color in Service
Mode.
1. Clean the glass surface of Copyboard Glass on the
• Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION >
DPC > DRMRSETY/M/C host machine.
2. Load the heavy paper to the cassette.
1240
9. Installation
3. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/ 5. Follow the below UI and perform the operation.
Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
Adjust Gradation] > [Heavy 1] > [Full Adjust].
Register Correction Pattern
[OK].
5. Follow the below UI and perform the operation. 1. Clean the glass surface of Copyboard Glass on the
host machine.
● [Heavy 2 to 7]
2. Log in as a system manager.
Factory default password is as follows.
1. Clean the glass surface of Copyboard Glass on the • System administration division ID: Administrator
host machine. • System administration password: 7654321
2. Load the heavy paper to the cassette or Multi-

purpose Tray. CAUTION:
When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it
3. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/ is required to log in as a system manager in
Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto accordance with instructions from the user
Adjust Gradation] > [Heavy 2 to 7] > [Full Adjust]. administrator.

[OK].
3. [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/Maintenance]
5. Follow the below UI and perform the operation. > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto Correct color Tone
Settings] > [Register Correction Pattern], and press
■ In the case of image RUNNER [Yes].
ADVANCE C5560i/C5540I/C5535/
CAUTION:
C5535i It is required that auto gradation adjustment has been
executed.
● [In case of Plain Paper1/2/3/Heavy1]
4. Select the destination for registration, and press

1. Clean the glass surface of Copyboard Glass on the [Next].
host machine.
5. Select the paper which is used by the user and press
2. Load A3, A4, 11x17 or LTR paper to the cassette. [Next].
(Refer to the cassette setting.)
3. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/ CAUTION:

Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto • Select the paper used for auto gradation
Adjust Gradation] >[Plain Paper/Heavy1] > [Full adjustment.
Adjust]. • If paper has been registered for auto gradation
adjustment, select the registered paper.
[OK].
5. Follow the below UI and perform the operation. 6. Select the paper source where paper which is used
by the user is loaded and press [OK].
● [Heavy 2 to 7] 7. Press [Start Printing].
8. Set the output image on the Copyboard and press

[Start Scanning].
1. Clean the glass surface of Copyboard Glass on the
host machine. 9. If there are 2 or more papers which either was used
for auto gradation adjustment or has been
2. Load the heavy paper to the cassette or Multi-
registered, repeat steps 3 to 8 as necessary. At that
purpose Tray.
time, be sure to register each paper to different
3. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/ destination. (Up to 4 papers can be registered.)
Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
Adjust Gradation] >[Heavy2 to 7] > [Full Adjust].

[OK].
1241
9. Installation
Execute the ITB Equilibrium

4. Remove the ITB Motor.
Position Detection • 1 Connector
• 4 Screws
1. Check that the main body is in standby state.

1x 4x
2. Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection.
Approx. 3 to 4minutes
• Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION >
MISC-P > ITB-INIT
3. Check that the value of the following service mode

(Level 1) is "-350 to +350".
• COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > ITB-POS
• COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > ITB-POS2
4. If the value of service mode is out of range, perform

the [ITB Alignment Adjustment].
NOTE:
Since this product is not affected by the tilt of floor,
adjustment of the adjuster height is not valid. Therefore, if
it is out of the range, perform "ITB alignment adjustment".
■ ITB Alignment Adjustment
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host

machine.

power plug.
3. Open the Front Cover and remove the ITB Cover.

• 2 Screws (Loosen)
2x
1242
9. Installation
CAUTION:
5. Loosen the 3 screws, and rotate the ITB Motor The appropriate range is from -350 to +350.
Support Plate clockwise or counterclockwise. • Make an adjustment by 1 scale mark (0.5 mm) or
less at a time.
NOTE: • Moving it by 1 scale mark (0.5 mm) changes the
Be sure to check the initial position of the Adjustment Plate values of ITB-POS and ITB-POS2 by approx. 250.
before loosening the screw because it moves when the • When moving the scale to the full extent of the
screw is loosened. range, the value of POS may change significantly
and E075 may light up.
• <When the values are above +350>

Rotate the ITB Motor Support Plate clockwise.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the plate is not placed on the boss which
serves as the axis of rotation.
• <When the values are below -350>
Rotate the ITB Motor Support Plate
counterclockwise.
3x
1243
9. Installation
■ Cassette Left Edge Margin

6. Tighten 3 screws loosened on the previous step. Adjustment(1st;Software
Adjustment)
CAUTION:
Be sure that the plate is not placed on the boss which
serves as the axis of rotation.
1. Make 2-sided copies using the Cassette 1 and check
that the left edge margin is 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.
3x Dirección de
alimenación
del papel
imagen
L1
<In case the Cassette1 is Nonstandard>
2. If the left margin is out of the specification, change

the adjustment value for the left margin on the 1st
side in cassettte 1.
As making the following selection: Service Mode
(level1)> COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1
andset 1 value larger, the left edge margin becomes
0.1mm larger.
3. Make 2-sided copy from cassette 2, and check that

7. Install the ITB Motor. (4 Screws, 1 Connector)
the left margin is 2.5 -/+ 1.5mm.

8. Install the ITB Cover (2 screws) and close the Front
Cover.
4. If the margin is out of the specification, change the
adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd side
9. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the in cassette 2.
power outlet. As making the following selection: Service Mode
10. Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power (level1)> COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2
switch. andset 1 value larger, the left edge margin becomes
0.1mm larger.
11. Perform steps 2 to 4 of "Detecting the ITB

equilibrium position". 5. Write down the new adjustment value on the service
label.
• ADJ-C1
Adjusting Image Position • ADJ-C2
NOTE:
• The second side of the 2-sided copy mentioned later 6. Exit from Service Mode.
means the second side in the image formation order.
• With this equipment, the second side in the image
formation order at the time of 2-sided copy/print is
equivalent to the first side of the original.
1244
9. Installation
■ Cassette Left Edge Margin

Adjustment (First side; Hardware
Adjsutment)
CAUTION: 1x
• The cassette left edge margin adjustment for 1st
side is performed with the priority on software
adjustment.
• Cassette 1 does not have the hardware
adjustment mechanism.
1
NOTE:
3
Make copies using the Cassette 2, and check that the left
edge margin is 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm. NOTE:
• Tighten the fixing screw.
• Return the cassette to its original position.
Dirección de
• Make copies using the Cassette 2, and check that the
alimenación
del papel
left edge margin is 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.
imagen
L1
1x
In Case of Out of Range
2
NOTE:
• Pull out the cassette.
• Check the scale positions on the Adjustment Plate.
• Loosen the fixing screw.
• As moving the adjusting plate toward the rear by 1
scale, the left edge margin becomes 1.0 mm smaller.
1245
9. Installation
NOTE: ■ Multi-purpose Tray Left Edge

When the cassette positions are uneven due to the Margin Adjustment (1st side)
hardware adjustment, adjust them by loosening the screw
on both left and right sides.
1. Execute duplex printing from the Multi-purpose

Tray, and check that the left edge margin for the 1st
side is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm.
Dirección de
alimenación
del papel
imagen
L1
1x 1x <In Case of Out of Range>
2. Change the left edge margin adjustment value for

the 1st side of the Multi-purpose Tray.
As making the following selection: Service Mode
(level1)> COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MF
andset 1 value larger, the left edge margin becomes
0.1mm larger.
3. Write the new adjustment value on the service label.

• ADJ-MF
4. Exit from Service Mode.
1x 1x ■ Cassette Left Edge Margin

Adjustment (Second side)
1. Make 2-sided copies using the Cassette 3 and check

Dirección de
alimenación
del papel
imagen
L1
1246
9. Installation
<In case the Cassette1 is Nonstandard> 4. Write down the new adjustment value on the service
label.
ADJ-MFRE
2. As for nonstandard, change the left edge margin
adjustment value for the second side of the 2-sided ■ Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (1st
copy from the Cassette 1. side)
Service Mode (level1) > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-
ADJ > ADJ-C1RE and set 1 value larger, the left edge
margin becomes 0.1mm larger.
1. Make copy from cassettte 1, and check that the lead-
edge margin is L1 = 4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm.
L1
3. As for the adjustment value for side registration on
the second side in cassette 1, enter the same value
as the adjustment value for the left margin on the 1st Dirección de
side in cassette 2. alimentación
del papel
Service Mode (level1) > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-
ADJ > ADJ-C2RE imagen
4. Make 2-sided copies using the Cassette 2, and check

2. Select the following in Service Mode (Level 1) :

5. If the margin is out of the specification, change the COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST
adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd side 3. Change the setting value to make adjustment (1
in cassette 2. increment of the setting value reduces the lead-edge
As making the following selection: Service Mode margin by 0.1mm)
(level1)> COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2RE
andset 1 value larger, the left edge margin becomes 4. To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the
0.1mm larger. main power of the Host Machine.
5. Write down the new adjustment value on the service

label.
6. Write down the new adjustment value on the service • REGIST
label.
• ADJ-C1RE ■ Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (2nd
• ADJ-C2RE
side)
7. Exit from Service Mode.

1. Make 2-sided copy from cassette 1, and check that
the lead-edge margin on the 2nd side is L1 = 4.0
■ Multi Purpose Tray Left Edge +1.5/-1.0 mm.
Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
L1
1. Make 2-sided copy from the manual feed tray, and Dirección de
check that the left margin on the 2nd side is 2.5 -/+ alimentación
del papel
2.0mm.
2. If the left margin is out of the specification, change imagen

the adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd
side from the Multi Purpose Tray.
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-
ADJ > ADJ-MFRE ; 1 increment of the value reduces the
left margin by 0.1mm.
3. To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the

main power of the Host Machine.
1247
9. Installation
<In case the Cassette1 is Nonstandard> complete, and ask for network connection of the
host machine.
2. Select the following in Service Mode (Level 1) : NOTE:

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP1 Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as
an administrator.
3. Change the setting value to make adjustment (1 Factory default password is as follows.
increment of the setting value reduces the lead-edge • System administration division ID: Administrator
margin by 0.1mm) • System administration password: 7654321
4. To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the

main power of the Host Machine.
CAUTION:
5. Write down the new adjustment value on the service Following setting needs to be ON to perform network
label. setting:
• REG-DUP1 • [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >
[Network] > [Confirm Network Connection Set.
Changes]
Checking Network Connection • [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >
[Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] >
[Use IPv4]
■ Overview
If the user network environment is TCP/IP, use Ping function
to check that the network setting is properly executed. 4. Turn OFF the main power switch.
If the user network environment is IPX/SPX or Apple Talk,
skip this procedure. 5. Turn ON the main power switch.
■ Checking Network Connection ■ Ping Operation Procedure

CAUTION: [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] >
Use the network cable of rank 5e or higher. In addition, [PING Command].
use of shield type (STP cable) is recommended.
2. Enter IP address with numeric keypad on the control
When non-shield type (UTP cable) is used, the
panel and press "Start" key. "Response from the
surrounding electronic equipments may be interfered
host" is displayed if Ping operation is successful.
via the network cable.
"No response from the host" is displayed if Ping
operation fails.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
2. Connect the network cable to the host machine and

■ Checking with Remote Host
turn ON the main power switch. Address
3. Inform the system administrator at the installation You can check whether the network is connected or not by
site that the installation of the host machine is using remote host address to execute Ping.
Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal that is
connected to/works with TCP/IP network environment, which
connects to this host machine.
1. Inform the system administrator to execute

checking of network connection using Ping.
2. Check the remote host address with the system

administrator.
3. Enter the remote host address to PING.

• "Response from the host": The machine is properly
connected to the network.
• "No response from the host": Execute the following
troubleshooting because the machine is not
connected to the network.
1248
9. Installation
Troubleshooting of Network ■ Checking Network Function on the

Main Controller
■ Checking Connection of the Check with the loopback address:
Network Cable
1. Select: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >
Check that the network cable is properly connected to the [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] >
Ethernet port. [PING Command], and enter the IP address
"127.0.0.1" with the numeric keypad and press the
■ Ping Operation Procedure Execute key.
• If the display shows "Response from the host", the
1. Ask the network administrator at the user's site to network of the main controller is properly
note the IP address of the PC that is connected to functioning.
the network. • If the display shows "No response from the host",
the network function of the main controller is faulty.
2. Select: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >
[Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > 2. Replace with a main controller that works properly,
[PING Command], and enter the IP address of PC and the check connection.
with the numeric keypad, and then press "Execute”
key.
• If the display shows "Response from the host", the When Relocating the Machine
network connection is properly functioning.
• If the display shows "No response from the host", When relocating this machine by truck or by other means for
go to the next step for another checking. some reasons after installing the machine, perform the
following procedure.
NOTE:
Checking of IP address of PC is available by the procedure CAUTION:
below. In case of relocating the machine while it is mounted
On Windows PC, go through the following: Start > on the Cassette Pedestal, be sure to check that the
Program > Accessory > Command Prompt, and enter coin screw has been tightened securely before holding
ipconfig and press the Enter key. IP address information the grips of the machine to lift when, for example,
will be displayed.
passing over a difference in level of the floor. Holding
the grips of the machine when lifting will result in
separation of the machine from the Cassette Pedestal.
■ Checking Network Setting of the
Host Machine
Check if the IP address specified on the host machine is
correct. 1. Move the Scanner Unit to the position where it is
going to be secured.
1. Select the following: [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [IP Address Settings], and note the IP • Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > FUNCTION >
address in the IP Address field. MISC-R > RD-SHPOS
2. Select the following: [Settings/Registration] >

[Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [PING Command], and enter the IP
address.
2. Turn OFF the main power.
• If the display shows "Response from the host", the
3.
IP address specified on the host machine is correct.
• If the display shows "No response from the host", Disconnect the power plug of the host machine.
go to the next step for another checking.
NOTE:
When entering an address by manual operation, set the 4. If the Cassette Pedestal is installed, turn the 4
Subnet Mask according to the instructions of the user adjusters of the Cassette Pedestal with a
administrator. screwdriver, etc. to lift them from the floor.
1249
9. Installation
5. When moving the machine, be sure to push the 6. Secure the Scanner Unit with the Scanner System
position indicated in the figure. Fixation Screws that have been kept in a safe place
since installation.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to push the upper side of the machine
strongly from the front side, otherwise it can fall over.
(Especially in the case of the carpet floor.)
2x
1250
9. Installation
7. Securely tighten the coin screws of the host

machine and the 2-cassette Pedestal (including the
High Capacity Cassette Pedestal).
CAUTION:
• When tightening the coin screws, pay attention to
plates and parts around the screws.
• Be sure to check that the coin screws have been
tightened securely.
2x
8. Put a sheet of paper on the Copyboard Glass.
9. After turning ON the power, make a copy.
1251
9. Installation
Printer Cover-J1 Installation Outline Drawing
Points to Note before

Installation
After installation of the Printer Cover, be sure to change the
setting of the following service mode (level1) to "0" before
turning OFF the power of the host machine. Otherwise, an
error may occur when turning ON the power.
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR
1x
1
M4x10 2x 4x
2x
Check Items when Turning

OFF the Main Power
Check that the main power switch is OFF.

machine.

power plug.
1252
9. Installation
2 4
2x 4x
NOTE:
The removed screws and rubber caps will be used in step
12.
NOTE:
The parts removed in the following steps 5, 6, and 7 will
3 be used in step 9.
3x
5
4x
1253
9. Installation
6 9
NOTE:
2x Use the parts removed in steps 5, 6, and 7.
7 2x
2x
1x
8 4x
2x
2x
1254
9. Installation
10
2x
11
NOTE:
Use the screws and rubber caps removed in step 2.
4x
M4x10
1255
9. Installation
Platen Cover Type W

4x
1x
1x
Binding ; M4x8
2x
6x 1x
Check Item When Turning OFF

2
the Main Power
2x
Check that the main power is OFF.
2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the

lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
disconnect the power plug.
Installation Outline Drawing
NOTE:
The removed screws and Rubber Caps will be used in step
6.
1256
9. Installation
3 6
NOTE:
3x Use the screws and Rubber Caps removed in step 2.
2x
4
7
4x
2x
1257
9. Installation
8 10
Binding ; M4x8
2x
1258
9. Installation
11 13
CAUTION:
• Be sure that there is no gap (for reference, 0.3 mm
or less) between the White Plate and the Index
Sheet.
• Check that the White Plate is not placed on the
Index Sheet.
ADF
White Plate Index Sheet

Reader Unit
ADF

Reader Unit
12
CAUTION:
If the White Plate is pressed downward, it is placed on
the Index Sheet, so be sure to press it upward.
ADF

Reader Unit
ADF

Reader Unit
14 Connect the power plug of the host machine to
the outlet.
1259
9. Installation
15 Turn ON the main power switch.
1260
9. Installation
NFC Kit-B1 (Flat Control Installation Outline Drawing

Panel)
Points to Note before

Installation
CAUTION:
Do not touch the sensor and PCB components of the
Control Panel.
NOTE:
The removed parts other than unnecessary parts will be
used in "Installing the NFC Kit". Installation procedure
■ Remove the Control Panel
1
1x

the Main Power

2
disconnect the power plug. 2x
1261
9. Installation
3 5
CAUTION:
2x Be sure to place 5 or more sheets of paper to prevent
damage.
After completing the work, remove papers.
4 4x
3x
1262
9. Installation
7 9
1x
10
2x
1x
11
6x
1263
9. Installation
12 13
CAUTION:
1x Be careful not to drop the washer.
2x
1264
9. Installation
■ Installing the NFC Kit

14
CAUTION:
• Be sure to place 5 or more sheets of paper to
1x prevent damage. After completing the work,
remove papers.
• When installing the parts, be sure not to get the
Protection Sheet caught.
15
1
3x
5x
5x
3x
1265
9. Installation
2 3
CAUTION:
1x Be careful not to drop the washer.
2x
4
1x
1266
9. Installation
5 8
6x
6
2x
9
1x
7
1x
1267
9. Installation
10 11
CAUTION:
Do not install the screws to the locations with X marks.
Tighten screws during the installation of cover in step
13.
3x
12
4x
1268
9. Installation
13 Setting after Installation

2x
outlet.
2. Turn ON the main power switch.
3. If a message prompting the user to update the

version appears, press [Update] to automatically
update the version of this equipment.
NOTE:
If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
update the version will appear every time the host machine
is started.
In the service mode (Level 2) shown below, it is possible
to set not to display the message.
14 • COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG
4. After the version update, enter service mode (Level

2x 1) and set the value to "1".
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > NFC-USE
NOTE:
When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it is
required to log in as a system manager in accordance with
instructions of the user administrator.
5. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management

Settings] > [Device Management] > [Use NFC Card
Emulation], and set the item to "ON".
15 6. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
7. When a message prompting the version update is

CAUTION: displayed, press [Update] and automatically update
Be sure to remove the Protection Sheet. the version of this equipment.
CAUTION:
It may take time to display the update screen. (Approx.
1 to 2 min.)
During this time, do not operate the screen.
8. Check the end of the following service mode (Level

1).
• COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > PANEL
If the end is an even number (e.g. 01.26): NFC is
not installed.
If the end is an odd number (e.g. 01.27): NFC is
installed.
1269
9. Installation
Reader Heater Unit - J1 / J2 Installation Procedure
Checking the Contents 1

2x
2x
Binding ; M4x6
2x
4x
Only for J2
1x 3x
2
CAUTION:
Check Item When Turning OFF When removing the Copyboard Glass, be careful not
to touch the glass surface and the White Plate on the
the Main Power back.
If the surface becomes dirty, clean it with lint free paper.

White Plate
1270
9. Installation
3 5
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Pull the rear side of the Drive Belt in the direction of the Be sure to hold down the Reader Heater Harness
arrow to move the Scanner Box to the center. because it may interfere with moving of the Scanner
Box if it is not connected properly.
Binding ; M4x6
1x 2x 1x
4
NOTE:
Install the Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in the
figure.
1271
9. Installation
6 7
NOTE: CAUTION:
Install the Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in the Be sure to hold down the Reader Heater Harness
figure. because it may interfere with moving of the Scanner
Box if it is not connected properly.
Binding ; M4x6
1x 2x 1x
1272
9. Installation
8
2x
CAUTION:
When installing the Copyboard Glass, be careful not to
touch the glass surface and back side of the White
Plate.If the surface becomes dirty, clean it with lint free
paper.
White Plate
1273
9. Installation
9 10
NOTE: NOTE:
Be sure to check that turn ON the environment switch. The Environment Switch Cover is included in the host
machine.
11
Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power
outlet.
12
Turn ON the main power switch.
1274
9. Installation
Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1
Checking before Installation

■ Check Items When Turning OFF the Main Power
Check that the main power switch is OFF
2. Be sure that the control panel display and the main power lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug.

[6] *
[7]
[9] [1] [2]
[12]
[13]
[8]
[14]
[2]
[11]
[10]
[5]
[4] [3]
[1] Heater Unit 1pc

[2] Screw (Toothed Washer Sems; M4x8) 2pcs
[3] Wire Saddle (Black) 5pcs
[4] Wire Saddle (White) 3pcs (1pc is not used)
[5] Plug Cover 1pc
[6] Screw (Binding ; M4x6) 1pc *
[7] Toothed Washer 1pc *
[8] AC Cable 1pc
[9] Relay Harness Unit 1pc
[10] Power Supply Label 2pcs (1pc is not used)
[11] AC Input Connector 1pc
[12] Screw (Binding ; M4x4) 1pc *
[13] Cable Protection Bushing 1pc *
[14] AC Output Connector 1pc *
*The parts [6][7][12][13][14] are not used for the installation of the Heater Unit.
<Others>
Including guides
1275
9. Installation
3. Insert screwdrivers into the hole at rear left side of
the Compartment and then release the lever to open
CAUTION: it.
Check that the main power switch is OFF and the
power plug is disconnected from the outlet.
NOTE:
Insert screwdrivers into the hole indicated by the arrow.
■ Preparation of the Paper Deck Unit
1. Disconnect the Lattice Connector from the host

machine.
• 1 Wire Saddle
• 1 Connector
1x 1x
2. Pull the Release Lever and then with draw the Paper 4. Remove the Rear Cover.
Deck Unit until it stops. • 5 Screws
5x
1276
9. Installation
5. Cut the Face Cover from the Rear Cover. 6. Remove the Right Cover.
• 5 Screws
5x
7. Loosen the 2 screws and then remove the Upper Left

Cover.
2x
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the Face Cover properly so that no
burr is formed.
1277
9. Installation
8. Remove the Upper Cover. 10. Insert the connector of the Heater Unit to the panel
• 3 Screws mount part.
3x
9. Put the connector through the hole in the top plate

and then fix the Heater Unit.
• 2 Hooks
• 1 Screw (Toothed Washer Sems; M4x8)
Toothed Washer; M4x8
1x
1278
9. Installation
11. Install the AC Input Connector in the power cord 12. Install the Wire Saddles (black) as shown in the
mount. figure.
• 1 Screw (Toothed Washer Sems; M4x8)
CAUTION:
Fix the Grounding Cable in the correct direction.
Toothed Washer; M4x8
1x
1279
9. Installation
13. Connect the Relay Harness Unit and then fix it with 14. Install the Upper Cover.
the Wire Saddles (black) and Reuse Bands as shown • 2 Protrusions
in the figure. • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M4x8)
• 2 Connectors • 1 Screw (RS tightening; M4x8)
• 2 Reuse Bands
• 5 Wire Saddles
3x
2x 7x
15. Fasten the 2 screws to install the Upper Left Cover.
2x
1280
9. Installation
16. Install the Right Cover. 18. Close the Compartment and then connect the Paper
• 2 Hooks Deck Unit with the host machine.
• 5 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x8)
5x
17. Install the Rear Cover.

• 5 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x8)
5x
1281
9. Installation
■ Connection with the Host Machine

3. Remove the plug cover. (the removed screw is used
at late procedure.)
1. Remove the Face seals. • 1 Screw
1x
2. Attach the Wire Saddles (white).
1282
9. Installation
4. Connect the host machine and the Paper Deck Unit 5. Attach the bundled Plug Cover.
with the AC Cable and then fix it with the wire • 1 Screw (Binding; M4x4) (the screw removed at
saddles. procedure 3)
• 2 Wire saddles
CAUTION:
Make sure that the Intermediate Power Cable is fully
connected to the outlet. Also, make sure to install the
Plug Cover. If the connection is not right, an accident
causing the smoke or fire may occur.
2x
1x
1283
9. Installation
6. Connect the lattice connector of the Paper Deck to 7. Affix the Power Supply Label as shown in the figure.
the host machine and then fix the cable with the wire
saddle.
• 1 Connector
• 1 Wire saddle
1x 1x
8. Check that turn ON the environment switch.

power outlet.
1284
9. Installation
Checking after Installation

■ Disposal Parts
1. Following disposal parts are remained after the
installation procedure.
[1] Screw (Binding; M4x6 ) 1pc

[2] Screw (Binding; M4x4 ) 1pc
[3] Toothed Washer 1pc
[4] Cable Protection Bushing 1pc
[5] AC Output Connector 1pc
[6] Power Supply Label 1pc
[7] Wire Saddle (white) 1pc
[8] Plug Cover 1pc
[9] Face Cover 1pc
[10] Face Seal 2pcs
1285
9. Installation
Inner 2-Way Tray-J1 Installation Procedure
TP ; M3x6
TP ; M3x6
1x 1x 1x

the Main Power

1x
1286
9. Installation
2 3
NOTE:
When the Inner 2-way Tray is inserted into the Inner 2-way
Tray Support Member, the boss is inserted into the Inner
Rear Cover 1.
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the Inner 2-way Tray is inserted
into the Inner 2-way Tray Support Member.
4
Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.
5
Settings after Installation
1. Set the value of the following service mode (Level 1)

to "1".
• COPIER > OPTION > ACC > IN-TRAY
3. Check that the following menu has been added.

• [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] >
[Common] > [Paper Output Settings] > [Tray
Designation]
4. Press [Tray Designation].
5. According to the user's request, set the function of

delivering paper to the Tray A/B/C and the priority
order of the trays, and press [OK]. The priority order
is displayed as "1", "2", and "3".
6. Check that the behavior is in accordance with the

settings.
1287
9. Installation
Copy Tray-J2 1
1x

the Main Power

Preparation before Installation
CAUTION:
The Wire Tray attached to the Copy Tray is not
necessary for this machine.
< How to remove the Wire Tray >
1288
9. Installation
2 Installation Procedure
1289
9. Installation
3
Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.
4
Settings after installation
1. Set the value of the following service mode (Level 1)

to "1".
• COPIER > OPTION > ACC > OUT-TRAY
3. Check that the following menu has been added.

• [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] >
[Common] > [Paper Output Settings] > [Tray
Designation]
4. Press [Tray Designation].
5. According to the user's request, set the function of

delivering paper to the Tray A/B/C and the priority
order of the trays, and press [OK]. The priority order
is displayed as "1", "2", and "3".
6. Check that the behavior is in accordance with the

settings.
1290
9. Installation
Utility Tray-B1 Installation Outline Drawing
Points to Note when Installing

Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing this
equipment before operation.
Table of Options Combination
Voice Voice Serial I/F Control Copy-

Opera- Guid- Kit I/F Kit Car-
tion ance dRead-
Kit er
Utility No No Yes Yes Yes
Tray
Yes: Available No: Unavailable
CAUTION: 1
Marked portion
When tightening the screws, do not tighten them too
tightly. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage and NOTE:
deformation of screw holes. Remove the packing tapes from this equipment.

2x
Las partes se 1x
usan para instalar
el teclado
M4x8 de color negro

7x
5x
M4x14 M4x10
4x 2x
1x
M4x8 de
color negro
3x
1291
9. Installation
3 4
CAUTION:
To avoid damage, do not pull the Utility Tray too much.
1292
9. Installation
5 6
CAUTION:
Be sure to install it by using the holes with the marks
D, G, J, M and P.
AB C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Q R S
D G J M P
M4x8 de color negro
5x
1293
9. Installation
7 When Installing the USB

Keyboard
1
M4x8 de color negro
2x 2x
1294
9. Installation
< Copy Card Reader Attachment-B5>

Copy Card Reader-F1/Copy
Card Reader Attachment-B5

1x 1x
• To install this equipment, the Copy Card Reader
Attachment-B5 is required.
• After installing the Copy Card Reader, input the card
number to be used in service mode (level 1) on this
equipment: [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] >
2x
[CARD]; otherwise the card cannot be recognized even
though it is inserted.
• Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing
this equipment before operation. 1x
1x
TP;
M3x6
Utility Voice Voice Copy Serial
Tray Opera- Guid- Control I/ I/F Kit 5x
tion ance Kit F Kit
Copy Yes Yes Yes No No TP;
Card M3x12
Reader 1x
2x
Yes: Available No: Unavailable
CAUTION: 1x
Marked portion
When tightening the screws, do not tighten them too 1x
tightly. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage and
deformation of screw holes.
1x
Checking the Contents 1x 1x
W Sams;
Binding;
< Copy Card Reader-F1)> M3x14
M4x6
2x
4x
1x
TP;
M4x12
De ajuste RS 1x
M4x10 2x
1x
1x
OFF the Main Power
1295
9. Installation

machine. 3
power plug.
4
1x
Installation 1x
1
3x
1296
9. Installation
5 7
2x
2x 1x
NOTE:
6
1x
8
1x
2x
1x
NOTE:
1297
9. Installation
9 10
NOTE: CAUTION:
Use the screws removed in steps 5 and 6. • Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it
stops.
• Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
the connector may not be connected properly.
1x
3x [A]
1x
1x
1298
9. Installation
11 14
Cubierta inferior
1x
12
1x
15
13 1x
3x
1299
9. Installation
16 18
1x
1x
1x
17 19
TP
M3x12
2x
1x 1x
1300
9. Installation
20 22
TP
M3x6
4x
21
1301
9. Installation
23 24
CAUTION:
To ensure that the connector does not become
1x
disconnected, be sure to place the tie-wrap of the Card
Reader External Relay Harness on the inside of the
Connector Cover.
25
26
TP; M3x6
1x
1x
1302
9. Installation
7. Insert a card with a card number that has been

27 registered, and check that the machine operates
normally.
NOTE:
3x
Perform the following operations to change the number of
cards (departments) after it has been set. In such a case,
counter information for each department is reset.
• Service mode (Level 1): COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEAR > CARD
• Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to
enable the settings.
• After that, perform from step 3.

power outlet.
2. Turn the main power switch ON.
3. Check the model of the Card Reader in service mode

(Level 1).
• COPIER > OPTION > ACC > CR-TYPE (Default: 0
"Card Reader-F1")
4. Set the number of card (number of department ID)

that can be used with the Card Reader in service
mode.(Level 2).
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CARD-RNG
5. Use Service Mode to enter the minimum card

number to be used by a user (1 to 2001).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD
1. Starting from the entered card number, the
number of cards set in step 4 can be used.
6. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to

enable the setting values.
1303
9. Installation
IC Card Reader Box-C1 Checking the Contents

• When installing this equipment, the Card Reader (sales
company's option) is required.
• Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation
same.
CAUTION: 1x 1x
Marked portion
2x
1x
Sin indicación por LED
Check Items when Turning 1x
OFF the Main Power


machine.
1x
1x
power plug.

11x
Con indicación por LED
1x
1x 1x
<Others>
• Including guides
1304
9. Installation
Installation Procedure 4
1
2
6x
2x
3 5
2x
4x
1305
9. Installation
6 9
7
1x
1306
9. Installation
10 11
NOTE:
Secure the cables as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Make sure to avoid putting too much load on the
connection port of Wi-Fi cable.
1x
1x
4x
1307
9. Installation
12 14
NOTE:
Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to the
thickness of the Card Reader.
15
13
1308
9. Installation
16 18
17
19
outlet.
20
Turn the main power switch ON.
2x
1309
9. Installation
Serial Interface Kit-K3, Copy Checking the Contents

Control Interface Kit-A1 <Serial Interface Kit-K3>

Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing this
equipment before operation. 1x
Table of Options Combination 1x

2x
Voice Utili Copy
Voice
Guid- ty Card Serial Copy Con-
Oper-
ance Tra Read- I/F Kit trol I/F Kit
ation 1x 2x
Kit y er
Serial
Yes Yes Yes No - No
I/F Kit
Copy
Control Yes Yes Yes No No -
I/F Kit
1x
Yes: Available No: Unavailable 1x

1x
CAUTION:
Marked portion
TP; M3 x 6 1x
tightly. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage and 3x
<Copy Control Interface Kit-A1>
1x
1x
2x 2x
2x
2x
1x
1310
9. Installation
Check Items When Turning 2

OFF the Main Power

machine.

power plug.
■ Preparation
1
3x
1311
9. Installation
■ Installing the Serial Interface Kit

4
1
1x
1x
1x
1x
5
2x
NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 3.
1x
1312
9. Installation
3 2
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in step 1.
2x
3x 1x
1x
■ Installing the Copy Control interface

Kit
1313
9. Installation
■ Subsequent Work
2
1
CAUTION:
• Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it
stops.
[A]
3x
1x
1x
5
outlet.
6
Turn the main power switch ON.
1314
9. Installation
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 Check Items When Turning

OFF the Main Power
Points to Note at Installation Check that the main power switch is OFF.
• To enable the function of "Image Data Analyzer Board", 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host
it is necessary to install the license which comes with the machine.
product.
• Be sure to ask users to install the license after the
installation.
power plug.
CAUTION:
An error occurs when the license is installed before Installation Outline Drawing
installing the Image Analysis Board, so make sure to
install the license after installing the Image Analysis
Board
CAUTION:
Marked portion
1
3x
3x
TP; M3x6
2x
1x
De seguridad; M3x4
1x
1x
TP; M3x6
1x
2x
1315
9. Installation
2 4
1x
1x
5
1x
NOTE:
1316
9. Installation
6 8
CAUTION:
stops.
3x
[A]
7
NOTE:
TP ; M3x6
1x
3x
1x
1x
1317
9. Installation

9 version appears, press [Update] to automatically
update the version of the host machine.
NOTE:
is started. In the service mode shown below, it is possible
to set not to display the message prompting the user to
update the version.
• Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-
SW > VER-CHNG
4. Ask users to install license.
5. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
6. Press the counter check key on the control panel.
10 7. Press "Check Device Configuration" key.
8. Check that "Image Data Analyzer Board" is

displayed in option field.
11
3x

power outlet.
1318
9. Installation
Voice Operation Kit-D1 Checking the Contents
Points to Note at Installation TP

M3x6
1x
Refer to "Combination of options" when installing this 1x
equipment before operation. 1x
Copy Copy Serial I/F Voice Utility 2x 1x

Card Control Kit Guid- Tray
De seguridad De seguridad
Reader I/F Kit ance Kit M3x14 M4x14
Voice Yes Yes Yes No No 1x
2x 1x
Opera-
tion
Yes: Available / No: Unavailable M4x20 M4x14
1x 2x 1x
CAUTION:
Marked portion TP
M3x6
1x 1x 1x 1x 1x
7x
<Others>
Including guides
Check Items When Turning

OFF the Main Power

machine.

power plug.
1319
9. Installation
Installation Outline Drawing 3
4
1 1x
3x
1320
9. Installation
5 7
1x
1x
6
2x
2x
1321
9. Installation
8 9
4x 2x
NOTE:
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1
flatly. Reason: Due to the protruded plate, the PCB may NOTE:
be deformed if work is performed while it is placed at The removed screws will be used at next step.
an angle.
10
CAUTION:
Check that the connector is connected properly.
NOTE:
Use the screw removed at previous step.
TP㸹M3x6
1x
3x
1322
9. Installation
11 14
CAUTION:
4x • Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it
stops.
[A]
12
1x
13 1x
2x
2x
1323
9. Installation
15 18
16
19
2x
17
NOTE:
3x
20
M3x14 M4x14
2x
M3x14
M4x14
1324
9. Installation
21 24
NOTE:
2x
15.0 mm
15.0 mm
22
25
4x
23
2x
1325
9. Installation
3. [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >

26 [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and
make sure that [Use Voice Navigation] is [ON].

2x [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Voice
Navigation at Startup] and make sure that is [Select
Mode at Startup] set.

[Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and
make sure that [Tune Microphone] is displayed.
6. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.
Operation Check
■ When Starting to Use
NOTE:
• Secure the Card Reader External Relay Harness in
place together with the DVI Cable using the Wire 1. Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button
Saddle [A] included in the package of Voice for more than 3 seconds.
Operation Kit.
• Even when used in combination with the Card 2. In "Select the Voice Navigation type." on the Control
Reader, the routing of the cable is same. Panel screen, select "Manual + Vocal Mode", "Vocal
Mode" or "Manual Mode", and press OK.
3. Once the indication on the screen is framed in red,

the "Voice Operation Kit" becomes enabled.
NOTE:
When "Manual Mode" is selected in "Select the Voice
3x
Navigation type.", nothing happens by pressing the Voice
Recognition button.
■ When Stopping to Use

[A]
1. Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button

for more than 3 seconds.
NOTE:
When changing the settings upon user’s request, it is
instructions from the user administrator.

power outlet.
1326
9. Installation
Pre-checks for HDD-related Installation Outline Drawing

Option
CAUTION:
• For TYPE2 to TYPE7, be sure to perform the
procedure of each TYPE after performing[xref to
“Removing the HDD (Preparation)” on page
1328
• When using the mirroring function, be sure to
install 2 HDDs of the same capacity.
• The HDD needs to be initialized after replacing the
large capacity HDD.
• When replacing a HDD that contains user
information with a high-capacity HDD (which is not
an initial installation), backup and export of HDD
data are necessary. For details, refer to in the Check Item When Turning OFF
Service Manual.
the Main Power
When installing the HDD-related options (the following 4 Check that the main power is OFF.
products), be sure to refer to the pages described in the
following table:
• 2.5inch/250GB HDD-N1 2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the
• 2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1 lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
• Removable HDD Kit-AL1 disconnect the power plug.
• HDD Mirroring Kit-J1
Title Combination of Product

TYPE- “ [TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB)” on page 1330
1
TYPE- “Removing the HDD (Preparation)” on page 1328+
2 “ [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit” on page 1333
TYPE- “Removing the HDD (Preparation)” on page 1328 +
3 “[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit” on
page 1339
4 “[TYPE-4] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) +
HDD Mirroring Kit” on page 1346
5 “[TYPE-5] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + Re-
movable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit” on page 1352
6 “[TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit”
on page 1361
7 “[TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit
+ HDD Mirroring Kit” on page 1368
1327
9. Installation
Removing the HDD 3

(Preparation)
CAUTION:
[TYPE-1] For Option HDD (1TB), skip this procedure.
For other TYPEs, be sure to proceed to each
installation procedure after performing this procedure.
Removed screws will be reused in the installation
procedure of each TYPE.
1
3x 4
NOTE:
The removed screw will not be used to install the
Removable HDD Kit.
1x
2
NOTE:
The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time.
5
NOTE:
When replacing the HDD with an Option HDD (1TB), the
removed HDD will not be used.
1328
9. Installation
6 8
NOTE:
Do not tighten the screw here. 2x
2x
7
NOTE:
Hold the handle to remove the Main Controller PCB 1.
1x
1x
1329
9. Installation
[TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB) Installation Procedure

1x
1x 1x
1x 1x
NOTE:
Sems ; M3x4 The removed screw will be used in step 6.
P Tightening ; M3x8
4x 2x
2
the Main Power

1330
9. Installation
3 5
P Tightening ; M3x8
2x
6
NOTE:
1x
Sems ; M3x4
4x
■ HDD Initialization Procedure

1. Requirements
1. PC
Service Support Tool in the version that supports
this host machine must be installed.
2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used)
1331
9. Installation
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software <In case of USB flash drive>
of Host machine 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC.
1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in
2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an the target selection screen.
Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used) 3. Select the drive, the model series, and the version
3. Turn on the PC. to be written to the USB flash drive, and click
[Confirm].
3. Registering the system software 4. Click [Start], and after the version has been written
1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove
the SST. the USB flash drive.
2. Start the SST. 5. Terminate the SST.
3. Click 'Register Firmware'. 6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine,
4. Select the drive where the system software has and start the host machine with download mode in
been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button. safe mode.
5. Click the [REGISTER] button. 7. When the USB menu is displayed, press keys on
6. Click [OK]. the Control Panel in the order shown below.
• [4]: Clear/Format
4. Initializing HDD
• [1]: Disk Format
<In case of SST> • [0]: OK
1. Start the host machine with download mode in safe • Press any keys.
mode. • [C]: Return to menu
2. Start the SST. • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence
3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and click • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is
[Start]. turned OFF automatically.)
4. Click [Format HDD]. 8. Remove the USB flash drive.
5. Select [All], and click [Start]. 9. Turn ON the main power switch.
6. Click [Execute Format].
7. The Format is executed.
8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown].
■ Executing Auto Gradation
9. Click [OK] Adjustment
10. The power of the host machine is turned OFF.
When the high-capacity HDD is installed, the machine
11. Terminate the SST.
initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation
12. Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the
correction.
machine, and connect the user's network cable to
Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation
the machine.
adjustment after installing the high-capacity HDD to enable
proper images to be output.
■ Execution of the Minimum

Installation Work
Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in
accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized
when the high-capacity HDD is installed.
1332
9. Installation
[TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit ■ Installing the Removable HDD Kit
1
Binding ; M3x8
1x 1x 2x
2x
1x 1x 1x
Binding ; M3x8
2x
1x
1x 1x NOTE:

the Main Power

CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “Removing the HDD (Preparation)”
on page 1328 before performing the following work.
1333
9. Installation
2 3
NOTE: NOTE:
Disconnect the HDD Cable from the HDD Connector • Connect the assembled iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A:
Support Plate, and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1 (Red) HDD-Sig1/Pow1).
(A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) (The removed cable will not be • Use the screws removed in step 1.
used).
2x
2x
4
2x
1334
9. Installation
5 6
CAUTION:
stops.
2x
[A]
1x
1x
1335
9. Installation
■ Assembling and Installing the HDD CAUTION:

• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block
1 when tightening the screws.
• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the
screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may
NOTE: not be connected properly, resulting in poor
Use the HDD removed from the host machine. contact.
CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD
Connector and the Conversion Connector.
1x
3
NOTE:
Write down the serial number of the host machine to the
label for recording the number, and affix it to the area
indicated in the figure.
P Tightening ; M3x8
2x
HDD No.
Serial No. XXXXXXXX
1336
9. Installation
4 8
NOTE:
10
3x
7
Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD
to discourage theft.
1337
9. Installation
11
NOTE:
Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language
by aligning it with the upper left corner.
1338
9. Installation

[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) +
Removable HDD Kit lamp of the main power are turned off, and then

< Option HDD (1TB) >
CAUTION:
1x 1x
■ Installing the Removable HDD Kit
1
1x 1x
Sems ; M3x4 P Tightening ; M3x8

4x 2x
< Removable HDD Kit >

2x
Binding ; M3x8
1x 1x 2x
1x 1x 1x NOTE:
Binding ; M3x8
2x
1x
1x 1x

the Main Power
1339
9. Installation
2 3
NOTE: NOTE:
Disconnect the HDD Cable from the HDD Connector • Connect the assembled iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A:
Support Plate, and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1 (Red) HDD-Sig1/Pow1).
(A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) (The removed cable will not be • Use the screws removed in step 1.
used).
2x
2x
4
2x
1340
9. Installation
5 6
CAUTION:
stops.
2x
[A]
1x
1x
1341
9. Installation
■ Assembling and Installing the

Option HDD
3
1 CAUTION:
NOTE:
Use the 2 screws (P Tightening; M3x8) included with the
Option HDD.
1x
P Tightening ; M3x8
2x
4
NOTE:
Removable HDD Kit.
P Tightening ; M3x8
2 2x
Sems ; M3x4
4x
1342
9. Installation
CAUTION:
6
when tightening the screws.
not be connected properly, resulting in poor
contact.
7
5
NOTE:
HDD No.
Serial No. XXXXXXXX
9
1343
9. Installation
10 13
NOTE: NOTE:
The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time. Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language
11
12
■ HDD Initialization Procedure
3x 1. Requirements
1. PC
Service Support Tool in the version that supports
this host machine must be installed.
2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used)
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software

of Host machine
1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.
2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an
Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used)
3. Turn on the PC.
1344
9. Installation
3. Registering the system software ■ Executing Auto Gradation

1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using
the SST.
Adjustment
2. Start the SST. When the high-capacity HDD is installed, the machine
3. Click 'Register Firmware'. initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation
4. Select the drive where the system software has correction.
been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button. Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation
5. Click the [REGISTER] button. adjustment after installing the high-capacity HDD to enable
6. Click [OK]. proper images to be output.
4. Initializing HDD
<In case of SST> ■ Execution of the Minimum
1. Start the host machine with download mode in safe Installation Work
mode.
2. Start the SST. Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in
3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and click accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized
[Start]. when the high-capacity HDD is installed.
4. Click [Format HDD].
5. Select [All], and click [Start].
7. The Format is executed.
8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown].
9. Click [OK]
the machine.
<In case of USB flash drive>

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC.
2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in
the target selection screen.
3. Select the drive, the model series, and the version
to be written to the USB flash drive, and click
[Confirm].
4. Click [Start], and after the version has been written
to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove
the USB flash drive.
6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine,
and start the host machine with download mode in
safe mode.
7. When the USB menu is displayed, press keys on
the Control Panel in the order shown below.
• [4]: Clear/Format
• [1]: Disk Format
• [0]: OK
• Press any keys.
• [C]: Return to menu
• [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence
• [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is
turned OFF automatically.)
8. Remove the USB flash drive.
1345
9. Installation
[TYPE-4] Standard HDD + Installation Procedure

Option HDD (250GB) + HDD
CAUTION:
Mirroring Kit Be sure to perform “Removing the HDD (Preparation)”

■ Installing the HDD Mirroring Kit
< Option HDD (250GB) >
1
1x
1x 1x
1x 1x

4x 2x
< HDD Mirroring Kit > 2
1x 1x
TP ; M3x6 TP ; M3x8 Black

2x 2x

the Main Power

1346
9. Installation
3 5
TP ; M3x8 Black
2x
TP ; M3x6
2x
1347
9. Installation
6 7
CAUTION: CAUTION:
• Be sure to connect the communication cable to the • Be sure to insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it
correct port. stops.
• Be sure to connect the HDD Cable 1 (Red) to [A] • Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
on the Controller PCB. the connector may not be connected properly.
• Be sure to connect the HDD Cable 2 (Blue) to [B]
on the Controller PCB.
[A]
2x
2x
[A]
[A]
[B]
[B]
1x
1x
1348
9. Installation

8 Option HDD
P Tightening ; M3x8
9
2x
NOTE:
Return the HDD removed from the host machine to the
Slot 1 (Left).
Sems ; M3x4
4x
1349
9. Installation
3 5
NOTE: NOTE:
Install the Option HDD to the Slot 2 (Right). The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time.
4
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in step 4 of "Removing the HDD
7
(Preparation)".
3x
1x
1350
9. Installation
■ Setting the Mirroring
1. Make a setting of mirroring.

• Specify "1" under "Service Mode (Level 1) >
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID".
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to

enable the setting value.
3. Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.
4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks.
NOTE:
Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after
turning OFF and then ON the power.
• HDD 1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
• HDD 2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.
CAUTION:
Rebuild process starts after setting "1" for W/RAID.
If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial
installation the hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call
service rep.), reexecute the process with the following
procedure.
1. Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2.
2. Select Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER >
OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID, and set "0".
3. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main
Power Supply Switch of the host machine.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild
process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed
during operation is not included in the consideration.
1351
9. Installation
< HDD Mirroring Kit >

[TYPE-5] Standard HDD +
Option HDD (250GB) +
Removable HDD Kit + HDD
Mirroring Kit
1x
Checking the Contents TP ; M3x6 TP ; M3x8 Black

2x 2x
< Option HDD (250GB) >
1x
1x 1x

the Main Power
1x 1x

Sems ; M3x4 lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
P Tightening ; M3x8
4x 2x disconnect the power plug.
< Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure
CAUTION:
2x 2x
1
1x 1x 1x
1x
Binding ; M3x8
2x
1x
1352
9. Installation
2 4
NOTE:
Disconnect the HDD Cable from the HDD Connector
Support Plate, and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1 (Red)
(A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) (The removed cable will not be
used).
2x
2x
2x
NOTE:
1353
9. Installation
5 7
NOTE: NOTE:
• Connect the assembled iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: Connect the assembled iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-
HDD-Sig1/Pow1). Sig2/Pow2).
• Use the screws removed in step 3.
TP ; M3x6
2x
2x
6
NOTE:
Use the iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2)
8
included with the Removable HDD Kit.
TP ; M3x8 Black
2x
1354
9. Installation
9 10
CAUTION: CAUTION:
• Be sure to connect the iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: • Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
HDD-Sig1/Pow1) to [A] on the Controller PCB. the connector may not be connected properly.
• Be sure to connect the iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A:
HDD-Sig2/Pow2) to [B] on the Controller PCB.
[A]
2x
4x
[A]
[A]
[B]
[B]
1x
1x
1355
9. Installation
■ Assembling and Installing the HDD CAUTION:

Removed from the Host Machine • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block
(First HDD) • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the
1 not be connected properly, resulting in poor
contact.
NOTE:
Use the HDD removed from the host machine.
CAUTION:
3
1x
NOTE:
2
NOTE:
Removable HDD Kit.
P Tightening ; M3x8 HDD No.
2x
Serial No. XXXXXXXX
1356
9. Installation

4 Option HDD
1
NOTE:
Option HDD.
5
P Tightening ; M3x8
NOTE:
Return the HDD removed from the host machine to the
Slot 1 (Left).
2x
Sems ; M3x4
4x
1357
9. Installation
3 CAUTION:
CAUTION:
not be connected properly, resulting in poor
contact.
1x
5
4 NOTE:
NOTE: indicated in the figure.
Removable HDD Kit.
P Tightening ; M3x8
2x
HDD No.
Serial No. XXXXXXXX
1358
9. Installation
6 9
NOTE: NOTE:
Install the Option HDD to the Slot 2 (Right). The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time.
10
1 2
7
1x
11
3x
8
1359
9. Installation
4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks.
12
NOTE:
Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after
NOTE: turning OFF and then ON the power.
Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language • HDD 1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
by aligning it with the upper left corner. • HDD 2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.
CAUTION:
procedure.
■ Setting the Mirroring
1. Make a setting of mirroring.

• Specify "1" under "Service Mode (Level 1) >
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID".
2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to

enable the setting value.
1360
9. Installation
[TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) Installation Procedure

+ HDD Mirroring Kit
CAUTION:
Checking the Contents on page 1328 before performing the following work.
< Option HDD (1TB) >

■ Installing the HDD Mirroring Kit
1
1x
1x 1x
1x 1x

4x 2x
1x 1x
TP ; M3x6 TP ; M3x8 Black

2x 2x

the Main Power

1361
9. Installation
3 5
TP ; M3x8 Black
2x
TP ; M3x6
2x
1362
9. Installation
6 7
CAUTION: CAUTION:
• Be sure to connect the HDD Cable 1 (Red) to [A] • Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
on the Controller PCB. the connector may not be connected properly.
• Be sure to connect the HDD Cable 2 (Blue) to [B]
on the Controller PCB.
[A]
2x
2x
[A]
[A]
[B]
[B]
1x
1x
1363
9. Installation
8 2
Sems ; M3x4
4x

Option HDD
NOTE:
Install the 2 Option HDDs according to the steps 1 to 2.
3
1 NOTE:
Install the first Option HDD to the Slot 1 (Left).
P Tightening ; M3x8
2x
1364
9. Installation
4 6
NOTE: NOTE:
Install the second Option HDD to the Slot 2 (Right). The Right Upper Cover will open at the same time.
5
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in step 4 of "Removing the HDD
8
(Preparation)".
3x
1x
1365
9. Installation
■ HDD Initialization Procedure <In case of USB flash drive>

1. Requirements 2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in
1. PC the target selection screen.
Service Support Tool in the version that supports 3. Select the drive, the model series, and the version
this host machine must be installed. to be written to the USB flash drive, and click
2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used) [Confirm].
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove
of Host machine the USB flash drive.
1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 5. Terminate the SST.
2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an 6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine,
Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used) and start the host machine with download mode in
3. Turn on the PC. safe mode.
3. Registering the system software the Control Panel in the order shown below.
1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using • [4]: Clear/Format
the SST. • [1]: Disk Format
2. Start the SST. • [0]: OK
3. Click 'Register Firmware'. • Press any keys.
4. Select the drive where the system software has • [C]: Return to menu
been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button. • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence
5. Click the [REGISTER] button. • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is
6. Click [OK]. turned OFF automatically.)
4. Initializing HDD
<In case of SST>
1. Start the host machine with download mode in safe
mode. ■ Setting the Mirroring
2. Start the SST.
3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and click
[Start]. 1. Make a setting of mirroring.
4. Click [Format HDD]. • Specify "1" under "Service Mode (Level 1) >
5. Select [All], and click [Start]. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID".
7. The Format is executed. 2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to
8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown]. enable the setting value.
9. Click [OK]
11. Terminate the SST. 4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks.
NOTE:
the machine. Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after
1366
9. Installation
CAUTION:
procedure.

Adjustment
correction.

Installation Work
1367
9. Installation

[TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB)
+ Removable HDD Kit + HDD
Mirroring Kit
Checking the Contents 1x
< Option HDD (1TB) > TP ; M3x6 TP ; M3x8 Black

2x 2x
1x
1x 1x

the Main Power
1x 1x

4x 2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the
2x
< Removable HDD Kit >
CAUTION:
2x Be sure to perform “Removing the HDD (Preparation)”
2x
1x 1x 1x 1
1x
Binding ; M3x8
2x
1x
1368
9. Installation
2 4
NOTE:
Disconnect the HDD Cable from the HDD Connector
Support Plate, and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1 (Red)
(A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) (The removed cable will not be
used).
2x
2x
2x
NOTE:
1369
9. Installation
5 7
NOTE: NOTE:
• Connect the assembled iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: Connect the assembled iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-
HDD-Sig1/Pow1). Sig2/Pow2).
• Use the screws removed in step 3.
TP ; M3x6
2x
2x
6
NOTE:
Use the iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2)
8
included with the Removable HDD Kit.
TP ; M3x8 Black
2x
1370
9. Installation
9 10
CAUTION: CAUTION:
• Be sure to connect the iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: • Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise
HDD-Sig1/Pow1) to [A] on the Controller PCB. the connector may not be connected properly.
• Be sure to connect the iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A:
HDD-Sig2/Pow2) to [B] on the Controller PCB.
[A]
2x
4x
[A]
[A]
[B]
[B]
1x
1x

Option HDD
NOTE:
Install the 2 Option HDDs according to the steps 1 to 4.
1371
9. Installation
1 3
CAUTION:
P Tightening ; M3x8
1x
2x
4
NOTE:
Removable HDD Kit.
2
P Tightening ; M3x8
Sems ; M3x4
2x
4x
1372
9. Installation
CAUTION:
5
NOTE:
screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may Write down the serial number of the host machine to the
not be connected properly, resulting in poor label for recording the number, and affix it to the area
contact. indicated in the figure.
NOTE:
• Affix the HDD No.1 to the HDD to be installed to the
Slot 1 (Left).
• Affix the HDD No.2 to the HDD to be installed to the
Slot 2 ( Right).
< When affixing HDD No.1 >
HDD No.
Serial No. XXXXXXXX
< When affixing HDD No.2 >
HDD No.
1373 Serial No. XXXXXXXX

9. Installation
6 7
NOTE:
• Be sure to install the HDD No.1 to the Slot 1 (Left).
• Be sure to install the HDD No.2 to the Slot 2 (Right).
< HDD No.1 >
< HDD No.2 >
1 2
1374
9. Installation
8 12
1x 3x
9 13
NOTE:
10 Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language
NOTE:
11
1375
9. Installation
■ HDD Initialization Procedure <In case of USB flash drive>

1. Requirements 2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in
1. PC the target selection screen.
Service Support Tool in the version that supports 3. Select the drive, the model series, and the version
this host machine must be installed. to be written to the USB flash drive, and click
2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used) [Confirm].
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove
of Host machine the USB flash drive.
1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 5. Terminate the SST.
2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an 6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine,
Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used) and start the host machine with download mode in
3. Turn on the PC. safe mode.
3. Registering the system software the Control Panel in the order shown below.
1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using • [4]: Clear/Format
the SST. • [1]: Disk Format
2. Start the SST. • [0]: OK
3. Click 'Register Firmware'. • Press any keys.
4. Select the drive where the system software has • [C]: Return to menu
been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button. • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence
5. Click the [REGISTER] button. • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is
6. Click [OK]. turned OFF automatically.)
4. Initializing HDD
<In case of SST>
1. Start the host machine with download mode in safe
mode. ■ Setting the Mirroring
2. Start the SST.
3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and click
[Start]. 1. Make a setting of mirroring.
4. Click [Format HDD]. • Specify "1" under "Service Mode (Level 1) >
5. Select [All], and click [Start]. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID".
7. The Format is executed. 2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to
8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown]. enable the setting value.
9. Click [OK]
11. Terminate the SST. 4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks.
NOTE:
the machine. Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after
1376
9. Installation
CAUTION:
procedure.

Adjustment
correction.

Installation Work
1377
9. Installation
Connection Kit-A1 for Installation Procedure

Bluetooth LE
1
1x
for CN,KR
1x 1x
for US
1x for TW
2
1x
2x
the Main Power

3
1x
1x
NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in a later step.
1378
9. Installation
4 6
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in the previous step.
1x
1x 7
B
A A’
B’
2x
A=A’
B=B’
1379
9. Installation
8 Setting after Installation
NOTE: 1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

In countries other than the following countries, it is not outlet.
necessary to affix the Approval Label.
< For US > 3. Enter service mode (Level 1), and set the value to
Affix it over the number on the Wireless LAN Approval "1".
Label. • COPIER >FUNCTION > INSTALL > BLE-USE
NOTE:
US

[Network] > [Confirm Network Connection Setting
Changes], and set the item [ON].

[Network] > [Bluetooth Settings] > [Use Bluetooth] >
[ON].
&RQWDLQV)&&,'$='[[[[[[[
6. The message "Perform Apply Setting Changes from

,&'[[[[[[[
Settings/Registration" appears at the bottom of the

&RQWDLQV)&&,'$=')00
,&')00
Touch Panel Display.
7. Press [Settings/Registration] > [Apply Setting

Changes] > [Yes].
< For CN, KR, and TW >

Affix it over the Wireless LAN Approval Label.
CN,KR TW
1380
9. Installation
Voice Guidance Kit-G1 Checking the Contents

Refer to "Combination of options" when installing this
equipment before operation. 1x 1x
TP; De
Table of Options Combination M3x6 seguridad;
M3x16
Copy Copy Serial Voice Utility 1x 3x 1x
Card Control I/F Kit Opera- Tray De De
Reader I/F Kit tion seguridad; seguridad;
M4x16 M4x6
Voice Yes Yes Yes No No 1x 1x 1x 2x
Guid-
ance Kit
Yes: Available / No: Unavailable 3x
De TP;
seguridad; M3x6
CAUTION:
1x M4x16 1x 1x
Marked portion
When tightening the screws, do not tighten them too De
seguridad;
M4x20
deformation of screw holes. 2x 1x 1x
4x
< Others >

Including guides

OFF the Main Power

machine.

power plug.
1381
9. Installation
Installation Outline Drawing 3
4
1 1x
3x
1382
9. Installation
5 7
1x
1x
6
2x
2x
1383
9. Installation
8 9
4x 2x
NOTE:
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1
flatly. Reason: Due to the protruded plate, the PCB may
be deformed if work is performed while it is placed at
10
an angle.
CAUTION:
Check that the connector is connected properly.
TP㸹M3x6
1x
3x
11
4x
1384
9. Installation
12 14
CAUTION:
stops.
[A]
13
2x
2x
1x
1x
1385
9. Installation
15 18
16
19
De De
seguridad; seguridad;
M3x16 M4x16
2x
17
M3x16
M4x16
3x
20
De seguridad
M4x6
1x
1386
9. Installation
21 23
NOTE:
Do not affix the Cord Guide on the Face Seal [A].
[A]
CAUTION:
Be sure to attach the Ring Cores within 50 mm from the
end of the Speaker Cable.
NOTE:
When using in combination with the Copy Card Reader
Affix the 2 Cord Guides [A] as shown in the figure, and use
the Wire Saddle [B] included in the Card Reader
Attachment.
50mm
22
[A]
3x
[B]
1387
9. Installation

24 [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Use
Voice Navigation], and check that the setting is [ON].

2x [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Voice
Guide from Speakers], and check that the setting is
ON.
Operation Check
■ When Starting to Use
1. Press reset key 3secs or more.
2. Press [Main Menu] in Control Panel.
3. If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame,

"Voice Guidance Kit" is available.
25
■ When Stopping to Use
1. Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button

for more than 3 seconds.
3x
CAUTION:
When changing the settings upon user's request, it is
required to log in as a system manager in accordance
with instructions from the user administrator.

power outlet.
2. Turn the main power switch ON.
1388
9. Installation
NFC Kit-C1 Installation Outline Drawing

• Do not touch the sensor and PCB components of the
Control Panel.
• The parts removed in "Removing the Control Panel" will
be used in "Installing the Control Panel".
• Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation
same.
Installation procedure
1x 1x
■ Remove the Control Panel
1x
1x 1
1x TP; M3x4
1x
<Others>
• Guides are included

the Main Power

2
2x
1389
9. Installation
3 5
CAUTION:
2x Be sure to place 5 or more sheets of paper to prevent
damage.
After completing the work, remove papers.
4 4x
3x
1390
9. Installation
7 9
10
2x
1x
11
6x
1391
9. Installation
12 2
2x
2x
13
TP; M3x4
1x
■ Installing the NFC Kit
1392
9. Installation
4 2
2x
1x
3
■ Installing the Control Panel
6x
1
1393
9. Installation
4 6
2x
7
1x
1394
9. Installation
8 9
CAUTION:
Do not install the screws to the locations with X marks.
Tighten screws during the installation of cover in step
11.
3x
10
4x
1395
9. Installation
■ Affixing the NFC Target

11
1
2x
12
2x
13
Setting after Installation

outlet.
1396
9. Installation

version appears, press [Update] to automatically
update the version of this equipment.
NOTE:
is started.
In the service mode (Level 2) shown below, it is possible
to set not to display the message.
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG
4. After the version update, enter service mode (Level

1) and set the value to "1".
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > NFC-USE
NOTE:
5. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management

Settings] > [Device Management] > [Use NFC Card
Emulation], and set the item to "ON".
6. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
7. When a message prompting the version update is

displayed, press [Update] and automatically update
the version of this equipment.
CAUTION:
It may take time to display the update screen. (Approx.
1 to 2 min.)
During this time, do not operate the screen.
8. Check the end of the following service mode (Level

1).
• COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > PANEL
If the end is an even number (e.g. 01.26): NFC is
not installed.
If the end is an odd number (e.g. 01.27): NFC is
installed.
1397
APPENDICES
Service Tool.................................... 1399
General Circuit Diagram..................1400
Software Counter Specifications..... 1403
Removal.......................................... 1409
Target PCBs of Automatic Update.. 1412
List of Service Modes That Can Be
Restored...................................... 1413
Service Tool
Service Tool
List of Special Tools

When servicing this machine, the special tools shown below are required besides the standard tools.
Tool name Tool No. Rank Configuration Use/Remarks

Digital multi-meter FY9-2002 A Used for supplementary electricity check of the electricity
check
CA-1 Test Sheet FY9-9030 A For image adjustment/check
Reference: Rank
A: Tool each service engineers should have 1 pc per engineer
B: Tool a group of approx. 5 engineers should have 1 pc per group
Solvent/Oil List
Name Purpose of use Parts number Remarks
Alcohol Cleaning - • Never put it close to fire
• Local procurement
MOLYKOTE EM-50L Apply to gear HY9-0007 • Dow Corning-made
Super Lube Grease Worm Gear FY9-6005 • Chemical synthesis oil
• 85 g
Lubricant (FLOIL G-337) Scanner Rail FY9-6030 • Synthetic hydrocarbon oil
• 50 cc
Conductive grease Applied to the Drum Heater sliding area and the ends of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller, Electrical continuity FY9-6008 • Barrierta IMI (10 g)
of the high voltage contact point
Applied to the ends of the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller FY9-6006 • Super Lube Grease (7 g)
Tospearl 240 Lubrication of the ITB Cleaning Blade FY9-6007
SE1107 Applied to the gear of the Fixing Unit or the Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft FY9-6036 • 10 g
MOLYKOTE HP-300 Applied to the Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft CK-8012
HANARL UD-321 FY9-6037 • Quick-drying grease (Since it is quick-drying and transparent, caution is required to identify
the area where it is applied.)
1399
General Circuit Diagram
General Circuit Diagram
Main Unit General Circuit Diagram

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
UN24
UN2 Y Pre-Exposure
Feed/Drum Driver PCB Led PCB (Rear)
J213 J221 J201 J223 J224 J217 J215 1 2 3
21
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 23 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 27
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 27
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
23 1 3
1 11
J6147
CST2_SIZE2_SW0
GND
CST2_SIZE2_SW1
CST2_SIZE2_SW2
GND
+24IL
EX_TNR_FG
EX_TNR_PWM*
ALG_EX_TNR_NEARFULL_DET
GND
EX_TNR_LED_PWM
EX_TNR_BOX_DET
+3.3V
PCRG_FAN_F_LOCK
GND
PCRG_FAN_F_OUT
+5V
LS_SHUTM_HP_SNS
GND
LS_SHUTM_OUT_B*
LS_SHUTM_OUT_B
LS_SHUTM_OUT_A*
LS_SHUTM_OUT_A
PCRG_FAN_R_LOCK
GND
PCRG_FAN_R_OUT
CST12_LIFTM_OUT+
CST12_LIFTM_OUT-
CST2_SIZE1_SW0
GND
CST2_SIZE1_SW1
CST2_SIZE1_SW2
CST1_SIZE1_SW0
GND
CST1_SIZE1_SW1
CST1_SIZE1_SW2
+5V
CST2_PAPER_LEVEL_1_SNS
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
FAN_SHUTM_OUT_B*
FAN_SHUTM_OUT_B
FAN_SHUTM_OUT_A*
FAN_SHUTM_OUT_A
2ND_TR_EX_FAN_LOCK
GND
2ND_TR_EX_FAN_OUT
COOL_R_FAN_LOCK
GND
COOL_R_FAN_OUT
COOL_F_FAN_LOCK
GND
COOL_F_FAN_OUT
GND (0.68ohm pull-down)
EX_PAPER_FAN1_OUT
+5V
EX_TRAY1_FULL*
GND
+5V
EX1_SNS
GND
EX12M_OUT_A
EX12M_OUT_A*
EX12M_OUT_B*
EX12M_OUT_B
TURNM_OUT_A
TURNM_OUT_A*
TURNM_OUT_B*
TURNM_OUT_B
EX3M_OUT_A
EX3M_OUT_A*
EX3M_OUT_B*
EX3M_OUT_B
+5V
+24IL (+12IL)
+24IL (+12IL)
GND
GND
FUSERM_BRAKE*
FUSERM_ON
FUSERM_LOCK*
FUSERM_GAIN*
FUSERM_CLK*
FUSERM_DIR*
PEDE_JACKAL_CLK
PEDE_JACKAL_M2S
PEDE_JACKAL_S2M
GND
PEDE_RESET*
PEDE_DETCT*
CST34_PICKUPM_CLK
CST4_PULLM_CLK
CST3_PULLM_CLK
CST34_LIFTM_ON_PWM
REGIM_OUT_B*
REGIM_OUT_B
REGIM_OUT_A*
REGIM_OUT_A
DUPM_OUT_B*
DUPM_OUT_B
DUPM_OUT_A*
DUPM_OUT_A
+5V
R_DOOR_OPEN_SNS*
GND
FUSER_EX_B_FAN_LOCK
GND
FUSER_EX_B_FAN_OUT
FUSER_EX_A_FAN_LOCK
GND
FUSER_EX_A_FAN_OUT
PRE_REGIM_OUT_B*
PRE_REGIM_OUT_B
PRE_REGIM_OUT_A*
PRE_REGIM_OUT_A
MULTIM_OUT_B*
MULTIM_OUT_B
MULTIM_OUT_A*
MULTIM_OUT_A
3 UN59 UN58 UN57 UN56
J6414 3
J6461D PS51 PS52 PS53 Drum Unit Drum Unit Drum Unit Drum Unit UN26
3
J6461DH Cassette Cassette Cassette Memory (Bk) Memory (C) Memory (M) Memory (Y) M Pre-Exposure
2
1 Paper 1 Paper 2 Paper 11 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 J2001H Led PCB (Rear)
1
1 23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Level Sensor A Level Sensor B
1 1
Level Sensor A J2001 UN73 UN71 UN70 1 3
1 2 3
J6071D
23 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 To Option Cassette Drum Unit UN72 Drum Unit Drum Unit J6148
J6091 J6461L J6084 New/Old Sensor (Bk) Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (M) New/Old Sensor (Y)
3 1
3 2 1
J6059D 3
3 2 1
1 J5031D
J6071DH TP1
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 New/Old Sensor (C) 1 3 1 3
J6059DH J6068D
1 1 2 3 3
3
3 2 1
1 3
3 2 1
1 H1 J6215D J5031DH 11 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1
J6804 J6801
Thermoswitch J6802
1 2 3
1 1 2 3 3 1 3 Fixing Heater 1 3
J6068DH
1 2 3
J6135 J6215DH 11 1
F F
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 2 3 4 4 J6130 13 1 J6803
3
3 2 1
1 2 TP 1
J5004 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 3 1 1 2 3 4 4 J6124D J6066D M MT40
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3
1 3 13
4 3 2 1
4 1 J6071L
3 3 FT7 FT8 1 2 3
2 1 J6124DH
PS44 J6066DH
3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J6059L 3 1 4 1 J5031L
1 2 3 1 1 2 3 3 M21
3
J6068L First Delivery J6215L 1 1 2 3 3 1 1 2 3 3
Fixing Motor
4 3 2 1
2
1 2 3 Tray Full Sensor 2 1
J6204D 3 2 1 3 2 1
J6236 3 1 3 1
1
M 1 1 2 3 4 4
1 9 PS20 MT41
PCRG_IO_M
PCRG_IO_C
PCRG_IO_K
PCRG_IO_Y
J6415 J5013L 1 1 J5013D J6066L J6141
FM8 J6124L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J6123D J6097 J6060D J2171
CNNT
CNNT
+12V
+12V
J5007F
SW9 J6142
GND
GND
GND
GND
J6217D 1 3 4 1
M27 1 3 1 3 Right Door Sensor 1 6
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
Secondary J6061D 1 2 3 9 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 J6060DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1
Fixing Shutter Transfer FM5 J6061DH

J6217DH
1 3
1 1 2 3 3 Cassette 4 4 3 2 1 1 4 4 3 2 1 1 1 1
8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 4 4 3 2 1 1
3 J5007M 3 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
Fixing Cooling 1 1 2 3
2 Size Switch B J6204LH 1 1 2 3 3 1 1 2 3 4 4 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 4 1 J608 J602
UN20
1 2 3
Motor Exhaust Fan 1 4 4 3 2 1
1
1
Fan (Front) 1 2 J6088 J6216D 1 2 3 4
J6204L J6123LH M
FM4
1 2 BL W K
M
M25
2
4 3 2 1
J6069DH J6123L 4 1 Process Unit Relay PCB
2
J6069L 1 3 J6216DH 4 4 3 2 1
1 J5012L M M
1 PS54 J607
2 1
2 1 J600
M24
3
1 2 3
Process Cartridge Third
3
3 J6069D J6217L MT1
1 2 3
PS29 J6060L
M18 M23
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4
1 2 3 4
J6061L 7 1
FM6 1 3 1 4 Cassette 2 Paper Fan (Rear) FM1 Delivery Motor 15 1
4
1 2 3 4
2 1
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
Laser Shutter Sensor Reverce Motor J6140 4
3
GND
+12V
PEXP_LEDON_BK
PEXP_LEDON_C
PEXP_LEDON_M
PEXP_LEDON_Y
FT37 Multi-Purpose
GND
Level Sensor B First & Second 4
Fixing J6214D J6244 M Fixing Heat PIN1
M26
1 2 3
4 3 2 1
2
4 1 1 1 2 3 4 4 Pickup Motor Delivery Motor GND

Cooling J6214DH 1 5 J451 J6205D Exhaust Fan 1 Waste Toner
1
J2176
PS41 J6216L J6234 FM10 J6067D
1 2 3 4 5
M28
MT18
Fan (Rear) 1 3 1 2 MT2 1 3 1 2 Feed Motor
FM7 1 6
1 2 3 1 2
1 5 J6067DH
First Delivery 1
2
2
1
SW6 FT38
1 2 3 4
J5012D
1 2 3 4 5
1 2
Process Cartridge Laser Shutter Motor
1 2 3 4 5 6
UN75
1
2
M
Delivery Fan 1 Sensor 2 1 Cassette 1 Size Fan (Front) 6 1 1 3 3 1
M 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3
MT32
J6214L Switch H4 Waste Toner
3 2 1
5 J5093D J6121 UN29 5 1
SOLD35
SOLD34
BL W K 5 4 3 2 1
3 1 J5093LH

IR-ADV C5500 Series Service Manual en 4.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IR-ADV C5500 Series Service Manual en 4.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IR-ADV C5500 Series Service Manual en 4.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Revision 4.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check visually. Insert the claw.

Check a sound. Push the part.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.

Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.

Install the screw. Tighten the screw.

Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

Environment Heater Control...............................................................................................................155

3. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 161

4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............................................................... 172

Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage Unit...........................................................................266

Cleaning the Pre-registration Guide Unit............................................................................................. 379

Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 449

8. Service Mode................................................................................................ 759

Switching the Screen Display (Level 1 <->2)....................................................................................... 767

Installing the Envelope Attachment................................................................................................... 1237

Points to Note when Installing.......................................................................................................... 1291

Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 1333

Control Panel Unit General Circuit Diagram.......................................................................................1401

Handling of Laser System

Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Turn power switch ON

Handling Adhered Toner

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

Notes Before it Works Serving

Points to Note at Cleaning

Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung

C5560 C5550 C5540 C5535

No. Product name Condition

No. Product name Condition

■ Image Reading System Options

No. Product name Condition

■ Function expansion system options

No. Product name Condition

No. Product name Condition

Product name Condition

Improved business productivity

High image quality

Display Setting screen Remarks

Introduction of Situation Mode

< Category >

[SITUATION MODE] Detail

Limiting of Color Printing

Startup from sleep mode:

imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5550:

imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5540:

imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535:

During sleep mode:

Weight and Size

* Except pickup from the Multi-Purpose Tray

Size Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)

Size Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)

■ Pickup Specifications (1/11)

Paper size Pickup position

Paper size Pickup position